Skip to main content

Full text of "Zoologica : scientific contributions of the New York Zoological Society"

See other formats


ZOOLOGICA 


SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 
OF  THE 

NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


1938 

Numbers  1-21 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  SOCIETY 
THE  ZOOLOGICAL  PARK,  NEW  YORK 


J^eto  Hork  Zoological  Society 

General  Office:  90  Broad  Street,  New  York  City 


Officers; 

President,  W.  Redmond  Cross 
Vice-Presidents,  Kermit  Roosevelt  and  Alfred  Ely 
Chairman,  Executive  Committee,  W.  Redmond  Cross 
Treasurer,  Cornelius  R.  Agnew 
Secretary,  Fairfield  Osborn 

Scientific  Staff 

Zoological  iparfe 
W.  Reid  Blair,  Director 

Raymond  L.  Ditmars,  Curator  of  Mammals  and  Reptiles 
Lee  S.  Crandall,  Curator  of  Birds 
Charles  R.  Schroeder,  Veterinarian 
O.aude  W.  Leister,  Ass’t  to  the  Director  and  Curator,  Educational  Activities 
H.  C.  Raven,  Prosector 
Edward  R.  Osterndorff,  Photographer 
William  Bridges,  Editor  and  Curator  of  Publications 

Aquarium 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  Acting  Director 
Christopher  W.  Coates,  Aquarist 
Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  Pathologist 
G.  M.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Pathology 
Homer  W.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Physiology 

department  of  C Topical  3&esearct) 

William  Beebe,  Director  and  Honorary  Curator  of  Birds 
John  Tee-Van,  General  Associate 
Gloria  Hollister,  Research  Associate 
Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate 

Cbitorial  Committee 

Fairfield  Osborn,  Chairman 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr. 
William  Bridges 


W.  Reid  Blair 
WJlliam  Beebe 


CONTENTS 


Part  1.  March  31,  1938.  page 

1.  The  Significance  of  Differential  Locomotor  Activity  as  an 

Index  to  the  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes.  By  C.  M.  Breder, 
Jr.,  & R.  F.  Nigrelli.  (Text-figures  1-8)  1 

2.  A Study  of  the  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  North  American 

Rabbits.  By  John  G.  Arnold,  Jr.  (Text-figures  1-23)  31 

3.  The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.  XIII.  Penaeidae  from 

the  Region  of  Lower  California  and  Clarion  Island,  with 
Descriptions  of  Four  New  Species.  By  Martin  D.  Burk- 
enroad.  (Text- figures  1-34)  55 

4.  Fibro-epithelial  Growths  of  the  Skin  in  Large  Marine  Turtles, 

Chelonia  mydas  (Linnaeus).  By  G.  M.  Smith  & C.  W. 
Coates.  (Plates  I-XVIII)  93 


Part  2.  July  14,  1938. 

5.  Plankton  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions.  VIII. 

Medusae  Taken  During  the  Years  1929  and  1930.  By 
Henry  B.  Bigelow.  (Text-figures  1-23)  99 

6.  Classification  of  Carp-like  Fishes.  By  J.  T.  Nichols 191 

7.  Tissue  Responses  of  Cyprinodon  variegatus  to  the  Myxo- 

sporidian  Parasite,  Myxobolus  lintont  Gurley.  By  Ross  F. 
Nigrelli  & G.  M.  Smith.  (Plates  I-VII) 195 

8.  Electrical  Characteristics  of  the  Electric  Tissue  of  the  Elec- 

tric Eel,  Electrophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  By  R.  T. 
Cox  & C.  W.  Coates.  (Plate  I;  Text- figures  1 & 2)  203 


DEC  3 0 IBM 


V 


PAGE 

9.  Colonial  Rattlesnake  Lore,  1714.  By  James  R.  Masterson  213 

Notes  : 217 

Part  3.  September  28,  1938. 

10.  Morphology  of  the  Hypophysis  of  the  Common  Goldfish 

(Carassius  auratus  L).  By  W.  Randal  Bell.  (Plates 
1 & 2;  Text-figures  1 & 2)  219 

11.  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation.  By  Joel  Hartley. 

(Plates  I-V) 235 

12.  Papilloma  of  the  Skin  Occurring  in  an  Electric  Eel,  Elec- 

trophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  By  C.  W.  Coates, 

R.  T.  Cox  & G.  M.  Smith.  (Plates  I-VI)  247 

13.  Arithmetical  Definition  of  the  Species,  Subspecies  and 

Race  Concept,  with  a Proposal  for  a Modified  Nomen- 
clature. By  Isaac  Ginsburg.  (Text-figures  1-4) 253 

14.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XIV.  Introduction,  Itinerary,  List  of  Stations, 

Nets  and  Dredges  of  the  Eastern  Pacific  Zaca  Expedi- 
tion, 1937-1938.  By  William  Beebe.  (Text-figures 
1 & 2) 287 

15.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XV.  Seven  New  Marine  Fishes  from  Lower 
California.  By  William  Beebe  & John  Tee-Van. 
Plates  I-III;  Text-figures  1-5) 299 

16.  Deep-sea  Fishes  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expedi- 

tions. Family  Anguillidae.  By  A.  Vedel  Taning. 
(Text-figure  1)  313 


VI 


PAGE 


Part  4.  December  31,  1938. 

17.  The  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes.  By  William  K. 

Gregory  & G.  Miles  Conrad.  (Text-figures  1-37 ) 319 

18.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XVI.  Holothurians  from  the  Western  Coasts 
of  Lower  California  and  Central  America,  and  from 
the  Galapagos  Islands.  By  Elisabeth  Deichmann. 
(Text-figures  1-15)  361 

19.  A Note  on  Eggs  and  Young  of  Leioheterodon  madagas- 

cariensis  (Dumeril  & Bibron).  By  Roger  Conant. 
(Plate  I) 389 

20.  An  Unusual  Aberrantly  Colored  Pleuronectid.  By  C.  M. 

Breder,  Jr.  (Plate  I)  393 

21.  A Diagnostic  Test  for  the  Recognition  of  Tuberculosis  in 

Primates.  By  Charles  R.  Schroeder.  (Plates  I & II)  397 

Index  to  Volume  XXIII  401 


vii 


ZOOLOGICA 


SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 

OF  THE 

NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


VOLUME  XXIII 
Part  1 

Numbers  1-4 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE 
THE  ZOOLOGICAL  PARK, 


March  31,  1938 


SOCIETY 
NEW  YORK 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

1.  The  Significance  of  Differential  Locomotor  Activity  as  an 

Index  to  the  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes.  By  C.  M.  Breder, 
Jr.,  & R.  F.  Nigrelli.  (Text-figures  1-8) 1 

2.  A Study  of  the  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  North  American 

Rabbits.  By  John  G.  Arnold,  Jr.  (Text-figures  1-23)  31 

3.  The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.  XIII.  Penaeidae  from 

the  Region  of  Lower  California  and  Clarion  Island,  with 
Descriptions  of  Four  New  Species.  By  Martin  D.  Burk- 
enroad.  (Text-figures  1-34) 55 

4.  Fibro-epithelial  Growths  of  the  Skin  in  Large  Marine  Turtles, 

Chelonia  mydas  (Linnaeus).  By  G.  M.  Smith  & C.  W. 
Coates.  (Plates  I-XVIII) 93 


ZOOLOGICA 


SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 
OF  THE 

NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


1. 

The  Significance  of  Differential  Locomotor  Activity  as  an  Index 
to  the  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes. 

C.  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  & R.  F.  Nigrelli 

New  York  Aquarium 
(Text-figures  1-8). 

Introduction. 

The  existence  of  a measurable  differential  in  the  locomotor  behavior  of 
fishes  under  various  conditions  of  companionship  has  been  established  by 
Schuett  (1934)  and  confirmed  by  Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1935b)  and  Escobar, 
Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936).  Each  report  mentions  the  use  of  similar  physical 
equipment  but  somewhat  different  handling  of  the  data.  All  three  are 
almost  purely  descriptive  with  little  attempt  to  interpret  the  possible  sig- 
nificance of  the  data  obtained  or  to  explain  the  mechanism  responsible  for 
the  observed  differences  in  behavior. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  the  present  communication,  therefore,  to  interpret 
the  findings  of  the  various  investigators  and  to  correlate  these  results,  so 
far  as  possible,  with  other  known  data  on  the  social  attitudes  of  fishes.  To 
this  end  a considerable  amount  of  experimental  work  is  reported,  some  of 
which  was  briefly  referred  to  by  Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1935b).  It  was  early 
found  that  before  the  observable  results  could  be  satisfactorily  interpreted 
it  was  necessary  to  consider  in  some  detail  the  various  items  of  both  the 
internal  and  external  environment.  Supplementary  experiments,  that  may 
seemingly  have  little  bearing  on  the  problem  of  social  attitude  or  mass 
physiology,  were  found  necessary. 

Briefly  stated,  the  method  of  investigation,  which  was  devised  by 
Dr.  Paul  Escobar  and  associates,  consists  of  observing  the  successive  posi- 
tions of  a fish  in  each  of  the  three  dimensions  through  a system  of  coordi- 
nates ruled  on  the  glass  walls  of  an  aquarium.  From  such  observations  the 
distance  traveled,  the  configuration  of  paths  and  their  relation  to  the  three 
spatial  axes  may  be  calculated.  That  these  differ  for  any  one  specimen  with 
companions  and  when  alone  has  already  been  established  in  the  three  re- 
ports mentioned.  Before  going  into  a full  discussion  of  these  data  and  pre- 
senting more  details  of  related  matters,  a brief  consideration  of  the  factors 
involved  may  best  be  presented. 


AF 


[i] 


2 Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :1 

Factors  Involved. 

Of  the  numerous  factors  concerned,  many  are  self  evident,  some  are 
not,  and  a few  have  not  been  previously  discussed  in  this  connection.  It 
does  not  follow,  furthermore,  that  this  list  is  exhaustive,  but  is  intended 
to  indicate  only  those  factors  that  must  be  considered  for  any  adequate 
understanding  of  social  phenomena  in  fishes. 

External  Factors. 

All  the  factors  in  the  external  environment  may  be  considered  under 
this  head  and  so  include  all  influences  extrinsic  to  the  subject  itself. 

Space.  The  available  space  places  strictures  on  the  movements  of  the 
included  organisms.  For  example,  any  calculations  based  on  physical  for- 
mulae that  assume  an  infinite  medium  are  accordingly  modified  by  the  limits 
of  the  container. 

The  shape  of  the  space  as  well  as  the  volume  is  distinctly  important. 
This  has  been  discussed  in  considerable  detail  by  Escobar,  Minahan  and 
Shaw  (1936).  Thus,  its  relative  extent  in  reference  to  the  vertical  and 
horizontal  axes  is  an  important  differential.  This  latter  element  is  ap- 
parently due  extrinsically  entirely  to  the  unidirectional  nature  of  the  gravi- 
tational influence,  illumination,  etc. 

Radiant  energy.  The  impact  of  radiant  energy  is  of  extreme  importance 
since,  for  example,  the  presence  of  visible  radiation  is  essential  to  vision, 
the  eyes  being  important  receptors  in  the  aggregating  behavior  of  fishes. 
Other  wave  lengths  have  not  been  studied  in  detail  but  Beebe  (1935)  showed 
that  a beam  of  ultra-violet  would  cause  certain  fishes  to  aggregate  in  a 
closely  compacted  mass  within  its  radius. 

Temperature.  The  effects  of  thermal  differences  and  thresholds  are  ob- 
viously of  considerable  importance  to  the  differential  behavior  of  fishes. 
Schooling  in  some  cases  is  clearly  temperature  controlled;  Townsend  (1916) 
and  Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1934,  1935a).  In  these  cases  the  lowering  of 
temperature  induces  the  fishes  to  aggregate. 

Chemical  conditions.  Many  substances  dissolved  in  the  water  have  a 
clear  effect  on  the  “social”  attitude  of  fishes,  including  the  amount  of  C02 
and  02  present;  Allee  (1931),  Allee  and  Bowen  (1932),  Breder  (1934), 
Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1934,  1935a).  Eddy  (1925)  maintained  that  certain 
stimulants  caused  aggregation  and  certain  depressants  caused  dispersal. 

Objects.  What,  for  want  of  better  term,  may  be  considered  as  objects 
may  include  both  those  that  are  inert  and  those  that  are  active.  Rocks, 
plants,  etc.,  serve  in  part  to  act  as  physical  boundaries  to  the  subjects  but 
more  especially  as  boundaries  to  their  vision  which,  as  will  develop,  are  of 
considerable  importance  in  the  behavior  pattern.  Food  items  present  a 
vigorous  stimulation  to  hungry  subjects. 

The  companions  may  be  here  classified  as  homotypic  and  heterotypic, 
following  the  usage  of  Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936).  These  may  be 
attractive  or  repellant  according  to  the  particular  physiological  state  of 
the  subject  at  the  time. 


Internal  Factors. 

Under  this  head  may  be  considered  all  the  effects  of  the  internal  en- 
vironment. These  then  include  the  physical,  chemical,  and  psychological 
make-up  of  the  organism  and  cover  all  its  inherent  tendencies  and  char- 
acteristics. 

The  Receptors.  Since  all  knowledge  of  the  external  world  comes  by  way 
of  the  sensory  receptors,  considered  in  the  broadest  sense,  they  in  their 
entirety  may  be  taken  as  a starting  point.  It  so  happens  that  in  all  fishes 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


3 


which  have  been  used  in  experiments  involving  their  attitude  to  their 
fellows,  vision  alone  has  been  shown  to  be  significant;  Newman  (1876) 
Clupea  harengus  Linnaeus;  Parr  (1927)  Pneumatophorus  grex  (Mitchill)  ; 
Spooner  (1931)  Morone  labrax  Linnaeus;  Breder  (1929)  Jenkinsia  stolifera 
(Jordan  and  Gilbert)  ; Bowen  (1931,  1932)  Ameiurus  melas  (Rafinesque)  ; 
Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1934,  1935a)  Lepomis  auritus  (Linnaeus).  This  has 
been  in  part  demonstrated  by  the  breaking  up  of  schools  on  dark  nights  or  by 
covering  the  eyes  of  individuals  with  vaseline  and  lamp  black.  While  it  has 
not  been  previously  noted,  the  same  holds  for  Carassius  auratus  (Linnaeus), 
the  species  on  which  Schuett  (1934),  Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1935b)  and 
Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936)  chiefly  worked.  Consequently  there  is 
no  need  under  the  present  limits  of  data  to  speculate  on  the  possible  sig- 
nificance of  the  other  senses  so  far  as  response  of  fish  to  fish  is  concerned. 
However,  the  presence  of  chemically  detectable  food,  mechanical  jarring  of 
the  aquarium,  etc.,  rapidly  change  the  pattern  of  behavior  and  for  the  pur- 
pose of  the  present  experimental  studies  have  been  rigorously  guarded 
against. 

The  Effectors.  After  stimulae  are  passed  from  the  receptors  and  modi- 
fied by  the  neuro-endocrine  mechanism,  the  past  conditioning  of  the  fish, 
the  particular  drives  that  it  labors  under  at  the  moment,  etc.,  the  effectors 
may  produce  appropriate  movements  or  other  responses.  However,  it  cannot 
be  assumed  that  such  will  be  locomotor,  although  they  clearly  are  in  many 
cases.  They  may,  for  instance,  be  simply  the  rolling  of  an  eye  or  the  ex- 
tension of  the  dorsal  fin.  Furthermore,  undoubtedly  many  of  the  stimulae 
may  reach  no  evident  effector  at  all,  becoming  “lost”  in  the  internal  en- 
vironment with  perhaps  scarcely  a quickened  heartbeat.  What  such  stimulae 
may  have  to  do  with  conditioning  in  fishes  we  can  only  speculate  upon  at 
present. 

The  locomotor  effectors,  the  only  ones  which  produce  results  which  can 
be  handled  by  the  present  technique,  are  distinctly  axial.  That  is  to  say, 
because  of  the  streamlined  shape  of  a goldfish  and  its  built-in  locomotor 
mechanism,  it  is  much  more  likely  to  move  forward  than  in  any  other 
direction.  While  it  is  capable  of  backing  up,  its  rising  and  falling  movements 
are  actually,  under  normal  conditions,  forward  movements  deflected  up  or 
down  and  its  sidewise  movements  are  forward  ones  which  are  laterally  de- 
flected. Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936)  expressed  the  same  thought 
as  follows:  “.  . . the  locomotor  mechanism  of  fishes  (with  a few  exceptions, 
e.g.,  seahorse)  are  adapted  to  propel  the  fish  along  the  axis  of  the  body, 
the  latter  being  normally  oriented  in  most  species  of  fishes  in  a horizontal 
plane.” 

The  Drives.  The  various  internal  urges  that  impel  fishes  to  respond  to 
stimulae  according  to  certain  patterns  obviously  enter  into  the  locomotor 
behavior  and  to  a large  extent  control  it.  These  stimulae  may  arrive  directly 
from  either  the  external  or  internal  environment.  The  seeking  of  comfort, 
suitable  temperature,  light,  depth  of  water,  current,  contact  with  solids, 
which  are  ordinarily  understood  as  the  various  tropisms,  can  be  shown 
to  be  induced  directly  by  external  influences.  For  the  purpose  of  the  experi- 
ments many  of  these  may  be  eliminated  by  having  the  factors  uniform 
throughout  the  experimental  tank.  Others,  such  as  gravity  or  light,  which 
necessarily  must  have  some  axis,  must  be  allowed  for  in  the  calculations. 
While  thigmatropism  in  its  full  sense  is  not  a characteristic  of  the  goldfish, 
its  desire  to  move  close  to  solids  is  of  considerable  importance  as  will 
develop  in  some  of  the  experiments. 

Lest  it  might  be  thought  that  the  agitation  of  water  caused  by  the 
passage  of  another  fish  tends  to  keep  schools  intact,  it  need  only  be  pointed 
out  that,  if  fishes  are  at  all  aware  of  such  movements,  they  are  entirely 
inadequate  to  produce  results  obtained.  As  previously  mentioned,  the  ob- 
scuration of  vision  results  in  the  disintegration  of  schools. 

The  internal  drives  of  hunger  and  sex  are  not  easily  controlled.  By 


4 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII:! 


adequate  feeding  apparently  the  first  may  be  neutralized,  and  by  using  gold- 
fish out  of  the  breeding  season  the  second  may  not  be  important,  but  as 
Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936)  pointed  out,  “Even  in  immature  in- 
dividuals sex  cannot  be  ignored,  since  there  may  exist  dimorphisms  and  dif- 
ferential physiological  abilities.”  Studies  of  both  these  items  invite  investi- 
gation. The  above  investigators  further  write:  “In  the  case  of  animals 
with  highly  developed  visual  sense  organs  the  contour  and  coloration  of 
their  fellows  in  homotypic  or  heterotypic  groups  may  conceivably  alter 
their  movements  resulting  in  various  degrees  of  aggregation  or  dispersal.” 
The  known  attitude  of  fishes  to  attempt  mating  with  a variety  of  quite 
unfish-like  objects  does  not  support  this  view,  however;  Lissmann  (1932) 
Betta  splendens  Regan;  Breder  and  Coates  (1934,  1935)  Lebistes  reticulatus 
Peters;  Noble  (1934)  Eupomotis  gibbosus  (Linnaeus);  Breder  (1936) 
Lepomis  auritus  (Linnaeus).  On  the  other  hand,  the  abstract  of  studies  by 
Noble  and  Curtis  (1935)  on  Hemichromis  bimaculatus  is  suggestive  of  some 
such  differentiation. 

Heterotypic  schools  of  fishes  are  not  uncommon  and  those  of  young 
fish  are  frequently  of  an  ecological  nature  rather  than  a specific  one,  as 
discussed  by  Reighard  (1915).  Parr  (1931)  considered  the  temporary  sexual 
dimorphism  of  Gasterosteus  as  a factor  in  the  breaking  up  of  the  earlier 
non-sexual  schools.  Breder  and  Nigrelli  (1935a)  discussed  other  cases  of 
heterotypic  schools.  Perhaps  many  of  the  vague  controversial  matters  re- 
garding fish  schools  and  sex  recognition  could  be  cleared  up  by  some 
modification  of  the  technique  here  used  for  examining  the  factors  in  the 
simple  aggregation  of  essentially  non-schooling  species. 

The  territorial  attitude  of  fishes  is  well  marked  in  many  species,  and  is 
associated  with  tank  dominance  as  has  often  been  mentioned,  Breder  (1934, 
1936).  This  seems  to  be  strongest  in  nesting  and  thigmatropic  species  and 
weakest,  if  present  at  all,  in  schooling  species.  It  is  at  least  present  to  the 
extent  of  some  aggregations  being  partial  to  some  small  area.  Nothing  can 
be  said  about  homing  instincts  or  migratory  movements  at  this  time  but 
such  would  surely  only  be  an  influence  evident  outside  of  laboratory  tanks. 
The  behavior  of  animals  on  “home”  territory  and  in  unknown  country  is 
demonstrably  different  without  the  necessity  of  recourse  to  the  plotting  of 
paths  or  trajectories. 

Spiral  Movements.  There  is  a well  known  tendency  for  animals  when 
blindfolded  or  in  an  environment  with  inadequate  points  of  reference  to 
move  in  more  or  less  circular  or  spiral  paths.  This  seems  to  be  an  inherent 
element  of  all  forms  of  life  examined.  Schaeffer  (1931)  expresses  it  as  fol- 
lows: “All  motile  organisms  move  spirally  when -guiding  senses  are  not 
functioning,  so  far  as  known.  By  experiment  and  observation  this  has  been 
found  to  hold  true  from  bacteria  to  blindfolded  aviators.”  That  it  is  equally 
true  of  fishes  is  subsequently  shown.  The  bearing  that  this  feature  has  on 
mass  physiology  will  be  discussed  in  detail  at  that  place.  Schaeffer  (1928) 
discusses  the  general  problem  of  spiral  movement  and  gives  a good  bibli- 
ography. Gordan  (1936)  detected  such  movement  in  the  massed  flight  of 
insects. 

Random  Movements.  It  has  been  stated  by  Lotka  (1925)  that  the 
movements  of  organisms  in  a uniform  environment  should  be  of  a random 
character.  They  then  follow  the  Einstein  (1905)  equation  for  Brownian 
movement  which  is  usually  given  as  follows: 

A.=  iLi 

LSx  3t tN  5?oc' 

Expressed  in  non-mathematical  terms,  the  law  states  that  the  mean 
squares  of  the  displacement  in  any  direction,  in  equal  intervals  of  time,  is 
proportional  to  the  elapsed  time.  This  may  be  expressed  graphically  by 
plotting  time  against  the  mean  squares  of  the  displacements.  Then  random 
movement  is  expressed  by  a straight  line  with  its  origin  at  the  zero  point 
in  each  axis. 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


5 


This  has  been  shown  to  be  in  agreement  with  the  movements  of  protozoa 
by  Przibram  (1913).  Applied  in  a larger  sense  to  a non-uniform  natural 
environment  (in  which  the  irregularities  are  essentially  cancelling)  Ross 
(1923),  Pearson  and  Blakeson  (1906),  Brownlee  (1911),  Edgeworth  (1920), 
Cole  (1922),  Hardy  (1922)  and  others  have  shown  similar  phenomena  in 
the  migratory  or  other  movements  of  non-captive  organisms.  Thompson 
(1933)  has  attempted  to  apply  the  equation  of  Einstein  to  the  movements 
of  tagged  fishes.  Certainly  there  would  be  expected  to  be  a large  degree  of 
randomness  under  the  conditions  of  the  experiments  to  be  discussed.  Con- 
sequently by  the  application  of  the  formula  it  should  be  expected  to  hold, 
except  for  the  fact  that  the  formula  applies  theoretically  to  a space  of  infinite 
volume.  In  the  case  of  small  containers  and  large  objects,  their  early  “reflec- 
tion” back  from  the  sides  makes  its  application  unsuitable. 

The  arbitrary  limits  of  space  available  made  it  impossible  in  our  cir- 
cumstances to  use  a tank  sufficiently  large  or  a fish  sufficiently  small  to 
apply  the  Einstein  equation  directly.  However,  by  certain  sub-experiments 
a fairly  clear  indication  of  the  relationship  of  random  to  spiral  movement 
was  obtained  which  is  adequate  for  the  present  purpose,  at  least. 

Light,  temperature,  chemical  conditions,  objects,  and  gravitational  dif- 
ferential were  either  controlled  or,  as  in  the  case  of  the  last,  pi'operly 
allowed  for. 

The  food  and  sex  drives  were  minimized  by  adequate  feeding  and  per- 
forming the  experiments  out  of  the  reproductive  season.  These  were  clearly 
sufficiently  overcome  to  give  comparable  results.  Small  differential  details 
are  explained  in  connection  with  the  items  they  modify. 

Experimental  Studies. 

The  data  obtained  by  various  experimental  contrivances  already  re- 
ferred to  in  the  previous  sections  are  given  here  in  full  descriptive  detail. 
The  interpretation  based  upon  these  results  will  be  found  in  the  section 
following. 

Experiments  in  Differential  Locomotion.  For  the  purposes  of  this  series 
of  experiments  a rectangular  aquarium  20"  x 16"  x 14"  high  was  used. 
This  then  represented  a rectangular  enclosure  of  4,480  cubic  inches.  One 
side  and  an  end  were  ruled  faintly  with  a glass  marking  crayon  in  two  inch 
intervals.  The  side  was  thus  divided  into  70  squares  and  the  end  into  56 
squares.  By  viewing  simultaneously  from  the  end  and  side,  any  fish  in  the 
aquarium  could  be  located  in  any  one  of  the  560  two-inch  cubes.  Such  posi- 
tions were  then  noted  at  ten  second  intervals  for  uniform  periods.  The 
resulting  data,  a series  of  three  reference  numbers,  one  for  each  plane  of 
projection,  in  a consecutive  series  (from  “0”  to  “140”)  could  then  be 
calculated  in  various  manners,  both  as  to  an  estimation  of  the  distance 
traveled  and  as  to  the  actual  position  of  the  subjects  in  space.  The  data, 
then,  which  were  obtained  by  all  these  experiments,  are  represented  by  a total 
of  5,499  points  in  space,  each  represented  by  three  index  figures  or  16,497 
projections.  Exp.  35  and  36  are  omitted  because  of  the  partial  data  taken. 

By  a suitable  geometrical  treatment  of  the  data  a trajectory  of  the 
fish,  as  measured,  at  ten-second  intervals  may  be  calculated.  This,  reduced 
to  meters  per  hour,  is  given  in  Table  I.1  Obviously  these  figures  are  minimal 
values  as  the  fishes  do  not  necessarily  travel  in  a straight  line  between  the 
fairly  long  intervals.  The  methods  used  by  Schuett  (1934)  and  Escobar, 
Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936),  give  closer  approximations  to  the  actual  dis- 
tance traveled.  However,  our  readings  were  made  basically  for  another 
purpose  and  are  of  course  comparable  among  themselves,  giving  properly 
relative  values.  A study  of  the  data  will  reveal  that  there  is  a very  genuine 
separation  between  the  rate  of  travel  by  a fish  alone  and  one  with  com- 


1 All  Tables  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  this  paper. 


6 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


panions,  the  details  of  which  are  given  in  the  discussion.  The  first  22 
experiments  were  made  by  one  observer  by  using  a mirror  set  at  an  angle 
of  45°  to  the  ruled  end  so  that  both  side  and  end  could  be  observed  at  one 
time.  This  was  found  to  introduce  slight  complications,  either  by  irregu- 
larities in  illumination  or  perhaps  by  the  fish  seeing  his  image.  This  was 
subsequently  overcome  by  enclosing  the  aquarium  in  a light-tight  box,  pro- 
vided with  a side  and  an  end  “peep  hole”  and  with  artificial  illumination. 
This  required  the  simultaneous  observations  of  two  people  and  even  here 
certain  irregularities  in  behavior  could  be  traced  to  light  entering  laterally 
from  around  the  viewing  holes.  The  details  of  the  separate  experiments  are 
given  in  Table  I and  discussed  along  with  their  interpretations. 

Another  method  of  handling  the  data  is  to  consider  the  fish  positions  in 
each  plane  of  projection  separately  and  plot  these  as  frequency  curves.  Ob- 
viously, any  correlative  changes  in  the  shape  of  such  curves  to  be  found 
associated  with  the  different  conditions  indicate  a change  in  the  swimming 
pattern  of  an  active  organism.  These  data  are  given  in  Table  II.  In  certain 
cases  it  is  more  convenient  simply  to  consider  the  aquarium  as  divided  in 
half  of  each  of  its  three  axes  and  note  the  percentage  of  positions  to  either 
side  of  the  mid-lines.  These  data  are  given  in  Table  III.  Still  another  way 
to  treat  the  data  is  to  count  the  number  of  crossings  of  these  mid-lines  in 
each  plane.  This  is  not  the  same  as  the  previous  treatment  as  various 
degrees  of  activity  may  give  the  same  distribution  or  various  speeds  of 
travel  may  include  more  or  less  crossings  of  the  mid-lines.  Each  of  the 
three  treatments,  however,  is  nevertheless  closely  related  to  the  others,  and 
taken  together  they  increase  the  emphasis  on  the  differential  behavior.  Still 
another  treatment  is  to  note  simply  the  number  of  changes  in  direction  and 
finally  to  plot  out  the  changes  in  position  along  a time  axis.  These  items  are 
considered  at  this  point  to  indicate  the  flexibility  of  the  technique  rather 
than  for  the  purpose  in  hand,  the  details  of  which  are  considered  along  with 
the  inferences  based  upon  them. 

Experiments  in  Random  and  Spiral  Movements.  It  is  thoroughly  evi- 
dent that  the  aquarium  used  in  the  preceding  experiments  would  be  inade- 
quate to  make  even  a cursory  study  of  random  and  spiral  movements  in  any 
but  nearly  microscopic  organisms.  In  order  to  obtain  some  estimation  of 
these  features  a pan  six  feet  in  diameter  and  two  inches  deep  was  con- 
structed. The  bottom  was  covered  with  a uniform  layer  of  sand  and  the 
vertical  sides  were  enameled  white  to  make  them  as  little  evident  as  pos- 
sible under  the  circumstances.  The  pan  was  illuminated  from  six  feet  above 
by  four  electric  fixtures  spaced  so  as  to  provide  a uniform  vertical  light, 
and  was  surrounded  by  a curtain  of  heavy  white  sail  canvas  to  exclude 
extraneous  light  and  disturbances.  A motion  picture  camera  was  mounted 
directly  over  the  center  for  the  production  of  permanent  records.  This  was 
found,  however,  not  of  any  particular  value  as  the  experiments  developed. 
The  speed  with  which  the  fish  found  the  edge  of  even  this  pan  was  so  rapid 
as  to  give  records  of  little  value.  It  may  be  noted  here  that  the  restriction 
of  the  subjects  to  an  essentially  two-dimensional  field  in  no  way  invalidates 
the  calculations.  Even  a single  dimension  may  be  used  for  such  purposes. 

Sketch  paths  of  five  fish  are  shown  in  Text-figure  1.  The  longest  repre- 
sents not  quite  15  seconds,  as  they  were  only  continued  until  the  subject 
responded  to  the  side.  This  was  always  immediately  evident  because  in 
every  case  the  subject  then  began  to  circle  close  to  it.  Table  VI  gives  the 
details  of  the  data.  There  is  very  considerable  evidence  of  typical  spiral 
movements  in  both  the  figure  and  the  tabular  data.  In  these  five  cases  the 
tendency  was  to  turn  to  the  left,  resulting  in  a counter-clockwise  traveling 
about  the  edge  of  the  pan.  These  fish  were  gently  placed  at  the  points 
shown  and  had  never  been  in  the  pan  before.  It  was  quickly  found  by  a 
second  trial  that  the  conditioning  had  been  such  that  the  subjects  learned 
that  there  was  a sheltering  edge  not  far  away  if  they  traveled  in  any 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


7 


Paths  of  five  fishes  of  different  species  in  a shallow  pan,  protected  from  outside 
influences.  1.  Carassius  No.  1.  2.  Carassius  No.  2.  3.  Lebistes  reticulatus, 
female  (fish  lost  sight  of  at  the  point  shown,  but  a moment  later  was  found 
traveling  counter-clockwise  around  edge) . 4.  Brachydanio  rerio.  5.  Villarius 
catus,  2 cm.  long  (heavy  dotted  portion  of  path  picked  from  a motion  picture 
record,  each  dot  representing  every  eighth  frame  or  at  intervals  of  % of  a 
second).  All  other  paths  are  free-hand  tracings. 


straight  line.  This  in  itself  is  rather  remarkable,  since  actual  sight  of  the 
edge  through  two  or  more  feet  of  water  is  not  involved,  as  is  evident  from 
the  fact  that  on  second  trials  they  seldom  went  to  the  nearest  edge  but 
seemingly  struck  out  in  a random  direction  when  released  but  maintained 
practically  a straight  path.  How  this  could  be  we  do  not  yet  understand. 
The  short  distances  at  which  Breder  and  Coates  (1935)  found  that  Lebistes 
could  distinguish  even  evident  objects  also  bears  on  this. 

After  proceeding  to  this  point  it  became  evident  that  such  an  apparatus 
was  inadequate  for  these  studies  and  that  suitable  equipment  was  not  avail- 
able, on  the  basis  of  space  alone,  in  the  laboratories.  Because  of  this,  slow 
moving  aquatic  gasteropods  were  substituted  for  fishes  as  subjects.  Their 
behavior,  readily  followed,  gave  some  interesting  data  on  animal  behavior, 
which  would  seem  to  be  in  accord  with  what  the  preceding  fragmentary 


8 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


experiments  would  lead  us  to  believe.  Fortunately  for  the  work,  the  snails 
all  seemed  dissatisfied  with  a position  on  a flat  horizontal  surface  and 
showed  a strong  disposition  to  come  to  rest  on  the  vertical  sides  of  the  pan. 
The  only  difference  in  physical  equipment  was  the  placing  of  a large  piece 
of  French  plate  glass  over  the  sand  so  as  to  give  the  creeping  snails  an 
absolutely  plane  surface  to  move  over.  Under  this  was  inserted  a pale 
gray  piece  of  cardboard,  pencil  ruled  in  small,  scarcely  discernible,  squares. 

The  trial  paths  of  certain  snails  are  given  in  Text-figures  2 and  3. 
Here,  too,  there  are  undoubted  spiral  movements,  but  the  bias  is  slightly  to 
the  right.  The  behavior  of  these  snails  yielded  further  data  bearing  on  the 
subject  of  random  movement  which  is  not  entirely  clear  at  this  writing. 
It  was  found,  for  example,  that  the  first  trial  of  Physa  No.  1 was  much  more 
nearly  random  than  the  second.  The  actual  paths  of  these  two  trials  are 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


9 


given  to  Text-figure  2A.  The  data  of  these,  plotted  according  to  the  Ein- 
stein equation  (i.e.,  square  of  the  distance  from  the  origin  against  time), 
are  also  shown  here  and  indicate  that  the  second  more  closely  approximates 
that  of  a straight  line  while  the  first  more  closely  resembles  that  of  a 
spiral  path  (Text-figure  2B).  See  Text-figure  4 for  illustrations  of 
typical  lines  of  translation  and  their  representation  by  this  type  of  plotting. 
If  the  means  of  5 consecutive  points  be  plotted,  curves  are  obtained  which 
are  given  in  Text-figure  2C.  Of  the  second  little  can  be  said  because  of  the 
slight  amount  of  data,  although  it  is  obvious  that  this  line  must  become  more 
and  more  nearly  a straight  one  as  the  quantities  taken  to  obtain  mean  values 
are  increased.  The  first  path  in  this  graph  also  more  nearly  approaches  a 
straight  line,  for  similar  reasons.  The  angle  of  these  lines  to  the  horizontal 
gives  a measure  of  the  speed  of  recession  from  the  origin  and  insofar  gives 
a measure  of  the  behavior  of  the  organism.  At  this  point  a difficulty  inherent 
in  the  method  becomes  apparent,  since  by  an  appropriate  selection  of  mean 
values  a given  path  such  as  the  first  can  be  either  represented  as  indicating 
a spiral  movement  or  a random  movement.  This  is  not  so  serious  as  it  might 


10 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


be  first  thought,  since  what  it  actually  indicates  is  that  elements  of  both 
are  present  and  either  one  may  be  emphasized  and  studied  according  to 
the  scale  of  operations  under  consideration.  This  seeming  paradox  becomes 
clear  when  it  is  considered  that  an  animal  or  other  object  may  be  cutting 
close  spirals,  turning  cart-wheels  or  showing  other  vagaries  of  locomotion 
and  still  be  moving  in  a random  fashion,  if  considered  in  a larger  sense. 
On  the  other  hand  an  animal  may  be  moving  in  very  large  spirals  on  which 
are  overlaid  a measure  of  randomness  considered  in  a finer  sense.  This  only 
becomes  confusing  when  the  size  of  the  spirals  and  the  random  paths  are  of 
similar  magnitudes.  However,  it  is  just  in  such  cases  that  the  value  of  this 
approach  is  greatest. 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


11 


•O'*-!  93  93 

2 °'I5  % 

IS  u 

“ CQ  Qh 

3 S bOC 
-K  £ c c 
w S.3  o 

g 

3 ft'O 
”3  “ 3 0* 
> 

•3  £t- 

•5  £*3  « 

— « J? 

aS  O 

LO 

•H  O0  «W 
0-0-0 
o 00  ^ 
ea .g 

O)  H cj 

s ftw!5 

e,«tn'0 
e o 2 41 

§ 5 2 

s§a- 

® -g  § 8 

•§§~Q 
W5  ^--5-3 


.-an: 


<u  -O 
3 3 
bfi  3 

V eo 


OX 


..  C 


c3^*r 
_ o _ £ 

O ^ CO  <D 

J^d  5 
e . « 

l^or 

-si  aj 

•h  bfl  ai  v 

0«C  Sr1 

03  ■+■> 

j-  X be  o r i 

+3  9><C  ■*jU 

S‘SH^  rt 

P 03  „ 

a ^.Std  . 

03^  M.s^ 

§S 13  “ 2 

tr3  o *o  ^ 
-o  o 4_»  jjjo 
<c 

.2'a^  x 

93 

S,eS^ 

2-" 


> w 


0) 

P4 


The  underlying  biological  causes  of  these  differences  between  the  snail 
paths  No.  1 and  No.  2 are  not  so  evident  but  would  seem  to  have  their  roots 
in  some  conditioning,  orientation,  or  more  broadly  some  learning  process.  By 
plotting  the  data  still  another  way  (i.e.,  trial  number  against  distance  from 
the  origin  at  the  end  of  fixed  periods),  what  may  tentatively  be  called  a 
learning  curve  is  obtained.  This  is  given  in  Text-figure  2D.  Further  data 
of  other  individuals  of  Physa  are  given  in  Text-figure  5.  The  learning  curves 


12 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


of  three  specimens  show  considerable  differences,  including  one  individual 
which  apparently  failed  to  learn,  performing  more  poorly  on  each  successive 
trials  (Text-figure  5B).  However,  it  is  clearly  evident  that  the  mean  of 
these  three  snails  nevertheless  shows  some  shift  to  an  increasing  speed  of 
recession  from  the  origin  on  succesive  trials.  These  observed  differences 
may  be  due  to  individual  background  or  other  factors  in  the  life  of  the 
animals.  Text-figure  5C  shows  the  positions  of  Physa  No.  3 at  the  end  of 
four  different  periods  in  each  of  its  three  trials,  again  indicating  its  lack 
of  learning.  The  essential  random  and  spiral  nature  of  the  paths  are 
also  indicated  in  Text-figure  5D  in  which  the  mean  trial  of  the  Physa  No.  3 
shows  a marked  resemblance  to  the  first  path  of  No.  1 given  in  Text-figure 
2B.  The  means  of  all  trials  of  these  three  Physa  are  likewise  given,  which 
emphasizes  the  characteristics  common  to  all  of  them  (Text-figure  5A). 

Data  on  another  species,  Planorbis,  are  given  in  Text-figure  3 and  show 
similar  characteristics.  The  actual  paths  are  given  and  the  resulting  plot- 
tings. The  mean  of  four  trials  shows  again  the  spiral  and  random  ten- 
dencies inherent  in  these  paths.  The  learning  curve  is  well  marked  and, 
as  in  the  other  species,  is  shown  both  with  the  data  as  picked  from  the 
curve  and  the  square  roots  of  those  values. 

Similar  studies  of  two  specimens  of  V.  vivipara,  the  data  of  which  are 
not  given  in  full,  appear  in  the  mean  values  for  all  in  Text-figure  5A.  This 
species  was  added  to  the  previous  two,  since  it  is  not  a pulmonate.  The 
essential  similarity  of  its  behavior  is  evident.  The  difference  in  shapes  of 
the  curves  of  the  three  species  is  referable  directly  to  their  activity  and 
speed.  It  is  to  be  noted  how  basically  similar  are  all  patterns. 


Significance  of  Observed  Behavior. 

The  data  obtained  by  means  of  the  experiments  previously  described 
and  presented  in  Tables  I and  V in  most  cases  may  be  better  understood  if 
presented  in  graphic  form.  The  index  of  the  rate  of  travel  under  various 
conditions  as  expressed  by  the  data  of  Experiments  1 to  22  of  Table  I is 
analyzed  in  Table  IV.  It  may  be  seen  at  once  from  this  table  that  the  two 
fishes  tested  move  much  faster  when  alone  than  when  with  companions.  This 
holds  not  only  for  the  mean  values  obtained  but  also  for  both  the  maximum 
and  minimum  values.  It  is  also  to  be  noted  that  there  is  but  one  case  of 
overlapping  of  extreme  figures  and  that  there  is  virtually  complete  separa- 
tion between  the  two  sets  of  values.  Actually  this  is  strictly  true  for  all 
of  the  mean  values,  the  only  ones  of  full  statistical  significance.  Maximum 
and  minimum  values  show  a separation  of  over  50%  and  the  minimum  con- 
siderably more.  The  close  agreement  between  the  two  test  fishes  is  to  be 
especially  noted.  These  data  support  the  experiments  of  Schuett  (1934)  and 
Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936).  The  data  of  these  investigators  are 
given  in  Table  III.  This  has  been  equated  as  well  as  is  possible  from  their 
data  to  the  present  experiments.  Since,  however,  their  procedure  differed 
somewhat  from  the  present  it  cannot  be  thoroughly  comparable,  although 
it  is  fully  adequate  to  establish  the  validity  of  the  increase  in  speed  of 
travel  in  Carassius  with  solitude.  These  data  are  presented  in  graphic  form 
in  Text-figure  6.  Some  of  the  irregularities  are  doubtless  due  to  differences 
in  technique  and  methods  of  calculation.  This  is  largely  obviated  in  the  top- 
most line  which  represents  the  travel  of  a fish  with  companions  as  a per- 
centage of  the  fish  alone.  The  apparent  differences  smooth  out  to  a con- 
siderable extent  under  such  treatment,  well  indicating  the  basic  agreement 
between  the  three  sets  of  studies.  Lest  it  may  be  thought  that  the  dif- 
ferent 02  and  C02  concentrations  associated  with  various  numbers  of  fish 
are  responsible  for  these  differences  it  is  but  necessary  to  point  out  that 
Schuett  (1934)  successfully  ruled  out  this  factor  for  a much  smaller 
aquarium  than  the  one  here  used. 


1938] 


Brecler  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


13 


Text-figure  6. 

Comparison  of  the  data  of  Schuett  (1934),  Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936), 
with  the  present.  The  topmost  line  was  computed  by  reducing  the  amount 
of  travel  of  the  fish  alone  to  unity.  Then  the  indicated  figures  represent  the 
extent  of  travel  reduction  with  three  companions. 


The  new  experiments,  each  representing  a special  feature  that  in  some 
cases  shows  more  clearly  just  what  transpired  by  other  treatment  of  the 
data,  may  be  now  considered  in  reference  to  rate  of  travel.  Another  fish, 
“C”,  in  the  shadow  box  (Exp.  23)  previously  described  and  illuminated  by 
a hundred  watt  light,  showed  a speed  of  162.15  M/h  when  alone.  The  addi- 
tion of  other  fish  (Exp.  24)  one-half  hour  later  resulted  in  even  a higher 
rate  of  travel  (166.98  M/h).  These  fish  changed  abruptly  from  daylight 
were  clearly  worried  and  it  would  seem  that  their  rapid  movements  were 
responsible  for  the  failure  of  the  accommodated  test  fish  to  reduce  its  speed. 
Further  data  on  this  appear  in  the  consideration  of  the  effect  of  light. 
Later,  on  the  removal  of  the  box  (Exp.  25  and  26),  the  travel  reduced  to 
values  comparable  to  those  of  “A”  and  “B”  with  companions;  61.70  and 
33.39,  mean  47.54. 

A rotating  motor-driven  disc  placed  under  the  electric  bulb,  causing 
the  rapid  passing  of  shadows,  clearly  caused  fright  and  the  speed  increased 
(Exp.  27).  Some  hours  later  this  was  even  higher  (Exp.  28)  and  three  days 
later  (Exp.  29)  the  speed  was  still  high  although  it  is  hard  to  imagine  that 
this  effect  lasted  that  long.  This  feature  needs  further  study. 

Another  fish,  “D”,  was  then  studied  in  relation  to  the  amount  of  light 


14 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


used.  The  data  are  given  in  Experiments  30  to  35.  If  the  values  of  fish  alone 
are  plotted,  there  seems  to  be  an  increase  of  speed  with  an  increase  of 
illumination  but  the  data  are  inadequate  for  a thorough  understanding  of 
this  phenomenon.  The  other  items  cannot  be  elucidated  in  terms  of  speed 
of  travel  at  this  time  but  are  discussed  in  subsequent  connections. 

The  distribution  of  the  experimental  fishes  in  space  is  given  in  Table  V, 
expressed  in  terms  of  percentage.  If  again  the  first  22  experiments  are 
combined  their  mean  distribution  alone  and  with  companions  may  then  be 
plotted  and  compared.  These  calculations  are  given  in  Table  V and  the 
resulting  graphs  are  shown  in  Text-figure  7.  It  will  be  noted  at  once  that 
the  curves  obtained  from  fishes  alone  are  convex  downwards  and  those  from 
fishes  with  companions  are  convex  upwards.  An  examination  of  the  data 
of  Table  II  will  show  that  this  is  a consistent  feature  of  each  experiment. 
The  separation  is  not  so  clear  in  some  individual  cases  as  in  the  integrated 
means  of  Text-figure  7,  but  in  each  of  these  there  is  a reasonably  clear  and 
evident  reason  because  of  the  conditions  of  the  experiments  and  to  that 
extent  forms  a measure  of  the  particular  influences  at  work  as  noted  in  Table 
I.  The  minor  distortions  of  the  curves  of  Text-figure  7 are  each  indicative 
of  tendencies  in  the  subject  and  form  an  excellent  quantitative  measure  of 
them.  A consideration  of  the  curves  in  detail  yields  the  following  data, 
each  treated  according  to  its  separate  coordinates. 

The  vertical  curve  of  the  fish  alone  shows  that  the  fish  tended  in  a 
regular  manner  to  keep  close  to  the  bottom  of  the  aquarium.  Actually  it 
occupied  the  bottom  2"  of  water  28%  of  the  time  and  the  surface  2"  only 
8%,  with  a quite  regular  grading  of  the  intermediate  strata.  Considering 
the  14  individual  experiments  upon  which  this  curve  of  the  fish  alone  is 
based,  there  are  the  following  extreme  divergencies:  Percentage  of  time 


Text-figure  7. 

Configurational  behavior  of  goldfish  alone  and  with  companions  in  respect  to 
three  dimensions.  Solid  line:  fish  alone.  Dotted  line:  fish  with  three  com- 
panions. The  short  vertical  pecked  lines  on  the  latter  indicate  the  limits, 
counting  from  the  central  position  that  covers  50%  of  the  readings.  A pro- 
jection of  these  on  the  solid  line  shows  that  over  50%  is  there  excluded  by 
them  instead  of  included. 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


15 


spent  in  the  bottom  layer  varied  from  a minimum  of  13%  to  a maximum 
of  60%  while  time  spent  in  the  surface  layer  varied  from  a minimum  of  0% 
to  a maximum  of  31%.  In  only  three  of  the  experiments  did  the  fish  spend 
more  time  in  the  surface  layer  than  in  the  bottom  one,  and  in  only  one  was 
a peak  value  reached  in  the  middle  layer.  This  may  simply  be  taken  as  a 
mathematical  expression  of  the  normal  attitude  of  a solitary  Carassius  as 
based  on  casual  but  extensive  observations,  to  the  effect  that  they  are  apt 
to  be  found  near  the  bottom,  and  if  not  there,  at  the  surface,  and  least 
commonly  in  mid-water. 

If  now  the  curve  of  the  fish  with  companions  be  considered,  it  is  clear 
that  a considerable  change  in  distribution  has  taken  place,  the  peculiar 
S-shape  of  the  curve  apparently  indicating  two  loci,  or  that  the  fish  is 
hesitant  between  two  sites  of  approximately  equal  preference.  The  bottom 
layer  accounts  for  19%  of  the  time  while  an  intermediate  layer  of  from 
6"  to  8"  from  the  surface  accounts  for  21%  of  the  time.  The  surface  layer 
is  visited  about  as  frequently  as  before  (6%),  but  the  distribution  between 
surface  and  bottom  is  utterly  different.  Over  50%  of  the  time  is  spent  in 
layers  2,  3 and  4 (57%)  ; the  small  values  of  the  layers  below  these,  except 
the  bottom  one,  indicate  rapid  dashes  through  them  to  cruise  along  in  the 
latter.  With  the  same  fish  alone  over  50%  of  the  time  was  spent  in 
layers  5,  6 and  7 (61%).  If  we  divide  the  tank  into  a top  and  bottom  half 
it  appears  that  alone  the  fish  spent  68%  below  and  32%  above  such  a mid- 
line. With  companions  this  was  inverted  to  read  54%  below  and  46%  above, 
indicating  a more  nearly  uniform  distribution. 

The  “longitudinal”  curve  running  at  right  angles  to  gravity  shows  a 
strong  tendency  for  the  solitary  fish  to  keep  to  either  end  of  the  tank,  most 
markedly  so  at  the  right  end.  This  was  the  end  at  which  the  mirror  stood 
and  the  curve  gives  a measure  of  the  attractiveness  of  this  device.  If  it  may 
be  assumed  that  either  end  was  equally  attractive  except  for  the  mirror, 
then  the  difference  of  the  readings  at  either  end  (56-12  = 44%)  may  be 
taken  as  a measure  of  this  attraction.  When  companions  are  added  and  a 
more  median  position  is  selected,  as  evidenced  by  the  shape  of  the  curve, 
the  strong  attraction  for  the  mirror  end  reduces  but  does  not  disappear. 
Thus,  between  the  two  sets  of  experiments  the  attractiveness  dropped  from 
a value  of  56%  as  compared  with  all  other  influences  in  this  plane  to  one  of 
17%  on  the  addition  of  three  companions.  The  non-mirrored  end  dropped 
from  12%  to  3%  and  since  the  latter  is  the  lowest  value  on  the  curve,  pre- 
sumably indicates  that  its  attractive  value  fell  to  zero.  The  median  positions 
3,  4,  5,  6 and  7 account  for  60%  of  the  time,  whereas  when  alone  the  terminal 
position  10  accounted  for  56%  of  the  time. 

The  “transverse”  curve  is  esentially  similar  to  the  longitudinal  one  and 
with  fish  alone  either  side  seemed  to  be  equally  attractive  (33%  and  36% 
respectively).  Since  there  was  no  differential  as  in  the  longitudinal  measure, 
this  is  what  one  should  naturally  expect.  The  addition  of  three  companions 
caused  the  sides  to  lose  their  relative  attractiveness  to  the  extent  that  the 
four  central  coordinates,  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6,  accounted  for  60%  of  the  time. 

Dividing  the  transverse  measures  in  half,  we  find  that  alone  the 
distribution  to  left  and  right  is  49%  and  51%  respectively  and  with  com- 
panions 55%  and  45%.  These  differences  are  likely  too  small  to  be  signifi- 
cant and  seem  to  indicate  merely  the  degree  of  accuracy  obtainable  by  this 
method  on  a half  and  half  distribution.  If,  however,  we  take  the  longitudinal 
measure  and  handle  it  in  the  same  way,  the  figures  for  the  fish  alone  stand 
left  23%  and  right  77%.  With  companions  this  becomes  41%  and  59%.  The 
bias  by  the  mirror  in  this  is  thus  overcome  by  the  introduction  of  three 
fish  to  the  extent  above  indicated.  The  biological  significance  of  the  basic 
distortion  of  the  spatial  distribution  curves  of  these  fish  with  and  without 
companions  is  quite  apparent.  The  interpretation  of  them  would  seem 
to  be  somewhat  as  follows:  Since  goldfish  are  gregarious,  the  behavior  re- 


16 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


fleeted  in  these  curves  is  evidently  a measure  of  this  social  disposition. 
The  species  may  be  said  to  be  an  aggregating  one  but  not  a schooling  one 
in  the  restricted  sense,  as  may  be  checked  by  reference  to  goldfish  in  a 
fairly  large  pond.  The  exact  behavior  in  a small  aquarium,  however,  be- 
cause of  its  limitations  of  space,  can  only  be  properly  appreciated  by  some 
such  treatment  as  the  present.  With  these  considerations  in  mind  it  would 
seem  that  both  the  increased  speed  of  travel  and  the  tendency  to  seek  the 
walls  of  the  aquarium  would  be  due  to  an  attempt  to  find  company.  This 
finding  of  company  with  the  resulting  slowing  down  of  movement  and  the 
formation  of  an  aggregation  remote  from  the  aquarium  walls  would  then 
indicate  a satisfaction  of  that  drive.  Since  the  aggregating  tendency  im- 
plies an  urge  to  seek  a position  close  to  but  not  in  contact  with  some  object 
(another  fish),  it  also  may  be  that  approach  to  some  inanimate  object  or 
surface  is  used  as  a substitute  to  partially  satisfy  that  urge  when  no  com- 
panions are  present.  In  fact,  it  may  even  be  that  the  movements  of  the 
other  fish  is  the  determining  factor  in  the  expression  of  the  preference 
of  approach  to  a fish  as  against  a surface.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  how- 
ever, that  the  glass  walls  of  the  tank  are  optically  not  very  evident.  If  other 
sensory  organs  enter  here  they  are  not  yet  evident,  for  as  previously  men- 
tioned the  fish  school  in  general  appears  to  be  a purely  visual  affair.  The 
fact  that  aggregations  form  remote  from  the  walls  is  not  surprising  on  a 
purely  mechanical  basis.  If  each  fish  is  considered  as  having  a “field”  of 
influence  about  it,  the  formation  of  the  aggregation  in  mid-water  would 
be  expected.  Fish  in  a central  position  would  exert  the  effect  of  their 
presence  at  every  point  on  the  surface  of  a sphere  at  whose  center  they  were 
located.  Fish  close  to  a side  could  exert  only  one-half  that,  i.e.  on  the 
surface  of  a hemisphere.  Fish  at  the  junction  of  two  sides  would  exert  a 
quarter  as  much  and  one  in  a corner  one-eighth  as  much  for  similar  reasons. 
It  is  not  necessary  to  labor  the  point  that  such  objects,  moving  either 
primarily  at  random  or  in  spirals  and  mutually  affecting  each  other,  would 
aggregate  at  approximately  the  tank  center  equi-distant  from  the  sides. 
Divergence  from  this  would  then  indicate  other  influences. 

If  a space  is  enclosed  that  includes  50%  of  the  positions,  counting  from 
the  center  both  ways,  Text-figure  7 indicates  that  it  also  includes  the  peaks 
of  each  of  the  curves  of  the  fish  with  companions.  Short  vertical  lines  show 
these  limits  in  that  figure.  These  lines  projected  to  include  the  curves  of 
fish  alone  for  the  longitudinal  and  transverse  readings  include  a very 
small  percentage,  i.e.,  10%  and  16%  respectively.  That  for  the  vertical  com- 
ponent is  somewhat  different  because  of  the  fact  that  it  is  at  right  angles 
to  the  main  axis  of  the  fish  and  parallel  to  the  gravitational  field.  Here  the 
curve  of  the  fish  alone  is  a gradual  increase  from  one  end  to  the  other  and 
the  corresponding  value  is  intermediate  between  the  one  on  either  side, 
i.e.,  15%,  39%,  and  46%. 

Schuett  (1934)  in  considering  the  speed  of  movement  alone  has  shown 
that  there  is  some  optimum  of  crowding  above  and  below  which  the  fish 
move  with  greater  rapidity.  This  would  seem  clearly  to  be  for  the  reasons 
above  outlined.  Since  these  fish  place  themselves  in  regard  to  one  another 
at  some  “standard”  distance,  the  findings  of  Schuett  would  naturally  follow 
and  the  whole  phenomenon  become  one  of  seeking  an  equilibrium.  Fast 
random  swimming  certainly  would  tend  more  quickly  to  restore  a “lost” 
goldfish  to  its  group  as  well  as  tend  more  quickly  to  disperse  an  aggrega- 
tion too  closely  packed  for  comfort. 

Having  considered  the  primary  significance  of  the  configurational  dis- 
tribution of  fishes,  the  details  of  the  further  experiments  may  be  discussed. 
Experiment  23  made  in  the  shadow  box  alone  shows  much  greater  equality 
of  distribution  at  either  end  of  the  horizontal  components;  longitudinal 
32%  and  22%,  transverse  32%  and  28%.  Here  the  confusing  outside  ele- 
ments were  eliminated,  giving  another  evidence  of  the  influence  of  the  end 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


17 


mirror  of  the  22  primary  experiments.  The  vertical  component  was  in  essen- 
tial agreement  with  the  previous,  the  surface  layer  .01%  and  the  bottom 
and  highest  figure  37%.  This  agreement  is  surprisingly  close  when  it  is 
considered  that  this  single  experiment  was  only  1/22  as  long  as  the  mean 
values  previously  discussed.  Experiment  24  showed  no  change  in  speed,  as 
previously  noted,  and  agreeing  with  this  it  also  showed  no  change  in  con- 
figuration. The  presumed  reason  has  already  been  mentioned,  but  it  may  be 
pointed  out  that  the  rate  of  speed  and  configuration  of  pattern  are  clearly 
not  locked  to  each  other  on  any  mechanical  basis.  Consequently  in  the  pres- 
ent case  we  have  two  separate  approaches,  both  of  which  indicate  that  in 
this  set  of  two  experiments  the  expected  response  to  companions  that  has 
already  been  established  here  and  by  others  did  not  take  place.  Experiments 
25  and  26,  without  the  shadow  box,  showed  irregularities  not  unlike  those 
of  the  earlier  experiments.  As  the  speed  of  the  fish  slowed  down,  as  pre- 
viously noted,  the  configuration  took  on  an  approach  to  that  of  fish  “A”  and 
“B”  with  Companions.  All  that  can  be  said  of  this  is  that  fish  “C”  either 
responded  more  slowly  to  companions  or  was  simply  not  as  reactive.  Per- 
haps this  could  eventually  be  shown  as  a matter  of  individual  difference  in 
the  “psychic”  attitude  of  various  goldfish. 

The  light  was  then  interrupted  (Exp.  27)  and  the  fishes  sought  either 
end  of  the  tank,  spending  28%  and  29%  of  the  time  in  the  two  end  divisions. 
The  next  day  (Exp.  28)  they  returned  to  a more  nearly  normal  distribution, 
the  ends  receiving  only  .08%  and  19%  of  the  positions. 

Fish  “D”  with  three  companions  (Exp.  30)  behaved  in  a normal  fashion. 
This  fish  was  then  tested  alone  with  various  degrees  of  illumination  (Exp. 
31  to  35).  The  results  of  this  can  be  best  understood  by  an  inspection  of 
Table  V.  Experiment  35,  with  a very  faint  light,  just  enough  to  enable  the 
making  of  the  necessary  observations,  showed  the  fish  to  have  spent  much 
time  in  mid-water.  The  three  central  coordinates  accounted  for  57%  of 
the  time.  Experiment  31,  with  a 10-watt  bulb,  showed  a considerable  resem- 
blance to  this  one  with  the  same  coordinates  accounting  for  66%  of  the 
time.  These  are  the  only  two  readings  obtained  with  vertical  characteristics 
of  this  nature  and  they  are  the  two  most  weakly  illuminated  ones.  This 
again  suggests  the  visual  nature  of  the  movements  and  aggregating  be- 
havior in  these  fish.  The  other  three  experiments  (32,  33  and  34)  with  40, 
100  and  200-watt  bulbs  all  showed  a strong  predilection  for  the  bottom, 
but  the  data  cannot  decide  if  there  is  a gradual  change  with  increased 
illumination  or  whether  it  is  simply  a matter  of  passing  some  threshold. 
Text-figure  8 gives  this  data  graphically.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  case  of 
“no  illumination”  the  fish  spent  more  time  in  the  top  layer  than  in  the 
bottom.  The  various  elements  of  this  figure,  including  that  of  speed,  would 
seem  to  indicate  that  the  lack  of  light  was  stimulating  to  locomotor  activity 
but  without  any  configurational  influence,  that  a low  illumination  (10  watts) 
was  quieting  but  again  with  no  influence  on  the  configuration,  but  that  a 
higher  illumination  (40  watts)  drove  the  fish  sharply  to  the  bottom  and 
increased  the  locomotor  activity.  Increase  of  illumination  above  this  point 
seemed  to  have  very  little  effect,  but  seemed,  if  the  figures  can  be  trusted  to 
such  details,  not  to  hold  the  fish  so  closely  to  the  tank  floor.  It  is  doubted  if 
such  slight  differences  are  significant,  however.  If  anything,  it  would  seem 
that  there  may  be  an  activity  and  behavior  threshold  somewhere  between 
the  illumination  of  the  10  and  40  watt  lamps. 

Experiments  36  and  37  represent  the  simultaneous  paths  of  “C”  and 
“D”.  For  practical  reasons  they  could  be  taken  in  two  ordinates  only.  The 
extent  of  agreement  is  close,  but  no  closer  than  the  agreement  between  suc- 
cessive observations  on  the  same  fish.  Consequently  it  is  inferred  that  these 
observed  differences  of  such  order  are  due  to  inherent  variant  characters 
in  the  fish  rather  than  unrecognized  extrinsic  elements. 

A fifth  fish,  “E”,  was  tested  in  Experiments  38  to  41.  The  four  fish, 


18 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


Text-figure  8. 

Behavior  of  goldfish  in  respect  to  vertical  distribution  under  different  amounts 
of  illumination.  See  text  for  explanation. 


A to  D,  which  were  examined  at  other  times,  were  the  companions  of  the 
test  fish.  The  speed  of  travel  under  varying  light  conditions  was  less  with 
companions  than  without,  but  the  separation  was  not  as  great  as  in  “A” 
and  “B”.  The  configuration,  however,  was  in  quite  good  agreement. 

Another  method  of  measurement  of  such  activity  is  to  plot  the  actual 
transit  of  the  mid-line  or  to  check  the  reversals  of  direction.  The  amount  of 
labor  involved  in  such  calculations,  however,  is  disproportionate  to  the  re- 
sults, which  so  far  as  can  be  seen  from  the  present  data  give  no  further 
information  than  that  already  obtained  from  the  more  readily  applied 
methods  herein  discussed. 

An  attempt  was  made  to  calculate  the  displacements  according  to  the 
formula  of  Einstein  (1905)  for  random  movement,  but  it  soon  became  ap- 
parent that  the  small  size  of  the  vessel  in  relation  to  the  size  and  movement 
of  the  fish  made  it  impossible  of  application.  The  thesis  was  taken  that  if 
such  a fish  moved  at  random,  then  any  diversion  from  such  randomness 
could  be  used  as  a measure  of  mental  integration  on  the  part  of  the  fish. 
It  is  now  clear,  however,  from  a study  of  the  movement  patterns,  that  in 
any  case  such  behavior  is  not  of  a fully  random  nature,  but  is  at  all  times 
guided  by  a series  of  integrated  perceptions,  however  slight. 

Since  the  formula  for  Brownian  movement,  which  may  be  used  just  as 
well  in  two  dimensions,  is  so  closely  controlled  by  physical  influences,  re- 
course was  made  to  the  use  of  a large,  shallow  pan,  virtually  of  two  dimen- 
sions, employing  much  smaller  fishes.  Here,  too,  we  encountered  a difficulty, 
much  different  in  nature,  but  one  which  finally  led  to  the  use  of  aquatic  uni- 
valves. A description  of  this  device  is  given  in  the  experimental  section 
together  with  the  results  obtained.  The  interpretation  of  these  data  involves 
the  further  confirmation  of  the  tendency  of  organisms  to  travel  in  spiral 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


19 


paths  when  there  is  an  absence  of  “landmarks”  to  guide  them.  The  simulta- 
neous action  of  the  innate  tendency  to  spiral  and  move  in  a broader  sense 
at  random  has  been  fully  set  forth  in  the  experimental  section.  That  this 
is  readily  modified  by  some  soi't  of  “leai'ning”  is  also  appai’ent  from  the 
experiments.  Whether  this  is  associated  also  with  an  obscure  means  of 
orientation  similar  to  that  of  “homing”  as  found  in  many  animals  or  simply 
that  the  snails  wei’e  impelled  by  some  drive  is  not  fully  clear.  We  suspect 
that  it  is  the  latter,  however,  for  when  left  alone  all  three  species  came  to 
rest  on  the  vertical  sides  of  the  pan.  The  pulmonates  had  evident  reason, 
but  it  is  not  clear  in  the  case  of  the  branchiate  foi'm.  If  the  snails  could 
detect  these  vei’tical  surfaces  at  such  a distance  it  is  most  surprising.  That 
the  re-crossing  of  their  previous  paths  had  no  bearing  on  the  subject  is 
evident  fi’om  the  actual  paths  shown  in  Text-figures  2 and  3,  as  some  did 
not  ci’oss  at  all  and  whei’e  they  did  thei'e  is  no  evidence  of  significant 
change  of  dii’ection. 

The  points  that  these  considerations  bring  out  enable  us  to  detei'mine  the 
minimum  l’equii’ements  for  an  adequate  study  of  the  phenomenon  involved: 

1.  A vessel  must  be  used  in  which  it  is  possible  for  the  oi'ganism  to  do  con- 
sidei'able  random  and  spiral  wanderings  without  being  able  to  “pick  up” 
any  landmai’ks.  This  may  be  a “two  dimensional”  space  if  necessary.  For 
any  animals  of  mici'oscopic  size  the  physical  limitations  of  most  laboratoi'ies 
pi-esent  difficulties.  2.  Photogi’aphic  l'ecoi’ding  at  suitable  time  intei’vals 
would  be  pi’actically  essential  for  any  extensive  sui’vey  of  this  field.  Since 
neither  space,  time  nor  suitable  equipment  are  available  to  us  under  pi'esent 
cii’cumstances  it  was  deemed  best  to  indicate  the  pi’ogi’ess  of  this  work  in 
the  hope  that  someone  better  situated  would  be  able  to  further  it. 

The  fundamental  nature  and  l'easons  for  the  existence  of  these  spiral 
movements  have  been  speculated  on  by  various  investigators,  chiefly  Schaef- 
fer (1928).  Accoi’ding  to  our  views,  cei’tain  featui'es  of  them  may  be 
thought  of  in  tex’ms  somewhat  according  to  the  following:  It  has  been 
shown  for  invei’tebrate  animals  that  those  which  move  by  means  of  muscular 
effort  as  opposed  to  ciliary  efforts,  behave  differentially  under  various 
amounts  of  illumination  (Welsh,  1933).  The  former  move  more  rapidly, 
according  to  their  phototropism,  as  the  units  of  illumination  are  increased, 
while  the  latter  show  no  such  correlation.  The  present  studies  indicate  a 
greater  amount  of  movement  under  an  increased  illumination  at  right  angles 
to  the  plane  of  activity.  This  suggests  a similar  increase  in  muscular 
effort  under  such  stimulation  in  at  least  the  lower  vertebrates.  It  should 
follow  from  this  that  such  spiral  movements  as  may  be  present  would  tend 
to  become  exaggerated.  Since  the  muscular  efforts  are  being  intensified, 
their  unit  acts  come  at  shorter  intervals  and  a given  path  is  covered  in  a 
shorter  period  of  time.  This  would  seem  to  culminate  in  the  spiral  paths 
of  insects  about  strong  lights  or  even  in  the  extreme  conditions  in  some 
fishes  discussed  by  Breder  and  Harris  (1935).  These  remarks  are  un- 
doubtedly an  over-simplification  of  the  condition,  a more  full  examination 
revealing  that  a number  of  separate  items  enter  into  the  complex  of  be- 
havior, at  least  including  the  following : 

1.  Increasing  speed  of  translation  with  increased  illumination. 

a.  Direct  positive  or  negative  phototropism  (Welsh,  1933). 

b.  Movements  at  right  angles  to  axis  of  light  (original). 

2.  Spiral  movements  inherent  in  organisms  (Schaeffer,  1928,  and 
others) . 

3.  Tendency  to  expose  dorsum  (or  other  surface)  to  source  of  strong 
illumination  (Breder  and  Harris,  1935). 

4.  Disturbance  of  neural  integration  by  large  changes  in  illumination 
(Breder  and  Harris,  1935). 

5.  Disturbance  of  neural  integration  by  other  environmental  or  patho- 
logical causes  (Hollister,  1934). 


20 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


It  is  not  necessary  for  certain  effects  that  all  of  these  factors  be  present 
in  evident  form  and  there  may  be  still  others,  as  yet  unanalyzed.  As  far  as 
it  is  possible  to  understand  these  effects  at  present  it  would  seem  that  the 
increasing  speed  of  normal  reactions  to  light  due  to  increased  illumination 
and  the  inherent  tendency  for  organisms  to  show  circling  movements  are 
basic  to  the  rest  and  represent  all  that  is  necessary  to  account  for  them.  The 
resulting  movements  from  slight  stimulae  may  be  of  value  to  the  individual, 
but  beyond  a cei'tain  point  may  lead  to  destruction. 

It  is  evident  from  many  quarters  that  the  social  relationship  of  a fish 
to  its  companions  is  not  static  but  changes  rather  violently  from  time  to 
time.  Among  adults  this  is  most  evident  during  the  reproductive  cycles  as 
is  emphasized  in  practically  every  paper  on  fish  reproduction.  Even  in  im- 
mature fish  diverse  influences  are  at  work.  Most  recently  this  has  been 
emphasized  by  Langlois  (1935),  who  studied  the  relationships  between 
young  bass  in  fish-rearing  ponds.  Not  only  did  he  find  that  changes  pro- 
ceeded with  their  development,  but  that  quite  different  associations  appeared 
in  ponds  that  were  essentially  similar  in  environment  and  original  popula- 
tion. This  he  treated  by  measuring  the  output  at  the  end  of  the  season. 
From  some  he  obtained  a uniform  group  showing  only  the  normal  curve  of 
variation  in  which  all  fed  on  the  food  supplied.  In  others  he  found  a group 
of  small  fish  and  a group  of  large,  the  latter  feeding  on  the  smaller  and 
refusing  other  food  as  well  as  showing  different  attitudes  toward  schooling. 
In  all  he  enumerated  eight  different  types  of  social  organization,  all  derived 
from  similar  starting  points.  This  is  mentioned  to  emphasize  the  dynamic 
quality  of  fish  aggregations  and  to  indicate  to  some  extent  that  the  problem 
cannot  be  handled  as  one  involving  only  the  varying  aspects  of  a continuing 
attitude  on  the  part  of  the  subjects  involved. 

Welty  (1934)  studied  the  learning  of  a maze  by  goldfish  with  and 
without  companions  that  had  been  trained  in  the  same  maze.  He  found  that 
those  with  trained  companions  learned  the  maze  faster.  The  aggregating 
tendencies  of  this  species  certainly  account  for  his  results,  as  indeed  might 
be  expected.  The  results  give  a measure  of  the  influence  of  an  individual 
that  “knows”  where  it  is  going  over  one  that  does  not. 


Summary. 

1.  The  relation  of  swimming  speed  to  the  number  of  fishes  present  as 
indicated  by  Schuett  (1934)  and  Escobar,  Minahan  and  Shaw  (1936)  has 
been  further  confirmed  in  larger  bodies  of  water. 

2.  The  mean  positions  of  fish  in  relation  to  coordinates  in  three  dimen- 
sions is  shown  to  be  modified  by  the  numbers  present  in  a significant  man- 
ner, providing  a quantitative  technique  for  the  study  of  environmental 
influences  in  active  animals. 

3.  The  inherent  tendency  for  animals  to  travel  in  spiral  paths  has  been 
shown  for  fishes  and  snails. 

4.  The  essentially  random  nature  of  the  broader  movements  of  animals 
has  been  indicated,  as  have  been  the  experimental  requirements  for  its  full 
study. 

5.  The  equation  of  Einstein  for  the  movement  of  Brownian  particles 
should  be  applicable  to  the  higher  organisms  if  proper  data  could  be  ob- 
tained. 

6.  The  basic  nature  of  the  tendency  of  organisms  to  travel  in  spiral 
paths  may  be  influenced  to  various  degrees  by  impingement  of  the  environ- 
ment on  the  neui’O-mechanism  and  can  be  shown  to  reach  from  useful 
activity  to  self-destruction. 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


21 


TABLE  I. 


Data  on  extent  of  locomotion  and  conditions  of  experiments.  Carassius  auratus,  2 to 
3 inches.  Each  experiment  covers  140  observations.  Aquaria  20  x 16  x 14  inches 
high  (50.8  x 40.6  x 35.6  cm.).  Volume  4,480  cubic  inches  (72,427  cc.). 


No. 

Date. 

Hour 

of 

Start. 

No.  of 
Compan- 
ions. 

Meters 

per 

Hour. 

Condition. 

Remarks. 

Fish.  ■ 

1 

Aug.  21 

1:45 

0 

72.96 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

) One 

A 

2 

Aug.  21 

2:05 

0 

76.39 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

> continuous 

A 

3 

Aug.  21 

2:25 

0 

87.20 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

) reading. 

A 

4 

Aug.  22 

11:20 

0 

101.45 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

S 

Aug.  22 

1:55 

0 

93.60 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

6 

Aug.  22 

4:30 

0 

84.20 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

7 

Aug.  27 

9:30 

3 

27.98 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

8 

Aug.  27 

1:05 

3 

38.45 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

9 

Aug.  27 

4:00 

3 

26.45 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

10 

Aug.  28 

9:35 

3 

42.37 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

11 

Sept.  5 

3:10 

3 

17.17 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

A 

12 

Aug.  27 

2:55 

3 

50.70 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

13 

Aug.  28 

10:00 

3 

34.38 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

14 

Sept.  5 

2:00 

3 

14.91 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

( 15  min.  after 

B 

IS 

Sept.  5 

4:30 

0 

49.38 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

•j  companions 

( were  removed. 

16 

Sept.  6 

9:25 

0 

70.12 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

17 

Sept.  6 

3:30 

0 

78.85 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

18 

Sept.  7 

9:05 

0 

58.45 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

19 

Sept.  7 

1:35 

0 

68.35 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

20 

Sept.  8 

11:15 

0 

62.50 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

21 

Sept.  10 

11:25 

0 

81.59 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

22 

Sept.  11 

11:00 

0 

89.48 

Open  tank  with  mirror. 

B 

23 

Apr.  13 

10:30 

0 

162.15 

In  box.  100  Watts. 

C 

24 

Apr.  15 

11:00 

3 

166.98 

In  box.  100  Watts. 

C 

25 

Apr.  18 

2:00 

3 

61.70 

Out  of  box.  Daylight 

C 

only. 

26 

Apr.  19 

11:30 

3 

33.39 

Out  of  box.  40  Watts. 

C 

27 

Apr.  19 

12:00 

3 

63.35 

Out  of  box.  40  Watts. 

C 

(Rotor). 

28 

Apr.  19 

4:30 

3 

91.95 

Out  of  box.  40  Watts. 

C 

(No  rotor). 

29 

Apr.  22 

2:30 

3 

79.48 

Out  of  box.  Daylight 

C 

only. 

30 

Apr.  18 

3:00 

3 

34.49 

Out  of  box.  Daylight 

D 

only. 

31 

June  4 

0 

46.49 

In  box.  10  Watts. 

D 

32 

June  5 

0 

92.85 

In  box.  40  Watts. 

D 

33 

June  6 

0 

86.95 

In  box.  100  Watts. 

D 

34 

June  7 

0 

87.48 

In  box.  200  Watts. 

D 

35 

June  10 

0 

95.10 

In  box.  (No  light). 

D 

36 

Apr.  22 

3:10 

1 

Out  of  box.  Daylight 

Simultaneous 

C 

only. 

with  37. 

37 

Apr.  22 

3:10 

1 

Out  of  box.  Daylight 

Simultaneous 

D 

only. 

with  36. 

38 

Apr.  22 

4:10 

0 

78.45 

Out  of  box.  40  Watts. 

E 

39 

Apr.  23 

0 

110.2 

In  box.  100  Watts. 

E 

40 

Apr.  26 

3 

52.49 

In  box.  100  Watts. 

E 

41 

Apr.  26 

3:10 

3 

103.1 

In  box.  40  Watts. 

E 

22 


[XXIII  :1 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


TABLE  II. 

V.  vertical  index  from  top  down.  L.  longitudinal  index  from  left  to  right.  T,  trans- 
verse index  from  front  to  back.  Numbers  under  Position  indicate  each  2-inch 
space  of  projection.  Figures  in  body  of  Table  equal  percentage  of  period 
occupied. 


Experiment. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Position. 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

1 

IS 

07 

59 

20 

08 

88 

16 

04 

93 

22 

05 

62 

31 

04 

09 

09 

09 

25 

2 

09 

05 

11 

18 

11 

08 

26 

06 

05 

19 

05 

06 

09 

11 

09 

02 

04 

09 

3 

13 

04 

08 

13 

02 

04 

11 

07 

02 

11 

05 

01 

13 

01 

05 

08 

03 

06 

4 

11 

03 

04 

07 

02 

00 

14 

02 

00 

08 

03 

05 

13 

05 

05 

04 

04 

09 

S 

11 

03 

04 

08 

04 

00 

13 

01 

00 

13 

02 

05 

08 

05 

03 

08 

02 

09 

6 

14 

01 

04 

11 

01 

00 

06 

04 

00 

09 

01 

05 

13 

01 

08 

09 

04 

06 

7 

27 

01 

05 

23 

08 

00 

14 

04 

00 

18 

06 

06 

13 

03 

13 

60 

13 

10 

8 

03 

05 

04 

00 

06 

00 

10 

10 

06 

48 

18 

26 

9 

13 

15 

15 

13 

13 

15 

10 

60 

45 

51 

50 

51 

28 

Experiment. 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

1 

07 

04 

20 

06 

05 

09 

12 

10 

08 

10 

05 

23 

01 

00 

03 

00 

00 

03 

2 

19 

01 

10 

13 

02 

21 

10 

17 

28 

27 

07 

24 

14 

02 

02 

05 

00 

07 

3 

25 

00 

20 

14 

21 

37 

14 

07 

16 

19 

21 

14 

36 

01 

13 

12 

00 

05 

4 

23 

09 

20 

19 

18 

05 

23 

12 

14 

10 

13 

19 

18 

13 

19 

17 

00 

09 

S 

10 

25 

12 

18 

22 

16 

07 

17 

10 

05 

09 

12 

20 

20 

25 

24 

00 

05 

6 

03 

19 

10 

07 

13 

05 

06 

21 

09 

05 

07 

02 

02 

16 

38 

18 

01 

07 

7 

13 

06 

07 

23 

05 

06 

28 

10 

13 

24 

12 

05 

09 

36 

00 

24 

03 

03 

8 

16 

01 

02 

01 

03 

02 

15 

01 

09 

00 

01 

61 

9 

10 

06 

02 

09 

02 

10 

10 

10 

06 

01 

02 

01 

85 

Experiment. 

13 

14 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

1 

01 

00 

01 

14 

01 

01 

01 

81 

02 

00 

05 

13 

00 

23 

03 

00 

01 

05 

2 

47 

00 

08 

12 

01 

04 

02 

08 

08 

00 

00 

12 

00 

07 

01 

01 

01 

05 

3 

17 

00 

05 

30 

13 

28 

14 

00 

00 

01 

01 

06 

03 

08 

01 

12 

01 

05 

4 

07 

02 

03 

30 

13 

37 

28 

01 

02 

13 

01 

06 

17 

01 

01 

22 

01 

02 

5 

03 

09 

10 

02 

25 

17 

18 

01 

05 

21 

00 

02 

16 

07 

01 

23 

01 

08 

6 

OS 

24 

20 

02 

17 

10 

21 

00 

02 

29 

02 

03 

39 

06 

01 

17 

00 

05 

7 

20 

10 

31 

10 

05 

02 

16 

00 

04 

36 

01 

10 

25 

03 

01 

25 

01 

05 

8 

10 

22 

12 

01 

01 

77 

01 

48 

08 

91 

00 

65 

9 

12 

12 

01 

07 

14 

06 

10 

33 

01 

07 

82 

23 

88 

Experiment. 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

1 

00 

13 

05 

01 

00 

24 

01 

00 

32 

01 

05 

36 

10 

32 

32 

00 

35 

31 

2 

00 

02 

07 

05 

01 

14 

02 

01 

15 

03 

05 

15 

03 

12 

08 

01 

06 

11 

3 

OS 

01 

06 

13 

01 

03 

17 

00 

09 

07 

02 

01 

06 

05 

05 

03 

08 

06 

4 

12 

04 

02 

21 

01 

05 

13 

00 

05 

15 

02 

05 

13 

04 

05 

07 

04 

06 

S 

16 

04 

02 

23 

00 

05 

15 

01 

07 

13 

02 

05 

11 

05 

04 

24 

04 

08 

6 

16 

01 

02 

13 

01 

05 

26 

01 

10 

24 

02 

02 

15 

03 

06 

21 

03 

06 

7 

51 

06 

07 

24 

01 

21 

26 

01 

06 

37 

02 

05 

42 

06 

12 

44 

03 

08 

8 

04 

69 

01 

23 

01 

16 

02 

31 

06 

28 

06 

24 

9 

06 

06 

02 

10 

05 

06 

10 

59 

88 

93 

68 

22 

25 

1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


23 


TABLE  II. — Continued 


Experiment. 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

Position. 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

1 

01 

63 

23 

00 

32 

10 

00 

28 

17 

01 

08 

04 

01 

38 

28 

00 

04 

08 

2 

06 

08 

28 

00 

05 

14 

01 

07 

20 

05 

06 

10 

03 

11 

19 

01 

04 

20 

3 

11 

04 

08 

00 

05 

04 

01 

04 

12 

23 

09 

09 

05 

07 

08 

01 

12 

08 

4 

06 

01 

13 

00 

20 

03 

04 

04 

06 

18 

11 

09 

19 

02 

07 

03 

05 

09 

S 

12 

01 

06 

03 

08. 

04 

05 

03 

06 

07 

06 

10 

12 

04 

09 

05 

06 

08 

6 

18 

04 

05 

05 

00 

22 

16 

03 

09 

16 

05 

31 

18 

01 

10 

13 

10 

06 

7 

46 

01 

08 

92 

00 

42 

73 

04 

13 

30 

06 

16 

42 

03 

13 

77 

09 

13 

8 

03 

09 

05 

01 

06 

17 

12 

11 

03 

06 

14 

28 

9 

06 

05 

12 

18 

11 

17 

10 

09 

20 

29 

19 

20 

19 

Experiment. 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

1 

01 

97 

05 

04 

40 

46 

14 

32 

23 

17 

13 

13 

13 

15 

83 

00 

16 

2 

09 

01 

21 

04 

04 

13 

05 

02 

12 

07 

04 

08 

06 

08 

10 

01 

03 

3 

17 

00 

15 

04 

04 

07 

06 

05 

08 

06 

04 

03 

21 

07 

01 

01 

04 

4 

23 

00 

13 

09 

08 

03 

07 

04 

08 

10 

07 

04 

20 

09 

01 

09 

14 

T3 

5 

26 

01 

13 

11 

04 

03 

07 

06 

08 

11 

05 

04 

16 

08 

01 

20 

06 

<v 

6 

17 

00 

12 

24 

04 

04 

14 

07 

07 

20 

07 

05 

14 

05 

01 

24 

07 

7 

07 

00 

17 

44 

06 

07 

47 

01 

10 

29 

09 

16 

10 

06 

02 

45 

04 

£ 

8 

00 

04 

07 

17 

09 

24 

07 

47 

12 

01 

07 

9 

00 

06 

10 

10 

19 

07 

10 

01 

17 

24 

34 

11 

32 

Experiment. 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

1 

04 

04 

01 

44 

14 

05 

19 

52 

00 

10 

09 

01 

18 

29 

2 

00 

01 

06 

11 

12 

11 

08 

04 

01 

10 

13 

00 

06 

05 

3 

01 

06 

12 

05 

08 

10 

04 

04 

00 

12 

15 

01 

04 

06 

4 

09 

08 

•ri 

17 

06 

06 

16 

08 

04 

00 

09 

18 

09 

06 

11 

5 

09 

08 

u, 

14 

06 

05 

19 

08 

04 

00 

13 

18 

22 

04 

12 

6 

32 

07 

■w 

16 

04 

06 

12 

10 

04 

00 

10 

12 

23 

06 

09 

7 

45 

06 

£ 

34 

04 

08 

27 

05 

06 

99 

09 

09 

44 

04 

14 

8 

03 

09 

41 

06 

22 

09 

06 

03 

14 

9 

09 

06 

11 

09 

06 

10 

48 

05 

21 

09 

41 

24 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


TABLE  III. 
Data  of  others. 


Schuett 
( 1934) 1 


Escobar, 
Minahan  and 

Shaw  (1936)2 


Compilation  of  published  data  for  comparative  purposes. 


Volume  of  Aquaria. 

7,500  cc. 

15,000  cc. 

Two  aquaria  of 
similar  shape 

Companions. 

Meters  per  Hour. 

were  used  but 

0 

200— 

150— 

the  dimensions 

3 

50— 

80— 

were  not  given. 

7 

90+ 

40+ 

15 

110+ 

90+ 

Volume  of  Aquaria. 


Fish. 


A 

A 

B 

B 

C 

C 


Companions. 


0 

3 

0 

3 

0 

3 


1,625  cc. 

3,250  cc. 

4,875  cc. 

6,500  cc. 

Meters  per  Hour. 

83.40 

83.44 

51.33 

118.18 

17.26 

55.47 

32.54 

58.43 

103.40 

69.43 

61.95 

100.09 

39.10 

39.65 

13.08 

50.04 

81.06 

59.58 

17.88 

108.69 

24.15 

51.84 

51.14 

17.58 

Comparative  travel  of  Carassius  from  all  data. 


Tank 

Size. 

No.  of 
Alone. 

With  3 
Companions. 

Number  of 
Observation 
Periods. 

Difference. 

Values  Alone 
Reduced  to  Unity. 
Then  Value  with 

+3  = 

Escobar 

i3 

92.84 

27.58 

47 

65.26 

.30— 

Escobar 

23 

73.95 

48.20 

47 

25.75 

.64— 

Escobar 

33 

50.87 

27.03 

47 

23.84 

.53+ 

Escobar 

43 

109.07 

48.77 

47 

60.30 

.45— 

Schuett 

5 

2 00.00 ± 

50.00± 

? 

1S0.00± 

.25 

Schuett 

6 

150.00± 

80.00± 

? 

70.00± 

.53  + 

B.&N. 

7 

76.77 

31.55 

22 

45.22 

.41  + 

1 Approximate  values  picked  from  the  published  graph. 

2 Heterotypic  associations  omitted  from  this  Table.  Fish  A and  B : each  value  represents  the  mean 
of  20  separate  20-minute  periods.  Fish  C : each  value  represents  the  mean  of  7 separate  20-minute 
periods.  The  aquarium  used  measured  24  x 12  x 24  cm.  deep  and  only  the  volume  of  water  was  varied. 

3 These  values  are  weighted  A & B — 20,  C — 7.  (Range  75  to  34) 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


25 


TABLE  IV. 


Comparative  travels  of  Carassius  in  certain  experiments. 


Rate  of  Travel  M/H. 

Exp.  No. 

Fish. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Maximum. 

No.  of  Periods. 

Alone. 

1-6 

A 

72.96 

86.00 

101.45 

6 

15-22 

B 

49.38 

69.84 

89.48 

8 

With  3 Companions. 

7-11 

A 

17.17 

30.48  + 

42.37 

5 

12-14 

B 

14.91 

36.66+ 

50.70 

3 

Averages. 

Alone 

72.96 

76.77— 

101.45 

14 

3 Companions 

14.91 

31.55  + 

50.70 

8 

TABLE  V. 

Mean  distribution  values  for  Fish  A and  B,  expressed  in  percentage. 


A (1-6) 

B (15-22) 

Average 

14 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

V 

L 

T 

Alone. 

19 

6 

56 

01 

16 

15 

8 

12 

33 

14 

7 

8 

02 

3 

10 

7 

5 

8 

12 

4 

4 

9 

2 

4 

10 

2 

4 

9 

3 

4 

17 

1 

3 

14 

2 

4 

10 

3 

3 

18 

2 

4 

15 

2 

4 

10 

2 

4 

23 

2 

4 

18 

2 

4 

26 

6 

6 

30 

2 

7 

28 

4 

7 

8 

15 

3 

53 

5 

36 

14 

7 

10 

47 

62 

56 

(7-11) 

(12-14) 

8 

With  3 

7 

5 

12 

5 

01 

2 

6 

3 

8 

Companions. 

16 

6 

17 

21 

01 

6 

18 

4 

13 

21 

10 

20 

20 

4 

13 

21 

8 

18 

18 

13 

16 

18 

5 

16 

18 

10 

16 

14 

18 

15 

10 

11 

11 

12 

16 

13 

4 

15 

13 

8 

14 

12 

6 

15 

13 

20 

14 

06 

18 

6 

12 

19 

11 

8 

9 

01 

8 

28 

8 

11 

6 

11 

8 

4 

39 

17 

Effect  of  light  on  position  and  speed. 


Exp.  No. 

Watts. 

% at  Surf. 

% at  Bott. 

% Above  Mid. 

% Below  Mid. 

Speed. 

35 

0 

13 

10 

40 

60 

95.10 

31 

10 

01 

07 

39 

61 

46.49 

32 

40 

04 

44 

17 

82 

92.85 

33 

100 

14 

47 

29 

71 

86.95 

34 

200 

17 

29 

35 

65 

87.48 

[XXIII  :1 


26 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


TABLE  VI. 

Movements  of  animals  in  a shallow  circular  pan  6 feet  in  diameter,  2 inches  deep. 


Fishes. 


No.  on  Text- 
fig.  2. 

Species. 

Clockwise 

Loops. 

Counter-clock- 
wise Loops. 

Direction  at  End  of  Path. 

i 

Carassius 
auratus  No.  1 

i 

i 

Counter-clockwise. 

2 

Carassius 
auratus  No.  2 

0 

0 

Counter-clockwise. 

3 

Lebistes 

reticulatus  $ 

0 

i 

Counter-clockwise. 

4 

Brachydanio 

rerio 

1 

i 

Counter-clockwise. 

S 

Villarius 

catus 

0 

0 

Counter-clockwise. 

Total 

2 

3 

Snails  (First  Trial). 


Length  of  Observation. 

Text-fig.  3 

Physa  No.  1 

0 

3 

10.0  min. 

6 

Physa  No.  2 

3 

0 

13. S 

6 

Physa  No.  3 

0 

1 

16.5 

4 

Planorbis  No.  1 

0 

0 

12.5 

6 

Vivipara  No.  1 

1 

0 

30.0 

6 

Vivipara  No.  2 

1 

0 

30.0 

Snails  (Second  Trial). 


Text-fig.  3 

Physa  No.  1 

0 

0 

2.5 

6 

Physa  No.  2 

0 

1 

8.5 

6 

Physa  No.  3 

0 

2 

26.0 

4 

Planorbis  No.  1 

0 

1 

22.5 

Snails  (Third  Trial). 


Text-fig.  6 

Physa  No.  3 

1 

4 

24.0 

4 

Planorbis  No.  1 

0 

1 

Snail  (Fourth  Trial). 


Text-fig.  4 

Planorbis  No.  1 

0 

0 

TOTAL 

6 

13 

1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


27 


Bibliography. 

Allee,  W.  C. 

1931.  Animal  Aggregations.  Chicago.  University  of  Chicago  Press. 

Allee,  W.  C.  and  Bowen,  E.  S. 

1932.  Studies  in  Animal  Aggregation:  Mass  Protection  against  Colloidal 
Silver  among  Goldfishes.  Jour.  Exp.  Zool.  61:  1-32. 

Beebe,  W. 

1935.  Resume  of  the  1935  Expedition  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Re- 
search. Bull.  N.  Y.  Zool.  Soc.  38  (6)  : 191-196. 

Bowen,  E.  S. 

1931.  The  Role  of  the  Sense  Organs  in  Aggregation  of  Ameiurus  melas. 
Ecological  Monographs.  1 (1):  1-35. 

1932.  Further  Studies  of  the  Aggregating  Behavior  of  Ameiurus  melas. 
Biol.  Bull.  63:  252-270. 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr. 

1929.  Certain  Effects  in  the  Habits  of  Schooling  Fishes,  as  Based  on  the 
Observation  of  Jenkinsia.  Amer.  Mus.  Novitates.  (382) : 1-5. 

1934.  An  Experimental  Study  of  the  Life-History  and  Breeding  Habits  of 
the  Cichlid  Fish,  Aequidens  latifrons.  Zoologica.  18  (1) : 1-42. 

1936.  The  Reproductive  Habits  of  the  North  American  Sunfishes,  Centrar- 
chidae.  Zoologica.  21  (1)  : 1-48. 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr.  and  Coates,  C.  W. 

1934.  Sex  Recognition  in  the  Viviparous  Poecilid,  Lebistes  reticulatus.  Anat. 
Rec.  60  (4)  : 45  (Abst.  No.  45). 

1935.  Sex  Recognition  in  the  Guppy,  Lebistes  reticulatus  Peters.  Zoologica. 
19  (5) : 187-207. 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr.  and  Harris,  J.  E. 

1935.  Effect  of  Light  on  Orientation  and  Stability  of  Young  Plectognath 
Fish.  Papers  Tortugas  Lab.  29  (3)  : 23-36.  Carnegie  Inst.  Wash. 
Pub.  (452). 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr.  and  Nigrelli,  R.  F. 

1934.  The  Influence  of  Temperature  and  other  Factors  on  the  Winter  Ag- 
gregations of  the  Sunfish,  Lepomis  auritus,  Anatomical  Record.  60  (4) : 
97  (Abstract  No.  160). 

1935a.  The  Influence  of  Temperature  and  other  Factors  on  the  Winter  Ag- 
gregations of  the  Sunfish,  Lepomis  auritus,  with  Critical  Remarks  on 
the  Social  Behavior  of  Fishes.  Ecology.  16  (1) : 33-47. 

1935b.  A Technique  for  the  Quantitative  Measure  of  Tropisms  and  Social 
Behavior  in  Active  Animals,  with  an  Illustration.  Anatomical  Record. 
64  (1)  : 119  (Abstract  No.  208). 

Brownlee,  J. 

1911.  The  Mathematical  Theory  of  Random  Migration  and  Epidemic  Dis- 
tribution. Pro.  Roy.  Soc.  Edin.  31:  262-289. 

Cole,  W.  H. 

1922.  Note  on  the  Relation  Between  the  Photic  Stimulus  and  the  Rate  of 
Locomotion  in  Drosophila.  Science.  55:  678-679. 

Eddy,  M.  W. 

1925.  Metabolic  Rate  and  Bunching  in  Catfish.  Anatomical  Record.  31:  1332 
(Abstract  No.  79). 


28 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :1 


Edgeworth,  F.  Y. 

1920.  Entomological  Statistics.  Metron.  1:  75-80. 

Einstein,  A. 

1905.  Zur  Elektrodynamik  bewegter  Korper.  Ann.  d.  Physik.  17:  549. 

Escobar,  R.  A.,  Minahan,  R.  P.  and  Shaw,  R.  J. 

1936.  Motility  Factor  in  Mass  Physiology:  Locomotor  Activity  of  Fishes 
under  Conditions  of  Isolation,  Homotypic  Grouping.  Physiol.  Zool. 
9 (1):  66-78. 

Gordan,  A. 

1936.  Paths  of  Flight.  Science.  84  (2167)  : 40-41. 

Hardy,  W.  B. 

1922.  The  Development  Commission.  12th  Report  of  the  Development  Com- 
mission. Nature  (110)  : 865-866. 

Hollister,  G. 

1934.  Salt  and  Fresh-Water  Viability  of  Fish.  Bull.  N.  Y.  Zool.  Soc.  37  (6) : 
183-187. 

Langlois,  T.  H. 

1935.  A Study  of  the  Small-Mouth  Bass,  Micropterus  dolomieu  (Lacepede) 
in  Rearing  Ponds  in  Ohio.  Bull.  Ohio  Biol.  Survey.  4 (4)  : 191-225. 

Lissmann,  H.  W. 

1932.  Die  umwelt  des  Kampfisches  ( Betta  splendens  Regan).  Zeitschr. 
V eigleichende  Physiologie.  18  (1) : 65-111. 

Lotka,  A.  J. 

1925.  Elements  of  Physical  Biology.  460  pp.  Williams  and  Wilkens.  Balti- 
more. 

Newman,  E. 

1876.  Mr.  Saville  Kent’s  Lectures  at  the  Society  of  Arts  on  the  “Aquarium 
Construction  and  Management.”  Zoologist.  4856. 

Noble,  G.  K. 

1934.  Sex  Recognition  in  the  Sunfish,  Eupomotis  gibbosus  (Linne).  Copeia. 
(4)  : 151-155. 

Noble,  G.  K.  and  Curtis,  B. 

1935.  Sexual  Selection  in  Fishes.  Anatomical  Record.  64  (1) : 84  (Abstract 

No.  126). 

Parr,  A.  E. 

1927.  A Contribution  to  the  Theoretical  Analysis  of  the  Schooling  Behavior 
of  Fishes.  Occ.  Pap.  Bingham  Oceanographic  Coll.  ( 1 ) : 1-32. 

1931.  Sex  Dimorphism  and  Schooling  Behavior  among  Fishes.  Amer.  Nat. 
65:  173-180. 

Pearson,  K.  and  Blakeson,  J. 

1906.  Mathematical  Contributions  to  the  Theory  of  Evolution.  XV.  A Mathe- 
matical Theory  of  Random  Migration.  Draper’s  Co.  Research  Memoirs. 
Ser.  3 (15)  Biometric  Ser.  : 1-54. 

Przibram,  K. 

1913.  liber  die  ungeordnete  Bewegung  niederer  tiere.  Phliiger  Archiv.  153: 
401-405. 

Reighard,  J.  E. 

1915.  An  Ecological  Reconnaissance  of  the  Fishes  of  Douglas  Lake,  Cheboy- 
gan County,  Michigan,  in  Mid-Winter.  Bull.  U.  S.  Bur.  Fisheries.  33: 
215-249. 


1938] 


Breder  & Nigrelli:  Mass  Physiology  of  Fishes 


29 


Ross,  R. 

1923.  Memoirs,  with  a Full  Account  of  the  Great  Malaria  Problem  and  Its 
Solution.  London.  547  pp. 

Schaeffer,  A.  A. 

1928.  Spiral  Movements  in  Man.  Jour.  Morph,  and  Physiol.  45:  293-398. 
1931.  On  Molecular  Organization  in  Ameban  Protoplasm.  Science.  74 
(1906)  : 47-51. 

SCHUETT,  F. 

1934.  Studies  in  Mass  Physiology:  the  Activity  of  Goldfish  Under  Different 
Conditions  of  Aggregation.  Ecology.  15:  258-262. 

Spooner,  G.  M. 

1931.  Some  Observations  on  Schooling  in  Fish.  Journ.  Marine  Biol.  Assoc. 
United  Kingdom.  17 : 421-448. 

Thompson,  D.  H. 

1933.  The  Migration  of  Illinois  Fish.  Biol.  Notes  (1) : 1-25.  Nat.  Hist. 
Survey  111.  (Mimeographed). 

Townsend,  C.  H. 

1916.  Hibernating  Fishes.  Bull.  N.  Y.  Zool.  Soc.  19  (2) : 1345. 

Welsh,  J.  H. 

1933.  Light  Intensity  and  the  Extent  of  Activity  of  Locomotor  Muscles  as 
Opposed  to  Cilia.  Biol.  Bull.  65  (2)  : 168-174. 

Welty,  J.  C. 

1934.  Experimental  Exploration  into  the  Group  Behavior  of  Fishes : A Study 
of  the  Influences  of  the  Group  on  Individual  Behavior.  Physiol.  Zool. 
7:  85-128. 


Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


31 


2. 

A Study  of  the  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of 
North  American  Rabbits.1 


John  G.  Arnold,  Jr. 

Department  of  Biology , University  College, 

New  York  University. 

(Text-figures  1-23). 

1.  Introduction. 

Previous  work  on  the  anoplocephaline  cestodes  of  North  American  rab- 
bits has  resulted  in  much  confusion.  Observations  on  internal  anatomy,  time 
of  appearance  of  genital  primordia,  number  of  testes  and  other  morpholog- 
ical details  are  so  lacking  in  agreement  that  any  interpretation  is  difficult. 
Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn  (1932)  have  incorrectly  cast  all  American  leporine 
species  of  the  genus  Cittotaenia  into  synonymy  with  the  European  species 
C.  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782).  The  purpose  of  the  present  investigation  was 
to  secure  pi’ecise  information  on  the  North  American  representatives  of 
this  genus,  correct  the  errors,  and  eliminate  the  confusion  that  has  existed 
in  the  knowledge  of  the  rabbit  cestodes  of  the  family  Anoplocephalidae. 


2.  Acknowledgements. 

The  present  study  was  suggested  by  Professor  Horace  W.  Stunkard 
and  carried  out  under  his  direction.  The  author  wishes  to  thank  Professor 
Stunkard  for  helpful  criticisms,  for  the  loan  of  the  European  material  used 
in  comparison,  and  for  the  use  of  his  private  library.  Grateful  acknowledge- 
ment is  also  extended  to  Dr.  Maurice  C.  Hall,  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Animal 
Industry,  U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture,  for  the  privilege  of  studying 
original  maternal  deposited  in  his  care.  The  kindness  of  Dr.  R.  V.  Boughton 
of  the  University  of  Manitoba,  in  lending  specimens  of  Cittotaenia  pectinata 
americana,  is  recognized.  Lastly,  the  author  gratefully  acknowledges  the 
assistance  of  Marion  E.  Arnold  for  criticisms  and  aid  in  the  preparation 
of  this  paper. 


3.  Materials  and  Methods. 

The  material  used  in  this  study  consisted  of  both  North  American  and 
European  species.  Specimens  of  all  the  American  species  and  four  of  the 
five  European  ones  provided  material  for  a comprehensive  treatment  of  the 
subject.  Andrya  rhopalocephala  from  European  hares  is  rare  and  no  mate- 
rial of  that  species  was  available.  Since  doubt  has  been  expressed  con- 

1 Contribution  from  the  Biological  Laboratory,  New  York  University,  University  Heights,  New 
York. 


32 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


cerning  the  specific  distinctness  of  the  North  American  species,  a detailed 
comparison  has  been  made  between  North  American  and  European  forms. 

Specimens  of  Cittotaenia  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804),  C.  ctenoides 
(Railliet,  1890),  C.  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782),  and  Andrya  cunicidi  (Blan- 
chard, 1891)  were  loaned  to  the  writer  by  Professor  Stunkard,  who  col- 
lected them  during  1931  and  1932  from  the  vicinity  of  Hamburg,  Germany. 

The  American  specimens  of  the  family  Anoplocephalidae  were  obtained 
from  various  sources.  The  writer  examined  the  intestines  of  9 cottontail 
rabbits,  Sylvilagus  floridanus  mallurus,  killed  near  New  York  City;  7 of 
the  same  species  from  Boylesville,  Pennsylvania;  7 from  cottontails  killed 
in  northern  New  York  State;  and  156  from  cottontails,  Sylvilagus  floridanus 
alacer,  killed  near  Wichita,  Kansas.  The  material  in  the  last  two  groups 
was  obtained  from  slaughter  houses  in  New  York  City.  All  the  parasites 
were  killed  and  fixed  in  a saturated  solution  of  corrosive  sublimate  and 
were  washed,  stained,  dehydrated,  cleared,  mounted  and  studied  either  as 
sections  or  in  toto.  Alcoholic  and  mounted  specimens  of  the  genera  Citto- 
taenia and  Schizotaenia  were  secured  through  the  kindness  of  Dr.  M.  C. 
Hall.  Similar  specimens  of  C.  pectinata  americana  were  loaned  by  Dr.  R.  V. 
Boughton. 


4.  Historical  Review. 

The  subfamily  Anoplocephalinae  was  erected  by  Blanchard  (1891), 
and  the  family  Anoplocephalidae  by  Kholodkovsky  (1902).  Fuhrmann 
(1907)  characterized  the  family  Anoplocephalidae  as  follows:  “Scolex  meist 
kugelig,  seltener  gestreckt,  unbewaffnet;  Saugnapfe  verhaltnismassig  gross; 
Hals  fehlt;  Gleider  kurz  und  breit;  Genitalien  einfach  oder  doppelt.  Geni- 
talpori  randstandig;  Eier  ,oft  mit  einem  ‘birnformigen  Apparat.’  In 
Saugetieren  und  Vogeln.”  In  his  recent  monograph,  Fuhrmann  (1931)  gave 
a more  extended  diagnosis  of  the  family.  He  stated:  “Scolex  immer  ohne 
Rostellum.  Glieder  meist  breiter  als  lang.  1 oder  2 Genitalapparate  in 
einer  Proglottis.  Genitaloffnung  beidseitig,  einseitig,  regelmassig  oder  un- 
regelmassig  alterierend.  Weibliche  Genitaloffnung  oft  verschwindend,  selten 
fehlend.  Hoden  zahlreich.  Weibliche  Geschlechtsdriisen  haufig  poral  ver- 
schoben.  Uterus  sackformig,  retikular  oder  sich  in  Ei-Kapseln  auflosend 
oder  mit  1 bis  zahlreichen  Paruterinorganen  versehen.  Eier  mit  3 Hiillen, 
von  welchen  die  innerste  oft  einen  birnformigen  Apparat  aufweist.  Ent- 
wickelungsgeschichte  vollstandig  unbekannt.  In  Reptilien  (2  Genera),  in 
Vogeln  (7  Genera),  in  Saugern  (21  Genera).” 

Five  species  of  anoplocephaline  cestodes  occur  in  European  hares  and 
rabbits.  Three  of  them  belong  to  the  genus  Cittotaenia,  the  others  to  the 
genus  Andrya.  The  American  leporine  cestodes  belong  to  the  genera  Citto- 
taenia and  Schizotaenia.  Although  the  genus  Andrya  is  represented  in  North 
America,  species  have  not  yet  been  found  in  rabbits  and  hares.  To  facili- 
tate description  and  avoid  repetition,  the  diagnostic  features  of  the  three 
genera  are  listed. 

Andrya  Railliet,  1893,  Anoplocephalinae:  Segments  much  broader  than 
long  except  in  most  distal  parts  of  strobila.  Single  set  of  reproductive 
organs  in  each  segment;  genital  pores  irregularly  alternate.  Testes  mostly 
on  aporal  side  of  segment;  female  genitalia  on  poral  side.  Uterus  typically 
reticular  to  saccular.  Pyriform  apparatus  present.  Adults  in  mammals. 

Type  species'.  A.  rhopalocephala  (Riehm,  1881). 

Cittotaenia  Riehm,  1881.  Anoplocephalinae:  Segments  broader  than 
long.  Double  set  of  reproductive  organs  in  each  proglottid;  genital  pores 
in  each  lateral  wall.  Uterus  saccular.  Pyriform  apparatus  present.  Adults 
in  mammals  and  birds. 

Type  species'.  C.  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804)  Stiles,  1896. 

Schizotaenia,  Janicki,  1906.  Anoplocephalinae:  Segments  much  broader 


1938 J Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


33 


than  long.  Single  set  of  reproductive  organs  to  each  segment;  genital  pores 
typically  alternate.  Testes  in  median  field  or  segment;  female  genitalia 
slightly  to  aporal  side.  Uterus  reticular.  No  pyriform  apparatus  present. 
Adults  in  mammals. 

Type  species:  S.  decrescens  (Diesing,  1856). 

A brief  historical  account  of  each  species  considered  in  the  present 
paper  is  given  later  with  the  specific  description.  For  more  detailed  his- 
torical data,  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  original  sources  cited  in  the 
bibliography. 

5.  ANOPLOCEPH ALINE  CESTODES  FROM  NORTH  AMERICAN  HARES  AND  RABBITS. 

Anoplocephaline  cestodes  were  first  reported  in  North  American  rab- 
bits by  Curtice  (1888),  who  described  supposedly  the  early  larval  stages 
of  Taenia  pectinata  in  Lepus  sylvaticus. 

At  present,  four  species  of  anoplocephaline  tapeworms  are  recognized 
in  North  American  hares  and  rabbits:  (1)  Schizotaenia  americana  (Stiles, 
1895)  (=  Andrya  americana  — Andrya  americana  leporis  — Bertia  ameri- 
cana — Bertia  americana  leporis  — Schizotaenia  americana  leporis)  ; (2) 
Cittotaenia  perplexa  (Stiles,  1895)  (=  Ctenotaenia  perplexa  = Cittotaenia 
mosaica)  ; (3)  Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana  Douthitt,  1915  (=  Cittotae- 
nia pectinata  of  Lyman,  1902)  ; (4)  Cittotaenia  variabilis  (Stiles,  1895) 
(=  Ctenotaenia  variabilis  = Cittotaenia  variabilis  variabilis  — Cittotaenia 
variabilis  angusta  — Cittotaenia  variabilis  imbricata) . 


Schizotaenia  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  Janicki,  1906. 

(Text-figs.  1,  10). 

This  cestode  was  first  described  as  Andrya  americana  leporis  by  Stiles 
(1895),  and  was  transferred  by  him  (1896)  to  the  genus  Bertia  on  the 
basis  of  its  resemblance  to  Bertia  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  Stiles,  1896, 
from  the  porcupine.  Stiles  postulated  that  B.  americana  leporis  might 
eventually  be  elevated  to  specific  rank,  but  that  his  five  poorly  preserved 
specimens  did  not  warrant  such  a step.  The  material  was  collected  by  C. 
Curtice  from  Lepus  sp.  and  the  locality  in  the  United  States  from  which  it 
was  taken  is  unknown.  Stiles  and  Hassall  (1902)  proposed  the  name 
Bertiella  for  Bertia,  since  the  latter  was  preoccupied. 

Cohn  (1906)  stated  that  Bertia  americana  was  synonymous  with  Taenia 
laticephala  Leidy.  He  retained  the  genus  Bertia  (he  had  apparently  not  seen 
Stiles’  and  Hassall’s  new  allocation  of  the  species),  but  placed  the  specific 
name,  americana,  in  synonymy. 

In  his  description  of  the  cestodes  of  mammals,  Janicki  (1906)  erected 
the  new  genus  Schizotaenia  with  S.  macrorhyncha  (Rudolphi,  1810)  as  type 
and  in  it  he  included  Bertia  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  and  Bertia  americana 
leporis  (Stiles,  1895). 

Douthitt  (1915)  declared  that  the  variety  Schizotaenia  americana 
leporis  (Stiles,  1895)  should  be  dropped  in  favor  of  Schizotaenia  americana. 
He  stated  that  the  variety  was  too  little  known  and  too  incompletely  described 
to  permit  any  distinction  from  S.  americana.  Douthitt  gave  sound  and  logi- 
cal arguments  to  disprove  Cohn’s  suggestion  that  Bertia  americana  and 
Taenia  laticephala  Leidy  were  identical. 

Meggitt  (1924)  reestablished  Schizotaenia  americana  leporis  as  a valid 
species.  He  reduced  the  species  S.  americana,  which  is  from  the  porcupine, 
to  synonymy  with  S.  laticephala.  In  this  he  followed  Cohn’s  contention  and 
disregarded  Douthitt’s  argument. 


34 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


Baer  (1927)  removed  Schizotaenia  americana  from  synonymy  with  S. 
laticephala.  Since  he  did  not  mention  S.  americana  leporis,  he  apparently 
followed  Douthitt  and  considered  the  leporine  variety  identical  with  the 
porcupine  species. 

Sprehn  (1932),  in  his  Lehrbuch  der  Helminthologie,  did  not  even  men- 


Text-figures  1-9. 

Abbreviations  : c — cirrus  sac.  e — excretory  duct,  n — nerve  fiber,  o — ovary,  p — pars  prostatica. 
r — seminal  receptacle,  s — shell  gland,  t — testis,  u — uterus,  v — vitelline  gland,  va — vagina,  vd — 
vas  deferens,  vs — seminal  vesicle.  All  measurements  are  to  a scale  of  0.1  mm.,  with  the  exception 
of  Text-figure  8 in  which  the  scale  is  0.01  mm.  All  drawings  are  camera  lucida. 

1.  Scolex,  Schizotaenia  americana.  2.  Scolex,  Cittotaenia  variabilis.  3.  Scolex, 
Cittotaenia  perplexa.  4.  Scolex,  Cittotaenia  denticulata.  5.  Scolex,  Andrya 
cuniculi.  6.  Scolex,  Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana.  7.  Scolex,  Cittotaenia 
pectinata.  8.  Ovum,  Cittotaenia  denticulata.  9.  Scolex,  Cittotaenia  ctenoides. 


35 


1938J  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 

tion  the  genus  Schizotaenia,  or  give  Janicki  as  a reference.  He  also  failed  to 
mention  either  Bertiella  americana  or  B.  americana  leporis,  although  he  rec- 
ognized the  generic  name,  Bertiella,  proposed  by  Stiles  and  Hassall  (1902). 

The  writer  was  fortunate  to  obtain  a cotype  of  Stiles’  original  material 
of  Schizotaenia  americana  leporis  (U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  1170). 

Since  the  specimen  was  incomplete  and  in  poor  condition,  the  total 
length  and  number  of  proglottids  could  not  be  determined.  The  fragment, 
consisting  of  75  proglottids,  measured  33  mm.  in  length  and  6.5  mm,  in 
maximal  width.  A neck,  if  present,  was  too  contracted  to  be  recognizable. 
The  scolex  (Text-fig.  1)  was  0.63  mm.  wide  (Stiles  found  it  to  be  0.64  mm.) 
and  the  suckers  measured  0.25-0.26  mm.  in  length  and  0.21-0.25  mm.  in  width. 
This  is  a wider  variation  than  found  previously  in  either  Schizotaenia  ameri- 
cana or  its  variety,  S.  americana  leporis. 

The  male  genital  primordia  with  evidences  of  the  male  ducts  appeared 
first  in  the  sixth  proglottid.  The  cirrus  and  cirrus  sac  were  well  developed 
by  the  20th  segment,  and  the  cirrus  was  seen  extruded  in  the  23rd.  Douthitt 
stated  that  the  genital  primordia  were  present  in  the  first  segment.  Accord- 
ing to  Douthitt,  sexual  maturity  was  attained  in  the  80th  proglottid  (Text- 
fig.  10).  The  cirrus  sac,  containing  the  seminal  vesicle  and  a long  thin 
cirrus,  was  very  muscular,  especially  at  its  proximal  end.  It  measured  as 
much  as  0.69  mm.  in  length.  It  was  Douthitt’s  opinion  that  part  of  the 
seminal  vesicle  was  outside  the  cirrus  sac.  In  one  of  the  best  preserved 
proglottids,  65-70  testes  (Stiles  reported  50)  were  observed  in  an  irregular 
row  in  the  distal  half  of  the  proglottid.  The  convoluted  vas  deferens  ex- 
tended from  the  region  of  the  ovary  to  the  cirrus  sac  and,  just  before  it 
entered  the  latter,  it  was  surrounded  by  glandular  cells,  probably  the  pars 
prostatica.  The  cirrus  sac  opened  to  the  exterior  at  approximately  the  middle 
of  the  lateral  margin.  The  vagina  emptied  just  below  the  male  opening. 
There  were  indications  of  a genital  papilla. 

The  primordium  of  the  seminal  receptacle  first  appeared  definitely  in  the 
eighth  segment,  although  indications  were  seen  in  the  seventh  proglottid. 
The  structure  present  was  rather  spherical  and  was  found  alternately  to  the 
right  and  left  of  the  median  line.  The  details  of  the  female  reproductive 
system  could  not  be  made  out.  Only  two  ovaries  were  measured  and  their 
probable  widths  were  0.53  and  0.63  mm.;  Douthitt’s  measurement  of  the 
ovary  width  was  1.3  mm.  The  uterus  arose  from  the  female  genital  complex 
as  a fan-shaped  structure,  and  was  filled  with  eggs  by  the  58th  segment. 
The  ova  measured  30-40  p in  diameter,  with  an  average  of  39  p.  According 
to  Douthitt,  the  outer  embryonic  membrane  ranges  from  55-61  p in  diameter. 

Comparison  of  the  specific  diagnoses  (Stiles,  1896)  of  Bertia  americana 
and  B.  americana  leporis  disclosed  only  minor  differences  which  may  be 
regarded  as  individual  variations  rather  than  specific  characters.  After 
examination  of  specimens  of  S.  americana  leporis,  the  writer  agrees  with 
Douthitt  and  Baer  that  the  variety  name  should  be  suppressed. 

From  the  above  description  and  from  a historical  review,  the  following 
specific  diagnosis  may  be  derived. 

Diagnosis : Schizotaenia  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  Janicki,  1906. 
Strobilae  from  23-47  mm.  in  length,  and  from  5-6.5  mm.  in  maximal  breadth. 
Number  of  proglottids  may  exceed  95.  Scolex  varies  from  0.6-0. 7 mm.  in 
breadth.  Neck  absent,  stroblization  beginning  immediately.  Genital  organs 
single;  pores  lateral  and  regularly  alternate.  Male  genital  primordia  appear 
first  at  the  6th  segment;  the  female,  between  the  7th  (?)-14th  proglottids. 
Testes,  50-70  in  number,  found  in  an  irregular  row  in  distal  half  of  proglot- 
tid. Muscular  cirrus  sac  contains  the  seminal  vesicle  and  a long  thin  cirrus. 
The  vagina  opens  just  below  the  cirrus  sac,  and  the  two  tend  to  form  a genital 
papilla.  Ovary  usually  indistinct,  median  (?).  Douthitt  reported  it  was  1.3 
mm.  in  width.  Uterus  arises  from  female  genital  complex  in  fan-like  fash- 


36 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


| XXIII  :2 


Text-figures  10-17. 

Abbreviations:  c — cirrus  sac.  e — excretory  duct,  n — nerve  fiber,  o — ovary,  p — pars  prostatica. 
r — seminal  receptacle,  s — shell  gland,  t — testis,  u — uterus,  v — vitelline  gland,  va — vagina,  vd — 
vas  deferens,  vs — seminal  vesicle.  All  measurements  are  to  a scale  of  0.1  mm.  All  drawings  are 
camera  lucida. 

1 0.  Mature  proglottid,  Schizotaenia  americana.  1 1 , Mature  proglottid,  Cittotaenia 
perplexa.  12.  Mature  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  variabilis.  13.  Mature  proglottid, 
Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana.  14.  Mature  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  denticul- 
ata.  15.  Mature  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  ctenoides.  16.  Mature  proglottid, 
Cittotaenia  pectinata.  17.  Mature  proglottid,  Andrya  cuniculi. 


1938]  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


37 


ion  to  fill  median  field.  Ova  range  from  30-40  p in  material  studied,  but  vary 
from  55-61  p,  according  to  Douthitt. 

Hosts : Yellow-haired  porcupine,  Erethizon  epixanthes;  Canadian  por- 
cupine, E.  dorsatus;  and  Lepus  sp. 

Habitat : Wyoming  and  New  York. 


Cittotaenia  perplexa  (Stiles,  1895). 

Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 

(Text-figs.  3,  11). 

This  species  was  described  by  Stiles  (1895)  as  Ctenotaenia  perplexa, 
but  was  later  transferred  (Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896)  to  the  genus  Citto- 
taenia for  reasons  of  priority.  Later  in  1896,  Stiles  published  an  inclusive 
diagnosis  of  the  species. 

In  1908,  Hall  described  this  same  form  as  Cittotaenia  mosaica,  and 
later  (1912)  listed  it  from  the  intestine  of  Sylvilagus  nuttalli  pinetis,  a 
cottontail  rabbit  of  Colorado.  The  synonymy  was  pointed  out  by  Douthitt 
(1915)  who  restudied  Stiles’  original  specimens  of  C.  perplexa  (U.  S.  Nat. 
Mus.,  No.  1110).  He  found  that  Stiles’  account  was  in  error  concerning  the 
length  of  the  cirrus  sac  and  distribution  of  testes,  and  that  the  features 
which  had  been  used  to  distinguish  C.  mosaica  from  C.  perplexa  were  not 
significant  differences. 

Meggitt  (1924)  recognized  Cittotaenia  perplexa  as  a valid  species  with 
C.  mosaica  as  a synonym.  Baer  (1927)  reduced  C.  perplexa  to  synonymy 
with  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782),  which  he  considered  to  be  ex- 
ceedingly variable  and  widely  distributed.  Sprehn  (1932)  failed  to  mention 
either  C.  perplexa  or  C.  mosaica. 

In  the  present  study,  26  incomplete  specimens  of  Cittotaenia  perplexa 
(Stiles,  1895)  and  Cittotaenia  mosaica  Hall,  1908,  were  loaned  to  the  writer 
by  Dr.  M.  C.  Hall,  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry,  U.  S.  Department  of 
Agriculture.  The  specimens  of  C.  perplexa  bore  the  following  numbers, 
U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Nos.  17226,  17246,  and  17449.  The  specimens  of  C.  mosaica 
were  catalogued  as  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Nos.  28429  and  24845.  These  included 
cotype  material. 

Of  the  fragments  studied,  the  longest  contained  150  proglottids  and 
measured  70  mm.  in  length  with  a maximal  width  of  11  mm.,  the  largest 
breadth  yet  reported.  The  greatest  length  reported  previously  (Hall,  1908) 
for  C.  mosaica  was  100  mm.  The  scolex  (Text-fig.  3)  ranged  from  0.32-0.45 
mm.  in  width.  The  suckers  were  0.11  mm.  in  diameter,  which  agrees  with 
the  measurement  of  Stiles.  The  scolex  was  not  differentiated  from  a short 
and  broad  unsegmented  neck,  which  measured  from  0.30-0.35  mm.  in  length. 

The  genital  organs  were  double  and  the  pores  opened  anterolaterally. 
The  female  genital  primordia  appeared  in  the  10th  proglottid  and  their 
ducts  were  first  evident  in  the  16th.  The  male  genital  primordia  first  ap- 
peared about  the  30th  and  their  ducts  in  the  35th  segment.  The  follicular 
ovary  was  well  developed  in  the  70th  segment,  and  disappeared  in  the  95th. 
This  was  correlated  with  the  appearance  of  eggs  in  the  uterus.  This  con- 
dition agreed  with  the  observations  of  Hall  and  Douthitt.  The  ovary  (Text- 
fig.  11)  measured  from  0.50-0.61  mm.  in  width.  Douthitt  reported  a width 
of  0.85  mm.  According  to  Hall,  the  yolk  gland  measured  0.20-0.23  in  width, 
and  the  shell  gland  0.074-0.092  mm.  The  seminal  receptacle  was  rather  large 
and  situated  within  the  longitudinal  canals.  The  vagina  was  long  and  thin, 
opening  below  the  cirrus  sac.  The  ova  ranged  from  57-69  p in  diameter. 
Hall  stated  that  they  reached  a maximum  of  105  p. 

The  testes,  120-125  in  number,  were  in  the  distal  half  of  the  segment. 
In  the  younger  proglottids,  the  testes  were  continuous  from  lateral  canal  to 


38 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


lateral  canal,  while  in  more  mature  segments  there  was  a definite  median 
break  in  continuity  of  the  chain.  This  was  apparent  both  in  Stiles’  cotype 
material  and  in  Hall’s  specimens  of  C.  mosaica.  The  testes  varied  from 
0.049-0.065  mm.  in  diameter.  The  maximal  size  recorded  by  Hall  was  0.09 
mm.  The  convoluted  vas  deferens  proceeded  from  the  region  of  the  female 
glands  to  the  long,  narrow  cirrus  sac,  which  measured  from  0.43-0.50  mm. 
in  length.  The  maximal  sizfe  recorded  by  Hall  was  0.64  mm.  In  some  of 
Stiles’  material,  Douthitt  observed  cirrus  sacs  as  long  as  0.55  mm. 

The  following  diagnosis  may  be  offered. 

Diagnosis : Cittotaenia  perplexa  (Stiles,  1895)  Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 
Mature  specimens  measure  3.8-10  cm.  in  length,  and  11  mm.  in  maximal 
width.  The  scolex,  0.27-0.45  mm.  in  breadth,  is  not  differentiated  from  a 
short,  unsegmented  neck  region.  Proglottids  number  over  150.  Female  gen- 
ital primordia  appear  first  in  the  10th  and  their  ducts  in  the  16th  segment. 
Ovary  well  developed  by  the  70th  segment;  disappears  at  the  95th.  Ovary, 
0.50-0.85  mm.  in  width ; ova  50  to  105  g in  diameter.  Male  genital  primordia 
appear  first  in  the  30th  and  their  ducts  in  the  35th  proglottid.  Testes  con- 
tinuous from  longitudinal  canal  to  longitudinal  canal  in  young  proglottids, 
but  divided  into  two  groups  in  more  mature  ones.  Testes  60-125  in  number 
and  0.049-0.09  mm.  in  diameter.  Cirrus  sac  0.43-0.64  mm.  long. 

Hosts : Sylvilagus  nuttalli  pinetis,  Sylvilagus  floridanus  mallurus,  and 
Sylvilagus  floridanus  alacer. 

Habitat:  Colorado,  Maryland  and  Oklahoma. 


Cittotaenia  pectinata  amerieana  Douthitt,  1915. 

(Text-figs.  6,  13,  19). 

In  1896,  Stiles  declared  that  Cittotaenia  variabilis  (Stiles,  1895)  is  an 
American  variant  of  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782)  of  Europe.  Later 
discoveries  have  shown  that  C.  pectinata  amerieana  of  North  America  is 
much  more  closely  related  to  C.  pectinata.  This  American  cestode  was 
described  by  Lyman  (1902)  from  Lepus  melanotis,  the  common  jackrabbit. 
Hall  (1908)  noted:  “A  hasty  comparison  of  specimens  of  the  European  and 
American  C.  pectinata  shows  certain  differences  that  should  be  determined 
as  accidental  or  shown  to  be  of  specific  or  subspecific  importance.” 

Later,  Douthitt  (1915)  concluded  that  the  American  form  “should  be 
designated  as  a distinct  variety  to  avoid  confusion,”  and  he  proposed  the 
name  C.  pectinata  amerieana.  This  terminology  was  followed  by  Meggitt 
(1924),  John  (1926),  Boughton  (1932),  and  Rees  (1933a). 

Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn  (1932)  failed  to  recognize  any  distinctly 
American  variety. 

The  author  was  fortunate  in  obtaining  several  paratype  specimens  of 
C.  pectinata  amerieana  from  Dr.  R.  V.  Boughton.  The  original  specimens 
of  C.  pectinata  america^ia,  which  were  described  by  Douthitt,  were  not 
available. 

Ten  almost  complete  specimens  were  studied.  The  longest,  consisting 
of  at  least  360  proglottids,  was  110  mm.,  and  the  broadest  7.5  mm.  The 
scolex  (Text-fig.  6),  varying  from  0.23-0.30  mm.  in  width,  was  set  off  only 
slightly  from  the  neck,  which  measured  0.14-0.30  mm.  in  length.  The 
suckers,  ranging  from  0.11-0.17  mm.  in  diameter,  were  shallow,  situated 
at  an  angle,  and  very  close  together. 

The  female  genital  primordia  were  indicated  first  in  the  5th-6th,  and 
their  ducts  in  the  6th-7th  proglottids.  The  ovary  (Text-fig.  13),  averaging 
about  0.60  mm.  in  breadth,  reached  maturity  between  the  60th-90th  seg- 
ments, and  disappeared  abruptly  between  the  90th-145th  proglottids  (Text- 
fig.  19).  The  cirrus  sac  and,  just  below  it,  the  vagina,  opened  into  a shallow 


1938J  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


39 


Text-figures  18-23. 

Abbreviations  : c — cirrus  sac.  e — excretory  duct,  n — nerve  fiber,  o — ovary,  p — pars  prostatica. 
r — seminal  receptacle,  s — shell  gland,  t — testis,  u — uterus,  v — vitelline  gland,  va — vagina,  vd — 
vas  deferens,  vs — seminal  vesicle.  All  measurements  are  to  a scale  of  0.1  mm.  All  drawings  are 
camera  lucida. 

18.  Gravid  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  variabilis.  19.  Gravid  proglottid,  Cittotaenia 
pectinata  americana.  20.  Gravid  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  denticulata.  21. 
Gravid  proglottid,  Cittotaenia  ctenoides.  22.  Gravid  proglottid,  Cittotaenia 
pectinata.  23.  Gravid  proglottid,  Andrya  cuniculi. 


40 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


depression  or  atrium  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  proglottid.  The  vagina 
continued  mediad  and  very  soon  enlarged  to  form  the  seminal  receptacle. 
The  latter,  thin-walled  and  irregular  in  outline,  led  to  the  ovarian  complex. 
Ova  ranged  from  70-130  g in  diameter,  with  an  average  of  80  y.  The  uterus 
was  typically  single. 

The  male  gential  primordia  appeared  first  in  the  37th-45th  segments, 
and  their  ducts  were  visible  one  or  two  proglottids  behind  the  primai’y  con- 
densation. The  testes,  about  125  per  segment,  0.062-0.11  mm.  in  diameter, 
were  situated  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  proglottid,  between  the  longitudinal 
excretory  canals,  posterior  to  the  ovaries.  The  short  vasa  efferentia  emptied 
into  the  vas  deferens,  which  joined  the  convoluted  seminal  vesicle  located 
median  to  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal.  The  cirrus  sac,  1.0-1.76  mm. 
in  length,  was  well  developed  and  extended  mediad  from  the  longitudinal 
excretory  canal. 

The  following  brief  diagnosis  is  proposed. 

Diagnosis : Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana  Douthitt,  1915.  Mature 
specimens  may  contain  360  proglottids,  with  a length  of  220  mm.  and  a 
width  of  7.5  mm.  Scolex  0.23-0.30  mm.  broad;  neck  0.14-0.30  mm.  long. 
Female  genital  primordia  appear  in  the  5th  or  6th  and  their  ducts  in  the 
6th  or  7th  segments.  Ovary,  about  0.6  mm.  in  breadth,  reaches  maturity 
in  the  60th-90th  and  disappears  between  the  90th-145th  segments.  Ova 
70-130  g in  diameter.  The  male  genital  primordia  appear  first  between  the 
37th-45th  proglottids,  and  their  ducts  in  each  instance  one -or  two  segments 
later.  Testes,  112-125  per  proglottid,  measure  from  0.062-0.11  mm.  in 
diameter.  They  extend  from  one  longitudinal  excretory  canal  to  the  other, 
in  the  posterior  half  of  the  segment.  Cirrus  sac,  1-1.76  mm.  long,  extends 
mediad  from  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal. 

Hosts : Lepus  calif  ornicus  melanotis  and  Lepus  americanus. 

Habitat : Nebraska,  Kansas  and  western  Canada. 

After  a careful  comparison  of  C.  pectinata  americana,  of  North  Amer- 
ica, and  C.  pectinata,  of  Europe,  it  was  felt  that  the  only  justifiable  alloca- 
tion of  these  species  is  to  retain  the  former  as  a variety  of  the  latter. 
The  chief  difference  between  the  two  is  that  C.  pectinata  attains  a length  of 
400  mm.  with  190  proglottids,  whereas  C.  pectinata  americana,  with  a length 
of  220  mm.,  has  more  than  360  segments.  This  difference  is  distinctive  and 
worth  variety  rank,  considering  that  the  specimens  were  from  different 
hosts  and  from  different  continents.  On  the  other  hand,  careful  comparison 
affords  no  justification  in  separating  them  by  more  than  variety  status. 
The  writer,  therefore,  agrees  with  Douthitt  (1915)  that  the  American  rep- 
resentative of  C.  pectinata  should  be  designated  as  a variety,  C.  pectinata 
americana. 


Citfotaenia  variabilis  (Stiles,  1895). 

Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 

(Text-figs.  2,  12,  18). 

This  species  was  described  by  Stiles  in  1895  as  Ctenotaenia  variabilis. 
The  next  year,  Stiles  and  Hassall  transferred  it  to  the  present  genus  because 
of  priority.  Stiles  felt  proper  classification  of  C.  variabilis  necessitated 
breaking  up  the  species  into  three  varieties : C.  variabilis  variabilis,  C.  vari- 
abilis angusta,  and  C.  variabilis  imbricata.  These  varieties  were  recog- 
nized by  Lyman  (1902)  but  not  by  Hall  (1908),  Douthitt  (1915)  or  John 
(1926).  Meggitt  (1924)  considered  the  varieties  as  synonyms  of  C.  vari- 
abilis. 

In  the  present  study  some  of  Stiles’  original  material  of  C.  variabilis 
and  97  other  specimens  of  this  species  were  studied.  Maximal  length  of 


1938J  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


41 


strobilia  was  450  mm.,  with  as  many  as  750  proglottids,  and  maximal  width 
was  10.5  mm.  The  scolex,  measuring  0.44-0.61  mm.  in  breadth,  was  typically 
set  off  from  the  neck,  although  in  a few  contracted  specimens  there  was  no 
line  of  demarcation  (Text-fig.  2).  The  suckers,  spherical  in  outline,  varied 
from  0.16-0.28  mm.  in  diameter  and  averaged  0.21  mm.  The  neck  measured 
from  0.26-0.84  mm.  in  length,  with  an  average  of  0.50  mm. 

The  female  genital  primordia  appeared  first  between  the  40th-50th  and 
their  ducts  between  the  95th-105th  segments  (Text-fig.  12).  The  follicular 
ovary  measured  from  0.48-0.71  mm.  in  width.  The  seminal  receptacle,  first 
differentiated  at  about  the  160th  segment,  lay  median  to  the  longitudinal 
excretory  canal,  with  its  proximal  end  near  the  ovarian  complex.  Near  its 
origin,  the  oviduct  was  joined  by  the  duct  from  the  seminal  receptacle  and 
the  combined  duct  received  shortly  those  from  the  yolk  and  shell  glands. 
The  tubular  uterus  then  proceeded  to  the  saccular  uterus  which  was  either 
single  or  double.  The  opening  of  the  vagina  was  immediately  below  that  of 
the  cirrus  sac.  The  ova  ranged  from  52-68  /x  in  diameter,  with  an  average 
of  64  /x  (Text-fig.  18). 

The  first  appearance  of  the  male  genital  primordia  was  thought  to  be  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  125th  proglottid,  although  their  ducts  were  not  located 
definitely  until  the  175th.  The  testes  were  confined  between  the  two  ovaries 
in  the  distal  half  of  the  segment.  They  numbered  between  60-135  and  ranged 
from  0.053-0.071  mm.  in  diameter,  with  an  average  of  0.062  mm.  The  short 
vasa  efferentia  emptied  into  the  vas  deferens  which  proceeded  to  the  highly 
convoluted  seminal  vesicle,  lying  for  the  most  part  median  to  the  longitudinal 
excretory  canal.  Distally  the  vesicle  joined  the  small  cirrus  sac  (0.32-0.45 
mm.  long,  averaging  0.38  mm.)  lying  lateral  to  the  longitudinal  excretory 
canal.  The  cirrus  sac,  testes,  ovary,  and  female  ducts  degenerate  in  ripe 
proglottids. 

From  the  above  data  the  following  diagnosis  may  be  given. 

Diagnosis : Cittotaenia  variabilis  (Stiles,  1895),  Stiles  and  Hassall, 
1896.  Mature  specimens  with  as  many  as  750  proglottids  attain  a maximal 
length  of  450  mm.  and  a maximal  breadth  of  10.5  mm.  Scolex  0.44-0.61  mm. 
in  width;  may  or  may  not  be  set  off  from  the  neck.  Suckers  0.16-0.28  mm. 
in  diameter,  average  0.21  mm.  Neck  well  defined;  length  0.26-0.84  mm., 
average  0.50  mm.  Female  genital  primordia  appear  between  the  40th-50th 
and  their  ducts  between  the  95th-105th  proglottids.  Ovary  measures  0.43- 
0.71  mm.  in  width,  with  an  average  of  0.58  mm.  Ova  52-68  /x  in  diameter, 
with  an  average  of  64  /x.  Male  genital  primordia  appear  about  the  125th 
proglottid  and  their  ducts  at  the  175th.  Testes  (60-135)  in  the  distal  half 
of  the  proglottid  between  the  two  ovaries ; diameter  0.053-0.071  mm.  Cirrus 
sac  small,  0.32-0.45  mm.  long,  lateral  to  longitudinal  excretory  canal. 

Hosts : Sylvilagus  floridanus  mallurus,  S.  floridanus  alacer  and  S. 
palustris. 

Habitat : New  York,  Maryland,  Kansas  and  Pennsylvania. 

6.  Correlation  of  Host-Parasite  Relations. 

In  the  present  survey,  179  cottontail  rabbits  were  examined.  For 
identification  the  systematic  arrangement  of  Nelson  (1909)  was  employed. 
Sylvilagus  floridanus  mallurus  was  obtained  from  New  York  and  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  S.  floridanus  alacer  from  Kansas.  Cittotaenia  variabilis  (Stiles, 
1895)  was  the  only  cestode  recovered.  The  parasites  were  usually  found 
near  the  middle  of  the  small  intestine,  although  more  anteriorly  in  a few 
cases. 

Tables  I and  II  give  the  data  on  infection  in  the  rabbits  studied. 


42  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :2 


TABLE  I.  Sylvilagus  floridanus  mallurus. 


Locality. 

No. 

Examined. 

No. 

Infected. 

% 

Infected. 

Lake  Mahopac,  N.  Y. 

3 

2 

66% 

Pinebush,  N.  Y. 

3 

1 

33% 

Carmel,  N.  Y. 

1 

1 

100 

New  York,  N.  Y. 

2 

1 

50 

Northern  New  York. 

7 

6 

85.9 

Boylesville,  Pa. 

7 

2 

28.5 

Total. 

23 

13 

56.5 

TABLE  II.  Sylvilagus  floridanus  alacer. 


Locality. 

No. 

Examined. 

No. 

Infected. 

% 

Infected. 

Wichita,  Kan. 
1932 

28 

19 

67.8 

Wichita,  Kan. 
1933 

50 

19 

38 

Wichita,  Kan. 
1934 

78 

32 

41 

Total. 

156 

70 

44.8 

Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana  (Douthitt,  1915)  is  found  only  in  hares, 
namely,  Lepus  calif ornicus  melanotis  Mearns  and  Lepus  americanus  Erx- 
leben.  Cittotaenia  perplexa  (Stiles,  1895)  and  C.  variabilis  (Stiles,  1895) 
are  found  only  in  cottontail  rabbits.  Both  species  are  present  in  Sylvilagus 
floridanus  mallurus  (Thomas)  and  Sylvilagiis  floridanus  alacer  (Bangs), 
while  only  Cittotaenia  perplexa  has  been  found  in  Sylvilagus  nuttalli  pinetis 
(Allen)  and  only  C.  variabilis  in  Sylvilagus  palustris  (Bachman). 


7.  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  from  European  Hares  and  Rabbits. 

Cittotaenia  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804). 

Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 

(Text-figs.  4,  8,  14,  20). 

C.  denticulata,  type  species  of  Cittotaenia,  was  first  described  by 
Rudolphi  as  Taenia  denticulata.  The  original  description  was  expanded  in 
later  papers  (Rudolphi,  1805,  1810).  The  same  species  was  subsequently 
described  by  Baird  (1853)  as  Taenia  goezei. 

The  next  important  work  is  that  of  Riehm  (1881a),  who  described 
this  worm  first  as  Cittotaenia  latissima,  gen.  nov.,  sp.,  nov.,  and  then  as  a 
species  of  Dipylidium.  Dipylidium  latissima  was  transferred  to  the  genus 
Taenia  by  Neumann  in  1888. 

Taenia  goezei  Baird  was  reduced  to  synonymy  with  D.  latissima  Riehm 
by  Blanchard  (1891)  on  reexamination  of  Baird’s  original  material. 

Riehm’s  D.  latissima  was  placed  in  the  genus  Ctenotaenia  by  Railliet  in 
1893. 

Stiles  and  Hassall  (1896),  upon  study  of  the  original  specimens  of 
Rudolphi’s  Taenia  denticulata,  Baird’s  Taenia  goezei,  and  Riehm’s  Dinv- 


1938]  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


43 


lidium  latissima,  declared  that  they  were  all  the  same  species  which  they 
recognized  as  Cittotaenia  denticulata.  Later  descriptions  of  C.  denticulata 
include  those  of  Stiles  (1896),  John  (1926),  Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn  (1932). 

In  the  present  study,  19  specimens  of  Cittotaenia  denticulata  were  ex- 
amined. They  ranged  from  minute,  immature  forms  to  large,  fully  matured 
cestodes  with  as  many  as  260  proglottids.  They  measured  0.149-260  mm. 
in  length  and  8.5  mm.  in  maximal  breadth  (Text-fig.  4).  The  solices  of 
the  immature  forms  (wonns  0.149-10.5  mm.  in  length)  ranged  from  0.10- 
0.50  mm.  in  width;  those  of  mature  worms  (21-260  mm.  in  length)  varied 
from  0.57-0.76  mm.  in  breadth.  The  scolex  appeared  to  be  rectangular  in 
cross  section.  There  was  a short  broad  neck,  not  previously  reported, 
which  measured  from  0.21-0.92  mm.,  depending  on  the  degree  of  contrac- 
tion. The  suckers  ranged  from  0.23-0.30  mm.  in  diameter,  averaging  0.27 
mm.  The  sucker  size  was  in  close  agreement  with  that  found  by  other 
workers. 

The  female  genital  primordia  were  first  seen  between  the  10th-15th,  and 
their  ducts  between  the  17th-40th  proglottids.  The  ovarian  follicles  were 
not  well  developed  until  the  80th-100th  proglottid  (Text-fig.  14).  The 
follicles  continued  to  increase  in  size  and  then  suddenly  disappeared  between 
the  135th-175th  segments.  The  ovary  measured  from  0.32-1.42  mm.  in  width 
and  averaged  0.97  mm.  The  disappearance  of  the  ovary  is  correlated  with 
the  presence  of  eggs  in  the  uterus  (Text-fig.  20).  The  ovaries  were  found 
in  the  posterior  two-thirds  of  the  proglottid  and  just  median  of  the  longi- 
tudinal excretory  canals.  The  oviduct  originated  about  the  middle  of  the 
ovarian  mass,  and  after  a short  distance  was  joined  by  the  short  duct  from 
the  bulbous  seminal  receptacle.  The  combined  duct  then  passed  to  the  shell 
gland,  where  it  was  joined  by  the  vitelline  duct.  The  tubular  uterus  then 
proceeded  anteriad  to  the  saccular  uterus.  The  ova  measured  from  46-75  p. 
in  diameter  and  averaged  61  p (Text-fig.  8). 

The  male  genital  primordia  were  first  seen  between  the  35th-60th,  their 
ducts,  between  the  36th-70th  proglottids.  The  testes  increased  in  number 
very  rapidly  after  the  first  appearance  of  their  primordia.  The  follicles 
extended  between  the  longitudinal  excretory  canals  and  were  scattered  be- 
tween the  anterior  and  posterior  limits  of  the  proglottid.  The  testes  totaled 
between  225  and  250,  a number  very  much  greater  than  that  previously 
recorded.  Baer  and  Sprehn  reported  that  there  were  100  testes.  Stiles  and 
John  merely  stated  that  they  were  numerous.  However,  Stiles  (1896) 
gave  a drawing  of  one-half  of  a mature  segment  of  C.  denticidata.  The 
writer  counted  the  testes  represented  in  that  half  segment  and  found  that 
there  were  124.  Since  Stiles  worked  on  the  original  material  of  Rudolphi, 
Baird  and  Riehm,  and  his  drawing  was  apparently  taken  from  that  mate- 
rial, it  seems  safe  to  assume  that  the  number  of  testes  is  nearer  225-250 
than  100.  The  vasa  efferentia  emptied  on  either  side  of  the  proglottid  into 
a vas  deferens  which  proceeded  to  the  cirrus  sac  containing  the  seminal 
vesicle  and  a large  cirrus.  The  cirrus  sac  measured  from  0.50-0.97  mm. 
and  averaged  0.77  mm.  in  length,  which  was  within  the  range  given  by 
other  workers.  The  testes  ranged  from  0.041-0.12  mm.  and  averaged  0.073 
mm.  in  diameter.  This  range  is  much  smaller  than  that  given  by  other 
authors,  but  it  is  inclusive  of  some  of  the  higher  values  found  by  others. 
The  testes  tend  to  disappear  in  ripe  proglottids. 

From  the  above  description  the  following  diagnosis  may  be  drawn. 

Diagnosis : Cittotaenia  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804)  Stiles  and  Hassall, 
1896.  Type  of  the  genus.  Mature  specimens  range  20-800  mm.  in  length, 
with  as  many  as  300  proglottids,  and  from  8-15  mm.  in  maximal  breadth. 
Scolex  0.57-1.18  mm.  wide;  0.43-1  mm.  long.  Suckers  0.2-0. 3 mm.  in 
diameter.  The  genital  primordia  appear  early.  Those  of  the  female  system 
are  found  between  the  10th-15th  proglottids,  and  their  ducts  between  the 
17th-40th  proglottids.  Ovary,  0.32-1.42  mm.  in  width,  becomes  well  devel- 


44 


Zoologica:  Nerv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


oped  at  about  the  84th-100th  and  disappears  about  the  135th-170th  seg- 
ment. Male  genital  primordia  appear  first  between  the  35th-60th  and  their 
ducts  between  the  36th-70th  segments.  Testes  range  from  225-250  in  num- 
ber in  mature  proglottids,  and  vary  between  0.041-0.12  mm.  in  diameter. 
Cirrus  sac  measures  from  0.50-1.12  mm.  in  length  and  0.26-0.3  mm.  in 
width.  Ova  measure  46-75  y in  diameter. 

Host:  Oryctolagus  cuniculus. 

Habitat:  Europe. 

C iitotaenia  ctenoides  (Riehm,  1881). 

Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 

(Text-figs.  9,  15,  21). 

Cittotaenia  ctenoides  was  first  described  as  Dipylidium  leuckarti  by 
Riehm  in  1881.  Later  it  was  transferred  to  the  genus  Taenia  by  Neumann 
(1888)  and  in  1892  it  was  replaced  in  the  genus  Dipylidium  by  the  same 
author. 

In  1890,  Railliet  changed  the  specific  name  from  Taenia  leuckarti  to 
Taenia  ctenoides.  R.  Blanchard  (1891)  placed  Dipylidium  leuckarti  Riehm 
in  the  genus  Moniezia.  Railliet  (1893)  erected  the  genus  Ctenotaenia  and 
placed  the  species  Taenia  ctenoides  in  it.  The  synonymy  of  this  genus  with 
Cittotaenia  was  pointed  out  by  Stiles  and  Hassall  (1896).  Later  accounts  of 
this  species  were  given  by  Stiles  (1896)  (who  studied  Riehm’s  type  speci- 
mens and  others  from  Blanchard’s  collection),  by  Baer  (1927),  and  by 
Sprehn  (1932). 

The  writer  examined  100  specimens  of  C.  ctenoides,  ranging  from  6-460 
mm.  in  length  and  from  1-10.5  mm.  in  width.  The  maximal  length  found 
was  less  than  that  previously  reported,  while  the  maximal  width  was  some- 
what greater.  The  scolex  was  small,  although  wider  than  the  neck  region 
and  proximal  proglottids.  It  measured  0.32-0.48  mm.  in  width  (Text-fig.  9). 
This  range  is  smaller  than  that  reported  by  Stiles,  Baer  or  Sprehn,  although 
the  higher  value  was  in  agreement.  The  suckers  measured  0.12-0.25  mm.  in 
diameter,  with  an  average  of  0.16  mm.  There  was  a short  broad  neck 
which  varied  from  0.25-0.42  mm.  and  averaged  0.32  mm.  in  length.  The 
neck  was  not  measured  by  Stiles,  and  Baer  and  Sprehn  did  not  mention  it. 
The  proglottids  reached  a number  greater  than  560.  Stiles  reported  a 
maximum  of  750  proglottids.  The  original,  terminal  10-15  proglottids,  when 
present,  were  sterile. 

The  female  genital  primordia  appeared  in  the  first  few  proglottids,  but 
their  ducts  were  not  distinct  until  the  45th-50th  segments.  A well  developed 
follicular  ovary  was  first  seen  in  the  130th-160th  segments  (Text-fig.  15). 
The  ovary  then  continued  to  develop  and  later  suddenly  disappeared  between 
the  183rd-232nd  proglottids.  This  disappearance  of  the  ovary  was  corre- 
lated with  the  presence  of  eggs  in  the  uterus.  The  ovary  measured  from 
0.40-0.88  mm.  in  width  and  averaged  0.61  mm.  The  oviduct  arose  posteriorly 
from  the  ovary  and  was  joined  almost  immediately  by  the  duct  from  the 
seminal  receptacle.  The  convoluted  oviduct  proceeded  posteriad  to  join  the 
rather  long  vitelline  duct,  in  the  shell  gland  mass.  The  tubular  uterus  then 
proceeded  anteriad  and  slightly  laterad  for  a short  distance,  where  it  en- 
larged into  the  saccular  uterus  (Text-fig.  21).  The  ova  ranged  from  62-69  y, 
and  averaged  66  y in  diameter.  This  figure  is  slightly  higher  than  those 
given  by  Stiles,  Baer,  and  Sprehn.  The  seminal  receptacle  was  not  clearly 
delimited.  The  vagina  opened  to  the  exterior  immediately  below  the 
opening  of  the  cirrus  sac.  It  proceeded  as  a small  tube  mediad  and  slightly 
posteriad  for  a short  distance  and  then  expanded  to  form  the  seminal  re- 
ceptacle. The  seminal  receptacle  gradually  narrowed  to  a duct  which 
proceeded  anteriad  and  mediad  to  join  the  oviduct. 


1938]  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


45 


The  male  genital  primordia  appeared  first  between  the  85th-100th  seg- 
ments, and  the  ducts  were  found  a few  proglottids  farther  back.  The  testes 
were  divided  into  two  groups,  one  on  either  side  of  the  proglottid,  posterior 
to  the  ovaries  and  median  to  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal.  The  testes 
numbered  from  35-75  in  each  group,  and  the  two  groups  contained  approxi- 
mately the  same  number  of  follicles.  The  number  of  testes  found  was 
less  than  that  given  previously  by  other  workers.  The  testes  varied  from 
0.046-0.081  mm.  and  averaged  0.056  mm.  in  diameter.  The  short  vasa 
efferentia  joined  the  vas  deferens  which  proceeded  anteriad  and  laterad  to 
the  cirrus  sac.  The  small  lateral  cirrus  sac,  containing  the  seminal  vesicle 
and  a well  developed  cirrus,  varied  from  0.16-0.25  mm.  in  length,  with  an 
average  of  0.23  mm.  These  measurements  are  slightly  higher  than  those 
reported  by  Stiles,  Baer  and  Sprehn. 

The  following  brief  diagnosis  is  suggested. 

Diagnosis : Cittotaenia  ctenoides  (Railliet,  1890)  Stiles  and  Hassall, 
1896.  Strobila,  of  500-750  proglottids,  may  attain  a length  of  800  mm.  and 
a maximal  breadth  of  10.5  mm.  Scolex,  0.32-0.50  mm.  wide,  is  broader  than 
the  neck  and  proximal  proglottids.  Suckers  0.12-0.25  mm.  in  diameter. 
Female  reproductive  primordia  appear  very  soon  after  segmentation  begins; 
their  ducts  at  45th-50th  segments.  Ovary,  0.40-0.88  mm.  wide,  develops 
between  130th-160th,  and  disappears  about  183rd-232nd  proglottids.  Ova 
62-69  /x  in  diameter.  Male  reproductive  primordia  appear  first  at  85th-100th 
segments  and  their  ducts  very  soon  thereafter.  Testes,  0.046-0.081  mm.  in 
diameter,  arranged  in  two  groups  (35-80  in  each).  Cirrus  sac  0.16-0.25  mm. 
long  and  0.138-0.23  mm.  wide. 

Hosts:  Oryctolagus  cuniculus  and  Oryctolagus  cuniculus  domesticus. 

Habitat:  Europe. 


Cittotaenia  pectinate  (Goeze,  1782). 

Stiles  and  Hassall,  1896. 

(Text-figs.  7,  16,  22). 

Cittotaenia  pectinata  was  first  described  by  Goeze  (1782)  as  Taenia 
pectinata  from  hares  and  wild  rabbits.  His  description  was  vague  and  in- 
adequate, and  pertained  to  material  of  more  than  one  species. 

Zeder  (1800)  transferred  the  species  to  the  genus  Alyselminthes.  His 
description  was  supposed  to  cover  T.  pectinata,  but  subsequent  workers  feel 
he  actually  studied  Andrya  rhopalocephala.  In  1803,  Zeder  placed  T.  pecti- 
nata in  the  genus  Halysis. 

Rudolphi  (1810),  Bremser  (1824),  and  Diesing  (1850)  studied  T. 
pectinata  but  their  characterizations  for  this  species  were  broad  enough  to 
include  several  species. 

Riehm  (1881)  was  the  first  to  study  the  species  in  detail.  After  recti- 
fying previous  errors,  he  placed  T.  pectinata  in  the  genus  Dipylidium.  In 
1891,  Blanchard  reported  this  species  at  Brianqon. 

The  species  was  included  in  the  genus  Ctenotaenia  by  Railliet  in  1893, 
but  Stiles  and  Hassall  (1896)  transferred  it  to  the  genus  Cittotaenia. 

Stiles  (1896)  obtained  some  of  Riehm’s  original  material  and  elabo- 
rated Riehm’s  diagnosis.  Stiles  summarized  the  works  of  previous  authors 
and  gave  a more  complete  description. 

Douthitt  (1915)  stated  that  C.  pectinata  was  found  only  in  Europe. 
This  allocation  was  followed  by  Meggitt  (1924),  John  (1926),  and  Rees 
(1933a). 

Baer  (1927)  claimed  that  C.  pectinata  was  very  extensively  distributed. 
He  considered  all  American  representatives  of  the  genus  Cittotaenia  in 


46  Zoologica : Neiv  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :2 

rabbits  to  be  Cittotaenia  pectinata.  Sprehn  (1932)  followed  Baer  in  his 
consideration  of  this  species. 

The  author  studied  29  specimens  of  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782), 
varying  from  0.97-84  mm.  in  length  and  from  0.17-8  mm.  in  maximal 
breadth.  Stiles  reported  a greater  length  than  this,  400  mm.  Blanchard 
found  a width  of  10  mm.  The  small  scolex  was  rarely  wider  than  the 
proglottids  immediately  following  it.  The  scolex  measured  from  0.20-0.35 
mm.  in  width,  with  an  average  of  0.28  mm.  (Text-fig.  7).  The  suckers  were 
set  at  an  angle  and  were  very  close  together.  They  ranged  from  0.071-0.15 
mm.  in  diameter,  with  an  average  of  0.12  mm..  The  neck  region  measured 
from  0.10-0.35  mm.  in  length  and  averaged  0.20  mm.  The  proglottids  were 
always  much  broader  than  long  and  numbered  as  high  as  190.  The  terminal 
proglottids  were  found  to  be  sterile,  an  anoplocephaline  characteristic. 

The  female  genital  primordia  appeared  by  the  8th  proglottid,  while 
their  canals  were  found  between  the  10th-15th  segments.  The  ovaries, 
measured  only  in  mature  proglottids,  ranged  from  0.21-0.67  mm.  in  width, 
with  an  average  of  0.48  mm.  (Text-fig.  16).  The  ovary  developed  steadily 
from  the  primordial  stage  to  that  found  in  fully  mature  proglottids,  and 
then  disappeared  rather  abruptly  between  the  75th-150th  proglottids.  The 
follicles  of  the  ovary  were  not  well  developed  until  the  45th-60th  proglottids. 
The  oviduct  arose  medially  from  within  the  mass  of  the  ovary  and  then 
proceeded  anteriad.  Within  a short  distance  it  joined  the  duct  from  the 
seminal  receptacle.  The  oviduct  then  proceeded  posteriad  and  soon  met  the 
ducts  from  the  vitelline  and  shell  glands.  The  convoluted  tubular  uterus 
passed  anteriad  to  meet  the  saccular  uterus  near  its  posterior  limits.  The 
uterus  was  either  double  or  the  two  uteri  became  confluent  in  the  middle 
of  the  segment  to  form  a single  continuous  one.  The  former  type  was  the 
one  commonly  encountered  (Text-fig.  22).  The  ova  ranged  from  62-67  g 
in  diameter  and  averaged  65  g. 

The  male  and  female  reproductive  systems  opened  to  the  exterior  by  a 
common  genital  pore,  or  by  two  pores  which  were  situated  exceedingly  close 
together.  The  vagina  opened  to  the  exterior  below  the  cirrus  sac,  or  into 
the  cirrus  sac  just  at  its  opening  to  the  outside.  The  latter  condition 
seemed  the  more  common.  The  vagina  soon  expanded  into  the  seminal 
receptacle,  a large,  thin-walled  structure,  which  was  closely  applied  to  the 
cirrus  sac  and  seminal  vesicle.  Medially,  the  seminal  receptacle  became  a 
duct  that  led  to  the  oviduct. 

The  male  genital  primordia  first  appeared  between  the  25th-45th 
proglottids,  or  1.4-5. 6 mm.  from  the  anterior  end,  and  the  male  ducts  be- 
tween the  27th-47th  segments.  The  testes,  in  mature  proglottids,  ranged 
from  80-160  in  number,  and  averaged  130.  They  lay  along  the  posterior 
border  of  the  proglottid,  between  the  longitudinal  excretory  canals,  below 
the  distal  half  of  the  ovary.  They  measured  from  0.043-0.077  mm.  in 
diameter,  with  an  average  of  0.06  mm.  The  vasa  efferentia  emptied  shortly 
into  the  vas  deferens,  which  proceeded  to  join  the  seminal  vesicle  near 
the  anterior  end  of  the  proglottid.  The  seminal  vesicle  was  much  con- 
voluted, and  medial  to  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal.  The  glandular 
cells  of  the  pars  prostatica  surrounded  the  seminal  vesicle.  The  cirrus  sac 
was  thick-walled,  muscular  and  contained  a well  developed  cirrus.  The 
cirrus  sac  ranged  from  0.36-1.03  mm.  in  length  and  averaged  0.69  mm.  The 
cirrus  sac  and  the  seminal  vesicle  lay  at  a slight  angle,  and  the  genital  pores 
(one  on  either  side  of  the  segment)  were  situated  in  the  posterior  half 
of  the  proglottid. 

From  the  literature  and  the  study  of  both  whole  mounts  and  sections, 
the  specific  diagnosis,  given  below,  has  been  derived. 

Diagnosis'.  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782)  Stiles  and  Hassall, 
1896.  Mature  specimens  400  mm.  long  and  10  mm.  wide.  Scolex  0.20-0.35 
mm.  wide.  Broad,  short  neck  measures  0.10-0.15  mm.  in  diameter.  Female 


1938]  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


47 


genital  primordia  appear  by  8th  segment,  their  ducts,  by  10th-15th  segment. 
Ovary,  0.21-0.67  mm.  wide,  disappears  between  75th-150th  segments.  Ova 
54-90  /x  in  diameter.  Male  genital  primordia  appear  first  between  the  25th- 
45th,  their  ducts  between  27th-47th  segments.  Testes,  80-160  in  number, 
0.043-0.077  mm.  in  diameter,  lying  in  distal  half  of  proglottid,  extend  from 
one  longitudinal  excretory  canal  to  other.  Cirrus  sac,  0.36-1.03  mm.  in 
length,  extends  mediad  beyond  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal. 

Hosts:  Oryctolagus  cuniculus,  Lepus  europaeus,  Lepus  timidus,  Lepus 
variabilis  and  Marmota  marmota. 

Habitat : Asia  and  Europe  (Germany,  France  and  England). 


Andrya  euniculi  (R.  Blanchard,  1891). 

Railliet,  1893. 

(Text-figs.  5,  17,  23). 

Andrya  euniculi,  first  described  by  Riehm  (1881)  as  Taenia  rhopalioce- 
phala,  was  placed  in  the  genus  Anoplocephala  in  1891  by  Blanchard  when  he 
changed  the  specific  name  to  euniculi.  In  regard  to  this  transfer,  he  stated : 

“A.  euniculi  R.  Blanchard,  1891  ( Taenia  pectinata  Goze,  1782,  pro  parte; 
T.  rhopaliocephala  Riehm,  1881). — Chez  le  Lapin  de  garenne.  Le  nom  pro- 
pose par  Riehm  ne  peut  pas  etre  conserve,  en  raison  de  son  identite  avec  le 
nom  de  Taenia  rhopalocephala;  ce  dernier  seul  est  valable : il  a la  priorite, 
puisque  la  ver  auquel  il  s’applique  est  decrit  par  Riehm  quelques  pages  avant 
le  Taenia  rhopaliocephala  (3),  et  d’ailleurs  est  le  seul  dont  le  nom  soit 
correctment  forme.” 

Railliet  (1893)  erected  the  genus  Andrya  to  contain  A.  rhopalocephala 
and  A.  euniculi.  Stiles  (1896)  restudied  Riehm’s  original  material  and  gave 
his  own  characterization  of  this  species.  He  stated  that  he  has  never  recov- 
ered this  parasite  from  rabbits  in  North  America.  Douthitt  (1915)  and 
Meggitt  (1924)  both  recognized  this  species  as  valid,  but  gave  no  further 
characterization  of  it.  Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn  (1932)  studied  this  form, 
but  gave  nothing  new  in  their  monographs. 

The  present  writer  studied  38  specimens  of  Andrya  euniculi.  They 
ranged  from  13-325  mm.  in  length.  The  maximal  breadth  obtained  was 
3.5  mm.  These  measurements  were  only  about  one-third  the  maximum  length 
and  width  previously  reported.  The  scolex  was  large,  varying  from  0.40- 
0.67  mm.  in  diameter.  It  was  definitely  set  off  from  a well  differentiated 
neck  (Text-fig.  5).  The  latter  measured  from  0.80-1.42  mm.  in  length.  The 
large  suckers  ranged  from  0.16-0.30  mm.  in  diameter,  with  an  average  of 
0.25  mm.  The  immature  segments  were  much  broader  than  long,  while  the 
mature  proglottids  tended  toward  a quadrate  condition.  The  segments 
numbered  as  many  as  500.  Stiles  (1896)  reported  them  to  be  as  many 
as  800.  He  undoubtedly  had  more  mature  specimens  than  were  studied  in 
this  survey.  The  original  2-7  terminal  proglottids  were  sterile. 

The  reproductive  organs  were  single.  Their  genital  openings  were  ir- 
regularly alternate  on  right  and  left  lateral  margins  (Text-fig.  17),  but 
opened  more  often  on  one  side  than  on  the  other,  as  previously  observed  by 
Stiles.  The  female  genital  primordia  appeared  first  about  the  5th-10th  prog- 
lottids, and  their  ducts  between  the  95th-110th  segments.  The  ovarian  fol- 
licles were  not  well  developed  until  the  225th-275th  proglottids.  The  ovary 
measured  from  0.43-0.50  mm.  in  width,  and  was  median  or  on  the  poral 
side  of  the  segment.  The  vagina  was  distal  to  the  cirrus  sac  and  its  openings. 
It  extended  mediad  to  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal  and  enlarged  into 
the  seminal  receptacle.  The  latter  extended  to  the  ovarian  mass,  where  it 
joined  the  oviduct.  The  latter  duct,  upon  uniting  with  the  yolk  and  shell 
glands,  gave  rise  to  the  uterus  (Text-fig.  23).  Stiles  (1896)  stated  that  the 


48 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


latter  was  characteristically  a network  structure.  The  ova  measured  from 
49-57  /x  in  diameter,  which  was  within  the  range  given  by  Stiles  (1896). 

The  male  genital  primordia  were  first  evident  about  the  45th  segment, 
and  their  ducts  at  the  110th  segment.  The  testes  extended  between  the 
two  longitudinal  excretory  canals,  and  the  anterior  and  posterior  limits  of 
the  proglottid.  They  practically  surrounded  the  ovary,  although  they  were 
more  predominantly  distributed  on  the  side  opposite  the  genital  pore.  They 
numbered  between  70-90  and  varied  from  0.049-0.065  mm.  in  diameter.  The 
vasa  efferentia  very  soon  joined  the  vas  deferens.  Just  before  the  latter 
emptied  into  the  cirrus  sac,  it  united  with  the  pars  prostatica.  The  cirrus 
sac  was  club-shaped,  extended  mediad  of  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal 
and  contained  a definite  seminal  vesicle.  The  cirrus  sac  measured  from 
0.27-0.43  mm.  in  length.  This  range  is  lower  than  that  given  by  Stiles,  but 
may  be  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  specimens  used  in  this  study  were  not 
as  mature  (long)  as  those  used  by  Stiles.  There  seemed  to  be  a tendency 
for  the  formation  of  a genital  papilla,  which  contained  both  male  and 
female  genital  openings. 

Summarizing  the  above  surveys,  the  following  diagnosis  is  derived. 

Diagnosis : Andrya  cuniculi  (R.  Blanchard,  1891)  Railliet,  1893. 

Mature  specimens,  with  as  many  as  800  segments,  1,000  mm.  long  and  8 mm. 
wide.  Scolex  0.4-0.67  mm.  wide.  Well  differentiated  neck,  0.80-1.42  mm. 
long.  Suckers  0.16-0.30  mm.  in  diameter,  with  an  average  of  0.25  mm. 
Female  genital  primordia  appear  first  in  5th-10th  and  their  ducts  in  95th- 
110th  proglottids.  Ovary  0.43-0.50  mm.  wide.  Ova  49-57  y in  diameter. 
Male  genital  primordia  appear  first  in  about  45th  proglottid  and  their 
ducts  in  110th.  Testes  in  median  field,  70-90  per  segment,  varying  from 
0.049-0.065  mm.  in  diameter.  Cirrus  sac,  0.27-0.8  mm.  long,  extends  mediad 
of  the  longitudinal  excretory  canal. 

Hosts:  Lepus  timidus  and  Oryctolagus  cuniculus. 

Habitat : Europe. 


8.  Comparison  of  European  and  American  Anoplocephalidae  of  Rabbits. 

The  members  of  the  Anoplocephalidae  from  North  American  rabbits 
show  constant  differences  from  those  of  European  rabbits. 

Schizotaenia  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  and  Andrya  cuniculi  (R.  Blan- 
chard, 1891)  are  immediately  distinguished  from  the  several  species  of 
rabbit  cestodes  of  the  genus  Cittotaenia  by  the  fact  that  they  possess  only 
one  set  of  genital  organs  to  a proglottid.  S.  americana  differs  from  A. 
cuniculi  in  regularity  of  alternation  of  the  genital  pores,  length  and  width 
of  body,  lack  of  neck,  number  of  proglottids,  size  of  ovary,  first  appearance 
of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  and  number  of  testes. 

Cittotaenia  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804)  differs  from  C.  ctenoides 
(Railliet,  1890)  in  size  of  scolex,  number  of  proglottids,  earliest  appear- 
ance of  female  genital  ducts,  position  of  ovarian  maturity  and  disappear- 
ance, first  indication  of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  number  of  testes 
and  their  distribution,  and  size  of  cirrus  sac.  It  is  unlike  C.  pectinata 
(Goeze,  1782)  in  maximal  length,  number  of  proglottids,  first  appearance 
of  female  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  position  of  ovarian  maturity,  number 
and  distribution  of  testes,  and  location  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  perplexa  (Stiles, 
1895)  is  different  from  C.  denticulata  in  maximal  length,  size  of  scolex, 
diameter  of  sucker,  number  of  proglottids,  appearance  of  ovarian  follicles, 
number  and  distribution  of  testes,  and  location  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  denti- 
culata is  dissimilar  to  C.  pectinata  americana  Douthitt,  1915,  in  maximal 
length,  maximal  width,  size  of  scolex,  size  of  sucker,  number  and  distribu- 
tion of  testes,  and  position  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  denticulata  is  unlike  C.  varia- 
bilis  (Stiles,  1895)  in  maximal  length  and  width,  size  of  neck,  number  of 


1938]  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits  49 

proglottids,  position  of  genital  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male  and 
female  reproductive  systems,  number  and  distribution  of  testes,  and  size 
of  cirrus  sac. 

C.  ctenoides  is  unlike  C.  denticulata  in  scolex  size,  sucker  diameter, 
proglottid  number,  first  indication  of  female  reproductive  ducts,  site  of 
ovarian  maturity  and  disappearance,  earliest  appearance  of  male  genital 
primordia  and  ducts,  number  and  distribution  of  testes,  and  size  of  cirrus 
sac.  C.  ctenoides  differs  from  C.  pectinata  in  maximal  length,  number  of 
proglottids,  first  indication  of  female  ducts,  ovarian  maturity  and  disap- 
pearance, location  of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  distribution  of 
testes,  and  length  and  position  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  perplexa  is  distinct  from 
C.  ctenoides  in  maximal  length,  size  of  suckers,  number  of  proglottids,  site 
of  female  genital  duct  appearance,  maturity  and  disappearance  of  ovary, 
first  appearance  of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  and  size  of  cirrus  sac. 
C.  ctenoides  is  dissimilar  to  C.  pectinata  americana  in  maximal  length  and 
width,  size  of  scolex,  number  of  proglottids,  first  indications  of  female 
genital  primordia,  first  appearance  of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts, 
maturity  and  disappearance  of  ovary,  distribution  and  size  of  testes,  and 
position  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  variabilis  is  different  from  C.  ctenoides  in 
maximal  length,  appearance  of  genital  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male 
and  female  reproductive  systems,  distribution  of  testes,  and  length  and 
position  of  cirrus  sac. 

C.  pectinata  differs  from  C.  denticulata  in  maximal  length,  scolex  width, 
sucker  diameter,  number  of  proglottids,  location  of  ovarian  maturity,  testes 
number  and  distribution,  and  cirrus  sac  size.  C.  pectinata  is  unlike  C. 
ctenoides  in  maximal  size,  number  of  proglottids,  time  of  appearance  of 
genital  primordia  and  of  ducts  of  both  male  and  female  reproductive  sys- 
tems, maturity  and  disintegration  of  ovary,  distribution  of  testes  and  size 
and  location  of  cirrus  sac.  The  comparison  of  C.  pectinata  with  the  next 
three  American  species  is  of  especial  interest,  since  Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn 
(1932)  considered  them  identical  with  C.  pectinata.  The  latter  is  distinct 
from  C.  perplexa  in  maximal  length,  first  appearance  of  female  genital 
primordia  and  their  ducts,  site  of  first  ovarian  follicular  development,  and 
distribution  of  testes  in  mature  proglottids.  C.  pectinata  has  a variant  in 
C.  pectinata  americana  but  differs  from  it  in  maximal  length  and  breadth 
and  number  of  proglottids.  C.  pectinata  is  unlike  C.  variabilis  in  size  of 
scolex,  length  of  neck,  size  of  suckers,  number  of  proglottids,  appearance 
of  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male  and  female  reproductive  systems,  dis- 
tribution of  testes,  and  length  and  location  of  cirrus  sac. 

C.  perplexa  differs  from  C.  denticulata  in  maximal  length,  scolex  width, 
sucker  diameter,  proglottid  count,  site  of  earliest  complete  follicular  develop- 
ment and  disintegration,  testes  number  and  distribution,  and  cirrus  sac 
location.  C.  perplexa  is  different  from  C.  ctenoides  in  maximal  length, 
sucker  size,  number  of  proglottids,  first  appearance  of  female  genital 
canals,  location  of  ovarian  follicular  maturity  and  disappearance,  earliest 
appearance  of  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  and  cirrus  sac  position. 
C.  perplexa  is  unlike  C.  pectinata  in  maximal  length,  earliest  appearance  of 
female  genital  primordia  and  their  ducts,  location  of  first  ovarian  follicular 
development,  and  distribution  of  testes  in  mature  segments.  C.  perplexa  is 
dissimilar  to  C.  pectinata  americana  in  maximal  length  and  breadth,  maxi- 
mal number  of  proglottids,  earliest  appearance  of  female  ducts,  first  ap- 
pearance of  the  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts,  testes  distribution,  and 
cirrus  sac  characteristics.  C.  perplexa  is  distinct  from  C.  variabilis  in 
maximal  length,  scolex  size,  length  of  neck,  sucker  size,  number  of  proglot- 
tids, place  of  appearance  of  genital  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male  and 
female  reproductive  systems,  distribution  of  testes,  and  size  and  location 
of  cirrus  sac. 

C.  pectinata  americana  is  unlike  C.  denticulata  in  maximal  length,  size 
of  scolex  and  suckers,  number  of  proglottids,  number  and  distribution  of 


50 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


testes,  and  cirus  sac  characteristics.  C.  pectinata  americana  differs  from 
C.  ctenoides  in  maximal  length  and  breadth,  number  of  proglottids,  first 
appearance  of  female  genital  ducts,  first  appearance  of  male  genital  primor- 
dia  and  ducts,  site  of  ovarian  maturity  and  disappearance,  testes  distribu- 
tion, and  cirrus  sac  size  and  position.  C.  pectinata  is  different  from  C.  pecti- 
nata americana,  its  variety,  in  maximal  length  and  breadth,  and  number  of 
proglottids.  C.  pectinata  americana  is  unlike  C.  perplexa  in  maximal  length 
and  breadth,  number  of  proglottids,  first  appearance  of  genital  primordia 
and  ducts  of  both  male  and  female  reproductive  systems,  testes  distribu- 
tion, and  cirrus  sac  size.  C.  pectinata  americana  is  distinct  from  C.  varia- 
bilis  in  maximal  length  and  breadth,  size  of  scolex,  number  of  proglottids, 
first  appearance  of  genital  primordia  and  of  ducts  of  both  male  and  female 
reproductive  systems,  testes  distribution,  and  cirrus  sac  size  and  position. 

C.  variabilis  is  divergent  from  C.  denticulata  in  maximal  length,  length 
of  neck,  number  of  proglottids,  appearance  of  genital  primordia  and  of  ducts 
of  both  male  and  female  reproductive  systems,  number  and  distribution  of 
testes,  and  size  of  cirrus  sac.  C.  ctenoides  is  distinct  from  C.  variabilis  in 
maximal  length,  length  of  neck,  earliest  appearance  of  male  and  female 
genital  primordia  and  ducts,  testes,  distribution,  and  cirrus  sac  size.  C. 
variabilis  is  dissimilar  to  C.  pectinata  in  scolex  width,  length  of  neck,  sucker 
size,  segment  count,  appearance  of  male  and  female  genital  primordia  and 
ducts,  testes  distribution,  and  cirrus  sac  length.  C.  variabilis  is  unlike 
C.  perplexa  in  maximal  length,  size  of  scolex,  length  of  neck,  size  of  suckers, 
site  of  appearance  of  genital  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male  and  female 
reproductive  systems,  distribution  of  testes,  and  length  of  position  of 
cirrus  sac.  C.  variabilis  is  unlike  C.  pectinata  americana  in  maximal  length 
and  breadth,  width  of  scolex,  number  of  proglottids,  earliest  appearance  of 
genital  primordia  and  ducts  of  both  male  and  female  reproductive  systems, 
distribution  of  testes,  and  size  and  position  of  cirrus  sac. 


9.  Key  to  Species. 

Contrary  to  the  findings  of  Baer  (1927)  and  Sprehn  (1932),  the  ano- 
plocephaline  species  of  leporine  cestodes  in  North  America  and  Europe  are 
separate  and  distinct.  Representatives  of  three  genera  of  the  Anoploce- 
phalidae  have  been  found  in  hares  and  rabbits.  The  genus  Schizotaenia 
Janicki,  1906,  is  represented  by  S.  americana  (Stiles,  1895)  and  this  species 
is  found  only  in  North  America.  The  genus  Andrya  Railliet,  1893,  is  repre- 
sented by  A.  cuniculi  (R.  Blanchard,  1891)  and  is  found  only  in  Europe. 
Finally  the  genus  Cittotaenia  Riehm,  1881,  has  members  in  both  North 
America  and  Europe  and  contains  six  species.  They  include  C.  denticulata 
(Rudolphi,  1804),  C.  ctenoides  (Railliet,  1890),  and  C.  pectinata  (Goeze, 
1782),  all  found  in  Europe,  and  C.  perplexa  (Stiles,  1895),  C.  variabilis 
(Stiles,  1895),  and  C.  pectinata  americana  Douthitt,  1915,  all  found  in 
North  America.  C.  pectinata  and  C.  pectinata  americana  are  parasitic  prin- 
cipally in  hares  ( Lepus ),  whereas  the  other  species  of  Cittotaenia  occur 
chiefly  in  rabbits  ( Oryctolagus  and  Sylvilagus) . 

The  Anoplocephalidae  of  rabbits  may  be  distinguished  by  the  following 

key: 

1.  (2)  Two  sets  of  reproductive  organs  to  a segment.  (5) 

2.  (1)  One  set  of  reproductive  organs  to  a segment.  (3) 

3.  (4)  Genital  pores  alternating  regularly  to  right  and  left  lateral  margins. 

Schizotaenia  americana. 

4.  (3)  Genital  pores  alternating  irregularly  to  right  and  left  lateral  mar- 

gins. Andrya  cuniculi. 

5.  (6)  Cirrus  sac  extending  medial  of  longitudinal  excretory  canal.  (10). 

6.  (5)  Cirrus  sac  lying  lateral  of  longitudinal  excretory  canal.  (7). 


1938J  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


51 


7.  (8)  Maximal  number  of  proglottids — 300;  first  appearance  of  female 

genital  ducts  between  17th-40th  proglottids;  earliest  indication  of 
male  genital  primordia  and  ducts  from  the  35th-60th  and  36th-70th 
proglottids,  respectively.  Cittotaenia  denticulata. 

8.  (9)  Maximal  number  of  proglottids — 750;  first  appearance  of  female 

genital  ducts  between  45th-50th  segments;  first  indication  of  male 
genital  primordia  and  ducts  between  75th-100th  and  76th-105th 
proglottids,  respectively.  Cittotaenia  ctenoides. 

9.  (7)  Maximal  number  of  proglottids — 750;  female  ducts  indicated  first 

between  the  95th-105th  segments;  male  genital  primordia  and  ducts 
originating  at  125th-175th  proglottids,  respectively;  well  defined 
neck  present.  Cittotaenia  variabilis. 

10.  (11)  Cirrus  sac  just  barely  crossing  longitudinal  excretory  canal,  and 

with  a maximal  length  of  0.64  mm.;  maximal  body  length,  100  mm. 

Cittotaenia  perplexa. 

11.  (12)  Cirrus  sac  extending  considerably  mediad  of  excretory  canal,  and 

with  a maximal  length  of  1.03  mm. ; proglottids  up  to  190 ; maximal 
body  length,  400  mm.  Cittotaenia  pectinata. 

12.  (10)  Cirrus  sac  extending  much  mediad  of  longitudinal  excretory  canal; 

cirrus  sac  with  a maximal  length  of  1.8  mm.;  proglottid  number, 
more  than  360;  maximal  body  length,  220  mm. 

Cittotaenia  pectinata  americana. 


10.  Literature  Cited. 

Baer,  J.  G. 

1927.  Monographic  des  Cestodes  de  la  Famille  des  Anoplocephalidae.  Sup- 
plements a u Bulletin  Biologique  de  France  et  de  Belgique,  Suppl.  X., 
4 pis. 

Baird,  W. 

1853.  Catalogue  of  the  species  of  Entozoa  or  Intestinal  Worms  contained  in 
the  Collection  of  the  British  Museum.  London.  132  pp. 

Blanchard,  R. 

1891.  Notices  Helminthologique.  (Deuxieme  serie.)  Mem.  de  la  Soc.  Zool.  de 
France.  IV:  420-489;  figs.  1-38. 

Boughton,  R.  V. 

1932.  The  Influence  of  Helminth  Parasitism  on  the  Abundance  of  the  Snow- 
shoe  Rabbit  in  Western  Canada.  Can.  Jour.  Res.,  7 : 524-547. 

Bremser,  J.  G. 

1824.  leones  Helminthum  Systema  Rudolphii  Entozoologicum  illustrantes. 
Viennae. 

Cohn,  L. 

1906.  Zur  Anatomie  zweier  Cestoden.  Centralbl.  f.  Bakt.  1,  Abt.,  orig.,  40: 
362-367. 

Curtice,  C. 

1888.  Early  stages  in  the  life  of  Taenia  pectinata.  Science,  March  23,  1888. 

1892.  Parasites.  Jour.  Comp.  Med.  & Vet.  Arch.,  13:  New  York;  223-236. 

Diesing,  K.  M. 

1850.  Systema  Helminthum.  Vol.  1.  Vindobonae.  679  pp. 

1856.  Neunzehn  Arten  von  Trematoden.  Kenkschriften  d.  k.  Akad.  d. 
Wissensch.  mathem.  Naturw.  CI.  X.  Bd. 


52 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :2 


Douthitt,  H. 

1915.  Studies  on  the  Cestode  Family  Anoplocephalidae.  Illinois  Biol.  Monogr., 
1:  351-446;  6 pis. 

Fuhrmann,  O. 

1907.  Die  Systematik  der  Ordnung  der  Cyclophyllidea.  Zool.  Anz.,  32: 
289-297. 

1931.  Kiikenthal-Krumbach-Handbuch  der  Zoologie,  Cestoidea.  Walter  De 
Gruyter  Co.,  Berlin  and  Leipzig,  141-416. 

Goeze,  J.  A.  E. 

1782.  Versuch  einer  Naturgeschichte  der  Eingeweidewiirmer  thierischer 
Korper.  Blankenburg,  471  pp.,  35  pis. 

Hall,  M.  C. 

1908.  A new  rabbit  cestode,  Cittotaenia  mosaica.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  34: 
691-699. 

1912.  The  Parasite  Fauna  of  Colorado.  Col.  Coll.  Pub.,  Sci.  Ser.,  12,  no.  10 

Janicki,  C.  von. 

1906.  Studien  an  Saugetiercestoden.  Zeitschr.  f.  wiss.  Zool.,  81 : 505-597. 

John,  D.  D. 

1926.  On  Cittotaenia  denticulata  (Rudolphi,  1804),  with  Notes  as  to  the 
Occurrence  of  other  Helminthic  Parasites  of  Rabbits  Found  in  the 
Aberystwyth  Area.  Parasit.,  18:  436-454;  4 figs. 

Kholodkovsky,  N.  A. 

1902.  Contribution  a la  Connaissance  des  Tenias  des  Ruminants.  Arch. 
Parasit.,  6:  145-148. 

Leidy,  J. 

1855.  Notices  on  some  Tapeworms.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  7 : 433. 

Lyman,  R.  A. 

1902.  Studies  on  the  genus  Cittotaenia.  Trans.  Amer.  Micro.  Soc.  23:  173-190. 

Meggitt,  F.  J. 

1924.  The  Cestodes  of  Mammals.  282  pp.  Pub.  Edward  Goldston,  London. 

Nelson,  E.  W. 

1909.  The  Rabbits  of  North  America.  U.  S.  Dept,  of  Agri.,  314  pp.,  13  pis. 

Neumann,  L.  G. 

1888.  Traite  des  maladies  parasitaires  non  microbiennes  des  animaux 
domestiques.  Paris.  673  pp.,  306  figs. 

1892.  Traite  des  maladies  parasitares,  etc.,  Paris  2 ed.  767  pp.,  364  figs. 

Railliet,  A. 

1890.  Les  parasites  de  nos  animaux  domestiques.  Rev.  d.  sc.  nat.  appliq.  Paris. 
Tome  XXXVII:  745-756. 

1892.  Une  nouvelle  affection  parasitaire  du  lievre  et  du  lapin  de  garenne.  Rev. 
d.  sc.  nat.  appliq.,  Paris.  Tome  XXXVII : 345-352. 

1893.  Traite  d.  zool.  med.  et  agric.  1 : 283. 

Rees,  F.  G. 

1933a.  Studies  on  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782)  from  the  common  rab- 
bit, Oryctolagus  cuniculus.  Part  I.  Anatomy  and  histology.  Proc.  Zool. 
Soc.  London  (1933)  : 239-252  (Plates  I-V) 

1933b.  Studies  on  Cittotaenia  pectinata  (Goeze,  1782)  from  the  common  rab- 
bit, Oryctolagus  cuniculus.  Part  II.  Developmental  changes  in  the  egg, 
and  attempts  at  direct  infestation.  Idem.  (1933)  : 253-257.  (Plates 
MI). 


1938J  Arnold:  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes  of  N.  Amer.  Rabbits 


53 


Riehm,  G. 

1881.  Utersuchungen  an  den  Bandwiirmern  der  Hasen  und  Kaninchen. 

Zeitschr.  f.  ges.  Naturwiss.  3 ser.,  VI : 200. 

1881a.  Studien  an  Cestoden.  Zeitschr.  f.  d.  ges.  Naturwiss.  Bd.  6:  545-610. 

Rudolphi,  C.  A. 

1804.  Bemerkungen  aus  dem  Gebiet  der  Naturgeschichte,  Medizin  und 
Thierarzneykunde,  auf  einer  Reise  durch  einen  Theil  von  Deutschland, 
Holland  und  Frankreich.  1 Th.  Berlin. 

1805.  Id.  2 Th.  Berlin. 

1810.  Entozoorum  sive  vermium  intestinalium  historia  naturalis.  Vol.  II,  pt. 
2,  Amstelaedami. 

Sprehn,  C.  E.  W. 

1932.  Lehrbuch  der  Helminthologie.  996  pp.  374  figs.  Pub.  Borntraeger 
Brudern. 

Stiles,  C.  W. 

1895.  Notes  on  Parasites.  Vet.  Mag.  II:  341-346. 

1896.  A Revision  of  the  Adult  Tapeworms  of  Hares  and  Rabbits.  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.  19:  145-235;  25  pis. 

Stiles,  C.  W.  and  Hassall,  A. 

1896.  Notes  on  Parasites.  Vet.  Mag.  Ill : 6-9. 

1896.  Notes  on  Parasites.  Vet.  Mag.  Ill:  407. 

1902.  Bertiella,  a new  name  for  the  cestode  genus  Bertia  Blanchard,  1891. 
Science,  n.  s.  16:  434. 

1902-1912.  Index-Catalogue  of  Medical  and  Veterinary  Zoology.  Authors’ 
Index.  Bur.  An.  Ind.  Bull.  39. 

1912.  Index-Catalogue  of  Medical  and  Veterinary  Zoology.  Subjects:  Cestode 
Cestodaria.  Hyg.  Lab.  Bull.  85. 

Stunkard,  H.  W. 

1934.  Studies  on  the  Life-History  of  Anoplocephaline  Cestodes.  Zeit.  f. 
Parasitenk.,  6:  481-507. 

Zeder,  J.  G.  H. 

1800.  Erster  Nachtrag  zur  Naturgeschichte  der  Eingeweidewurmer.  Leipzig. 
320  pp.,  6 pis. 

1803.  Anleitung  zur  Naturgeschichte  der  Eingeweidewurmer.  432  pp*.,  4 
pis.  Bamberg. 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


55 


3. 

The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.  XIII.  Penaeidae  from  the 
Region  of  Lower  California  and  Clarion  Island, 
with  Descriptions  of  Four  New  Species.1 

Martin  D.  Burkenroad 

Bingham  Oceanographic  Laboratory, 

Yale  University. 

(Text-figures  1-34). 

[Note:  This  is  the  thirteenth  of  a series  of  papers  dealing  with  the  specimens 
collected  on  the  Twenty-fourth  or  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Tropical  Research  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society;  William  Beebe, 
Director.  For  data  on  dredges,  localities,  dates,  etc.,  concerning  the  capture  of 
specimens  treated  in  this  paper,  refer  to  the  Volume  XXII  of  Zoologica,  No.  2 
pp.  33  to  46.  Unless  otherwise  noted  the  catalogue  and  station  numbers  referred 
to  relate  to  the  above-mentioned  expedition.] 


Contents. 

Page 


Introduction  56 

1.  Gennadas  sordidus  Kemp 57 


Female  described  and  placed  in  key  to  genus;  from  Pacific  America, 
new  record. 


2.  Gennadas  scutatus  Bouvier 59 

From  Pacific  America,  new  record. 

3.  Hymenopenaeus  doris  (Faxon) 60 

Semi-nektonic  habit. 


4.  Solenocera  mutator,  sp.  nov 61 

Described. 

5.  Solenocera  florea,  sp.  nov 64 

Described. 


6.  Penaeus  calif orniensis  Holmes 67 

Resurrected  and  differentiated  from  P.  brevirostris  Kingsley. 

7.  Penaeopsis  kishinouyei  (Rathbun) 72 

Described;  from  Revillagigedo  Islands,  new  record. 

8.  Penaeopsis  beebei,  sp.  nov 74 

Described. 


1 Contribution  No.  550,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society. 


56 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


Page 


9.  Penaeopsis  mineri  Burkenroad 77 

Seminal  receptacles  described. 

10.  Trachypeneus  similis  pacificus  Burkenroad 78 

11.  Trachypeneus  brevisuturae  Burkenroad 79 

Female  described;  from  Lower  California,  new  record. 

12.  Eusicyonia  disparri  Bux-kenroad 80 

Male  described. 

13.  Eusicyonia  disedwardsi  Burkenroad 82 

Female  described. 

14.  Eusicyonia  penicillata  (Lockington) 83 

Juveniles  described. 

15.  Eusicyonia  aliaffinis  Burkenroad 84 

16.  Eusicyonia  species  84 

Possible  intergradation  with  E.  aliaffinis  and  E.  affinis  Faxon. 

17.  Eusicyonia  picta  (Faxon) 87 

Compared  with  E.  stimpsoni  (Bouvier). 

18.  Eusicyonia  disdorsalis  Burkenroad 87 

From  Lower  California,  new  record. 

19.  Eusicyonia  ingentis,  sp.  nov 88 

Described. 

Literature  Cited  90 


Introduction. 

Of  the  seventeen  or  eighteen  species  of  Penaeidae  represented  in  the 
present  collection,  more  than  half  were  previously  known  more  or  less  in- 
completely if  at  all.  There  are  no  less  than  five  species  in  the  collection 
which  have  not  heretofore  been  recorded  from  Pacific  America,  of  which 
three  are  new  to  science;  in  addition  the  material  aids  in  the  resurrection 
of  a named  species  not  generally  recognized  as  valid  and  in  the  completion 
of  descriptions  of  five  species  hitherto  known  only  from  juveniles  or  from 
a single  sex,  and  also  assists  in  the  recognition  as  a new  species  of  one  form 
not  included  in  the  collection.  That  so  large  a part  of  the  gathering  is  of 
the  ultimate  in  systematic  value  is  a tribute  not  only  to  the  surprising  rich- 
ness of  the  region  but  to  the  capacity  of  those  by  whom  the  material  was 
obtained.  I am  deeply  indebted  to  Dr.  William  Beebe,  the  Director  of  the 
Expedition,  and  to  his  associates,  for  so  valuable  an  opportunity  to  continue 
a study  of  the  Pacific  American  peneids. 

In  a previous  paper  (Burkenroad,  1936,  p.  6),  it  was  stated  that 
whereas  the  littoral  peneids  of  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  coasts  of  America 
are  much  more  nearly  related  each  to  the  fauna  of  the  other  coast  than  is 
either  to  the  fauna  of  any  other  region,  the  deep-water  peneids  of  the  two 
regions  seem  to  exhibit  the  inverse  relationship.  In  explanation  of  this  re- 
versal of  degree  of  relationship,  it  was  suggested  that  the  littoral  peneids 
of  the  two  coasts  have  had  contacts  less  intimate  (in  terms  of  epoch  and 
intensity)  with  the  peneids  of  other  regions  than  were  their  contacts  with 
each  other  supplied  by  shallow  Pleistocene  and  preceding  transcontinental 
channels.  It  was  suggested  that  by  contrast,  the  oceanic  faunas  of  the 
two  coasts  have  presumably  had  no  direct  communication  since  the  elevation 
of  the  Panama  ridge  before  the  late  Cretaceous  and  have  at  the  same 
time  by  their  oceanic  habit  perhaps  been  placed  in  communication  with 


1938  j 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


57 


the  faunas  of  other  regions  with  relatively  greater  frequency  than  have  the 
littoral  forms.  The  new  records  supplied  by  the  present  collection  are  in 
agreement  with  the  arrangement  suggested  above.  Of  the  two  newly  added 
deep-water  species,  Gennadas  sordidus  is  otherwise  known  only  from  the 
Indo-Pacific;  while  G.  scutatus,  although  it  occurs  in  the  American  Atlantic, 
is  also  known  from  the  intervening  Indo-Pacific  regions. 

It  seems  of  interest  to  observe  that  the  proportion  of  Eusicyoninae  to 
Penaeinae  in  the  region  of  Lower  California  is  rather  different  from  what 
seems  usual  elsewhere,  the  Eusicyoninae  forming  a relatively  very  con- 
spicuous part  of  the  littoral  population.  Thus,  for  instance,  DeMan,  1911, 
records  as  the  catch  of  the  Siboga  in  East  Indian  waters  388  specimens  of 
Penaeinae  of  about  30  species  to  19  specimens  of  Eusicyoninae  of  9 species 
(a  ratio  which  I believe  to  be  not  unusual  in  unselected  collections  from 
most  parts  of  the  world).  The  Zaca  took  156  specimens  of  Eusicyoninae  of 
7 or  8 species  to  182  specimens  of  Penaeinae  of  5 species,  and  the  Pawnee 
in  1926  took  92  specimens  of  Eusicyoninae  of  4 species  to  43  of  Penaeinae 
of  3 species,  in  the  Lower  California  region. 

Gennadas  Bate. 

Gennadas,  Burkenroad,  1936,  p.  59. 

Gennadas  sordidus  Kemp. 

Gennadas  sordidus,  Kemp,  1910,  p.  177. 

Amalopenaeus  sordidus,  Balss,  1927,  p.  262. 

(Text-figure  1). 

Range : Indian  Ocean  off  India;  Pacific  off  Lower  California,  Gulf  of 
California;  in  midwater. 

Material : A total  of  37  specimens  (about  one-third  of  them  males) 
was  taken  in  the  Gulf  of  California  in  the  general  neighborhood  of  Tortuga 
(Station  139)  and  San  Ildefonso  (Station  148)  Islands;  in  the  mouth  of  the 
Gulf  of  California  (Stations  158  and  159)  ; off  the  southern  tip  of  Lower 
California  (Station  134),  and  north  of  the  Revillagigedo  Islands  (Station 
165),  at  depths  above  300  to  500  fathoms  both  inside  and  outside  the  1,000 
fathom  contour,  as  follows: 

Station  130:  T-l  (1  3);  Station  134:  T-2  (2  5),  T-3  (1  9);  Station 
139:  T-2  (1  $),  T-3  (1  $) , T-4  (1  9);  Station  148:  T-2  (1  9),  T-4  (2  $, 
5 9)  ; Station  158:  T-4  (2  $,  7 9)  ; Station  159:  T-2  (1  $,  2 9),  T-3  (2  $,  4 9)  ; 
Station  165:  T-3  (3  $,  1 9).  Cat.  Nos.  36,950,  36,951,  36,952,  36,953,  36,954, 
36,955,  36,956,  36,957,  36,958,  36,959,  36,960,  36,961. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Material  ranges  from  adult  in- 
dividuals of  carapace  length  11  mm.,  total  about  32  mm.,  to  an  uncertainly 
determinable  early  post-mysis  probably  of  this  species,  of  carapace  2 mm. 
The  petasmal  endopods  are  united  in  males  above  8 mm.  carapace  length ; 
females  may  and  usually  do  bear  ripened  ovaries  above  9 mm.  Of  the 
twelve  fruitful  hauls,  the  six  made  at  500  fathoms  or  more  accounted  for  28 
of  the  37  specimens;  no  clear  indication  of  segregation  according  to  size 
is  apparent. 

Remarks:  The  present  Pacific  American  catches  of  Gennadas  sordidus 
are  unexpected,  inasmuch  as  previous  records  have  suggested  a localization 
of  the  species  in  the  Indian  Ocean. 

The  female  of  the  species  has  not  previously  been  described.  The 
thelycum  bears  a very  great  resemblance  to  that  of  G.  parvus  Bate,  from 
which  it  differs  in  the  slighter  development  of  the  median  longitudinal 
carina  of  sternite  XIV,  the  more  narrowed  anterior  portion  of  the  triangular 


58 


Zoologica:  Netv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


shield  of  sternite  XIII,  and  the  smaller  size  of  the  protuberance  at  the 
sides  of  sternite  XIII  behind  the  bases  of  the  third  legs.  The  median 
carina  of  XIV  is  variable  in  length  and  definition,  ranging  in  form  from 
a short,  tooth-like  crest  at  the  posterior  margin  of  the  sternite  to  a very 
low  ridge  fading  out  anteriorly  before  it  reaches  a third  of  the  way  to 
the  anterior  margin  (although  a faint  trace  of  median  elevation  sometimes 
reappears  on  the  anterior  part  of  the  sternite  and  is  very  occasionally  con- 
tinuous with  the  more  perceptible  posterior  ridge).  In  G.  parvus  the 
much  stronger  carina  of  XIV  displays  comparable  variations,  but  seems  al- 
ways to  reach  beyond  the  anterior  third  of  the  sternite.  The  protuberance 
behind  the  bases  of  the  third  legs  varies  in  strength  in  G.  sordidus  from 
complete  absence  to  a low  and  inconspicuous  weakly  setose  swelling  (and  is 
even,  in  one  specimen,  a conspicuous  projection)  ; but  it  seems  never  to 
acquire  the  strength  of  its  homologue  in  G.  parvus,  which  reaches  as  far 
median  as  to  the  lips  of  the  openings  of  the  sperm  receptacles. 


Text-figure  1. 

Gennadas  sordidus  Kemp.  Thely- 
cum;  adult  $,  D.  T.  R.  36,960, 
x 13. 


The  petasma  of  G.  sordidus  is  adequately  represented  by  Balss,  1927, 
fig.  18.  It  differs  from  that  of  G.  parvus  most  conspicuously  in  that  the 
distoventral  lobe  is  not  clearly  subdivided,  the  cleft  between  the  lobules  in 
G.  parvus  being  represented  in  G.  sordidus  only  by  a slight  crenellation  of 
the  margin  of  the  lobe  and  a short  vertical  crest  on  its  posterior  face  (some- 
what as  in  G.  tinayrei ) ; and  also  in  that  the  accessory  and  the  distomedian 
lobes  are  not  subdivided,  as  they  are  in  G.  parvus. 

In  my  discussion  of  Gennadas  in  1936,  p.  85,  I have  stated,  on  the  basis 
of  the  undivided  form  of  the  distolateral  lobe,  that  “The  only  other  species 
of  which  the  female  is  unknown,  G.  sordidus  Kemp,  undoubtedly  belongs 
to  a different  section  [I],  and  may  be  predicted  with  some  confidence  to  have 
a thelycum  with  separated,  independent  spermathecal  orifices;”  a prediction 
which  now  stands  confirmed.  In  a key  to  the  species  (1936,  p.  64),  however, 
G.  sordidus  has  been  placed  in  Group  I A with  the  species  (G.  capensis  and 
G.  kempi)  in  which  the  distoventral  lobe  of  the  petasma  is  undivided  and 
the  orifices  of  the  sperm  receptacles  very  widely  separated  and  not  guarded 
posteriorly  by  conspicuous  prominences;  rather  than  in  Group  I B of 
forms  (G.  elegans,  G.  brevirostris,  G.  tinayrei,  G.  parvus)  with  divided 
distoventral  lobe  and  guarded  and  less  widely  separated  spermathecal 
orifices.  The  structure  of  the  female  of  G.  sordidus  is  clearly  that  of 
Group  I B ; and  it  is  evident  that  I was  mistaken  in  ignoring  the  trace  of  a 


1938J 


Burkenroad : Penaeidae 


59 


cleft  in  the  distal  border  of  the  distoventral  lobe  of  the  petasma  indicated 
in  Balss’  figure  (but  not,  however,  in  that  of  Kemp,  1910,  plate  XIV,  figs. 
1,  2).  It  may  be  observed  that  both  Kemp  and  Balss  have  placed  the  male 
of  G.  sordidus  in  its  correct  relationship,  as  most  closely  allied  to  G.  parvus. 

The  diagnostic  key  published  by  me  in  1936  thus  requires  to  be  modified 
by  elimination  of  I A 1 and  transfer  of  G.  sordidus  to  I B 2 b (2)  as  follows: 
IB  2b  (2).  MALE.  Distolateral  lobe  much  narrower  than  the  distoventral, 
and  not  reaching  so  far  distally  as  does  the  latter;  accessory  lobe  much 
larger  than  the  distolateral. 

FEMALE.  Elevation  of  XIV  with  a median  longitudinal  ridge. 

I B 2 b (2)  (a)  MALE.  Division  of  the  distoventral  lobe  indicated  only  by 
a slight  crenellation  and  thickening  of  the  margin;  accessory  and  dis- 
tomedian  lobes  entire. 

FEMALE.  Median  longitudinal  ridge  of  XIV  very  short,  not  well 
defined,  if  present,  on  the  anterior  two-thirds  of  the  sternite. 

6.  G.  sordidus  Kemp;  Balss,  1927,  $ [$,  figure  1], 

I B 2 b (2)  (b).  MALE.  Distoventral  lobe  conspicuously  bipartite;  accessory 
lobe  tripartite;  distomedian  lobe  bipartite. 

FEMALE.  Median  longitudinal  ridge  of  XIV  well  defined  and 
extending  two-thirds  or  more  the  length  of  the  sternite. 

7.  G.  parvus  Bate;  Balss,  1927,  $ and  2. 


Gennadas  scutatus  Bouvier. 

Gennadas  scutatus,  Bouvier,  1906,  p.  9 ; Burkenroad,  1936,  p.  83. 

Gennadas  clavicarpus,  part,  DeMan,  1911,  p.  19. 

? Gennadas  clavicarpus,  Boone,  1930,  p.  129. 

Range : Cosmopolitan,  in  midwater. 

Material:  Two  female  specimens  were  taken  145  miles  north  of  Clarion 
Island  (Station  165  T-3),  20°  36'  N.  Lat.,  115°  07'  W.  Long.,  at  a depth 
above  500  fathoms  (Cat.  No.  36,962). 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Carapace  length  9 mm.,  total  about 
31  mm.  The  specimens  equal  in  length  the  largest  heretofore  recorded  (Milne 
Edwards  and  Bouvier,  1909,  p.  194).  Both  have  well-developed  ovaries;  in 
one  a small  mass  of  material  in  one  sperm-receptacle  seems  to  mark  an 
interrupted  mating. 

Remarks:  The  record  from  Pacific  America  is  new.2 

The  present  material  differs  in  genital  sculpture  from  that  known  from 
the  Atlantic  and  the  Indo-Pacific  in  that  the  free  flap  from  the  anterior 
margin  of  the  fourteenth  sternite  is  very  slender  (about  three  times  as  long 
as  broad),  tapering,  and  pointed,  being  widest  at  the  base;  the  anterior 
margin  of  the  anterior  lip  of  the  sperm  receptacles  is  heavily  setose;  there 
are  a pair  of  conspicuous  setose  prominences  between  the  bases  of  the  fourth 
pair  of  legs;  and  the  coxal  projection  of  the  fourth  legs  has  an  elongate 
deeply  concave  distal  margin.  Comparison  of  the  present  specimens  and 
others  (including  both  sexes)  taken  by  the  Arcturus  in  the  American 
Pacific,  with  Atlantic  material  of  G.  scutatus  in  the  Bingham  Oceanographic 
Collection  and  with  the  literature,  leads  however  to  the  belief  that  the  Zaca 
females  are  to  be  considered  as  an  extreme  variation  falling  within  the 
specific  limits. 

2 It  is  possible  that  the  record  by  Boone,  1930,  of  “Gennadas  clavicarpus  DeMan”  from  off  Cape 
Mala,  may  refer  to  the  present  species.  However,  although  Miss  Boone’s  description  of  the  petasma 
applies  to  Gennadas  scutatus,  her  description  of  the  thelycum  applies  to  Gennadas  propinquus  Rath- 
bun,  just  as  in  the  account  of  “G.  clavicarpus”  by  DeMan,  and  what  her  specimens  may  actually 
correspond  to  therefore  seems  doubtful. 


\ 


60 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


In  females  of  G.  scutatus  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean, 
the  free  flap  of  XIV  is  very  broad,  not  more  than  one  and  one-third  times 
as  long  as  wide.  In  Plate  II,  figure  3k,  DeMan,  1911,  of  the  thelycum  of  an 
Indo-Pacific  female  of  G.  scutatus  (“G.  clavicarpus” ) , the  flap  is  shown 
as  about  one  and  three-quarters  times  as  long  as  wide;  in  Bouvier’s  figure 
of  a North  Atlantic  female  (1906,  fig.  8),  as  two  and  one-third  times  as  long 
as  wide.  In  an  Arcturus  female  from  the  American  Pacific  the  flap  is  two 
and  one-third  times  as  long  as  wide.  In  available  Atlantic  females  the  tip 
of  the  flap  is  sometimes  truncate  or  even  emarginate,  sometimes  pointed. 

The  Atlantic  females  bear  a pair  of  very  inconspicuous  and  weakly 
setose  prominences,  placed  just  median  to  the  bases  of  the  fourth  legs; 
these  prominences,  which  were  overlooked  in  my  previous  account,  seem 
the  equivalents  of  the  much  more  conspicuous  ones  in  the  Zaca  females ; and 
indeed,  are  not  very  much  less  distinct  in  Atlantic  specimens  than  in  small 
Arcturus  females  from  the  American  Pacific. 

The  inner  margin  of  the  coxa  of  the  fourth  legs  in  Atlantic  females 
generally  resembles  that  indicated  in  DeMan’s  Plate  II,  figure  3k,  of  an 
Indo-Pacific  specimen;  in  some  Atlantic  females,  however,  the  distal  projec- 
tion is  farther  below  the  coxobasisal  articulation  and  is  more  pronounced, 
thus  approaching  the  form  characteristic  of  the  Pacific  American  specimens. 

Finally,  the  petasma  of  an  Arcturus  male  from  the  American  Pacific, 
as  compared  with  the  same  organ  in  Atlantic  specimens,  seems  to  show  no 
differences  lying  outside  the  range  of  those  fairly  considerable  variations  in 
relative  length  of  the  different  lobules  which  are  indicated  in  the  literature. 

Hymenopenaeus  Smith. 

Hymenopenaeus , Burkenroad,  1936,  pp.  101,  102. 

Hymenopenaeus  doris  (Faxon). 

Haliporus  doris,  Faxon,  1893,  p.  214;  1895,  p.  191. 

Range:  Off  the  Pacific  coasts  of  southern  Mexico  and  Guatemala; 

mouth  of  the  Gulf  of  California.  Midwater  (300-500  fathoms)  and  bottom, 
in  1,500-2,000  fathoms. 

Material:  One  female  was  taken  in  the  mouth  of  the  Gulf  of  California 
(Station  159  T-3,  Cat.  No.  36,963)  at  a depth  above  500  fathoms. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  The  specimen  is  a juvenile  of  cara- 
pace 9 mm.,  total  length  about  29  mm. 

Remarks : The  thelycum  of  the  present  small  female  differs  consider- 
ably from  that  of  the  much  larger  types  of  H.  doris  in  that  the  median 
vertical  projection  of  the  posterior  margin  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  has 
a very  bluntly  acuminated  rather  than  a truncated  distal  margin;  and  the 
pair  of  projections  laterally  flanking  the  median  projection  are  very  much 
lower  than  the  median  one  instead  of  reaching  as  high  as  it  does.  The 
posterior  margin  the  twelfth  sternite  lacks  the  pair  of  posteriorly  directed 
projections  present  in  the  types. 

In  my  opinion,  the  thelycum  described  above  cannot  be  that  of  a juvenile 
of  H.  nereus,  particularly  since  a strong  cusp  like  that  of  the  adult  H.  doris 
is  present  on  the  fourteenth  sternite,  instead  of  the  low  untoothed  ridge  of 
H.  nereus  adult.  In  Penaeinae,  a tooth  or  spine  is  usually  present  on  the 
fourteenth  sternite  in  larval  or  juvenile  stages,  which  may  later  disappear 
in  the  adult.  According,  however,  to  the  results  of  examination  of  mysis 
and  post-mysis  larvae  and  of  juveniles  of  Solenocerinae,  a tooth  develops  on 
the  fourteenth  sternite  of  this  subfamily  only  in  juveniles  of  species  which 
continue  to  bear  it  as  adult. 

As  to  whether  the  present  specimen  actually  refers  to  H.  doris  rather 


1938] 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


61 


than  to  some  undescribed  foi-m  it  is  impossible  to  be  certain.  However,  the 
thelycum  in  juveniles  of  the  closely  related  species  H.  laevis  differs  from 
that  of  adults  in  somewhat  the  same  manner  as,  although  to  a lesser  degree 
than,  the  thelycum  of  the  present  juvenile  differs  from  that  of  H.  doris. 

A comparison  of  the  present  specimen  of  H.  doris  and  of  another  sim- 
ilar but  still  smaller  juvenile  with  two  adult  females  of  H.  nereus  (the  three 
last-mentioned  specimens  being  undescribed  Pacific  American  material  taken 
by  the  Arcturus) , reveals  no  striking  differences  between  the  two  forms 
other  than  those  in  genitalia.  A less  detailed  comparison  of  the  female  types 
of  H.  nereus  with  those  of  H.  doris  (the  males  being  known  in  the  former 
species  only),  made  during  a visit  to  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology, 
also  indicated  that,  about  as  stated  by  Faxon,  the  two  species  agree  so 
closely  except  in  thelycum  “that  one  description  would  serve  for  both.’’  Both 
forms  are  extremely  like  H.  laevis  (Bate),  and  differ  from  the  remainder 
of  the  genus  [save  possibly  H.  villosus  (Alcock  and  Anderson)  ] in  bearing 
both  pterygostomian  and  branchiostegal  spines  (cf.  Burkenroad,  1936,  pp. 
103  seq.).  The  only  non-genital  differences  from  H.  laevis  seem  to  be  that 
the  eyes  are  somewhat  larger  in  the  two  Pacific  American  species  and  the 
tip  of  the  telson,  beyond  the  lateral  spines,  is  more  slender  and  elongate 
than  in  H.  laevis. 

It  may  be  noted  that  in  a preceding  reference  to  H.  nereus  and  H.  doris 
(1936,  p.  Ill),  I have  done  an  injustice  to  Faxon  by  the  incorrect  state- 
ment that  “only  three”  of  the  five  teeth  arming  the  median  lobule  of  the 
distolateral  lobe  of  the  petasma  of  H.  nereus  “are  indicated  in  Faxon’s 
figure.” 

Faxon  (1895,  p.  192)  calls  attention  to  the  possibility  that  those  of  his 
specimens  of  H.  doris  which  were  obtained  at  Albatross  Station  3414  might 
possibly  have  been  taken  pelagically,  inasmuch  as  Agassiz  records  the  cap- 
ture of  some  “transparent  Penaeidae”  in  the  tow-net  at  this  station;  it  is 
possible,  however,  that  Agassiz  refers  to  the  “Sergestes  edwardsii  Kr.” 
which  Faxon  records  from  Station  3414.  On  the  other  hand,  there  is  no 
possible  doubt  that  the  present  juvenile  of  H.  doris,  and  another  taken  by 
the  Arcturus  off  Cocos  Island  at  300  fms.,  were  captured  pelagically,  since 
both  were  caught  in  nets  lowered  to  not  more  than  500  fathoms,  in  areas 
well  outside  the  1,000-fathom  contour.  In  the  present  Californian  juvenile, 
the  statocyst  contains  a flattened  agglomeration  of  transparent,  sharp,  irreg- 
ularly shaped  granules,  the  largest  of  which  is  about  0.15  mm.  in  greatest 
dimension.  These  granules,  which  are  not  affected  by  dilute  HC1,  appear 
siliceous;  although  they  are  rather  readily  fractured  by  pressure  with  the 
dissecting  needle.  In  the  Cocos  juvenile,  the  statocyst  contains  a flattened 
plate  of  the  delicate  shells  of  minute  pelagic  foraminifera  cemented  together 
with  cuticular  secretion.  In  two  large  specimens  of  Hymenopenaeus  nereus, 
taken  by  the  Arcturus  on  bottom  at  Station  74  and  examined  for  comparison, 
the  statolith  is  composed  of  pelagic  foraminifera,  heavy  calcareous  frag- 
ments apparently  of  molluscan  shells,  and  granules  of  siliceous  appearance 
similar  in  nature  to  those  composing  the  statolith  of  the  Californian  juve- 
nile of  H.  doris.  I am  inclined  to  think  that  as  in  the  case  of  the  pelagically 
captured  specimens  of  H.  laevis  and  H.  aphoticus  discussed  by  Burkenroad, 
1936,  p.  106,  the  present  juveniles  of  H.  doris  had  obtained  their  statoliths 
from  bottom,  and  had  later  swum  up  to  the  levels  where  they  were  captured. 

SOLENOCERA  Lucas. 

Sofenocera  mutator,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-figures  2-5). 

Type:  Type  male  and  cotypes:  Cat.  No.  36,969,  Department  of  Tropical 
Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society;  taken  at  Station  150,  Dredge  5 


62 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


LXXIII  :3 


(5  $,  2 2)  ; from  Gorda  Banks,  tip  of  Lower  California,  23°  01'  30"  N.  Lat., 
109°  30'  W.  Long.,  4-foot  dredge  at  40  to  100  fathoms;  April  21,  1936. 

Range:  Bay  of  Panama;  Pacific  coast  of  Mexico  off  Manzanillo  and 
Mazatlan;  Lower  California,  both  coasts;  20-117  fathoms. 

Material : A total  of  33  specimens  (somewhat  more  than  half  of  them 
males)  was  taken,  at  depths  of  20  to  100  fathoms,  east  of  Cedros  Island 
(Stations  125  and  126),  in  Santa  Inez  Bay  (Stations  141  and  143),  on 
Gorda  Bank  (Station  150)  and  off  Mazatlan  (Stations  154  and  155),  as 
follows : 

Station  125:  D-l  (2  $)  ; Station  126:  D-3  (2  $,  1 5),  D-4  (1  $,  1 9)  ; 
Station  141:  D-4  (1  $,  1 9)  ; Station  143:  D-3  (5  $,  2 9)  ; Station  150:  D-5 
(5  $,  2 2)  ; Station  154:  D-l  (3  9 plus  1 fragment)  ; Station  155:  (3  S,  3 9). 
Cat.  Nos.  36,964,  36,965,  36,966,  36,967,  36,968,  36,969,  36,970,  36,971. 

In  addition  to  this  material,  I have  been  enabled  through  the  kindness 
of  Dr.  W.  L.  Schmitt  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum  to  examine  four  males 
ranging  in  carapace  length  from  12  to  13.5  mm.  and  five  females  ranging  in 
carapace  length  from  12.5  to  16  mm.,  taken  off  Manzanillo,  Mexico,  in  117 
fathoms  (U.  S.  N.  M.  28489)  ; as  well  as  a large  female  19  mm.  in  carapace 
length  from  Panama  Bay  ( Albatross  Station  2804)  at  a depth  of  47  fathoms 
(U.  S.  N.  M.  28488). 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Males  ranging  in  size  from  cara- 
pace length  16  mm.,  total  about  62  mm.,  to  carapace  9 mm.;  females  from 
carapace  14  mm.,  total  56  mm.,  to  carapace  7 mm.  In  the  four  males  of 


Solenocera  mutator,  n.  sp.  2.  Carapace  (lateral  view) ; juvenile  Mazatlan  $, 
D.  T.  R.  36,970,  x 6.  3.  Petasma  (left  half,  posterior  view) ; type  $, 
T.  R.  36,969,  x 6.  4.  Fourteenth  sternite;  adult  $,  D.  T.  R.  36,965,  x 6. 
Thelycum;  subadult  9,  D.  T.  R.  36,968,  x 6. 


1938J 


Burkenroad : Penaeiclae 


63 


carapace  10  mm.  or  less,  and  in  one  of  carapace  11  mm.,  the  petasmal  endo- 
pods  are  unjoined;  in  the  rest,  of  carapace  11  mm.  or  more,  the  petasma  is 
of  adult  form. 

Diagnosis : Pterygostomian  spine  meeting  the  frontal  margin  at  nearly 
a right  angle;  cervical  carina  not  notched  above  the  level  of  the  hepatic 
tooth;  postorbital  spine  well  developed;  orbital  angle  dentiform.  Cervical 
sulcus  not  continuous  across  the  dorsum;  postrostral  carina  of  the  carapace 
obliterated  behind  the  level  of  the  cervical  sulcus.  The  rostrum  is  short  and 
deep,  with  convex  ventral  margin;  it  bears  from  5 to  7,  usually  6,  teeth  in 
addition  to  the  epigastric,  of  which  the  posteriormost  (and  sometimes  the 
preceding  also)  is  behind  the  orbit.  The  posteriormost  tooth  of  the  rostral 
series  is  separated  from  the  preceding  by  an  interspace  equal  to  one-third 
to  one-fifth,  usually  more  than  one-fourth,  of  the  interval  between  the  pos- 
teriormost rostral  tooth  and  the  dorsal  end  of  the  cervical  sulcus.  The 
epigastric  tooth  is  placed  at  a point  from  three-fifths  to  more  than  two- 
thirds,  usually  about  two-thirds,  of  the  way  from  the  orbital  margin  to  the 
cervical  sulcus.  In  specimens  from  other  localities  than  Lower  California 
there  is  a small  slender  spine  on  the  dorsum  of  the  carapace  near  its  pos- 
terior end,  and  still  other  spines  not  present  in  Lower  Californian  material 
may  occur  on  carapace  and  pleon.  It  is  to  the  inconstant  presence  of  this 
armature  that  the  specific  name  refers. 

The  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  pleonic  somites  are  dorsally  carinated;  the 
third  rather  weakly  ridged.  The  telson  is  short,  with  a conspicuous  pair  of 
fixed  marginal  teeth. 

The  antennular  flagella  vary  from  somewhat  shorter  than  the  carapace 
minus  the  rostrum,  to  more  than  one  and  two-thirds  this  length.  They  are 
usually  quite  slender,  except  in  a few  of  the  larger  males  where  the  distal 
portion  of  the  inferior  flagellum  is  expanded  to  twice  its  basal  breadth. 

The  emargination  of  the  posterior  end  of  the  fourteenth  sternite  of  the 
male  is  deep  but  broad.  The  paired  teeth  of  the  anterior  part  of  the  four- 
teenth sternite  of  the  female  are  usually  represented  by  broad,  low,  obtuse 
swellings;  which  may  in  large  specimens,  however,  be  somewhat  produced, 
acuminated  and  turned  medioanteriorly.  The  posterior  margin  of  the  thir- 
teenth sternite  of  the  female  is,  although  narrowly  incised  by  a median 
groove,  on  the  whole  conspicuously  convex;  the  V-shaped  anterior  edge  of 
the  posterior  part  of  the  stei’nite  is  sharply  defined;  the  anterior  part  of  the 
sternite  bears  a low  ridge  not  rising  into  a setose  protuberance  at  its  hinder 
end.  The  coxae  of  the  fourth  legs  of  the  female  are  often  considerably  pro- 
duced, so  that  they  may  overlap  considerably  in  the  midline. 

The  petasma  is  particularly  characterized  by  the  considerable  size  of 
the  triangular  lamellate  projection  of  the  dorsal  face  of  the  distolateral  lobe 
(which  is  even  visible  in  ventral  view,  projecting  beyond  the  lateral  margin 
of  its  lobe)  ; and  by  the  elongated  subtriangular  shape  of  the  acuminated 
median  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe.  The  distoventral  lobe  is  crowned  by 
a free  distoventral  projection. 

Remarks : In  a preceding  paper  (1936,  p.  123),  I have  described  in 
detail,  under  the  heading  “Solenocera  species,”  a small  male  with  joined 
petasmal  endopods  taken  in  the  Gulf  of  Panama,  which  differs  in  several 
respects  from  the  much  larger  types  of  S.  agassizii  Faxon  from  the  same 
region.  It  was  thought  possible  at  that  time  that  this  specimen  might  rep- 
resent a young  form  of  S.  agassizii;  chiefly  for  the  reason  that  a small 
female  of  Solenocera  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  described  in  the  same  paper 
(1936,  p.  122)  under  the  heading  “Solenocera  vioscai  Burkenroad”  and  re- 
garded as  a young  adult  of  that  species,  was  found  to  differ  in  bodily  char- 
acters from  the  much  larger  types  of  S.  vioscai  in  somewhat  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  small  Panamanian  male  differed  from  the  types  of  S.  agassizii. 

A study  of  the  very  much  more  adequate  material  of  Solenocera  from 


64 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


American  /waters  which  has  now  become  available  from  various  sources, 
demonstrates,  however,  that  not  only  do  both  “Solenocera  species”  and  the 
supposed  young  specimen  of  S.  vioscai  represent  species  distinct  from  those 
to  which  it  was  previously  thought  that  they  might  refer,  but  there  are 
still  other  distinct  forms,  one  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and  the  present  one 
included  in  the  Zaca  collection.  The  American  species  of  the  genus  therefore 
number  six,  of  which  only  two,  S.  agassizii  Faxon  and  S.  vioscai  Burkenroad, 
have  been  named  until  the  present.  The  third  form,  S.  mutator  sp.  nov.,  has 
been  named  and  diagnosed  in  preceding  paragraphs.  A fourth  form  is  a 
peculiar  one  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  represented  by  the  supposed  “juvenile” 
erroneously  referred  to  S.  vioscai  in  1936;  a fifth  form,  also  from  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico,  is  closely  related  to  S.  mutator;  these  will  be  described  in  a 
forthcoming  paper.  The  sixth  form,  the  “Solenocera  species”  from  Panama, 
which  is  also  closely  related  to  S.  mutator,  may  be  given  a name  in  this 
place,  as  follows : 


Solenocera  florea,  sp.  nov.  Holotype,  B.  O.  C.  No.  132  (a  male  described 
by  Burkenroad,  1936,  p.  123,  figs.  68-69).  Paratypes  (Text-figs.  6-7  below) 
U.  S.  N.  M.  No.  28486,  five  males  and  five  females,  all  adult,  taken  in  Panama 
Bay  at  a depth  of  33  fathoms.  The  paratype  material  has  been  made  avail- 
able to  me  by  the  very  great  kindness  of  Dr.  W.  L.  Schmitt  of  the  U.  S. 
National  Museum.  The  males  range  in  size  from  carapace  17.2  mm.,  total 
length  68  mm.,  to  carapace  15  mm.;  the  females  from  carapace  22.8  mm., 
total  length  77  mm.  to  carapace  21.5  mm.  The  paratype  material  agrees  very 
well  with  the  previous  description  of  the  holotype;  it  may  however  be  noted 
that  the  antennal  scale  usually  overtops  the  antennular  peduncle  by  a fif- 
teenth or  more  of  the  length  of  the  scale.  The  figure  of  the  petasma  of  the 
holotype  (Burkenroad,  1936,  fig.  69)  is  in  error,  in  that  the  distal  margin 
of  the  median  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  should  be  shown  as  folded  over 
anteriorly,  not  posteriorly ; the  description  is  also  in  error  in  that  the  “pair 
of  rigid  lamellar  projections”  on  the  posterior  face  of  the  distolateral  lobe 
actually  represent  the  two  ends  of  a single  lamella,  the  midsection  of  which 
is  broken  in  the  holotype.  Diagnostic  distinctions  between  S.  florea  and 
related  species  of  the  genus  are  given  in  succeeding  paragraphs. 

The  three  Pacific  American  species  of  Solenocera  are  distinguished 
from  their  three  Atlantic  American  congeners  by  the  fact  that  the  blade  of 
the  epipodite  of  the  tenth  through  thirteenth  somites  is  in  all  of  the  former 
deeply  bifurcate,  the  shorter  ramus  being  half  or  more  the  length  of  the 
undivided  portion  of  the  blade  (not  including  peduncle)  ; whereas  in  the 


Solenocera  florea,  sp.  nov. 


Text-figures  6 & 7. 

Solenocera  florea,  n.  sp.  6.  Fourteenth  sternite;  adult,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
28,486,  x 5.  7.  Thelycum;  adult  $,  U.  S.  N.  M.  28,486,  x 5. 


1938J 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


65 


Atlantic  forms  the  epipodites  are  only  shallowly  furcated  or  even  mitten- 
like, the  shorter  ramus  being  at  most  less  than  a third  as  long  as  the  un- 
divided portion  of  the  blade.  S.  mutator,  S.  ftorea  and  one  of  the  undescribed 
species  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  are  all  three  distinguished  from  S.  agassizii 
and  S.  vioscai  by  their  less  numerous  rostral  teeth  (minimum  6,  maximum  8 
in  the  former  as  compared  with  minimum  8,  maximum  10  in  the  latter)  ; the 
right  angle  made  by  the  juncture  of  their  pterygostomian  spine  with  the 
frontal  margin  of  the  carapace  dorsal  to  it,  this  juncture  being  a smooth 
concavity  in  the  two  latter  forms;  and  the  presence  of  a scale-like  projec- 
tion on  the  anterior  face  of  the  distolateral  lobe  of  their  petasma,  which  is 
not  represented  in  S.  vioscai  and  S.  agassizii.  The  former  three  species  are 
also,  so  far  as  their  maxima  are  known,  smaller  (55-80  mm.)  than  the  latter 
two  (total  lengths  respectively  exceeding  100  and  200  mm.).  The  second 
unnamed  species  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  which  was  erroneously  described 
as  the  juvenile  of  S.  vioscai  in  1936,  agrees  with  the  S.  mutator  group  as 
regards  number  of  rostral  teeth,  but  with  the  S.  agassizii  group  in  pterygo- 
stomian spine;  its  petasma  is  unknown. 

In  non-sexual  characters,  typical  (Californian)  material  of  S.  mutator 
is  not  very  easily  distinguished  from  S.  ftorea  although  the  epigastric  tooth 
of  the  latter  is  usually  placed  somewhat  nearer  to  the  orbit  (only  about  one 
and  one-quarter  times  as  far  from  the  orbit  as  from  the  cervical  sulcus)  and 
the  posteriormost  tooth  of  its  rostral  series  is  less  widely  separated  from 
the  tooth  preceding  it  (interval  between  the  two  teeth  from  a fourth  to  a 
fifth  of  that  beween  the  posterior  tooth  and  the  cervical  sulcus)  than  in 
S.  mutator.  The  scale  of  the  inner  margin  of  the  basal  segment  of  the 
antennular  peduncle  (prosartema)  of  S.  ftorea,  which  reaches  well  beyond 
the  eye,  seems  to  be  longer  than  that  of  S.  mutator. 

Females  of  S.  ftorea  are  readily  distinguished  from  those  of  S.  mutator 
by  the  fact  that  in  the  former  the  posterior  margin  of  the  thirteenth  ster- 
nite  is  acutely  concave  rather  than  roundedly  convex;  and  that  there  is  no 
sharp  boundary  between  the  anterior  and  posterior  parts  of  the  same  ster- 
nite  except  medially,  where  the  median  groove  of  the  posterior  part  of  the 
sternite  ends  at  a conspicuous,  unpaired,  setose  conical  projection  set  just 
in  advance  of  the  fourth  legs.  The  pair  of  teeth  of  the  anterior  part  of  the 
fourteenth  sternite  also  seems  to  be  somewhat  more  sharp  and  slender  in 
females  of  S.  ftorea,  and  the  coxal  nibs  of  the  fourth  legs  are  less  extended 
than  is  sometimes  the  case  in  S.  mutator. 

The  emargination  of  the  posterior  edge  of  the  fourteenth  sternite  is  a 
narrow  notch  with  parallel  sides  in  males  of  S.  ftorea,  rather  than  a sloping 
concavity  as  in  S.  mutator.  In  petasma  the  two  species  are  strikingly  dif- 
ferent; particularly  as  regards  the  subtriangular  rather  than  subrectan- 
gular  shape  of  the  median  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  of  S.  mutator,  and 
the  form  of  the  distoventral  lobe  which  is  in  S.  mutator  very  nearly  identical 
with  that  in  S.  agassizii. 

Certain  peculiar  variations  in  structure  within  the  material  which  I 
have  here  assigned  to  Solenocera  mutator  seem  to  require  attention.  In  the 
specimens  from  Mexico  and  Panama,  the  integument  is  thin  and  mem- 
braneous, the  tissues  are  rather  flabby,  and  the  pleon  seems  relatively  quite 
slender.  In  Californian  material,  on  the  contrary,  the  integument  is  thick 
and  rigid,  the  flesh  solid,  and  the  habitus  is  of  the  Penaeine  type  usual  in 
the  American  species  of  the  genus.  These  differences  are  difficult  to  define 
precisely,  and  there  is  considerable  intergradation  between  the  groups;  but 
nevertheless  specimens  from  Lower  California  do  give  a general  impression 
different  from  that  of  the  Mexican  material.  That  this  impression  may  not 
be  the  result  of  differences  in  method  of  preservation  is  suggested  by  the 
fact  that  the  Lower  Californian  and  one  of  the  available  lots  of  Mexican 
material  are  derived  from  one  collection,  the  other  lot  of  Mexican  and  Pan- 
amanian material  from  another. 


66 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


Of  more  precisely  definable  differences  between  the  peninsular  and  the 
mainland  material  of  S.  mutator,  in  all  but  one  of  the  nineteen  Mexican  and 
Panamanian  specimens  the  dorsum  of  the  carapace  about  midway  between 
the  cervical  sulcus  and  the  posterior  margin  bears  a small,  slender  spine 
which  is  absent  in  all  of  the  twenty-four  Californian  specimens.  In  the 
mainland  material  there  is  also  a well-developed  vestige  of  the  posterior 
dorsal  organ  found  in  many  peneid  larvae,  which  is  not  perceptible  in  Cali- 
fornian specimens.  In  small  mainland  specimens  from  Mazatlan  (the 
smallest  a female  of  carapace  length  9 mm.),  the  carapace  bears  four  addi- 
tional pairs  of  spines  of  which  no  traces  appear  in  peninsular  specimens, 
two  pail’s  on  the  branchial  region  below  the  cardiaco-branchial  carina,  and 
two  pairs  on  the  sides  behind  the  cervical  sulcus.  The  cardiaco-branchial 
carina,  which  is  in  Californian  specimens  obsolescent,  is  in  these  small  indi- 
viduals strongly  developed ; and  there  is  also  a short  carina,  not  represented 
in  peninsular  material,  which  runs  between  the  posterior  section  of  the 
cardiaco-branchialis  and  the  cervical  carina.  One  of  the  pairs  of  lateral 
spines  is  set  on  the  middle  of  this  carina,  from  the  midpoint  of  which  an- 
other ridge  not  perceptible  in  Californian  specimens  slants  in  a sinuous 
oblique  toward  the  posteroventral  margin  of  the  carapace.  There  is  also  in 
these  small  specimens  a spine  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  dorsal  carina  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  pleonic  somites  as  well  as  of  the  sixth  to  which  such 
spines  are  limited  in  the  peninsular  material.  Altogether,  the  small  speci- 
mens recall  to  mind  in  many  ways  various  of  the  species  of  Hymenopenaeus ; 
thus  the  carapacic  carination  and  pleonic  armature,  as  well  as  the  habitus, 
are  to  some  extent  comparable  with  those  of  H.  laevis  (Bate)  ; the  dorso- 
lateral postcervical  spines  with  the  pair  present  in  H.  diomedeae  (Faxon) 
(or  in  Solenocera  hextii  Wood  Mason)  ; and  the  posterior  dorsal  spine  of 
the  carapace  with  that  of  H.  steindachneri  (Balss).  In  somewhat  larger 
specimens  from  Mazatlan,  the  extra  carapacic  carinae  are  weaker,  and  the 
extra  lateral  spines  of  the  carapace  and  the  posterior  spine  of  the  fourth 
pleonic  somite  are  absent,  although  the  dorsal  carapacic  spine  and  that  of  the 
fifth  pleonic  somite  are  present.  In  the  largest  specimen  from  Mazatlan, 
a male  of  carapace  length  13.5  mm.,  all  of  the  extra  spines  of  carapace  and 
pleon  are  absent  and  the  animal  nearly  approaches  the  Californian  types  in 
habitus.  In  all  available  specimens  from  Manzanillo,  of  whatever  size,  the 
dorsal  spine  and  the  two  dorsal  of  the  extra  lateral  pairs  are  present.  A 
spine  is  present  on  the  fifth  pleonic  somite  in  all  but  one  small  male  from 
Manzanillo;  that  of  the  fourth  pleonic  somite  occurs  in  only  two  of  the  ten 
specimens.  In  the  large  female  from  Panama,  of  carapace  length  19  mm., 
the  dorsal  and  two  pairs  of  extra  lateral  carapacic  spines  are  present,  but 
only  the  sixth  pleonic  somite  is  dorsally  armed. 

There  are  a number  of  other  inconstant  differences  between  mainland 
and  peninsular  material;  thus  there  are  eight  rostral  teeth  in  '5  of  7 
Mazatlan  specimens  and  in  2 of  9 Manzanillo  specimens  as  compared  with  a 
maximum  of  seven  in  all  of  the  22  Californian  individuals  with  unbroken 
rostrum;  and  the  antennular  flagella  are  shorter,  or  at  most  no  more  than 
slightly  longer,  than  the  carapace  in  Mazatlan  and  Manzanillo  specimens. 

However,  despite  the  many  differences  pointed  out  above,  the  mainland 
and  the  peninsular  specimens  are  identical  in  petasma  and  thelycum,  and 
for  this  reason  I am  unable  to  consider  them  as  systematically  distinct.  It 
seems  possible,  especially  because  of  the  change  with  size  among  the 
Mazatlan  specimens,  that  the  peculiar  features  of  the  mainland  material 
are  of  larval  derivation.  However,  the  mainland  specimens  are  quite  as  well 
developed  sexually  as  are  Californian  specimens  of  similar  size,  and  the 
Panamanian  female  is  by  far  the  largest  of  the  known  individuals  of  S. 
mutator;  while  at  the  same  time  juveniles  from  Lower  California,  smaller 
and  less  developed  sexually  than  are  any  from  the  mainland,  display  no 
traces  of  the  extra  spines  and  carinae  characteristic  of  the  latter.  The 


1938  | 


BurJcenroad : Penaeidae 


67 


question  of  the  significance  of  the  differences  between  the  Californian  and 
the  mainland  specimens  is  a most  interesting  one,  and  it  is  to  be  regretted 
that  no  more  satisfactory  an  account  than  the  above  can  be  offered. 


Penaeus  Fabricius. 

Penaeus,  Burkenroad,  1934a  p.  74. 

division  2,  Burkenroad,  1934a,  p.  75. 

Penaeus  calif orniensis  Holmes. 

Penaeus  calif  orniensis,  Holmes,  1900,  p.  218;  Pesta,  1915,  p.  113. 

Penaeus  canaliculatus , Holmes,  1895,  p.  581. 

Penaeus  brevirostris,  part,  Rathbun,  1902,  p.  287;  1904,  p.  146;  Schmitt, 
1921,  p.  21;  Burkenroad,  1934a,  p.  91. 

Penaeus  brasiliensis,  part,  Schmitt,  1935,  p.  16. 

(Text-figures  10,  11,  14,  15). 

Range:  San  Francisco,  California;  Santa  Monica,  California;  Gulf 
coast  of  Lower  California;  west  coast  of  Mexico  near  Esquinapa.  Beach  to 
45  fathoms;  Juveniles  in  lagoons  and  estuaries. 

Material:  A total  of  3 specimens  (1  $,  2 9)  was  taken  on  Arena  Bank, 
45  fathoms  (Station  136  D-2,  Cat.  No.  36,972). 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Larger  female  impregnated,  of  cara- 
pace 34  mm.,  total  length  about  140  mm. ; smaller  female  of  carapace  30  mm., 
unimpregnate.  Male  fully  adult,  carapace  length  30  mm. 

Remarks:  No  more  than  two  American  species  of  Section  2 of  Penaeus 
have  in  the  past  been  recognized.  The  names  generally  applied  to  these  have 
been,  for  Atlantic  specimens,  P.  brasiliensis  Latreille;  for  Pacific  ones,  P. 
brevirostris  Kingsley.  In  the  two  most  recent  considerations  of  the  group, 
Burkenroad  (1934a,  pp.  91  seq.)  has  advanced  some  reasons  for  believing 
that  Atlantic  is  specifically  distinct  from  Pacific  material,  while  Schmitt 
(1935,  pp.  16-17)  refers  all  American  material  to  a single  name,  P.  brasi- 
liensis. 

It  now  appears,  however,  that  there  are  no  less  than  five  species  of 
Division  2 in  the  American  waters,  three  Atlantic  and  two  Pacific  ones.  As 
the  account  of  the  Atlantic  forms  will  appear  in  a forthcoming  paper,  it  is 
proposed  to  describe  and  to  differentiate  only  the  two  Pacific  species  in  this 
place. 

Although  there  seems  in  the  past  to  have  been  no  suspicion  of  the  ex- 
istence of  more  than  one  species  of  the  P.  brasiliensis  group  in  Pacific  Amer- 
ica, names  are  already  available  for  both  of  the  newly  separated  forms. 
Some  juvenile  specimens  from  Nicaragua  were  described  by  Kingsley,  1878, 
p.  98,  as  the  new  species  Penaeus  brevirostris .3  In  1895,  Holmes  incorrectly 
referred  specimens  of  the  brasiliensis  group  from  Southern  California  and 
San  Francisco  Bay  (which  he  thought  likely  to  be  identical  with  Kingsley’s 
material)  to  the  Indo-Pacific  P.  canaliculatus  (Olivier).  In  1900  Holmes  re- 
trieved this  error  by  describing  the  Californian  specimens  as  the  new  spe- 
cies P.  calif  orniensis ; but  as  he  failed  at  this  time  to  refer  to  Kingsley’s 
species,  his  name  has  subsequently  been  regarded  by  most  workers  as  syn- 
onymous with  P.  brevirostris.  P.  calif  orniensis  Holmes  is  entered  in  his 
list  of  peneid  species  by  DeMan,  1911,  p.  10,  but  it  is  intentionally  omitted 
from  the  account  of  Penaeus  by  the  same  author,  who  according  to  p.  131 
accepts  its  identity  with  P.  brevirostris.  Pesta,  1915,  p.  113,  identifies  mate- 


3 This  name  was  later  incorrectly  referred  to  the  synonymy  of  P.  brasiliensis  by  Kingsley  him- 
self (1879,  p.  427),  thus  antedating  the  similar  action  by  Verrill  in  1922  and  by  Schmitt,  1935,  p.  17. 


68 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


rial  from  San  Francisco  Bay  as  P.  calif  or  niensis  Holmes,  but  considers  it 
likely  that  Kingsley’s  specimens  are  juveniles  of  the  same  form;  he  remarks 
“Es  scheint  mir  jedoch  zweckmassiger  den  P.  californiensis  Holmes,  von 
dem  eine  gut  Diagnose  mit  abbildungen  gegeben  ist,  bestehen  zu  lassen,  und 
vielleicht  die  Spezies  Kingsley’s  als  fragliches  Synonym  hierher  zu  stellen.” 

Since  I am  informed  by  Dr.  F.  M.  MacFarland  of  the  California  Acad- 
emy of  Sciences  that  the  types  of  P.  californiensis  Holmes  were  destroyed 
in  the  earthquake  and  fire  of  1906,  a specimen  from  Santa  Monica,  Cali- 
fornia, is  designated  below  as  neotype.  The  specimen  from  San  Francisco 
which  is  figured  by  Pesta  seems  to  belong  to  the  same  species  as  the  neo- 
type. Cotypes  of  Penaeus  brevirosiris  Kingsley,  although  juvenile,  are  eas- 
ily differentiated  from  the  form  which  occurs  in  the  type  locality  of  P. 
californiensis.  Material  of  the  two  Pacific  American  species  of  the  group 
available  to  me  in  addition  to  that  obtained  by  Dr.  Beebe,  is  listed  below. 
For  material  credited  to  the  respective  institutions,  I am  deeply  indebted  to 
the  authorities  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  the  Museum 
of  Comparative  Zoology,  and  the  U.  S.  National  Museum. 

Penaeus  californiensis  Holmes. 

NEOTYPE.  U.  S.  N.  M.  23942.  Santa  Monica,  California.  1 8 adult, 
carapace  33  mm.;  total  length  140  mm. 

B.  0.  C.  18.  Concepcion  Bay,  Lower  California;  May  3,  1926.  Pawnee 
II.  1 $ adult,  impregnated,  carapace  length  43  mm.;  8 $ adult,  carapace  29 
to  34  mm.;  3 $ juvenile,  carapace  14.5  to  20  mm.;  2 $ juvenile,  carapace 
17.5  to  20  mm. 

B.  0.  C.  14.  Angeles  Bay,  Lower  California;  May  13,  1926;  17-23  fms. 
Pawnee  II.  3 9 adult  (2  impregnated),  carapace  lengths  31.5  to  38.5  mm.; 
2 $ adult,  carapace  lengths  29.5  and  30  mm. 

A.  M.  N.  H.  4620  [A],  Lagunaje  de  las  Lomitas,  Esquinapa,  Sinaloa, 
Mexico  (just  south  of  the  Gulf  of  California)  ; November  15,  1919.  Sr.  M. 
Gallegos.  2 $ juvenile,  carapace  lengths  18  mm.  and  20  mm. 

Penaeus  brevirostris  Kingsley. 

(Text-figures  8,  9,  12,  13). 

COTYPES.  M.  C.  Z.  Estero  at  Realejo,  Nicaragua;  March,  1867.  1 9, 
juvenile,  carapace  length  13.2  mm.;  1 $,  juvenile,  carapace  length  11  mm. 

B.  O.  C.  15.  Pearl  Islands,  Bay  of  Panama  (8°  29'  40"  N,  78°  52'  30" 
W)  ; March  31,  1926.  Pawnee  II.  5 9,  subadult  to  juvenile,  carapace  length 
9 mm.  to  22  mm.;  2 $,  juvenile,  carapace  lengths  10.5  mm.  and  11  mm. 

B.  O.  C.  102.  Panama  City  Market  (reported  locality,  Chame  River)  ; 
February  10,  1934.  M.  D.  B.  1 9 adult,  impregnated,  carapace  length  38  mm. 

B.  O.  C.  103.  Tide-pool,  Panama  City;  February  12,  1934.  M.  D.  B. 
1 $ juvenile,  carapace  length  8 mm. 

B.  O.  C.  16.  West  coast  of  southern  Mexico  (14°  48'  40"  N,  92°  54'  40" 
W ; April  9,  1926 ; 30  fms.  Pawnee  II.  3 9 adult,  impregnated,  carapace 
lengths  46  mm.  to  50  mm. 

U.  S.  N.  M.  28417.  Panama  Bay  ( Albatross  Station  2795)  ; 33  fms. 

1 3 adult,  carapace  30.5  mm. ; 1 9 adult,  impregnated,  carapace  43.5  mm. 

U.  S.  N.  M.  28419.  Panama  Bay  ( Albatross  Station  2804)  ; 47  fms. 

2 8 adult,  carapace  31  mm. 

A.  M.  N.  H.  4620  [B].  Lagunaje  de  las  Lomitas,  Esquinapa,  Sinaloa, 
Mexico;  November  15,  1919.  Sr.  M.  Gallegos.  2 9,  juvenile,  carapace 
lengths  18  mm.  and  20  mm. 


1938] 


Burkenroad : Penaeidae 


69 


A.  M.  N.  H.  4621.  Estero  del  Puyeque,  Esquinapa,  Sinaloa,  Mexico; 
November  29,  1919.  Sr.  M.  Gallegos.  1 $ juvenile,  carapace  length  19  mm.; 
1 $ juvenile,  carapace  length  17.5  mm. 

A.  M.  N.  H.  4622.  Pesqueria  Caliguey,  Esquinapa,  Sinaloa,  Mexico; 
November  22,  1919.  Sr.  M.  Gallegos.  1 $ juvenile,  carapace  length  19  mm. 

A.  M.  N.  H.  4623.  Estero  del  Puyeque,  Esquinapa,  Sinaloa,  Mexico; 
November  29,  1919.  Sr.  M.  Gallegos.  1 $ juvenile,  carapace  length  15.5 
mm.;  2 $ juvenile,  carapace  lengths  18  and  19  mm. 

The  sharpest  non-sexual  diagnostic  between  P.  brevirostris  and  P. 
calif orniensis  is  supplied  by  the  carina  forming  the  postero-dorsal  margin  of 
the  antennal  sulcus.  In  P.  calif  orniensis  this  carina  reaches  to  within  near- 
ly half  its  length  at  least  of  the  orbital  angle  (usually,  and  in  adults  almost 
always,  to  within  one-third)  ; whereas  in  P.  brevirostris  the  carina  does  not 
reach  to  within  more  than  three-fifths  its  length  of  the  orbital  angle,  often 
not  within  its  length. 

The  orbital  angle  is  more  produced  and  the  postorbital  carina  more  pro- 
nounced in  P.  calif  orniensis  than  in  P.  brevirostris;  thus  in  the  former  the 
sharply  defined  posterior  part  of  the  crest  (best  seen  in  dorsal  view)  is 
longer,  usually  considerably  longer,  than  the  more  obtuse  anterior  portion, 
while  in  the  latter  species  the  anterior  obtuse  part  is  usually  the  longer. 
The  posterior  part  of  the  ridge  is  in  P.  brevirostris  often  no  sharper  than  is 
the  anterior  part  in  P.  calif  orniensis,  and  the  anterior  part  is  sometimes 
hardly  discernible. 


Text-figures  8-11. 

Peneus  brevirostris  Kingsley.  8.  Carapace  (anterior  part,  lateral  view)  ; 
juvenile  $ cotype,  M.  C.  Z.,  x 4.  9.  Thelycum;  impregnated  adult  $, 
B.  O.  C.  102,  x 4. 

Peneus  calif  orniensis  Holmes.  10.  Carapace  (anterior  part,  lateral  view)  ; 
juvenile  $,  B.  0.  C.  18,  x 4.  11.  Thelycum;  unimpregnated  adult  $, 
D.  T.  R.  36,972,  x 4. 


70 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


The  adrostral  carinae  of  P.  calif orniensis  are  somewhat  longer  and  more 
widely  separated  than  are  those  of  P.  brevirostris,  generally  extending 
toward  the  posterior  margin  of  the  carapace  to  within  the  breadth  of  the 
interval  separating  their  posterolateral  ends;  and  are  posteriorly  better 
defined  than  in  P.  brevirostris,  being  continued  medially  at  the  posterior 
ends  of  the  adrostral  sulci.  In  P.  brevirostris  these  carinae  usually  extend 
to  no  more  than  about  three-quarters  of  the  interval  between  them  toward 
the  posterior  margin,  and  are  usually  not  continued  medially,  so  that  the 
adrostral  sulci  lack  a defined  posterior  margin.  These  differences  in  form 
of  adrostral  carina  are  very  much  less  distinct  in  juveniles  than  in  adults. 

The  modal  number  of  dorsal  carapacic  teeth  is  different  in  the  two  spe- 
cies, as  far  as  the  present  material  serves  to  indicate,  being  nine  in  P. 
calif  orniensis,  ten  or  eleven  in  P.  brevirostris.  The  exact  counts  are  shown 
in  the  table: 


Number  of  Rostral  Teeth. 

Number  of 
P.  calif  orniensis. 

Individuals. 

P.  brevirostris. 

7+1  epigastric 

1 

0 

8 + 1 

14 

2 

9 + 1 

7 

11 

10  + 1 

1 

11 

11  + 1 

0 

1 

Finally,  the  two  species  seem  distinct  in  thelycum,  petasma  and  appendix 
masculina.  In  adult  Panamanian  females  of  P.  brevirostris,  the  posterior 
part  of  the  median  elevation  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  forms,  in  ventral 
view,  a roughly  oval  or  diamond-shaped  cup  with  elevated  rim  and  de- 
pressed center,  against  which  the  anteromedian  lips  of  the  lateral  plates  of 
the  fourteenth  sternite  abut,  and  by  which  these  lips  are  held  apart  so  that 
they  do  not  meet  in  the  midline  anteriorly.  The  anterior  part  of  the  ven- 
tral surface  of  the  lateral  plates  is  quite  heavily  pubescent.  The  character- 
istic form  of  the  median  elevation  of  XIII  and  the  pubescence  of  the  ventral 
surface  of  the  lateral  plates  are  recognizable  in  Panamanian  juveniles  down 
to  a carapace  length  of  14  mm.,  though  the  pubescence  cannot  be  discovered 
in  smaller  specimens.  Since  the  lateral  plates  of  XIV  gape  widely  in  juveniles 
of  Penaeus,  the  separation  of  the  anteromedian  lips  of  the  lateral  plates 
loses  its  value  as  a diagnostic  in  juveniles.  In  the  juvenile  female  cotype 
from  Nicaragua,  of  carapace  13.2  mm.,  the  form  of  the  median  elevation 
of  XIII  is  characteristic,  but  the  specimen  seems  below  the  size  at  which 
the  pubescence  of  the  lateral  plates  appears.  In  adult  females  of  P.  breviros- 
tris from  southern  Mexico,  the  structure  of  the  thelycum  is  similar  to  that 
in  Panamanian  specimens,  but  the  anterior  parts  of  the  ventral  plates  are 
in  some  individuals  only  very  lightly  pubescent.  In  juvenile  females  from 
Esquinapa,  of  carapace  lengths  15-20  mm.,  the  ventral  surfaces  of  the  lateral 
plates  are  not  pubescent  at  all ; and  while  the  posterior  part  of  the  median 
elevation  of  XIII  has  the  characteristic  cup-like  form,  its  posterior  end  is 
more  extensively  produced  in  a posterior  direction,  to  form  an  obliquely 
vertical  ridge,  than  in  the  Panamanian  juveniles. 

In  adult  females  of  P.  calif  orniensis  from  the  Gulf  of  California,  the 
posterior  part  of  the  median  elevation  of  XII  shows  at  most  no  more  than 
a trace  of  the  cup-like  form  found  in  P.  brevirostris;  instead,  it  bears  a 
median  longitudinal  carina  representing  an  elongation  of  the  posteromedian 
rim  of  the  cup  in  P.  brevirostris.  The  lateral  plates  of  XIV  meet  in  the 


1938J 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


71 


midline  for  their  entire  length,  their  anterior  ends  thus  overlying  and  con- 
cealing the  posterior  part  of  the  elevation  of  XIII,  as  is  clearly  indicated  in 
Pesta’s  figure  of  a female  from  San  Francisco.  The  lateral  plates  are  not 
pubescent  on  their  ventral  surface.  Juveniles  of  P.  calif orniensis  maintain 
the  characteristic  form  of  the  thelycum  (except  as  regards  the  meeting  of 
the  lips  of  the  lateral  plates)  down  to  a carapace  length  of  18  mm.  at  least. 
Although  the  juveniles  of  P.  calif  orniensis  are  not  too  readily  distinguish- 
able in  these  features  from  the  Sinaloa  juveniles  of  P.  brevirostris  de- 
scribed above,  it  is  my  belief  that  the  Sinaloa  juveniles  would  as  adults  re- 
semble material  from  southern  Mexico,  and  would  thus,  although  differing 
slightly  from  the  Panamanian  stock  of  P.  brevirostris,  fall  easily  within 
the  same  specific  limits  and  be  clearly  distinct  in  female  genital  characters 
from  P.  calif  orniensis. 


The  petasma  of  adult  males  of  P.  calif  orniensis  displays  the  following 
critical  characters:  The  medially  curved  distal  ends  (distoventral  lobes)  of 
the  heavily  chitinized  lateral  ribs  of  the  petasma  terminate  in  a sharply 
pointed  recurved  tip  which  is  free  from  the  membranes  forming  the  median 
parts  of  the  petasma.  The  distolateral  or  free  margin  of  the  distal  ends 
of  the  ribs  is  unarmed ; the  proximomedian  margin  which  is  attached  to  the 
membranes  forming  the  median  parts  of  the  petasma  is  most  frequently 
armed  on  its  anterior  or  dorsal  side  with  a single  proximally  directed  tooth- 
like spine  (the  range  in  armature  being  from  no  such  teeth  to  five).  Just 
median  to  the  tip  of  the  lateral  rib  is  a large,  fleshy  posteriorly  projecting 
flap  the  area  of  which  is  nearly  comparable  with  that  of  the  distomedian 
lobe.  This  flap,  which  probably  represents  a part  of  the  distolateral  lobe,  is 
armed  on  its  free  edge  with  several  series  of  spines  like  those  arming  the 
anterior  surface  of  the  membranes  median  to  the  lateral  rib  and  those  on 
the  median  edge  of  the  lateral  rib  itself.  The  posteriorly  curved  disto- 
median lobes  are  quite  long,  and  overlap  the  distal  ends  of  the  lateral  ribs 
by  a considerable  amount.  The  characteristic  features  of  the  adult  petasma 
are  well-developed  in  the  two  available  juvenile  males  with  separated  petas- 
mal  endopods. 

In  adult  males  of  P.  brevirostris  from  Panama  the  petasma  differs  from 
that  of  P.  calif  orniensis  as  follows:  The  medially  directed  distal  ends  of  the 
lateral  ribs  terminate  in  a blunt  tip  not  projecting  free  of  the  median  mem- 
branes; this  tip  is  armed  on  its  distolateral  or  free  edge  with  one  or  two 


Peneus  brevirostris  Kingsley.  12. 
Petasma,  (distal  part,  lateral 
view  from  right  side) ; adult 
8,  U.  S.  N.  M.  28,419,  x 5.  13. 
Appendix  masculina  (of  right 
second  pleopod,  anterior  view) ; 
as  in  12,  x 5. 


Text-figures  12-15. 


Peneus  calif  orniensis  Holmes.  14. 
Petasma  (distal  part,  lateral 
view  from  left  side)  ; adult  $, 
D.  T.  R.  36,972,  x 5.  15.  Ap- 


pendix masculina  (of  right 
second  pleopod,  anterior  view)  ; 
as  in  14,  x 5. 


72 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


conspicuous  axially-directed  teeth  which  seem  not  to  be  homologous  with 
the  projecting,  recurved,  acutely-pointed  tip  in  P.  calif orniensis.  The  proxi- 
momedian  margin  of  the  anterior,  or  dorsal  side  of  the  distal  parts  of 
the  lateral  ribs  bears  a row  of  8 to  11  spines  along  its  juncture  with 
the  membraneous  median  parts  of  the  petasma.  The  folded  distal  edge 
of  the  median  parts,  at  the  point  of  juncture  with  the  tip  of  the  lateral 
rib,  does  not  project  inward  as  a conspicuous  fleshy  flap,  and  is  here 
unarmed.  The  distomedian  lobes  of  the  petasma  are  relatively  short, 
and  do  not  much  overlap  the  distal  ends  of  the  lateral  ribs.  In  the  four 
juvenile  males  of  P.  brevirostris  from  Sinaloa,  the  disunited  petasmal  en- 
dopods  are  very  much  like  the  above,  although  there  is  in  all  but  one  tooth 
visible  on  the  free  margin  of  the  tip  of  the  lateral  ribs,  and  although  there 
may  be  as  few  as  four  teeth  on  the  proximomedian  margin.  Juvenile  males 
from  Nicaragua  and  Panama  are  too  small  to  display  recognizable  petasmal 
characters. 

In  adult  and  juvenile  males  of  P.  calif  orniensis,  the  external  margin  of 
the  appendix  masculina  of  the  second  pair  of  pleopods  is  approximately 
straight.  In  adult  males  of  P.  brevirostris  from  Panama  and  in  juveniles 
from  Sinaloa  the  external  margin  of  the  appendix  is  deeply  concave.  In 
Panamanian  and  Nicaraguan  juveniles,  the  carapace  length  of  which  is 
less  than  10.5  mm.,  the  external  margin  of  the  appendix  masculina  is 
straight,  but  this  organ,  like  the  petasma,  is  extremely  small  and  undevel- 
oped in  these  very  small  specimens  and  presumably  does  not  yet  display  the 
adult  characters. 


Penaeopsis  A.  Milne  Edwards  (Bate). 

Penaeopsis,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  7. 

Subgenus  metapen aeopsis  Bouvier. 

Metapenaeopsis,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  8. 

SECTION  I,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  8. 

Penaeopsis  I Metapenaeopsisi  kishinouyei  (Rathbun). 

Parapenaeus  kishinouyei,  Rathbun,  1902,  p.  288. 

Penaeopsis  kishinouyei,  Schmitt,  1924,  p.  161. 

Not  Penaeopsis  kishinouyei,  Boone,  1930,  p.  108;  1931,  p.  176. 

(Text-figures  16,  17). 

Range:  Galapagos  Islands;  Revillagigedo  Islands;  2-55  fathoms. 

Material:  Two  specimens  (1  $,  1 9)  were  taken  3 miles  off  Pyramid 
Rock,  Clarion  Island,  Revillagigedo  Islands  (Station  163  D-2,  Cat.  No. 
36,973)  in  55  fathoms. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Female  an  impregnated  adult  of 
carapace  12  mm.,  total  length  about  56  mm.  Male  a subadult  with  joined 
petasmal  endopods  of  carapace  5 mm.,  total  length  about  27  mm. 

Remurks : The  present  record  of  Penaeopsis  kishinouyei,  although  from 
a locality  nearly  20°  to  northward  of  the  Galapagos  from  which  the  species 
is  otherwise  definitely  known,  and  from  deeper  water,  refers  like  the 
original  record  to  the  neighborhood  of  an  isolated  group  of  oceanic  islands. 
Whether  the  species  occurs  on  the  mainland,  from  which  it  has  twice  been 
recorded  by  Boone,  is  extremely  doubtful;  thus  the  Panamanian  specimen 
in  the  collection  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  referred  to 
P.  kishinouyei  by  Boone,  1931,  p.  176,  is  entirely  distinct  from  Rathbun’s 
species  and  will  be  discussed  in  a further  paragraph  as  P.  beebei  sp.  nov. 
(not  P.  mineri  Burkenroad,  to  which  closely  related  form  I have  erroneously 


1938] 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


73 


referred  the  Panamanian  specimen  in  1934b,  p.  28).  As  to  the  Costa  Rican 
specimen  referred  to  P.  kishinouyei  by  Boone,  1930,  p.  108,  according  to 
her  Plate  33  the  fifth  legs  of  this  specimen  are  nearly  as  long  as  the  third, 
the  telson  lacks  conspicuous  lateral  armature,  the  antennular  flagella  are 
longer  than  their  peduncle,  and  the  exopodites  of  the  walking-legs  are 
swollen  and  bladder-like ; I would  therefore  infer  that  it  may  perhaps  belong 
to  another  genus  than  Metapenaeopsis.  As  a possible  analogy,  mention  may 
may  be  made  of  figure  4B  in  the  same  paper,  which  although  referred  to 
“Penaeopsis  goodei,”  obviously  represents  the  petasma  of  Trachypeneus. 
If  the  Costa  Rican  specimen  is  not  a Metapenaeopsis,  it  is  necessary  to 
assume  that  such  portions  of  Boone’s  description  as  that  (p.  110)  referring 
to  the  sternal  spines  characteristic  of  Metapenaeopsis  may,  like  the  descrip- 


Text-figures  16  & 17. 

Penaeopsis  kishinouyei  (Rathbun).  16.  Thelycum;  adult 
$,  D.  T.  R.  36,973,  x 10. 

Penaeopsis  kishinouyei  (Rathbun).  17.  Petasma  (posterior 
view,  “dust-cap”  bent  down  to  expose  distal  parts) ; 
subadult  $,  D.  T.  R.  36,973,  x 25. 


tions  of  thelycum  and  petasma  in  the  same  account,  be  drawn  from  Rath- 
bun’s  remarks  on  P.  kishinouyei  rather  than  from  the  animal  figured  on 
Plate  33.  Boone’s  unrecognizable  figure  3A,  given  as  an  original  drawing 
of  the  thelycum  of  P.  kishinouyei  (although  the  material  which  she  has 
examined  is  stated  to  have  consisted  of  “one  adult  male”)  bears  a great 
resemblance  to  the  similarly  unrecognizable  figure  4A  given  by  the  same 
author  as  that  of  “ Penaeopsis  goodei.”  It  must  be  admitted  that  this  figure 
is  rather  suggestive  of  Metapejiaeopsis,  by  reason  of  the  occurrence  of  a 
spine  at  the  anterior  end  of  what  seems  intended  to  represent  the  median 
plate  of  XIII ; however,  it  seems  unlikely  the  drawing  can  refer  to  P.  kish- 
inouyei, since  at  a carapace  length  of  11  mm.  the  median  plate  seems  to 
have  lost  its  armature  in  that  species. 

Accepting  that  P.  kishinouyei  has  not  yet  been  taken  on  the  mainland, 
its  limitation  to  oceanic  islands  off  the  Pacific  American  coast  would  seem 
a matter  of  considerable  interest,  inasmuch  as  the  mainland  would  seem 
as  readily  accessible  to  a littoral  animal  of  the  Galapagos  as  would  the 
Revillagigedo  Islands. 

For  comparison  with  the  present  Revillagigedo  specimens,  one  of  the 
two  juvenile  females  taken  off  Indefatigable  Island  by  the  Williams  Gala- 
pagos Expedition,  and  reported  by  Schmitt,  1924,  p.  161 ; as  well  as  three 


74 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


juvenile  females  (the  largest  of  carapace  5.2,  total  length  about  25  mm.) 
and  a juvenile  male  (of  carapace  4 mm.;  petasmal  endopods  not  joined) 
taken  at  Arcturus  Station  54  (Gardiner  Bay,  Hood  Island,  Galapagos; 
April  25,  1925;  15  feet),  from  the  collection  of  the  Department  of  Tropical 
Research,  have  been  available. 

P.  kishinouyei  differs  from  the  related  American  species  in  that  the 
basis  of  the  second  leg  is  constantly  unarmed.  Its  rostrum  also  seems  to 
bear  a smaller  number  of  teeth  than  in  the  other  species,  the  average  for 
the  six  available  specimens  being  8+1. 

The  petasma  of  the  juvenile  male  from  the  Galapagos  displays  in 
recognizable  form  the  peculiarities  of  the  Revillagigedo  subadult.  The  dis- 
tinctive features  of  the  petasma  of  P.  kishinouyei  are,  that  the  lateral 
shoulder  of  the  distolateral  lobe  of  the  right  endopod  bears  a short  obtuse 
conical  projection;  the  main  or  ventral  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  is  a 
blunt  cone  armed  on  the  dorsal  rim  of  its  distal  end  with  a single  lunate 
row  of  spinules;  the  dorsal  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  is  an  undivided 
projection  much  smaller  than  the  ventral  lobule;  the  projection  or  “dust- 
cover”  of  the  distoventral  lobe  is  distally  deeply  cleft  into  a small  right 
and  large  left  lobule,  the  right  partially  folded  under  the  left. 

The  present  Revillagigedo  female,  by  far  the  largest  specimen  of 
P.  kishinouyei  so  far  recorded,  agrees  with  Rathbun’s  figure  15,  PI.  XII, 
1902,  of  the  Galapagan  type  of  33  mm.,  total  length,  in  that  the  anterior 
margin  of  the  median  plate  of  the  thelycum  is  unarmed.  As  regards  cer- 
tain other  features  of  Rathbun’s  drawing,  particularly  the  enormous  bilobed 
form  indicated  to  characterize  the  coxa  of  the  fourth  legs,  I find  no  cor- 
respondence with  available  material.  Rathbun’s  figure  is  incomplete,  the 
posterior  part  of  the  fourteenth  sternite  not  being  represented.  In  the 
available  juvenile  females  from  the  Galapagos,  the  thelycum  differs  from 
that  of  the  northern  adult  in  that  the  posterior  parts  of  the  median  plate 
are  shorter  and  broader,  and  the  anterior  margin  armed  with  a median 
spine;  these  differences  seem  however  to  be  referable  to  youth.  The  thely- 
cum of  P.  kishinouyei  differs  from  that  of  the  related  Pacific  forms  (aside 
from  the  disappearance  of  the  anteromedian  spine  in  adults,  a unique  fea- 
ture) in  that  the  semicircular  median  elevation  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  is 
not  posteromedially  depressed;  and  the  posterior  parts  of  the  median  plate 
of  XIII  are  moderately  elongate,  little  elevated,  and  taper  to  their  posterior 
ends.  There  appears  to  be  a pair  of  sac-like  membraneous  sperm-receptacles 
invaginated  beneath  the  lateral  hoods  of  sternite  XIV.  The  transverse  plate 
of  XIV  is  about  three  or  four  times  as  broad  as  long;  its  posterior  half 
slopes  sharply  down  to  well  below  the  level  of  the  median  part  of  the  trans- 
verse ridge  of  the  posterior  margin  of  the  sternite.  The  anteromedian  edge 
of  the  transverse  plate  does  not  overhang  the  posterior  parts  of  XIII  or  the 
anteromedian  prolongation  of  XIV. 


Penaeopsis  ( Metapenaeopsisl  b eebei1  sp.  nov. 
(Text-figures  18,  19). 

Type:  Type  and  cotypes,  Cat.  No.  36,983  (4  $,  4 $),  Department  of 
Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society.  Taken  at  Station  136, 
Dredge  30,  Arena  Bank,  Gulf  of  California,  23°  27'  N.  Lat.,  109°  24'  W. 
Long.,  4-foot  dredge,  35  fathoms.  May  1,  1936. 

Range : Gulf  of  Panama;  Lower  California,  3 to  50  fathoms. 
Material:  A total  of  106  specimens  (almost  equally  divided  as  to  sex) 
was  taken  at  San  Lucas  Bay  (Station  135)  and  at  Arena  Bank  (Station 

4 Named  for  Dr.  William  Beebe  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological 
Society. 


1938  J 


Burkenvoad : Penaeidae 


75 


136),  at  the  southern  end  of  Lower  California,  as  follows:  Station  135: 
D-l  (4  3,  1 9),  D-9  (20  3,  21  9),  D-ll  (9  3,  16  9),  D-20  (1  3),  D-18, 
D-19,  D-21  to  D-25  (4  3,  5 9),  D-26  (1  3,  1 2)  ; Station  136:  D-6  (1  3, 
1 9),  D-21  (1  3),  D-24  (2  3,  5 9),  D-26  (1  3)",  D-27  (2  3,  1 9),  D-30 
(4  3,  4 9).  Cat.  Nos.  36,974,  36,975,  36,1027,  36,977,  36,978,  36,979,  36,980, 
36,981,  36,982,  36,983,  36,1028. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Females  ranging  in  carapace  length 
from  13.5  mm.  (impregnated  adult)  to  4.5  mm.  (juvenile)  ; total  length  at 
carapace  10  mm.  about  44  mm.;  at  5 mm.  about  21  mm.  Males  ranging  in 
carapace  length  from  11  mm.  (adult)  to  4 mm.  (juvenile)  ; total  length  at 
carapace  9 mm.  about  42  mm.,  at  5 mm.  about  23  mm.  Petasmal  endopods 
joined  and  of  adult  appearance  down  to  a carapace  length  of  6 mm.  Both 
juveniles  and  adults  are  included  in  all  of  the  more  extensive  samples,  with- 
out any  indication  of  segregation  as  to  either  locality  or  depth. 


Text-figures  18  & 19. 

Penaeopsis  heebei,  n.  sp.  18.  Thelycum  (position  of  right 
sperm-receptacle  indicated  by  cross-hatching)  ; adult 
9 type,  D.  T.  R.  36,983,  x 7.  19.  Petasma  (posterior 
view,  “dust-cap”  bent  down  to  expose  distal  parts)  ; 
adult  3 type,  D.  T.  R.  36,983,  x 15. 

Diagnosis:  Vestigial  anterior  arthrobranch  present  on  the  thirteenth 
somite.  Distoventral  projection  of  the  left  side  of  the  asymmetrical  petasma 
reduced  to  a vestige. 

Rostrum  modally  with  9 teeth  in  addition  to  the  epigastric.  The  sec- 
ond pleonic  tergite  lacks  any  trace  of  median  longitudinal  carina;  the  third 
is  compressed  but  not  sharply  carinated.  Posterior  pair  of  mobile  lateral 
spines  of  the  telson  exceeding  by  little  or  nothing  the  fixed  pair  succeeding 
them.  Stylocerite  less  than  half  as  long  as  the  external  margin  of  the  basal 
segment  of  the  antennular  peduncle.  Basis  of  second  leg  usually  spinose 
but  sometimes  unarmed. 

Median  elevation  of  thirteenth  sternite  of  the  female  with  a subtri- 
angular  outline,  its  posteromedian  portion  much  depressed  below  the  an- 
terior and  lateral  rim;  the  anteromedian  margin  armed  with  an  anteriorly 
directed  spine  of  moderate  size.  Posterolateral  parts  of  the  median  plate 
of  XIII  tear-shaped  in  outline,  anteromedially  depressed,  posterolaterally  ele- 
vated. A pair  of  membraneous  sperm-receptacles  invaginated  to  lie  internal 
to  the  lateral  hoods  of  the  fourteenth  sternite.  Transverse  plate  near  the 
posterior  margin  of  XIV  more  than  six  times  as  broad  as  long;  the  antero- 
median margin  slightly  convex  but  not  produced  to  overhange  the  postero- 


76  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :3 

lateral  parts  of  XIII;  the  posterior  margin  depressed  below  the  level  of  the 
posterior  rim  of  the  stern ite. 

Lateral  shoulder  of  the  distolateral  lobe  of  the  right  endopod  of  the 
petasma  a gently  curved  swelling;  main  or  ventral  lobule  in  ventral  view 
a saddle-shaped  transverse  elevation  crowned  with  a row  of  spinules  on 
each  of  its  two  peaks,  the  lateral  of  the  two  rows  of  spinules  much  more 
extensive  than  the  median  one.  Dorsal  lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  a 
subdivided  projection  nearly  as  bulky  as  the  ventral  lobule  but  almost  en- 
tirely concealed  behind  it  in  ventral  view. 

Remarks:  Penaeopsis  beebei  very  nearly  resembles  P.  mineri  Burken- 
road;  and  indeed,  was  confused  with  the  latter  by  Burkenread,  1934b,  pp. 
25-26,  since  the  Panamanian  male  in  the  collection  of  the  American  Museum 
of  Natural  History  which  was  there  considered  to  be  a variant  individual 
of  P.  mineri  can  now  be  recognized  as  a representative  of  P.  beebei. 

P.  beebei  is  distinguishable  in  non-sexual  characters  from  P.  gooclei 
(Smith)  [and  from  the  African  P.  pubescens  (Bouvier)  ] by  its  relatively 
shorter  stylocerite  and  the  weaker  c-arination  of  its  pleon;  and  from  P.  pube- 
scens by  the  relatively  much  shorter  mobile  lateral  spines  of  its  telson.  It 
differs  from  all  of  the  American  members  of  its  section  in  the  inconsistency 
of  the  armature  of  the  basis  of  its  second  leg,  which  appendage  appears  to 
by  constantly  unarmed  in  P.  kishinouyei,  constantly  armed  in  P.  mineri  and 
the  two  Atlantic  American  species.  In  the  available  material  of  P.  beebei, 
a well-developed  spine  is  present  on  the  basis  of  the  second  leg  in  78  in- 
dividuals, a rudimentary  one  in  8 individuals,  and  no  spine  at  all  in  19  in- 
dividuals. Although  the  spine  modally  diminishes  in  relative  size  with 
decrease  in  size  of  the  individual,  its  absolute  presence  or  absence  seems  to 
be  independent  of  the  size  or  sex  of  the  individual.  Even  at  its  maximum, 
the  spine  is  smaller  in  P.  beebei  than  in  P.  mineri. 

In  rostral,  as  in  pereiopodal  armature,  P.  beebei  falls  between  P.  kishi- 
nouyei and  P.  mineri,  as  tabularly  indicated  below. 


Number  of  Rostral 
Teeth. 

Nun 

P.  kishinouyei. 

nber  of  Individu 
P.  beebei. 

als. 

P.  mineri. 

13+1  epigastric 

0 

0 

1 

12  + 1 

0 

0 

5 

11  + 1 

0 

0 

23 

10  + 1 

0 

4 

23 

9 + 1 

2 

63 

5 

8 + 1 

2 

22 

0 

7 + 1 

2 

0 

0 

In  the  4 individuals  of  P.  beebei  with  ten  rostral  teeth,  and  in  somewhat 
more  than  half  of  the  63  with  nine,  the  anteriormost  tooth  is  rudimentary. 
Variations  in  rostral  ai'mature  show  no  conspicuous  correlation  with  size 
of  individual,  but  the  number  of  teeth  tends  to  be  greater  in  the  females. 
The  rostrum  of  P.  beebei,  as  that  of  other  species  of  the  section,  varies  in 
length  with  size  of  the  individual,  ranging  in  extent  from  the  end  of  the 
first  to  the  middle  of  the  second  segment  of  the  antennular  peduncle.  As 
in  P.  kishinouyei  and  P.  mineri,  the  rostrum  of  P.  beebei  is  somewhat 
deeper  proximally  than  it  is  in  the  Atlantic  American  species. 

P.  beebei  agrees  with  all  of  the  American  species  except  P.  goodei 


1938J 


Burkenroad : Penaeidae 


77 


(Smith)  in  that  the  females  possess  a pair  of  sac -like,  membraneous  sperm- 
receptacles  invaginated  from  the  lateral  portions  of  the  groove  between  the 
twelfth  and  thirteenth  sternites.  The  thelycum  is  very  similar  to  that  of 
P.  mineri  from  which  it  differs  as  regards  the  subtriangular  rather  than 
semicircular  outline  of  the  median  elevation  of  XIII  which  is  armed  with  a 
somewhat  smaller  anteromedian  spine  (this  spine  being  relatively  larger  in 
P.  mineri  than  in  any  of  the  other  American  species).  The  posterior  parts 
of  XIII  are  in  P.  beebei  much  less  narrow,  elongate  and  elevated  than  in 
P.  mineri;  the  transverse  plate  of  XIV  is  shorter  and  its  anterior  margin 
much  less  produced ; the  thelycum  thus  appears  much  less  cuplike  than  in 
P.  mineri.  The  anteromedian  margin  of  the  transverse  plate  of  XIV  is 
convex  rather  than  notched  as  in  P.  mineri. 

To  an  even  greater  extent  than  as  regards  thelycum,  the  petasma  of 
P.  beebei  resembles  that  of  P.  mineri  much  more  nearly  than  that  of  any 
other  species.  The  principal  differences  are  that  in  P.  mineri  the  lateral  of 
the  two  rows  of  spinules  crowning  the  eminences  of  the  ventral  lobule  of 
the  distolateral  lobe  is  hardly  more  extensive  than  the  median  row,  instead 
of  much  more  extensive  as  in  P.  beebei;  and  the  lateral  part  of  the  dorsal 
lobule  of  the  distolateral  lobe  projects  considerably  beyond  the  ventral  lobule 
in  ventral  view  instead  of  being  hidden  behind  it  as  in  the  present  species. 


Penaeopsis  I Metapenaeopsis)  mineri  Burkenroad. 

P.  (M.)  mineri,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  25,  part. 

Range : Lower  California,  both  coasts,  7 to  30  fms. 

Material:  A total  of  61  specimens  (the  males  slightly  outnumbering 
the  females)  was  taken  at  Magdalena  Bay,  Pacific  coast  of  Lower  Cali- 
fornia (Station  131),  San  Lucas  Bay  on  the  southern  coast  (Station  135) 
and  Santa  Inez  Bay  on  the  Gulf  coast  (Stations  141  and  142)  at  depths  of 
6 to  30  fathoms,  as  follows:  Station  131 : D-l  (6  $,  10  2)  ; Station  135:  D-ll, 
D-12  (2  a);  Station  141:  D-l  (3  $),  D-4  (2  $,  5 2)  ; Station  142:  D-l 
(23  $,  10  2).  Cat.  Nos.  36,984,  36,985,  36,986,  36,987,  36,988. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Females  ranging  in  carapace  length 
from  11.5  mm.  (impregnated  adult)  to  5 mm.  (juvenile)  ; males  from  11 
to  5 mm.  The  petasmal  endopods  are  already  joined  distally  in  the  smallest 
specimen  available,  but  are  of  fully  adult  condition  only  above  6 mm.  No 
particular  indication  of  local  segregation  as  to  size  or  sex  is  discernible. 

Remarks : Although  P.  mineri  has  so  far  been  recorded  only  from  Lower 
California,  the  fact  that  there  is  but  one  specifically  determinable  record  of 
the  genus  from  the  Pacific  American  mainland  south  of  22°  N.  permits  no 
speculation  as  to  the  actual  range  of  the  species.  It  is  perhaps  interesting 
that  although  their  ranges  overlap,  P.  mineri  was  taken  in  company  with 
P.  beebei  only  once,  at  Station  135,  and  then  in  very  small  number. 

The  present  extensive  material  requires  modification  of  the  original 
description  in  certain  particulars.  The  rostral  armature  varies  from  9 + 1 
to  13  + 1,  the  modal  number  being  10  or  11  teeth  in  addition  to  the  epi- 
gastric; the  extremes  are  infrequently  found.  Recognition  of  the  “variant” 
Panamanian  male  erroneously  referred  to  the  present  species  in  1934b 
(p.  26)  as  representing  the  closely  related  but  distinct  species  P.  beebei 
disposes  of  the  opinion  previously  held  that  the  basisal  spine  of  the  second 
leg  in  P.  mineri  is  variable  in  occurrence.  The  distoventral  projection  of 
pars  externa  of  the  right  petasmal  endopod  is  not,  as  described  in  1934b 
(p.  28),  shallowly  cleft  into  “a  small  right  and  a large  left  lobe,”  but  into 
two  subequal  lobes  the  left  of  which  partially  conceals  the  right  in  ventral 
view;  the  essential  distinction  between  the  projection  in  P.  mineri  and  in 
P.  kishinouyei  is  therefore  that  in  the  latter  the  left  lobule  is  actually  as 


78 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


well  as  apparently  considerably  larger  than  the  right.  Rathbun’s  statement 
that  the  “left  half”  of  the  “petasma”  of  P.  kishinouyei  is  longer  than  the 
right  evidently  refers  to  the  distoventral  projection  of  pars  externa  of  the 
right  endopod  only;  and  not,  as  interpreted  in  1934b  (p.  28)  to  the  actual 
halves  of  the  petasma,  the  two  endopods. 

In  the  comparison  of  the  thelycum  of  P.  mineri  with  that  of  the 
Atlantic  American  species  of  Metapenaeopsis,  given  in  1934b,  the  statement 
is  made  (p.  28)  that  the  transverse  groove  between  sternites  XIII  and  XIV 
is  in  P.  mineri  “anteromedially  so  shallow  . . . that  it  is  probably  no  more 
than  a vestige  bereft  of  the  sperm-storing  function  which  this  portion  of 
the  groove  possesses  in  P.  goodei  and  P.  smithi;”  and  I have  also  stated 
(p.  10)  that  “in  the  American  species  of  Metapenaeopsis,  no  portion  of  this 
depression  [the  transverse  groove]  is  especially  expanded;  the  spermato- 
phores  enter  each  lateral  half  of  the  groove  by  median  openings,  the  sperm 
being  extruded  at  the  lateral,  anterior  ends  of  the  groove.”  These  state- 
ments are  not  entirely  correct,  and  a more  precise  description  of  sperm- 
storage  in  these  forms  is  therefore  offered  here,  as  follows: 

In  P.  goodei  (as  described  in  1934b,  p.  18),  the  transverse  groove  is 
on  either  side  quite  deep  in  its  entire  length,  and  the  spermatophore  is  in- 
troduced into  the  elongate,  U-shaped  receptacle  of  either  side  at  its  antero- 
median end,  on  the  inner  side  of  the  posterior  part  of  the  median  plate. 
The  median  limb  of  the  U is  occupied  by  an  elongate  cylinder  of  sperm- 
free  material;  while  the  sperm  lie  near  the  exit  of  the  receptacle,  at  the 
anterolateral  end  of  the  U,  which  is  not  particularly  expanded  for  this  func- 
tion. In  P.  smithi,  on  the  contrary,  the  part  of  the  transverse  groove 
homologous  with  the  median  limb  of  the  U in  P.  goodei  is  shallow,  and  is  not 
employed  in  spermatophore  storage;  and  the  entrances  of  the  receptacles 
seem  to  lie  near  the  posterior  ends  of  the  lateral  limbs  of  the  transverse 
groove,  on  the  outer  sides  of  the  posterior  parts  of  the  median  plate ; instead 
of  on  the  inner  sides  of  the  posterior  parts  at  the  anterior  ends  of  the 
median  limbs  of  the  ti'ansverse  groove,  as  in  P.  goodei.  Further,  the  anterior 
ends  of  the  lateral  limbs  of  the  transverse  groove  in  P.  smithi,  near  the 
exits,  are  quite  definitely  expanded  as  membraneous  sacs  into  which  the 
sperm-bearing  portion  of  the  spermatophores  is  introduced;  the  sperm-free 
secretion  of  the  spermatophore  seems  much  reduced  in  quantity  as  com- 
pared with  P.  goodei,  commensurate  with  the  reduction  of  that  part  of  the 
groove  in  which  the  secretion  might  be  stored.  The  receptacular  arrange- 
ments in  the  three  Pacific  American  species  of  the  subgenus  are  very 
similar  to  those  of  P.  ( M .)  smithi,  although  there  is  little  resemblance 
in  superficial  sculpture.  It  therefore  appears  that  as  regards  the  method  of 
sperm  storage,  P.  goodei  is  unique  among  its  American  congeners;  and  it 
seems  possible  that  P.  mineri,  P.  beebei,  and  P.  kishinouyei  are  more  closely 
related  to  P.  smithi  than  to  P.  goodei  and  P.  pubescens  (to  which  P.  kishi- 
nouyei displays  some  superficial  resemblance  in  sculpture  of  the  thelycum). 
It  is  probable,  however,  that  the  three  Pacific  species  are  more  closely  re- 
lated to  one  another  than  they  are  to  any  of  the  Atlantic  forms. 

Trachypeneus  Alcock. 

Subgenus  trachysalambria  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  49. 
section  1,  Burkenroad,  1934a,  p.  94. 

Trachypeneus  similis  paciticus  Burkenroad. 

T.  ( T .)  s.  pacificus,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  50. 

Range : Gulf  of  Panama;  Lower  California,  both  coasts;  12-24  fms. 

Material : Five  specimens  (1  $,  4 5)  were  taken  at  Magdalena  Bay, 


1938J 


Burkenroad : Penaeidae 


79 


Pacific  coast  of  Lower  California,  in  12  fathoms,  March  29,  1936.  (Station 
131  D-l,  Cat.  No.  361,026). 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Females  ranging  in  carapace  length 
from  8 to  12  mm.;  male  7.5  mm.  Juvenile. 

Remarks’.  In  the  adults  of  T.  s.  pad  ficus  the  anterior  margins  of  the 
produced  posterior  lips  of  the  transverse  groove  are  conspicuously  truncated, 
as  stated  in  the  original  description.  In  the  juveniles,  however,  this  trunca- 
tion is  hardly  discoverable,  the  anterior  margins  of  the  lips  being  roundedly 
convex  somewhat  as  in  the  Atlantic  American  species  T.  constrictus  (Stimp- 
son).  In  the  Atlantic  American  T.  s.  similis  (Smith)  the  truncation  develops 
with  age  as  in  T.  s.  pacificus,  but  the  lips  are  never  so  decidedly  convex  as 
they  are  in  the  juveniles  of  the  Pacific  subspecies.  Other  diagnostic  dif- 
ferences between  T.  similis  and  T.  constrictus,  listed  in  1934b,  are  little 
affected  by  growth  in  subadult  stages. 


SECTION  2,  Burkenroad,  1934a,  p.  94. 

Trachypenens  (Trachysalambrial  brevisuturae  Burkenroad. 

T.  (T.)  brevisuturae,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  55. 

(Text-figures  20,  21). 

Range:  El  Salvador;  Lower  California;  3-35  fms. 

Material : A total  of  seven  specimens  (of  which  two  are  males)  was 
taken  at  San  Lucas  Bay  (Station  135)  and  at  Arena  Bank  at  the  southern 
end  of  Lower  California  (Station  136)  in  3 to  35  fathoms,  as  follows: 
Station  135:  D-l  (1  $,  3 5),  D-6  (1  $) , B-18  (1  9)  ; Station  136:  D-30  (1  9). 
Cat.  Nos.  36,989,  36,990,  36,991,  36,992. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Females  ranging  from  carapace 
length  15  mm.,  total  about  58  mm.  (impregnated  adult)  to  carapace  length 
5 mm.  (juvenile).  Both  males  of  carapace  length  7 mm.  (subadults  with 
joined  petasmal  endopods). 

Remarks : The  present  Californian  material  seems  in  close  agreement 
with  the  Salvadorean  holotype  of  the  species,  a subadult  male  of  carapace 
length  6.5  mm.  There  is  very  little  difference  in  non-genital  features  be- 
tween adults  and  juveniles  or  males  and  females;  except  that  in  the  larger 


21 

Text-figures  20  & 21. 

Trachypeneus  brevisuturae  MDB.  20.  Carapace  (anterior  part, 
lateral  view);  adult  9,  D.  T.  R.  36,991,  x 5.5.  21.  Thelycum; 
as  in  20,  x 12. 


80 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


specimens  the  rostrum  is  somewhat  longer  than  in  the  holotype,  reaching 
as  far  as  to  the  middle  of  the  second  segment  of  the  antennular  peduncle. 
In  4 of  the  present  specimens  there  are  seven  rostral  teeth  in  addition  to 
the  epigastric;  in  3,  eight.  The  branchiostegal  carina  is  very  shallow,  but 
quite  perceptible;  it  is  obsolescent,  rather  than  “obsolete”  as  stated  in  the 
original  description. 

Confirming  the  allocation  of  Trachysalambria  brevisuturae  to  Section  2 
of  the  subgenus,  the  thelycum  resembles  that  of  the  other,  Indo-Pacific, 
species  included  in  the  Section,  in  that  the  posteromedian  lip  of  the  trans- 
verse groove  is  not  produced  forward  as  a pair  of  flaps  divided  by  a deep 
incision  in  the  manner  diagnostic  of  Section  1.  The  posterior  lip  of  the 
transverse  groove  of  the  present  species,  although  it  is  continuous  across 
the  midline  in  the  fashion  diagnostic  of  the  subgenus,  overhangs  a median 
cavity  much  shallower  even  than  that  in  the  other  species  of  the  Section. 
The  thelycum  is  superficially  distinguishable  from  that  of  T.  curvirostris  and 
its  allies  in  that  the  posterior  lip  of  the  transverse  groove  is  in  adults  (but 
not  in  juveniles)  medially  convex,  rather  than  concave;  and  in  that  the 
portion  of  sternite  XIV  lying  behind  the  level  of  the  bases  of  the  fifth  legs 
is  longer  than  the  anterior  part,  rather  than  shorter.  The  heart-shaped 
median  plate,  which  is  considerably  depressed  in  the  midline,  especially 
posteriorly,  bears  an  anteromedian  spine  reminiscent  of  that  in  Meta- 
penaeopsis  in  the  three  juvenile  females  of  D.  T.  R.  36989. 

Eusicyonia  Stebbing. 
division  I,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  71. 

Eusicyonia  disparri  Burkenroad. 

E.  disparri,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  83. 

(Text-figures  22,  23). 

Range : Southern  and  Gulf  coasts  of  Lower  California,  beach5  to  35 
fathoms. 

Material : A total  of  3 specimens  (2  8,  1 2)  was  taken  at  Arena  Bank 
(Station  136)  and  at  Santa  Inez  Bay  (Station  142)  in  30  to  35  fathoms,  as 
follows:  Station  136:  D-30  (1  3);  Station  142:  D-l  (1  8,  1 2).  Cat.  Nos. 
36,993,  36,994. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : Female  of  carapace  length  7 mm., 
total  about  29  mm.  Larger  male  of  carapace  length  6.9  mm.;  smaller  of 
carapace  4 mm.,  total  length  15.5  mm.  The  petasma  of  both  males  is  of 
adult  form. 

Remarks : The  female  of  the  present  collection  is  in  detailed  agreement 
with  the  types.  The  larger  male,  taken  in  the  same  catch  as  the  female, 
agrees  well  as  to  sculpture  and  armature  of  carapace  and  pleon,  except  that 
the  posteriormost  rostral  tooth  is  somewhat  farther  in  advance  of  the 
orbital  margin  than  in  material  previously  recorded.  The  small  male  (D.  T. 
R.  36993)  differs  quite  considerably  from  other  known  specimens  of  E.  dis- 
parri, which  are  all  of  considerably  larger  size,  in  that  the  rostral  tip  bears 
only  four  teeth,  the  third  rostral  tooth  is  not  a great  deal  farther  behind  the 
tip  than  it  may  be  in  E.  laevigata  (Stimpson),  the  first  or  posteriormost 
rostral  tooth  is  not  a great  deal  closer  to  the  orbit  than  it  sometimes  is  in 
E.  laevigata  (Stimpson),  the  anterior  postrostral  tooth  is  conspicuously 
smaller  than  the  two  following  ones  (although  it  is  relatively  much  larger 
than  even  the  extreme  in  E.  laevigata),  and  finally,  the  anterior  three 
pleonic  somites  bear  a trace  of  posterior  pleural  sulcus,  much  shorter  and 

5 “Beach”  record  based  on  specimens  taken  in  the  seine  by  the  Pawnee,  at  depths  presumably 
not  greater  than  5 fathoms. 


1938J 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


81 


shallower  than  in  E.  parri  Burkenroad,  but  quite  definite;  and  the  anterior 
tergal  of  the  fourth  somite  is  continuous,  as  in  E.  carinata  (Olivi),  not  in- 
terrupted as  in  E.  laevigata,  E.  parri,  and  the  other  available  specimens  of 
E.  disparri.  In  spite  of  these  differences  from  the  specific  norm  it  seems 
to  me  safest  for  the  present  to  identify  D.  T.  R.  36993  with  E.  disparri. 

The  petasma  of  E.  disparri,  which  has  not  previously  been  described, 
very  nearly  resembles  that  of  E.  laevigata;  the  distolateral  projections  are 
however  turned  conspicuously  inward,  somewhat  as  in  E.  carinata,  instead 
of  extending  straight  distally  in  ventral  view  as  in  E.  laevigata.  A male  of 
E.  parri  taken  by  Dr.  Beebe  in  Bermuda  (which  agrees  very  well  in  non- 
sexual  characters  with  the  female  holotype  from  the  Bahamas)  resembles 
the  present  males  of  E.  disparri  in  form  of  sexual  appendage,  except  that 
the  proximal  border  of  the  notch  in  the  lateral  margins  of  the  petasma  pro- 
trudes beyond  the  margin  proximal  to  it  as  a prominent  shoulder. 


Text-figures  22  & 23. 
Eusicyonia  disparri  MDB.  22. 
Petasma  (posterior 
view) ; adult  $,  D.  T.  R. 
36,994,  x 14.  23.  Eye  (of 
left  side,  dorsal  view)  ; 
adult  9,  D.  T.  R.  36,994. 
x 14. 


Since  the  variant  small  male  referred  with  some  doubt  to  E.  disparri 
above  softens  several  of  the  differences  previously  given  as  distinguishing 
this  species  from  related  forms,  especially  E.  parri,  certain  additional  dis- 
tinctions between  the  Atlantic  and  the  Pacific  forms  may  be  considered. 

In  all  five  of  the  available  specimens  of  E.  disparri  the  middle  part  of 
the  posterior  margin  of  the  pleura  of  the  fourth  pleonic  segment  is  decidedly 
concave  and  is  ventrally  set  off  by  a well-developed  angle  which  in  the  larg- 
est specimens  is  acute.  In  both  specimens  of  E.  parri  (as  in  E.  laevigata 
and  E.  carinata),  the  midsection  of  the  posterior  margin  of  the  fourth 
pleui'a  is  straight  and  the  posterior  rounds  into  the  ventral  margin  without 
a defined  angle.  In  the  five  specimens  of  E.  disparri  the  ventral  margins 
of  the  rostrum,  near  its  distal  end,  bear  one  or  two  small  but  conspicuous 
mobile  spinules  on  either  side,  which  are  absent  in  both  specimens  of 
E.  parri.  In  four  of  the  five  specimens  of  E.  disparri  the  rostrum  bears  a 
fourth  tooth  on  its  dorsal  margin  just  behind  the  tip,  which  is  not  present 
in  either  example  of  E.  parri. 

The  first  of  the  above  characters  may  perhaps  be  subject  to  variation; 
the  second  probably  is  (inasmuch  as  in  a male  and  a female  of  E.  laevigata 
from  the  west  coast  of  Florida  the  mobile  rostral  tooth  [similar  to  those  of 
E.  disparri ] present  in  all  fourteen  members  of  the  species  previously  ex- 
amined by  me,  is  absent)  ; and  the  third  is  certainly  variable;  these  differ- 
ences therefore  appear  not  to  be  diagnostic.  A diagnostic  between  E.  parri 
and  E.  disparri  seems  however  to  be  provided  by  size  and  shape  of  eye.  In 
the  Atlantic  form  the  distal,  cornea-bearing  section  of  the  ocular  peduncle 
is  relatively  longer  and  is  much  less  expanded  at  its  distal  end;  and  the 
cornea  is  smaller  and  is  set  more  transversely  than  in  the  Pacific  material. 
The  difference  in  peduncular  proportions  may  be  expressed  by  the  ratio  of 
the  length  of  the  outer  margin  of  the  peduncle  to  that  of  the  carapace  and 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


82 


[XXIII  :3 


to  the  breadth  of  the  peduncle  across  its  dorsal  surface  at  base  of  cornea, 
as  follows: 


Species. 

Eusieyonia  parri. 

Eusieyonia  disparri. 

Sex. 

9 

8 

8 

8 

9 

9 

9 

Carapace  length 
in  mm. 

6.3 

8.0 

4.0 

6.9 

7.0 

9.2 

9.3 

Ratio  of  length  of 
outer  margin  of  dis- 
tal pai’t  of  ocular 
peduncle  to  carapace 
length. 

.14 

.13 

.10 

.11 

.11 

.09 

.09 

Ratio  of  length  to 
breadth  of  ocular 

.83 

.76 

.58 

.52 

.53 

.52 

.53 

peduncle. 

division  II,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  73. 

Eusieyonia  disedwardsi  Burkenroad. 

E.  disedwardsi,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  86. 

Range:  Lower  California,  Gulf  coast  and  southern  tip;  6 to  50  fathoms. 

Material : A total  of  33  specimens  (about  half  of  them  males)  was 
taken  at  San  Lucas  Bay  (Station  135),  Arena  Bank  (Station  136)  and  Santa 
Inez  Bay  (Stations  141,  142,  143)  in  6 to  50  fathoms,  as  follows:  Station 
135:  D-l  (3  8,  1 9),  D-9,  D-10  (1  9),  D-26  (1  9);  Station  136:  D-l  (1 
9),  D-6  (2  8),  D-24  (2  8,  2 9),  D-30  (4  8,  2 9);  Station  141:  D-l  (1  9), 
D-3  (1  8,  1 9),  D-4  (3  8,  1 9)  ; Station  142:  D-l  (2  8,  3 9),  Station  143:  D-l 
(19).  Cat.  Nos.  36,995,  36,996,  36,997,  36,998,  36,999,  361,000,  361,001, 
361,002,  361,003,  361,004,  361,005,  361,006. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Females  ranging  in  carapace  length 
from  16.2  mm.  to  7 mm.;  males  from  15.3  mm.  to  4.6  mm.  Total  length 
of  the  largest  male,  about  59  mm.  The  haul  from  Station  136,  D-24,  com- 
posed of  the  four  largest  specimens,  is  the  deepest  one  yielding  material  of 
the  species;  but  although  the  smaller  specimens  are  often  those  from  the 
least  depths,  the  correspondence  is  by  no  means  complete.  The  size  of  the 
males  at  maturity  seems  quite  irregular;  there  are  specimens  with  unjoined 
petasmal  endopods  ranging  in  carapace  length  from  6.8  mm.  to  8 mm.,  and 
specimens  with  the  endopods  hooked  together  at  the  distal  end  only  ranging 
in  carapace  length  from  5.5  mm.  to  10  mm. 

Remarks:  Eusieyonia  disedwardsi  was  described  with  some  misgivings 
from  a single  subadult  male;  and  it  is  therefore  with  considerable  satisfac- 
tion that  a confirmation  of  its  right  to  specific  distinction  is  now  offered 
on  the  basis  of  an  ample  material. 

Petasma,  male  genital  sternites,  and  thelycum  are  practically  identical 
with  those  of  E.  edwardsi,  except  that  the  tips  of  the  distolateral  projec- 
tions of  the  petasma  are  often  directed  rather  conspicuously  away  from  the 
midline  instead  of  parallel  to  it.  Differences  from  E.  penicillata  in  petasma, 
previously  described,  are  completely  constant  in  adults  and  are  recognizable 
even  in  very  juvenile  stages.  Differences  in  male  genital  sternite  and  in 
thelycum  between  E.  disedwardsi  and  E.  penicillata,  identical  with  those  be- 
tween the  latter  and  E.  edwardsi,  are  constant  in  adults  but  are  somewhat 
obscure  in  very  juvenile  individuals.  The  divergence  of  the  tips  of  the 
stylets  of  the  ocular  somite,  constant  at  all  sizes,  provides  a clear  though 
minute  distinction  from  E.  penicillata. 


1938] 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


83 


Differences  in  pleonic  sculpture  from  E.  edwardsi  are  constant  and 
diagnostic;  although  the  traces  of  posterior  pleural  sulcus  are  often  stronger 
than  in  the  holotype,  there  is  generally  a faint  trace  of  posterior  tergal  on  the 
first  somite,  and  the  dorsal  end  of  the  posteromedian  pleural  often  reaches 
the  anterior  margin  as  a groove  which  although  shallower  than  in  E.  ed- 
wardsi and  E.  penicillata  is  not  completely  obliterated.  In  large  adults  the 
pleura  of  the  fourth  somite  often  bear  a posterior  ventral  tooth  or  angle. 

The  rostrum  is  almost  constantly  longer  than  the  maximum  in  E.  peni- 
cillata, and  is  usually  more  elevated  than  in  the  related  Pacific  form.  As  a 
very  obvious  distinction  from  both  E.  edwardsi  and  E.  penicillata,  it  may  be 
observed  that  the  rostrum  of  every  available  individual  of  E.  disedwardsi 
bears  two  teeth  behind  the  bifurcated  tip  (in  addition  to  the  “anterior 
tooth  of  the  carapace”  which  is  occasionally  placed  in  advance  of  the 
orbital  margin)  ; whereas  in  the  two  related  species  not  more  than  one 
individual  in  ten  bears  more  than  one  rostral  tooth  behind  the  tip. 

It  may  be  noted  that  in  one  specimen  of  E.  disedwardsi  the  middle  tooth 
of  the  carapace,  in  contrast  to  its  usual  position,  lies  anterior  to  the  level 
of  the  hepatic  spine. 

Like  E.  penicillata  and  several  other  Pacific  species  less  closely  related, 
E.  disedwardsi  is  marked  with  a large  and  conspicuous  ring  or  ocella  of 
pigment  on  the  branchial  region  which  seems,  peculiarly  enough,  to  be  absent 
in  E.  edivardsi  and  in  the  other  Atlantic  members  of  the  genus. 

Eusicyonia  penicillata  (Lockington) . 

Sicyonia  penicillata,  Lockington,  1879,  p.  164;  Pesta,  1915,  p.  118. 

Eusicyonia  penicillata,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  88. 

Range:  Lower  California,  both  coasts;  beach  to  40  fathoms. 

Material:  A total  of  37  specimens  (somewhat  more  than  half  of  these 
being  males)  was  taken  at  Santa  Inez  Bay  (Station  144),  at  San  Lucas 
Bay  (Station  135),  east  of  Cedros  Island  (Station  126),  and  at  Magdalena 
Bay,  in  2 feet  to  40  fathoms,  as  follows:  Magdalena  Bay,  “In  2 to  3 feet  of 
water  under  stone”  (17  $,  14  9)  ; Station  126:  D-3  (3  $,  1 9)  ; Station  135: 
D-ll,  D-12,  (1  $ );  Station  144:  D-7  (1  9).  Cat.  Nos.  361,007,  361,008, 
361,009,  361,010. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Material  from  Station  126  (a  female 
of  carapace  length  18  mm.  and  males  of  12.4  to  16.5  mm.),  falls  within  the 
range  of  sizes  previously  recorded  (1934b,  p.  88)  and  is  fully  adult;  while 
the  male  from  Station  135,  of  carapace  length  9.6  mm.,  although  of  smaller 
size,  appears  to  be  adult.  The  series  from  very  shallow  water  in  Magdalena 
Bay  is  however  composed  exclusively  of  juveniles,  the  first  which  I have  been 
able  to  examine.  Females  of  this  series  range  from  carapace  length  12  mm. 
down  to  carapace  4 mm.,  total  length  17.5  mm.;  and  males  from  carapace 
8 mm.  to  carapace  4.9  mm.,  total  length  18.5  mm.  The  single  female  from 
Station  144  is  also  a juvenile,  of  carapace  length  6.9  mm. 

Remarks : The  present  seem  to  be  the  first  records  of  the  species  from 
outside  the  Gulf  of  California. 

In  my  previous  account  of  E.  penicillata,  I have  unfortunately  over- 
looked the  description  by  Pesta,  1915.  It  may  be  noted  that  the  otherwise 
excellent  figure  7 of  the  petasma,  there  given,  is  inaccurate  in  one  detail, 
in  that  the  accessory  filaments  originate  near  the  middle  of  the  distolateral 
projections,  rather  than,  as  shown,  at  their  bases. 

The  present  juveniles  of  E.  penicillata  display  little  change  from  adult 
form  in  non-sexual  characters,  except  that  as  in  many  related  species  the 
sharp  angle  terminating  the  hinder  end  of  the  dorsal  carina  of  the  fifth 
pleonic  somite  becomes  more  rounded  with  diminishing  size  until  in  the 


84 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


smallest  individuals  there  is  no  trace  of  it.  The  notch  in  the  posterior 
margin  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  loses  its  narrow  subrectangular  outline  in 
the  juveniles  and  becomes  a shallow  concavity;  and  the  ridge  across  the 
posterior  margin  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  of  the  male  loses  its  well-bowed 
appearance,  chiefly  by  the  reduction  in  relative  size  and  the  increased  separa- 
tion of  the  lateral  protuberances. 

In  males  of  carapace  length  7.5  to  8 mm.  the  petasmata  are  hooked 
together  only  at  their  anterior  ends,  and  the  filaments  of  the  various  pro- 
jections are  relatively  shorter  than  in  the  adult.  Below  7.5  mm.  the  endopods 
are  unattached,  but  the  adult  characteristics  of  the  petasma  are  recognizably 
indicated  even  in  the  smallest  individuals,  where  the  accessory  filament 
is  represented  by  a well-defined  shoulder  about  one-third  from  the  tip 
of  the  curtailed  but  very  slender  distolateral  projection. 


Eusieyonia  aliaffinis  Burkenroad. 

Eusicyonia  aliaffinis,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  92. 

(Text-figures  25,  27). 

Range:  Pacific  coast  of  Mexico;  southern  tip  of  Lower  California;  13 
to  30  fathoms. 

Material:  One  male  was  taken  at  San  Lucas  Bay  in  13  fathoms  (Sta- 
ton 135  D-26,  Cat.  No.  361,011). 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  The  specimen,  of  carapace  length 
8.4  mm.,  is  smaller  than  the  holotype,  but  its  petasma  is  fully  developed  and 
of  adult  form,  rather  than  disunited  and  juvenile  as  in  the  type. 

Remarks : The  present  male  agrees  precisely  in  critical  non-sexual  char- 
acters with  the  Mexican  holotype.  The  petasma  shows  no  very  striking 
differences  from  that  of  E.  affinis,  except  in  the  non-projection  of  a small 
cusp  near  the  median  base  of  the  distolateral  projections  which  is  con- 
spicuous in  an  available  large  type  male  of  Faxon’s  species. 

In  addition  to  the  large  specimens  of  E.  affinis  contained  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  a comparison  of  which  with 
E.  aliaffinis  has  been  presented  in  my  previous  discussion  of  that  species 
(1934b),  I have  recently  been  enabled  by  the  kindness  of  Dr.  W.  L.  Schmitt 
of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum  to  examine  the  juvenile  male  of  E.  affinis 
(U.  S.  N.  M.  21169)  which  Faxon,  1895,  p.  179,  records  from  Albatross 
St.  3369,  off  Cocos  Island,  in  52  fathoms.  This  specimen  (figure  24),  of 
carapace  8.8  mm.,  total  length  35  mm.,  is  of  the  same  size  as  the  holotype 
of  E.  aliaffinis.  The  agreement  of  this  specimen  in  all  critical  characters 
with  the  much  larger  individuals  of  E.  affinis  previously  examined,  and  its 
sharp  contrast  with  E.  aliaffinis,  seems  to  provide  justification  for  my 
dismissal  in  1934b,  p.  94,  of  the  possibility  that  E.  aliaffinis  might  “repre- 
sent a developmental  stage  of  E.  affinis.”  The  possibility  that  E.  aliaffinis 
and  E.  affinis  may  represent  extremes  of  variation  connected  by  intergrad- 
ing forms  is  discussed  in  the  next  paragraph. 


Eusicyonia  species. 

(Text-figures  26,  28,  29,  30). 

Range:  Known  only  from  Arena  Bank  at  the  southern  tip  of  Lower 
California;  45-50  fathoms. 

Material:  Two  specimens  (1  $,  1 2)  were  taken  at  Arena  Bank  at  depths 
of  45  to  50  fathoms,  as  follows:  Station  136:  D-13  (IS),  D-24  (12).  Cat. 
Nos.  361,012,  361,013. 


1938J 


Burkenroad, : Penaeidae 


85 


Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  The  male  from  Station  136  has  a 
carapace  length  of  12  mm.,  total  length  about  60  mm.  The  carapace  length 
of  the  female  is  12  mm.  Both  specimens  appear  to  be  fully  adult. 

Remarks : The  present  material,  representing  a species  closely  related 
to  if  distinct  from  E.  aliaffinis  Burkenroad,  agrees  with  the  two  known 
specimens  of  the  latter  and  differs  markedly  from  E.  affinis  Faxon  (figure 
24  above)  as  regards  the  sharp  definition  of  the  angle  terminating  the 
dorsal  carina  of  the  fifth  pleonic  somite;  the  angular  outline  of  the  ventral 
margins  of  the  pleonic  pleura  (especially  those  of  the  fourth  somite,  the 
posterior  ventral  angle  of  which  is  in  the  male  even  spiniform;  and  of  the 
first  somite,  the  anteroventral  margin  of  which  is  in  all  decidedly  concave 
rather  than  conspicuously  convex  as  in  E.  affinis ) ; and  the  coarse  tubercula- 


Eusicyonia  affinis  (Faxon).  24.  Pleon  (lateral  view) ; juvenile  $,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
21,169,  x 5.5. 

Eusicyonia  aliaffinis  MDB.  25.  Pleon  (lateral  view  of  anterior  part,  tuber- 
cles indicated  for  first  two  somites  only)  ; subadult  $,  D.  T.  R.  361,011, 
x 5.5. 

Eusicyonia  species.  26.  Pleon  (lateral  view,  tubercles  indicated  for  first 
two  somites  only) ; adult  9,  D.  T.  R.  361,013,  x 5.5 


86 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


tion  of  the  pleonic  surface.  On  the  other  hand,  however,  the  two  specimens 
from  Station  136  differ  considerably  from  E.  aliaffiinis  and  approach 
E.  affinis  in  that  the  posteromedian  pleural  sulci  of  the  second  and  third 
pleonic  somites  extend  dorsally  only  to  within  a third  of  the  height  of  the 
somite  from  the  dorsal  midline  (instead  of  to  within  a fourth  or  nearer), 
turn  anteriorly  at  their  dorsal  ends,  and  are  margined  above  by  a conspicuous 
longitudinal  ridge. 


Text-figures  27-30. 

Eusicyonia  aliaffinis  MDB. 
27.  Rostrum  (lateral 
view) ; as  in  25,  x 6. 

Eusicyonia  species.  28.  Ros- 
trum (lateral  view)  ; as 
in  26,  x 6.  29.  Rostrum 
(lateral  view)  ; adult  $, 
D.  T.  R.  361,012,  x 6.  30. 
Petasma  (distal  part, 
posterior  view)  ; as  in 
29,  x 13.5. 


The  anteromedian  pleural  sulci  of  the  first,  second  and  third  pleonic 
somites  of  the  two  specimens  from  Station  136  seem  to  fall  about  midway 
in  length  and  definition  between  those  of  E.  affinis  and  E.  aliaffinis.  The 
rostrum  seems  longer  than  that  of  either  E.  affinis  or  E.  aliaffinis,  being 
approximately  half  instead  of  two-fifths  or  less  as  long  as  the  carapace  and 
extending  far  beyond  the  eyes;  and  it  bears  six  teeth  instead  of  five  in 
both  specimens.  While,  however,  the  rostrum  of  the  male  from  Station  136 
is  recurved  nearly  to  the  horizontal  and  the  third  tooth  of  the  dorsal  margin 
lies  far  behind  the  trifurcate  tip,  that  of  the  female  is  recurved  to  an 
angle  of  elevation  much  greater  even  than  in  the  two  available  specimens 
of  E.  aliaffinis,  the  third  dorsal  tooth  forms  part  of  a trifurcate  tip,  and  the 
sixth  tooth  is  placed  on  the  ventral  margin  more  than  half  as  far  from 
the  tip  as  the  penultimate  dorsal  tooth;  the  rostrum  of  the  female  thus 
superficially  somewhat  resembles  that  of  E.  carinata  (Olivi).  The  trans- 
verse ridge  at  the  posterior  margin  of  the  fourteenth  sternite  of  the  male 
from  Station  136  resembles  that  of  E.  aliaffinis  as  regards  its  dimensions, 
but  is  strongly  arched.  The  petasma  differs  slightly  both  from  that  of 
E.  aliaffinis  and  that  of  the  available  large  male  E.  affinis,  in  that  the 
distolateral  projections  are  quite  convergent;  and  in  that  the  small  cusp 
near  the  median  base  of  the  distolateral  projections  is  more  conspicuous  than 
in  E.  aliaffinis,  less  so  than  in  E.  affinis. 

Whether  the  present  material  should  be  regarded  as  a distinct  species, 
as  a variant  form  of  E.  aliaffinis,  or  as  an  intergrade  between  E.  aliaffinis 
and  E.  affinis  seems  difficult  of  decision.  The  fact  that  the  pleonic  sculpture 
is  the  same  in  E.  affinis  of  both  large  and  small  size,  which  is  in  harmony 
with  what  is  known  of  other  members  of  the  genus,  suggests  that  differences 
between  the  various  available  groups  of  individuals  of  the  E.  affinis  super- 
species are  at  least  not  the  correlates  of  differences  in  size.  The  provenance 
of  the  present  material  seems  to  rule  out  local  variation  as  an  explanation 
of  its  attributes.  However,  the  total  number  of  available  individuals  of 
the  superspecies  is  not  yet  sufficient  to  exclude  the  possibility  that  differences 
between  groups  of  these  individuals  are  referable  simply  to  individual 
variation  (and  it  may  be  noted  that  if  the  small  specimen  discussed  on 


1938J 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


87 


p.  80  actually  refers  to  E.  disparri,  its  pleonic  characters  imply  that  con- 
siderable departure  from  the  specific  norm  may  sometimes  occur  in  species 
of  the  genus).  Although  it  seems  to  me  possible  that  the  present  specimens 
represent  a third  species  distinct  from  both  E.  affinis  and  E.  aliaffinis,  their 
systematic  status  may  be  left  undefined  until  further  material  has  become 
available. 

Eusicyonia  picta  (Faxon). 

Sicyonia  picta,  Faxon,  1893,  p.  210. 

Eusicyonia  picta,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  95. 

Range : Off  Mariato  Point  and  in  the  Gulf  of  Panama,  127  to  182 
fathoms;  southern  and  Gulf  coasts,  Lower  California,  beach11  to  60  fathoms. 

Material:  A total  of  six  specimens  (including  1 male)  was  taken  at 
Arena  Bank  (Station  136)  and  at  Santa  Inez  Bay  (Station  147)  in  depths 
of  30  to  45  fathoms;  as  follows:  Station  136:  D-ll  (1  2),  D-12  (1  2),  D-15 
(1  2)  ; Station  147:  (IS,  2 2).  Cat.  Nos.  361,014,  361,029,  361,016. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Females  ranging  in  length  from 
carapace  14  mm.,  total  56  mm.,  to  carapace  8 mm.  Male  of  carapace  length 
7.5  mm.  The  largest  female  is  considerably  smaller  than  Faxon’s  type-speci- 
men of  70  mm.  The  petasma  of  the  male  is  of  adult  form. 

Remarks : The  rostral  armature  varies  in  the  present  material  from 
three  dorsal  and  two  terminal  to  four  dorsal  and  three  terminal  teeth. 
The  spacing  and  position  of  the  dorsal  rostral  teeth,  and  the  length,  eleva- 
tion and  curvature  of  the  rostral  blade  are  quite  variable.  Although  Cali- 
fornian material  of  E.  picta  has  not  been  directly  compared  with  the 
Panamanian  types,  there  seems  little  reason  to  doubt  its  identity  with  the 
latter. 

A direct  comparison  of  E.  picta  with  two  females  and  a male,  paratypes 
of  E.  stimpsoni  (Bouvier),  from  Blake  Station  293,  Barbados,  82  fms., 
which  were  very  kindly  loaned  by  Dr.  F.  A.  Chace,  Jr.,  of  the  Museum  of 
Comparative  Zoology,  confirms  the  suggestions  previously  made  (Burken- 
road, 1934b,  p.  96)  as  to  characters  distinguishing  the  two  species.  In  addi- 
tion to  the  conspicuously  greater  breadth  and  depth  of  its  carapace  and 
pleon,  its  longer  rostrum  with  ventral  tooth  very  distinctly  separated  from 
the  two  dorsal  elements  of  the  tip,  and  the  deeper  sculpture  of  its  pleon, 
E.  stimpsoni  seems  to  differ  from  E.  picta  as  follows : Its  pleon  is  tuber- 
culate,  not  punctate  only  as  in  E.  picta.  The  lateral  ridge  of  its  rostrum 
is  usually  concave  dorsally,  so  that  the  ridge  is  closer  and  more  nearly 
parallel  to  the  ventral  margin  of  the  rostrum  than  in  E.  picta  where  the 
ridge  is  usually  concave  ventrally.  Its  eye  and  the  peduncle  of  its  antenna 
seem  somewhat  smaller  and  shorter  and  its  stylocerite  longer.  The  dis- 
tolateral  projections  of  its  petasma  are  curved  much  more  to  median  than 
is  usual  in  E.  picta.  Finally,  whereas  in  a male  of  E.  picta  of  carapace 
11  mm.  (B.  O.  C.  No.  81)  the  petasma  is  2.9  mm.  long  by  1.3  mm.  broad, 
and  in  the  present  male  of  E.  picta  of  carapace  7.5  mm.  the  petasma 
measures  1.3  x 0.7  mm.,  in  the  available  male  of  E.  stimpsoni,  of  carapace 
7.0  mm.,  the  petasma  measures  2.5  x 1.2  mm.,  a size  relatively  much  greater 
than  in  E.  picta,. 


Eusicyonia  disdorsalis  Burkenroad. 

E.  disdorsalis,  Burkenroad,  1934b,  p.  96. 

Range:  Gulf  of  Panama,  southern  tip  of  Lower  California,  3 to  24 
fathoms. 

6 “Beach”  record  based  on  specimen  taken  in  the  seine  by  the  Pawnee,  at  a depth  presumably 
not  greater  than  5 fathoms. 


88 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


Material:  A total  of  10  specimens  (of  which  about  half  are  males) 
was  taken  at  San  Lucas  Bay  (Station  135)  in  3 to  20  fathoms,  as  follows: 
Station  135:  D-ll,  D-12  (2  S,  4 2),  D-18,  D-19  (2  $),  D-20  (2  2).  Cat. 
Nos.  361,017,  361,018,  361,019. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition : All  of  the  specimens  are  of  very 
small  size,  the  females  ranging  in  carapace  length  from  6 mm.  to  8 mm., 
the  males  from  5 mm.  to  7 mm.  The  petasma  is,  however,  of  adult  form 
and  condition  in  all  of  the  males,  which  are  presumably  adult. 

Remarks:  No  distinction  between  the  present  material  and  that  pre- 
viously known,  from  the  Gulf  of  Panama,  is  apparent. 


Eusieyonia  ingentis,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-figures  31-34). 

Type:  Type  and  Cotypes,  Cat.  No.  361,025,  Department  of  Tropical 
Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society  (6  $,  4 2).  Station  127,  Dredge  1, 
off  east  coast  of  Cedros  Island,  west  coast  of  Lower  California,  28°  05' 
N.  Lat.,  115°  09'  W.  Long.  4-foot  dredge,  38  fathoms,  March  27,  1936. 

Range:  Known  only  from  the  present  records,  from  east  of  Cedros 
Island  on  the  Pacific  coast  of  Lower  California,  in  38  to  60  fathoms. 

Material:  A total  of  63  specimens  (of  which  number  about  three-fifths 
are  males)  was  taken  east  of  Cedros  Island  (Stations  125,  126  and  127)  in 
depths  of  38  to  60  fathoms,  as  follows:  Station  125:  D-l  (7  $,  1 2); 

Station  126:  D-2  (4  $,  6 2),  D-3  (21  $,  12  2),  D-4  (1  5),  D-10  (1  2)  ; Station 
127:  D-l  (6  $,  4 2).  Cat.  Nos.  361,020,  361,021,  361,022,  361,023,  361,024, 
361,025. 

Dimensions  and  Sexual  Condition:  Females  ranging  in  length  from 
carapace  27  mm.,  total  length  105  mm.,  to  carapace  7 mm.,  total  30  mm. 
Males  ranging  in  length  from  carapace  22  mm.,  total  86  mm.  to  carapace 
5 mm.,  total  20  mm.  There  is  no  clear  evidence  of  local  segregation  as  to 
size  or  sex.  The  petasmal  endopods  are  of  adult  form  and  are  joined  to- 
gether in  males  down  to  10.5  mm.  in  carapace  length. 

Diagnosis : Antennal  angle  with  a buttressed  tooth ; dorsal  carina  of  the 
second  pleonic  somite  not  incised;  basis  and  ischium  of  the  first  chelipeds 
unarmed.  The  carapace  is  armed  with  two  middorsal  teeth,  one  before  and 
one  behind  the  level  of  the  hepatic  spine;  the  rostrum  is  armed  above  with 
three  teeth  and  has  a bifurcate  tip. 

The  rostrum  is  more  than  one-third  as  long  as  the  carapace  and  is 
distally  quite  slender;  it  is  proximally  decurved,  but  the  tip  is  often  turned 
up  somewhat  at  an  angle  to  the  proximal  part.  The  lateral  ridge  of  the 
rostrum  parallels  the  ventral  margin  of  the  blade  throughout  its  length. 
The  ridge  (cardiacobranchial)  extending  posteriorly  on  the  sides  of  the 
carapace  from  behind  the  hepatic  spine,  is  conspicuous,  especially  in  large 
individuals. 

The  telson  is  long  and  slender,  the  width  of  its  base  being  no  more 
than  a quarter  of  its  length;  and  is  armed  with  a conspicuous  pair  of 
fixed  lateral  spines.  The  middorsal  carina  of  the  fifth  pleonic  somite  de- 
scends very  gently  at  its  posterior  end.  The  anteromedian  pleural  sulcus 
of  the  first  pleonic  somite  is  faintly  continued  below  its  well-defined  dorsal 
section  as  a very  shallow  depression.  The  pleural  margin  of  the  first 
pleonic  somite,  anterodorsal  to  the  ventral  angle,  is  straight. 

The  dorsal  surface  of  the  distal  part  of  the  ocular  peduncle  bears,  near 
its  distolateral  margin,  a pencil  of  hairs  which  when  unbroken  reaches  far 
beyond  the  eye  in  large  adults,  although  it  is  sometimes  much  shorter  in 
small  specimens.  The  terminal  segment  of  the  antennal  peduncle  is  very 


1938  J 


BurJcenroad:  Penaeidae 


89 


long  and  slender,  its  diameter  being  no  more  than  one-fifth  its  length.  The 
telson  does  not  extend  as  far  as  do  the  uropods  in  adults,  although  it  may 
exceed  them  in  juveniles. 

The  blunt-tipped  distoventral  projections  of  the  petasma  bear  a shal- 
low proximolateral  prominence,  distal  to  which  the  projections  extend  paral- 
lel to  and  nearly  or  quite  as  far  as  do  the  distolateral  lobes.  The  distolateral 
lobes  are  divergent  from  the  median  plane. 

The  depressed  median  interspace  between  the  raised  posterolateral 
parts  of  the  buttress  of  the  median  spine  of  the  thirteenth  sternite  in  the 
female  is  little  if  at  all  wider  than  are  the  raised  parts.  The  spine  between 
the  first  pleopods  of  the  female  is  broadly  subtriangular  in  ventral  outline, 
with  convex  lateral  margins. 

Remarks : The  length  attained  by  E.  ingentis  is  somewhat  greater  than 
seems  heretofore  to  have  been  recorded  for  the  subfamily,  although  the 
animal,  being  a relatively  slender  one,  is  outbulked  by  the  corpulent  species 
next  it  in  length,  E.  brevirostris  (Stimpson). 

Eusicyonia  ingentis  is  closely  related  to  E.  dorsalis  (Kingsley)  and  its 
Pacific  congener  E.  disdorsalis  Burkenroad,  from  which  it  is  most  strikingly 
distinguished  by  the  form  of  its  petasma.  Aside  from  being  a much  larger 
species,  its  habitus  is  relatively  more  elongate  and  slender  than  in  the 
related  forms,  a tendency  particularly  pronounced  as  regards  rostrum,  telson, 
and  antennal  peduncle.  The  details  in  which  E.  ingentis  differs  most  mark- 
edly from  E.  disdorsalis  are  those  listed  in  the  paragraphs  of  the  diagnosis 
subsequent  to  the  first ; thus  in  E.  disdorsalis  the  lateral  ridge  of  the  rostrum 
usually  arches  up  from  the  ventral  margin  near  the  distal  end;  the  broad 
ridge  posteriorly  continuing  the  hepatic  buttress  is  ill-defined;  the  lateral 
teeth  of  the  telson  are  very  minute  and  inconspicuous,  especially  in  large 


Text-figures  31-34. 

Eusicyonia  ingentis,  n.  sp.  31.  Carapace  (lateral  view)  ; juvenile  2,  D.  T.  R. 
361,021,  x 4.5.  32.  Telson  and  right  uropod  (dorsal  view)  ; adult  $ of 
total  length  64  mm.,  D.  T.  R.  361,021,  x 4.5.  33.  Fifth  pleonic  somite 
(lateral  view) ; as  in  32,  x 4.5.  34.  Petasma  (posterior  view) ; as  in 
32,  x 10. 


90 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :3 


specimens ; the  posterior  end  of  the  dorsal  carina  of  the  fifth  pleonic  somite 
is  in  adults  sharply  angular,  although  in  juveniles  it  may  descend  gently; 
the  anteromedian  pleural  sulcus  of  the  first  pleonic  somite  is  not  continued 
below  its  well-cut  dorsal  section;  the  anteroventral  pleural  margin  of  the 
first  pleonic  somite  is  concave  in  adults,  although  it  is  straight  in  juveniles; 
the  pencil  of  setae  on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  ocular  peduncle  extends  no 
more  than  half  way  across  the  cornea;  the  telson  exceeds  the  uropods;  the 
distolateral  lobes  of  the  petasma  curve  toward  the  midline;  the  proximo- 
lateral  ramus  of  the  distoventral  projection  of  the  petasma  exceeds  the  acute, 
laterally  directed  distal  part  in  size;  the  depressed  area  of  the  base  of  the 
spine  of  sternite  XIII  of  the  female  is  much  wider  than  the  raised  parts 
flanking  it;  and  the  tooth  between  the  first  pleopods  in  females  is  narrow 
and  usually  with  concave  lateral  edges. 

At  dimensions  at  which  E.  ingentis  is  juvenile,  with  minute  undevel- 
oped petasmal  endopods,  E.  disdorsalis  presents  all  the  characters  of 
maturity. 


Literature  Cited. 

Balss,  H.: 

1927.  Macrura  der  Deutschen  Tiefsee-Expedition.  2.  Natantia,  Teil  A.  ILiss. 
Ergeb.  D.  T.-E.,  XXIII,  6. 

Boone,  P.  L.: 

1930.  Crustacea:  Anomura,  Macrura  . . . Bull.  Vanderbilt  Marine  Mus., 
III.  Huntington,  N.  Y. 

1931.  Anomuran,  Macruran  Crustacea  from  Panama  and  Canal  Zone.  Bull. 
American  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  LXIII,  2. 

Bouvier.  E.  L. : 

1906.  Sur  les  Gennadas  ou  Peneides  bathypelagique.  Bull.  Mus.  Oc.  Monaco, 
LXXX. 


Burkenroad,  M.  D.: 

1934a.  The  Penaeidea  of  Louisiana.  Bull.  American  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  LXVIII, 

2. 

1934b.  Littoral  Penaeidea  chiefly  from  the  Bingham  Oceanographic  Collection. 
Bull.  B.  O.  C.  IV,  7. 

1936.  The  Aristaeinae,  Solenocerinae  and  Pelagic  Penaeinae  of  the  Bingham 
Oceanographic  Collection.  Bull.  B.  O.  C.,  V,  2. 

Faxon,  W.: 

1893.  Reports  on  the  Dredging  Operations  ...  by  the  U.  S.  F.  C.  S.  “Alba- 
tross.” VI.  Preliminary  Descriptions  of  New  Species  of  Crustacea.  Bull. 
Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  Harvard,  XXIV,  7. 

1895.  Reports  on  an  Exploration  off  the  west  coasts  of  Mexico,  Central  and 
South  America,  and  off  the  Galapagos  Islands  . . . XV.  The  Stalk- 
Eyed  Crustacea.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  Harvard,  XVIII. 

Holmes,  S.  J.: 

1895.  Notes  on  West  American  Crustacea.  Proc.  Cal.  Acad.  Sci.,  (2)  IV. 
1900.  Synopses  of  California  stalk-eyed  Crustacea.  Occ.  Pap.  Cal.  Acad. 
Sci.,  VII. 

Kemp,  S.  W. : 

1910.  Notes  on  Decapoda  in  the  Indian  Museum.  I.  The  Species  of  Gennadas. 
Rec.  Indian  Mus.,  V,  17. 

Kingsley,  J.  S. : 

1878.  Notes  on  North  American  Caridea  in  the  Museum  of  the  Peabody  Aca- 
demy of  Science.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia,  XXX. 

1879.  On  a collection  of  Crustacea  from  Virginia,  North  Carolina  and 
Florida.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Philadelphia,  XXXI. 


1938  J 


Burkenroad:  Penaeidae 


91 


Lockington,  W.  N.: 

1879.  Notes  on  Pacific  Coast  Crustacea.  Bull.  Essex  Inst.,  X (1878). 

Man,  J.  G.  De: 

1911.  Decapoda  of  the  Siboga  Expedition.  I.  Penaeidae.  Siboga-Expeditie, 
XXXIXa  [and  plates,  1913,  suppl.  XXXIXa]. 

Milne  Edwards,  A.  & Bouvier,  E.  L.: 

1909.  Reports  on  the  Results  of  Dredging  ...  by  the  U.  S.  C.  S.  S.  “Blake” 
. . . XLIV.  Peneides  et  Stenopides.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.  Harvard, 
XXVII,  3. 

Pesta,  0.: 

1915.  Die  Penaeidea  des  Wiener  Naturhistorischen  Hofmuseums.  Arch.  f. 
Naturg.,  LXXXI,  A,  1. 

Rathbun,  M.  J.: 

1902.  Papers  from  the  Hopkins  Stanford  Galapagos  Expedition  . . . VIII. 

Brachyura  and  Macrura.  Proc.  Washington  Acad.  Sci.,  IV. 

1904.  Decapod  Crustaceans  of  the  Northwest  Coast  of  North  America.  Har- 
riman  Alaska  Exped.,  X. 

Schmitt,  W.  L. : 

1921.  Marine  decapod  Crustacea  of  California.  Univ.  California  Publ.  Zool., 

XXIII. 

1924.  The  Macrura  and  Anomura  collected  by  the  Williams  Galapagos  Ex- 
pedition, 1923.  Zoologica  (Sci.  Contr.  New  York  Zool.  Soc.),  V,  15. 
1935.  The  West  American  Species  of  Shrimps  of  the  Genus  Penaeus.  Proc. 
Biol.  Soc.  Washington,  XLVIII. 


Smith  & Coates:  Fibro- epithelial  Growths  in  Turtles 


93 


4. 

Fibro-epithelial  Growths  of  the  Skin  in  Large  Marine  Turtles, 
Chelonia  my  das  (Linnaeus). 

G.  M.  Smith 

Department  of  Anatomy,  Yale  School  of  Medicine, 
and  Neiv  York  Aquarium 
& 

C.  W.  Coates 

New  York  Aquarium 

(Plates  I-XVIII). 

Diseases  of  turtles  have  received  but  relatively  little  study  up  to  the 
present  time  and  not  much  is  known  about  the  benign  or  malignant  tumors 
of  these  reptiles.  In  a report  on  the  causes  of  deaths  in  the  London  Zoo- 
logical Gardens,  Plimmer  (1912,  1913)  reported  two  cases  of  such  growths. 
Scott  and  Beattie  (1927),  referring  to  Plimmer’s  observation,  state  that 
one  tumor  was  a glandular  cancer  of  the  stomach  in  an  elephantine  tortoise 
and  that  the  second  was  a multi-nucleated  tumor  involving  heart  muscle 
of  Sternothaerus  niger,  a fresh  water  turtle  from  the  Cameroon  area  of 
West  Africa.  These  authors  point  out  that  of  six  thousand  reptiles  of 
various  kinds  autopsied  at  the  London  Zoological  Gardens,  only  two  showed 
tumors  as  the  cause  of  death.  Pick  and  Poll  (1903)  described  an  adenoma- 
tous growth  of  the  thyroid  of  the  Brazilian  fresh  water  turtle,  Platemys 
geoffroyana  ( Hydraspis  geoffroyana) . This  was  a large  mass  measuring 
6 x 4 x 2.5  cm.,  consisting  of  narrow  cylindrical  cells  in  small  acinar  ar- 
rangement with  lumina  containing  granular  material. 

In  December,  1936,  it  came  to  our  attention  that  one  of  the  large  marine 
turtles,  Chelonia  mydas  (Linnaeus),  of  the  New  York  Aquarium  presented 
multiple  warty  growths  of  the  skin.  This  turtle,  shipped  from  Key  West, 
Florida,  two  years  previously,  occupied  a large  harbor  water  tank  with  two 
others  of  the  same  species  and  with  two  large  loggerhead  turtles,  Thalas- 
sochelys  caretta  (Linnaeus).  None  of  the  other  four  turtles  exhibited 
papillomatous  lesions,  although  an  exposure  to  possible  infection  had  existed 
for  more  than  a year.  The  water  supply  of  the  tank  is  a continuous  flow  of 
harbor  water,  which  is  brackish  and  changes  density  with  the  change  of  tide. 

The  turtle  showing  multiple  warts  weighed  approximately  one  hundred 
and  fifty  pounds.  Papillomata  were  distributed  in  the  region  over  the 
dorsal  part  of  the  neck  in  both  non-pigmented  and  pigmented  areas  and 
in  the  light  gray  or  whitish  areas  of  both  axillae  and  both  groins  (Figs.  1 
and  2).  There  were  in  addition  several  small  warty  excrescences  in  the 
outer  regions  of  the  upper  eyelids  involving  the  conjunctivae.  Tissues  were 


94 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :4 


removed  from  the  neck  for  microscopic  study  and  a month  later  more 
tissues  were  excised  from  several  sites  for  transplantation  experiments. 

Recently  (December,  1937)  it  was  determined  that  cutaneous  fibro- 
epithelial  growths  occur  in  Chelonia  mydas  (Linnaeus)  under  normal  con- 
ditions of  wild  life.  Three  instances  of  this  disease  were  found  in  these 
large  marine  turtles  (weighing  from  sixty  to  two  hundred  pounds)  in  the 
course  of  an  examination  of  some  two  hundred  turtles  of  this  species 
caught  in  the  waters  south  of  Key  West.  The  distribution  of  the  growths 
in  the  wild  turtles  likewise  occupied  the  dorsal  aspect  of  the  neck,  the 
axillae,  groins  and  eyelids.  The  histological  details  of  the  lesions  in  the 
wild  turtle  resembled  in  general  those  of  the  original  turtle  studied  in 
the  New  York  Aquarium  and  it  was  thought  probable  that  the  disease  in 
wild  life  and  that  seen  in  the  Aquarium  represented  the  same  condition. 

For  purposes  of  pathological  description,  the  cutaneous  growths  of 
the  large  marine  turtle  now  under  consideration  may  be  referred  to  as 
fibro-epithelial  in  character.  There  appeared  to  be  considerable  variety 
in  the  size,  form  and  arrangement  of  the  masses  of  tissue  (Figs.  3 to  8). 
Outstanding  were  the  papillary,  coral  or  cauliflower-like  growths  (Figs.  5 
to  8).  Figure  7 represents  a growth  arising  from  non-pigmented  skin,  while 
the  tumor  in  Fig.  8 is  derived  from  a pigmented  area.  Less  frequently 
smooth  oval  or  round  fibromata  projected  above  the  level  of  the  skin  (Figs. 
12  and  13).  Both  papillomata  and  fibromata,  caused  perhaps  by  the  same 
agent,  appeared  as  single  or  confluent  masses  in  the  same  turtle.  Papil- 
lomata and  fibromata  at  times  grew  in  immediate  apposition.  All  growths 
had  a firm  gritty  consistency  and  areas  of  calcification  at  the  surface  of 
tumors  were  not  uncommon.  In  the  preparation  of  histological  sections,  it 
was  found  advisable  to  subject  all  tissues  to  decalcification.  Papillomata 
varied  in  size  from  3 mm.  to  3 cm.  while  solitary  fibromata  measured 
as  much  as  2.5  cm.  in  diameter. 

The  internal  structure  of  papillary  growths  became  clear  on  sectioning 
the  gross  specimens  and  inspecting  their  cut  surfaces  (Figs.  9 to  11).  At- 
tached to  the  skin  by  a sessile  or  pedunculated  base,  the  stroma  of  the 
various  growths  was  composed  of  dense  intermingling  fibrous  tissue  which 
spread  out  toward  the  surface  in  many  lesser  ramifications  to  form  rounded, 
bulbous  or  pointed  terminal  tips  covered  with  thickened  surface  epithelium. 

The  microscopic  structure  of  normal  skin  of  Chelonia  mydas  is  shown 
in  Fig.  17.  Compared  with  this  the  epithelium  covering  papillomata  appeared 
to  be  somewhat  thickened  and  covered  with  an  irregular  mass  of  keratin 
(Fig.  21).  The  size  and  shapes  of  epithelial  cells  varied  greatly  and  inter- 
cellular bridges  of  prickle  cells  were  strongly  developed  (Fig.  23).  Epithelial 
columns  and  cords  often  dipped  down  deeply  into  the  supporting  stroma 
(Fig.  22).  So-called  epithelial  “pearls”  were  frequently  encountered,  not 
unlike  those  found  in  mammalian  epithelial  tumors  (Fig.  24).  The  vascular 
supply  of  papillomata  is  a network  of  small  blood  vessels.  It  was  not  unusual 
to  have  collections  of  lymphocytes  grouped  around  small  blood  vessels,  indi- 
cating possibly  a low  grade  of  inflammation  (Fig.  27).  Cell  inclusions  were 
not  demonstrated  in  the  sections  examined.  Dendritic  pigment  cells  fre- 
quently accompanied  blood  vessels  (Fig.  25),  or  they  existed  in  diffuse  dis- 
tribution in  the  stroma  below  the  surface  epithelium  (Fig.  26).  In  highly 
pigmented  areas,  numerous  melanophores  were  found  at  the  surface  between 
epithelial  cells. 

The  fibromata  of  the  turtle’s  skin  (Figs.  12  and  13)  were  relatively 
simple  in  microscopic  architecture,  being  composed  of  intermingling  bands 
of  fibrous  tissue  varying  in  density  (Figs.  28  and  29),  covered  on  the 
surface  with  but  slightly  thickened  epithelium  (Fig.  28).  Although  the 
skin  covering  fibromata  could  appear  non-pigmented  so  that  tumors  looked 
white  on  external  examination,  the  interiors  were  usually  gray  or  a streaky 
black  due  to  the  presence  of  pigment  cells  which  followed  the  course  of  blood 


1938] 


Smith  & Coates:  Fibro-epithelial  Growths  in  Turtles 


95 


vessels  (Fig.  28).  Small  nerve  trunks  were  found  in  one  of  the  sections 
of  a fibroma  (Fig.  30). 

It  was  noted  that  papilloma  and  fibroma  existed  at  times  in  a combined 
form  of  tumor.  This  was  illustrated  very  well  in  a large  growth  measuring 
8x6x5  cm.,  taken  from  the  right  side  of  the  neck  of  one  of  the  Key  West 
turtles  (Fig.  15).  The  large  bosses  (F)  of  this  growth  were  fibromata, 
while  at  point  P a distinct  papilloma  existed,  fused  with  the  rest  of  the 
mass.  Figure  16  shows  the  interior  of  this  tumor  to  be  composed  of  five 
smaller  fibromata,  white  or  partly  pigmented.  Nearly  all  fibromata  showed 
microscopic  evidences  of  peri-vascular  melanophores  (Fig.  28). 

These  fibro-epithelial  tumors  of  the  turtle  show  no  malignant  changes. 
Mitotic  figures  are  few  in  number. 


Comment. 

The  stimulus  to  the  formation  of  cutaneous  fibro-epithelial  growths  in 
Chelonia  mydas  remains  for  the  present  undetermined.  It  is  interesting  to 
note  that  fishermen  of  the  white  population  at  Key  West,  exposed  for  many 
years  to  the  sun,  frequently  develop  keratoses  and  malignant  changes  of  the 
skin,  whereas  it  is  said  that  with  fishermen  of  the  colored  population 
such  changes  are  rare  occurrences.  It  is  conceivable  that  these  great  sea 
turtles,  even  though  in  an  aquatic  environment,  may  respond  to  exposure  to 
the  sun  prolonged  over  many  years  by  papillomatous  changes  affecting  the 
skin.  A different  explanation  for  the  etiology  of  the  disease  other  than 
the  above  mentioned  is  more  likely,  such  as  infection  by  parasites  or  by  an 
unknown  virus.  No  parasites  were  noted  so  far  in  the  tumor  tissues  of 
the  four  turtles  examined.  It  is  known  that  certain  infectious  warts  of  man, 
dog  and  cattle  are  of  virus  origin.  Infectious  papillomatosis  of  rabbits  has 
been  shown  by  Shope  (1933)  and  Rous  and  Beard  (1934)  to  have  its  origin 
in  a virus.  Such  an  etiology  for  the  cutaneous  turtle  fibro-papillomata  is  not 
unlikely.  The  study  of  the  transmissibility  of  the  turtle  papilloma  has  been 
begun  and  it  is  hoped  to  report  on  this  at  a later  date. 

Summary. 

Cutaneous  fibro-epithelial  growths  in  four  large  marine  sea  turtles, 
Chelonia  mydas  (Linnaeus),  are  described,  with  a discussion  of  their  micro- 
scopic structure. 


Bibliography. 


Pick,  L.  and  Poll,  H. 

1903.  Ueber  einige  bemerkenswerthe  Tumorbildungen  aus  der  Thier- 
pathologie,  insbesondere  fiber  gutartige  und  krebsige  Neubildungen 
bei  Kaltblfitern.  Berlin  Klin.  Woch.  24:547. 

Plimmer,  H.  G. 

1912.  Report  on  the  deaths  which  occurred  in  the  Zoological  Gardens  dur- 
ing 1911.  Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London.  1:235. 

1913.  Report  on  the  deaths  which  occurred  in  the  Zoological  Gardens  dur- 
ing 1912,  together  with  the  blood-parasites  found  during  the  year. 
Proceedings  of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London.  1:141. 

Rous,  P.  and  Beard,  J.  W. 

1934.  A virus  induced  mammalian  growth  with  characters  of  a tumor  (the 
Shope  rabbit  papilloma).  Jonrn.  of  Exper.  Med.  60:701. 


96 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :4 


Scott,  H.  H.  and  Beattie,  J. 

1927.  Neoplasm  in  a Porose  Crocodile.  Journal  of  Pathology  and  Bac- 
teriology. 30:61. 

Shope,  R.  E. 

1933.  Infectious  papillomatosis  of  rabbits.  Journ.  of  Exper.  Med.  58:607. 


1938] 

Figs.  1 i 

Fig.  3. 
Fig.  4. 

Figs.  5 t 
Fig.  7. 

Fig.  8. 

Fig.  9. 

Fig.  10. 
Fig.  11. 

Fig.  12. 
Fig.  13. 

Fig.  14. 

Fig.  15. 

Fig.  16. 

Fig.  17. 
Fig.  18. 


Smith  & Coates:  Fibro-epithelial  Growths  in  Turtles  97 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

& 2.  Marine  turtle,  Chelonia  mydas,  weighing  about  150  pounds,  show- 
ing distribution  of  papillomata  on  neck,  axillae  and  eyelid. 

Plate  II. 

Small  papillomata.  A pigmented  growth  at  x. 

Papillomata  of  various  shapes.  E is  tissue  removed  from  upper  eyelid 
with  papilloma  growing  on  the  margin  of  eyelid. 

Plate  III. 

& 6.  Larger  forms  of  papillomata., 

Plate  IV. 

One  of  the  larger  forms  of  papillomata.  Shows  papilloma  arising  from 
non-pigmented  skin. 

Plate  V. 

One  of  the  larger  forms  of  papillomata.  Shows  papilloma  derived  from 
pigmented  skin. 

Plate  VI. 

Cut  surfaces  of  gross  specimens  of  papillomata. 

Plate  VII. 

Cut  surface  of  gross  specimen  of  papilloma. 

Cut  surface  of  gross  specimen  of  papilloma,  showing  a deeply  pigmented 
stroma. 

Plate  VIII. 

Solitary  fibroma  of  the  skin.  F marks  the  fibroma;  C marks  the  site 
of  a calcified  plaque  of  the  skin. 

Solitary  fibromata  of  the  skin. 


Plate  IX. 

Inner  surfaces  of  fibromata  with  pigmentation. 


Plate  X. 

Large  fibromatous  masses,  FF,  with  associated  papilloma,  P. 

Plate  XI. 

Interior  of  tumor  shown  in  Fig.  15,  exhibiting  smaller  fibromata;  1, 
2,  3,  4 and  5. 


Plate  XII. 

Normal  skin  of  Chelonia  mydas.  x 80. 

Papilloma  with  broad  base  of  fibrous  tissue  supporting  irregularly- 
shaped  papillary  processes  tipped  with  thickened  epithelium,  x 40. 


98 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


Plate  XIII. 

Figs.  19  & 20.  Low  power  magnification  of  papillomatous  tissue,  x 20. 

Plate  XIV. 

Fig.  21.  Bulbous  tips  of  a papilloma.  Stroma  slightly  hyalin  in  character,  x 100. 

Fig.  22.  Surface  epithelium  of  papilloma  illustrating  down-growth  of  epithelium, 
x 60. 

Plate  XV. 

Fig.  23.  Surface  epithelium  of  papilloma  showing  prickle  cells  united  by  thick 
intra-cellular  bridges.  Masson  stain,  x 650. 

Fig.  24.  Deep-lying  epithelial  cord  with  epithelial  “pearl.”  x 250. 

Plate  XVI. 

Fig.  25.  Section  from  a papilloma  with  melanophores  arranged  around  small 
blood  vessels,  x 125. 

Fig.  26.  Melanophores  in  diffuse  arrangement  lying  in  stroma  close  to  epi- 
thelium. x 200. 

Plate  XVII. 

Fig.  27.  A collection  of  lymphoid  cells  around  blood  vessels  in  a papilloma, 
x 350. 

Fig.  28.  Section  taken  from  solitary  pigmented  fibroma  showing  compact  fibrous 
tissue  below  skin.  Numerous  pigment  cells  accompany  blood  vessels, 
x 50. 

Plate  XVIII. 

Fig.  29.  Dense,  wavy,  hyalin,  fibrous  tissue  taken  from  the  center  of  a non- 
pigmented  fibroma. 

Fig.  30.  In  center  of  photograph  a small  nerve  trunk  traversing  loosely  ar- 
ranged fibers  of  a fibroma,  x 275. 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  2. 

FI  BRO-EPITH  ELI  AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  II. 


ini|im 

llll 

llll 

llli|llll 

llll|!lll 

llll|ll!l 

lll!|llll 

llll|IHI 

llll|llll 

lllllll 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

0 8 

8 

FIG.  3. 


1 

llll 

llll 

llll 

llll 

llll 

| 

II 

llll 

III 

III 

llll 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

FIG.  4. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  III. 


FIG.  5. 


FI BRO-EPITH ELI AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  IV. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  V. 


1 1 1 

Ml! 

| I 1 1 1 

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 

4 

1 

5 

6 

FIG.  8. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  VI. 


111! 

llll 

IHIII!!! 

III! 

llll 

III! 

llll 

llll 

mi 

II 

METRIC  1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

FIG.  9. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  VI!. 


FIG.  10. 


FIG.  11. 


FI BRO-EPITH ELI AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  VIII. 


TUT 

m 

m 

TTTT 

llll 

TUT 

impr 

llll||lll 

mpr 

TUTJUTT 

TUT 

llll 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

3 

9 

1 

FIG.  13. 


FI  BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES 


PLATE  IX. 


MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  X. 


FI  BRO-EPITH ELI  AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  XI. 


METRIC 


II 


6 


FIG.  16. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  XII. 


FIG.  17. 


FIG.  18. 

FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  XIII. 


FIG.  19. 


FIG.  20. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  XIV. 


FIG.  21. 


FIG.  22. 

FI BRO-EPITH ELI AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


tk 


FIG.  24. 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  XV. 


’■*  *■ 

.1  ^ 

\ ♦-V-1 


FIG.  23. 


FI BRO-EPITH ELI AL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  XVI. 


FIG.  26. 


FI  BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


V/  ■> 


SMITH  a COATES. 


PLATE  XVII. 


FIG.  27. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


SMITH  & COATES. 


PLATE  XVIII. 


FIG.  29. 


FIG.  30. 


FI BRO- EPITHELIAL  GROWTHS  OF  THE  SKIN  IN  LARGE 
MARINE  TURTLES,  CHELONIA  MYDAS  (LINNAEUS). 


Jleto  ^orfe  Zoological  Society 

General  Office:  90  Broad  Street,  New  York  City 


Officers! 

President,  W.  Redmond  Cross 
Vice-Presidents,  Kermit  Roosevelt  and  Alfred  Ely 
Chairman,  Executive  Committee,  W.  Redmond  Cross 


Treasurer,  Cornelius  R.  Agnew 
Secretary,  Fairfield  Osborn 

Scientific  Staff 

Zoological  }3arb 
W.  Reid  Blair,  Director 


Raymond  L.  Ditmars,  Curator  of  Mammals  and  Reptiles 


Claude  W.  Leister,  Ass’t  to  the  Director  and  Curator,  Educational  Activities 
H.  C.  Raven,  Prosector 
Edward  R.  Osterndorff,  Photographer 
William  Bridges,  Editor  and  Curator  of  Publications 

Aquarium 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  Acting  Director 
Christopher  W.  Coates,  Aquarist 
Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  Pathologist 
G.  M.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Pathology 
Homer  W.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Physiology 

3®tpartmont  of  tCropical  &eseardj 

William  Beebe,  Director  and  Honorary  Curator  of  Birds 


John  Tee-Van,  General  Associate 
Gloria  Hollister,  Research  Associate 
Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate 

Cbitorial  Committee 

Fairfield  Osborn,  Chairman 


Lee  S.  Crandall,  Curator  of  Birds 
Charles  R.  Schroeder,  Veterinarian 


W.  Reid  Blair 
William  Beebe 


Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr. 
George  Bird  Grinnell 


William  Bridges 


■ ■ • 

V,-  • : 


ZOOLOGICA 


J9J93Q 

SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 
OF  THE 


NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


VOLUME  XXIII 
Part  2 

Numbers  5-9 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  SOCIETY 
THE  ZOOLOGICAL  PARK,  NEW  YORK 


July  14,  1938 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

5.  Plankton  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions.  VIII. 
Medusae  Taken  During  the  Years  1929  and  1930.  By 


Henry  B.  Bigelow.  (Text- figures  1-23) 99 

6.  Classification  of  Carp-like  Fishes.  By  J.  T.  Nichols 191 

7.  Tissue  Responses  of  Cyprinodon  variegatus  to  the  Myxo- 

sporidian  Parasite,  Myxobolus  lintoni  Gurley.  By  Ross  F. 
Nigrelli  & G.  M.  Smith.  (Plates  I-VII) 195 

8.  Electrical  Characteristics  of  the  Electric  Tissue  of  the  Elec- 

tric Eel,  Electro  phorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  By  R.  T. 
Cox  & C.  W.  Coates.  (Plate  I;  Text-figures  1 8c  2) 203 


9.  Colonial  Rattlesnake  Lore,  1714.  By  James  R.  Masterson  213 


Notes 


217 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


99 


5. 

Plankton  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions.  VIII. 
Medusae  Taken  During  the  Years  1929  and  19301. 

Henry  B.  Bigelow 

Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  Harvard  College. 

(Text-figs.  1-23). 

[This  is  one  of  a number  of  papers  dealing  with  the  planktonic  contents 
of  nets  drawn  at  various  levels  off  the  coast  of  Bermuda  on  the  Bermuda 
Oceanographic  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society  under  the 
direction  of  Dr.  William  Beebe.  Full  details  of  the  nets,  locality,  etc.,  will 
be  found  in  Zoologica,  Volume  XIII,  Numbers  1,  2 and  3,  and  Volume  XXI, 
Numbers  3 and  4.] 

Contents.  Page 

Introduction  101 

Anthomedusae  102 

Zancleopsis  102 

Zancleopsis  dichotoma  Mayer 102 

Bougainvillia  .104 

Bougainvillia  niobe  Mayer  104 

Pandea  106 

Pandea  conica  Quoy  and  Gaimard 106 

Pandea  rubra  Bigelow 107 

Heterotiara  108 

Heterotiara  anonyma  Maas  108 

Calycopsis  108 

Calycopsis  sp  ? 108 

Leptomedusae  109 

Chromatonema  109 

Chromatonema  rubrum  Fewkes  109 

Aequorea  110 

Aequorea  floridana  L.  Agassiz Ill 

Trachomedusae  112 

Olindias  112 

Olindias  phosphorica  tenuis  Fewkes  113 

1 Contribution  No.  554,  Department  of  Tropical  Research.  New  York  Zoological  Society. 

Contribution  No.  147  of  the  Woods  Hole  Oceanographic  Institution. 

Contribution  from  the  Bermuda  Biological  Station  for  Research,  Inc. 


A 


100  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

Page 

Rhopalonema  113 

Rhopalonema  velatum  Gegenbaur  113 

Pantachogon  114 

Pantachogon  haeckeli  Maas  115 

Colobonema  116 

Colobonema  typicum  Maas  117 

Crossota  118 

? Crossota  brunnea  Vanhoffen 119 

Trachynemidae  genus  ? 120 

Halicreas  120 

Halicreas  minimum  Fewkes  122 

? Halicreas  glabrum  Vanhoffen  124 

Halitrephes  125 

Halitrephes  valdiviae  Vanhoffen  125 

Liriope  126 

Liriope  tetraphylla  Chamisso  and  Eysenhardt 127 

Geryonia  127 

Geryonia  proboscidalis  Forskal  127 

Narcomedusae 128 

Cunina  ,, 128 

Cunina  sp?  128 

Solmissus  129 

? Solmissus  incisa  Fewkes  129 

Aegina  130 

Aegina  citrea  Eschscholtz 131 

Aeginura  132 

Aeginura  giimaldii  Maas  132 

Pegantha  134 

? Pegantha  clara  R.  P.  Bigelow 134 

SCYPHOMEDUSAE 135 

Carybdeida  135 

Carybdea  136 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana  Conant 139 

Carybdea  alata  Reynaud 144 

Tamoya  150 

Tamoya  haplonema  Muller 151 

Periphylla  155 

Periphylla  hyacinthina  Steenstrup  155 

Nausithoe  159 

Nausithoe  punctata  Kolliker  159 

Atolla  160 

Atolla  wyvillei  Haeckel  160 

Linuche  163 

Linuche  unguiculata  Schwartz 163 


1938] 


Bigeloiv:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


101 


Page 


Discophora 164 

Pelagia 164 

Pelagia  noctiluca  Forskal  164 

Poralia 165 

? Poralia  rufescens  Vanhoffen  165 

Aurellia  167 

Aurellia  aurita  Linne  168 

Faunistic  Considerations  169 

Vertical  Distribution  of  Medusae  as  a Whole 170 

Relative  Abundance  of  Different  Species 172 

Absolute  Abundance  172 

Quantitative  Comparison  with  Other  Regions 172 

Bibliography  174 

Appendix  180 


Introduction. 

The  medusae  recorded  in  the  following  pages  were  taken  by  Dr.  William 
Beebe  within  a roughly  circular  area,  some  eight  miles  in  diameter,  cen- 
tering about  9 miles  about  south-southeast  from  the  eastern  end  of  the  Ber- 
muda archipelago.  Within  the  area  of  study,  the  depth  ranges  from  1,357  to 
somewhat  less  than  1,500  fathoms. 

Horizontal  towing  with  open  nets  was  carried  out  in  each  year  at  fre- 
quent intervals  from  April  through  September,  at  various  levels  from  the 
surface  down  to  2,195-0  meters,  the  total  number  of  tows  being  528  for  1929, 
488  for  1930.  An  account  of  methods  of  collection,  with  list  of  tows,  has 
been  given  by  Beebe  (1931).  In  this  list,  the  depths  stated  are  those  at 
which  the  horizontal  parts  of  the  tows  were  made,  determined — at  least  in 
some  cases — by  a recording  pressure-gauge  or  “Bathygraph”  (Beebe,  1931, 
p.  13,  Fig.  6).  But  one  must  remember  that  as  the  nets  used  were  of  the 
ordinary  open  type,  which  fish  nearly  as  effectively  while  being  lowered  as 
while  being  towed  horizontally,  and  as  effectively  while  being  hauled  up 
again,  there  is  no  way  of  determining  from  what  depth  any  particular  speci- 
men may  have  come.  The  depths  of  the  hauls,  given  under  the  several 
species  in  the  following  pages,  are  therefore  stated  accordingly.  However,  so 
many  hauls  were  made  on  each  towing  day,  and  at  so  many  different  levels, 
that  differential  results  show  fairly  well  the  upper  limits  of  occurrence;  also 
the  chief  levels  of  abundance  for  the  more  common  species.  But  none  of  the 
species  was  taken  in  numbers  large  enough  to  allow  calculation  of  the  prob- 
able degree  to  which  the  catches  were  contaminated  by  specimens  picked  up 
during  the  vertical  parts  of  the  tows  (for  further  discussion  of  this  subject 
see  Bigelow  and  Sears,  1937,  p.  69). 

The  collection  contains  no  new  species.  But  it  adds  to  morphological 
knowledge  of  several.  And  it  is  especially  interesting  from  the  distribu- 
tional standpoint,  being  the  only  intensive  and  long-continued  campaign  of 
deep  towing  that  has  yet  been  made  at  one  place  in  the  open  ocean.  With 
so  many  hauls,  made  at  such  close  intervals,  it  is  unlikely  that  any  medusa 
was  missed  that  was  at  all  common,  or  that  occurred  other  than  sporadically. 
It  is  therefore  safe  to  assume  that  the  catches  listed  below  give  a repre- 
sentative picture  of  all  the  species  of  medusae  that  occurred  with  any  regu- 
larity between  the  surface  and  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  at  the  chosen  station, 
during  the  summers  of  1929  and  1930,  except  Gyanea,  which  as  Dr.  Beebe 
informs  me,  was  occasionally  seen  at  the  surface. 


102 


[XXIII  :5 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

ANTHOMEDUSAE. 

Cladonemidae. 

Zancleopsis. 

This  genus  was  proposed  by  Hartlaub  (1907,  p.  116)  for  a bitentaculate 
medusa  from  the  Tortugas,  described  by  Mayer  (1900)  as  Gemmaria  dicho- 
toma,  but  which  differs  from  typical  Gemmaria  (the  latter  is  probably  a 
synonym  of  Zanclea)  in  the  fact  that  its  tentacles  are  branched,  with  the 
branches  as  well  as  the  main  trunk  terminating  in  swollen  bulbs;  structures 
very  different  from  the  stalked  nematocyst  knobs  with  which  the  tentacles 
of  Gemmaria  (or  Zanclea)  are  armed.  Zancleopsis  also  possesses  ocelli, 
which  are  lacking  in  Gemmaria.  And  the  new  genus  was  accepted  by  Mayer 
(1910)  in  his  subsequent  monograph. 

Zancleopsis  was  not  reported  again  until  1928  when  Kramp  (1928, 
p.  40)  described  a second  species — tentaculata — from  a single  specimen  from 
the  Pacific.  The  Bermuda  series  now  yields  a third  record  of  the  genus. 

Mayer’s  specimens  from  the  Tortugas  had  only  two  developed  tentacles. 
But  it  appears  that  they  were  juveniles,  for  while  he  stated  that  the  gonads 
are  developed  on  the  inter-radial  sides  of  the  manubrium,  his  illustrations 
give  no  indication  that  the  sex  tissue  had  actually  appeared,  which  accords 
with  the  small  size  of  the  specimens  (3  mm.  high),  contrasted  with  the 
Bermudian  example  (20  mm.  high).  Therefore,  it  is  entirely  possible  that 
the  bulbs  alternating  with  the  formed  tentacles  of  Mayer’s  specimens  would 
later  have  developed  filaments,  thus  raising  the  tentacle  number  to  four. 
And  this  is  made  the  more  likely  by  the  fact  that  Kramp’s  Pacific  specimen 
(4.5  mm.  high)  showed  just  this  state,  i.  e.,  one  pair  of  large  branched 
tentacles  and  one  pair  of  much  smaller  simple  tentacles.  It  also  showed  a 
more  advanced  stage  in  the  sexual  development,  with  the  gonads  forming 
“a  number  of  vertical  folds,  four  on  each  of  the  inter  radial  sides  of  the 
stomach”  (Kramp,  1928,  p.  41).  The  Bermuda  example  illustrates  a stage 
still  more  advanced,  the  sex  folds  being  more  numerous  (p.  104),  the  second- 
ary tentacles  about  as  long  as  the  primary,  though  still  continuing  simple, 
and  the  size  much  greater.  In  short,  it  seems  altogether  probable  that  we 
have  to  do  here  with  the  final  stage  in  growth  of  Mayer’s  juvenile  Z.  dicho- 
toma,  a conclusion  favored  by  the  fact  that  there  is  no  faunistic  discon- 
tinuity, so  far  as  medusae  are  concerned,  between  Bermuda  and  southern 
Florida. 

But  it  appears  that  the  Pacific  Z.  tentaculata  is  distinct,  for  not  only 
does  it  have  large  gonads  at  a much  smaller  size,  but  the  tentacular  spurs, 
bearing  the  ocelli,  are  not  so  highly  developed,  and  the  edges  of  its  radial 
canals  are  pictured  by  Kramp  as  smooth,  whereas  they  are  jagged  in  the 
Bermuda  specimen. 


Zancleopsis  dichotoma  Mayer. 

Gemmaria  dichotoma,  Mayer,  1900,  p.  35,  PI.  17,  Fig.  40. 

Zancleopsis  dichotoma,  Hartlaub,  1907,  p.  115;  Kramp,  1928,  p.  42. 

Material : Net  No.  922,  1,097-0  meters,  September  20,  1930,  1 specimen, 
20  mm.  high  by  14  mm.  broad,  in  good  condition. 

As  the  adult  has  not  been  seen  previously,  an  account  of  the  significant 
features  follows : 

The  bell  is  high  domed,  moderately  thick  walled,  especially  apically 
(Text-fig.  1),  resembling  Kramp’s  (1928,  Fig.  14)  picture  of  the  Pacific 
tentaculata  in  general  form,  except  that  the  apex  is  rounded  instead  of 
pointed.  And  this  minor  difference  may  be  merely  the  result  of  the  preserva- 
tive. The  exumbrella  is  smooth  as  Hartlaub  has  also  noted,  without  any 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


103 


Text-fig.  1. 

Zancleopsis  dichotoma.  Bermudian  specimen, 
20  mm.  high. 


Text-fig.  2. 

Zancleopsis  dichotoma.  Tentacular  bulb.  A.,  Abaxial 
view;  B.,  Lateral  view,  x about  12. 


104 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


trace  of  the  nematocyst-ribs  so  conspicuous  in  Zanclea.  The  subumbrella 
occupies  about  % the  heighth  of  the  bell,  with  the  bell-cavity  projecting, 
pouch-like,  apically,  in  the  interradii,  in  form  easier  pictured  (Text-fig.  1) 
than  described ; again  much  as  Kramp  figured  it  for  the  Pacific  species.  The 
four  radial  canals  are  of  moderate  breadth,  their  margins  distinctly  jagged 
(smooth  in  tentaculata) . The  margins  of  the  circular  canal  are  smooth. 

The  four  subspherical  tentacular  bulbs,  about  equal  in  size,  are  prom- 
inent axially.  Just  distal  to  its  bulb,  the  tentacle  base  is  also  expanded, 
abaxially,  as  a spur  (Text-fig.  2)  lying  in  a furrow  of  the  exumbrella,  and 
with  a curious  cap-like  mass  of  large,  clear  cells  (apparently  ectoderm)  on 
its  outer  (abaxial)  side.  On  its  outer  angle  the  spur  bears  a prominent, 
long  oval  ocellus  (Text-fig.  2A).  The  four  tentacular  filaments  are  all  of 
about  the  same  length — in  the  preserved  state  about  % as  long  as  the  bell 
is  high.  One  pair  are  simple,  the  other  pair  branched.  Of  the  latter,  one 
bears  a branch  out  near  the  tip,  two  sessile  knobs  about  mid-way  the 
length  of  the  filament  (distal  to  which  the  latter  narrows  abruptly),  be- 
sides a swelling  apparently  the  forerunner  of  an  additional  branch.  The 
other  tentacle  of  this  pair  bears  two  small  branches,  but  is  so  strongly  con- 
tracted that  it  is  impossible  to  tell  how  extensible  the  latter  may  have  been. 
The  two  branched  primary  tentacles  terminate  in  large  knobs.  The  two 
secondary  tentacles  do  not,  but  their  tips  are  in  poor  condition. 

The  area  of  connection  between  the  base  of  the  manubrium  and  the 
subumbrella  is  cruciform,  much  as  described  by  Kramp  for  tentaculata;  its 
upper  % is  thrown  into  a very  characteristic  series  of  vertical  folds.  These 
are  no  doubt  the  sites  of  the  sexual  tissue,  as  interpreted  by  Kramp,  but  eggs 
not  being  visible  (i.e.,  the  specimen  apparently  being  a male),  this  point 
could  not  be  determined  positively  without  microscopic  sectioning.  In  the 
Pacific  specimen  of  tentaculata,  there  were  3-4  such  folds  in  each  interradial 
sector  of  the  manubrium  (Kramp,  1928,  p.  41,  Fig.  15).  In  the  present 
specimen  the  number  is  greater,  4-6  per  interradius,  precise  enumeration 
depending  on  what  does,  or  does  not,  deserve  the  name  “fold.”  Below  the 
level  of  attachment  of  the  radial  canals  the  folds  apparently  form  a continu- 
ous series  surrounding  the  manubrium,  but  as  Kramp  points  out,  sectioning 
would  be  required  to  show  to  what  extent  the  masses  of  sex  tissue  are  con- 
fluent. In  the  preserved  state,  the  distal  tube-like  portion  of  the  manubrium 
hangs  to  about  the  mid-level  of  the  bell  cavity.  But  as  it  is  much  wrinkled, 
it  is  probably  contracted,  hence  may  have  been  considerably  longer  in  life. 

After  preservation  with  formalin,  manubrium  and  tentacular  bulbs  are 
of  an  opaque,  dull  brownish  hue;  the  pigment  ring  of  each  ocellus,  dull  red. 

A comparison  of  Text-fig.  1 with  Kramp’s  (1928,  Figs.  14-18)  illustra- 
tions of  Z.  tentaculata  will  sufficiently  emphasize  the  close  resemblance  be- 
tween the  two,  especially  as  regards  the  structure  of  the  tentacles.  The 
chief  differences — probably  sufficient  to  separate  two  species — are  summar- 
ized above  (p.  102).  Minor  differences  in  the  outline  of  the  bell  and  the 
shape  of  the  manubrium  are  probably  to  be  credited  to  the  preservative. 


Bougainvilliidae. 

Bougainvillia. 

Bougainvillia  niobe  Mayer. 

Bougainvillia  niobe,  Mayer,  1894,  p.  236,  PI.  1,  Fig.  2;  1900,  p.  42; 
1904,  p.  11,  PI.  2,  Figs.  14-15c;  1910,  p.  166,  PI.  18,  Figs.  1-3; 
Bigelow,  1918,  p.  368. 

Material : Surface,  July  11,  1929,  1 specimen,  9 mm.  diameter,  with 
medusa  buds. 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  105 

Net  No.  562,  914-0  meters,  May  10,  1930,  1 specimen,  9 mm.  diameter, 
with  medusa  buds. 

Net  No.  738,  1,463-0  meters,  June  28,  1930,  1 specimen,  9 mm.  diameter, 
with  gonads. 

Net  No.  812,  1,463-0  meters,  August  28,  1930,  1 specimen,  10  mm.  diam- 
eter, with  gonads. 

Net  No.  862,  1,463-0  meters,  September  8,  1930,  1 specimen,  10  mm. 
diameter,  with  gonads. 

Net  No.  915,  549-0  meters,  September  19,  1930,  1 specimen,  6 mm.  diam- 
eter, with  medusa  buds. 

Net  No.  935,  1,463-0  meters,  September  23,  1930,  1 specimen,  10  mm. 
diameter,  with  gonads. 

These  specimens  confirm  conclusions  earlier  reached  from  the  study 
of  the  more  extensive  Bache  series  (Bigelow,  1918,  p.  368)  as  to  the  rela- 
tionship of  B.  niobe  to  other  species  of  the  genus,  for  they  fall  well  within 
the  recorded  range  of  niobe  in  number  of  marginal  tentacles  and  in  branch- 
ing of  the  oral  tentacles.  As  in  previous  collections,  the  smaller  specimens, 
up  to  9 mm.  in  diameter,  bear  the  medusa  buds  well  described  by  Mayer 
(1910),  whereas  the  gonads  have  so  far  been  found  only  in  specimens  of 
8 mm.  in  diameter  or  larger.  In  the  specimens  listed  above,  as  in  those  of 
the  Bache  collection,  the  sex-masses  are  adradial,  in  which  niobe  resembles 
fulva  and  britannica.  It  was  not  possible  to  determine  on  the  Bache  speci- 
mens whether  or  not  the  masses  of  sexual  tissue  were  discontinous  in  the 
interradii,  at  the  base  of  the  manubrium.  This,  however,  seems  definitely 
to  be  the  case  in  the  specimen  from  Net  No.  862;  apparently  so  in  the 
specimen  from  Net  No.  812  (see  list  above).  Hence,  while  the  other  two 
specimens  with  gonads  are  too  much  contracted  to  show  this  feature,  it 
can  now  be  added  to  the  specific  diagnosis. 

The  medusa  buds  in  the  smaller  specimens  add  nothing  to  Mayer’s 
(1910)  account,  except  for  confirmation. 

I may  note  also  that  one  specimen  (Net  No.  562)  is  infested  with  the 
parasitic  larval  stages  of  a Narcomedusa,  probably  Cunoctantha. 

The  large  specimens  are  so  much  contracted  that  exact  counting  of 
the  marginal  tentacles  is  difficult.  They  appear  to  range  from  13-14  up 
to  16;  in  one  bundle  possibly  18,  the  latter  a somewhat  greater  number 
than  reported  previously.  For  this  same  reason,  the  number  of  branchings 
of  the  oral  tentacles  can  be  stated  only  tentatively;  the  maximum  number 
of  branchings  appears  to  be  not  less  than  8 or  9. 

On  the  basis  of  cumulative  evidence  the  following  diagnosis  may  now 
be  given  for  this  species:  Marginal  tentacles,  usual  maximum  12-16  per 

bundle  at  sexual  maturity,  perhaps  up  to  18-19;  gonads  adradial,  discon- 
tinuous in  the  interradii  and  entirely  confined  to  the  manubrium  proper; 
manubrium  sessile,  i.e.,  there  is  no  gelatinous  peduncle;  ocelli  are  present; 
oral  tentacles  branch  a maximum  of  7-9  times.  Medium  sized  individuals 
may  produce  medusa-buds.  It  is  not  known  whether  the  same  individuals 
produce  first  buds,  then  gonads  in  succession,  or  whether  some  individuals 
exhibit  the  asexual  reproduction  only,  others  the  sexual. 

The  closest  ally  of  niobe  is  the  wide-ranging  Pacific  species,  fulva;  so 
close  in  fact,  that  no  constant  difference  has  been  found,  to  separate  them, 
other  than  the  common  occurrence  of  budding  in  the  former,  its  absence,  so 
far  as  known,  in  the  latter. 

General  Distribution:  Records  for  B.  niobe  are  so  far  confined  to  the 
waters  between  southern  Florida,  Cuba,  the  Bahamas,  and  Bermuda.  The 
common  occurrence  of  this  species,  close  to  the  surface,  proves  it  a shoal 
water  form,  hence  it  is  probable  that  the  specimens  taken  in  deep  hauls  (all 
with  open  nets)  were  picked  up  not  far  below  the  surface. 


106 


[XXIII  :5 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

Pandeidae. 

Pandea. 

Pandea  conica  Quoy  and  Gaimard. 

Dianaea  conica,  Quoy  and  Gaimard,  1827,  p.  182,  PI.  6A,  Figs.  3-4. 

For  synonymy,  see,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  118;  Hartlaub,  1914,  p.  338;  Kramp, 
1924,  p.  8;  Uchida,  1927,  p.  214;  Ranson,  1936,  p.  84. 

Material : Net  No.  649,  1,646-0  meters,  May  29,  1930,  1 specimen,  about 
17  mm.  high. 

The  single  example  is  much  contracted,  the  margin  being  strongly  re- 
curved; gonads,  radial  canals,  and  tentacular  bulbs  are,  however,  in  good 
condition,  and  it  is  chiefly  on  the  basis  of  the  former  that  the  specimen  is 
identified  as  P.  conica. 

The  several  recent  accounts  of  this  species  agree  that,  at  maturity,  its 
gonads  form  an  irregular  net-work  completely  occupying  the  interradial 
areas  of  the  gastric  wall  (see  especially,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  117,  Fig.  63B; 
Hartlaub,  1914,  Figs.  283,  286;  Uchida,  1927,  Fig.  38;  Ranson,  1936,  PI.  1, 
Fig.  2).  Conditions  in  the  present  specimen  suggest  a somewhat  more  ad- 
vanced stage  in  development,  for  while  the  upper  portion  of  the  manubrium 
shows  much  the  type  of  network — the  most  distinctive  generic  feature — 
usually  figui’ed,  this  gives  place  in  the  distal  zone  next  the  lip  to  an  irreg- 
ular series  of  folds  and  knobs,  a formation  not  shown  in  any  of  the  earlier 
figures,  though  perhaps  indicated  by  Uchida  (1927). 

There  are  34  or  35  tentacles — a number  falling  well  within  the  recorded 
range,  the  maximum  so  far  recorded  being  44  in  a specimen  30  mm.  high 
(Uchida,  1927).  The  tentacles  also  show  the  characteristic  laterally  com- 
pressed basal  bulbs,  each  with  a well  marked,  dark  red,  abaxial  ocellus, 
repeatedly  described  for  P.  conica. 

Earlier  accounts  have  varied  as  to  whether  the  walls  of  the  radial 
canals  are  smooth  (Hartlaub,  1914,  p.  339),  or  more  or  less  jagged  (Mayer, 
1910,  p.  117,  Fig.  63;  Uchida,  1927,  p.  214).  In  the  present  example,  they 
are  of  the  latter  type,  much  as  pictured  by  Uchida  (1927)  and  reported  by 
Kramp  (1928)  for  a large  specimen  from  Japan.  The  only  feature  specifi- 
cally characteristic  of  P.  conica  that  is  not  clearly  shown  is  the  ribbing  of 
the  exumbrella  with  nematocyst  ridges.  The  bell  does  show  a definite  ridge 
in  the  radius  of  each  tentacle.  But  the  exumbral  surface  has  been  so  badly 
rubbed,  that  one  cannot  be  certain  whether  these  ridges  actually  represent 
the  locations  of  nematocyst  ribs,  or  are  merely  contraction  phenomena.  But 
the  specimen  agrees  so  well  in  all  other  respects  with  the  accounts  of  conica, 
and  with  good  specimens  of  the  latter  from  Naples,  with  which  I have  been 
able  to  compare  it,  that  its  identity,  as  such,  seems  assured. 

General  Distribution-.  P.  conica  has  already  been  found  at  a station  not 
far  from  Bermuda  (Bigelow,  1918). 2 Other  captures  show  a wide  distribu- 
tion, including  many  localities  in  the  Mediterranean  (Kramp,  1924),  off 
Scotland,  the  South  Atlantic,  Japan,  and  the  Philippines. 

Vertical  Range-.  Recorded  depths  of  capture  indicated  that  P.  conica  oc- 
cupies a considerable  depth  zone,  for  while  all  stages  have  been  found  com- 
monly at  the  surface  (Kramp,  1924;  Ranson,  1936),  a fair  proportion  of 
the  records  have  been  from  nets  working  down  to  considerable  depths.3  But 
the  deep  hauls  yielding  it  have  all  been  with  open  nets,  nor  are  data  exten- 
sive enough  to  allow  any  conclusion  as  to  the  lower  limit  to  its  normal  oc- 
currence. 

2 Identification  of  this  specimen  was  provisional,  but  subsequent  studies  of  P.  conica  show  that 
it  fell  well  within  the  varietal  range  of  this  species. 

3 See  especially  the  table  of  Thor  captures,  given  by  Kramp  (1924,  p.  9). 


1938] 


107 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 

Pandea  rubra  Bigelow. 

Pandea  rubra,  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  14,  PI.  2,  Figs.  1-7;  Hartlaub,  1914,  p. 

340;  Kramp,  1920,  p.  4;  1926,  p.  96,  PL  2,  Fig.  15;  Ranson,  1936, 

p.  81. 

Material : Net  No.  562,  914-0  meters,  May  10,  1930,  1 specimen,  about 
25  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  607,  914-0  meters,  May  20,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  40  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  613,  1,097-0  meters,  May  21,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  40  mm. 
high. 

Net  No.  800  1,463-0  meters,  July  15,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  40  mm. 
high. 

The  specimens  from  Net  Nos.  562,  613,  and  800  are  in  good  enough 
condition  to  show  that  they  agree  closely,  even  as  to  details,  with  the  orig- 
inal series  from  the  North  Pacific,  and  with  those  subsequently  collected  in 
the  North  Atlantic  by  the  Armauer  Hansen  (Kramp,  1920;  1926.)  The  most 
diagnostic  morphological  features  of  this  species,  as  contrasted  with  its 
relative  P.  conica,  are  its  lack  of  exumbral  nettle  ribs,  the  thin  bell  wall,  the 
very  complex  and  fine  meshed  network  formed  on  the  walls  of  the  manu- 
brium by  the  development  of  the  gonads,  the  complexly  crenulated  lips,  the 
small  number  of  tentacles,  and  the  large  size  attained  at  maturity.  Another 
difference  is  that  most  accounts  of  conica  credit  it  with  ocelli,  whereas  such 
organs  have  not  been  detected  in  any  of  the  specimens  of  rubra  so  far  seen. 

The  largest  example  yet  recorded  (from  the  Pacific)  about  75  mm.  high, 
had  about  20  tentacles  (Bigelow,  1913)  ; Pacific  examples  of  35-47  mm.  had 
14-18.  Present  indications  are  that  the  number  of  tentacles  may  average 
somewhat  smaller  in  medium-sized  examples  from  the  Atlantic  than  from 
the  Pacific,  for  in  2 Bermudian  specimens  about  38-40  mm.  high,  and  in 
one  of  Kramp’s  (1920;  1926),  of  about  the  same  size,  the  number  ranged 
from  12-14.  But  larger  series  might  well  show  that  there  is  actually  no 
regional  difference  in  this  respect.  Specimens  25-31  mm.  high  (1  Pacific, 
2 Atlantic)  may  have  8 (Kramp,  1926,  p.  96),  9 (Bermudian  specimen,  Net 
No.  562),  or  12  or  13  tentacles  (Bigelow,  1913,  PI.  2,  Fig.  6). 

The  gonads  of  P.  rubra  are  extremely  characteristic,  the  sexual  con- 
volutions of  the  manubrium  taking  the  form  of  an  extremely  fine  and  nu- 
merous-meshed  network;  comparison  of  a photograph  of  a Pacific  specimen 
(Bigelow,  1913,  PI.  2,  Fig.  2) — which  would  equally  well  represent  the  Ber- 
mudian specimen  from  Net  No.  613 — with  illustrations  of  P.  conica  by 
Mayer  (1910,  Fig.  63)  and  by  Ranson  (1936,  PI.  1,  Fig.  2)  will  illustrate 
how  widely  the  two  species  differ  in  this  respect;  how  widely,  in  fact,  rubra 
differs  from  any  other  pandeid  yet  known.  Seen  from  the  inner  side,  the 
sexual  thickenings  appear  as  a great  number  of  knobs. 

The  most  arresting  feature  of  P.  rubra,  among  its  relatives,  is  that  it 
shows  extreme  development  of  what  might  now  be  termed  “bathypelagic” 
pigmentation.  The  Bermuda  specimens  about  40  mm.  high  show  the  same 
reddish  or  chocolate  brown  coloration  as  the  Pacific  specimens  of  the  same 
size  or  larger,  the  entire  manubrium,  tentacles,  and  subumbrella  surface 
being  densely  pigmented,  with  the  more  palely  colored  radial  canals  show- 
ing as  pale  bands.  In  the  Bermudian  example  of  25  mm.,  however,  in 
which  the  manubrium  and  tentacles  are  equally  densely  colored,  the  sub- 
umbrella is  pigmented  only  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  base  of  the 
manubrium,  so  that  the  pigmented  canals — radial  and  circular — show  as 
dark  bands  in  the  transparent  bell,  as  was  also  the  case  in  the  smaller  of 
the  Pacific  specimens.  As  Pacific  examples  of  intermediate  size  (35-40 
mm.)  showed  an  intermediate  stage  (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  16),  it  appears  that 
it  is  not  until  the  medusa  is  well-grown  that  pigment  spreads  out  over  the 
subumbrella — perhaps  accompanying  a descent  into  deeper  water. 


108 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Ranson  (1936,  p.  82)  does  not  consider  the  coloration  diagnostic  in  this 
genus.  The  pigmentation  of  P.  rubra  is,  however  so  peculiar  in  its  density 
and  opacity,  and  in  its  eventual  extension  over  the  subumbrella  (quite  apart 
from  the  precise  shade  of  color),  and  P.  rubra  differs  so  widely  in  these 
respects  from  P.  conica,  that  it  must  be  regarded  as  a specific  characteristic 
even  though  it  may  not  be  a safe  criterion  for  identification  except  for 
large  specimens. 

General  Distribution:  Previous  records  include  high  latitudes  in  the 
northwest  Pacific  and  Bering  Sea  (Bigelow,  1913)  ; and,  more  recently,  two 
oceanic  stations  to  the  west  of  Ireland  (Kramp,  1920).  The  captures  at 
Bermuda  now  make  it  likely  that  its  range  will  finally  prove  to  be  as  exten- 
sive as  that  of  other  bathypelagic  medusae. 

Vertical  Range : The  shoalest  of  the  6 hauls  that  have  so  far  yielded  it 
was  from  411-0  meters  ( Albatross  Sta.  4800)  ; others  have  been  from  549-0 
meters  or  deeper. 


Bythotiaridae. 

Heterotiara. 

Heterotiara  anonyma  Maas. 

Heterotiara  anonyma,  Maas,  1905,  p.  19,  PI.  3,  Figs.  19-21;  Bigelow, 

1909,  p.  216,  PI.  41,  Figs.  12-13;  1913,  p.  25;  1918,  p.  382;  Mayer, 

1910,  p.  107,  489;  Vanhoffen,  1911,  p.  211,  PI.  22,  Figs.  3,  4;  Hart- 
laub,  1914,  p.  350. 

Material : Net  No.  79,  1,280-0  meters,  May  8,  1929,  1 very  fragmentary 
specimen,  about  20  mm.  high  by  17  mm.  in  diameter. 

Net  No.  977,  Surface,  May  12,  1931,  1 specimen,  13  mm.  high  by  9 mm. 
in  diameter,  with  10  tentacles. 

The  specimen  from  Net  No.  977  is  in  excellent  condition.  As  regards 
size,  in  relation  to  4he  number  of  tentacles,  it  falls  well  within  the  range 
already  recorded  (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  26;  1918,  p.  382;  1919,  p.  287. 

The  larger  specimen  is  in  such  poor  condition  that  identification  is  only 
tentative.  Its  general  appearance  seems,  however,  to  warrant  reference  to 
Heterotiara,  and  its  large  size  to  H.  anonyma  rather  than  to  H.  minor. 

General  Distribution : Previous  Atlantic  records  are  between  Florida, 
the  Bahamas,  and  Cuba  (Bigelow,  1918).  Elsewhere,  it  is  known  from 
Malayan  waters,  the  Indian  Ocean  and  several  localities  in  the  Pacific, 
South  and  North,  including  Bering  Sea  (for  list  of  Pacific  localities,  see 
Hartlaub,  1914,  p.  351). 

Vertical  Range:  The  recorded  vertical  range  includes  various  depths 
from  the  surface  downward.  The  comparative  frequency  with  which  the 
Bache  took  it  shoaler  than  100  meters  (Bigelow,  1918,  p.  382),  makes  it 
likely  that  specimens  from  deep  hauls  with  open  nets  were  actually  taken 
in  the  upper  water  layers. 


Calycopsis. 

Calyeopsis  sp.? 

Material:  Net  No.  959,  914-0  meters,  September  29,  1930,  1 specimen 
about  22  mm.  high ; 1 specimen,  much  crumpled,  about  9 mm.  high. 

The  larger  specimen  is  fragmentary,  having  lost  all  but  the  cruciform 
base  of  the  manubrium.  And  it  apparently  represents  an  abnormality  of 
the  same  type  as  pictured  by  Kramp  (1924,  p.  15,  Fig.  11B,  11D)  for 
Bythotiara  murrayi,  for  the  canals  are  connected  in  an  irregular  network, 


1938] 


Bigeloiv:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


109 


the  arrangement  differing  on  the  halves  of  the  bell.  To  attempt  to  give  it 
a specific  name  would  only  add  to  the  difficulties  with  which  the  student 
of  the  genus  is  faced. 


LEPTOMEDUSAE. 

Laodiceidae. 

Chromatonema. 

The  systematic  location  of  this  genus,  originally  described  by  Fewkes 
(1882),  is  still  a moot  question:  it  is  placed  by  Kramp  (1919;  1933)  among 
the  Laodiceidae,  which  by  common  consent,  are  the  leptomedusan  group 
most  closely  related  to  the  higher  Anthomedusae,  whereas  Ranson  (1936) 
refers  it  to  the  latter,  as  a member  of  the  Williidae.  Discussion  of  this 
point  necessarily  revolves  chiefly  around  the  relationship  of  the  gonads  to 
the  gastrovascular  system,  i.e.,  whether  the  perradial  diverticula  from  the 
corners  of  the  stomach,  along  which  the  sexual  tissue  is  developed,  are 
actually  part  of  the  manubrium,  whether  they  are  merely  the  dilated 
proximal  sectors  of  the  radial  canals,  or  whether  (as  I believe)  no  sharp 
distinction  can  be  drawn  between  gastric  and  canalar  portions.  This  last 
view  has  already  been  proposed  by  Kramp  (1933,  p.  552)  who  says,  for 
the  Laodiceidae  as  a whole,  that  the  separation  of  the  gonads  from  the 
manubrium  is  not  “durchgeflihrt.”  The  Bermudian  series  are  not  in  good 
enough  condition  to  throw  light  on  this  point.  But  successive  growth 
stages  in  the  closely  allied  C.  erythrogonon,  from  the  Pacific  (Bigelow, 
1909),  show,  on  the  one  hand,  that  the  development  of  the  gonads  does 
take  place  along  the  radial  canals  (cf.  Bigelow,  1909,  PI.  39,  Fig.  6 with 
Figs.  2-3),  but,  on  the  other  hand,  that  as  the  sex  masses  increase  in  size 
and  complexity,  the  canal-sectors  that  they  occupy  expand  in  breadth  and 
so  become  morphologically  incorporated  into  the  cruciform  angles  of  the 
manubrium  proper.  Thus,  it  is  only  distal  to  the  extremities  of  the  gonads 
that  the  canals  continue  to  retain  their  narrow  tubular  nature.  It  also 
seems  probable  from  the  corresponding  expansion  of  entodermal  pigment 
that  Kramp  (1919)  was  correct  in  crediting  a digestive  function  to  the 
expanded  proximal  portions. 

If  this  view  be  correct,  the  primary  question  is  no  longer  whether  we 
are  to  regard  Chromatonema  as  a Leptomedusa  or  as  an  Anthomedusa, 
for  it  bridges  the  gap,  but  to  which  of  the  borderline  groups  it  belongs,  or 
is  most  closely  related.  Basing  the  decision  chiefly  on  the  marginal  sensory 
clubs,  it  seems  wisest  to  follow  Kramp  (1919;  1933)  in  referring  it  to  the 
Laodiceidae — at  least,  provisionally.  But  future  study  may  well  show  that 
Chromatonema  deserves  a separate  family,  for  as  Kramp  (1919)  has  em- 
phasized, its  gonads  are  fundamentally  similar  to  those  of  Calycopsis, 
rather  than  to  those  of  Laodicea  or  Ptychogena.  I cannot  follow  Ranson 
(1936)  in  referring  it  to  the  Williidae  (if  his  own  definition  of  the  latter  is 
to  be  accepted),  because  he  confines  this  family  to  forms  lacking  a circular 
canal,  which  is  present  in  Chromatonema  as  Kramp  (1919,  p.  9)  has  shown 
and  as  Ranson  (1936,  p.  103)  himself  remarks,  and  because  the  typical 
members  of  the  Williidae  (Willia  and  Proboscidactyla ) lack  marginal  organs 
other  than  tentacles. 


Chromatonema  rubrum  Fewkes. 

Chromatonema  rubrum,  Fewkes,  1882,  p.  305,  PL  1,  Fig.  41. 

For  subsequent  references,  see  Kramp,  1919,  p.  7;  1933,  p.  552;  Ranson, 
1936,  p.  102. 

Material : Net  No.  368,  1,280-0  meters,  August  14,  1929  and  Net  No. 


110  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

959,  914-0  meters,  September  29,  1930,  2 very  fragmentary  specimens,  re- 
spectively about  17  and  15  mm.  in  diameter. 

One  of  these  specimens  still  bears  fragments  of  a few  tentacles, 
though  no  cordyli ; the  other  has  lost  the  marginal  zone  altogether.  Identity 
seems,  however,  reasonably  assured  by  what  remains  of  the  gonads,  which 
are  of  very  characteristic  appearance  in  this  genus. 

The  Bermuda  capture  extends  the  known  range  of  C.  rubrum  south- 
ward, previous  records  being  west  of  the  Azores  (Ranson,  1936)  ; off  the 
American  continental  slope  in  Latitude  about  40°  N.  (Fewkes,  1882)  ; 
and  at  numerous  localities  farther  north,  including  Davis  Strait  (Kramp, 
1919,  Chart  I,  p.  13). 

The  depths  of  capture  of  the  Bermudian  specimens  are  in  line  with 
previous  experience  that  C.  rubrum  inhabits  chiefly  the  mid-depths,  the 
great  majority  of  captures  (all  with  open  nets)  having  been  in  hauls  reach- 
ing down  to  at  least  700  meters,  and  as  Kramp  (1933,  p.  553)  remarks 
“nur  ein  paarmal  in  hoheren  Wasserlagen.” 

Aequoridae. 

Aequorea. 

The  few  Aequoreas  in  the  collection  represent  the  subdivision  of  the 
genus  in  which  the  stomach  is  only  1/4-1/5  as  broad  as  the  diameter  of 
the  disc.  In  contrast  to  the  multiplicity  of  names  under  which  large- 
stomached  Aequoreas  have  appeared  in  literature,  the  small-stomached 
group  includes  only  two  named  forms,  tenuis  and  floridana.  The  first  of 
these  is  now  generally  accepted  as  a good  species  (Bigelow,  1913;  Kramp, 
1933;  Ranson,  1936),  size  of  stomach  having  proved  one  of  the  most  depend- 
able characters  in  this  widely  variable  genus.  But  the  status  of  the 
second  has  remained  doubtful,  awaiting  critical  examination  of  the  sup- 
posed differences — all  minor — between  it  and  tenuis.  The  Bermuda  speci- 
mens agree  so  closely  with  A.  Agassiz’s  (1865)  account  of  floridana  as  to 
leave  no  doubt  of  their  identity  with  the  latter.  And  the  need  of  giving 
them  a name  makes  pertinent  a decision  as  to  the  relationship  of  floridana 
to  tenuis;  names  which  appeared  on  the  same  page  in  the  original  publica- 
tion. According  to  the  original  accounts,  and  to  Mayer’s  (1910)  more  re- 
cent comparison,  the  chief  differences  between  the  two  are  that  floridana 
has  more  tentacles  at  a smaller  size,  about  four  times  as  many  otocysts  as 
tentacles  instead  of  an  equal  number,  a somewhat  smaller  stomach  (about 
1/7  instead  of  1/5  as  wide  as  the  diameter  of  the  bell),  and  that  its  radial 
canals  are  very  narrow,  its  tentacles  minute.4  Hargitt  (1905),  however,  had 
already  shown  that  in  tenuis  from  Woods  Hole  (i.e.,  from  the  type  region) 
numerical  characters  are  all  highly  variable.  Thus,  a specimen  of  only  36 
mm.  may  have  even  more  tentacles  than  one  of  47  mm.  Canals  not  only  vary 
in  number,  but  show  much  irregular  branching  and  anastomosis.  The 
number  of  otocysts  (described  by  A.  Agassiz  as  alternating  regularly  with 
the  tentacles)  may  be  one,  is  often  two,  and  sometimes  even  more  between 
every  two  tentacles  and  series  of  typical  tenuis  from  Woods  Hole  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  similarly  show  from  1-4; 
most  frequently  2 or  3;  the  number  depending,  it  seems,  on  the  distance 
apart  of  the  large  tentacles,  and  on  how  many  rudimentary  tentacles  there 
are  in  the  interspaces.  I may  note  in  passing,  that  while  A.  Agassiz  (1865, 
p.  96,  Fig.  138)  stated  that  there  is  always  a single  otocyst  between  2 ten- 
tacles in  tenuis,  the  segment  of  margin  he  illustrated  was  one  in  which  two 
large  tentacles  stood  close  together  with  no  small  ones  intervening. 

The  contracted  condition  of  the  specimens  in  the  present  collection 

4 Mayer’s  (1910,  PI.  43,  Fig.  6)  illustration  of  Ae.  floridana  is  obviously  labelled  incorrectly, 
for  it  shows  a very  wide  stomach. 


1938] 


111 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 

makes  it  difficult  to  make  sure  of  the  total  number  of  otocysts.  But  in  other 
specimens  from  Bermuda,  in  the  collection  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative 
Zoology,  there  are  from  one  to  three  between  every  two  large  tentacles,  most 
frequently  one  or  two  in  the  sectors  on  the  margin  on  which  the  otocysts 
are  still  intact,  which  agrees  with  the  Woods  Hole  specimens  of  tenuis.  And 
the  number  of  small  tentacles,  between  2 adjacent  large  ones,  varies  from 
none  to  an  observed  maximum  of  six,  usually  1-3. 

Evidently,  then,  one  can  no  longer  invoke  numerical  precision  in  the 
number  of  otocysts  relative  to  tentacles  as  an  alternative  character  between 
tenuis  and  floridana.  Neither  can  the  number  of  large  tentacles  finally  de- 
veloped, for  while,  by  published  accounts,  this  is  somewhat  larger  for  flori- 
dana (up  to  100)  than  for  tenuis  (up  to  90),  there  is  no  discontinuity  in 
this  respect.  Comparison  of  the  Woods  Hole  series,  just  mentioned,  with 
the  Bermudian  specimens  shows,  however,  that  at  diameters  of  24-35  mm. 
( tenuis  is  only  half  grown  at  this  size),  tenuis  consistently  has  significantly 
fewer  large  tentacles  than  floridana,  the  number  in  the  one  case  ranging 
from  43-58,  in  the  other  from  63-103.  And  a still  sharper  distinction  ap- 
pears in  the  number  of  canals,  for  while  in  the  tenuis  within  this  size  range 
that  I have  examined,  the  number  of  complete  canals  arising  from  the  stom- 
ach, varies  from  22-31  (plus  1-4  blind  centrifugals  in  5 of  the  seven  speci- 
mens), which  corroborates  previous  reports  of  24-32,  the  number  in  the 
Bermuda  specimens  is  16  in  every  specimen  (large  or  small)  where  count- 
able, except  for  two  (respectively  of  25  and  28  mm.)  in  which  it  is  15.  And 
no  blind  centrifugals  are  to  be  seen  in  any.  A.  Agassiz’s  (1865,  Fig.  139) 
illustration  of  floridana  also  shows  16  complete  canals,  though  with  one 
short  centrifugal  also,  besides  indications  of  an  early  stage  in  formation 
of  several  more,  while  Mayer  (1910,  p.  330)  reports  16-24  complete  canals. 

Thus  it  appears  that  while  occasional  specimens  of  floridana  may  have 
as  many  canals  as  an  occasional — perhaps  stunted — tenuis,  the  number  is 
usually  only  % to  % as  great  in  the  former  as  in  the  latter,  with  strong  in- 
dications of  a normal  determinate  number  of  16  in  the  one  case,  of  32  in 
the  other.  And  this  difference  seems  sufficient  to  warrant  recognition  of 
both  species.  A minor  difference  is  that  floridana  (so  far  as  known)  is  full 
grown  and  has  its  maximum  number  of  large  tentacles  at  a maximum  re- 
ported diameter  of  only  about  50  mm.;  whereas  tenuis,  at  Woods  Hole,  is 
known  to  reach  a diameter  of  100  mm.  (Mayer,  1910,  p.  332). 


Aequorea  floridana  L.  Agassiz. 

Rhegmatodes  floridanus,  L.  Agassiz,  1862,  p.  361 ; A.  Agassiz,  1865,  p. 
97,  Fig.  139. 

Rhegmatodes  floridana,  Haeckel,  1879,  p.  223. 

Aequorea  floridana,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  330;  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  37;  1919, 
p.  309. 

Material : Net  No.  840,  Surface,  September  3,  1930,  1 specimen  about 
19-20  mm.  in  diameter,  stomach  diameter,  4 mm.,  16  canals,  72  tentacles; 
1 specimen,  23-24  mm.  in  diameter,  stomach  diameter  about  5 mm.,  16  canals 
and  about  50  large  tentacles.  As  the  margin  in  each  case  is  damaged,  exact 
measurement  of  diameter  is  not  possible. 

Also,  16  other  Bermudian  specimens,  12-37  mm.  in  diameter  (besides 
fragments)  collected  in  the  summers  of  1903,  1904,  1911  and  1916,  now  in 
the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 

The  following  tabulation  for  the  Bermuda  specimens  is  pertinent  to  the 
foregoing  discussion  of  the  relationship  of  Ae.  floridana  to  Ae.  tenuis. 


112  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 


Date  of 
Collection. 

Approximate 

Diameter. 

Approximate 
Diameter  of 
Stomach. 

Approximate 
Number  of 
Large  Tentacles. 

Canals. 

1904 

12 

3 

37 

16 

1904 

15 

3 

45 

16 

1930 

20 

4 

72 

16 

1930 

23 

5 

50 

16 

1904 

23 

6 

63 

16 

1904 

25 

5 

67 

16 

1911 

25 

6 

63 

15 

1911 

28 

7 

46 

15 

1911 

28 

5 

81 

16 

1911 

33 

7 

74 

16 

1916 

33 

7 

87 

16 

1916 

33 

7 

85 

? 

1904 

35 

7-8 

83 

16 

1916 

37 

8 

103 

16 

Relative  counts  of  large  tentacles  and  of  small  cannot  be  precise,  there 
being  no  sharp  demarcation  between  the  latter  and  rudimentary  knobs  of 
various  sizes,  the  variety  in  size  of  which  is  evidence  that  while  some  would 
have  developed  into  large,  others  would  have  remained  permanently  rudi- 
mentary. 

The  specimens  of  12-15  mm.  have  no  gonads;  in  those  of  20-23  mm., 
gonads  have  appeared  on  the  outer  V3-V2  of  the  radial  canals;  in  those  of 
25-28  mm.,  they  occupy  the  outer  %-%  and  the  outer  %-%  in  the  larger 
specimens  of  33-37  mm. 

In  Ae.  tenuis  of  corresponding  sizes,  the  gonads  occupy  about  the  same 
sectors  of  the  canals,  but  with  continued  growth  they  finally  come  to  occupy 
nearly  the  wdiole  length  of  canals,  though  (as  Mayer,  1910,  p.  332,  remarks) 
“not  quite  reaching  the  circular  canal.” 

According  to  Mayer  (1910,  p.  330),  the  stomach  is  relatively  smaller  in 
floridana  (only  1/7  as  wide  as  the  disc)  than  in  tenuis  (about  1/5  the  width 
of  the  disc).  However,  A.  Agassiz  (1865,  Fig.  139)  pictures  its  greatest 
diameter  as  about  1/5.  And  as  the  preceding  tabulation  shows,  it  ranges 
about  1/4-1/6  the  diameter  of  the  disc  in  the  Bermuda  specimens.  But  since 
the  stomach  is  rarely — if  ever — circular,  its  breadth  depends  on  what  par- 
ticular radius  be  chosen  for  measurement.  Total  diameter  similarly  depends 
on  the  degree  of  contraction  (cupping)  or  relaxation  of  the  disc. 

General  Distribution:  So  far  as  I am  aware,  previous  records  of  small- 
stomached  Aequoreas  referable  to  floridana  have  been  confined  to  the  waters 
around  the  southern  extremity  of  Florida.  Bermuda  is  thus  a considerable 
extension  of  the  known  range. 

TRACHOMEDUSAE. 

Olindiidae. 

Olindias. 

Recent  studies  of  considerable  series  from  different  parts  of  the  world 
(Bigelow,  1909;  1919;  Mayer,  1910;  Neppi  and  Stiasny,  1913)  have  made 
it  reasonably  certain  that  the  two  named  forms  from  the  western  Atlantic 
( sambaquiensis  F.  Muller  and  tenuis  Fewkes)  represent  but  a single  species, 
for  the  supposed  differences  between  them  in  number  of  tentacles,  of  mar- 
ginal knobs,  and  of  blind  centripetal  canals,  and  in  the  diameter  of  the  disc 
indicate,  at  most,  that  tenuis  is  a dwarf  race  of  sambaquiensis,  or  that  the  de- 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


113 


scriptions  of  the  former  have  been  based  on  specimens  that  had  not  attained 
their  maximum  growth  and  development.  It  has  in  fact  been  repeatedly  sug- 
gested that  both  of  these  are  simply  varieties — if  as  much— of  the  well- 
known  0.  phosphorica  of  the  Mediterranean.  And  the  necessity  of  naming 
the  Bermudian  example  listed  below  makes  discussion  of  this  question  per- 
tinent. 

The  only  ostensible  differences  between  phosphorica  and  sambaquiensis 
are  that  the  original  account  of  the  latter  (Muller,  1861)  credits  it  with  a 
larger  number  of  secondary  tentacles  (200-300)  and  of  centripetal  canals 
(21-27  per  quadrant),  than  have  ever  been  recorded  for  phosphorica,  for 
which  the  maxima  are  100-120  tentacles  and  19  centripetal  canals  in  one 
quadrant  (for  tabulation  of  numerical  characters,  see  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  109; 
Mayer,  1910,  p.  353).  That  is  to  say,  phosphorica  bears  the  same  sort  of 
relationship  to  sambaquiensis  as  does  tenuis  to  phosphorica.  By  present  in- 
dications it  is  not  possible  to  make  any  definite  specific  separation,  within 
this  series,  because  the  three  forms  intergrade  in  numerical  characters.  On 
the  other  hand,  to  unite  the  three  definitely  under  one  name,  would  obscure 
the  very  interesting  fact  that  all  the  records  from  the  West  Indian-Ber- 
mudian  region  are  for  the  tenuis  (or  to  some  extent  paedogenetic)  form, 
which  is  not  known  to  occur  at  all  in  the  Mediterranean.  Neither,  on  the 
other  hand,  has  Olindias  from  the  latter  sea,  ever  been  found  to  attain  the 
extreme  development  described  for  the  Brazilian  form.  The  case,  analogous 
to  that  of  the  representatives  of  Charybdea  from  these  same  regions  (p.  137) , 
seems  best  handled  taxonomically,  by  the  recognition  of  subspecies.  For 
further  discussion  of  the  reasons  for  this  procedure,  in  the  case  of  geo- 
graphic races  of  medusae,  see  page  137. 

Olindias  phosphorica  tenuis  Fewkes. 

Halicalyx  tenuis,  Fewkes,  1882,  p.  277,  PI.  7,  Fig.  15. 

To  the  references  given  by  Mayer,  1910,  p.  354  (" Olindias  tenuis”), 
add: 

Olindias  phosphorica  [Partim],  Bigelow,  1919,  p.  317. 

Olindias  tenuis,  Boone,  1933,  p.  32. 

Material:  Net  No.  840,  Surface,  September  20,  1929,  3 specimens,  ap- 
proximately 10,  10,  and  25  mm.  in  diameter. 

The  larger  specimen  has  large  gonads,  between  45  and  50  primary 
tentacles,  and  about  40  centripetal  canals,  the  contracted  and  recurved  state 
of  the  margin  preventing  exact  enumeration.  The  chief  interest  of  the 
series  is  as  cumulative  evidence  that  the  Bermudian-West  Indian  representa- 
tives of  O.  phosphorica  are  characterized  by  fewer  primary  tentacles  and 
canals  at  maturity  than  are  their  Mediterranean  relatives;  consequently 
that  the  recognition  in  nomenclature  of  tenuis,  as  a local  subspecies,  is  jus- 
tifiable. Owing  to  the  condition  of  the  large  specimen,  I was  not  able  to 
count  the  secondary  tentacles. 

General  Distribution:  O.  tenuis  has  already  been  reported  from  Ber- 
muda (Bigelow,  1909,  p.  109)  ; other  records  are  from  the  Bahamas  and 
the  coast  of  southern  Florida  (Fewkes,  1882;  Mayer,  1910;  Boone,  1933). 

Trachynemidae. 

Rhopalonema. 

Rhopalonema  velatum  Gegenbaur. 

Rhopalonema  velatum,  Gegenbaur,  1856,  p.  251,  PI.  9,  Figs.  1-5. 

For  synonymy,  see  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  129;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  378;  Thiel, 


114 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Material-.  Net  Nos.  32,  35,  39,  43,  44,  67,  69,  97,  98,  100,  102,  362,  581, 
620,  632,  634,  682,  720,  730,  793,  915,  916,  945,  959,  967;  hauls  at  549-0  to 
1,829-0  meters;  39  specimens,  6-12  mm.  in  diameter;  1-5  specimens  per  haul. 

These  specimens,  all  of  which  are  more  or  less  fragmentary,  call  for 
no  special  comment,  this  being  one  of  the  best  known  of  Trachomedusae.  I 
need  merely  note  that  as  all  of  them  are  large  enough  to  show  the  situation 
of  the  gonads,  there  is  no  possibility  that  the  list  includes  any  examples  of 
Sminthea  eurygaster,  a species  somewhat  similar  in  appearance,  and  which 
Thiel  (1936,  Fig.  2)  has  recently  shown  to  be  much  more  generally  dis- 
tributed on  the  high  seas  than  formerly  supposed. 

General  Distribution:  R.  velatum  was  to  be  expected  near  Bermuda, 
there  being  many  previous  records  for  the  eastern  side  of  the  Sargasso  Sea 
region,  as  well  as  elsewhere  over  the  warmer  belts  of  all  three  oceans,  in- 
cluding also  the  Mediterranean  and  Red  Sea.  For  a recent  chart  of  dis- 
tribution, see  Thiel,  1936,  Fig.  1. 

It  is  interesting  that  108  hauls  shoaler  than  549-0  meters  did  not  yield 
it,  for  it  often  occurs  close  to  the  surface,  with  its  center  of  abundance 
shoaler,  in  general,  than  100  meters  (Thiel,  1935,  Fig.  21). 


Pantachogon. 

The  definitions  for  this  genus  adopted  by  Mayer  (1910),  also  recently 
by  Broch  (1929)  and  by  Thiel  (1932),  would  likewise  include  the  medusa 
reported  here  (p.  117)  as  Colobonema.  But  for  reasons  stated  on  page  116,  it 
seems  to  me  preferable  to  retain  the  latter  genus  as  distinct,  because  of  the 
peculiar  order  in  which  its  tentacles  are  developed,  and  because  of  the  struc- 
ture of  its  radial  canals.  The  structure  of  its  tentacles  may  perhaps  be  of 
generic  significance,  likewise.  Opinions  have  also  differed  as  to  whether  the 
generic  limits  of  Pantachogon  should  be  interpreted  broadly  enough  to  in- 
clude the  various  species  usually  reported  as  Homoeonema,  in  which  the 
gonads  are  localized  along  restricted  sectors  of  the  radial  canals  (Bigelow, 
1913,  p.  44),  or  should  be  restricted  to  forms  in  which  these  organs  are  de- 
veloped more  diffusely  along  the  whole  length  of  the  canals  (Broch,  1929; 
Thiel,  1932,  1936;  Ranson,  1936).  As  the  present  collection  contains  repre- 
sentatives of  the  latter  sort,  only,  it  does  not  aid  in  the  solution  of  this 
question. 

The  group  with  diffuse  gonads  includes  three  named  forms,  haeckeli 
(Maas,  1893),  rubrum  (Vanhoffen,  1902),  and  scotti  (Browne,  1910).  I 
have  already  expressed  doubt  as  to  whether  the  first  two  could  be  separated, 
the  color  being  the  only  difference.  As  Ranson  (1936)  again  emphasizes, 
successive  studies  of  considerable  series  have  revealed  no  anatomical  differ- 
ences whatever  between  them,  hence  he  has  now  united  them  provisionally, 
Thiel  (1936)  definitely,  and  I believe  with  good  reason.  I may  add  that  the 
capture  near  Bermuda  of  several  specimens,  lacking  any  trace  of  pigment 
(i.e.,  of  the  haeckeli  type),  now  answers  the  last  argument  in  favor  of  con- 
sidering the  two  color-forms  as  distinct,  i.  e.,  that  the  colorless  haeckeli  was 
restricted  to  high  latitudes.  Nomenclatural  rules  require  the  choice  of 
haeckeli  Maas  as  the  name  for  the  joint  species,  because  Maas’  account, 
with  clearly  recognizable  illustration  showing  the  gonads  and  tentacles  cor- 
rectly, was  published  many  years  prior  to  the  description  of  rubrum  (Van- 
hoffen, 1902). 

P.  scotti,  an  Antarctic  species,  is  separated  from  haeckeli  by  much  more 
numerous  tentacles  (104-128,  contrasted  with  a maximum  of  64  in  haeckeli). 
And  so  many  specimens  of  the  latter  have  now  been  examined  that  this 
difference  seems  established. 


1938] 


Bigeloiv:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


115 


Pantachogon  haeckeli  Maas. 

Pantachogon  haeckeli,  Maas,  1893,  p.  17,  PI.  1,  Fig.  2;  1904,  p.  29; 

Mayer,  1910,  p.  389;  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  44,  PI.  3,  Figs.  4-8;  Broch, 
1929,  p.  503;  Thiel,  1932a,  p.  152;  1936,  p.  26. 

Pantachogon  rubrum,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  63,  PI.  9,  Fig.  9,  PI.  10, 
Figs.  19-20,  PI.  11,  Fig.  25;  Maas,  1905,  p.  55,  PI.  10,  Fig.  66; 
Mayer,  1910,  p.  389;  Kramp,  1913,  p.  274;  1914,  p.  433;  1920,  p.  5; 
1924,  p.  22;  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  44;  Browne,  1916,  p.  195;  Broch, 
1929,  p.  504;  Thiel,  1931,  p.  330;  1932a,  p.  153;  Ranson,  1936,  p. 
147. 

Pantachogon  rubrum  [Partim],  Thiel,  1936,  p.  24. 

Material : Net  Nos.  36,  42,  52,  64,  234,  296,  539,  552,  554,  575,  582,  598, 
628,  648,  657,  658,  659,  666,  684,  685,  691,  695,  698,  709,  717,  718,  736,  739, 
742,  757,  780,  789,  805,  809,  854,  862,  864,  866,  881,  897,  916,  964;  549-0  to 
1,829-0  meters;  65  specimens;  1-5  per  haul. 

Also,  12  very  fragmentary  specimens,  from  Net  Nos.  556,  640,  698,  709, 
721,  748,  862,  929;  1,280-0  to  1,646-0  meters,  ai'e  provisionally  referred  to 
this  species. 

The  specimens  are  all  more  or  less  fragmentary — most  of  them  very 
much  damaged — but  those  included  in  the  first  of  the  two  preceeding  lists 
have  enough  of  the  margin  and  of  the  subumbrella  intact  to  show  that  the 
tentacles  are  so  spaced  as  to  accord  with  the  number  characteristic  of  this 
species  (maximum,  64),  and  that  the  radial  canals  are  of  even  bore  through- 
out their  lengths.  I have  also  been  able  to  compare  them  with  the  series 
collected  by  the  Albatross  in  the  northwestern  Pacific  (Bigelow,  1913). 

Tentacles : Vanhoffen  (1902a)  counted  7 tentacles  per  octant,  between 
every  two  perradials,  in  all  his  specimens.  Maas  (1905),  however,  found 
smaller  numbers  in  some  octants,  i.e.,  intermediate  stages  in  development. 
And  the  Bermuda  series  again  illustrates  this,  for  while  the  sub-radials  are 
seven  in  number  in  most  of  the  octants  in  which  complete  counts  can  be 
made,  only  6 are  to  be  seen  in  some  octants.  And  one  specimen  seems  to 
have  not  more  than  6 in  any  octant,  i.e.,  a total  of  only  56.  On  the  other 
hand,  a greater  number  than  7 sub-radials  has  never  been  found  in  any 
octant,  nor  have  additional  tentacular  bulbs  been  observed.  That  the  num- 
ber is  determinant  in  Pantachogon  (as  it  is  in  Colobonema ) thus  seems 
sufficiently  established.  The  order  of  development  of  the  different  series  of 
tentacles  has  not  been  traced;  nor  is  this  point  clarified  by  the  present 
series,  preservation  not  being  good  enough  for  dependence  to  be  placed  on 
differences  in  size  between  different  tentacles.  It  is,  however,  suggestive 
that  a tentacle  does  not  always  stand  exactly  opposite  a canal,  i.e.,  it  appears 
that  in  some  cases  none  can  be  described  as  strictly  “perradial ;”  neither 
are  those  most  nearly  opposite  the  canals  appreciably  larger  than  the  others. 

An  interesting  question,  still  awaiting  answer,  is  whether  the  tentacles 
of  Pantachogon,  like  those  of  Colobonema,  are  stump-like,  as  suggested  by 
the  fact  that  they  have  been  very  short,  and  of  sub-equal  length,  in  all  the 
specimens  so  far  examined,  or  whether  Maas  (1905)  was  correct  in  his 
suggestion  that  they  are  of  ordinary  filamentous  type,  but  so  easily  broken 
off  that  all  except  the  bases  have  been  lost.  None  of  the  Bermudian  and 
northwest  Pacific  specimens  are  in  good  enough  condition  to  settle  this 
point,  though  the  general  appearance  of  the  tentacles — especially  the  fact 
that  in  many  cases,  they  are  square  tipped — favors  the  second  alternative. 

Gonads:  In  one  small  specimen,  about  8 mm.  high,  in  which  the  gonads 
are  intact,  they  represent  about  the  same  early  stage  in  development  illus- 
trated for  a North  Pacific  specimen  of  corresponding  size  (Bigelow,  1913, 
PI.  3,  Fig.  5).  In  the  larger  specimens,  the  gonads  have  either  been  lost 


116  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

entirely,  or  are  represented  by  fragments  only,  here  and  there  along  the 
canals. 

Musculature : The  circular  musculature  of  the  subumbrella  is  strongly 
developed  (Bigelow,  1913;  Ranson,  1936);  a development  as  striking,  in 
fact,  as  it  is  in  Colobonema.  In  Pantachogon,  as  in  Colobonema,  however,  the 
musculature  is  not  only  entirely  discontinuous  along  the  lines  of  the  radial 
canals,  but  terminates,  apically,  at  the  level  where  the  general  contour  of 
the  subumbrella  changes  from  sub-cylindrical  to  domed,  leaving  a consider- 
able clear  space  surrounding  the  base  of  the  manubrium.  And  Ranson 
(1936)  has  recently  pointed  out  that  the  outlines  of  the  apical  ends  of  the 
interradial  muscular  fields  provide  at  least  a specific  character,  being  trans- 
versely truncate  in  P.  haeckeli,  as  appears  clearly  in  the  few  Bermuda  speci- 
mens in  which  the  musculature  is  still  intact,  whereas  in  Colobonema  they 
are  ovoid,  corresponding  to  the  contours  of  the  interspaces  between  the 
apically  expanded  radial  canals  (p.  118).  The  latter,  as  Ranson  (1936)  has 
emphasized,  are  narrow  and  of  uniform  caliber,  throughout  their  lengths, 
from  bell  margin  to  union  with  the  manubrium,  contrasting  strongly  with 
their  state  in  Colobonema. 

Color : Occasional  specimens  show  a pinkish  tinge.  But  the  few  in  which 
the  subumbral  musculature  is  more  or  less  intact  are  colorless:  interesting 
evidence,  as  noted  above  (p.  114),  that  the  unpigmented  form  of  this  species, 
as  well  as  the  rosy-colored,  occurs  in  the  warm  belt  of  the  North  Atlantic. 
Thiel  (1936,  p.  24),  in  fact,  has  already  shown  that  the  two  may  exist  side 
by  side,  the  Meteor  having  taken  one  of  each  at  a station  in  the  South 
Atlantic.  No  recent  student  of  Pantachogon  has  considered  this  color  differ- 
ence a sufficient  ground  per  se  for  specific  separation.  But  it  is  an  interest- 
ing question,  how  the  existence  of  the  two  color  phases  is  to  be  interpreted. 
As  the  present  series  throws  no  light  on  this  point,  I need  only  note  that  the 
pigmentation  of  the  rosy  form  ( P . rubrum,  auct.)  is  not  of  the  peculiarly 
dense  and  opaque  sort  characteristic  of  many  bathypelagic  medusae. 

General  Distribution:  Locality  records  for  P.  haeckeli,  as  here  defined, 
are  widespread  in  the  Atlantic,  including  Spitzbergen,  Irminger  Sea  and 
Davis  Strait  in  the  north,  sundry  localities  off  Ireland,  in  the  Bay  of  Biscay, 
and  in  the  region  between  the  Canaries,  Azores,  and  Gibralter;  the  Mediter- 
ranean ; the  eastern  side  of  the  tropical  and  South  Atlantic  south  to  Lat. 
64°  S.;  the  Antarctic  (Weddell  Sea)  ; South  and  North  Indian  Oceans  and 
Red  Sea;  Malaysia;  and  the  extreme  northern  Pacific  including  Bering  Sea 
and  the  Sea  of  Okhotsk.  With  the  Bermuda  records  extending  the  known 
range  to  the  western  Sargasso  Sea, — the  nearest  previous  record  was  in  mid- 
Atlantic — P.  haeckeli  is  evidently  world  wide  in  the  ocean  basins,  right  up 
to  the  subpolar  zones. 

Vertical  Range:  The  great  majority  of  captures  have  been  in  open  nets 
working  as  deep  as  500-0  meters,  the  only  exception  being  a single  young 
specimen  taken  by  the  Valdivia  in  a haul  from  60  meters  (Vanhoffen,  1902). 

Colobonema. 

There  has  been  much  discussion  recently  as  to  whether  Colobonema  is 
generically  separable  from  Pantachogon.  Thiel  (1936)  at  the  one  extreme, 
has  even  included  its  unique  representative  in  the  synonymy  of  P.  rubrum 
(=  P.  haeckeli) . But  this  seems  definitely  precluded  not  only  by  the  constant 
difference  in  the  number  of  tentacles,  but  also  by  the  structure  of  the 
proximal  sectors  of  the  radial  canals.  Other  students  who  have  recently 
written  of  Colobonema  (Bigelow,  1913;  1919;  Kramp,  1924;  Broch,  1929; 
Ranson,  1936)  have  therefore  retained  it  as  a separate  genus,  either  defi- 
nitely or  provisionally.  And  that  course  is  followed  here. 

The  question  what  specific  name  should  be  applied  to  the  one  known 
representative  of  Colobonema  is  one  that  will  not  down,  because  a final  an- 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  117 

swer  depends  on  decision  as  to  the  accuracy,  or  the  reverse,  of  the  published 
description  of  a specimen  no  longer  extant.  Accepting  Maas’  (1905)  subse- 
quent statement  that  his  earlier  (1897)  account  of  his  Homoeonema  typicum, 
which  credited  the  latter  with  more  than  32  tentacles,  was  an  error  resulting 
from  the  poor  condition  of  the  specimen,  Mayer  (1910),  Uchida  (1928),  and 
I (Bigelow,  1913;  1919)  have  used  this  specific  name,  for  in  all  other  re- 
spects, Maas’  typicum  appears  to  resemble  the  form  later  described  by 
Vanhoffen  (1902a)  as  Colobonema  sericeum.  Kramp  (1920;  1924),  Broch 
(1929),  and  Ranson  (1936),  however,  take  the  opposite  view,  that  Maas’ 
(1897)  original  typicum  cannot  be  identified  with  sericeum,  hence  use  the 
latter  name.5 

The  present  series  adds  nothing  toward  solution  of  this  nomenclatural 
puzzle,  beyond  the  opportunity  for  pointing  out  that  choice  of  typicum  as  the 
specific  designation  has  the  advantage  of  providing  a resting  place  for  a 
name  which  is  likely  otherwise  to  remain  permanently  without  connection 
with  any  actually  existant  medusa. 

Colobonema  typicum  Maas. 

Homoeonema  typicum,  Maas,  1897,  p.  22,  PI.  3,  Figs.  1-3. 

For  early  synonymy,  see  Mayer,  1910,  p.  385. 

It  has  been  referred  to,  subsequently,  under  the  following  names: 

Colobonema  sericeum,  Kramp,  1920,  p.  5;  1924,  p.  28;  Ranson,  1936, 
p.  152,  PI.  2,  Figs.  14-15. 

Homoeonema  ( Colobonema ) sericeum. , Broch,  1929,  p.  500. 

Colobonema  typicum,  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  46;  1919,  p.  322. 

Homoeonema  typicum,  Uchida,  1928,  p.  81. 

Material:  Net  Nos.  26,  39,  94,  95,  99,  105,  240,  292,  293,  295,  296,  400, 
434,  565,  597,  605,  606,  607,  610,  625,  626,  637,  641,  653,  680,  732,  760,  777, 
802,  805,  813,  853,  867,  874,  937,  939,  964;  732-0  to  1,829-0  meters;  47 
specimens;  1-3  per  haul,  mostly  in  poor  condition. 

The  specimens  range  from  about  8 to  about  33  mm.  in  heighth.  Fea- 
tures especially  to  be  examined  on  any  considerable  series  of  this  species 
that  may  now  come  to  hand,  are:  (a),  number  and  order  of  appearance  of 
the  tentacles,  whether  as  constant  as  earlier  records  have  indicated;  (b), 
number  of  otocysts;  and  (c),  contours  of  the  proximal  parts  of  the  radial 
canals,  which  Ranson  (1936,  PI.  2,  Fig.  14)  has  found  to  differ  significantly 
from  those  of  Pantachogon. 

Tentacles : Successive  examinations  have  yielded  cumulative  evidence, 
not  only  that  the  final  number  of  tentacles  in  this  species  is  32,  but  that 
variations  from  this  number  are  so  unusual  that  none  has  been  found  among 
123  specimens  collected  by  the  Valdivia  (Vanhoffen,  1902a)  Siboga  (Maas, 
1905),  Research  (Browne,  1906),  Albatross  (Bigelow,  1909;  1913;  1919), 
Thor  (Kramp,  1924),  and  by  the  Prince  of  Monaco  (Ranson,  1936).  The 
peculiar  order  of  development — perradials,  adradials,  and  finally  interradials 
— first  reported  by  Maas  (1905),  has  proved  equally  unvarying,  judging 
from  the  relative  sizes  of  the  different  orders  of  tentacles  on  small  and 
medium-sized  specimens.  Both  these  findings  are  further  corroborated  by 
the  present  series,  for  in  every  octant  on  which  they  can  be  counted,  there 
is  the  usual  interradial,  and  pair  of  adradials  in  the  larger  specimens.  In 
one  of  the  smaller  specimens  about  20  mm.  high  (Net  No.  26),  the  inter- 
radial has  not  yet  appeared  in  one  of  the  octants,  while  in  6 of  the  other 
octants6  it  is  represented  by  a rudimentary  knob  only,  illustrating  a stage 
between  that  in  which  the  per-  and  adradials  alone  have  appeared  (Maas, 

5 The  species  subsequently  described  by  Maas  (1905)  from  the  Siboga  collection,  as  typicum, 
undoubtedly  was  identical  with  Vanhoffen’s  sericeum. 

6 The  margin  of  the  eighth  octant  has  been  torn  off. 


[XXIII  :5 


118  Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 

1905,  Fig.  64),  and  the  final  stage  in  which  the  interradials  are  also  well 
developed. 

In  all  specimens  so  far  examined  (including  the  Bermuda  series)  the 
tentacles  have  been  short,  stump-like.  And  it  seems  now  established  that 
this  is  normal,  and  not  the  result  of  mutilation,  for  in  the  better  preserved 
specimens  the  tips  are  rounded  and  apparently  uninjured,  i.e.,  with  their 
ectodermal  covering  complete.  And  the  fact  that  in  large  specimens  the 
members  of  the  per-  and  adradial  series  (sometimes  the  interradials  also) 
are  all  about  equal  in  length,  suggests  that  they  are  but  little  extensible. 

Otocysts : The  otocysts  of  this  species  must  be  very  easily  detached,  for 
only  in  one  case  has  a single  otocyst  been  detected,  among  the  earlier  collec- 
tions (Bigelow,  1919,  p.  323).  One  of  the  Bermuda  specimens  (Net  No.  26) 
also  bears  one  otocyst — agreeing  in  structure  with  the  earlier  account — be- 
tween a per-  and  an  adradial  tentacle.  But  I have  not  been  able  to  detect 
even  a trace  of  any  others,  in  this,  or  on  any  of  the  other  specimens.  To 
determine  positively  whether  otocysts  normally  alternate  with  tentacles,  as 
earlier  observations  suggest  (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  321),  requires  examination 
of  specimens  with  undamaged  margin. 

Radial  Canals:  Ranson  (1936,  p.  154,  PI.  2,  Fig.  14)  has  recently  pointed 
out  (what  seems  to  have  been  overlooked  previously)  that  the  radial  canals 
of  Colobonema  are  expanded  proximally  so  that  their  walls  are  in  close 
contact  (though  discontinuous)  in  the  interradii  across  the  domed  apex  of 
the  subumbrella,  narrowing  again  toward  their  union  with  the  narrow  base 
of  the  manubrium,  which  gives  characteristic  ovoid  contours  to  the  apical 
ends  of  the  8 muscular  zones.  The  better  preserved  of  the  Bermuda  series 
corroborate  this  interpretation,  so  far  as  can  be  determined  from  surface 
views,  though  in  all  cases  the  base  of  the  stomach  is  damaged. 

General  Distribution:  Colobonema,  as  distinguished  from  Pantachon 
haeckeli7  had  been  taken  already  at  many  stations  in  regions  as  widely  scat- 
tered, as  the  central  Sargasso  Sea;  the  eastern  North  Atlantic;  west  of  Ire- 
land ; between  the  Azores,  Canaries,  and  the  coast  of  Spain ; Straits  of 
Gibraltar;  Mediterranean;  equatorial  and  South  Atlantic  down  to  Latitude 
42°S. ; the  Indian  Ocean  from  Lat.  9°N.  to  Lat  34°S. ; Malaysian  region; 
Philippines;  Japanese  waters;  and  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific.  It  is,  in 
short,  cosmopolitan  in  the  warm  and  temperate  belts,  at  appropriate  depths, 
but  has  not  yet  been  reported  from  Arctic  or  from  Antarctic  latitudes. 

Vertical  Range:  So  far  as  I have  been  able  to  learn,  the  shoalest  haul 
that  has  so  far  yielded  Colobonema  was  with  an  open  net,  from  about  241-0 
meters,  most  of  the  captures  (all  but  one  with  open  nets)  being  from  hauls 
deeper  than  500-0  meters;  and  there  is  one  record  from  a closing  net  from 
900-1,500  meters.  Its  bathypelagic  habit  is  thus  well  established. 

Crossota. 

Crossota,  originally  classed  with  the  Ptychogastridae  (Vanhoffen,  1902a; 
Bigelow,  1909),  was  soon  shown  to  be  a trachynemid  (Bigelow,  1913).  But 
it  is  not  yet  possible  to  give  any  precise  generic  definition  for  it  that  can  be 
depended  upon  to  stand  the  test  of  time.  During  the  first  years  of  its  his- 
tory it  was,  indeed,  regarded  as  a very  sharply  defined  genus,  for  while  the 
type  species  (C.  brunnea  Vanhoffen)  agrees  with  Aglaura  and  Aglantha  in 
the  structure  of  the  gonads,  it  differs  markedly  from  them  not  only  in  lack- 
ing any  trace  of  a gelatinous  peduncle,  but  also — and  from  all  other  Trachy- 
nemidae  as  well — in  having  more  than  one  row  of  tentacles.  Shortly,  how- 
ever, other  species  were  described,  one  of  which  ( rufobrunnea , Kvamp, 
1913)  apparently  had  the  tentacles  in  a single  row,8  while  in  another  (C. 

7 Thiel’s  (1936)  chart  of  distribution  for  Pantachogon  also  includes  the  Colobonema  records, 
for  he  classes  the  latter  as  a synonym  of  the  former. 

8 Broch  (1929,  p.  506)  says  “Ersichtlich  in  einer  Reihe.” 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  119 

pedunculata  Bigelow,  1913),  there  is  a short  gelatinous  peduncle.  The  for- 
mer partially  bridges  the  gap  between  Crossota  and  Pantachogon,  the  latter 
between  Crossota  and  Aglantha,  i.e.,  between  the  subfamilies  Rhopalone- 
minae  and  Aglaurinae,  as  defined  by  Broch  (1929)  and  by  Thiel  (1936,  p.  9). 
Indeed,  pedunculata  is  tentatively  referred  to  Aglantha  by  Thiel  (1936,  p. 
22).  But  this  course  would  involve  expanding  that  genus  to  include  species 
with  tentacles  in  more  than  one  series,  for  in  C.  pedunculata  these  are  in 
three  or  four  irregular  rows,  much  as  in  Crossota  brunnea.  Until  Kramp 
and  Damas’  (1925,  p.  317)  characterization  of  the  tentacles  of  norvegica 
as  being  in  a single  row  is  confirmed,  it  seems  simplest  to  confine  Crossota 
to  Trachynemidae  with  sausage-shaped  gonads  hanging  free  from  the  sub- 
umbrella and  with  many  closely  crowded  tentacles,  in  more  than  one  row, 
irrespective  of  whether  or  not  there  is  a short  peduncle.  Data  as  to  the 
number  of  otocysts  is  much  to  be  desired.  In  the  only  species  in  which  any 
estimate  of  this  has  been  possible,  they  have  proved  much  more  numerous 
than  they  are  in  Aglantha. 


? Crossota  brunnea  Vanhoffen. 

Crossota  brunnea,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  73,  PI.  9,  Figs.  11-13,  PI.  12,  Figs. 
34-38,  43-47;  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  135,  PI.  2,  Fig.  7,  PI.  45,  Fig.  9; 
Mayer,  1910,  p.  396. 

Crossota  brunnea  [Partim],  Thiel,  1936,  p.  20°. 

Crossota  brunnea,  var.  norvegica,  Bigelow,  1913,  p.  48. 

Crossota  norvegica,  Broch,  1929,  p.  5Q7. 

? Crossota  norvegica,  Kramp,  1920,  p.  5. 

Non  Crossota  norvegica,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  75;  Kramp  and  Damas, 
1925,  p.  317. 

See  Thiel  (1936,  p.  21)  for  a recent  summary  of  the  checkered  history 
of  C.  norvegica  Vanhoffen  and  for  the  reasons  why  norvegica  can- 
not be  used  as  the  name  for  a variety  of  C.  brunnea  as  I formerly 
did  (Bigelow,  1913). 

Material : Net  Nos.  241,  642,  665,  733,  787,  794,  854,  869;  1,097-0  to 
1,829-0  meters;  11  very  fragmentary  specimens,  all  approximately  14  mm. 
in  diameter. 

These  specimens  are  all  in  such  poor  condition  that  identification  is 
only  tentative;  in  every  case  all  trace  of  the  manubrium  and  gonads  has 
been  lost  and  only  faint  indications  of  the  radial  canals  are  to  be  seen.  At 
first  sight,  it  seemed  that  they  might  belong  to  C.  rufobrunnea  Kramp,  for 
in  most  cases  the  tentacular  bases — in  their  present  state — have  the  appear- 
ance of  being  in  a single  row.  But  in  one  specimen  in  which  the  margin  is 
in  somewhat  better  condition  than  in  the  others,  the  larger  (older)  tentacle- 
bases  arise  at  a slightly  higher  level  than  do  the  smaller  (younger)  ones,  for 
which  reason  it  seems  more  probable  that  the  whole  series  belongs  to 
C.  brunnea.  In  some  parts  of  the  margin,  3 successive  sizes — or  rows — of 
tentacles  can  be  recognized,  in  others  only  two,  as  was  the  case  in  the 
Meteor  specimen  recently  described  by  Thiel  (1936,  p.  20).  In  the  speci- 
mens of  brunnea  that  I have  seen,  in  good  enough  condition  to  show  the 
tentacles  (Bigelow,  1909;  1913),  the  arrangement  in  different  rows  has  been 
less  regular  than  Vanhoffen  (1902a,  PI.  12,  Fig.  47)  pictured  it,  the  tentacles 
being  more  crowded  and  the  older  only  a very  short  distance  above  the 
younger,  instead  of  well  above  the  latter:  this  distribution  is  more  cor- 
rectly represented  in  Vanhoffen’s  1902a,  PI.  12,  Fig.  46)  section  of  the 
margin. 


,J  Thiel  (1936)  includes  C.  alba  Bigelow  in  the  synonymy  of  C.  brunnea. 


120 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


It  was  not  possible  to  make  a reliable  count  of  the  tentacles,  even  in 
any  one  octant,  owing  to  the  uncertainty  as  to  the  precise  location  of  the 
radial  canals.  In  the  specimen  just  mentioned,  the  spacings  of  the  ten- 
tacular-bases suggests  a total  of  at  least  200.  No  otocysts  were  to  be  found. 

In  most  of  the  specimens  enough  of  the  subumbral  pigmentation  is 
still  intact  to  show  that  it  was  of  the  characteristic  opacity  and  chocolate  or 
reddish  brown  color. 

General  Distribution:  Previous  records  probably  referable  to  C.  brun- 
nea,  as  mapped  by  Thiel  (1936,  p.  23),  are  widely  scattered  in  the  eastern 
side  of  the  Atlantic  from  Latitude  about  50°  N.  down  to  the  Antarctic — 
extended,  now  in  all  probability  to  the  western  half  of  the  Sargasso  Sea — ; 
in  both  sides  of  the  Indian  Ocean ; and  in  the  parts  of  the  eastern  tropical 
and  far  northern  Pacific  traversed  by  the  Albatross  on  the  cruises  of  1904- 
1905  and  1906.  It  has  not  been  taken,  however,  in  the  Mediterranean.  And 
while  reaching  high  latitudes  in  the  south,  it  apparently  does  not  inhabit  the 
North  Polar  regions. 

Vertical  Range:  All  captures  have  been  in  deep  hauls. 

? Crossota. 

The  following  fragments  (now  mere  shells)  are  tentatively  referred  to 
Crossota  because  such  indications  of  the  locations  of  the  tentacles  as  are 
still  to  be  seen  suggest  that  these  were  numerous  and  close  crowded,  and 
because  most  of  the  specimens  still  show  some  trace  of  subumbral  pigment. 
But  specific  identification  is  out  of  the  question. 

Net  Nos.  41,  66,  74,  75,  101,  114,  137,  138,  220,  295,  640,  644,  647,  666, 

724,  748,  770,  779,  807,  812,  815,  844,  849,  867,  885,  891,  917,  935,  959,  967, 

970;  914-0  to  1,830-0  meters;  fragments  of  37  specimens. 

Trachynemidae  gen.  ? 

Medusae,  apparently  belonging  to  the  Trachynemidae,  but  in  such  poor 
condition  as  to  preclude  even  provisional  identification,  were  taken  in  Net 
Nos.  110,  145,  269,  295,  317,  322,  327,  341,  449,  574,  577,  598,  613,  644,  680, 

715,  718,  726,  738,  767,  785,  795,  799,  807,  824,  827,  867,  882,  885,  896,  926, 

968;  a total  of  51  specimens,  1-4  per  haul. 

Halicreidae. 

Halicreas. 

Opinions  have  differed  whether  such  of  the  Halicreidae  as  have  only 
8 canals,  and  tentacles  in  a continuous  row  (i.e.,  not  grouped  as  they  are  in 
Botrynema')  should  all  be  referred  to  the  one  genus,  Halicreas,  or  to  two 
genera;  and  if  the  latter,  whether  generic  separation  should  be  based  on 
number  of  tentacles  alone,  as  by  Vanhoffen  (1902a),  on  this  character  com- 
bined with  the  form  of  the  umbrella,  as  by  Ranson  (1936)  ; or  on  the  pres- 
ence or  absence  of  exumbral  papillae,  as  formerly  by  me  (1909). 

Even  granting  eventual  agreement  as  to  the  relative  taxonomic  value 
of  different  characters,  we  still  face  a nomenclatural  difficulty  (if  two  gen- 
era are  to  be  recognized),  in  the  fact  that  the  decision  as  to  the  correct  name 
of  the  second  genus  would  depend  on  the  true  identity  of  the  specimen 
originally  described  by  Maas  (1893)  as  Homoeonema  platygonon,  and  later 
declared  by  him  (Maas,  1906,  p.  3)  to  be  a halicreasid,  not  a trachynemid  as 
he  originally  supposed. 

Examination  of  the  type  specimen  of  H.  platygonon,  if  this  be  still  in 
existence,  would  settle  the  point.  Meanwhile  it  seems  simplest  to  follow 
Broch  (1929)  and  Thiel  (1936),  in  uniting,  in  Halicreas,  all  halicreasids 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


121 


with  8 canals  and  continuous  series  of  tentacles,  whether  the  exumbrella  be 
papillate  or  smooth,  and  whether  the  tentacles  be  few  or  numerous,  all  of 
one  size,  or  of  two  sizes.  For  further  discussion,  see  Ranson  (1936)  and 
Thiel  (1936). 

Among  the  named  forms  referable  to  Halicreas  as  thus  expanded,  two 
( H . minimum  Fewkes  and  H.  papillosum  Vanhoffen)  are  set  apart  by  the 
presence  of  exumbral  papillae.  Thiel  (1936),  it  is  true,  bases  the  specific 
distinction  within  Halicreas  solely  on  whether  the  tentacles  are  of  one  size 
or  of  two  sizes.  I see  no  reason,  however,  for  abandoning  the  presence  or 
absence  of  exumbral  papillae  as  of  specific  value  here,  even  if  it  be  not  of 
generic  worth  as  I formerly  suggested ; not  only  are  these  structures  highly 
distinctive  features,  but  no  variation  has  ever  been  found  in  their  number. 
And  Ranson  (1936)  also  considers  them  as  specific. 

H.  papillosum  is  the  best-known  member  of  the  genus,  and  large  series 
of  it  have  been  taken  on  most  of  the  recent  expeditions  that  have  done  deep 
towing.  It  has,  however,  long  been  generally  recognized  that  it  might 
eventually  prove  to  be  identical  with  the  H.  minimum  of  Fewkes  (type 
species  of  the  genus)  which  was  described  20  years  the  earlier,  consequently 
minimum  has  repeatedly  been  classed  as  a doubtful  synonym  of  papillosum 
in  the  lists  of  references  to  the  latter.  Fortunately,  the  collection  of  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  contains  one  of  Fewkes’  original  two  speci- 
mens (previously  overlooked)  ; evidently  the  one  described  by  him  (1882,  p. 
306)  as  “expanded”  and  “preserved  in  spirit.”  Although  this  specimen  has 
subsequently  been  dessicated,  then  restored  to  alcohol,  the  typical  exumbral 
papillae  (each  with  several  conical  projections)  are  still  to  be  seen,  while 
the  locations  of  the  8 radial  canals  are  marked  as  broad,  flat  ridges  on  the 
subumbrella.  And  fragments  of  the  circular  lip  are  still  recognizable.  What 
Fewkes  took  for  the  velum  was  in  reality  the  marginal  zone  of  the  bell, 
distal  to  the  exumbral  papillae.  Thus,  while  the  tentacles  have  all  been  lost 
— as  indeed  Fewkes  pointed  out — there  is  no  reason  to  doubt  that  it  is  the 
same  species  that  Vanhoffen  (1902a)  later  described  as  papillosum,  while 
Fewkes’  specimens  were  from  a locality  where  many  papillosum  have  since 
been  taken,  on  the  cruises  of  the  Woods  Hole  Oceanographic  Institution. 
Consequently,  there  need  no  longer  be  any  hesitancy  in  superseding  papillo- 
sum by  minimum,  thus  making  one  more  step  toward  stability  in  the 
nomenclature  of  the  medusae. 

It  has  long  been  obvious  that  the  five  named  representatives  of  the 
smooth-belled  subdivision  of  the  genus  ( conicum , album,  glabrum  and  ro- 
tundatum  Vanhoffen,  1902a;  recovitzae  Maas,  1906)  stand  in  need  of  drastic 
reduction,  successive  studies  (Bigelow,  1909;  Ranson,  1936)  having  proved 
that  the  features  on  which  Vanhoffen  (1902a)  laid  chief  stress  (degree  of 
doming  of  the  exumbrella,  and  precise  location  of  the  gonads  on  the  radial 
canals),  are  too  variable  to  be  of  taxonomic  significance.  Thiel’s  (1936) 
recent  grouping,  based  on  whether  there  are  two  sizes  of  tentacles  or  only 
one,  is  a decided  advance.  It  is  certain  that  the  tentacles  are  all  alike  in 
racovitzae,  for  Maas  (1906)  definitely  states  as  much;  likewise  in  conicum 
(Vanhoffen,  1902a,  PI.  11,  Fig.  33).  On  the  other  hand,  it  seems  equally 
certain  that  the  original  specimens  of  glabrum  had  tentacles  of  two  sizes, 
because  Vanhoffen  (1902a,  p.  70)  describes  them  as  “ebenso  wie  bei  H. 
papillosum  angeordnet.”  Hence — as  glabrum  has  page  priority  in  Vanhoffen’s 
original  paper — this  name  may  be  accepted  for  smooth-belled  Halicreas  with 
2 sizes  of  tentacles. 

Unfortunately,  Vanhoffen  gave  no  definite  information  on  this  point, 
either  for  his  Halicreas  album  or  his  Halicreas  rotundatum.  The  first  of 
these  is  placed  by  Thiel  (1936)  in  the  group  in  which  the  tentacles  are  all 
of  one  size  (i.e.,  grouped  with  racovitzae  and  conicum ).  And  the  original 
accounts  certainly  would  allow  this  interpretation.  But  Vanhoffen’s  (1902a, 
p.  68)  statement  that  “so  wohl  Halicreas  wie  Haliscera”  has  tentacles  of 


122 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


two  sizes,  makes  it  seem  more  likely  that  this  was  true  of  his  specimens  of 
album  and  rotundatum.  Hence  it  seems  justifiable  to  class  these  names 
provisionally  as  synonyms  of  glabrum,  recognizing,  however,  that  the  wide 
variation  in  numbers  of  tentacles  between  the  several  forms  may  finally 
warrant  a further  subdivision  on  this  basis. 

Halicreas  minimum  Fewkes. 

Halicreas  minimum,  Fewkes,  1882,  p.  306. 

Halicreas  papillosum,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  68,  PI.  9,  Figs.  7-8;  PI.  11, 
Fig.  30. 

For  the  more  important  subsequent  references,  see  Halicreas  papil- 
losum, Mayer,  1910,  p.  391;  Ranson,  1936,  p.  164;  Halicreas  papil- 
losum [Pai’tim],  Thiel,  1936,  p.  34. 

Material : Net  Nos.  25,  26,  41,  43,  44,  56,  60,  62,  65,  66,  67,  68,  69,  75, 
76,  81,  83,  108,  110,  115,  124,  138,  144,  157,  203,  241,  247,  269,  270,  271,  293, 
295,  297,  357,  360,  383,  401,  405,  406,  442,  466,  468,  481,  488,  501,  566,  569, 

570,  576,  590,  599,  640,  648,  654,  682,  683,  684,  701,  703,  717,  718,  722,  723, 

724,  727,  728,  730,  736,  741,  746,  750,  751,  756,  765,  767,  774,  781,  787,  788, 

795,  799,  815,  852,  857,  858,  863,  864,  869,  875,  887,  893,  898,  919,  931,  932, 

933,  935,  940,  942,  947,  963,  969,  970;  at  depths  ranging  from  0 to  2,012-0 
meters;  a total  of  186  specimens;  1-6  specimens  per  haul,  except  for  one 
catch  of  17  specimens  in  Net  No.  271. 

The  specimens,  ranging  from  about  13  mm.  to  about  36  mm.  in  diam- 
eter, are  all  fragmentary,  having  lost  every  trace  of  marginal  organs  and  of 
the  gastrovascular  system.  Hence,  they  add  nothing  to  previous  accounts  of 
the  morphology  of  this  interesting  bathypelagic  medusa.  This  species  is, 
however,  made  so  easily  recognizable  by  the  marginal  papillae — structures 
so  resistant  that  they  persist  even  after  the  roughest  handling — that  iden- 
tity seems  assured.  Most  of  them  also  show  more  or  less  trace  of  the 
gelatinous  apical  projection,  though  the  discs  of  others  are  apically  rounded, 
in  their  present  condition. 

General  Distribution:  Earlier  records  of  captui’e  are  widespread  over 
the  eastern  side  of  the  tropical  Pacific,  also  the  tropical  and  subantarctic 
belts  of  the  Indian  Ocean,  the  East  Indies  and  Philippines,  Japan,  Sea  of 
Okhotsk,  Bering  Sea,  the  South  Atlantic  down  to  the  Antarctic,  north  boreal 
and  east  temperate  belts  of  the  North  Atlantic  (Thiel,  1935,  Fig  38;  1936, 
p.  36,  Fig.  7;  Ranson,  1936).  It  had  been  taken  on  the  continental  slope  of 
America  in  the  offing  of  Woods  Hole.  Curiously,  however,  there  was  no 
previous  record  of  it  in  the  Sargasso  Sea  region.  The  Bermuda  records, 
proving  it  abundant  there,  are  therefore  interesting  as  cumulative  evidence 
that  it  is  cosmopolitan  in  the  ocean  basins  at  suitable  depths,  at  low  and 
mid-latitudes. 

However,  it  has  not  been  taken  in  the  Mediterranean,  in  spite  of  the 
great  number  and  wide  distribution  of  deep  hauls  that  have  been  made  there 
by  the  Thor  and  by  the  Prince  of  Monaco  (Kramp,  1924;  Ranson,  1936). 
And  its  absence,  or  at  least  rarity,  there  is  puzzling,  for  the  comparative 
frequency  of  records  from  small  depths  at  low  latitudes  in  the  Atlantic  (see 
below),  makes  it  unlikely  that  the  shoalness  of  the  sill  depth  of  the  Straits 
of  Gibraltar  can  offer  a permanent  barrier  to  its  entrance  into  the  Mediter- 
ranean, as  it  apparently  does  in  the  case  of  certain  more  strictly  bathy- 
pelagic animals  (Bigelow  and  Sears,  1937,  p.  128).  For  further  discussion 
of  its  distribution  and  dispersal  in  the  South  Atlantic,  see  Thiel,  1935,  p. 
72. 

Seasonal  Distribution : The  seasonal  distribution  of  the  hauls  yielding 
H.  minima,  for  the  two  years  combined,  appear  from  the  following  tabula- 
tion : 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  123 


Month. 

Hauls  Yielding 

H.  minimum. 

Total  Hauls, 
1,280-0  Meters 
or  Deeper. 

% Yielding 
H.  minimum. 

April. 

6 

20 

30 

May. 

24 

77 

31 

June. 

22 

135 

16 

July. 

17 

109 

15 

August. 

5 

40 

12 

September. 

29 

158 

19 

This  shows  a somewhat  greater  abundance  in  spring,  for  the  two  collecting 
seasons  combined,  than  during  the  summer  months. 

Vertical  Range : The  early  records  were  all  from  hauls  with  open  nets, 
leaving  in  doubt  the  precise  depths  from  which  the  specimens  came,  but 
the  great  majority  of  the  catches  were  from  hauls  that  sampled  down  to 
500  meters  or  deeper.  Thus,  the  shoalest  of  the  40  Valdivia  hauls  that 
yielded  specimens  positively  identified  as  H.  minimum  was  from  600-0 
meters,  37  of  them  at  least  1,000-0  meters10  or  deeper  (Vanhoffen,  1902). 
All  of  the  30  Albatross  catches  were,  similarly,  in  hauls  from  550-0  meters 
(Bigelow,  1909;  1913;  1919),  while  the  records  of  the  Prince  of  Monaco 
were  all  from  1,000-0  meters  or  deeper  (Ranson,  1936). 

The  Meteor  records  have  shown,  however,  that  H.  minimum  is  not  ex- 
clusively restricted  to  great  depths,  but  may  populate  the  whole  column 
from,  say,  75  meters  down  to  800-900  meters,  as  appears  from  the  distribu- 
tion of  catches  in  closing  nets,  tabulated  below,  from  data  presented  by 
Thiel  (1935,  Tables  10,  21,  Fig.  27;  1936,  p.  34)  : 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Number 
of  Cases. 

Number  of 
Specimens. 

50-  70 

1 

1 

50-100 

7 

8 

100-200 

2 

2 

200-400 

5 

7 

400-600 

4 

5 

600-800 

2 

1 

And  still  more  recent  captures  by  Atlantis  of  the  Woods  Hole  Oceanographic 
Institution  make  it  unlikely  that  there  is  any  definite  lower  boundary  to  its 
occurrence,  any  more  than  for  various  siphonophores  (Bigelow  and  Sears, 
1937,  p.  137),  for  horizontal  closing  net  hauls  of  uniform  duration  at  3 
stations  as  described  by  Leavitt  (1935)  in  the  summer  of  1935,  yielded  the 
following  catches: 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Number 
of  Cases. 

Number  of 
Specimens. 

600 

1 

6 

1,200 

1 

4 

1,800 

1 

3 

2,000 

1 

2 

2,200 

2 

2 

10  One  juvenile,  perhaps  of  this  identity,  was  taken  at  200-0  meters. 


124 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


The  Bermuda  collection  amplifies  the  foregoing,  proving  that  H.  mini- 
mum may  occasionally  come  right  up  to  the  surface  (Net  No.  654,  1 speci- 
men). But  in  this  part  of  the  Sargasso  Sea,  where  the  thickness  of  the 
superficial  stratum  of  warm  water  is  great,  the  chief  center  of  abundance 
lies  deeper  than  in  most  parts  of  the  oceans,  or  at  least  as  deep  as  1,400- 
1,800  meters,  as  appears  from  the  following  tabulation  for  the  two  seasons 
combined : 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

No.  of  Hauls 
with 

minimum. 

Total 

Number 

Hauls. 

% with 
minimum. 

732-0 

2 

40 

5 

913-0 

3 

132 

2 

1,097-0 

2 

134 

2 

1,280-0 

8 

132 

6 

1,463-0 

21 

132 

15 

1,646-0 

34 

135 

25 

1,829-0 

31 

135 

22 

2,012-0 

3 

4 

45 

H.  minimum  (seemingly  also  H.  glabrum  and  Halitrephes ) thus  is  a marked 
exception  to  the  general  rule  that  medusae  having  their  center  of  abundance 
so  deep,  are  densely  pigmented. 

Thiel  (1935,  p.  47)  has  shown,  from  the  catches  made  in  closing  nets  by 
the  Meteor,  that  the  individuals  of  the  genus  Halicreas,  as  a whole,  average 
larger,  the  greater  the  depth.  This  suggests  that  the  young  stages  are 
passed  chiefly  in  the  shoaler  strata  and  that  the  medusae  tend  to  sink  as 
they  grow  larger.  But  we  still  await  positive  evidence  whether  the  eggs,  as 
a whole,  rise  to  the  surface,  as  he  suggests  (Thiel,  1935,  p.  72). 


? Halicreas  glabrum  Vanhoffen. 

Halicreas  glabrum,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  70,  PI.  9,  Fig.  3;  Mayer,  1910, 
p.  392;  Ranson,  1936,  p.  167. 

Homoeonema  glabrum,  Bigelow  and  Leslie,  1930,  p.  564. 

Haliscera  alba,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  71,  PI.  9,  Fig.  5. 

Homoeonema  alba,  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  142,  PI.  3,  Fig.  1-2,  PI.  33,  Figs.  6, 
11,  PI.  34,  Fig.  9. 

Halicreas  album  [Partim],  Thiel,  1935,  p.  48;  1936,  p.  37. 

Halicreas  rotundatum,  Vanhoffen,  1902a,  p.  71,  PI.  9,  Fig.  4;  Maas,  1905, 
p.  57 ; Mayer,  1910,  p.  392. 

Halicreas  papillosum  [Partim],  Thiel,  1936,  p.  34.  [Non  H.  papillosum, 
Vanhoffen,  1902.] 

Material : Net  Nos.  25,  43,  56,  62,  68,  75,  83,  89,  106,  114,  144,  145,  157, 
218,  242,  247,  269,  270,  271,  295,  297,  315,  339,  345,  346,  347,  354,  359,  449, 
466,  488,  501,  506,  539,  710,  742,  890,  942,  962;  hauls  from  914-0  meters 
to  2,012-0  meters;  66  specimens,  1-5  per  haul. 

These  specimens — like  Ranson’s — agree  very  closely  with  Vanhoffen’s 
(1902,  p.  9,  Fig.  3)  illustration  of  H.  album  in  the  form  of  the  bell,  with 
high  conical  apex,  and  thin  marginal  zone,  without  any  sign  of  the  exumbral 
protuberances.  But  as  already  suggested  (Bigelow  and  Leslie,  1930,  p.  564), 
and  as  indicated  above  (p.  122),  it  is  probable  that  album  is  specifically 
identical  with  Vanhoffen’s  H.  glabrum  and  the  latter  name  has  page  priority. 


1938] 


Bigeloiv:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


125 


In  every  case,  all  trace  of  all  the  tentacles  has  been  lost,  preventing  posi- 
tive identification;  in  fact  the  great  majority  are  mere  shells.  But  in  a few, 
parts  of  the  subumbrella  still  remain.  And  one  from  Net  No.  890,  another 
from  Net  No.  942,  are  especially  interesting,  being  in  good  enough  condi- 
tion to  show  the  oval  gonads  situated  proximally,  leaving  the  distal  parts  of 
the  radial  canals  free,  as  was  the  case  in  the  Albatross  specimens  (Bigelow, 
1909).  And  this  corroborates  Ranson’s  (1936,  p.  168)  observation  that  in 
his  specimens  (which  had  lost  the  gonads)  the  traces  of  the  radial  canals 
suggested  proximal  enlargements. 

General  Distribution:  Previous  records  positively  referable  to  glabrum 
+ album  are  from  the  vicinity  of  the  Azores  (Ranson,  1936)  ; and  scattered 
a'ong  the  route  of  the  Valdivia  in  the  eastern  side  of  the  Atlantic,  from  the 
offing  of  Morocco  to  Lat.  42°  S.,  besides  one  locality  record  for  the  southern 
Indian  Ocean  (Vanhoffen,  1902a)  ; several  in  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific 
(Bigelow,  1909)11;  and  off  California  (Bigelow  and  Leslie,  1930).  With  the 
Bermuda  records  extending  its  known  range  to  the  western  side  of  the 
North  Atlantic,  there  seems  no  reason  to  doubt  that  the  distribution  of  H. 
glabrum  will  eventually  prove  to  be  as  wide  as  that  of  its  better  known 
relative,  H.  minimum  (p.  122). 

Vertical  Range:  It  is  not  yet  possible  to  make  a final  statement  as  to  the 
vertical  distribution  of  H.  glabrum,  as  here  defined,  because  it  is  combined 
with  H.  racovitzae  and  H.  conicum  in  Thiel’s  (1935,  1936)  discussions  of 
the  Meteor  closing-net  data.  However,  the  fact  that  the  Valdivia,  Albatross, 
and  Bermudian  specimens  all  came  from  (open  net)  hauls  from  550-0 
meters,  or  deeper,  suggests  that  it  is  chiefly  bathypelagic  in  habit,  though 
perhaps  not  exclusively  so. 

Halitrephes. 

This  genus,  closely  allied  to  Halicreas  by  the  structure  of  the  tentacles 
and  of  the  sense  organs,  as  well  as  by  the  simple  circular  mouth,  without 
separate  lips,  but  separated  from  it  by  the  large  number  of  radial  canals, 
was  first  described  from  the  collection  made  by  the  Albatross  in  the  eastern 
tropical  Pacific  as  H.  maasi  (Bigelow,  1909,  p.  146,  PI.  33,  Figs.  1-5,  7,  10, 
PI.  45,  Fig.  13).  In  the  type  specimen  of  the  latter,  55  mm.  in  diameter,  28 
canals  were  given  off  from  the  stomach,  5 of  them  branching  dichotomously 
so  that  the  number  at  the  bell  margin  was  33;  and  there  were  about  70 
tentacles  of  different  sizes.  Three  years  later,  Vanhoffen  (1912)  described 
a second  species,  as  H.  valdiviae,  from  the  collection  of  the  German  South 
Polar  Expedition,  with  as  many  tentacles  or  even  more,  but  separated  from 
maasi  by  having  only  16  canals.  As  the  specimens  examined  by  him 
ranged  in  diameter  from  18  to  70  mm. — i.e.,  included  full  grown  individuals 
as  well  as  juveniles — the  specific  distinction  seems  well  founded. 

As  the  genus  has  not  been  seen  since,  the  captures  listed  below  from 
Bermuda  are  of  interest,  for  although  the  specimens  are  extremely  frag- 
mentary, their  identity  seems  reasonably  certain. 


Halitrephes  valdiviae  Vanhoffen. 

Halitrephes  valdiviae,  Vanhoffen,  1912,  p.  384. 

Material:  Net  Nos.  135,  154,  247,  357,  451,  562,  580,  614,  635,  709, 
714,  745,  767,  778,  818,  830,  843,  967;  hauls  from  914-0  to  1,829-0  meters; 
19  specimens  about  30  to  80  mm.  in  diameter. 

All  the  specimens  are  in  poor  condition.  Even  when  much  battered, 

11  Thiel’s  (1936,  p.  36)  chart  of  distribution  also  includes  locality  records  for  racovitzae  and 
conicum. 


126  ' Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

however,  the  flat,  lenticular  form,  but  with  central  thickening,  combined 
with  numerous  endodermal  tentacular  roots,  (which  are  so  resistant  that 
they  are  recognizable  even  in  the  most  fragmentary  specimens),  give  a 
general  aspect  so  characteristic  as  to  make  Halitrephes  easily  recognizable, 
even  when  the  canals  have  been  lost.  And  the  two  known  species  differ  so 
widely  in  the  number  of  tentacles  that  in  most  cases  a specimen  is  referable 
either  to  the  one  or  to  the  other,  with  reasonable  certainty.  All  of  the 
Bermudian  specimens  show  the  endodermal  roots  of  some  of  the  tentacles; 
and  in  one  example,  several  tentacles  are  still  sufficiently  intact  to  show  the 
contrast  between  stiff  distal,  and  soft  proximal,  portions,  characteristic  of 
the  Halicreidae.  It  was  not  possible  to  make  certain  of  the  total  number 
of  tentacles,  in  any  specimen.  But  the  minimum  number  (specimen  of  about 
55  mm.)  was  certainly  as  great  as  102.  In  another  of  45  mm.,  there  were  at 
least  105,  while  in  others  of  60-80  mm.,  145-170  tentacular  roots  were 
counted,  total  numbers  being  evidently  somewhat  greater.  This  corresponds 
well  to  the  distribution  with  size  recorded  by  Vanhoffen  (1912)  of  32 
tentacles  in  a specimen  of  12  mm.;  32-64  tentacles  at  a diameter  of  18-20 
mm.;  64-96  at  a diameter  of  30-40  mm.;  and  200  at  70  mm.  As  pointed  out 
for  H.  maasi  (Bigelow,  1909,  p.  146),  the  tentacular  bases  are  of  various 
sizes,  indicating  their  successive  development.  But  as  no  trace  of  canals  is 
to  be  seen  in  the  marginal  zone  of  any  of  the  Bermudian  specimens,  nothing 
can  be  said  as  to  the  order  of  development  of  tentacles  relative  to  canals. 

In  one  specimen,  a sector  of  the  margin  still  bears  several  rhopalia, 
alternating  with  the  tentacular  roots,  as  is  the  case  in  H.  maasi,  and  agree- 
ing closely  with  the  rhopalia  of  the  latter  in  structure  and  club-like  appear- 
ance (Bigelow,  1909,  PI.  33,  Fig.  10).  The  only  example  in  which  there  is 
any  trace  of  the  gastrovascular  system  still  to  be  seen,  shows  the  circular 
lip  characteristic  of  the  genus  and  its  allies,  with  the  bases  of  about  8,  at, 
broad  canals  in  about  one-half  the  circumference,  suggesting  a total  of 
about  sixteen;  or  the  same  number  described  by  Vanhoffen  (1912)  for  the 
original  series  of  H.  valdiviae. 

General  Distribution : The  original  collections  of  H.  valdiviae  were  from 
the  tropical  Atlantic  between  Lat.  6°  N.  and  Lat.  20°  S. ; and  fi'om  the 
Indian  Ocean  between  Lat.  2°  N.  and  Lat.  34°  S.  The  Bermuda  captures 
are  thus  the  most  northerly  yet  recorded,  and  the  farthest  extra-tropical 
for  the  Atlantic.  Present  indications  are  that  this  is  a tropical  and  sub- 
tropical species,  else  it  would  probably  have  been  picked  up  in  some  of  the 
many  deep  towings  that  have  been  made  farther  north  and  east  in  the 
Atlantic. 

Vertical  Range:  All  the  records  for  H.  valdiviae  have  so  far  been  from 
hauls  that  worked  down  to  at  least  500  meters;  in  most  cases  to  at  least 
1,000  meters.  Its  bathypelagic  status  thus  seems  established. 

More  precise  information  as  to  the  depth  of  its  chief  center  of  abun- 
dance would  be  of  interest,  because,  while  colorless,  most  of  the  captures, 
like  those  of  Halicreas  minimum,  have  been  in  nets  working  so  deep  as  to 
indicate  that  the  specimens  were  from  levels  inhabited  also  by  the  deeply 
pigmented  groups  of  medusae,  and  by  the  black  bathypelagic  fishes. 

Geryonidae. 

Liriope. 

Although  this  sharply  defined  genus  is  perhaps  the  most  often  encoun- 
tered of  Trachomedusae,  there  has  been  no  agreement  as  to  the  specific 
relationships  of  its  many  described  representatives,  owing  to  the  difficulty 
(I  believe  we  may  say  “impossibility”)  of  finding  any  differences,  the  gaps 
between  which  cannot  be  bridged  by  examination  of  sufficiently  large  series. 
Final  decision  that  all  known  representatives  of  Liriope  represent  but  a 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


127 


single  variable  species  was  already  foreshadowed  in  Browne’s  (1927)  inter- 
esting exposition  of  the  situation  that  faces  every  student  of  the  genus. 
Thiel  (1936,  p.  45)  has  now  definitely  made  this  union  of  all  the  named 
forms  under  the  oldest  designation,  L.  tetraphylla  Chamisso  and  Eysen- 
hardt.  And  the  reader  is  referred  to  his  discussion  for  a clear  exposition 
of  the  reasons  justifying  this  procedure.  Granting,  however,  that  the  vari- 
ous forms  of  Liriope  cannot  be  considered  “species,”  in  the  sense  in  which 
the  term  is  generally  employed  in  zoological  nomenclature,  it  still  remains 
an  interesting  question  how  they  are  to  be  interpreted,  and  how  recorded 
in  scientific  literature.  While  it  is  now  established  that  intergrades  can  be 
found  with  regard  to  every  character  which  has  been  suggested  as  specific, 
we  have  still  to  recognize  that  the  representatives  of  different  swarms,  or 
of  different  populations  (seasonal  or  regional),  often  do  differ  so  widely  in 
many  respects,  as  Browne  (1927)  has  vividly  described,  that  they  would  be 
referred  without  hesitation  to  different  species  had  not  the  existence  of 
intermediates  been  proved. 

Liriope  tetraphylla  Chamisso  and  Eysenhardt. 

Geryonia  tetraphylla,  Chamisso  and  Eysenhardt,  1821,  p.  357,  PI.  27, 
Fig.  2. 

For  lists  of  references  to  the  named  forms  of  Liriope,  all  of  which,  fol- 
lowing Thiel  (1936)  are  now  referred  to  L.  tetraphylla,  see  Mayer, 
1910,  p.  413-424;  also,  Thiel,  1936,  p.  45. 

Material:  Net  No.  51,  Surface,  April  29,  1929,  1 specimen  about  5 mm. 
in  diameter. 

The  gonads  in  this  young  specimen  are  of  about  the  same  form  as  in  a 
7 mm.  specimen,  already  pictured  from  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  (Bigelow, 
1909,  PI.  4,  Fig.  3),  namely,  squarish  with  rounded  angles.  This  stage  has 
already  been  proved  preliminary  to  the  triangular  or  rhomboid  outlines 
often,  but  not  always,  attained  by  adult  L.  tetraphylla. 

The  most  interesting  thing  about  this  record  is  that  974  hauls  in  vari- 
ous months  from  May  to  October,  in  two  different  years,  yielded  only  the 
one  specimen  of  a genus  so  widespread  and  frequently  abundant  in  warm 
seas.  Nor  can  the  paucity  be  credited  to  the  depths  at  which  the  hauls  were 
made,  for  108  of  them  were  in  the  upper  200  meters ; 86  right  at  the  surface. 
This,  added  to  the  corresponding  fact  that  the  Bache  hauls  in  the  winter  of 
1914,  yielded  only  4 Liriope  at  2 stations  on  lines  run  between  Cape  Hat- 
teras,  Bermuda,  the  Bahamas,  and  the  Straits  of  Florida,  can  only  mean 
that  it  was  decidedly  rare  in  this  side  of  the  Sargasso  Sea  area  during  the 
periods  in  question,  which  included  both  the  warm  and  the  cold  months.  This 
is  the  more  astonishing,  when  one  remembers  that  the  Plankton  Expedition 
(Maas,  1893)  took  Liriope  regularly  from  Latitude  about  40°  N.,  southward 
to  Bermuda;  and  thence  eastward  all  along  the  track  across  the  tropical 
Atlantic. 


Geryonia. 

Geryonia  proboscidalis  Forskal. 

Medusa  proboscidalis,  Forskal,  1775,  p.  108. 

For  synonymy,  see  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  116,  and  Mayer,  1910,  p.  425. 

Material : Net  No.  613,  1,097-0  meters,  1 fragmentary  specimen,  diam- 
eter about  30  mm. 

Net  No.  621,  1,097-0  meters,  1 fragmentary  specimen,  diameter  about 
16  mm. 


128  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

Net  No.  850,  1,463-0  meters,  1 fragmentary  specimen,  diameter  about, 
25  mm. 

These  very  fragmentary  specimens  (identified  by  the  number  of 
canals)  add  nothing  to  previous  knowledge  of  the  morphology  of  this  well 
known  species. 

Geryonia  had  already  been  reported  to  the  north  and  to  the  east  of 
Bermuda  (Maas,  1893)  as  well  as  at  many  other  localities  in  the  warm  belt 
of  the  Atlantic. 


Narcomedusae. 

In  the  classification  adopted  by  Broch  (1929),  by  Ranson  (1936),  by 
Uchida  (1928),  and  by  me  in  earlier  papers  (Bigelow,  1909;  1913;  1918; 
1919),  the  Narcomedusae  that  have  gastric  pockets  are  divided  into  two 
families,  Cuninidae  and  Aeginidae,  depending  on  whether  the  pockets  are 
perradial,  equal  in  number  to  the  tentacles,  and  not  extending  out  beyond 
the  points  of  origin  of  the  latter  (Cuninidae),  or  whether  the  definitive 
pockets  are  interradial  in  location,  and  at  least  twice  as  numerous  as  the 
tentacles,  with  the  tentacles  arising  in  the  notches  between  the  pockets 
(Aeginidae).  This  scheme  is  followed  here.  Thiel  (1936,  p.  55),  on  the 
contrary,  follows  Mayer  (1910),  in  referring  all  Narcomedusae  with 
peripheral  gastric  pockets  to  one  family,  Aeginidae. 

Such  of  the  typical  Narcomedusae  as  lack  gastric  pockets  are  now  gen- 
erally grouped  in  the  family  Solmaridae.  If  the  curious  sand-dwelling  form, 
Halammohydra,  actually  is  an  aberrant  Narcomedusa,  as  Remane  (1927), 
Uchida  (1928),  and  Leloup  (1935)  believe,  it  calls  for  a separate  family 
(Halammohydriidae,  Remane). 


Cunina. 

Cunina  sp.? 

Material : Net  No.  242,  1,646-0  meters,  1 specimen,  about  30  mm.  in 
diameter. 

Although  .this  specimen  is  very  much  damaged,  enough  remains  to  show 
that  it  had  perradial  gastric  pockets,  and  a well  developed  peronial  canal 
system,  a combination  of  characters  locating  it  in  the  genus  Cunina,  as  con- 
trasted with  Solmissus,  which  lacks  canals.  Unfortunately,  the  exumbrella 
is  so  much  rubbed  or  macerated,  that  it  is  impossible  to  tell  whether,  or  not, 
otoporpae  were  present.  And  all  the  otocysts  have  been  destroyed.  There 
are  23  large  tentacles  and  one  very  small  one.  Identification  of  any  speci- 
men of  Cunina  with  as  many  as  20  tentacles  depends,  in  the  first  place, 
on  decision  whether  the  Medusa  mucilaginosa  of  Chamisso  and  Eysenhardt 
(1821),  with  21-24  tentacles,  belonged  to  Cunina,  to  which  Blainville  (1834) 
referred  it,  or  whether  it  actually  was  a Solmissus  according  to  the  defini- 
tions for  these  two  genera  now  generally  adopted.  The  name  mucilaginosa 
was  used  by  Vanhoffen  (1908a,  as  “Solmaris  mucilaginosa”)  for  a series  of 
Cuninidae  of  large  size  (25-60  mm.  in  diameter),  with  21-24  tentacles.  But 
since  his  specimens  lacked  peronial  canals  (he  gave  no  information  as  to  the 
presence  or  absence  of  otoporpae),  they  are  more  likely  to  have  belonged  to 
Solmissus  than  to  Cunina.12  And  I have  argued  (Bigelow,  1909,  p.  55;  1918, 
p.  392)  that  it  was  wisest  to  discard  mucilaginosa  as  a nomen  nudem,  be- 
cause it  will  never  be  possible  to  tell  from  Chamisso  and  Eysenhardt’s  ac- 
count, to  which  of  these  two  genera  their  original  specimens  did  actually 
belong,  lacking  information  on  the  critical  points — canals  and  otoporpae. 
Ranson  (1936,  p.  200),  however,  has  recently  revived  this  name,  for  a 
Cunina  of  55  mm.  with  21  tentacles. 


12  See  Bigelow,  1919,  p.  327,  for  discussion  of  Vanhoffen’s  treatment  of  the  genus  Solmissus. 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  129 

Without  attempting  to  settle  this  question,  I may  point  out  that  it 
mucilaginosa  be  finally  accepted  as  a Cunina,  it  was  the  earliest  named  mem- 
ber of  this  genus.  Hence,  if  it  lies  within  the  varietal  range  of  the  species 
commonly  called  rubiginosa,  a possibility  suggested  by  Thiel  (1936),  mu- 
cilaginosa must  take  precedence  over  rubiginosa,  and  the  latter  becomes  a 
synonym  of  it. 


Solmissus. 

? Solmissus  incisa  Fewkes. 

Solmissus  incisa,  Fewkes,  1886,  p.  954,  PI.  9;  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  67,  PI. 
21,  Figs.  1-3,  5;  1913,  p.  57;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  483;  Broch,  1929,  p. 
527;  Uchida,  1928,  p.  90;  Bigelow  and  Leslie,  1930,  p.  560;  Ranson, 
1936,  p.  206. 

Solmissus  faberi,  Haeckel,  1879,  p.  350. 

Solmissus  bleekii,  Haeckel,  1879,  p.  351. 

? Solmaris  rliodoloma,  Vanhoffen,  1908a,  p.  60,  PI.  1,  Fig.  5.  [non 
Aequorea  rhodoloma  Brandt,  1838.] 

Material : Net  Nos.  599,  628,  632,  680,  700,  713,  735,  753,  765,  799,  848 
885,  891;  914-0  to  1,829-0  meters;  13  specimens;  those  of  which  measure- 
ment is  possible,  range  from  about  50  mm.  to  about  75  mm.  in  diameter; 
also  other  fragments. 

These  specimens  — all  extremely  fragmentary  — are  identifiable  as 
Solmissus  because  they  show  indications  of  the  presence  of  gastric  pockets 
in  the  radii  of  the  tentacles,  but  no  signs  of  a canal  system.  In  all  cases,  the 
free  gastric  wall  has  been  destroyed,  but  persistant  bands  of  subumbral 
tissue,  around  the  outer  margins  of  the  pockets,  and  in  the  septal  spaces 
between  them,  show  the  pockets  to  have  been  oval  in  outline  and  somewhat 
longer  than  broad.  This  fact,  combined  with  the  large  number  of  tentacles 
(see  below),  warrant  tentative  reference  to  S.  incisa.  And  this  identifica- 
tion is  rendered  the  more  probable  by  the  fact  that  even  in  their  present 
state,  they  agree  in  thinness  of  the  disc,  in  softness  of  the  gelatinous  sub- 
stance, and  generally  in  appearance,  with  the  incisa  collected  by  the  Al- 
batross in  the  Pacific,  with  which  I have  been  able  to  compare  them. 

In  no  case  was  an  exact  count  of  the  tentacles  possible,  but  the  presence 
of  at  least  23  in  one  specimen  of  about  55  mm.,  and  of  25  to  30,  in  three 
others  of,  roughly,  60  and  75  mm.,  corresponds  with  earlier  counts,  which 
have  shown  a range  of  from  23-40  in  specimens  50  mm.  in  diameter  or 
larger.  This  contrasts  with  a maximum  of  16  tentacles  in  S.  albescens  and  in 
S.  marshalli. 

All  specimens  of  S.  incisa  previously  seen  have  lost  all  trace  of  the 
gonads,  nor  is  the  present  series  any  better  in  this  respect.  They  do,  how- 
ever, confirm  Fewkes’  original  illustration  of  the  marginal  outline  as 
straight  or  nearly  so,  from  peronium  to  peronium.  All  the  otocysts  have 
been  lost,  and  even  the  pads  on  which  these  organs  stand. 

General  Distribution : S.  incisa  was  to  be  expected  in  the  vicinity  of 
Bermuda,  for  it  has  been  taken  at  several  stations  along  the  American  con- 
tinental slope,  between  the  latitudes  of  Cape  Hatteras  and  of  Sable  Island, 
Nova  Scotia,  on  the  one  side,  and  mid-way  between  Bermuda  and  the 
Azores  on  the  other.  Other  Atlantic  records  are  off  the  coasts  of  France  and 
of  Spain.  It  has  also  been  taken  at  a number  of  localities  in  the  eastern 
tropical  Pacific;  off  Monterey,  California;  between  San  Francisco  and  the 
Aleutians;  in  the  Bering  Sea  region;  off  Kamchatka;  and  in  Japanese 
waters. 


130 


Zoologica : New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Vertical  Range : Most  of  the  captures  of  this  species  have  been  from 
hauls  made  with  open  nets  at  considerable  depths,  but  the  list  includes  three 
captures  from  the  surface,  one  from  the  northwestern  Atlantic  (Fewkes, 
1886),  the  others  from  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  (Bigelow,  1909). 

Aeginidae. 

Aegina. 

Up  to  1910,  fourteen  supposed  “species”  referable  to  Aegina  had  been 
described.  Mayer’s  (1910)  summary  made  it  clear,  however,  that  this  list 
required  drastic  reduction.  And  as  the  result  of  subsequent  studies,  by 
various  authors,  evidence  has  gradually  accumulated  to  the  effect  that  all 
Aeginas  yet  described  represent  at  most  two  species,  the  Ae.  rosea  and  Ae. 
citrea  of  Eschscholtz  (Bigelow,  1913;  1919;  Broch,  1929;  Ranson,  1936); 
or  perhaps  only  one  as  Thiel  (1936)  has  most  recently  argued.  Decision 
here  rests  on  whether  the  difference  between  the  “citrea”  type,  in  which  the 
margin  of  each  of  the  eight  adradial  gastric  pockets  is  more  or  less  indented 
in  the  mid-line,  and  the  “rosea”  type  in  which  it  is  entire,  is  genetic,  or  is 
simply  the  result  of  sex  or  of  age  differences,  of  differing  degrees  of  disten- 
tion of  the  pockets,  or  of  contraction,  as  Thiel  (1936)  maintains.  The  situ- 
ation may  be  summarized  as  follows  (see  Thiel,  1936,  p.  74,  for  details)  : 
Juveniles,  up  to  perhaps  9 mm.  in  diameter,  have  undivided  pockets,  i.  e., 
are,  as  a rule,  of  the  “rosea”  type;  all  very  large  specimens  (35  mm.  in 
diameter  or  larger),  so  far  recorded,  (of  which  adequate  descriptions  were 
given)  have  likewise  been  of  the  “rosea”  type;13  for  example,  Haeckel’s 
(1879)  Ae.  rhodina,  and  the  rosea  reported  by  me  (1913)  from  the  north- 
west Pacific.  Among  middle-sized  individuals,  however,  of,  say,  9-25  mm. 
in  diameter,  both  types  have  been  recorded.  Otherwise  stated,  all  typical 
citrea  have  fallen  within  this  size  range,  whereas  the  much  more  numerous 
records  of  the  rosea  type  have  covered  the  entire  size  range  so  far  recorded 
for  the  genus.  Furthermore,  several  specimens  of  7-16  mm.  in  the  present 
series  show  intermediate  conditions,  with  some  of  the  adradial  pockets 
notched,  others  not,  or  showing  a slightly  sinous  outline.  One  point  not 
previously  stressed  is  that  in  specimens  of  the  citrea  type  the  gonads  usually 
(but  not  always)  form  two  swellings  on  the  oral  surface  of  each  primarily 
adradial  pocket,  whereas  in  the  rosea  type,  the  swelling  involves  the  oral 
surface  of  each  of  the  8 pockets  as  a whole.  In  oral  view,  that  is  to 
say,  there  are  up  to  16  very  conspicuous  swollen  areas  (sometimes  only  14 
or  15)  in  the  citrea  type,  but  only  8 in  the  rosea  type.  And  this  difference 
is  much  more  conspicuous  than  is  the  difference  in  outline  of  the  pockets, 
for  even  at  its  maximum,  the  latter  is  slight. 

The  question  as  to  the  relationship  of  the  two  types  cannot  be  settled 
until  a microscopic  study  is  made  to  determine  whether  we  may  not  be 
dealing  here  with  a sexual  dimorphism — nor  would  this  be  unique  among 
Narcomedusae,  for  the  gonads  of  the  two  sexes  of  Aeginura  differ  widely, 
in  appearance.  But  the  present  series  does  not  offer  hopeful  material  for 
histological  study.  It  is  also  possible  that  the  very  large  representatives  of 
the  rosea  type  are  spent  individuals.  Nor  can  the  role  played  in  this  matter 
by  contraction  be  determined  without  a study  of  living  material. 

Meantime  it  seems  wisest  to  follow  Thiel,  at  least  provisionally,  and 
to  class  citrea  and  rosea  as  forms  (of  undetermined  significance)  of  one 
species.  This,  however,  must  be  named  citrea,  not  rosea  as  Thiel  has 
called  it,  because  the  former  has  page  priority  in  Eschscholtz’s  (1829) 
original  accounts  of  the  two. 


13  Ae.  alternans  (Bigelow,  1909)  was  probably  a large  damaged  rosea  (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  59). 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


131 


Aegina  citrea  Eschscholtz. 

Aegina  citrea,  Eschscholtz,  1829,  p.  113,  PI.  10,  Fig.  3. 

It  is  probable,  as  explained  above,  that  all  the  citations  to  supposed 
species  of  Aegina,  listed  by  Mayer,  1910,  p.  451-454,  refer  to  one 
variety  or  another  of  this  species.  For  a recent  list  of  references, 
see  Thiel,  1936,  p.  73  (“Ae.  rosea”). 

Material:  Net  Nos.  263,  292,  294,  296,  488,  564,  566,  576,  627,  649,  657, 
666,  686,  692,  693,  708,  745,  762,  779,  800,  809,  857,  874,  882,  885,  971;  hauls 
from  0 to  1,829-0  meters;  31  specimens,  5-20  mm.  in  diameter,  in  various 
stages  of  preservation. 

Among  the  specimens  that  are  well  enough  preserved  to  show  the 
gastric  pockets,  9 (ranging  in  diameter  from  5-20  mm.)  are  definitely  of  the 
rosea  type,  i.e.,  the  adradial  pockets  show  no  signs  of  additional  subdivision. 
Two,  of  15-16  mm.,  are  as  definitely  of  the  citrea  type.  The  most  interest- 
ing specimens  are  nine  others  (7-16  mm.  in  diameter)  which  show  various 
intermediate  states  as  follows : 

A.  Each  adradial  pocket  shows  but  one  swelling  {“rosea”  type)  ; margins 
of  some  pockets  entire  {“rosea”  type),  of  others  notched  {“citrea”  type). 

B.  Some  pockets  show  “citrea”  swellings,  some  “rosea”]  margins  of  all 
pockets  entire  {“rosea”  type). 

C.  Swellings  as  above;  margins  of  some  pockets  notched  {“citrea”  type), 
of  others  entire  {“rosea”  type). 

D.  Each  pocket  with  2 swellings  {“citrea”)  ; but  with  margin  entire 
{“rosea”). 

Obviously,  these  corroborate  Thiel’s  (1936)  view  that  it  is  not  pos- 
sible to  segregate  two  groups  (however  named)  on  this  basis.  However, 
we  are  still  faced  with  the  fact  that  while  a great  majority  of  specimens 
of  the  “citrea”  type  show  the  normal  metamerism,  a large  proportion  of 
those  of  the  “rosea”  type  that  have  been  seen,  have  had  5 or  more  tentacles. 
This  was,  indeed,  the  case  with  Eschscholtz’s  original  series  of  rosea  (4 
specimens,  3 with  5 tentacles,  one  with  6 tentacles),  and  has  repeatedly 
been  reported  since;  see  especially  Vanhoffen  (1908a)  and  Uchida  (1928). 
The  present  series  again  yields  3 pentamerous  specimens  among  the  9 of 
rosea  type  just  mentioned,  the  others  having  4 tentacles  each.  A possible 
explanation  is  that  variants  of  this  sort  are  more  frequent  in  one  sex  than 
in  the  other. 

Reduction  of  the  tentacles  also  occurs,  though  more  rarely;  the  series 
includes  one  specimen  of  9 mm.  with  only  three  tentacles.  But  it  is  too 
much  contracted  to  allow  classification,  as  to  type. 

While  most  authors  who  have  written  of  Aegina  have  described  it  as 
having  only  a small  number  of  otocysts,  Vanhoffen  (1908a)  found  about  20 
per  marginal  sector  in  one  of  the  “rosea”  type,  16  in  one  of  the  “citrea”  type. 
And  while  I have  not  been  able  to  make  a complete  count  of  otocysts,  even 
for  a single  sector,  of  any  of  the  Bermuda  specimens,  the  spacing  of  such 
of  these  organs  as  are  still  recognizable,  or  of  their  basal  pads,  is  con- 
sonant with  Vanhoffen’s  counts. 

General  Distribution:  Aegina  citrea  is  widespread  in  the  warm  belts 
of  all  oceans — this  was  already  known  to  apply  both  to  the  citrea  and  rosea 
forms — also  in  the  Mediterranean.  Southward,  it  had  been  taken  in  the 
sub- Antarctic ; and  northward  to  the  Bering  Sea  region  in  the  Pacific;  to 
Lat.  58°  N.  in  the  northeastern  Atlantic.  The  present  series  is,  however, 
interesting  geographically  because  there  was  no  previous  record  of  Aegina 
in  the  western  half  of  the  north  Atlantic  except  close  to  the  coast  (see 
Thiel,  1936,  p.  76,  Fig.  15,  for  a recent  chart  of  this  distribution). 


132 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Vertical  Range : Ae.  citrea  has  repeatedly  been  taken  at  the  surface  (the 
Bermuda  series  includes  2 surface  hauls),  but  also  in  open  nets  lowered  to 
various  levels,  and — more  instructive — in  closing  nets  from  1,000-700  meters 
(Vanhoffen,  1908a,  as  “Ae.  lactea ”)  ; about  800  meters  (Bigelow,  1909)  ; 
200-100,  600-400,  700-500,  800-600,  and  1,030-830  meters  (Thiel,  1936,  “Ae. 
rosea”).  Its  bathic  range  is  thus  very  wide. 

Thiel  (1935,  p.  81)  has  also  pointed  out  that  the  specimens  taken  deep- 
est averaged  the  largest,  those  taken  shoalest,  the  smallest;  evidence  that 
Aegina,  like  various  other  medusae,  reproduces  chiefly  near  the  surface, 
tending  to  sink,  with  increasing  age.  This  is  corroborated  by  the  Bermudian 
collection,  the  distribution  of  catches  with  depth  being: 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Number  of 
Specimens. 

0 

2 

914-0 

2 

1,097-0 

3 

1,280-0 

4 

1,463-0 

11 

1,646-0 

5 

1,827-0 

4 

Aeginura. 

It  is  now  generally  agreed  that  all  representatives  of  Aeginura  that 
have  been  examined  recently,  are  referable  to  the  wide-ranging,  bathypelagic 
species,  named  Ae.  grimaldii  by  Maas  (1904)  from  the  collections  of  the 
Prince  of  Monaco.  Thiel  (1936),  in  his  historical  survey  of  the  genus,  goes 
still  further,  in  definitely  uniting  grimaldii,  and  its  more  recent  synonyms, 
with  the  Aeginura  myosura,  Cunoctona  nausithoe,  and  C.  lanzerotae  of 
Haeckel  (1879)  ; hence  he  employs  the  latter  name  (it  has  page  priority  over 
nausithoe  and  myosura).  This  point  is  discussed  in  an  earlier  publication 
(Bigelow,  1913,  p.  60).  I need  only  repeat  here,  that  (quite  apart  from 
the  presence  or  absence  of  a peronial  canal  system),  if  we  are  to  conclude 
that  the  Aeginura  of  modern  students  is  identical  with  these  older  Haeckel- 
ian  species  we  must  assume  (a)  that  the  otoporpae  so  clearly  shown  in 
Haeckel’s  (1879,  PI.  20,  Figs.  1-2)  illustrations  of  his  two  species  of  “Cunoc- 
tona” were  imaginary;  and  (b)  that  the  absence  of  secondary  tentacles  and 
the  small  number  of  otocysts  (16  indicated)  in  his  Ae.  myosura  were  the 
result  of  mutilation.  As  his  descriptions  were  based  on  preserved  (no  doubt 
alcoholic)  material,  the  second  assumption  is  not  unreasonable.  But  there 
is  no  way  to  establish  the  correctness  of  either  of  these  assumptions;  and 
it  is  possible  that  an  Aeginura  lacking  secondary  tentacles  and  with  very 
few  otocysts,  may  some  day  be  found.  It,  therefore,  seems  to  me  wiser  to 
treat  Haeckel’s  old  names  as  doubtful  synonyms  of  grimaldii,  rather  than 
to  select  one  of  them  as  the  name  for  the  species  in  question. 

I need  only  note  farther  that  if  Haeckel’s  accounts  were  to  be  taken  at 
face  value,  grimaldii  could  not  be  referred  to  his  genus  Aeginura  at  all, 
because  he  described  the  latter  as  having  a well-developed  canal  system.  But 
as  Maas  (1905,  p.  78)  pointed  out,  what  Haeckel  (1881,  PI.  13,  Fig.  7) 
pictured  as  canals  were  in  reality  parts  of  the  gastric  pouches. 

Aeginura  grimaldii  Maas. 

Aeginura  grimaldii,  Maas,  1904,  p.  38,  PI.  3,  Figs.  19-28;  Bigelow,  1909, 
p.  80,  PI.  9,  Fig.  4;  1913,  p.  61;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  470;  Kramp,  1913, 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


133 


p.  276;  1914,  p.  436;  1920,  p.  6;  1924,  p.  37;  Broch,  1929,  p.  533, 
Fig.  37;  Thiel,  1932a,  p.  156;  Ranson,  1936,  p.  211. 

Aeginura  weberi,  Maas,  1905,  p.  77,  PI.  11,  Fig.  73,  PI.  12,  Fig.  76,  PI. 
14,  Figs.  90-99. 

Cunoctona  grimaldi  var  munda,  Vanhoffen,  1908a,  p.  53,  PI.  2,  Fig.  6. 

Cunoctona  guinensis,  Vanhoffen,  1908a,  p.  53,  PI.  3,  Fig.  29. 

Cunoctona  obscura,  Vanhoffen,  1908a,  p.  52,  PI.  2,  Fig.  7,  PI.  3,  Figs. 
25-28,  30. 

Aeginura  lanzerotae,  Thiel,  1936,  p.  86. 

? Aeginura  myosura,  Haeckel,  1879,  p.  343,  PI.  19,  Figs.  8-9;  1881,  p. 
41,  PI.  13-14;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  468. 

? Cunoctona  lanzerotae,  Haeckel,  1879,  p..  318,  PI.  20,  Figs.  1-6. 

? Cunoctona  nausithoe,  Haeckel,  1879,  p.  318. 

? Aeginura  lanzerotae,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  469. 

Material : Net  Nos.  18,  22,  24,  36,  41,  48,  49,  52,  53,  64,  66,  67,  69,  73, 
78,  111,  121,  122,  137,  270,  293,  295,  362,  400,  427,  442,  455,  468,  481,  539 

562,  582,  605,  606,  612,  620,  621,  627,  628,  631,  632,  635,  638,  639,  645,  646, 

652,  654,  665,  680,  681,  685,  698,  700,  702,  708,  712,  715,  719,  720,  721,  724, 

726,  732,  740,  742,  745,  746,  753,  759,  760,  761,  778,  779,  781,  793,  794,  804, 

805,  810,  811,  812,  842,  849,  852,  861,  885,  894,  959;  hauls  from  540-0  to 
1,829-0  meters;  184  specimens,  1-6  per  haul.  Also,  Net  Nos.  26,  42,  65,  76, 
110,  143,  295,  360,  447,  488,  598,  716,  929,  949;  19  specimens,  probably - 
belonging  here,  but  so  fragmentary  as  to  preclude  positive  identification. 

In  spite  of  its  extent,  the  collection  adds  nothing  to  previous  knowledge 
of  the  morphology  of  this  species,  for  the  specimens  are  all  in  such  poor 
condition  that  it  is  only  the  very  characteristic  appearance  of  Aeginura — 
especially  the  large  tentacle  roots,  the  outlines  of  gastric  pockets,  and  the 
dense  pigmentation — that  makes  them  recognizable  at  all.  It  was  disap- 
pointing that  the  margins  are  in  every  case  so  battered  that  neither  the 
secondary  tentacles  peculiar  to  the  genus,  nor  the  otocysts,  are  to  be  seen. 
The  very  large  white  eggs  are,  however,  so  resistant  that  they  are  still 
visible  in  specimens  from  Net  Nos.  Ill,  122,  468,  606,  726,  761,  794,  810, 
and  959.  These  catches  were  made  in  the  months  of  May,  June,  July, 
August,  and  September,  evidence  that  in  this  region  the  breeding  season  of 
Aeginura  covers  spring,  summer,  and  early  autumn— very  likely  the  entire 
year. 

General  Distribution : The  wide  distribution  of  previous  records  (Thiel, 
1936,  Fig.  18)  had  already  established  the  cosmopolitan  nature  of  this 
medusa  in  the  ocean  basins.  The  present  captures  are,  however,  interesting 
as  the  first  for  the  eastern  side  of  the  North  Atlantic;  interesting  also  as 
showing  that  this  is  one  of  the  most  regularly  occurring  medusae  at  suit- 
able depths  in  the  Bermuda  region,  which  may  be  taken  as  representative 
of  the  Sargasso  Sea  as  a whole. 

Vertical  Range : Up  to  the  present,  there  is  no  positive  evidence  that 
any  Aeginura  larger  than  8-10  mm.  has  been  taken  from  a depth  less  than 
400-500  meters,  for  while  the  great  majority  of  captures  have  been  in  open 
nets,  those  taking  adults  have  in  every  case  sampled  the  water  down  to  at 
least  this  depth — in  most  cases  much  deeper.  And  there  is  record  of  closing 
net  captures  of  adults  from  about  780  meters  (Maas,  1904),  as  well  as  from 
1,000-700  meters  and  deeper  (Thiel,  1935,  Table  16).  Thus,  when  adult, 
Aeginura  belongs  to  the  same  bathypelagic  community  as  Atolla  and  Peri- 
phylla,  as  indeed,  its  dense  pigmentation  would  indicate.  The  depth  distri- 
bution of  the  Bermuda  hauls  yielding  Aeginura,  relative  to  the  total  number 
made  at  each  depth,  tabulated  below,  suggests  a rather  definite  concentra- 
tion between,  say,  1,000  and  1,600  meters. 


134 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Total  Number 
Hauls. 

Number  Hauls 
with  Aeginura. 

% with 
Aeginura. 

549-0 

23 

1 

4 

732-0 

40 

2 

5 

914-0 

132 

9 

7 

1,097-0 

134 

19 

13 

1,280-0 

132 

27 

19 

1,463-0 

132 

19 

14 

1,646-0 

135 

17 

13 

1,829-0 

135 

8 

6 

2,012-0 

4 

0 

0 

Thiel  (1935),  however,  has  recently  made  the  interesting  discovery 
that  young  stages  of  1-5  mm.  occur  in  the  upper  water  layers,  the  Meteor 
having  taken  them  on  four  occasions  shoaler  than  100  meters,  once  shoaler 
than  50  meters  (Thiel,  1936,  p.  86).  From  this,  he  suggests  that  the  eggs 
rise  to  the  surface,  and  that,  as  growth  proceeds,  the  young  medusae  sink 
deeper  and  deeper,  as  seems  commonly  to  be  the  case  among  bathyplanktonic 
animals. 


SOLMARIDAE. 

Peganfha. 

? Peganfha  elara  R.  P.  Bigelow. 

Pegantha  clara,  R.  P.  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  80;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  445;  H.  B. 

Bigelow,  1918,  p.  397. 

Polycolpa  forskali,  Vanhoffen,  1908a,  p.  56;  1912,  p.  391;  1912a,  p.  32. 

[Non  P.  forskalii  Haeckel,  1879;  1881.] 

Pegantha  smaragdina,  H.  B.  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  90,  PI.  14,  Fig.  1,  2,  PI. 

19,  Figs.  1-9,  PI.  22-26. 

Material:  Net  Nos.  50,  157,  271,  720,  812,  882,  902,  959;  914-0  to  1,463-0 
meters;  8 fragmentary  specimens,  about  10-about  20  mm.  in  diameter. 

Although  damaged,  having  lost  all  trace  of  exumbral  sculpture,  and 
with  the  stomach  much  battered,  the  specimens  all  show  the  peronial  canals, 
and  the  outlines  of  the  stomach  without  any  trace  of  gastric  pockets,  that 
are  characteristic  of  Pegantha.  Owing  to  the  obvious  contraction  of  some 
specimens  and  the  flattening  of  others,  it  is  not  possible  to  state  the  normal 
relationship  of  heighth  to  breadth:  in  the  pi’esent  state  they  suggest  that 
at  diameters  of  10-20  mm.,  the  bell  of  this  species  is  from  *4  to  % as  high 
as  broad;  perhaps  still  higher  relatively  in  some  cases. 

The  tentacles  range  in  number  from  about  20  to  about  24;  the  largest 
number  being  in  a specimen  of  about  12  mm.,  while  the  largest  specimen 
has  only  22  tentacles.  The  small  specimens  (6  in  number,  10-12  mm.  in 
diameter)  without  gonads,  are  referred  to  this  species  chiefly  because  this 
is  the  only  Pegantha,  yet  known,  in  which  upwards  of  18  tentacles  have 
been  found  before  the  development  of  the  gonads.  This  identification  is 
strengthened,  in  the  case  of  the  20  mm.  specimen,  by  the  fact  that  traces 
are  to  be  seen  of  simple  interradial  swellings — forerunners  of  the  gonads — 
at  the  margin  of  the  stomach. 

Most  of  the  otocysts  have  been  lost;  but  the  spacing  of  those  still 
visible  suggests  the  presence  of  3-5  per  marginal  lappet;  or  about  the  num- 
ber to  be  expected  in  juveniles  of  P.  clara,  in  adults  of  which  there  may  be 
up  to  8 per  lappet.  In  only  one  specimen  are  traces  of  the  otoporpae  still 
to  be  seen. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  T930 


135 


General  Distribution:  The  original  record  of  P.  clara  was  from  the 
continental  slope  in  the  offing  of  Woods  Hole,  and  young  specimens  were 
taken  near  the  Bahamas  by  the  Baclie  (Bigelow,  H.  B.,  1918),  so  that  it 
was  to  be  expected  at  Bermuda.  Other  records  referable  to  it  are  from  the 
vicinity  of  the  Cape  Verde  Islands  (Vanhoffen,  1912,  “Polycolpa  forskali”) , 
off  Chile  (Vanhoffen,  1912a,  “Polycolpa  forskali”) , off  Peru,  (Bigelow, 
1909,  “Pegantha  smaragdina”) , and  from  the  tropical  Pacific  between 
Hawaiian  and  Caroline  Islands  (Vanhoffen,  1912a,  “Polycolpa  forskali”) . 

Vertical  Range : Previous  records  include  both  the  surface,  and  open  net- 
hauls  from  considerable  depths. 

SCYPHOMEDUSAE. 

Carybdeida. 

Mayer  (1910)  grouped  all  known  Carybdeida  in  a single  family — Caryb- 
deidae.  For  convenience,  however, — even  if  for  no  other  reason — it  seems 
preferable  to  follow  Krumbach  (1925)  and  Uchida  (1929)  in  limiting  that 
family  to  forms  which  lack  gastric  pouches  projecting  from  the  manubrium 
into  the  subumbrella  cavity,  and  in  which  there  are  only  8 (adradial) 
marginal  pockets.  The  more  complexly  organized  forms  with  free  gastric 
pouches  and  more  numerous  (16)  marginal  pockets  are  divided  by  Krum- 
bach (1925)  into  2 families,  but  (I  believe  more  logically)  grouped  by 
Uchida  in  one,  Chirodropidae.  The  latter  need  not  be  discussed  here,  as 
it  is  not  represented  in  the  Bermuda  collection. 

Carybdeidae. 

Few  pelagic  coelenterates  came  to  scientific  attention  earlier  than  did 
the  quadritentaculate  members  of  this  family,  for  the  well  known  Mediter- 
ranean Carybdea  was  described  by  Linnaeus,  (1758).  Since  that  time,  the 
number  of  named  forms  multiplied,  until  Mayer  (1910)  gave  a list  of 
twenty-one.  It  was  already  obvious,  however,  that  the  number  of  actual 
species  represented  was  much  smaller.  And  although  insufficiency  of  most 
of  the  early  descriptions  precluded  revision,  Mayer  (1910)  tentatively 
classed  all  of  them  as  varieties  of  four  species  at  most.  The  carybdeids  have 
subsequently  been  the  subject  of  repeated  discussion,  notably  by  Stiasny 
(1919,  1926,  1929,  1930,  1934,  1935,  1937),  by  Uchida  (1929),  by  Thiel 
(1928)  and  by  Menon  (1930).  But  views  held,  as  to  generic  and  specific 
characters,  have  been  so  divergent  that  a resume  is  requisite,  before  the 
Bermudian  specimens  can  be  discussed  even  though  these  belong  to  forms 
known  for  many  years. 

Much  of  the  confusion  has  resulted  from  uncertainty  as  to  how  much 
weight  should  be  given  (in  classification)  to  the  position  of  the  groups  of 
gastric  filaments  (phacellae)  ; i.  e.,  whether  in  clusters  or  horizontal  bands 
at  the  4 interradial  corners  of  the  stomach  ( Carybdea  type),  or  extending 
as  vertical  bands  along  the  interradial  sides  of  the  latter,  as  described  by 
Muller  (1858),  for  Tamoya  haplonema.  Unfortunately,  Muller’s  illustration 
did  not  show  the  location  of  the  filaments.  And  while  his  account  of  their 
location  has  repeatedly  been  quoted,  or  paraphrased,  no  first-hand  descrip- 
tion of  this  type  of  phacella  appeared  subsequently  until  Stiasny  (1919, 
p.  40)  found  the  phacellae  forming  “interradiale  vertikale  Fadenreihen  langs 
der  Magenseiten,”  in  Sumatran  specimens  otherwise  agreeing  so  closely 
with  Muller’s  Tamoya  that  generic  identity  was  assured.  And  in  1934 
Stiasny  (1934)  was  at  last  in  the  position  to  present  a good  illustration  of 
a West  African  carybdeid,  evidently  referable  to  Muller’s  T.  haplonema,  ■ 
clearly  showing  this  same  vertical  arrangement,  with  phacellae  extending 
along  % of  the  length  of  the  stomach.  It  is  thus  proved  that  the  type  species 


136 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


of  Tarnoya  differs  from  the  type  of  Carybdea  ( C . marsupialis,  Linne)  not 
only  in  the  larger  stomach  and  in  the  presence  of  mesenteries  (often  used 
as  the  chief  generic  separation),  but  equally  sharply  in  the  arrangement 
of  the  phacellae. 

Uchida  (1929,  p.  175),  it  is  true,  described  the  phacellae  as  “numerous 
short  gastral  filaments  in  the  interradial  crescentic  area  of  the  stomach,” 
for  a Japanese  carybdeid  agreeing  otherwise  with  Tarnoya  (i.e.,  in  the  struc- 
ture of  the  stomach,  mesenteries,  and  canalization),  hence,  no  doubt  cor- 
rectly, referred  by  him  to  that  genus.  But  he  did  not  illustrate  the  phacellae. 
And  Stiasny  (1930,  p.  10)  included  their  arrangement  as  one  of  the  alterna- 
tive characters  for  the  genera,  Tarnoya  and  Carybdea,  a course  followed 
here,  as  well. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  proves  necessary  to  abandon  size  and  the  promi- 
nence of  the  exumbrella  sculpture,  as  generic  characters — also  included  by 
Stiasny  in  his  recent  synopsis — because  the  Bermudian  collection  (p.  144) 
verifies  Agassiz  and  Mayer’s  (1902)  account  of  the  existence  of  at  least  one 
species  with  the  Carybdea  type  of  stomach  (i.e.,  flat  and  lacking  mesenteries) 
and  phacellae,  but  with  weak  sculpture  and  growing  to  a larger  size  than  any 
other  carybdeid  yet  seen.  Thus,  if  the  generic  separation  is  to  be  based  pri- 
marily on  structural  features — and  that  this  is  the  more  logical  procedure 
need  hardly  be  defended — we  arrive  at  the  following: 

1.  Stomach  flat,  without  mesenteries:  gastric  cirri  forming  brush-like 

bundles  at  the  interradial  cornel’s  of  the  stomach,  or  (if  expanded) 
crescentic  areas  extending  horizontally Carybdea. 

2.  Stomach  deep,  connected  with  the  subumbrella  by  well  developed  per- 

radial  mesenteries : gastric  cirri  in  bands,  extending  vertically  along 
the  walls  of  the  stomach,  in  the  interradii  Tarnoya. 

This,  the  reader  will  observe,  is  a return  to  the  scheme  long  ago  pro- 
posed by  Haeckel  (1880)  ; an  instance  where  the  latter’s  classic  system  has 
proved  more  prophetic  of  knowledge  to  come  than  it  was  justified  by  facts  at 
hand  at  the  time. 

The  family,  Carybdeidae  (as  here  defined),  also  includes  one  well  known 
genus,  Tripedalia,  which  shows  a multiplication  of  tentacles,  but  otherwise 
resembles  Carybdea  and  Tarnoya  in  simplicity  of  organization.14 

Carybdea. 

Among  the  Carybdeas  that  have  yet  come  to  light,  one,  recently  de- 
scribed by  Stiasny  (1930),  but  unnamed,  is  set  apart  by  the  fact  that  its 
tentacles  bear  lateral  branches.  As  the  tentacles  in  all  other  members  of  the 
family — whether  single  or  grouped — are  simple,  this  form  certainly  deserves 
specific  recognition.  The  new  species,  Carybdea  stiasnyi,  is  therefore  pro- 
posed for  it.  Stiasny  (1930,  p.  5)  suggests  that  “auf  Grund  dieses  einen 
Merkmals  konnte  ein  neues  Genus  aufgestellt  werden.”  But  in  this  regard, 
we  may  well  await  the  action  of  its  discoverer. 

Successive  studies  by  different  authors  have  brought  cumulative  evi- 
dence to  support  Mayer’s  (1910)  contention  that  all  other  named  forms  of 
Carybdea  in  reality  represent  nothing  more  than  varieties  or  races  of  a very 
small  number  of  good  species.  But  views  have  differed  as  to  how  many  such 
deserve  recognition,  largely  because  of  the  uncertainty  as  to  which,  if  any, 
of  the  supposed  “Carybdeas,”  should  actually  be  referred  to  its  companion 
genus,  Tarnoya.  A survey  of  recent  literature,  added  to  the  specimens  I have 
myself  seen,  corroborates  Mayer’s  (1910)  view  that  the  great  majority  of 
Carybdeas,  the  generic  identity  of  which  is  established  by  adequate  descrip- 

14  Haeckel’s  (1879-80)  problematical  genera  Procharagma  (lacking  velum)  and  Procharybdis 
(with  velarium,  but  lacking  velar  canals)  would  also  fall  among  the  Carybdeidae,  should  it  ever 
prove  that  any  existing  carybdeids  show  these  primitive  states  when  adult,  i.  e.,  that  they  were 
not  founded  either  on  multilated  specimens,  or  on  juvenile  stages. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


137 


tion  or  by  illustration  of  the  critical  characters,  fall  in  one  or  other  of  the 
following  well  differentiated  groups: 

Group  A.  Of  small  or  moderate  size  (for  the  most  part  less  than  50  mm. 
high)  ; with  strong  exumbral  sculpture;  with  the  gastric  cirri  in  each  cluster 
arising  either  from  a single  basal  stalk  or  from  stalks  closely  clustered  at 
the  four  interradial  corners  of  the  base  of  the  manubrium.  The  earliest 
named  Carybdea,  C.  marsupialis  Linne,  of  the  Mediterranean,  was  of  this 
type;  so  also  two  other  well  known  forms,  C.  xaymacana  Conant  from  the 
West  Indian  region,  and  C.  rastonii  Haacke  of  the  Indo-Pacific — likewise 
C.  murrayana  Haeckel,  from  West  Africa. 

Mayer  (1910,  p.  508)  in  his  tabular  view  classes  xaymacana  as  a variety 
of  marsupialis  from  which  it  differs  only  in  somewhat  smaller  size,  in  having 
fewer  and  less  complexly  branched  velar  canals  (4  per  quadrant  instead  of 
up  to  6 or  8),  and  phacellae  arising  from  a single  primary  trunk,  instead  of 
from  8-10  primary  branches. 

The  unity  between  xaymacana  and  marsupialis  with  respect  to  the  pha- 
cellae is  in  fact,  even  closer  than  Mayer  supposed.  On  the  one  hand,  Claus 
(1878)  long  ago  pointed  out  that  in  marsupialis  each  group  of  filaments 
arises  from  a single  main  trunk,  while  on  the  other,  my  own  examination 
of  Bermudian  and  Bahaman  specimens  of  xaymacana  described  below  (p. 
139)  shows  that  the  basal  trunk  divides  into  several  primary  branches,  each 
of  which  bears  a cluster  of  filaments  either  simple,  or  showing  further  den- 
dritic branching  (Text-figs.  3,  4,  5),  much  as  described  for  marsupialis. 
Nor  are  there  any  differences  in  the  outline  of  gonads  and  of  pedalia,  in  the 
shape  of  the  rhopalar  nitches,  or  in  exumbral  sculpture,  that  can  not  be 
explained  as  due  to  contraction,  or — at  most — to  individual  variation. 

Comparison  does,  however,  substantiate  the  supposed  difference  in 
canalization,  for  whereas  in  the  xaymacana  that  I have  seen,  as  well  as  in 
those  described  by  Conant  (1898),  by  Mayer  (1910),  and  by  Stiasny  (1919), 
there  have  been  at  most  four  (sometimes  three,  according  to  Stiasny),  un- 
branched or  simply  forked  canals  per  quadrant,  there  may  be  6 or  even  8 
in  marsupialis , some  of  them  complexly  subdivided.  In  canalization,  then, 
xaymacana  corresponds  to  half-grown  marsupialis;  as  it  does  in  the  fact 
that  the  largest  so  far  seen  (with  large  gonads)  have  been  only  % to  % 
as  high  as  mature  marsupialis. 

Present  indications,  therefore,  are  that  xaymacana  is  a dwarf — perhaps 
paedogenetic — form  of  marsupialis ; one,  too,  with  a different  geographic  dis- 
tribution, for  the  typical  ( marsupialis ) form  has  never  been  seen  in  the  west- 
ern side  of  the  Atlantic,  nor  the  dwarf  ( xaymacana ) form  in  the  eastern. 
Furthermore,  C.  murrayana  bears  much  the  same  relationship  to  marsupialis 
that  the  latter  does  to  xaymacana,  for  while  it  agrees  with  marsupialis  in 
sculpture  and  in  the  structure  of  its  phacellae,  its  velar  canals  are  not  only 
more  complexly  branched  than  in  typical  marsupialis,  but  more  numerous, 
i.e.,  10-12  per  quadrant.  It  is,  indeed,  doubtful  whether  a half-grown  mur- 
rayana would  be  distinguishable  from  a full-grown  marsupialis — except  per- 
haps, by  the  state  of  development  of  the  gonads — or  a half-grown  marsupialis 
from  a fully-grown  xaymacana,  though  there  would  be  no  danger  of  con- 
fusing full-grown  specimens. 

Forms  bearing  a relationship  of  this  sort,  one  to  the  other,  would  un- 
hesitatingly be  named  “subspecies”  by  students  of  molluscs,  of  Crustacea, 
or  of  the  higher  vertebrates.  And  as  they  certainly  require  recognition  in 
nomenclature,  more  precise  than  the  vague  designation  “variety,”  it  seems 
justifiable  to  introduce  trinomials  into  the  classification  of  pelagic  coelen- 
terates,  also,  to  cover  such  cases. 

The  discussion  must  also  touch  on  the  status  of  C.  rastonii,  because  if 
the  latter  be,  in  fact,  indistinguishable  from  xaymacana,  as  Stiasny  (1919) 
has  suggested,  the  combined  subspecies  must  be  named  rastonii  Haacke 


138 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


(1886),  this  being  the  older  of  the  two  names;  or  perhaps  even  prototypus 
or  cuboides,  if  it  finally  prove  that  Haeckel’s  (1880)  problematical  Proch- 
aragma  prototypus  and  Procharybdis  cuboides  are  young  rastonii  as  Mayer 
(1910,  p.  509)  has  classed  them. 

Apart  from  geographic  distribution,  the  only  distinctions  between 
xaymacana  and  rastonii,  listed  in  Mayer’s  (1910)  tabular  view,  are  slight 
differences  in  shape  and  relative  length  of  pedalia,  and  in  length  of  ten- 
tacles, which  certainly  would  not  justify  separation.  Furthermore,  the  canali- 
zation of  rastonii  is  intermediate,  in  type,  between  that  of  typical  marsupi- 
alis,  and  of  the  subspecies,  xaymacana. 

On  the  other  hand,  rastonii  does  differ  from  xaymacana  in  the  structure 
of  its  phacellae,  for,  whereas  in  xaymacana  all,  or  most  of  the  primary 
branches  arise  from  a single  basal  trunk  (p.  140),  in  rastonii  they  arise  inde- 
pendently from  the  gastric  wall,  in  a row,  flanked  on  either  side  by  several 
simple  cirri,  as  long  ago  described  by  Haacke  (1887,  PI.  35,  Fig.  4),  a state 
derived  (in  young  medusae)  from  a row  of  simple  cirri.15  And  this  differ- 
ence, by  which  specimens  of  rastonii  can  be  recognized  at  any  stage  after 
the  appearance  of  the  gastric  cirri,  seems  sufficient  to  warrant  its  continued 
recognition  as  a distinct  species,  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  the  Indo-Pacific 
representative  of  this  group  differs  more  widely  from  the  Atlantic  repre- 
sentatives, than  do  the  latter,  one  from  another. 

Group  B.  This  group  includes  much  larger  forms  up  to  230  mm.  high; 
relatively  narrower  in  outline  than  the  marsupialis  group;  with  weak  exum- 
bral  sculpture,  if  any;  with  the  gastric  cirri  grouped  along  crescent-shaped 
rows  centering  at  the  interradial  corners  of  the  base  of  the  gastric  cavity. 
Recent  collections  have  repeatedly  yielded  large  Carybdea  of  this  type,  most 
frequently  reported  as  C.  alata  Reynaud,  as  C.  grandis  Agassiz  and  Mayer, 
as  C.  moseri  Mayer,  or  as  one  or  other  of  the  last  two  considered  as  a variety 
of  the  first.  According  to  various  accounts  the  group  differs  also  from  the 
marsupialis  group,  in  the  form  of  the  pedalia,  in  the  relative  heighth  of  the 
rhopalia  above  the  bell  margin;  in  the  outline  of  the  rhopalar  nitches,  and 
in  the  more  numerous  velar  canals,  as  described  below  (p.  146,  147). 

The  earliest  named  form  that  can  be  positively  referred  to  this  group 
(because  of  the  distinctive  characters  of  bell  and  of  phacellae)  was  C.  gran- 
dis Agassiz  and  Mayer  (1902)  from  the  tropical  Pacific,  half-grown  indi- 
viduals (or  a dwarf  race)  of  which  were  redescribed  shortly  afterward  by 
Mayer  (1906)  as  C.  moseri.  But  it  seems  probable  that  C.  alata  Reynaud 
(1830)  was  based  on  a young  Carybdea  of  this  same  type,  for  the  original 
illustration  shows  a rounded,  non-sculptured  bell,  nor  is  there  anything  in 
Reynaud’s  illustration  or  account  to  argue  to  the  contrary.  Consequently, 
Vanhoffen  (1908)  revived  the  name  alata,  for  Carybdeas  from  the  Indian 
Ocean  and  Straits  of  Malacca,  that  agreed  with  grandis  in  canalization  and 
in  structure  of  phacellae.  Mayer  in  his  tabular  view  (1910,  p.  508),  followed 
Vanhoffen  in  classifying  both  grandis  and  moseri  as  varieties  of  alata  Rey- 
naud, as  have  subsequent  authors,  generally.16  And  while  one  must  admit 
that  it  will  never  be  possible  to  determine,  with  absolute  certainty,  the  iden- 
tity of  the  specimen  pictured  by  Reynaud,  because  no  description  was  given 
of  the  morphological  features  on  which  identification  primarily  depends,  to 
follow  Vanhoffen  will  tend  toward  stability  of  nomenclature.  The  situation 
is,  however,  confused  by  the  fact  that  Uchida  (1929),  while  agreeing  that 
grandis  and  moseri  belong  in  the  synonymy  of  alata  Reynaud,  transferred  the 
latter  name  to  a species  of  Tamoya,  on  the  supposition  that  Agassiz  and  May- 
er’s (1902)  original  figures  of  grandis  referred  to  a member  of  that  genus, 
not  to  a Carybdea.  And  this  course  has  been  followed  by  Stiasny  (1929; 

15 1 have  been  able  to  confirm  Haacke’s  (1887)  account  of  stages  in  development  for  small 
and  middle-sized  specimens  from  the  tropical  Pacific  (Bigelow,  1909),  and  for  a large  series  from 
Japan,  in  the  collection  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 

16  Thiel  (1928)  has  revived  the  name  grandis. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


139 


1930,  1935,  1937),  likewise  by  Rao  (1931).  Successive  examinations  of 
specimens  of  the  alata-grandis  type  have,  however,  proved  that  actually  they 
have  the  shallow  stomach  and  the  arrangement  of  phacellae  characteristic  of 
Carybdea. 

So  far  as  can  be  judged,  from  published  accounts,  and  by  the  specimens 
(Atlantic  and  Pacific)  that  I have  myself  examined,  the  members  of  the 
alata-grandis  group,  so  far  named,  represent  only  one  species,  including  C. 
madrasputana  recently  described  by  Menon  (1930)  which  seems  to  repre- 
sent an  immature  stage  in  development.  It  is  even  doubtful  whether  any 
of  the  named  forms  deserve  the  term  variety. 

Group  C.  Mayer  (1900;  1910)  described  (as  C.  aurifera ) a juvenile 
Carybdea  from  the  Tortugas,  differing  from  C.  xaymacana  in  the  facts  that 
the  velar  canals  next  the  tentacular  radii  were  broadly  palmate,  and  that  the 
exumbrella  was  sprinkled  with  nematocyst  warts,  as  well  as  in  strong  color- 
ation. Recently,  Stiasny  (1926)  has  described  a second  species,  C.  sivickisi, 
from  the  Philippines,  in  which  all  the  canals  are  of  this  palmate  form,  and 
with  similarly  warty  exumbrella.  Its  rhopalar  nitches  also  differ  from  those 
either  of  the  marsupialis  group,  or  of  the  alata  group,  in  lacking  a well- 
developed  covering  scale.  But  it  is  separated  from  aurifera  by  the  fact  that 
its  exumbrella  is  strongly  sculptured;  that  it  has  large  gonads  though  only 
slightly  larger  (10-12  mm.  high,  as  against  7 mm.)  ; and  in  the  tentacles 
and  sensory  nitches.  Examination  of  a larger  series  alone  can  show  how 
far  these  differences  can  be  credited  to  different  stages  in  growth ; especially 
since  Mayer’s  figures  of  aurifera  are  evidently  somewhat  diagrammatic  and 
conflicting  as  regards  the  phacellae;  meantime  the  two  species  are  best 
retained. 

Summation  of  the  foregoing  yields  the  following  synopsis  of  Carybdea, 
as  here  recognized: 

1.  Tentacles  simple. 

A.  Sensory  nitches  overhung  by  well  developed  covering  scales; 
exumbrella  not  warty. 

a.  With  prominent  exumbral  sculpture;  sensory  nitches  with 
covering  scale  above,  but  entry  open  below. 

(1) .  Phacellae  dendritic,  the  filaments  primarily  arising 

from  a single  trunk 

marsupialis  (including  xaymacana  and  murrayana) . 

(2) .  Phacellae  more  diffuse,  of  several  trunks  arranged  in  a 

row  rastonii. 

b.  Exumbrella  without  prominent  sculpture;  sensory  nitches  en- 
closed by  a pair  of  scales  below,  as  well  as  by  one  above  alata. 

B.  Sensory  nitches  without  well  developed  covering  scale,  exumbrella 

warty  sivickisi  {aurifera?) . 

2.  Tentacles  bearing  lateral  branches stiasnyi. 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana  Conant. 

Charybdea  xaymacana,  Conant,  1897,  p.  8,  Fig.  8;  1898,  p.  4,  Figs.  1-16, 
31-34,  36-43,  57,  67,  69,  70,  72;  Berger,  1898,  p.  223;  1900,  p.  1,  3 
pis.;  Mayer,  1904,  PI.  7,  Fig.  60;  1910,  p.  509,  PI.  56,  Figs.  5-7,  PI. 
57,  Fig.  1;  Stiasny,  1919,  p.  34. 

Tamoya  punctata,  Fewkes,  1883,  p.  84,  PI.  1,  Figs.  4-6. 

Material : Net  No.  745,  Surface,  June  29,  1930,  4 specimens,  about  12-23 
mm.  high. 

Net  No.  840,  Surface,  September  3,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  11  mm.  high. 

Dip  net,  Surface,  October  16,  1930,  1 specimen  about  15  mm.  high. 


140 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Net.  No.  935,  1,463-0  meters,  September  23,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  19 
mm.  high. 

Net  No.  977,  Surface,  May  12,  1931, 14  specimens,  about  10-20  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  978,  Surface,  May  15,  1931,  18  specimens,  about  10-18  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  979,  Surface,  May  16,  1931,  66  specimens,  about  10-19  mm.  high. 

The  general  features  of  xaymacana,  including  exumbral  sculpture,  need 

no  comment  here,  having  been  well  described  by  Conant  (1898)  and  by 
Mayer  (1910)  ; the  phacellae,  and  rhopalar  nitches  in  more  detail  by  Stiasny 
(1919).  But  notes  are  pertinent  on  the  range  of  variation  in  these  respects, 
and  on  the  branching  of  the  velar  canals,  questions  bearing  on  the  relation- 
ship of  this  form  to  typical  marsupialis  on  the  one  hand,  and  to  rastonii  on 
the  other. 

Phacellae : Conant  (1898)  and  Stiasny  (1919)  both  describe  the  gastric 
cirri  of  each  group  as  arising  from  a single  trunk,  as  is  likewise  the  case 


macana.  One  of  the 
groups  of  phacellae  from 
a specimen  16  mm.  high 
(Net  No.  745),  showing 
the  typical  state  in  which 
the  filaments  all  arise 
from  a single  primary 
trunk,  x 30. 


Text-fig.  4. 

Carybde a marsupialis  xaymacana.  One 
of  the  groups  of  phacellae  from 
a specimen  23  mm.  high  (Net  No. 
745).  x 30. 


Text-fig.  5. 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana. 
One  of  the  primary  branches, 
with  terminal  filaments,  from 
the  group  of  phacellae  shown 
in  Text-fig.  3. 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  141 

in  most  of  the  Bermudian  specimens  (Text-fig.  3).  And  while  in  one  of  the 
clusters  in  the  specimen  from  Net  No.  745  (Text-fig.  4),  there  is  a secondary 
cluster  of  filaments  close  beside  the  primary  group  (the  other  3 phacellae  are 
of  the  more  usual  type),  the  fact  that  the  primary  trunk  invariably  bears 
most,  if  not  all  of  the  cirri,  is  a ready  distinction  between  xaymacana  and 
juvenile  alata  of  the  same  size  (p.  147). 

According  to  Stiasny  (1919,  p.  36),  the  filaments  are  not  branched17; 
and  they  present  this  same  appearance  of  simplicity  when  viewed  through 
the  bell  wall.  But  when  the  groups  are  dissected  out  and  the  filaments 
teased  apart  (Text-figs.  3-5),  it  is  seen  that  actually,  the  basal  trunk  gives 
rise  to  several  primary  branches,  each  of  which  in  turn  divides,  close  to  the 
base,  into  a group  of  filaments,  much  as  is  the  case  in  the  typical  marsupi- 
alis  (p.  137).  In  one  group,  5 such  primary  branches  were  detected,  with  a 
cluster  of  juvenile  filaments  at  one  side,  apparently  forecasting  the  develop- 
ment of  a sixth;  the  total  number  of  filaments  being  about  40  (Text-fig. 
3). 

Canalization : Up  to  the  present  time,  Stiasny  (1919)  alone  has  reported 
any  variation  (3)  from  the  number  of  velar  canals  per  quadrant  (4)  orig- 
inally reported  by  Conant;  even  when  most  deeply  forked,  the  4 primary 
trunks  are  identifiable  as  such  in  all  specimens  I have  seen.  However,  the 
present  series  amplifies  earlier  accounts,  in  showing  considerable  variation 
in  the  degree  and  type  of  branching.  Conant’s  (1898,  Figs.  3-5)  original 
figures  pictured  all  of  the  canals,  in  adult  medusae,  as  forked,  either  bifid 
or  trifid.  Mayer’s  (1910,  PI.  56,  Fig.  7)  illustration,  however,  shows  each  of 
the  four  canals  in  one  quadrant  as  four-branched.  And  the  present  series 
proves  that  there  may  be  as  many  as  5 terminal  subdivisions,  with  indica- 
tions even  of  a sixth  (Text-fig.  6).  On  the  other  hand,  Stiasny  (1919) 
found  most  of  the  canals  in  Haitian  specimens  of  large  size  (22-25  mm. 
high)  to  be  unbranched,  except  for  a tendency  to  dichotomous  division  at 
the  tips.  And  the  Bahaman  specimens  listed  above  are  of  this  same  type, 
the  canals  being  simple  (Text-fig.  7),  though  the  specimens — evidently  full- 
grown,  or  nearly  so,  judging  from  the  large  gonads  (p.  144.) — are  otherwise 
indistinguishable  from  the  Bermudian  series,  and  from  the  specimens  orig- 
inally described  by  Conant  (1898)  from  Jamaica.  Since  both  the  simple 
types  of  canalization  and  the  more  complex  have  been  found  in  the  West 
Indian  region  (and  exclusively  one  or  the  other  at  any  one  locality  on  a 
given  occasion),  it  is  likely  that  we  have  here  to  do  with  a case  of  what  has 
been  termed  “swarm”  variation. 

The  Bermudian  series,  added  to  earlier  accounts,  shows  that  when  the 
canals  are  branched,  there  is  much  variation  in  the  degree  and  type  of  sub- 
division, even  from  canal  to  canal  in  a given  individual,  though  in  most  (if 
not  all)  cases,  it  is  primarily  a dendritic  forking,  very  different  from  the 
lateral  lobation  such  as  characterizes  Tamoya  (p.  154,  Text-fig.  22).  And 
only  a very  rough  correlation — if  any — exists  between  the  complexity  of 
branching  and  the  size  of  the  medusa.  Thus,  the  canals  may  already  be  bifid 
and  trifid,  in  specimens  not  more  than  10-14  mm.  high  as  exemplified  by  the 
specimen  from  Net  No.  745.  One  of  19  mm.,  shows  much  the  same  state, 
but  one  of  23  mm.  (Text-fig.  6)  shows  a somewhat  more  complex  branching. 
In  most  cases,  the  canals  next  the  tentacular  radii  are  somewhat  more  com- 
plexly branched  than  those  next  the  rhopalar  radii  (Text-fig.  6)  ; occa- 
sionally, however,  one  of  the  latter  may  have  as  many  as  four  well  developed 
branches. 

Pedalia:  The  only  variations,  worth  mention,  from  the  shape  illustrated 
by  Conant  (1898)  and  by  Mayer  (1910)  are  slight  individual  differences  in 
the  precise  outline  of  the  fin-like  basal  expansion  of  the  inner  (oral)  side 


17  Conant  (1898,  p.  14)  was  not  explicit  on  this  point. 


142 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


T 


Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana.  Velar  canals 
of  one  quadrant  of  Bahaman  specimen 
about  23  mm.  high,  x about  5. 


(Text-fig.  8).  And  these  are  so  slight  as  to  be  perhaps  explicable  as  con- 
traction phenomena  (Text-fig.  8).  The  pedalia  of  all  I have  seen  agree  very 
closely  with  these  structures  in  an  excellent  specimen  of  typical  marsupialis 
from  Naples  with  which  I have  been  able  to  compare  them;  also  with  rastonii 
(Bigelow,  1909,  PI.  10,  Fig.  1;  Uchida,  1929,  Fig.  60A).  The  lengths  of  the 
pedalia,  in  terms  of  bell  height,  in  a series  of  10  specimens  ranging  in  height 
from  10  mm.  to  23  mm.,  are  as  follows : 


Net  No. 

Bell 

Height. 

Length 
of  Pedalia.18 

Pedalia,  % of 
Bell  Height. 

977 

10 

6 

60 

745 

12 

5 

42 

977 

15 

7 

47 

977 

16 

8 

50 

977 

17 

8 

47 

977 

17 

8 

47 

977 

17 

8 

47 

745 

19 

8 

42 

935 

20 

9 

45 

745 

23 

10 

43 

The  foregoing  shows  some  slight  but  irregular  decrease  in  the  relative 
length  of  the  pedalia  with  the  growth  of  the  medusa;  the  average  of  43% 
confirms  Mayer’s  (1910)  report  of  between  % and  % the  bell  heighth. 

18  Measured  from  the  base  of  the  fin-like  expansion  to  the  origin  of  the  ringed  portion  of  the 
tentacle. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


143 


Text-fig.  8. 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana. 
Pedalia  to  show  variations  in 
outline.  A.t  From  specimen  14 
mm.  high  from  Jamaica;  B., 
From  Bahaman  specimen  23 
mm.  high. 


A B 

Text-fig.  9. 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xaymacana.  Outlines  of  two 
specimens  about  20  mm.  high  to  show  variations 
in  breadth  and  outlines  of  gonads.  A.,  From  Net 
No.  979;  B„  From  Net  No.  935. 


Gonads : The  feature  which  shows  most  obvious  variation,  among  pre- 
served specimens  of  a given  size,  is  the  relative  length  and  breadth  of  the 
gonads.  In  their  final  state  (Conant,  1898,  PI.  1,  Fig.  1),  these  extend  dis- 
tally,  nearly  to  the  margin  of  the  bell.  None  of  the  Bermudian  or  Bahaman 
specimens  are,  however,  as  far  advanced  as  this.  In  the  largest  of  the  for- 
mer, the  gonads  reach  only  to  about  the  level  of  the  distal  ends  of  the  rho- 
palia.  In  specimens  17-18  mm.  high,  i.e.,  % grown,  the  gonads  terminate 
about  as  high  above  the  rhopalia  as  are  the  latter  above  the  bell  margin. 
Among  the  Bermudian  series,  the  gonads  in  specimens  18-23  mm.  high  vary 
from  narrow-linear,  to  so  wide  that  their  free  margins  are  close  together 
(Text-fig..  9).  Furthermore,  the  lamellae  from  which  the  sex  organs  arise, 
may  be  either  so  narrow  that  the  gonads  of  each  pair  seem  almost  in  union 
(Text-fig.  9A),  or  so  wide  that  they  are  separated  by  a considerable  space 


144 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


(Text-fig.  9B).  This  last  may  mirror,  simply,  a flaccid  condition.  But  the 
variation  in  length  of  the  gonads,  in  specimens  of  equal  size,  is  evidence 
that  the  growth  of  these  organs  does  not  necessarily  parallel  the  growth 
rate  of  the  medusa  as  a whole. 

So  far  as  can  be  determined  in  surface  view,  the  Bermudian  specimens 
are  all  males.  Both  sexes  are,  however,  represented  among  the  Bahaman 
series,  the  females  being  recognizable  by  the  large  eggs  with  which  the  leaf- 
like gonads  are  crowded,  and  which  are  easily  visible  with  a hand  lens. 

Rhopalar  Nitches:  The  present  series  confirms  Stiasny’s  (1919)  obser- 
vation that  the  outlines  of  the  pits  in  which  the  rhopalia  are  situated,  and 
of  the  scales  that  partially  cover  the  pits,  offer  specific  characters  in  this 
genus.  As  Conant  (1898,  PI.  1,  Fig.  1)  long  ago  showed  (and  Stiasny,  1919, 
Fig.  2 more  recently),  the  covering  scale  of  xaymacana  (Text-fig.  10)  has 
a simple  undulatory  outline,  and  the  nitch  is  wide  open  toward  the  bell  mar- 
gin, i.e.,  there  are  no  subsidiary  scales  such  as  characterize  C.  alata  (p.  146). 
This  is  also  true  of  typical  marsupialis,  as  pictured  by  Claus  (1878,  PI.  1, 
Figs.  1,  2),  and  as  I have  been  able  to  verify  on  the  specimen  mentioned 
above;  also  in  C.  rastonii  (Bigelow,  1909,  PI.  10,  Fig.  1,  4;  Uchida,  1929, 
Fig.  61). 


Text-fig.  10. 

Carybdea  marsupialis  xay- 
macana. Sensory  pit,  with 
covering  scale,  of  a Ba- 
haman specimen,  x about 
10. 


General  Distribution : Previous  records  of  xaymacana,  under  this  name, 
are  all  from  the  West  Indian  region;  Jamaica  (Conant,  1898);  Bahamas 
(Mayer,  1904;  1910)  ; Haiti  (Stiasny,  1919).  But  it  is  no  surprise  to  find 
it  near  Bermuda,  for  it  is  probable  that  the  T.  punctata  recorded  thence  by 
Fewkes  (1883)  was  actually  a young  xaymacana. 

Vertical  Range : The  list  of  captures  (see  above)  confirms  previous  ex- 
perience that  the  species  occurs  chiefly  close  to  the  surface. 


Carybdea  alata  Reynaud. 

Carybdea  alata,  Reynaud,  1830,  p.  95,  PI.  33,  Fig.  1 ; Haeckel,  1880, 
p.  441;  Vanhoffen,  1908,  p.  34;  Mayer,  1910,  p.  510;  Bigelow,  1918, 
p.  400. 

Marsupialis  alata,  Lesson,  1843,  p.  276. 

Tamoya  alata,  L.  Agassiz,  1862,  p.  174;  Rao,  1931,  p.  27  [partim], 

- - -,  Semper,  1863,  p.  561,  PL  39,  Figs.  8,  9. 

Charybdea  pyramis,  Haeckel,  1879,  PI.  25,  Fig.  5-8;  1880,  p.  440. 
Charybdella  alata,  Haeckel,  1880,  p.  441. 

Charybdea  grandis,  Agassiz  and  Mayer,  1902,  p.  153,  PL  6,  Figs.  26-31 ; 

Bigelow,  1909,  p.  19;  Thiel,  1928,  p.  4. 

Charybdea  moseri,  Mayer,  1906,  p.  1135,  PL  1,  Figs.  2-26. 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  145 

Carybdea  alata  var.  pyramis,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  511. 

Carybdea  alata  var.  grandis,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  511;  1915,  p.  171;  1917, 
p.  189;  Light,  1921,  p.  26. 

Carybdea  alata  var.  moseri,  Mayer,  1910,  p.  512;  Light,  1914,  p.  196; 
Stiasny,  1919,  p.  37. 

Charybdea  madraspatana,  Menon,  1930,  p.  3,  PI.  1,  Fig.  3. 

? , Semper,  1863,  p.  561,  PI.  39,  Fig.  8. 

? Charybdella  philippina,  Haeckel,  1877,  No.  404. 

? Charybdea  philippina,  Haeckel,  1880,  p.  440. 

? Charybusa  obeliscus,  Haeckel,  1877,  No.  406. 

? Charybdea  obeliscus,  Haeckel,  1880,  p.  441. 

? Charybdea  sp?  Browne,  1905,  p.  157. 

Non  Tamoya  alata,  Uchida,  1929,  p.  172;  Stiasny,  1929,  p.  196;  1930, 
p.  5;  1935,  p.  10;  1937,  p.  210. 

Material : Net  No.  448,  732-0  meters,  September  9,  1929,  1 specimen, 
about  75  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  459,  732-0  meters,  September  11,  1929,  1 specimen,  about  20 
mm.  high. 

Net  No.  663,  732-0  meters,  June  4,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  80  mm.  high. 

Net  No.  979,  Surface,  May  16,  1931,  1 specimen,  about  90  mm.  high. 

Also,  4 specimens,  55-63  mm.  high,  from  Jamaica,  in  the  collection  of 
the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology. 

For  the  reasons  for  the  choice  of  alata  Reynaud  (1830)  as  the  name  for 
this  species,  see  p.  138.  Apparently,  the  next  record  of  it  was  one  of  Semper’s 
(1863,  PI.  39,  Fig.  9)  unnamed  carybdeids  from  the  Pacific;  while  a sec- 
ond of  his  unnamed  forms  (Semper,  1863,  PI.  39,  Fig.  8),  may  have  been 
a young  stage  of  it,  judging  from  the  number  (6)  of  canals  in  one  quad- 
rant.11* It  is  for  this  same  reason  that  C.  obeliscus  Haeckel  is  provisionally 
included  here  in  the  synonymy  of  alata.  As  Mayer  (1910)  has  already  de- 
cided, this  seems  certainly  to  apply  to  Haeckel’s  C.  pyramis,  for  the  latter 
had  not  only  the  number  of  canals  now  known  to  be  characteristic  of 
alata,  but  also  the  lunate  groups  of  phacellae,  while  the  relatively  great 
length  of  its  pedalia  is  explicable  as  associated  with  the  small  size  of  Haeck- 
el’s specimen  (20  mm.  high). 

So  far  as  I am  aware,  alata  was  not  seen  again  until  1902,  when  Agassiz 
and  Mayer  gave  the  first  adequate  description  of  it  (large  adult),  from  the 
tropical  Pacific,  as  C.  grandis,  followed  by  Mayer’s  (1906)  account  of  half- 
grown  (or  dwarf)  examples,  from  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  as  C.  moseri. 
Browne  (1905)  had  meantime  reported,  from  Ceylon,  a small  Carybdea  that 
may  have  been  of  this  parentage,  though  its  velar  canals  were  less  numer- 
ous. Soon  thereafter  it  was  reported  from  the  South  Seas  (Bigelow,  1909, 
p.  20)  and  from  Philippine  waters  (Mayer,  1915;  1917,  “C.  alata  var. 
grandis”) . 

Since  that  time,  specimens  definitely  referable  to  alata  have  been  re- 
ported from  Sumatra  (Stiasny,  1919)  and  from  the  west  tropical  Pacific 
(Mariana  Islands,  Thiel,  1928)  in  the  one  hemisphere,  from  the  Florida- 
Bahamas  region  (Bigelow,  1918)  and  from  unnamed  Atlantic  localities 
(Thiel,  1928)  in  the  other.  The  figures  by  Menon  (1930)  of  his  C.  madras- 
patana from  India,  also  agree  closely  with  C.  alata,  so  far  as  general  form 
and  shape  of  pedalia  are  concerned,  while  the  depression  of  the  apex,  thought 
by  him  to  be  distinctive,  seems  more  likely  to  have  been  the  result  of  con- 
traction, or  of  distortion.  And  as  the  large  number  (up  to  10)  of  canals 


iy  This  later  formed  the  basis  for  Haeckel’s  (1880)  Charybdea  'philippina. 


146 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


per  quadrant,  reported  (but  not  figured)  by  Menon  may  likely  be  derivable 
from  the  primary  6,  characteristic  of  alata,  it  seems  probable  that  madras- 
patana  belongs  in  the  synonymy  of  the  latter.  Some  of  the  specimens  re- 
corded by  Rao  (1931)  as  Tamoya  alata  seem  also  to  belong  here,  because  of 
the  number  (6  per  quadrant)  and  simplicity  of  their  canals,  whereas  others 
(because  of  complexity  of  the  latter)  seem  to  have  been  true  Tamoya. 

As  no  account — other  than  Reynaud’s  (1830)  original — of  the  Atlantic 
representatives  of  this  species  has  ever  appeared,  details  are  added  here, 
as  warrant  for  definitely  uniting  it  with  its  Indo-Pacific  relative.  The  latter 
has  been  redescribed  by  Stiasny  (1919). 

General  Form:  The  Atlantic  series  agrees  with  previous  accounts  in  be- 
ing not  only  of  large  size,  and  in  the  absence  of  any  pronounced  exumbral 
sculpture,  but  in  the  fact  that  the  bell  is  relatively  narrower  than  in  any 
member  of  the  marsupialis  group;  measurements  are  as  follows: 


Net  No. 

Approximate 
Height  in  mm. 

Approximate 
Breadth  in  mm. 

Pedalia,  % of 
Bell  Heighth. 

459 

20 

14 

70 

663 

80 

43 

56 

979 

85-90 

42 

50  (approx.) 

Also, 

Jamaica 

63 

35 

65 

ii 

60 

35 

60 

U 

60 

35 

60 

u 

55 

35 

64 

62%,  average 

In  the  Indo-Pacific  examples,  measured  by  Agassiz  and  Mayer  (1902), 
by  Mayer  (1906;  1915;  1917),  and  by  Stiasny  (1919),  the  width  also  aver- 
aged 50-60%  of  the  height,  contrasting  with  an  average  of  about  80%  in 
xaymacana,  and  in  the  marsupialis  group  generally.  However,  there  is  no 
specific  discontinuity  in  this  respect — not,  at  least,  in  preserved  specimens 
— for  Mayer  (1915;  1917)  has  reported  large  alata  (as  var.  grandis ) from 
the  Philippines,  in  which  the  heighth  was  73%  and  81%  of  the  breadth.  It 
should  be  noted,  however,  that  preserved  specimens  are  usually  so  much 
flattened  that  breadth  is  exaggerated.  And  the  better  preserved  of  the  alata 
I have  seen  all  taper  toward  the  apex,  which  is  not  normally  the  case  in  mar- 
supialis and  its  immediate  allies. 

In  the  specimens  of  alata  I have  seen,  exumbral  sculpture  has  been  con- 
fined to  a faint  trace  of  a circumferential  furrow,  at  the  level  of  the  base 
of  the  stomach,  and  to  the  prominences  in  which  the  rhopalar  nitches  are 
situated;  nor  has  any  trace  of  the  longitudinal  ridges  and  furrows,  so 
prominent  in  the  marsupialis  group,  been  reported  by  any  observer  for 
alata;  neither  have  nettle  warts. 

Rhopalia : In  the  largest  two  of  the  Bermudian  specimens,  the  distance 
of  the  rhopalia  above  the  bell  margin  equals  about  12%  of  the  bell  heighth; 
about  15%  in  the  somewhat  smaller  Jamaican  examples,  about  15-20%  in 
the  smallest  Bermudian,  while  in  Indo-Pacific  specimens,  so  far  measured, 
it  has  ranged  from  13-19%  (Agassiz  and  Mayer,  1902;  Mayer,  1906;  1915; 
1917;  Stiasny,  1919). 

Rhopalar  Nitches : The  series  confirms  Stiasny’s  observation  that  these 
differ  from  the  nitches  of  the  marsupialis  group,  in  being  partially  covered, 
on  the  side  toward  the  bell  margin,  by  scale-like  projections  of  the  umbrella 
on  either  hand,  in  addition  to  the  roof-like  scale  that  overhangs  the  nitch 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


147 


from  above;  a difference  illustrated  by  Text-fig.  10,  compared  with  Text-fig. 
11  (cf.  also  Text-fig.  20  of  Tamoya  liaplonema) . 


Text-fig.  11. 

Carybdea  alata.  Sensory  pit, 
with  covering  scales,  of 
specimen  from  Net  No. 
979.  x about  6. 


Gonads : No  gonads  are  visible  on  the  20  mm.  specimen,  but  as  this  is 
in  poor  condition,  they  may  have  been  lost.  In  the  80  mm.  specimen,  they 
reach  about  to  the  level  of  the  rhopalia;  to  a point  about  halfway  between 
the  latter  and  the  bell  margin  in  the  90  mm.  specimen.  Perhaps  as  the  result 
of  contraction  of  the  bell,  they  overlap  somewhat  near  their  upper  ends  in 
the  80  mm.  specimen  (Text-fig.  12). 

Stomach : As  the  name  alata  has  also  (but  incorrectly)  been  applied  to 
a Tamoya  from  the  Indo-Pacific,  it  should  be  emphasized,  as  Stiasny  (1919, 
p.  37)  has  pointed  out,  that  in  Carybdea  alata,  the  stomach  is  flat  and  with 
very  short  lips,  much  as  it  is  in  C.  marsupialis,  and  with  no  trace  of  mesen- 
teries; indeed  it  is  so  shown  in  Agassiz  and  Mayer’s  (1902)  and  Mayer’s 
(1906;  1910;  1915)  illustrations. 

Phacellae:  Previous  students  have  already  shown  that  the  numerous 
gastric  cirri  of  each  group,  occupy  crescentic  areas  extending  horizontally, 
at  the  corners  of  the  stomach  (Text-fig.  12),  an  arrangement  differing 
sharply  from  the  dendritic  phacellae  of  the  marsupialis  group  (p.  140)  ; but 
no  detailed  account  of  these  structures  in  alata  has  yet  appeared.  In  the  best 
pi’eserved  of  the  Bermudian  series,  the  4 crescents  occupy  about  % of  the 
periphery  of  the  stomach  (Text-fig.  12)  confirming  Agassiz  and  Mayer’s 
and  Mayer’s  illustrations.  Stiasny  (1919,  p.  37)  has  described  the  filaments 
as  “einfach,  unverzweigt.”  And  in  surface  view,  the  Bermudian  specimens 
presented  this  same  appearance.  But  when  one  cluster  (Text-fig.  13)  was 
dissected,  and  its  component  filaments  spread  apart  it  proved  that  the  latter 
are  the  terminal  branches  of  numerous  primary  trunks,  standing  in  a single 
row.  In  most  cases,  a primary  trunk  bears  2-8  such  branches  (Text-fig.  14). 
It  is  the  fact  that  the  end  filaments  are  much  longer  than  the  (very  short) 
primary  trunks  that  gives  the  deceptive  appearance  of  simplicity.  In  one 
group  of  phacellae  examined,  there  were  approximately  20  primary  trunks, 
and  more  than  75  filaments.  As  Uchida  (1929)  has  expressed  doubt,  whether 
Atlantic  specimens  earlier  recorded  by  me  (Bigelow,  1918,  p.  400)  as  alata 
really  belonged  to  this  species,  I may  note  that  one  of  these  in  the  collec- 
tion of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  has  phacellae  of  this  same 
type,  besides  agreeing  with  the  Bermudian  series  in  other  respects. 

The  fact  that  the  small  specimen,  20  mm.  high,  has  only  6-8  primary 
trunks,  in  each  crescentic  cluster,  contrasted  with  the  much  larger  number 
in  large  specimens,  gives  a measure  of  the  increase  in  number  that  takes 
place  with  growth. 

Canals:  All  recent  accounts  credit  this  species  with  6 velar  canals  per 
quadrant,  as  is  also  true  of  the  Bermudian  specimens  (Text-fig.  15)  ; evi- 


148 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Text-fig.  12. 

Carybdea  alata.  Somewhat  sche- 
matic apical  view  of  specimen 
75  mm.  high,  from  Net  No. 
448,  to  show  the  location  of 
the  lunate  groups  of  gastric 
filaments. 


Text-fig.  13. 

Carybdea  alata.  One  cluster  of  gastric  filaments,  specimen  from  Net 
No.  448.  x about  12. 


dently,  variants  from  this  state  are  rare,  except  that  a canal  next  one  of  the 
tentacular  radii  may  be  so  deeply  cleft  that  unless  it  be  traced  back  to  its 
proximal  end,  it  might  appear  that  the  primary  number  was  greater  (Text- 
fig.  15B).  Evidence  thus  accumulates  to  the  effect  that  the  number  of  canals 
is  a dependable  specific  difference  between  alata  and  the  marsupialis  group 
(p.  141).  Accounts  have,  however,  differed  widely  as  to  the  extent  to  which 
the  canals  branch.  On  the  other  hand,  Mayer  (1906)  and  Stiasny  (1919) 
have  described  them  as  simple,  or  at  most  as  showing  the  commencement  of 
division.  But  Agassiz  and  Mayer  (1902),  copied  by  Mayer  (1910),  picture 
them  as  digitate,  with  short  lateral  lobes,  while  in  Vanhoffen’s  (1908)  two 
specimens,  they  were  variously  forked — those  of  the  tentacular  radii  usually 
the  most  deeply-  And  the  two  large  Bermudian  specimens  not  only  show 
forking,  with  similar  contrasts  between  the  perradial  and  the  interradial 
pairs,  and  with  complexity  increasing  with  growth  (cf.  Text-fig.  15A  with 
Text-fig.  15B),  but  also  with  wide  variation  from  octant  to  octant  even  of 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


149 


Text-fig.  14. 

Carybdea  (data.  One  primary  branch 
with  terminal  filaments,  from  the 
group  of  phacellae  in  Text-fig. 
13. 


T 


T 


Text-fig.  15. 

Carybdea  alata.  To  show  velar  canals.  A.,  One  quadrant 
of  velarium  of  specimen  about  75  mm.  high  from 
Net  No.  448;  B..  One  quadrant  of  specimen  about 
90  mm.  high,  from  Net  No.  979.  T.,  Tentacular 

radii;  R.,  Rhopalar  radii,  x about  3. 


150  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

a given  specimen,  in  the  precise  degree  of  subdivision,  and  in  the  lateral 
lobing  of  the  canal  margins. 

Pedalia:  By  earlier  accounts,  and  in  the  Bermudian  and  Jamaican  series, 
the  length  of  the  pedalia  (measured  along  the  inner  edge)  equals  about  25- 
30%  of  the  bell  heighth,  in  medium-sized  specimens  of  60-90  mm.  In  larger 
specimens  they  are  relatively  shorter:  17%  according  to  Agassiz  and  Mayer 
(1902)  at  a bell  heighth  of  230  mm.  In  young  specimens  they  are  relatively 
longer:  33%  in  the  Bermudian  example  of  20  mm.;  and  shown  as  about 
50%  in  a young  medusa  by  Agassiz  and  Mayer  (1902). 

The  fin-like  expansions  of  the  pedalia  are  relatively  narrower  in  the 
Bermudian  and  Jamaican  specimens  (Text-fig.  16)  than  they  are  pictured 
by  Agassiz  and  Mayer  (1902,  PI.  6,  Fig.  37)  or  by  Mayer  (1906,  PI.  1,  Fig. 
2;  1917,  Fig.  3);  their  outlines  less  pronouncedly  semi-lunar.  But  this 
may  well  be  the  result  of  different  states  of  contraction,  between  preserved 
and  fresh  material. 


Text-fig.  16. 

Car>~ybdea  alata.  Basal  part  of 
tentacle  o f specimen 
from  Net  No.  448. 


General  Distribution:  The  wide  distribution,  Atlantic  and  Pacific,  of 
locality  records  for  this  species  (listed  above),  suggests  that  it  is  cosmo- 
politan, in  the  warm  belts  of  the  oceans.  But  it  probably  does  not  occur  in 
the  Mediterranean  (perhaps  barred  thence  by  low  water  temperatures),  for 
it  could  hardly  have  been  overlooked  there. 


Tamo  ya. 

If  the  Bursarius  cytherae  of  Lesson  (1830,  p.  108,  PI.  14,  Fig.  1)  was, 
in  fact,  congeneric  with  the  form  later  named  Tamoya  by  F.  Muller  (1858), 
as  Haeckel  (1880)  suggested,  it  would  be  necessary  to  substitute  Bursarius 
as  the  generic  name.  However,  as  Haeckel  pointed  out,  Lesson’s  account  and 
illustration  differ  from  all  known  carybdeids  in  showing  only  2 tentacles 
(though  4 pedalia)  ; nor  do  they  give  any  indication  as  to  the  structural 
characters  which  determine  generic  position  in  this  group.  It  is  thus  wisest 
to  abandon  the  name  Bursarius  for  good  and  all,  on  the  ground  that  the  type 
species  of  the  genus  is  and  must  always  remain  unrecognizable.  For  this 
same  reason  the  specific  name  bursaria,  substituted  by  Haeckel  (1880)  for 
Lesson’s  B.  cytherae,  is  likewise  best  regarded  as  a nomen  nudem. 


1938] 


Bigeloio:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


151 


During  the  years  that  have  elapsed  since  the  type  species  of  the  genus 
Tamoya  ( T . haplonema ) was  described  by  Muller  (1858),  carybdeids  that 
can  be  referred  to  this  genus  as  here  defined20  have  been  described  from  the 
two  sides  of  the  Atlantic  (Haeckel,  1880,  as  “T.  prismatica” ; Mayer,  1910; 
Stiasny,  1934)  ; from  Samoa  (Haeckel,  1880)  ; from  Japan  (Uchida,  1929)  ; 
from  the  Malay  Archipelago  (Stiasny,  1919;  1930)  ; and  from  India  (Menon, 
1930;  Rao,  1931)  ; showing  a world  wide  distribution  within  the  warm  belt. 

All  Atlantic  records  undoubtedly  belong  to  T.  haplonema.  And  so  far 
as  can  be  judged  from  available  information,  all  Indo-Pacific  Tamoyas  so 
far  reported  also  represent  a single  species.  But  it  is  still  an  open  question 
whether  or  not  the  Atlantic  and  Indo-Pacific  forms  are  distinct.  If  so,  the 
correct  name  for  the  Indo-Pacific  species  is  gargantua,  for  the  earliest 
named  Indo-Pacific  carybdeid  that  is  definitely  proved,  by  the  description, 
to  have  been  a Tamoya,  is  the  T.  gargantua  of  Haeckel  (1880),  for  which 
he  revived  a name  under  which  Lesson  (1830)  had  long  before  reported  a 
large  carybdeid  from  New  Guinea.  And  while  neither  Lesson’s  account,  nor 
his  illustration,  gave  any  indication  of  the  details  needed  to  show  whether 
his  specimen  was  actually  a Tamoya,  or  a large  Caryhdea,  stability  of  nomen- 
clature will  be  served  by  following  Haeckel  in  this  regard.  Should  the  Atlan- 
tic and  Pacific  Tamoyas  be  finally  united,  haplonema  would  become  a syno- 
nym of  gargantua. 

Reasons  are  given  above  for  abandoning  altogether  the  specific  name 
bursaria  which  Haeckel  (1880)  substituted  for  Lesson’s  Bursarius  cytherae, 
on  the  assumption  that  it  also  was  a Tamoya. 


Tamoya  haplonema  Muller. 

Tamoya  haplonema,  Muller,  1858,  p.  1,  PL  1,  2;  L.  Agassiz,  1862,  p.  174; 
Haeckel,  1880,  p.  443;  Brooks,  1882,  p.  138;  Von  Lendenfeld,  1884, 
p.  245;  Mayer,  1904,  p.  28,  PI.  7,  Figs.  60-64;  1910,  p.  513,  PL  57, 
Fig.  2;  Stiasny,  1934,  p.  339. 

Tamoya  prismatica,  Haeckel,  1880,  p.  443. 

Chary bdea  ( Tamoya ) haplonema,  Fewkes,  1889,  p.  526. 

Non  Tamoya  haplonema,  Boone,  1933,  p.  39,  PL  6. 

Material:  Surface,  June  25,  1929,  1 specimen,  heighth  about  70  mm., 
breadth  about  45-50  mm.  (depending  on  the  degree  of  flattening),  length  of 
pedalia  along  inner  edge,  about  22  mm.,  of  fin-like  expansion  of  latter,  15 
mm.,  heighth  of  rhopalia  above  bell  margin,  13  mm. 

Although  the  Atlantic  species  of  Tamoya  has  been  mentioned  repeatedly, 
by  name,  in  the  literature  of  medusae,  few  students  have  been  fortunate 
enough  to  have  seen  specimens  of  it.  First  described  by  Muller  (1858),  it 
was  next  reported  by  Haeckel  (1880)  whose  description  (as  “T.  prismatica ”) 
of  a West  Indian  specimen  agreed  so  closely  with  the  original  account,  both 
in  arrangement  of  phacellae,  in  size  of  stomach,  and  in  complexity  of  velar 
canals,  as  to  make  it  certain  that  he  was  dealing  with  haplonema.  As  the 
next  reports  were  by  name  only  (Brooks,  1882;  Fewkes,  1889),  it  is  possible 
that  they  may  actually  have  referred  to  some  Cary  bdea.  And  the  “T.  haplo- 
nema” recorded  from  the  Bahamas  by  Boone  (1933,  p.  39,  PL  6)  seem  cer- 
tainly to  have  been  Carybdea  (probably  C.  xaymacana) , for  her  illustration 
shows  a very  flat  stomach,  with  brush-like  groups  of  phacellae  at  its  corners. 

Mayer  (1904;  1910),  however,  had  typical  examples  of  T.  haplonema,  as 
had  Stiasny  (1934)  more  recently. 

The  single  Bermudian  specimen  (considerably  crumpled)  agrees  so 


20  Omitting  references  by  name  only. 


152  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

closely  in  general  form  with  Mayer’s  (1910,  PI.  57,  Fig.  2)  picture  that  illus- 
tration is  not  required. 

In  the  preserved  condition,  the  gelatinous  substance  is  stiffer  than  in 
any  other  carybdeid  I have  seen.  And  the  nematocyst  warts  described  by 
previous  students  (see  particularly,  Stiasny,  1934)  are  still  to  be  seen  thickly 
strewn  here  and  there  on  the  exumbrella  down  to  the  bell  margin,  likewise 
on  the  outer  faces  of  the  pedalia,  though  the  surface  has  been  so  badly 
rubbed  that  nothing  can  be  said  as  to  the  regularity  of  their  distribution. 
As  the  size  of  the  stomach  is  a distinctive  feature  of  the  genus,  I may  note 
that  this  organ  (Text-fig.  17)  is  about  as  long  as  shown  by  Muller  (1858, 
PI.  1,  Fig.  1)  and  by  Mayer  (1910,  PI.  57,  Fig.  2),  i.e.,  with  lips  hanging 
to  about  the  mid-level  of  the  bell;  this  is  somewhat  shorter  than  in  Stiasny’s 
(1934)  West  African  specimen — a difference  perhaps  due  to  the  degree  of 
contraction.  The  well  differentiated,  pointed  lips  are  also  much  as  pictured 
by  Muller  and  by  Stiasny.  They  are  not  shown  clearly  by  Mayer  (1910,  PI. 
57,  Fig.  2). 


Text-fig.  17. 

Tamoya  haylonerna.  Dissection  of 
upper  part  of  bell  of  Bermu- 
dian specimen,  to  show  out- 
lines of  stomach,  lips,  mesen- 
teries, and  area  occupied  by 
the  phacellae.  Somewhat  sche- 
matic. 


Mesenteries : Previous  statements  regarding  mesenteries  in  Tamoya  have 
been  conflicting.  According  to  Muller  (1858)  and  to  Haeckel  (1880),  the 
pendulous  stomach  is  bound  to  the  subumbrella  by  well  developed  mesenteries 
in  the  radii  of  the  rhopalia,  as  Uchida  (1929)  also  found  for  the  Pacific 
Tamoya.  Stiasny  (1919,  Fig.  6;  1934,  Fig.  1),  however,  pictures  the 
mesenteries  as  in  the  radii  of  the  tentacles;  while  Mayer  (1910,  p.  512) 
states  that  the  “so-called  mesenteries  . . . are  merely  the  flattened  perradial 
sides  of  the  cruciform  stomach.” 

It  is  therefore  worth  mention  that  the  Bermudian  specimen  confirms 
early  accounts,  in  the  presence  of  mesenteries  (Text-fig.  17),  and  that  the 
latter  are  in  the  radii  of  the  rhopalia  (perradial).  Structurally,  they  are 
thin,  transparent  plates  (apparently  ectodermic),  their  free  margin  cres- 
centic, and  by  connecting  the  4 sides  of  the  stomach  with  the  exumbrella, 
they  subdivide  the  upper  part  of  the  bell  cavity  into  as  many  blind  pockets. 

Phacellae : The  gastric  cirri  agree  with  previous  accounts,  in  being 
grouped  in  4 bands  extending  vertically  along  the  sides  of  the  stomach,  alter- 
nating with  the  lips,  i.e.,  in  the  radii  of  the  tentacles  (thus  interradial,  as 
is  also  the  case  in  Carybdea) . In  Stiasny’s  (1934)  illustration,  these  bands 
are  shown  extending  as  far  as  the  distal  end  of  of  the  dilated  portion  of 
the  manubrium.  In  the  present  example,  however,  they  reach  only  about 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


153 


Tamoya  haplonema.  One  of  the  groups 
of  gastric  filaments  of  the  Ber- 
mudian specimen.  P.,  Proximal  end. 
x about  10. 


Text-fig.  19. 

Tamoya  haplonema.  One  of  the 
primary  trunks  with  terminal 
filaments,  from  the  group  illus- 
trated in  Text-fig.  18.  x about 
18. 


to  the  mid-level  of  the  latter  (Text-fig.  17).  As  no  detailed  account  has 
previously  appeared,  I should  add  that  each  group  consists  of  a single  row 
of  about  40  primary  trunks,  arranged  (but  somewhat  irregularly)  in  a 
single  row,  and  each  dividing,  close  to  its  base  into  several  filaments  (Text- 
figs.  18,  19). 

Rhopalar  N itches : Earlier  accounts  (Muller,  1858,  PI.  1,  Fig.  1;  Stiasny, 
1919,  p.  39,  Fig.  7;  1934,  p.  341,  Fig.  IB;  Uchida,  1929,  Fig.  81B)  had  al- 
ready shown  that  the  shape  of  the  rhopalar  nitches  is  one  of  the  minor  char- 
acters separating  Tamoya  from  Carybdea.  In  T.  haplonema  (and  in  its  Pa- 
cific relative  also),  the  nitches,  situated  on  well  marked,  ovoid  gelatinous 
prominences  of  the  exumbrella  (Text-figs,  20,  21),  are  continuously  bounded, 
on  the  lower  side  as  well  as  on  the  upper,  by  a rounded  covering-scale,  which 
gives  the  nitch  a pit-like  confh'mation,  very  different  in  appearance,  from 
the  more  open  nitches  of  Carybdea  (cf.  Text-fig.  20,  with  Text-figs.  10,  11). 

The  edges  of  the  marginal  pouches,  where  they  enclose  the  nitches,  and 
for  some  distance  beyond,  are  strongly  lobate  (Text-fig.  20)  ; in  Carybdea 
(Text-fig.  10),  they  are  smooth. 


154 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Text-fig.  20. 

Tamoya  haplonema.  One  of 
the  sensory  nitches  of 
the  Bermudian  speci- 
men, to  show  covering 
scales  and  lobate  outlines 
of  the  marginal  pouches, 
x about  7. 


Text-fig.  21. 

Tamoya  haplonema.  Lateral 
view  of  sensory  nitch.  x 
about  6. 


T 


lit5  *** 


Text-fig.  22. 


Tamoya  haplonema.  One  quadrant  of  velarium  of  Bermudian 
specimen  to  show  velar  canals.  T.,  Tentacular  radius;  R., 
Rhopalar  radius. 


Canals : The  readiest  field-mark  to  distinguish  Tamoya  from  any  Caryb- 
dea  yet  described  is  the  lobing  of  the  margins  of  its  complexly  forked  velar 
canals  (Text-fig.  22)  ; this  type  of  branching  was  long  ago  pictured  by 
Muller  (1858)  ; more  recently  by  Stiasny  (1919,  Figs.  8,  9;  1934,  Fig.  1,  C), 
and  by  Uchida  (1929,  Fig.  85) .21  Previous  authors  (Mayer,  1910;  Stiasny, 
1934)  record  10  canals  per  quadrant  for  T.  haplonema.  In  the  Bermudian 
specimen,  the  number  is  less  regular,  there  being  only  3 primary  canals  in 
one  octant  (between  tentacular  and  rhopalial  radii)  ; but  so  complexly  sub- 
divided that  there  are  33  terminal  branches,  whereas  in  the  adjacent  quad- 

21  Mayer’s  (1910,  PI.  57,  Fig.  2)  picture  suggests  a somewhat  different  type  of  subdivision,  but 
it  is  evidently  diagrammatic. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


155 


rant,  the  number  of  major  trunks  is  7 (some  of  which  may  have  been 
derived  by  subdivision  close  to  the  base)  with  30  terminal  branches. 

Pedalia : These  (Text-fig.  23)  are  intermediate  in  outline  between 
those  figured  by  Mayer  (1910,  PI.  57,  Fig.  2)  and  by  Stiasny  (1934,  Fig.  la). 
According  to  Mayer’s  figure,  the  tentacular  canals  are  widely  dilated  at  the 
distal  ends  of  the  pedalia,  whereas  Stiasny  shows  them  as  of  uniform  bore. 
Here,  again,  the  present  specimen  is  intermediate,  the  canals  showing  only 
slight  dilation  distally,  but  with  an  irregularity  of  the  margins  suggesting 
that  when  the  pedalia  are  relaxed,  the  dilation  might  be  greater. 


Text-fig.  23. 

Tamoya  haplonema.  Basal 
part  of  tentacle,  x about 
2. 


Gonads : These  organs  are  somewhat  farther  advanced  in  development 
than  those  pictured  by  Mayer,  not  only  reaching  about  to  the  level  of  the 
points  of  origin  of  the  tentacular  canals,  but  so  broad  that  their  free 
edges  overlap  slightly.  In  their  present  state,  they  are  folded,  but  so 
irregularly  as  to  suggest  the  effects  of  preservation. 

General  Distribution : Previous  records  of  T.  haplonema  include  Brazil 
(the  type  locality)  ; West  Indies;  east  coast  of  the  United  States,  north  to 
Latitude  about  41°  N.,  and  to  the  offing  of  the  French  Congo. 


Periphylla. 

Periphylla  hyacinthina  Steenstrup. 

For  early  synonymy,  see  Mayer,  1910,  p.  544,  546  (“P.  hyacinthina”  and 
“P.  hyacinthina  forma  regina ”). 

For  subsequent  discussions,  see  especially  Broch,  1913,  p.  4;  Stiasny, 
1934,  p.  342. 

Material : Net  Nos.  13,  16,  17,  23,  26,  33,  34,  39,  43,  44,  45,  53,  83,  88, 
89,  100,  103,  114,  116,  119,  121,  135,  141,  142,  144,  145,  154,  157,  178, 


156 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


291,  292,  293,  295,  296,  405,  434,  449,  543,  545,  546,  547,  548,  551,  552, 

555,  562,  577,  581,  590,  595,  618,  619,  620,  621,  624,  625,  626,  631,  638, 

644,  645,  646,  654,  674,  686,  688,  692,  699,  707,  709,  710,  712,  716,  721, 

722,  723,  724,  726,  728,  730,  731,  732,  734,  736,  746,  750,  752,  756,  758, 

759,  762,  766,  767,  772,  773,  774,  775,  778,  780,  785,  791,  795,  796, 
797,  798,  799,  801,  804,  809,  818,  822,  825,  827,  832,  835,  836,  837,  838, 
842,  846,  848,  850,  851,  852,  854,  855,  858,  860,  880,  882,  883,  885, 
886,  895,  896,  898,  905,  916,  917,  918,  921,  925,  928,  930,  932,  933,  935, 
937,  939,  940,  951,  963,  970;  317  specimens;  1-14  (in  most  cases,  1-3)  per 
haul. 

Successive  studies  (see  especially  Stiasny,  1934)  have  now  definitely 
established  that  the  two  representatives  of  this  genus  most  often  reported 
— dodecabostrycha  and  hyacinthina — are  nothing  more  than-  growth  stages, 
contraction  phases,  or  color  variants  of  one  species;  and  that  this  probably 
is  equally  true  of  the  third,  regina.  Stiasny  (1934,  1937),  on  the  basis  of  the 
Discovery  collection,  has  concluded  that  the  three  represent  successive  stages 
in  growth,  the  dodecabostrycha  form  (small,  with  low  rounded  stomach  and 
transparent  peripheral  zone)  being  the  youngest,  the  hyacinthina  form 
(with  peripheral  entodermal  system  also  pigmented,  and  usually  with  high, 
pointed  stomach),  an  intermediate  stage — usually  75-80  mm.  in  diameter — 
while  the  regina  form  represents  the  largest,  usually  more  than  80  mm.  in 
diameter,  with  extensive  and  dense  peripheral  pigmentation,  but  again 
usually  low-domed,  as  are  the  juveniles. 

The  Bermudian  series  (many  of  which  are  in  excellent  condition)  cor- 
roborates this  general  growth  relationship,  so  far  as  the  dodecabostrycha 
and  hyacinthina  types  of  pigmentation  are  concerned,  for  among  38  small 
specimens  taken  at  random,  5-12  mm.  in  diameter  at  the  level  of  the  coronal 
furrow,  37  have  the  peripheral  zone  so  hyaline  that  the  gonads  are  entirely 
visible,  only  one  being  so  densely  pigmented  that  they  are  concealed.  Among 
37  specimens  of  15-20  mm.  the  gonads  are  completely  visible  in  only  21; 
their  upper  portions  are  obscured  by  the  spreading  pigment  in  7 ; and  com- 
pletely so  obscured  ( hyacinthina  form)  in  9.  And  among  27  specimens  of 
25-40  mm.,  the  gonads  are  entirely  obscured  in  18;  partially  so  in  8;  and 
completely  visible  only  in  1.  However,  still  larger  specimens  occasionally 
retain  the  restricted  (“ dodecabostrycha ”)  type  of  pigmentation;  this  being 
true  of  one  Bermudian  example  of  45  mm.;  and  of  another  of  55  mm.  The 
series  does  not  include  any  specimens  larger  than  60  mm.,  hence,  throws 
no  additional  light  on  the  regina  form. 

It  seems  that  the  very  smallest  specimens  (smaller,  say,  than  8-9 
mm.  in  diameter  at  the  coronal  furrow)  usually,  or  always,  have  the  gastric 
floor  low-domed.  It  is  already  more  or  less  definitely  conical,  however,  in 
the  majority  of  the  Bermudian  specimens  of  10-12  mm.,  in  several  cases 
pronouncedly  so  (extreme  hyacinthina  type).  It  has  already  been  suf- 
ficiently emphasized,  by  various  students,  that  medium-sized  specimens  show 
wide  variation  in  this  respect,  with  complete  integradation  from  the  lowest 
and  rounded,  to  the  highest  and  most  acutely  conical — depending,  I believe, 
entirely  on  phases  of  contraction. 

Broch  (1913,  p.  7)  and  Stiasny  (1934,  p.  356)  have  both  observed  that 
the  apical  projection  of  the  aboral  gastric  wall  into  the  mesoglea,  so  often 
observed  in  Periphylla  and  frequently  referred  to  as  a “stiel  canal,”  does 
not  occur  in  very  small  specimens.  This  the  Bermudian  series  corroborates, 
for  while  the  gastric  apex  is  acutely  conical  in  some,  even  of  the  smaller 
(down  to  11  mm.  in  diameter  at  the  level  of  the  coronal  furrow),  the  smallest 
in  which  the  apex  shows  anything  that  could  be  named  a canalar  elongation 
is  about  17  mm.  in  diameter.  We  can,  then,  finally  conclude  that  this  struc- 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  157 

ture  has  nothing  whatever  to  do  with  a true  stiel  canal — i.e.,  does  not  indi- 
cate derivation  from  a Scyphistoma  stage,  but  merely  represents  one  ex- 
treme in  the  phases  of  contraction  that  govern  the  contour  of  the  floor  of 
the  stomach  in  middle-sized  individuals. 

It  is  interesting  that,  in  Periphylla  (as  in  Atolla,  p.  161),  the  gonads 
appear  while  the  medusa  is  still  not  more  than  5-8  mm.  in  diameter  at  the 
level  of  the  coronal  furrow22.  By  the  time  a diameter  of  15-20  mm.  is 
reached,  the  sexual  organs  may  be  proportionately  about  as  large  as  they 
are  in  large  specimens,  the  females  with  large  eggs.  But  we  have  still  to 
learn  through  how  extensive  a growth-phase  any  individual  specimen  may 
actually  set  free  its  sexual  produce. 

General  Distribution : Enough  records  have  now  accumulated  to  prove 
that  Periphylla  is  truly  cosmopolitan  in  seas  of  appropriate  depth  and  tem- 
perature23, Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Indian,  right  up  to  the  polar  fronts.  Having 
been  already  taken  in  the  Straits  of  Florida  (Bigelow,  1918),  and  to  the 
southeast  of  Bermuda  (Bigelow,  1928),  it  was  a foregone  conclusion  that 
any  campaign  of  deep  towing  would  yield  it  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
the  latter. 

Seasonal  and  Annual  Distribution : The  following  tabulation  of  the 
percentage  of  the  hauls,  at  732-0  meters  or  deeper,  that  took  Periphylla  (the 
number  taken  shoaler  was  negligible)  illustrates  the  relative  frequency  of 
occurrence,  in  different  months,  and  as  between  the  two  years  1929  and  1930 : 


1929 

1930 

Months. 

Total 

Hauls 

% 

Months. 

Total 

Hauls. 

% 

Hauls. 

with  P. 

with  P. 

Hauls 

with  P. 

with  P. 

April 

47 

13 

29 

April 

May 

75 

15 

20 

May 

87 

26 

30 

June 

93 

9 

9 

June 

82 

23 

28 

July 

107 

14 

13 

July 

52 

23 

44 

Aug. 

51 

0 

0 

Aug. 

11 

1 

9 

Sept. 

106 

3 

3 

Sept. 

136 

43 

31 

Thus  it  appears  that  Periphylla — like  Atolla  (p.  163) — occurred  with 
much  greater  frequency  in  1930  than  in  1929.  But  the  annual  difference 
in  actual  abundance  was  not  as  great  for  Periphylla  (180  specimens  in  343 
deep  hauls,  or  0.5  per  haul  in  1930;  127  specimens  in  462  deep  hauls,  or  0.3 
per  haul  in  1929)  as  for  Atolla  (p.  162).  And  the  data  for  the  two  years 
agree  in  showing  the  greatest  frequency  in  spring  and  early  summer,  with 
a decided  decrease  in  late  summer,  followed  by  some  recovery  in  early 
autumn,  especially  in  1930. 

The  95  hauls  that  yielded  juveniles  of  15  mm.  or  smaller,  were  well 
distributed  through  the  season,  most  numerous  and  in  roughly  comparable 
numbers  (17-23)  for  May,  July  and  September,  evidence  that  Periphylla, 
near  Bermuda,  reproduces  throughout  the  spring  and  summer.  Probably 
it  does  so  throughout  the  year  there,  as  Kramp  (1924)  found  to  be  the  case 
in  the  Mediterranean. 

Vertical  Range : No  Periphylla  were  caught  in  hauls  from  366-0  meters 
or  shoaler.  The  distribution  of  the  catches  in  both  years  combined,  in  the 
deeper  hauls,  was  as  follows : 

22  'The  smallest  individuals  are  in  poor  condition,  but  gonads  are  visible  in  several  not  more 
than  5 mm.  in  diameter,  though  still  very  small. 

23  It  is  not  likely  that  it  will  ever  be  found  in  the  Red  Sea,  for  example. 


158 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Depth 
in  Meters. 

No.  of  Hauls 
Made. 

No.  of 
Specimens. 

Av.  No. 
Specimens 
per  Haul. 

366-0 

12 

0 

0.0 

549-0 

23 

2 

0.08 

732-0 

40 

4 

0.1 

914-0 

132 

53 

0.4 

1,097-0 

134 

85 

0.6 

1,280-0 

132 

29 

0.2 

1,463-0 

135 

28 

0.2 

1,646-0 

135 

60 

0.4 

1,829-0 

135 

48 

0.4 

2,012-0 

4 

2 

0.5 

From  the  foregoing,  it  appears  that  in  the  region  in  question,  Periphylla 
regularly  lives  only  deeper  than  about  600  meters  and  has  its  chief  abun- 
dance considerably  deeper  (from  about  900  meters  downward)  than  in  the 
Mediterranean,  or  off  the  coast  of  Spain  and  Portugal  where  the  Thor 
(Kramp,  1924)  found  it  most  numerous  in  hauls  from  about  150-200  to 
600-700  meters24,  while  one  Mediterranean  catch  was  made  close  to  the  sur- 
face. Farther  north  in  the  Atlantic,  also,  the  upper  limit  to  its  most  fre- 
quent occuri’ence  was  found  to  be  between  about  250  and  500  meters 
(occasional  specimens  as  shoal  as  50  meters)  along  the  route  of  the  Michael 
Sars  Expedition  (Broch,  1913)  ; in  the  Sognefjord,  Broch  (1913)  reports 
it  as  numerous  as  shoal  as  150  meters — again  with  its  upper  limit  a little 
above  50  meters.  And  in  west  Greenland  waters  the  Ingolf  found  it  about 
equally  frequently  at  one  level  as  at  another,  right  up  to  the  surface  (Kramp, 
1913).  In  high  southern  latitudes,  also,  Periphylla  has  been  taken,  not  only 
in  deep  hauls,  but  in  the  superficial  stratum,  and  at  the  surface  as  well,  on 
several  occasions  (Browne,  1910;  Stiasny,  1934,  Table,  p.  364,  365).  The 
combined  picture  is  thus  of  a species  strictly  bathypelagic  throughout  most 
of  its  range,  but  with  the  upper  limit  to  its  normal  occurrence  lying  at  a 
progressively  higher  level,  toward  high  latitudes,  until,  in  subpolar  seas, 
it  comes  right  up  to  the  surface.  Stiasny’s  (1934)  observations  show,  too, 
that  in  upwelling  regions  it  may  frequently  be  brought  up  to  the  super- 
ficial strata,  as  well  as  casually  elsewhere,  as  noted  above. 

So  far  as  is  yet  known,  it  is  in  the  Sargasso  Sea  region  (typified  by 
the  vicinity  of  Bermuda)  that  the  upper  boundary  to  its  regular  occurrence 
lies  deepest,  at  least  for  the  Atlantic.  On  the  basis  of  these  data,  it  seems 
likely  that  the  upper  boundary  for  Periphylla  is  set  by  light  combined  with 
temperature.  As  to  the  latter,  one  can  at  least  say  that  water  of  12°-13° 
is  not  unfavorably  warm  for  it,  witness  its  regular  occurrence  in  the  deeps 
of  the  Mediterranean  (Kramp,  1924).  But,  so  far  as  I have  been  able  to 
learn,  it  has  never  been  found,  more  than  casually,  in  temperatures  much 
higher  than  that. 

Recorded  captures  do  not  suggest  any  definite  lower  limit;  like  sundry 
siphonophores  (Bigelow  and  Sears,  1937),  however — and  perhaps  the 
majority  of  bathypelagic  animals — its  numbers  decrease  as  truly  abyssal 
depths  are  reached. 

Segregation  by  sizes  shows  that  the  upper  zone  of  concentration,  near 
the  1,000-1,200  meter  level,  represents  the  zone  of  greatest  abundance  of 
juveniles,  the  depth  distribution  of  specimens  of  15  mm.,  or  smaller,  being 
as  follows: 


-■i  Kramp  (1924)  estimates  the  depths  of  the  Thor  hauls  as  equalling  about  one-half  the  length 
of  wire  out.  But  it  seems  likely,  from  Jespersen’s  (1915)  experiments,  that  the  towing  depths  were 
actually  somewhat  greater,  with  2/3  the  wire  length  as  perhaps  maximal  (Bigelow  and  Sears 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


159 


Depth 
in  Meters. 

Number 

Juveniles. 

Depth 
in  Meters. 

Number 

Juveniles. 

366-0 

0 

1,463-0 

6 

549-0 

4 

1,646-0 

18 

914-0 

41 

1,829-0 

8 

1,097-0 

44 

2,012-0 

1 

1,280-0 

9 

2,195-0 

1 

The  largest  individuals  were  even  more  definitely  concentrated  in  the 
deepest  strata — responsible  in  part  for  the  apparent  concentration  at  the 
1,400-1,800  meter  level — for  out  of  the  16  specimens,  of  35  mm.  or  larger, 
7 were  from  1,646-0  meters25,  8 from  1,829-0  meters,  one  only  from  a 
shoaler  haul  (549-0  meters). 

It  is  especially  interesting  that  in  West  Greenland  waters,  Kramp 
(1913)  found  juveniles  most  abundant  at  about  600-700  meters26,  i.e.,  but 
little  shoaler  than  at  Bermuda.  This  perhaps  indicates  that  Periphylla  is  not 
permanently  endemic  in  the  Arctic  water  of  the  Greenland-Labrador  sea 
region,  but  that  the  supply  there  is  maintained  by  the  deep  indraft  of 
Atlantic  water,  a hydrologic  phenomenon  now  well  recognized. 


Nausithoidae. 

Nausifhoe. 

Nausithoe  punctata  Kolliker. 

Nausithoe  punctata,  Kolliker,  1853,  p.  323. 

For  synonymy,  see  Bigelow,  1909,  p.  35;  1928,  p.  498;  Mayer,  1910,  p. 

554;  Thiel,  1928,  p.  25. 

Material : Net  No.  627,  1,097-0  meters,  May  23,  1930,  1 specimen. 

Net  No.  719,  1,280-0  meters,  June  25,  1930,  2 specimens. 

Net  No.  773,  1,829-0  meters,  July  4,  1930,  1 specimen. 

Net  No.  793,  1,280-0  meters,  July  9,  1930,  1 specimen. 

Net  No.  967,  914-0  meters,  September  30,  1930,  1 specimen. 

The  specimens,  ranging  from  5 to  9 mm.  in  diameter,  are  specifically 
recognizable,  though  fragmentary;  one  alone  (Net  No.  793)  still  shows  the 
characteristic  dark-pigmented  ocellus  on  one  of  the  rhopalia. 

Earlier  accounts  have  credited  N.  punctata  with  spherical  gonads,  as 
has  been  true  of  the  specimens  of  it  from  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific,  from 
Japanese  waters,  from  the  Mediterranean,  and  from  Florida  and  the  West 
Indies  that  I have  previously  examined;  likewise  of  the  specimen  from  Net 
No.  793  (a  ? with  eggs  of  various  sizes).  A specimen  from  Net  No.  719 
and  one  from  Net  No.  967  seem  at  first  sight  to  have  horse-shoe  shaped 
gonads,  with  concavities  directed  centripetally.  But  it  appears  from  more 
careful  examination  that  the  pockets  (globular  in  life)  within  which  the 
sex  products  are  developed,  had  been  torn  open  on  the  centripetal  sides  by 
the  rough  treatment  the  specimens  had  received,  correspondingly  disrupting 
the  sexual  tissue  still  adhering  to  their  inner  walls.  That  is  to  say,  their 
present  resemblance  to  the  horse-shoe  shaped  gonads  pictured  by  Haeckel 
(1879,  PI.  27),  for  his  genera,  Ephyra  and  Palephyra27,  is  purely  accidental. 

—’This  tends  to  corroborate  Stiasny’s  (1934,  p.  363)  conclusion  that,  during  its  development, 
it  tends  to  move  slowly  into  the  deeper  layers. 

26  Recorded  at  1,000  meters  of  wire  out. 

27  Vanhoffen  s (1902,  PI.  3,  Fig.  10)  illustration  of  Palephyra  indica , they  are  kidney-shaped. 


160 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


This  being  a neritic  species,  it  is  likely  that  the  specimens  here  listed 
were  the  product  of  the  Bermudian  Bank.  To  find  N.  punctata  a few  miles 
out  from  the  land  is  no  surprise,  for  it  has  long  been  known  that  the  free- 
living  stage  of  N.  punctata  endures  long  enough  for  it  to  drift  much  greater 
distances.  It  had  not  been  recorded  previously  from  Bermudian  waters,  but 
was  to  be  expected  there,  for  it  is  common  in  the  West  Indies  (Mayer, 
1910),  as  well  as  widespread  in  warm  seas  generally.  See  Mayer  (1910, 
p.  555),  for  a summary  of  the  earlier  accounts  of  its  developmental  stages. 

As  the  attached  stage  is  known  to  be  commensal  within  certain  sponges 
of  the  littoral  zone,  and  as  adults  have  commonly  been  taken  close  to  the 
surface  elsew’here,  it  is  somewhat  astonishing  that  the  Bermudian  speci- 
mens were  all  from  deep  hauls.  But  the  numbers  concerned  are  so  small 
that  no  estimation  is  possible  of  the  actual  depths  of  capture. 


Atollidae. 

Atolla. 

Atolla  wyvillei  Haeckel. 

Atolla  ivyvillei,  Haeckel,  1880,  p.  488;  1881,  p.  113,  PI.  29,  Figs.  1-9. 

For  early  synonymy,  see  Mayer,  1910,  p.  563,  565,  567  (“A.  bairdii” 
+ “A.  valdiviae”  + “A.  gigantea”  + “A.  wyvillei”). 

For  subsequent  discussions  of  relationships,  see  especially  Broch  (1913, 
p.  13),  Browne  (1916,  p.  203),  Bigelow  (1928,  p.  505),  and  Stiasny 
(1934,  p.  365.). 

Material : Net  Nos.  23,  26,  29,  36,  39,  41,  53,  62,  66,  74,  78,  100,  102, 

105,  111,  118,  122,  142,  154,  196,  221,  240,  247,  253,  292,  293,  295,  296,  368, 
434,  539,  544,  545,  546,  552,  553,  556,  561,  562,  563,  565,  568,  574, 
575,  582,  588,  596,  597,  598,  599,  601,  605,  606,  611,  618,  619,  625,  626, 

631,  632,  633,  637,  639,  647,  648,  652,  657,  659,  666,  674,  676,  681,  682, 

685,  687,  688,  691,  698,  701,  707,  719,  720,  721,  727,  739,  741,  745,  748, 

767,  770,  774,  777,  778,  781,  787,  789,  798,  799,  800,  801,  804,  806,  808, 

810,  812,  824,  826,  829,  831,  838,  846,  850,  860,  861,  863,  865,  875,  881, 

882,  885,  892,  917,  926,  928,  937,  938,  943,  964;  549-0  to  1,829-0  meters; 
232  specimens,  1-6  per  haul,  except  for  Net  Nos.  565,  707,  and  767,  which 
captured  10,  8,  and  9 specimens  respectively.  The  specimens  range  from  7 to 
100  mm.  in  diameter. 

It  now  seems  so  thoroughly  established  that  all  known  Atollas,  that 
have  smooth  marginal  lappets,  belong  to  the  one  species  wyvillei,  that  this 
viewpoint  needs  no  further  defence  (see  Kramp,  1924;  Bigelow,  1928;  and 
Stiasny,  1934,  for  recent  pronouncements  on  this  subject).  Stiasny  (1934, 
p.  366)  has  thought  it  possible  from  his  study  of  the  extensive  Discovery 
series  to  divide  the  comprehensive  species  wyvillei  into  three  forms,  accord- 
ing as  the  margin  of  the  central  disc  is  indented  with  broad  radial  notches 
( wyvillei  form),  or  with  narrow  notches  ( verrillii  form),  or  is  entirely 
smooth  ( bairdii  form),  Conditions,  however,  in  the  Bermuda  series  and 
in  the  others  I have  studied  suggest  that  these  differences  (so  far  studied 
only  in  preserved  material),  like  the  relative  prominence  of  the  annular 
zone,  chiefly  reflect  the  state  of  contraction,  or  relaxation  of  the  animal 
when  preserved.  But  individual  variation  may  also  enter  into  the  case,  to 
a degree  that  it  is  not  yet  possible  to  estimate.  Certainly,  we  do  not  have 
to  do  with  geographic  variation,  for  the  Arcturus  and  Discovery  collections 
have  already  shown  that  it  is  not  unusual  for  narrow-notched,  broad-notched, 
and  smooth  disced  individuals  to  be  taken  side  by  side  in  the  same  haul. 
In  a given  individual  some  of  the  notches  may,  furthermore,  be  broad, 
others  narrow  (Bigelow,  1909,  p.  40)  ; and  it  frequently  happens  that  a 


1938] 


161 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 

given  individual  may  be  equally  well  characterized  as  “broad-notched, 
or  as  “narrow,”  there  being  a complete  inter-graduation  between  the  two. 
The  Bermuda  collection  now  contributes  at  least  one  specimen  (Net  No. 
221)  about  65  mm.  in  diameter,  in  which  the  margin  of  the  disc  is  entirely 
smooth  on  one  side,  but  shows  clear  traces  of  broad  notches  on  the  other. 

Recent  collections  have  yielded  the  smooth  and  notched  or  furrowed 
forms  in  varying  proportions,  the  relative  counts  being  112  notched  (ver- 
rillii,  wyvillei) , and  92  smooth  ( bairdii ),  for  the  Discovery  series  (Stiasny, 
1934,  p.  370),  12  notched  to  3 smooth,  for  the  Thor  series  (Kramp,  1924), 
and  103  smooth  (or  nearly  so)  to  57  furrowed,  for  the  Michael  Sars  collec- 
tion (Broch,  1913).  Among  such  of  the  Bermuda  series  as  are  in  good 
enough  condition  to  be  significant  in  this  respect,  there  are  25  smooth  to 
38  with  the  margin  of  the  disc  variously  notched. 

Previous  collections  had  shown  that  in  specimens  upwards  of,  say,  30 
mm.  in  total  diameter,  i.e.,  presumably  with  the  final  number  of  tentacles, 
there  may  be  as  many  as  29  or  as  few  as  14  of  these;  the  majority  of  large 
specimens  having  from  22  to  28  (see  Vanhoffen,  1902,  Bigelow,  1909,  and 
Kramp,  1924,  for  tabulations  of  tentacle  numbers  at  different  sizes). 
Eighteen  to  twenty-two  tentacles  have  already  been  recorded  in  small  speci- 
mens 8-10  mm.  in  diameter  (Vanhoffen,  1902;  Kramp,  1924).  Among  the 
smallest  of  the  Bermudian  specimens,  of  7-12  mm.,  the  tentacle  number 
ranges  from  19  to  24,  most  frequently  20,  the  smallest  specimen  (7  mm.) 
having  the  latter  number. 

The  most  interesting  contribution  by  the  Bermudian  series  to  knowledge 
of  Atolla  is  its  confirmation  of  earlier  observations  (Maas,  1897;  1904, 
Vanhoffen,  1902)  that  the  gonads  regularly  appear  while  the  medusa  is 
still  very  small,  for  these  organs  are  already  of  moderate  size  in  11  out  of 
14  specimens  of  7-9  mm.,  while  all  but  two  out  of  the  54  specimens  of  15  mm. 
or  smaller,  that  are  in  good  enough  condition  for  study,  have  gonads. 
And  eggs  of  various  sizes  are  clearly  visible  in  one  specimen  of  only  10 
mm.,  in  two  of  11  mm.,  in  one  of  13  mm.  and  in  one  of  14  mm.  But  it 
seems  that  in  occasional  specimens  these  organs  may  not  develop  until  much 
later,  for  in  one  of  30  mm.,  the  gonads  are  still  very  small.  At  the  other 
extreme,  Maas  (1904)  has  reported  a 72  mm.  Atolla  as  spent.  Even  the 
largest,  however,  of  the  Bermudian  specimens,  from  60-100  mm.  in  diameter, 
still  have  full,  or  partly  full  gonads,  both  sexes  being  represented. 

In  short,  it  appears  that  Atolla — like  Periphylla — is  sexually  active 
throughout  most  of  the  growth  period.  But  nothing  is  yet  known  as  to 
how  long,  in  point  of  time,  this  latter  may  continue. 

Broch  (1913)  has  argued,  from  the  depth  distribution  of  the  extensive 
series  collected  by  the  Michael  Sars  in  the  North  Atlantic,  that  the  wide 
variations  that  occur  in  the  characteristic  pigmentation  of  Atolla  are  corre- 
lated with  the  depths  at  which  given  specimens  live,  those  in  which  only 
the  stomach  is  densely  pigmented  (Broch’s  group  I)  having  been  taken  most 
numerously  in  hauls  from  500  meters,  those  with  more  extensive  pigmenta- 
tion in  hauls  from  750  and  1,000  meters.  Stiasny  (1934)  likewise  found 
the  Discovery  captures  at  least  compatible  with  this,  except  in  the  Antarctic 
and  in  the  upwelling  waters  off  West  Africa.  Unfortunately,  the  Bermudian 
series  throws  little  light  on  this  point,  partly  because  the  great  majority  of 
the  hauls  sampled  the  water  to  a depth  of  900  meters  or  more,  and  partly, 
because  the  great  majority  of  the  specimens  were  so  much  rubbed  in  the 
nets,  that  it  is  impossible  to  tell  how  extensive  their  pigmentation  was  in 
life.  The  most  that  can  be  said  is  that  14  of  the  16  specimens  in  which  the 
ring  muscle  is  strongly  pigmented  (or  apparently  was  so  in  life),  were  from 
hauls  from  1,097-0  meters,  or  deeper,  whereas  the  genus  was  of  most 
frequent  occurrence  in  the  914-0  meter  hauls,  as  noted  below.  But  it  is  not 
safe  to  estimate  the  vertical  distribution  of  the  contrasting  specimens  in 


162 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


which  the  pigment  is  now  confined  to  the  stomach  (Broch’s  group  I),  because 
many  of  these  still  show  some  slight  trace  of  peripheral  pigment,  as  well. 

General  Distribution:  A.  wyvillei  has  already  been  reported  close  to 

Bermuda  (Bigelow,  1928,  p.  509),  as  well  as  at  many  other  localities  wide- 
spread in  the  North  Atlantic  from  side  to  side;  it  is  in  fact  now  known  to 
be  one  of  the  most  cosmopolitan  of  bathypelagic  medusae,  to  be  expected 
anywhere  in  the  basins  of  the  open  oceans.  But  like  some  other  bathypelagic 
forms,  it  seems  to  be  barred  from  access  to  the  Mediterranean  (Kramp, 
1924;  Bigelow  and  Sears,  1937). 

To  the  northward,  it  has  been  taken  to  Lat.  64°  N.  in  the  western  side 
of  the  Atlantic,  north  of  the  Faroe-Shetland  ridge  in  the  eastern  (Kramp, 
1914;  Broch,  1913),  to  Bering  Sea  in  the  Pacific  (Bigelow,  1913).  To  the 
southward,  its  recorded  range  extends  right  down  to  the  Antarctic,  namely  to 
Lat.  63°  S.  in  the  Indian  Ocean  (Vanhoffen,  1902)  : to  68°  S.  in  the  Atlantic 
(Stiasny,  1934),  to  70°  30'  S.  in  the  Pacific  (Browne,  1910). 

Seasonal  Distribution:  In  1930,  Atolla  was  taken  rather  regularly  right 
through  the  collecting  season,  from  early  May  until  late  September.  In 
1929,  however,  when  it  occurred  regularly  from  April  through  July,  only 
one  was  taken  in  August,  only  6 (in  one  net  haul)  in  September,  although 
169  hauls  to  suitable  depths  (500-0  meters)  were  made  during  those  two 
months.  Similarly,  the  total  number  taken  was  only  about  % as  great  in 
1929  (54  specimens)  as  in  1930  (171  specimens)  although  many  more  hauls 
were  made  to  900-0  meters  or  deeper,  in  the  former  year  (462  hauls)  than 
in  the  latter  (343  hauls).  In  our  present  ignorance  of  the  ecological  rela- 
tionships of  this  species,  any  attempt  to  explain  this  annual  difference  in  its 
abundance  would  be  pure  guesswork.  As  elsewhere  emphasized  (Bigelow, 
1918,  p.  509)  winter  towing,  in  the  Cape  Hatteras-Bermuda-Bahamas  tri- 
angle, did  not  yield  it  at  all.  But  the  interpretation  of  this  seasonal  perio- 
dicity must  await  a knowledge  of  whether  it  passes  through  a fixed  stage 
in  its  development,  or  whether  it  is  holoplanktonic  as  seems  the  more  likely 
from  its  bathymetric  range. 

In  1929,  so  few  very  small  specimens  (of  12  mm.  or  less)  were  taken 
(3  in  April,  1 in  May,  1 in  July,  1 in  August)  that  no  weight  can  be  given 
to  their  seasonal  distribution.  In  1930,  however,  there  was  an  unmistakable 
concentration  of  young  stages  in  spring  and  autumn  (24  were  taken  in  May, 
6 in  June,  11  in  September)  contrasting  with  the  comparative  scarcity  in 
July  (5)  and  August  (1).  A combination  of  the  data  for  the  two  years 
yields  the  picture  of  a species  breeding  at  least  from  mid-spring  to  early 
August,  but  with  a definite  slackening  of  production  in  the  late  summer. 

Vertical  Range:  The  distribution  of  the  specimens  according  to  the 

depth  of  haul  is  as  follows: 


Depth 
in  Meters. 

No.  of 
Specimens. 

No.  of 
Hauls. 

Specimens, 
per  Haul. 

366-0 

0 

12 

0.0 

549-0 

2 

23 

0.09 

732-0 

3 

40 

0.08 

914-0 

56 

133 

0.42 

1,097-0 

41 

134 

0.3 

1,280-0 

38 

132 

0.3 

1,463-0 

42 

132 

0.3 

1,646-0 

32 

135 

0.2 

1,829-0 

14 

135 

0.1 

1,829-0 

0 

5 

0.0 

1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


163 


This  indication  o,f  an  upper  limit  not  far  from  500  meters,  and  of  a pre- 
ponderance between  1,000  and — perhaps — 1,500  meters,  is  in  line  with  the 
catches  of  the  Michael  Sars  farther  north  in  the  Atlantic  (Broch,  1913). 

The  catches  of  very  small  specimens  (of  13  mm.  or  smaller)  show  even 
more  definite  concentration  near  the  1,000  meter  level,  with  no  indication 
whatever  of  any  tendency  on  the  part  of  the  juveniles  to  live  at  any  higher 
level  in  the  water  than  do  the  adults ; data  are  as  follows : 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

No.  of 
Specimens. 

No.  of 
Hauls. 

Specimens 
per  Haul. 

366-0 

0 

12 

0.0 

549-0 

0 

23 

0.0 

732-0 

1 

40 

0.02 

914-0 

27 

133 

0.20 

1,097-0 

8 

134 

0.06 

1,280-0 

8 

132 

0.06 

1,463-0 

5 

132 

0.04 

1,646-0 

6 

135 

0.05 

1,829-0 

2 

135 

0.02 

There  is,  however,  some  indication  that  as  Atollas  attain  their  full  size 
they  tend  to  sink,  for  no  specimens  of  50  mm.  or  larger  were  taken  as  shoal 
as  732-0  meters,  only  one  from  914-0  meters,  3 at  1,097-0  meters,  2 at 
1,280-0  meters,  7 at  1,463-0  meters,  6 at  1,646-0  meters  (a  preponderance 
at,  say,  1,400  meters  or  deeper),  and  one  at  1,829-0  meters. 

Linuchidae. 

Linuche. 

Linuehe  unguiculata  Schwartz. 

Medusa  unguiculata,  Schwartz,  1788,  p.  195,  PI.  6,  Fig.  1. 

For  synonymy,  see  Mayer,  1910,  p.  558  (“L.  unguiculata”) , p.  560  (“L. 
aquila”)  ; Vanhoffen,  1913,  p.  429;  Bigelow,  1928,  p.  510;  Stiasny, 
1931,  p.  30,  1935,  p.  13;  Darby,  1933,  p.  268. 

Material:  Dip-net,  surface,  June  8,  1929,  hundreds  of  specimens,  about 
1.5  mm.  in  diameter. 

Dip-net,  surface,  July  23,  1929,  1 specimen,  5 mm.  in  diameter. 

Net  No.  293,  1,280-0  meters,  July  12,  1930,  1 specimen,  6.5  mm.  in 
diameter. 

Net  No.  690,  2,012-0  meters,  June  9,  1930,  2 specimens,  4.5-11  mm. 
in  diameter. 

Net  No.  694,  1,646-0  meters,  June  12,  1930,  1 specimen,  5.5  mm.  in 
diameter. 

Reasons  are  given  in  an  earlier  paper  (Bigelow,  1928)  for  including, 
under  the  old  name  unguiculata,  the  form  aquila,  first  described  by  Haeckel 
(1880),  which  has  at  various  times  been  regarded  as  a distinct  Pacific 
species,  or  as  a variety  sufficiently  well  marked  to  deserve  recognition  in 
nomenclature.  And  this  union  has  subsequently  been  accepted  bv  Stiasnv 
(1931).  3 

Thiel  (1928)  has  argued  that  L.  draco  Haeckel  is  a distinct  species,  sepa- 
rated from  unguiculata  by  its  large  size  (up  to  20  mm.  in  diameter),  by 
the  arrangement  of  the  subumbral  pockets  in  two  series,  by  the  number 


164 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


(48)  of  horse-shoe  shaped  gonads,  and  by  green  color  (due  to  the  infesting 
zooxanthellae) . It  is  doubtful,  however,  whether  these  distinctions  will 
stand  the  test  of  time.  Size,  in  particular,  is  hardly  likely  to  prove  of 
specific  significance.  At  most,  a large  variety  might  be  indicated — whether 
regional,  or  seasonal — or  representing  the  growth  of  the  members  of  a 
particular  brood  under  specially  favorable  surroundings.  So  far  as  the 
number  of  pockets  and  their  arrangement  is  concerned,  I may  point  out  that 
while  it  is  usual  in  typical  unguiculata  for  these  to  be  in  3 rows,  32  in  the 
outer,  16  in  the  median,  4-8  in  the  inner,  an  occasional  large  specimen  (12 
mm.)  may  lack  the  inner  row  entirely.  And  the  number  in  the  intermediate 
row  may  even  be  as  small  as  8,  reducing  the  total  number  to  40  (Bigelow, 
1928,  p.  512,  Fig.  184).  It  has  also  been  found  in  typical  unguiculata  that, 
while  the  gonads  originate  in  pairs,  the  members  of  each  pair  may,  with 
growth,  either  “come  together  in  the  perradii,  resulting  in  four  horse-shoe 
shaped  figures”  (Bigelow,  1928,  p.  513,  Fig.  184)  ; i.e.,  attain  the  “draco” 
condition,  or  may  still  continue  separate  until  the  medusa  is  well  grown 
(Bigelow,  1928,  p.  513,  Fig.  183). 

Nor  does  color  seem  any  more  likely  to  prove  an  alternative  character, 
Darby  (1933)  having  recently  found  that  L.  unguiculata,  at  the  Tortugas, 
contains  2 pigments28,  which — depending  on  the  degree  of  oxidation — give 
the  subumbrella  a yellowish  brown  color  by  day  (the  usual  unguiculata 
color),  but  a spotted  dark  green  pattern  by  night,  i.e.,  the  “draco”  hue.  In 
short,  it  now  seems  probable  that  specimens  having  the  “draco”  charac- 
teristics, represent  variants  of  unguiculata,  though  we  are  still  entirely  in 
•the  dark,  as  what  conditions — seasonal,  environmental,  or  genetic — favor 
their  appearance. 

General  Distribution : Previous  records  for  the  general  region  of  Ber- 

muda (Fewkes,  1883;  Bigelow,  1928)  had  already  made  it  likely  that  the 
Bermuda  Bank  is  a center  of  production  for  Linuche,  the  farthest  extra- 
tropical  such  center  in  the  Atlantic.  And  this  is  corroborated  by  the  catch 
of  juveniles,  listed  above. 

Vertical  Range : Linuche  commonly  swarms  at  the  surface.  The  few 
specimens  listed  above  from  deep  hauls  were  probably  picked  up  by  the  nets 
on  their  way  down  or  up. 


DISCOPHORA. 

Pelagidae. 

Pelagia. 

Pelagia  noctiluca  Forskal. 

Medusa  noctiluca,  Forskal,  1775,  p.  109. 

For  synonymy,  see  Mayer,  1910,  p.  572-576  (“P.  noctiluca,”  “P.  noc- 
tiluca var.  neglecta,”  “P.  cyanella,”  “P.  panopyra,”  “P.  panopyra 
var.  placenta,”  “P.  flaveola,”  “P.  perla,”  “P.  phosphora,”  “P. 
crassa ,”)  ; Stiasny,  1914,  p.  529,  p.  531  (“P.  purpuroviolacea”  and 
“P.  rosea”)  ; 1924,  p.  83  (“P,  curagaoensis”) . 

Material : Net  No.  863,  1,646-0  meters,  September  8,  1930,  1 specimen, 
about  26  mm.  in  diameter. 

Surface,  September  12,  1930,  1 specimen,  about  45  mm.  in  diameter. 

The  several  authors  who  have  recently  studied  this  wide-ranging  and 
widely  varying  genus,  have  successively  reduced  the  number  of  so-called 
species.  On  the  basis  of  the  Arcturus  collection,  I concluded  that  one  species 
of  Pelagia  (P . noctiluca) , at  any  rate,  “occurs  widespread,  over  the  warmer 

28  Probably  these  are  actually  in  the  contained  zooxanthellae. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


165 


parts  of  the  Indian  and  Pacific  and  Atlantic  oceans”  (Bigelow,  1928,  p.  519) 
and  doubted  whether  any  of  the  other  named  forms  could  be  separated  from 
it,  specifically.  Stiasny  (1934,  p.  388),  in  his  most  recent  discussion  of  the 
genus,  likewise  makes  equally  drastic  reduction,  writing  “there  is  most  prob- 
ably only  a single  species  of  Pelagia  with  a world  wide  distribution  over  all 
tropical  and  subtropical  parts  of  the  ocean.”  This  species  must  bear  the 
name  that  was  earliest  given  to  a medusa  recognizable  as  Pelagia,  the  P. 
noctiluca  of  Forskal.  Menon  (1930)  has  likewise  applied  this  name,  without 
discussion,  to  Pelagia  from  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Subsequently,  however,  Stiasny  (1935)  has  maintained  that  flaveola  is 
also  a good  species. 

Whether  any  of  the  other  named  forms  deserve  recognition  at  all,  as 
geographic  or  environmental  races,  or  whether  they  merely  represent  indi- 
vidual or  swarm  variations,  different  stages  in  growth,  or  contraction 
phases,  is  still  an  open  question,  the  solution  of  which  is  not  aided  by  the 
present  small  series.  I can  only  point  out  that,  in  the  larger  specimen,  linear 
exumbral  warts  greatly  predominate  in  the  marginal  zone,  but  are  inter- 
mingled with  round-oval  warts  in  nearly  equal  numbers  in  the  central  zone. 
That  is  to  say,  the  so-called  perla  and  pelagia  types  are  combined  with  the 
noctiluca  type  (narrow  linear  warts)  on  different  parts  of  the  bell.  Menon 
(1930)  also  reports  finding  both  long  warts  and  rounded.  This  is  additional 
evidence  that  specific  distinctions  cannot  be  based  on  the  shape  of  these 
structures. 

General  Distribution:  Pelagia  was  to  be  expected  in  the  collection,  hav- 
ing already  been  found  near  Bermuda  (Fewkes,  1883;  Bigelow,  1928).  It  is, 
however,  interesting  that  so  large  a number  of  hauls,  shoal  as  well  as  deep, 
made  in  so  many  different  months,  should  have  yielded  so  few  specimens  of  a 
species  which  has  now  been  encountered — often  in  swarms — at  many  sta- 
tions, in  the  warm  belts  of  all  oceans,  as  well  as  in  the  Mediterranean. 

Poralia. 

? Poralia  rufescens  Vanhoffen. 

Poralia  rufescens,  Vanhoffen,  1902,  p.  41,  PI.  4,  Fig.  15,  16;  Bigelow, 
1909,  p.  45,  PI.  13,  Figs.  1-5. 

Material : Net  Nos.  50,  247,  and  726;  hauls  from  1,646-0,  1,829-0,  and 
1,463-0  meters ; fragments  of  the  central  parts  of  3 specimens ; diameters  of 
base  of  stomach,  respectively  about  30,  about  35,  and  about  18  mm. 

This  species  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  finds  in  the  collection,  for  it 
is  only  the  third  record  for  the  genus.  Poralia  was  first  described  by  Van- 
hoffen (1902)  for  a fragmentary  specimen  (marginal  zone  torn  off)  with 
very  simple  gonads  consisting  of  outpocketings  projecting  direct  from  the 
gastric  wall  into  the  subumbral  cavity,  in  seven  groups  of  3 or  4 pockets 
each.  This  type  of  symmetry,  as  Vanhoffen  pointed  out,  was  previously 
known  (for  Scyphomedusae)  only  as  an  abnormality  of  Aurelia.  There  were 
21  or  22  narrow  radial  canals. 

Two  specimens  in  the  Albatross  collection  (Bigelow,  1909),  though  like- 
wise very  fragmentary,  allowed  some  amplification  of  Vanhoffen’s  original 
account.  In  the  smaller,  there  were  8 groups  of  sexual  folds,  and  21  canals 
in  about  V2  the  circumference,  suggesting  octoradial  arrangement  and  about 
twice  as  many  canals  as  Vanhfiffen’s  example.  In  the  larger  and  somewhat 
better  preserved  Albatross  specimen,  about  250  mm.  in  diameter,  the  sexual 
folds  formed  a practically  continuous  ring,  surrounding  the  base  of  the 
stomach,  but  separated  by  gelatinous  pillars,  into  18  or  19  groups  of  6 or  7 
pockets  each.  And  there  were  41  canals.  As  already  remarked  (Bigelow, 
1909,  p.  46),  a growth  series  is  here  indicated,  with  multiplication  of  canals, 


166  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 

and  of  sex  folds,  accompanied  by  a corresponding  formation  of  additional 
pillars. 

In  the  largest  Bermudian  specimen  (so  far  as  can  be  seen  in  the  present 
fragmentary  state),  the  sex  folds  are  in  five  groups,  separated  by  as  many 
broad  gelatinous  pillars,  corresponding  to  as  many  angles  at  the  base  of  the 
manubrium.  The  number  of  folds  per  group  is  5,  5,  6,  5(?),  5,  while  in 
most  of  the  groups  the  larger  central  folds  are  flanked  in  addition  by  indi- 
cations of  very  small  folds,  which  (if  they  developed)  would  raise  the  num- 
ber per  group  to  6-8.  Several  of  the  folds  contain  large  eggs.  But  this 
cannot  be  taken  as  proof  that  the  specimen  had  reached  its  full  growth,  for 
it  is  equally  possible  that  the  development  of  sex  products  may  extend  over 
a considerable  period,  allowing  opportunity  for  subdivision  of  the  primary 
groups  of  six  folds  by  the  development  of  additional  pillars.  The  number 
of  pillars  is  also  apparently  five  in  the  smallest  specimen  (stomach,  18  mm. 
in  diameter)  ; the  condition  of  the  third  specimen  is  too  bad  for  counting. 

The  canals  are  very  narrow,  as  in  Vanhoffen’s  example  of  corresponding 
size,  approximately  38  in  number  in  the  smallest  specimen,  about  40  in  the 
example  30  mm.  in  diameter  of  stomach,  but  only  about  30  in  number  in 
the  largest. 

These  conditions  of  metamerism  in  the  Bermudian  specimens  make  it 
likely,  not  that  Poralia  is  primarily  octoradial  as  I formerly  suggested,  but 
that  it  is  primarily  quadriradial,  but  that  with  the  growth  of  the  medusa, 
the  original  state  is  obscured  by  the  formation  of  additional  canals,  and  by 
subdivision  of  the  original  groups  of  sex  folds  through  the  development  of 
additional  gelatinous  pillars.  Different  specimens  would  then  show  different 
numbers  of  groups  of  sex  folds — as  is  actually  the  case — if  these  develop- 
ments take  place  at  different  rates,  in  different  radial  sectors,  as  may  very 
well  happen.  Decision  whether  geographical  races  of  the  species  exist  in 
this  respect,  or  whether  it  has  been  a matter  of  pure  chance  that  different 
numerical,  conditions  have  been  illustrated  by  the  few  specimns  so  far  seen 
from  the  Indian,  Pacific,  and  Atlantic  oceans,  must  await  a study  of  larger 
series. 

In  the  Bermudian,  as  in  the  Albatross  examples  (Bigelow,  1909,  PI.  13, 
Figs.  1-3),  the  gastric  cirri  are  arranged  in  a single  fringe-like  row,  in  as 
many  groups  as  there  are  groups  of  sex  folds,  there  being  none  on  the 
gelatinous  pillars. 

Nothing  can  be  said  as  to  the  form  of  the  manubrium,  all  but  the  base 
having  been  destroyed. 

The  marginal  zones  have  been  torn  off,  as  was  also  the  case  in  Van- 
hfiffen’s  and  in  the  smaller  of  the  Albatross  specimens.  And  while  the 
larger  of  the  latter  showed  the  distal  terminations  of  the  canals,  and  allowed 
a description  of  the  rhopalia,  the  tentacles  of  this  genus  have  yet  to  be 
seen. 

The  Bermudian  specimens,  like  those  previously  seen,  show  the  bathy- 
pelagic  type  of  pigmentation,  for  they  are  given  a reddish  chocolate  hue  by 
pigment  granules  so  large  as  to  be  individually  visible  under  a magnification 
of  only  3 diameters.  Even  the  gelatinous  substance  is  sparsely  pigmented 
throughout;  such  of  the  subumbrella  surface  as  is  intact  more  densely  so, 
likewise  the  surface  of  the  sexual  folds,  though  in  places  where  the  latter 
are  torn,  allowing  the  eggs  to  show  through  (specimen  from  Net  No.  247), 
these  are  opaque  white,  as  is  also  the  case  in  Aeginura. 

The  depths  of  capture,  listed  above,  added  to  preexisting  records  of 
1,100-0  meters  (Vanhoffen,  1902)  and  549-0  meters  (Bigelow,  1909),  com- 
bined with  the  fact  that  a form  so  easily  recognizable,  and  so  striking  in 
appearance  has  been  taken  on  only  3 occasions,  is  sufficient  proof  that  its 
habitat  is  exclusively  bathypelagic. 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  167 

Aurelliidae. 

Aurellia.29 

The  written  history  of  Aurellia  extends  back  nearly  two  centuries, 
during  which  period  many  descriptions  of  its  members  have  appeared,  and 
discussion  of  their  interrelationships.  It  has  been  the  object  of  much  inves- 
tigation, embryologic,  physiologic,  and  varietal;  and  it  is  commonly  used 
as  material  for  biological  teaching.  None  the  less,  we  still  await  critical 
revision  of  the  seventeen  “species”  of  Aurellia  that  have  been  named. 

It  is,  however,  generally  accepted  that  most  of  these  represent  nothing 
more  than  contraction-phases,  growth  stages,  individual  variants,  or  at  most 
environmental  races  of  a much  smaller  number.  Thus,  Mayer  (1910,  p. 
620,  622),  in  his  tabular  view  of  the  genus,  grouped  all  the  named  forms 
as  either  “aurita  and  its  varieties”  or  “labiata  and  its  varieties.”  Com- 
parison, a few  years  later,  between  specimens  of  the  aurita  group  from 
various  Atlantic  and  Pacific  localities,  lead  me  to  the  conclusion  that  they 
are  not  separable  into  varieties,  by  any  of  the  characters  previously  sug- 
gested (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  98).  And  Stiasny  (1919a;  1922,  p.  524,  525), 
after  a preliminary  survey  of  the  genus,  concluded  that  all  known  Aurellias 
fall  in  one  or  another  of  four  “wohlunterscheidbare  gruppen,  nicht  Varie- 
taten”  of  the  “grossen  Species  aurita”  characterized  by  differences  in  the 
number  of  canals  arising  from  each  genital  sinus. 

The  difficulty  in  defining  the  forms  of  Aurellia  (whatever  be  the  taxo- 
nomic rank  of  these)  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  character  chiefly  involved,  in 
recent  discussions,  is  one  in  which  differences  are  gradual,  not  discontinuous, 
namely,  the  complexity  of  branching  of  the  canals,  and  the  extent  to  which 
the  branches  anastomose.  The  extremes  in  this  respect  are  far  apart.  The 
one  is  represented  by  the  simple  state  illustrated  by  Mayer  (1910,  p.  624, 
Fig.  397)  for  a Mediterranean  example,  in  which  the  main  perradial  canals 
show  no  branching  between  the  subdivision  that  takes  place  close  to  their 
points  of  origin,  and  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  bell  margin,  and  in  which 
anastomosis  is  also  confined  to  the  latter  region.  The  other  extreme  is  repre- 
sented by  the  form  first  reported  by  Brandt  (1838)  from  Kamchatka,  and 
subsequently  by  Uchida  (1934)  and  by  me  (1913;  1920)  from  northern 
Japan,  from  the  Sea  of  Okhotsk,  and  from  the  Bering  Sea-Alaska  region,  in 
which  the  perradials  give  off  numerous  branches  throughout  the  outer  % of 
their  lengths,  and  in  which  there  is  any  extensive  anastomosis  between  all 
the  primary  systems,  perradial,  interradial,  and  adradial.  I have  already 
argued  (Bigelow,  1913;  1920)  that  this  form  differs  so  sharply  from  typical 
aurita  in  this  respect,  (also  in  the  dense  pigmentation  of  the  margin)  as  to 
deserve  specific  recognition  as  A.  limbata  Brandt.  However,  it  proves  that 
the  further  difference  reported  by  Uchida  (1934),  namely  wrinkled  exumbral 
sense  pits  in  limbata,  smooth  in  aurita,  is  not  a dependable  specific  char- 
acter (unless  perhaps  for  full-grown  specimens),  for  while  the  pits  in  a large 
example  from  the  Kurile  Islands  agreed  with  Uchida’s  description  in  their 
wrinkling  (Bigelow,  1913,  p.  100,  PI.  5,  Fig.  2),  they  are  smooth  in  the 
smaller  specimens  with  limbata  canalization  that  I have  seen.  Neither  have 
I been  able  to  demonstrate,  on  any  of  the  Aurellias  of  this  type,  the  partial 
closure  of  the  mouth  by  flaps  from  the  oral  arms,  reported  by  Uchida  (1934) 
and  thought  by  him  to  suggest  rhizostome  affinities.  This  perhaps  represents 
a contraction  phase. 

Aurellia  limbata,  in  short,  is  very  closely  allied  to  aurita  though  differ- 
ing enough  from  the  latter  (at  least  in  its  typical  form)  for  specific  recog- 
nition. It  also  has  a much  more  circumscribed  range,  for  all  records  of 
Aurellias,  the  canals  of  which  have  shown  the  extreme  complexity  and  exten- 

29  This  name  has  usually  been  spelled  Aurelia.  But  Peron  and  Lesueur’s  (1809)  original  spelling 
was  Aurellia , as  Mayer  (1910,  p.  619)  points  out. 


168 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


sive  anastomosis  characteristic  of  limbata  have  (so  far  as  I am  aware) 
been  from  the  Arctic  or  Subarctic;  namely,  from  northern  Japan,  Kam- 
chatka, Sea  of  Okhotsk,  the  Bering  Sea  region  (Brandt,  1838;  Uchida, 
1934;  Bigelow,  1913;  1920),  and  Greenland  (Kramp,  1913,  as  “A.  flavi- 
dula”) . Thus  it  is  circumpolar,  as  I have  previously  pointed  out  (Bigelow, 
1920,  p.  14). 

The  status  of  A.  maldivensis  Bigelow,  and  of  A.  solida  Browne — the 
former  recently  redescribed  by  Stiasny  (1935),  the  latter  by  Menon  (1930) 
and  by  Rao  (1931) — still  remains  uncertain. 

Aurellia  aurita  Linne. 

Medusa  aurita,  Linne,  1758,  p.  660. 

For  early  synonymy,  see  “A.  aurita,”  Mayer,  1910,  p.  623,  627,  and 
“A.  labiata,”  p.  628. 

The  more  important  subsequent  discussions  are  listed  above  (p.  167). 

Material:  Net  No.  296,  1,829-0  meters,  July  12,  1929,  1 specimen,  about 
85  mm.  in  diameter. 

Dip  Net,  Surface,  October  16,  1930,  10  specimens,  about  30-80  mm.  in 
diameter. 

Net  No.  880,  914-0  meters,  September  12,  1930,  1 specimen,  frag- 
mentary, about  85  mm.  in  diameter. 

Also,  9 other  Bermuda  specimens,  25-90  mm.  in  diameter  in  the  col- 
lection of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  collected  in  the  summers 
of  1902,  1903,  1916,  1917. 

The  number  of  canal  roots,  arising  from  each  genital  sinus,  shows  the 
following  range,  in  specimens  of  different  sizes: 


Diameter 
in  mm. 

Number  of 
Specimens. 

Number  of 
Canals  per 
Sinus. 

25 

2 

3 

30 

1 

3 

33 

1 

3-4 

35 

1 

3 

37 

1 

3 

40 

2 

3 

45 

1 

3 

50 

1 

3-4 

52 

1 

3 

55 

1 

1-3 

75 

2 

3-5 

80 

2 

3-5 

90 

1 

4-5 

Thus,  most  of  the  smaller  examples  would  fall  in  the  “aurita”  group,  ac- 
cording to  Stiasny’s  (1922)  subdivision,  while  the  larger  specimens  bridge 
the  gap  between  the  latter  and  his  “colpota”  group.  The  first  branching  of 
the  primary  interradial  canals  is  trichotomous,  as  Stiasny  (1922)  has  em- 
phasized, with  further  branching  leading  to  the  formation  of  what  Mayer 
(1910,  p.  624)  has  aptly  named  a “pitchfork-shaped  system.”  In  small 
Aurellias,  the  first  branching  of  the  interradial  canals  usually  lies  some  dis- 
tance distal  to  the  boundary  of  each  genital  sinus.  It  is,  in  fact,  probable 
that  all  Aurellias  pass  through  this  “aurita”  stage  in  this  respect,  when 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


169 


they  are  small.  The  outer  boundaries  of  the  sinuses  spread  centrifugally 
with  growth.  And  it  appears  that  the  number  of  separate  trunks  that  arise 
from  a given  sinus,  in  larger  individuals,  depends  chiefly  in  how  far  out- 
ward the  canal-system  has  become  incorporated  into  the  sinus,  by  the 
growth  of  the  latter.  With  Aurellia  proverbially  variable  and  subject  to 
abnormality,  it  is  not  astonishing  that  the  number  of  canals  often  differs 
for  the  different  sinuses  of  a given  individual. 

The  Bermudian  series  gives  evidence,  in  the  foregoing  tabulation,  of  the 
tendency  toward  an  irregular  increase  in  the  number  of  canals,  with  growth, 
that  is  to  be  expected,  on  this  basis.  Failure  of  any  of  the  specimens30  to 
show  a larger  number  of  canal-roots  than  5 per  sinus  is  no  doubt  due  to 
the  fact  that  none  of  them  was  of  large  size.  For  example,  the  numbers  per 
sinus  in  a large  Cuban  specimen,  250  mm.  in  diameter,  are  6,  6,  8,  7. 

I may  note,  in  passing,  that  anastomosis  of  canals  in  the  Bermudian 
specimens,  is  much  as  it  has  frequently  been  described  for  A.  aurita. 

General  Distribution:  It  has  long  been  known  that  A.  aurita  is  one  of 
the  most  abundant  of  medusae  among  the  West  Indies,  and  northward  from 
Florida  along  the  east  coast  of  North  America.  It  is  also  a familiar  object 
at  Bermuda,  although  no  printed  record  of  its  presence  seems  to  have  ap- 
peared. Being  strictly  a neritic  form,  the  specimens  in  the  present  collec- 
tion were  no  doubt  the  product  of  the  Bermuda  Bank. 

Faunistic  Considerations. 

Neritic  and  Holoplanktonic  Communities. 

It  is  safe  to  conclude — from  the  geographic  location  of  the  station 
where  the  towing  was  done — that  all  the  medusae  taken,  of  species  that 
pass  through  a fixed  stage  in  their  development,  were  the  products  of  Ber- 
muda. Hence,  a comparison  of  this  neritic  element,  in  the  catches,  with  the 
holoplanktonic  species  gives  a good  indication  of  the  extent  to  which  a 
small  isolated  Bank  may  be  expected  to  contribute  to  the  medusan  fauna 
of  the  open  ocean  nearby. 

In  the  case  of  the  Hydromedusae,  out  of  a total  of  717  specimens,  the 
number  belonging  to  species  that  are  either  known  to  pass  through  an  at- 
tached hydroid  stage,  or  may  reasonably  be  assumed  to  do  so,31  does  not 
exceed  17.  This,  I may  point  out,  does  not  include  the  small  series  of 
Bougainvillia  niobe,  which  has  a budding  phase,  hence  is  placed  in  the  holo- 
planktonic category,  so  far  as  its  dispersal  is  concerned.  That  is  to  say, 
the  contribution  made  by  the  neighboring  slopes  and  shallows  of  Bermuda, 
to  a point  not  ten  miles  distant,  was  less  than  3%  of  the  total  catch.  And 
the  numerical  paucity  of  the  neritic  element  is  the  more  striking,  when  one 
recalls  that  it  represents  at  least  9 species,  the  holoplanktonic  element 
(Tracho-  and  Narcomedusae)  only  14.  It  is  probable  that  if  the  station 
had  been  located  but  a few  miles  further  offshore,  the  neritic  element  in  the 
medusa  fauna  would  have  been  negligible,  as  Thiel  (1935)  has  shown  it  to 
be  for  the  Central  and  South  Atlantic  as  a whole. 

In  the  case  of  the  Scyphomedusae,  the  situation  was  the  reverse,  if 
judged  from  the  standpoint  of  total  numbers  only,  for  the  number  of  neritic 
specimens  was  raised  considerably  above  that  of  the  holoplanktonic  by  one 
catch  of  several  hundreds  of  juveniles  of  Linuclie,  a genus  which  almost 
certainly  passes  through  a scyphistoma  stage,  though  not  yet  actually  proven 
to  do  so.  And  a second  large  catch  (66)  was  also  made  of  Carxjbdea 
xaymacana,  which  also  probably  has  a polyp  stage  in  coastal  waters.  How- 

so  Except  for  two  abnormal  tripartite  specimens,  each  about  80  mm.  in  diameter,  in  which 
the  number  of  canals  per  sinus  were  9,  7,  9,  and  9,  6,  7. 

31  Zancleopsis,  Pandea,  Heterotiara,  Calycopsis,  Chromatonema,  Aequorea,  Olindias. 


170 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


ever,  if  the  neritic  and  holoplanktonic  groups  of  Scyphomedusae  be  judged, 
not  by  numbers  of  specimens,  but  by  the  frequency  of  occurrence,  the  latter 
group  ranks  far  in  advance,  for  252  hauls  yielded  representatives  of  genera 
certainly  or  probably  holoplanktonic  ( Atolla , Periphylla,  Pelagia),  while 
only  16  hauls  and  surface  collections  yielded  genera  which  may  be  safely 
called  neritic  ( Carybdea , Tamoya,  Nausithoe,  Linuche,  Aurellia) . And 
apart  from  the  two  species  just  mentioned,  neritic  (or  probably  neritic) 
Scyphomedusae  numbered  only  23  specimens,  holoplanktonic  Scyphomedusae 
549. 

Apart,  then,  from  sporadic  contributions  of  2 species,  produced  on  the 
Bermuda  Bank,  the  regular  population  was  as  characteristically  holoplank- 
tonic for  the  Scyphomedusae  as  for  the  Hydromedusae.  Why  it  is  that  the 
young  of  Linuche  and  Carybdea  drift  offshore  more  frequently,  or  in  greater 
numbers,  than  do  other  medusae  produced  on  the  Bermuda  Bank,  is  a 
problem  for  the  future. 


Vertical  Distribution  of  Medusae  as  a Whole. 

If  we  omit  the  few  specimens,  for  which  depth  data  are  not  available; 
fragments  which  may  not  have  represented  individual  medusae;  and  also 
the  swarm  of  juvenile  Linuche,  mentioned  above,  the  distribution  of  all  the 
medusae  combined  with  respect  to  depth  of  haul,  was  as  follows : 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Number  of 
Hauls  Made. 

Number  of 
Medusae  Taken. 

Specimens 
per  Haul. 

0 

86 

126 

1.5 

183-0 

10 

0 

0 

366-0 

12 

0 

0 

549-0 

23 

10 

0.43 

732-0 

40 

18 

0.45 

914-0 

132 

189 

1.44 

1,097-0 

134 

246 

1.83 

1,280-0 

132 

245 

1.85 

1,463-0 

132 

235 

1.79 

1,646-0 

135 

234 

1.73 

1,829-0 

135 

220 

1.63 

2,012-0 

4 

21 

5.25 

The  fact  that  the  yields  of  85  hauls  at  depths  of  183-0  to  732-0  meters 
was  so  trifling,  is  good  evidence  that  catches  made  in  the  deeper  hauls  can 
have  owed  very  little,  if  anything,  to  what  the  nets  picked  up  while  being 
lowered  and  hauled  up  again.  Consequently,  the  tabulation  indicates  that, 
numerically,  the  immediate  surface,  on  the  one  hand,  and  a stratum  from 
about  the  900  meter  level  downward,  were  about  equally  populated,  but  that 
the  intervening  zone,  some  700  meters  thick,  was  practically  barren.  And 
omission  of  the  neritic  specimens  from  the  surface  catches,  shows  that  this 
barren  zone  extended  right  up  to  the  surface,  for  only  4 specimens  of  the 
holoplanktonic  group  were  taken  at  the  surface,  namely,  1 Liriope,  1 Hal- 
icreas,  and  2 Aegina. 

Consideration  of  the  comparative  regularity  of  occurrence  at  different 
depths  leads  to  a similar  conclusion,  as  appears  from  the  following  tabu- 
lation : 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


171 


Depth  in 
Meters. 

Number  of 
Hauls  Made. 

Number  with 
Medusae. 

% with 
Medusae. 

0 

86 

10  (3) 

11  (-3) 

183-0 

10 

0 

0 

366-0 

12 

0 

0 

546-0 

23 

4 

17 

732-0 

40 

12 

30 

914-0 

132 

55 

41 

1,097-0 

134 

67 

50 

1,280-0 

132 

66 

50 

1,463-0 

132 

64 

49 

1,646-0 

135 

71 

52 

1,829-0 

135 

61 

45 

2,012-0 

4 

4 

100 

By  this  criterion,  for  all  medusae  combined,  and  even  including  the 
swarms  of  juvenile  Linuche,  the  medusae  occurred  less  regularly  at  the  sur- 
face than  from  about  600-0  meters  downward,  not  at  all  in  the  intervening 
strata.  And  omission  of  the  neritic  forms  lowers  the  surface  frequency  to 
a very  small  fraction  of  that  of  the  deep  layers,  for  only  3 out  of  the  86 
surface  hauls  yielded  holoplanktonic  medusae  (about  3%),  or  1 for  28 
hauls. 

If  the  foregoing  tabulations  were  taken  at  face  value,  they  would  sug- 
gest that  medusae  were  about  equally  abundant  and  equally  frequent  from 
about  800  meters,  or  thereabouts,  downward,  with  a decided  maximum  as 
deep  as  2,000  meters.  But  consideration  of  the  method  by  which  the  hauls 
were  made  shows  that  such  a conclusion  would  almost  certainly  be  incor- 
rect, because  the  catches  from  the  deepest  hauls  were  no  doubt  augmented, 
both  in  frequency  and  in  numerical  yield,  by  what  the  nets  picked  up  as 
they  were  lowered  through  the  comparatively  rich  500-800  meter  stratum, 
and  then  hauled  up  through  it  again.  The  data  are  not  of  a sort  to  allow 
numerical  calculation  of  the  probable  contamination  resulting  from  this. 
But  it  may  be  safely  assumed  that  with  depth,  below,  say,  800  meters,  this 
increased  significantly  and  rapidly.  And  it  is  not  unlikely  that  all  the  speci- 
mens yielded  by  the  4 hauls  at  2,012-0  meters  actually  came  from  much 
smaller  depths.  In  short,  the  data  yields  no  positive  evidence  that  there 
were  any  medusae  as  deep  as  this. 

Reasoning  then  from  the  collections  actually  made  at  Dr.  Beebe’s  sta- 
tion, it  seems  safe  to  conclude  for  the  part  of  the  Sargasso  Sea  represented 
by  the  Bermuda  region: 

1.  That  the  neritic  element  among  the  Hydromedusae  is  numerically 
negligible;  and  that  this  also  applies  to  the  Scyphomedusae,  except  on  occa- 
sions when  swarms  of  one  species  or  another  may  drift  out  for  a few  miles 
from  the  Bermuda  Bank. 

2.  That  the  whole  upper  500  meters  of  water  is  practically  barren  of 
medusae  from  spring,  through  summer,  to  autumn,  except  when  such  events 
take  place.  On  these  occasions,  the  immediate  surface  may  be  the  most 
thickly  populated  zone.  But  it  appears  that  these  periods  are  of  brief  dura- 
tion; nor  is  it  likely  that  they  aifect  the  situation  on  a broad  scale  more 
than  a few  miles  out  from  Bermuda. 

3.  That  medusae  as  a whole  in  this  part  of  the  ocean  basin  are  usually 
most  abundant  and  occur  most  regularly  at  about  500-800  meters,  below 
which  they  decrease,  in  both  these  respects,  with  increasing  depth. 


172 


[XXIII  :5 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 
Relative  Abundance  of  Different  Species. 


The  relative  abundance  of  the  several  species  is  shown  in  the  following 
table : 


Species. 

Number. 

Species. 

Number. 

Zancleopsis  dichotoma 

1 

Liriope  tetraphylla 

1 

Bougainvillia  niobe 

7 

Geryonia  proboscidalis 

3 

Pandea  conica 

1 

Cunina  sp? 

1 

Pandea  rubra 

4 

Solmissus  incisa 

13 

Heterotiara  anonyma 

2 

Aegina  citrea 

31 

Calycopsis  sp? 

2 

Aeginura  grimaldii 

201 

Chromatonema  rubrurn 

2 

? Pegantha  clara 

7 

Aequorea  floridana 

2 

Carybdea  xaymacana 

105 

Olindias  tenuis 

3 

Carybdea  alata 

3 

Rhopalonema  velatum 

39 

Tamoya  haplonema 

1 

Pantachogon  haeckeli 

65 

Periphylla  hyacinthina 

317 

Colobonema  typicum 

47 

Nausithoe  punctata 

6 

? Crossota  brunnea 

50 

Atolla  wyvillei 

232 

Trachynemidae? 

51 

Linuche  unguiculata 

many 

Halicreas  minimum 

186 

Pelagia  noctiluca 

2 

Halier eas  glabrum 

66 

Poralia  rufescens 

3 

Halitrephes  valdivii 

19 

Aurellia  aurita 

12 

Absolute  Abundance. 

Some  estimate  of  the  absolute  abundance  has  proved  interesting.  Since 
the  neritic  forms  may  be  regarded  as  sporadic  invaders  of  the  offshore 
waters,  they  may  be  left  out  of  account  in  this  connection.  The  number 
of  holoplanktonic  medusae  of  all  kinds  taken  in  the  hauls  from  549-0 
meters  and  deeper,  i.e.,  in  the  most  productive  zone,  was  about  1,406; 
the  number  of  hauls  869;  the  number  of  hours  of  towing  was  3,276;  or 
an  average  yield  of  only  1.6  specimens  per  tow,  or  0.42  specimen  per 
hour’s  towing.  Divided  into  groups,  the  catch  was  approximately  0.23 
Trachomedusae  and  Narcomedusae  combined,  and  0.16  of  the  bathypelagic 
Scyphomedusae  ( Atolla  and  Periphylla ) per  towing  hour. 

Quantitative  Comparison  with  Other  Regions. 

A quantitative  comparison  of  the  medusa  population  of  the  Bermuda 
region  with  that  of  the  Mediterranean  and  of  the  Central  and  South  Atlantic 
is  interesting,  as  an  indication  of  how  the  former — and  its  part  of  the  Sar- 
gasso Sea  as  a whole — ranks  as  to  productivity  for  this  group,  at  different 
levels  in  the  water,  compared  with  other  seas.  Calculation  of  the  Mediter- 
ranean catches  made  by  the  Thor  as  listed  by  Kramp  (1924),  but  omitting 
one  large  catch  of  “many  thousands”  of  Liriope  eurybia  in  the  Sea  of  Mar- 
mora ( Thor  Sta.  175,  Kramp,  1924,  p.  32),  shows  an  average  catch  per 
hour’s  towing  of  about  41.5  medusae  of  all  sorts,  of  about  36-37  Tracho- 
medusae and  Narcomedusae  combined,  and  about  2.5  Scyphomedusae.  Since 
the  Thor  collections  were  made  with  a net  with  a mouth  area  of  3 square 
meters,  towing  at  a rate  of  about  2 sea  miles  an  hour,  the  Bermudian  collec- 
tion with  one  of  only  about  0.78  square  meters,  towed  at  a rate  of  2-2% 
knots,  a factor  of  about  3.8  must  be  introduced  to  make  the  catches  com- 
parable. So  adjusted,  it  is  obvious  that  the  Mediterranean  was  many  times 
the  more  productive  region,  both  for  the  holoplanktonic  Hydromedusae,  and 
for  the  medusae  as  a whole.  In  the  case  of  the  bathypelagic  Schyphomed- 
usae,  however — represented  at  Bermuda  chiefly  by  Atolla  and  Periphylla, 


173 


1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 

but  in  the  Mediterranean  by  the  latter  only — the  two  regions  were  about 
equally  rich. 

The  Bermudian  region  is  also  poor  in  the  holoplanktonic  Hydromedusae, 
in  general,  as  compared  to  the  Central  and  South  Atlantic  as  a whole,  where 
the  Meteor  tows,  with  nets  only  half  as  large  in  diameter,  yielded  an  aver- 
age of  about  5.4  specimens  per  200  meters  of  towing  at  all  depths  and  sta- 
tions combined — a number  that  must  be  multiplied  by  a factor  of  perhaps 
1.8  to  correct  for  the  size  of  the  net  alone,  to  be  made  comparable  with 
the  Bermuda  average  catch  of  only  0.23  per  hour’s  towing.  And  the  Atlantic 
figure  would  be  much  increased  if  the  vertical  Meteor  tows  were  to  be  cal- 
culated on  an  hourly  basis. 

Reference  to  the  foregoing  discussion  of  vertical  distribution  (p.  170) 
makes  it  clear  that  this  relative  poverty  of  the  Bermuda  region  results 
chiefly  from  the  barrenness  there  of  the  upper  500  meters  of  water,  in  holo- 
planktonic medusae  of  any  sort.  In  the  Mediterranean,  by  contrast,  most  of 
the  hauls  from  the  upper  100  meters  of  water  yielded  considerable  numbers 
of  medusae,  of  one  species  or  another  (see  Kramp’s,  1924  lists),  while  most 
of  the  larger  catches  of  the  species  most  plentiful  there,  namely  Rhopalon- 
ema  velatum  and  Liriope,  were  from  depths  no  greater  than  300  meters.  In 
the  Central  and  South  Atlantic  also,  the  Meteor  found  Tracho-  and  Narco- 
medusae most  abundant  (10-11  individuals  per  200  meters  tow)  between 
the  surface  and  200  meters,  much  less  so  in  the  deep  underlying  waters 
(Thiel,  1935,  p.  43,  Fig.  20,  Table  3).  And  evidence  in  the  same  direction, 
in  the  Pacific,  results  from  the  rich  catches  of  medusae  of  this  category 
made  in  tWe  Humboldt  Current  off  northwestern  South  America,  by  the 
Albatross  (Bigelow,  1909). 

From  the  foregoing,  it  appears  that  the  very  warm  superficial  stratum 
of  the  Sargasso  Sea  is  notably  barren  of  medusae  of  the  holoplanktonic 
category,  but  so  far  as  the  evidence  goes,  it  suggests  that  the  productivity 
of  the  deep  waters  in  the  more  strictly  bathypelagic  types,  represented  by 
Periphylla  and  Atolla,  is  much  more  nearly  of  the  same  general  order  of 
magnitude  there,  as  it  is  over  the  ocean  basins  as  a whole32,  or  in  the  Medi- 
terranean. 

It  is  interesting  as  illustrating  the  relative  numerical  abundance  of 
two  allied  groups  of  pelagic  coelenterates  that  the  average  Mediterranean 
catch  of  about  41  medusae  per  hour’s  towing  mentioned  above  (p.  172),  con- 
trasts with  a corresponding  average  of  between  200  and  300  calycophorid 
siphonophores,  both  in  the  Mediterranean  and  in  the  neighboring  parts  of 
the  Atlantic  (Bigelow  and  Sears,  1937,  p.  137).  Evidently,  the  latter  group 
is  much  the  more  numerous  in  that  particular  region.  But  it  is  doubtful 
how  far  regionally  this  generalization  would  apply,  for  the  average  Meteor 
catches  per  200  meters  of  towing,  of  siphonophores  and  of  Tracho-  plus 
Narcomedusae,  for  the  Central  and  South  Atlantic  did  not  differ  greatly 
one  from  the  other  (cf.  Leloup  and  Hentschel,  1935,  p.  24,  Fig.  17  with 
Thiel,  1935,  p.  43,  Fig.  20,  Table  3). 

In  the  Bermuda  region,  we  have  no  direct  comparison  between  the  two 
groups,  as  there  are  no  published  records  of  siphonophores  for  the  years 
1929-1930,  and  as  the  numbers  captured  are  not  recorded  for  the  one  year 
on  record  (1931,  Totton,  1936).  We  may,  however,  point  out  that  they 
were  only  taken  in  55  out  of  374  hauls  (usually  only  one  species  in  a haul), 
or  14%  of  the  tows  in  1931,  whereas  the  medusae  were  taken  at  41%  of 
all  hauls  in  the  summers  of  1929-1930.  Hence  assuming  that  the  several 
summers  were  comparable,  it  appears  that  medusae  are  actually  more  fre- 
quently encountered  in  the  Bermuda  region  than  siphonophores.  And  this 
area  may  thus  prove  to  be  as  barren  of  the  latter  as  the  former. 

..  ]:C,om?a,re’  for  example,  the  catches  of  Atolla  and  Periphylla  made  in  the  North  Atlantic  bv 
the  Michael  Sars  (Broch,  1913). 


174 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Bibliography. 

Agassiz,  Alexander. 

1865  North  American  Acalephae.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol.  1,  No.  2,  pp. 
1-234,  360  figs. 

Agassiz,  A.,  and  Mayer,  A.  G. 

1902  Reports  on  the  Scientific  Results  of  the  Expedition  to  the  Tropical 
Pacific,  1899-1900.  III.  Medusae.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol.  26, 
pp.  139-176,  14  pis. 

Agassiz,  Louis 

1860  Contributions  to  the  Natural  History  of  the  United  States.  Vol.  3, 
11+301+26  pp.,  19  pis.  Boston. 

1862  Contributions  to  the  Natural  History  of  the  United  States.  Vol.  4, 
8+380+12  pp.,  Pis.  20-35.  Boston. 

Beebe,  Wlliam 

1931  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions  1929-1930.  Zoologica,  New  York 
Zool.  Soc.,  Vol.  13,  Nos.  1-2,  pp.  1-36. 

Berger,  E.  W. 

1898  The  Histological  Structure  of  the  Eyes  of  Cubomedusae.  J.  Comp. 
Neur.,  Vol.  8,  pp.  223-230,  5 text-figs. 

1900  Physiology  and  Histology  of  the  Cubomedusae.  Mem.  Biol.  Lab.,  Johns 
Hopkins  Univ.,  Vol.  4,  No.  4,  84  pp.,  3 pis. 

Bigelow,  H.  B. 

1909  Reports  on  the  Scientific  Results  of  the  Expedition  to  the  Eastern 
Tropical  Pacific,  1904-1905.  XVI.  The  Medusae.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.,  Vol.  37,  243  pp.,  48  pis. 

1913  Medusae  and  Siphonophorae  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Fisheries  Steamer 
“Albatross”  in  the  Northwestern  Pacific,  1906.  Proc.  V.  S.  Nat.  Mus., 
Vol.  44,  pp.  1-119,  Pis.  1-6. 

1918  Some  Medusae  and  Siphonophorae  from  the  Western  Atlantic.  Bull. 
Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol.  62,  pp.  365-442,  8 pis. 

1919  Hydromedusae,  Siphonophores  and  Ctenophores  of  the  “Albatross” 
Philippine  Expedition.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.  Bull.  100,  Vol.  1,  Pt.  5,  pp.  279- 
362,  Pis.  39-43. 

1920  Medusae  and  Ctenophora.  Rept.  Canadian  Arctic  Exped.,  1913-1918. 
Vol.  8,  Pt.  H,  22  pp.,  2 pis. 

1928  Scyphomedusae  from  the  Arcturus  Oceanographic  Expedition.  Zoo- 
logica, New  York  Zool.  Soc.,  Vol.  8,  pp.  495-524. 

Bigelow,  H.  B.,  and  Leslie,  Maurine. 

1930  Reconnaissance  of  the  waters  and  plankton  of  Monterey  Bay,  July 
1928.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol.  70,  p.  429-581. 

Bigelow,  H.  B.,  and  Sears,  Mary. 

1937  Siphonophorae.  Rept.  Danish  Oceangr.  Exped.,  1908-1910,  to  the 
Mediterranean  and  adjacent  seas,  Vol.  2,  Biol.,  Pt.  2,  H.  2,  144  pp.,  83 
figs. 

Bigelow,  R.  P. 

1909  A New  Narcomedusa  from  the  North  Atlantic.  Biol.  Bull.,  Vol.  16,  pp. 
80-82. 

Blainville,  H.  M.  D.  de. 

1834  Manuel  d’Actinologie  ou  de  Zoophytologie.  Paris,  8+688+12  pp.,  Atlas 
of  100  pis. 

Boone,  Lee. 

1933  Coelenterata.  Sci.  Results  of  Cruises  of  the  Yachts  “Eagle”  and  “Ara,” 
1921-1928  . . . Bull.  Vanderbilt  Marine  Mus.,  Huntington,  N.  Y.,  Vol. 
4,  pp.  27-68,  Pis.  1-24. 

Brandt,  J.  F. 

1838  Ausfiihrliche  Beschreibung  der  von  C.  H.  Mertens  auf  seiner  Weltum- 
segelung  beobachteten  Schirmquallen  . . . Mem.  Acad.  Imp.  Sci.  St. 
Petersburg.  Ser.  6,  Vol.  4,  pp.  237-411,  Pis.  1-31. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


175 


Broch,  Hj. 

1913  Scyphomedusae  from  the  “Michael  Sars”  North  Atlantic  Expedition 
1910.  Rept.  Sci.  Res.  of  the  “ Michael  Sars”  North  Atlantic  Deep  Sea 
Expedition  1910  . . . Vol.  3,  Pt.  1,  Zool.,  23  pp.  1 pi.,  12  text-figs. 

1924  Hydroida,  in  Kiikenthal  und  Krumbach,  Handbuch  der  Zool.,  Vol.  1, 
pp.  422-458. 

1924  Trachylina,  Ibid,  pp.  459-484. 

1929  Craspedote  Medusen.  Pt.  2.  Trachylinen  (Traehymedusen  und  Nar- 
comedusen).  Nordisches  Plankton,  Zool.  Vol.  6:  Coelenterata,  pp.  481- 
540,  Figs.  1-40. 

Brooks,  W.  K. 

1882  List  of  Medusae  found  at  Beaufort,  N.  C.,  during  the  summers  of 
1880  and  1881.  Studies  Biol.  Lab.,  Johns  Hopkins  Univ.,  Vol.  2,  pp. 
135-146. 

1895  The  Sensory  Clubs  or  Cordyli  of  Laodice.  Journ.  Morph.,  Vol.  10,  pp. 
287-304,  PI.  17. 

Browne,  E.  E. 

1905  Report  on  the  Medusae  (Hydromedusae,  Scyphomedusae,  and  Cteno- 
phora)  collected  by  Professor  Herdman  at  Ceylon  in  1902.  Suppl.  Rep. 
XXVII,  Ceylon  Pearl  Oyster  Fisheries,  publ.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  Pt. 
IV.  pp.  131-166,  4 pis. 

1906  Biscayan  Plankton.  Part  IX.  The  Medusae.  Trans.  Linn.  Soc.,  London, 
Vol.  10,  pp.  163-187,  Pl.  13. 

1910  Coelenterata.  V.  Medusae.  Nat.  Antarctic  Exped.,  Nat.  Hist.,  Vol.  5, 
62  pp.  7 pis. 

1916  The  Percy  Sladen  Trust  Expedition  to  the  Indian  Ocean  1905  . . . 
IV.  Medusae  from  the  Indian  Ocean.  Trans.  Linn.  Soc.,  London,  Vol.  17, 
pp.  169-209,  PI.  39. 

1927  Report  on  the  Medusae.  Cambridge  Exped.  to  the  Suez  Canal,  1924. 
Trans.  Zool.  Soc.,  London,  Vol.  22,  pp.  105-115. 

Chamisso,  A.  de,  and  Eysenhardt,  C.  G. 

1821  De  animalibus  quibusdam  e Classe  Vermium  Linneana  . . . Nova 
Acta,  Fasc.  2.  Acad.  Caes.  Leop.,  Vol.  10,  pp.  343-374,  Pis.  24-33. 

Claus,  C. 

1878  Ueber  Charybdea  marsupialis.  Arb.  Zool.  Inst.  Wien,  Vol.  1,  pp.  1-56 
or  (221) - (276) , 5 pis. 

CONANT,  F.  S. 

1897  Notes  on  the  Cubomedusae.  Johns  Hopkins  Univ.  Circ.,  Vol.  17,  No.  132, 
p.  8-10,  Figs.  8-9. 

1898  The  Cubomedusae.  Mem.  Biol.  Lab.,  Johns  Hopkins  Univ.,  Vol.  4,  No. 

I,  61  pp.,  8 pis. 

Darby,  H.  H. 

1933  Studies  on  Pigments  of  Linuche  unguiculata  (Eschscholtz) . Carnegie 
Inst.  Washington,  Year  Book,  No.  32,  p.  268. 

Delle  Chiaje,  S. 

1841  Descrizione  e notomia  degli  animali  invertebrati  della  Sicilia  citeriore 
. . . Vol.  4,  142  pp.,  Atlas  (to  Vols.  1-8), 181  pis.,  Naples. 

Eschscholtz,  Fr. 

1829  System  der  Acalephen  . . . 6+190  pp.,  16  pis.,  Berlin. 

Fewkes,  J.  W. 

1882  On  the  Acalephae  of  the  East  Coast  of  New  England.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.,  Vol.  9,  pp.  291-310,  1 pl. 

1883  On  a few  Medusae  from  the  Bermudas.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol. 

II,  pp.  79-90,  1 pl. 

1886  Report  on  the  Medusae  collected  by  the  U.  S.  F.  C.  Steamer  Albatross, 
in  the  region  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  in  1883-’84.  Rept.  U.  S.  Fish.  Comm. 
for  1884,  pp.  927-977,  10  pis. 

1889  Report  on  the  Medusae  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  Steam- 
er Albatross  in  the  region  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  in  1885-’86.  Rept. 
U.  S.  Commissioner  of  Fish  and  Fisheries  for  1886,  pp.  513-534,  1 pl. 


176 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Foerster,  R.  E. 

1923  The  Hydromedusae  of  the  West  Coast  of  North  America,  with  Special 
Reference  to  the  Vancouver  Island  Region.  Contr.  Canadian  Biol.,  N.  S., 
Vol.  1,  No.  12,  pp.  219-277,  5 pis. 

Forskal,  Petrus. 

1775  Descriptiones  animalium  . . . quae  in  itinere  Orientali  observavit  . . . 
Post  mortem  auctoris  edidit  Carsten  Niebuhr.  19+1  + 34+164  pp. 
Hauniae. 

Gegenbaur,  C. 

1856  Versuch  eines  Systemes  der  Medusen  . . . Zeit  Wiss.  Zool.,  Vol.  8,  pp. 
202-273,  Pis.  7-10. 

Haacke,  Wilhelm. 

1886  liber  die  Ontogenie  der  Cubomedusen.  Zool.  Anz.,  Vol.  9,  pp.  554-555. 

1887  Die  Scyphomedusen  des  St.  Vincent  Golfes.  Jena  Zeitschr.  Naturwiss. 
Vol.  20,  pp.  588-638,  Pis.  35-37. 

Haeckel,  Ernst. 

1877  Prodrom.  System.  Medus.  (Cited  from  Haeckel,  1880). 

1879  Das  System  der  Medusen.  Theil  1.  System  der  Craspedoten.  Jena 
Denkschr.  Med.-Naturwiss.  Gesell.,  Vol.  1,  25+360  pp.,  Atlas  of  40  pis. 

1880  System  der  Acraspeden.  Zweite  halfte  des  Systems  der  Medusen.  Jena 
Denkschr.  med.-naturwiss.  Gesell.,  Vol.  1,  Pt.  2,  pp.  361-672. 

1881  Report  on  the  deep  sea  Medusae  . . . Rept.  Sci.  Res.  H.  M.  S.  Chal- 
lenger. Zool.  Vol.  4,  105+154  pp.,  32  pis. 

Hargitt,  C.  W. 

1905  Notes  on  the  Variations  in  Rhegmatodes.  Biol.  Bull.,  Vol.  9,  pp.  368- 
377. 

Hartlaub,  C. 

1907  Craspedote  Medusen.  1 Teil,  1 Leif.:  Familie  I,  II.  Codoniden  und 
Cladonemiden  Nordisches  Plankton,  Zool.,  Vol.  6,  Coelenterata,  pp. 
1-135,  126  text-figs. 

1914  Craspedote  Medusen.  1 Teil,  3 Leif.:  Familie  IV.  Tiaridae.  Nordisches 
Plankton,  Zool.,  Vol.  6 Coelenterata,  pp.  237-364. 

Jespersen,  P. 

1915  Sternoptychidae  ( Argryopelecus  and  Sternoptyx).  Rep.  Danish  Ocean. 
Exp.  1908-1910  to  the  Mediterranean  and  Adjacent  Seas,  No.  3,  Vol.  2, 
{Biology) , A.  2,  pp.  1-33,  6 text-figs. 

Kolliker,  Albert. 

1853  liber  Scheibenquallen.  Zeit.  Wiss.  Zool.,  Vol.  4,  pp.  320-329. 

Kramp,  P.  L. 

1913  Medusae  collected  by  the  “Tjalfe”  Expedition.  Vidensk.  Meddl.  Dansk 
naturh,  foren.  Kjobenhavn,  Vol.  65,  pp.  257-286,  4 text-figs. 

1914  Meduser  og  Siphonophorer  Medd.  om  Gronland,  Pt.  23,  pp.  381-456. 

1919  Medusae.  Part  1.  Leptomedusae.  Danish  Ingolf-Exped.,  Vol.  5,  No.  8, 
111  pp.,  5 pis. 

1920  List  of  Medusae  collected  by  the  M.  S.  “Armauer  Hansen”  in  the 
North  Atlantic  in  1913.  Bergens  Mus.  Aarbog,  1917-1918,  No.  8,  7 pp. 

1920a  Anthomedusae  and  Leptomedusae.  Rept.  Sci.  Res.  “Michael  Sars” 
North  Atlantic  Deep  Sea  Exped.,  Vol.  3,  Pt.  2,  13  pp.,  1 pi.,  6 text-figs. 

1924  Medusae.  Rep.  Dan.  Ocean.  Exp.  1908-1910  to  the  Mediterranean  and 
Adjacent  Seas,  No.  8,  Vol.  2,  Biol.  H.  1,  67  pp.,  40  text-figs.,  12  charts. 

1926  Medusae.  II.  Anthomedusae.  Danish  Ingolf-Exped.,  Vol.  5,  Pt.  10,  102 
pp.,  2 pis, 

1928  Papers  from  Dr.  Th.  Mortensen’s  Pacific  Exped.  1914-1916.  XLIII. 
Hydromedusae.  I.  Anthomedusae.  Vidensk.  Meddl.  Dansk  Naturhist. 
Foren.  i Kjobenhavn,  Vol.  85,  pp.  27-64. 

1933  Craspedote  Medusen.  Teil  III.  Leptomedusen.  Nordisches  Plankton. 
Zool.,  Vol.  6:  Coelenterata,  pp.  541-602,  Figs.  1-68. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


177 


Kramp,  P.  L.  and  Damas,  D.  . 

1925  Les  Meduses  de  la  Norvege.  Introduction  et  Partie  speciale  I.  Vidensk. 
Meddl.  Dansk  Naturhist.  Foren.  i Kjobenhavn,  Vol.  80,  pp.  217-323, 

PI.  35. 

Krumbach,  T. 

1925  Scyphozoa,  in  Kiikenthal  und  Krumbach,  Handbuch  der  Zool.,  Vol.  1, 
Pt.  4,  pp.  522-608. 

Leavitt,  B.  B. 

1935  A Quantitative  Study  of  the  Vertical  Distribution  of  the  Larger 
Zooplankton  in  Deep  Water.  Biol.  Bull.,  Vol.  68,  pp.  115-130. 

Leloup,  E. 

1935  Halammohydra  et  les  Siphonophores  Chondrophorides.  Bull.  Mus.  roy. 
hist.  nat.  Belg.,  Vol.  11,  No.  23,  4 pp. 

Leloup,  E.,  and  Hentschel,  E. 

1935  Die  Verbreitung  der  Calycophoren  Siphonophoren  im  Sudatlantischen 
ozean.  RY'ss.  Ergeb.  Deutsclien  Atlantischen  Exped.  auf  dem  . . . 
“Meteor,”  1925-1927,  Vol.  12,  Pt.  2,  pp.  1-31. 

Lesson,  R.  P. 

1830  Voyage  autour  du  monde  sur  la  Corvette  de  sa  majeste,  La  Coquille 
. . . 1822,  1823,  1824,  et  1825  . . . Zool.,  Vol.  2,  Pt.  2,  Div.  2,  Zoophytes, 
35  pp.  and  Atlas,  Zoophytes,  16  pis. 

1843  Histoire  naturelle  des  Zoophytes.  Acalephes.  Paris,  8+596  pp.  Atlas  of 
12  pis. 

Light,  S.  F. 

1914  Some  Philippine  Scyphomedusae  . . . Philippine  Jour.  Sci.,  Vol.  9,  Sect. 
D,  pp.  195-231. 

1921  Further  notes  on  Philippine  Scyphyomedusan  Jellyfishes.  Philippine 
Jour.  Sci.,  Vol.  18,  pp.  25-47. 

Linne,  Carl  von 

1758  Systema  Naturae  . . . Ed.  10,  Vol.  1,  823  pp.  Holmiae. 

Maas,  Otto. 

1893  Die  craspedoten  Medusen.  Ergebn.  Plankton  Exped.  . . . Vol.  2,  K.  c., 
107  pp.,  6 pis.,  2 charts. 

1897  Reports  on  an  Exploration  off  the  West  Coasts  of  Mexico,  etc.  XXL  Die 
Medusen.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  Vol.  23,  92  pp.,  15  pis. 

1904  Meduses  provenant  des  campagnes  des  Yachts  Hirondelle  et  Princesse 
Alice  (1886-1903).  Res.  camp.  sci.  . . . par  Albert  ler,  Prince  souverain 
de  Monaco.  Vol.  28,  71  pp.,  6 pis. 

1905  Die  craspedoten  Medusen  der  Siboga  Expedition.  Siboga  Exped. 
Monogr.  10,  84  pp.,  14  pis. 

1906  Medusen.  Res.  Voyage  S.  Y.  Belgica  en  1897-1898-1899  . . .,  Zoologie, 
pp.  1-30,  3 pis. 

Mayer,  A.  G. 

1894  Cruise  of  the  Steam  Yacht  “Wild  Duck”  in  the  Bahamas  . . . III.  An 
Account  of  some  Medusae  obtained  in  the  Bahamas.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.,  Vol.  25,  pp.  235-242,  3 pis. 

1900  Some  Medusae  from  the  Tortugas,  Florida.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool., 
Vol.  37,  pp.  11-82,  44  pis. 

1904  Medusae  of  the  Bahamas.  Mem.  Nat.  Sci.,  Brooklyn  Inst.  Arts  and 
Sci.,  Vol.  1,  33  pp.,  7 pis. 

1906  Medusae  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  collected  by  the  Steamer  Albatross 
in  1902.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.,  Vol.  23,  Pt.  3,  pp.  1131-1143,  3 pis. 
1910  Medusae  of  the  world.  3 vols.  Carnegie  Inst.,  Washington,  Publ.  No. 
109. 

1915  Medusae  of  the  Philippines  and  of  Torres  Straits.  Papers  from  Dept. 
Mar.  Biol.,  Vol.  8,  Publ.  212,  Carnegie  Inst.,  Washington,  pp.  157-202, 
3 pis.,  7 text-figs. 

1917  Report  upon  the  Scyphomedusae  collected  by  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of 
Fisheries  Steamer  “Albatross”  in  the  Philippine  Islands  and  Malay 
Archipelago.  Bull.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  100,  Vol.  1,  Pt.  3,  pp.  175-233. 


178 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


Menon,  M.  G.  K. 

1930  The  Scyphomedusae  of  Madras  and  the  neighboring  coast.  Bull.  Madras 
Govt.  Mas.,  N.  S.  Nat.  Hist,  sect.,  Vol.  3,  No.  1,  28  pp.  3 pis. 

Muller,  F. 

1858  Zwei  neue  Quallen  von  Santa  Catharina  (Brasilien).  Abhandl.  natf. 
Ges.  Halle,  Vol.  5,  pp.  1-12,  3 pis. 

1861  Polypen  und  Quallen  von  Santa  Catharina.  Olindias  sambaquiensis  n. 
sp.  Archiv.  fur  Naturges.  Jahrg.  27,  pp.  312-319,  Fig.  9. 

Neppi,  V.  and  Stiasny,  G. 

1913  Die  Hydromedusen  des  Golfes  von  Trieste.  Arb.  Zool.  Inst.  Wien,  Vol. 
20,  pp.  1-70  or  (23) -(92),  4 pis. 

PeRON,  F.  and  Lesueur,  C.  A. 

1809  Histoire  generate  et  particuliere  de  tous  les  animaux  qui  composent  la 
famille  des  Meduses.  Ann.  Mas.  Hist.  Nat.  Paris,  Vol.  14,  pp.  218-228. 

Quoy,  J.  R.  C.  and  Gaimard,  J.  P. 

1827  Observations  Zoologiques  faites  a bord  de  V Astrolabe  en  mai  1826  dans 
le  detroit  de  Gibraltar.  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.,  Vol.  10,  pp.  172-193,  Pis.  4-6. 

Ranson,  G. 

1936  Meduses  provenant  des  Campagnes  du  Prince  Albert  ler  de  Monaco. 
Res.  camp.  sci.  Monaco  . . . Vol.  92,  245  pp.,  2 pis. 

Rao,  H.  S. 

1931  Notes  on  Scyphomedusae  in  the  Indian  Museum.  Rec.  Indian  Mus.  Cal- 
cutta, Vol.  33,  Pt.  1,  pp.  25-62,  pis.  3-4. 

Remane,  A. 

1927  Halammohydra,  ein  eigenartiges  Hydrozoon  der  Nord-  und  Ostsee. 
Zeit.  f.  Wiss.  Biol.,  Abt.  A,  Zeit  f.  Morphol.  u.  Ukol.  der  Tiere,  Vol. 
7,  pp.  643-677,  21  text-figs. 

Reynaud,  M. 

1830  In  Lesson,  R.  P.  Centurie  zoologique  . . . Paris  10,  244  pp.,  80  pis. 
Semper,  Carl. 

1863  Riesebericht.  Zeit.  f.  Wiss.  Zool.,  Vol.  13,  pp.  558-570,  Pis.  38-39. 
Stiasny,  G. 

1914  Zwei  neue  Pelagien  aus  der  Adria.  Zool.  Anz.,  Vol.  44,  pp.  529-533. 

1919  Die  Scyphomedusen-Sammlung  des  naturhistorischen  Reichsmuseums 

in  Leiden.  I.  Die  Carybdeiden  (Cubomedusen) . Zool.  Mededeel.  Rijks. 
Mus.  Nat.  Hist.  Leiden,  Vol.  5,  pp.  33-58,  14  text-figs. 

1919a  Die  Scyphomedusen-Sammlung  der  Naturhistorischen  Reichsmuseums 
in  Leiden.  II.  Stauromedusae,  Coronatae,  Semaeostomeae.  Zool. 
Mededeel.,  Rijks.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Leiden,  Vol.  5,  pp.  66-99,  3 text-figs. 
1922  Papers  from  Dr.  Th.  Mortensen’s  Pacific  Expedition  1914-1916.  XIII. 
Die  Scyphomedusen-Sammlung  von  Dr.  Th.  Mortensen  . . . Vidensk. 
Meddel  Dansk  Naturh.  Foren.,  Kjobenhavn,  Vol.  73,  pp.  513-558. 

1924  Ueber  einige  von  Dr.  C.  J.  Van  der  Horst  bei  Curasao  gesammelte 
Medusen.  Bijdagen  tot  der  Dierkunde.  Amsterdam,  Vol.  23,  pp.  83-91. 
1926  Ueber  einige  Scyphomedusen  von  Puerto  Galera,  Mindoro  (Philip- 
pinen).  Zool.  Mededeel.,  Rijks  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Leiden,  Vol.  9,  pp.  239- 
248. 

1929  Ueber  einige  Scyphomedusen  aus  dem  Zoologischen  Museum  in  Am- 
sterdam. Zool.  Mededeel.,  Rijks  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  Leiden,  Vol.  12,  pp. 
195-216. 

1930  Scyphomedusen.  Res.  sci.  Voyage  aux  Indes  Orientales  Neerlandaises 
. . . Mem.  Mus.  Roy.  Hist.  Nat.  de  Belgique.  Hors  serie,  Vol.  2,  Pt.  4, 

11  pp. 

1931  Ueber  einige  Coelenterata  von  Australien.  Zool.  Meded.,  Rijks  Mus. 
Nat.  Hist.,  Leiden,  Vol.  14,  pp.  27-40. 

1934  Scyphomedusae.  Discovery  Repts.,  Vol.  8,  pp.  329-396,  Pis.  14-15. 

1935  Die  Scyphomedusen  der  Snellius  expedition.  Verh.  konink.  acad.  Wet. 
Amsterdam  afd.  natuurk.,  2nd  Section,  Vol.  34,  No.  6,  pp.  1-44,  9 
text-figs.,  1 pi. 


1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


179 


1937  Scyphomedusae.  Sci.  Rep.  John  Murray  Exped.,  1933-34,  Brit.  Mus. 
(N.  H.),  Vol.  4,  No.  7,  pp.  203-242,  1 pi.,  14  text-figs.,  2 maps. 

Schwartz,  C. 

1788  Neue  Abhandl.  Schwed  Acad.  Deutsche  liebers.,  1789,  p.  195,  PI.  6,  Fig. 
1,  (not  accessible). 

Thiel,  M.  E. 

1928  Die  Scyphomedusen  des  Zoologischen  Staatsinstituts  und  Zoologischen 
Museums  in  Hamburg.  1.  Cubomedusae,  Stauromedusae  und  Coronatae. 
Mitt.  Zool.  Staats.  Inst.  und.  Zool.  Mus.  Hamburg,  Vol.  43,  pp.  1-34. 

1931  Beitrage  zur  Planktonbevolkerung  der  Weddellsee  nach  den  Ergebnis- 
sen  der  Deutschen  Antarktischen  Expedition,  1911-1912.  Internat.  Rev. 
Hydrobriol  u.  Hydrograph.,  Vol.  25,  pp.  305-332,  1 text-fig. 

1932  Die  Hydromedusenfauna  des  Nordlichen  Eismeeres  . . . Arch.  f.  Natur- 
gesch.,  n.  s.,  Vol.  1,  pp.  435-514. 

1932a  Ubersicht  fiber  die  Hydromedusen  der  Arktis.  Fauna  Arctica,  Vol.  6, 
pp.  121-158. 

1935  Die  Besiedlung  des  Sfidatlantischen  Ozeans  mit  Hydromedusen.  TViss. 
Ergeb.  Deutschen  Atlantischen  Exped.  auf  dem  . . . “Meteor",  1925- 
1927,  Vol.  12,  Pt.  2,  pp.  32-100. 

1936  Systematische  Studien  zu  den  Trachylinae  der  Meteorexpedition.  Zool. 
Jahrb.  Abt.  Syst.  Vol.  69,  pp.  1-92. 

Totton,  A.  K. 

1936  Plankton  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions.  VII.  Siphon- 
ophora  taken  during  the  year  1931.  Zoologica.  New  York  Zool.  Soc., 
Vol.  21,  Pt.  4,  pp.  231-240. 

UCHIDA,  TOHRU. 

1927  Studies  on  Japanese  Hydromedusae.  1.  Anthomedusae.  Jour.  Fac.  Sci. 
Imp.  Univ.,  Tokyo,  Sect.  4,  Zool.,  Vol.  1,  Pt.  3,  pp.  145-241,  Pis.  10-11. 

1928  Studies  on  Japanese  Hydromedusae.  2.  Trachomedusae  and  Narcome- 
dusae. Japanese  Jour.  Zool.,  Vol.  2,  pp.  73-97. 

1929  Studies  on  the  Stauromedusae  and  Cubomedusae,  with  Special  Refer- 
ence to  their  Metamorphosis.  Japanese  Jour.  Zool.,  Vol.  2,  pp.  103-193, 
Pis.  3-5. 

1934  A Saemostome  Medusa  with  Some  Characters  of  Rhizostomae.  Proc. 
Imp.  Acad.,  Tokyo,  Vol.  10,  No.  10,  pp.  698-700. 

Vanhoffen,  Ernst. 

1902  Die  acraspeden  Medusen  der  deutschen  Tiefsee-Expedition  1898-1899. 
JFiss.  Ergeb.  deutschen  Tiefsee-  Exped.  auf  dem  Dampfer  “Valdivia”, 
1898-1899,  Vol.  3,  pp.  1-52,  Pis.  1-8. 

1902a  Die  craspedoten  Medusen  der  deutschen  Tiefsee-Expedition  1898-1899. 
1.  Trachymedusen.  Wiss.  Ergeb.  deutschen  Tiefsee-Exped.  auf  dem 
Dampfer  “ Valdivia ”,  1898-1899,  Vol.  3,  pp.  53-86,  Pis.  9-12. 

1908  Die  Lucernariden  und  Scyphomedusen.  Deutsche  Siidpolar  Exped.  1901- 
1903  . . . Vol.  10,  Zool.  Vol.  2,  pp.  25-49,  11  text-figs. 

1908a  Die  Narcomedusen.  Wiss.  Ergeb.  Deutschen  Tiefsee-Exped.  auf  dem 
Dampfer  “Valdivia” , 1898-1899,  Vol.  19,  Pt.  2,  pp.  43-74,  Pis.  7-9,  5 
text-figs. 

1911  Die  Anthomedusen  und  Leptomedusen  der  Deutschen  Tiefsee-Exped. 
1898-1899.  TPiss.  Ergeb.  Deutschen  Tiefsee-Exped.  auf  dem  Dampfer 
“Valdivia”,  1898-1899,  Vol.  19,  Pt.  5,  pp.  193-233,  PI.  22,  21  text-figs. 

1912  Die  Craspedoten  Medusen  der  Deutschen  Sfidpolar-Expedition. 
Deutsche  Siidpolar-Expedition  1901-1903.  Vol.  13,  Zool.  Vol.  5,  pp.  351- 
396,  PI.  24-25,  25  text-figs. 

1912a  Die  craspedoten  Medusen  des  “Vettor  Pisani.”  Zoologica,  Stuttgart, 
Vol.  26,  Pt.  67,  pp.  1-34,  2 pis.,  6 text-figs. 

1913  Uber  westindische  Medusen.  Zool.  Jahrb.  Supp.  Vol.  11,  pp.  413-432. 

Von  Lendenfeld,  R. 

1884  The  Scyphomedusae  of  the  Southern  Hemisphere.  Pt.  2,  Proc.  Linn. 
Soc.,  New  South  Wales,  Vol.  9,  pp.  242-249. 


APPENDIX1 


180 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


aiqBgpnaptuft 

»-t  03  — I 03  03  03  03  »-<  *~t  03  — < 03 

EliJive  Bigamy 

snaosajnj  'cqujoj  i 

- 

■eoiqi^oou  BiStejaj 

^Bjnoinaun  aqonurj 

lajjiAjtn  B|[<ny 

03  03  i-4  *— < CO  *— < 03  <-H  ->t<  O*  «-• 

■e^ound  aoq^isnejq 

■euiq^umAq 
’ ,enAqdiJ9(j 

»— < CO  03  -H  lO  03  CO  r-i  i-l  «-4  f-4  i-l 

i3tnaao[dBq  afonrex 

'BapqAlBQ 

eueouoiAux 
sqEidns.n?ni  eapqAjB^ 

■ejup  uqjueSaj  i 

- 

np|eaiiJ3  BJimiSay  ^ 

- - 

npiuaiij8  ujnuiaay 

« — < — ' «-H  03  03  03  H03  CO  CO  03  -r»< 

B9J1I0  uui8ay 

bsioui  snesiuqog  i 

<ds  salting 

gqupiOBOqcud 
' uiuoAia*) 

c|[XqdEj^3}  adouiq 

- 

reuipjcA  gaqdaj^qujj 

niiuqs[8  esajoi|Sjj 

03  i-<  ' 03 

nmaiiuira  gnajoqyg 

*-h  rH  «-H  -H  CO  — ' — ' — • 03  — < — < 03  —•  03 

^sna98 

aepiraauAqouJX 

B'JOSSOJQ  l 

- « 

cauuiuq  ujoggojQ  i 

amoicLty  BraaaoqojOQ 

03  i-< 

qaqoasq 

uoStoqoBjmja 

03  — « ■**  — ' 

nm^|9A 

^ai9no|Bdoq^j 

O «-i  03  ^ 1-H  «-H  03 

sinaa; 

uouoqdgoqd  seipnijQ 

Buupijoq  Eajonbay 

ranjqru 

^raaaoi^raojqQ 

^ds  sigdooAjBQ 

■BOIAUOU^  BJBI^OJ9;9g 

ujqru  BapuBj 

Boinoo  eapusj 

aqoia  uiqiAuieSnog 

uraojoqoip 

8isdo9ioa«2 

Net 

Number 

MCN00»HC3M^'«5«0C5'HN«,1'«0O0>*-i03W^»0000>O^e3WO00ON,<'»0ON00ai«’rn5O00 

^-,^^^03C303Cso3C303cococoeoeocoeo'^"tf"<f^’^^^r»o»o»o»o»o»o«o«o«c>o«oeococDr^r^t^t>»t» 

1938]  Bigeloiv:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  181 


1 This  tabic  does  not  include  a number  (less  than  10)  of  specimens  for  which  no  Net  Number  was  available  at  the  time  of  compiling  table. 


APPENDIX' 


Net 

Number 

l! 

j| 

f 

8 

1 
i £ 

E 

1 

| 

E 

1 

1 

|l 

J2 

1 

a 

8 

S 

•a 

.§1 

la 

|4 

lx 

13 

i£ 

I 

E 

3 

1 

5 

| 

1 

ll 

e s. 

E-* 

1 

S 

■a 

a 

1 

| 

4 

i 

1 

4 

g 

1 

% 

|l 

S1 

i 

1 

s 

1 

1 

i 

•g> 

< 

=5 

1 

1 

'I 

1 

1 

1 

| 

!i 

it 

t3 

.a 

s 

3 

I 

1 

| 

1 

Pcriphylla 

hyacinthina 

| 

1 

I 

| 

| 

1 

8 

| 

J 

1 

1 

3 

| 

1 

13 

IS 

17 

18 
21 
22 

23 

24 
28 
28 
29 

31 

32 

33 

34 

38 
3fl 

39 

41 

42 

43 

44 

49 

60 

61 

52 

53 

58 

62 

65 

66 
67 

69 

73 

74 

75 

76 
7B 

5 

1 

2 

4 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

4 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

l 

1 

3 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

2 

1 

l 

2 

2 

2 

2 

3 

3 

2 

1 

1 

3 

1 

3 

2 

5 

2 

3 

2 

2 

1 

3 
1 

1 

4 

2 

1 

• 

1 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

Thi.  table  doet  not  include  a number  (lean  than  10)  ot  .pecimeus  Tor  which  no  Not  Number 


i available  at  the  time  of  compiling  tablo. 


Zoologica:  Ne,o  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5  | ig38]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


182 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :5 


9iqegi)U9piufi 

■ejijne  «^|9jny 

- 

suaosajru  mjBJOj  i 

Boiqpoou 

'Bj'qnoinSun  aqonurj 

- 

lajjiAitM 

CO  *— l T-H  *-H  O 

abound  9oq)isrve^ 

euiq^uioeAq 
’ 'B[|^qdiJ9<j 

1-t  T-t  M-HiM-HTfNO  05  -*f  »-H  *-« 

Bai3U0|dBq  ByfomEj, 

'B9pq^JBQ 

~ 

BU'BDBUlAeX 
SljBldnSJBOI  T39pqXjBQ 

bjbjo  CTfnreSsj  j 

- 

iipimau3  BjnuiSsy  < 

<M  1-<  »-H 

upjurau3  ejnui39y 

y->  »— • »— • *-<  *-H  CO  r-<  CO  — < 

1291)19  Bui39y 

CS)  H OJ 

bsioui  snssiaqog  i 

,;ds  buiuuq 

sqepiosoqojd 
’ biuo^j9q 

T?jlAqdx?j)9)  adourj 

9BlAip[BA  S9qd9J)jIBJJ 

* 

raiuqB[3  sbsjoi[Bjj 

HinO  CM  CO  *-t  y->  r-i  Hf) 

ranaiiuiai  SB9J0i[eg 

(N'J'N  O CO  03  1-H  •— 1 T-t  r-l  CO  *-H  CN  CO  CO  hh 

^snu93 

9Bpira9UA'qOBJJi 

b- < CM  i-H 

B)OSSOJQ  l 

- 

B9aanjq  bjossojq  i 

ainoidA)  Bai9uoqo[03 

CO  CO  *-H  ’-H  l C<J 

q9qo9Bq 

uoioqoejuej 

ran)B[9A 

Bra9uo[Bdoq^j 

" 

sinus; 

Bouoqdsoqd  seipuqQ 

BUBpuop  B9ionb9y 

ranjqru 

Bai9no)Braoiq3 

^ds  sisdoo^BQ 

BUI^UOUB  BJBl^019)9g 

Bjqm  B9PUBJ 

BOIUOO  BSpUBJ 

sqoiu  Bi|[iAuiB3nog 

Brao^oqoip 

SISd09[0UB2 

Net 

Number 

CON0005O*HC0'}|O5O'-'NC0't>C«0NC0NaiON00'-IC0O'-ll0cON^NN00O5i-lu:O)t000'H'»J'00-H 

CDOtD-ONNNNN00  03  05  O5O5  05  05  05'}'i0iC^>5O®N»OOOO(NC0'^,^'J,'^»0i0i0C0!0C0M00O 
<M<M(M(M(M0qC^C^<M<M(M(MC^C^CM<MC^C0e0COC0C0C0C0C0>0<-^'«^Tr^J'TtiTrrf'Tti-^T}»Tf’<f'^''^^'^''Tj’»O 

1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


183 


Net 

Number 

ij 
1 3 

| 

•p 

8 

J 
( 2 

e 

2 

1 

| 

| 

g 

o 

Chroraatonema 

rubrum 

1 

i 

| 

8 

j 

| 

.11 

li 
« " 

U 

Pi 

Coloboncma  typicuml 

8 

| 

5 

I 

3 

6 

1 

'L 

| 3 

1 E 

Halicreas  minimum 

Halicreas  glabrum 

J 

J 

1 

1 

Liriopo  tctrapbylla 

1 Gcryonin 

proboscidalis 

i 

1 

8 

j 

| 

8 

f 

i 

■i 

e 

| 

i 

■& 

e 

I 

M 

J 

1 

1 

if 

IS 

5 

8 

3 

CJ 

j Tamoyn  haploncma  | 

ouqiuumXq  I 
’ unfcpluaj 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

| 

3 

I 

§ 

| Pelagia  noctiluca  || 

E 

1 

g 

3 

1 

3 

1 

'1 

263 

267 

268 

269 

270 

271 

273 

274 

279 

280 

291 

292 

293 

294 

295 
290 
297 
343 
357 

359 

360 
362 
368 
371 
383 

400 

401 

405 

406 
427 
434 
442 

447 

448 

449 
451 
455 
459 

468 

481 

484 

488 

1 

* 

3 

3 

1 

2 

■ 

1 

2 

17 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

3 

2 

2 

3 

3 

1 

1 

5 

0 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

i 

i 

1 

2 

1 

I 

3 

1 

3 

2 

1 

1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

*7 

0 

4 

1 

11 

1 

3 

1 

2 

1 

1 

6 

' 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5  ( 19381  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


184  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 


a[qBgi^uapniQ 

- - « - - c,~ 

■KjUTve  Biqajny 

SU80S3JIU  'BqBJOJ  l 

'Bonji^oou  BiSujaj 

B^'ejnainSun  aqonuiq 

<N 

raijiAAn  ^||oiy 

NCOH  Tf<  O*  CM  ^ t-H  f-H  1-H  »-H  — 1 CM  1-i 

BjTqound  aoqjisnB^ 

~ 

BuiqjuiO'BXq 

'C|[Aqdija<j 

~ ~ ~ N 

Enrauo]di3q 

BapqXjBQ 

- 

BUeDBOL/LBX 

sijBidnsjBui  -eapq^JBQ 

lutqo  Bq^ireSaa  < 

iipix}oiij8  BmuiSay  i 

iip|tjaiij2  BjnuiSay 

co  -*f  >— < co  »~t  hn  <m <m  coi  cm  o coco  oa 

Bai^io  Baiaay 

- « - 

■bsioui  snssinqog  i 

- - 

,:ds  BuiunQ 

sqBpiosoqojd 

uiuoXjaQ 

'B||AqdTJj^a^  adoiiiq 

aBiAippjA  saqdaj^qeji 

- 

ranjqB[3  sBajoipry 

ramniuira  sBajoqBjj 

' *-H  «-<  CO  -I  •— 1 

^snua8 

aBpiraauXqoejj, 

■*f  1-H 

B^OSSOJQ  i 

T-<  *-t  »-H  CO 

Bauuiuq  bjossojq  i 

CM  .-I 

innoicLty  BinauoqoiOQ 

- 

qa^oa-eq 

uoSoqaBjUBj 

»-•  T-<  CM  >-<  CM  CM  1-tiM  y-t 

um;'B|aA 

'eraauoi'Bdoq^j 

— CM  <M  f-H 

smua; 

Bouoqdsoqd  SBipuqo 

BQBpuop  uajonbay 

miuqiu 

Baiauo^BraojqQ 

;ds  sisdoOiCjaj 

boiAuoub  BiBi^oja;aH 

Bjqnj  BapuBj 

boiuoo  BapuBj 

- 

aqoiu  BiuiAureSnog 

Braojoqoip 

sisdoa[ouB2 

Net 

Number 

h-Q0'H(NC0'l(>flN0005O'HiNC0'J,‘0C0N00O}NC0'^N00®C0i0eO^C0OiHiNC0'C>0cDN00O»-iNC0 

(N(NCOCOCOCOCOCOCOCO'fl,'^Tt'T}i'<j<'tl<^^Tji'^»OU3U5»C»CiCcDcOcOr^NOOOOOOOOOOOOCOOOOOC»OSa)® 

OCOCD©«OcDCOO®OCDcOeDcOcOcOOCOcDcOcDcDCDCDcDCOCOcDcO®CDOcOcDCDcOtOCOcDCO«OOcOCO 

1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


185 


Net 

Number 

|| 

¥ 

'£ 

i 

8 

1 

| 

2 

J 

| 

J 

a 

1 

11 

2 

| 

a 

1 

8 

1 

a-| 
■s  | 

o 

ii 

■jg 

N 

1! 

§ 

j 

1 

| 

8 

| 

f 

6 

5 

i 

| 

f] 

£ 

| 

a 

'a 

1 

a 

s 

•i 

1 

S 

J 

.a 

| 

ii 

d®1 

1 

i 

8 

1 

§ 

| 

1 

■E 

s 

1 

I 

ll 

!l 

5 

3 

3 

o 

Tamoya  haploncma 

Pcripbylla 

hyacinthina 

Nausithoc  punctata 

1 

3 

f 

8 

| 

p-i 

3 

1 
1 

2 

J 

3 

3 

1 

3 

i 

C27 

G28 

631 

632 

633 

634 

635 

637 

638 

639 

640 

642 

643 

645 

646 

647 

648 

649 

652 

653 

654 

657 

658 

659 
663 
665 
G60 
674 
670 
680 
681 
682 

683 

684 

685 
086 

687 

688 

690 

691 

692 

693 

■ 

2 

2 

1 

2 
2 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

l 

i 

i 

i 

3 

• 

l 

3 

1 

1 

l 

i 

i 

i 

1 

l 

3 

1 

3 

1 

2 

2 

2 

3 

2 

6 

6 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

1 

1 
1 

2 

1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 
3 

1 

2 

Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5  I 1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


186  ' Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 


9jqtjgiiu9pmjq 

- - ~ 

bjurb  Eijiajny 

snaosajiu  ci]cjoj  i 

caiqpoon 

BjTqnoinSnn  gqomnx 

t:||0}y 

Oi  CM  CM  CM  CM  *->  lO  *-»  CM  Tt*  i-H  r— ( T— < i-H  CM  CM  i— < CM 

tf^onnd  goqiisne^ 

T?aiq^niotiAq 
‘ uqXqdugj 

CM  — i CM  CM  i-H  CM  T-t  i— l CO  i—i  -h  CO  i— 1 CM  i— I r-uC  CO  CM  CO 

uai9uojdBq  'B^oraux 

BSpqXJBQ 

BaBOBOI^BX 

sqBidnsj'Bni  BapqXiBQ 

bjbjo  < 

- 

iip[Btnij8  ttjnniSay  < 

np|BraiJ3  BjnuiSay 

CO  CM  T-I  Tji  i-H  i-l  i-H  CO  1-1  CO 

TOJJIO  EUI83V 

CM  CM  i-l 

bsiooi  snssiuqog  i 

- 

^ds  buiuiiq 

sqepiosoqojd 

BIU0i£J9£) 

BqXqdBj^a^  adourq 

9BiArpjBA  saqdaj^qBg 

CM  i-H  y-t 

nnuqBja  SB3JoqEji 

umraiuiai  segjoqBjj 

~ ~ - 

^snuaS 

8BpiraauAqoBJX 

CM  CM  r-<  CM  CM  i-l 

B^OSSOJQ  i 

i-l  CM  i-l  CM  i—t 

B9UUIUq  B^OSSOJQ  £ 

CM  i-H 

ranoicLfy  BraguoqojOQ 

CM  CM  i-H 

i[9q09Bq 

noSoqoB^nBx 

- - 

ran;B|9A 

Bra9nojBdoqH 

- 

smu9^ 

uouoqdsoqd  sBipaqo 

Bu^pijop  B9ionb9y 

unuqiu 

BD39no^Braojq3 

<ds  SISdOOAj'BQ 

UtILftlOUB  BaBI}Oa3}3JJ 

Bjqnj  B9pnBx 

- 

BOIQOO  B9piTBX 

9qom  BiqiAureSnog 

- 

uaicqoqoip 

sisdo9p’uB2 

Net 

Number 

iCONOHCMCOifiCNOOOO'HiONOOOiiHCOiJ'iOtDNOOaiO'HitiflCDNOOCJO'-iCMcO^iCOOOeM^ 
Ot0®r«NNNNNSNN00CC00  00WIX)0S0)Cl©05a  05  05OOOOOOOOHHHHHHMHN(N 
l^t^t^.t>.t>-t^t^t>-t^t>.t^t>.t^t>.t^.t-t^t^t-t^t^t^.t^t^.f>it^OOOOOOOOOOOOCOOOOOOOOOCOOOC»ooOOOOOO 

1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


187 


C"$ 


(M 


r- 1 


(M 


•H  1-H  rHrt'-f  MC^ 


iO  <M  1— ( <M  (M 


<M 


<M 


<M  CO  *—*  ION 


<M 


CO 


i0'-0N05OHNif350N00ONM’fU5t00005O'-'0)»'},l0'0N00O'-'C')M^,»0ON000JTjiU3O*iMC0>CONO'-iNC0'},i0<0N 
MNNNMP5COmMMCO'^,tTl'rf'a'^'f'fl'iCiniOiOlO»OlC>CiO«D^COcOCiCDtDCDy5cDNNOOOOOOOOOOCl0000503aO»0505C305 
CO  GC  00  00  CO  00  00  CO  GO  QO  OO  CO  OO  QO  CO  0O  CO  CO  GO  CO  CO  00  QO  GO  OO  00  OO  00  OO  OO  OO  00  00  OO  GO  OO  00  00  GO  OO  GO  00  OO  00  OO  GO  OO  OO  OO  00  CO  OO  OO  OO  OO 


Net 

Number 

.=  1 
as 
gjj 
s-M 
s 

| 

•a 

| 

8 

J 

1 

5 

1 

Heterotiara  anonyma 

1 

Chromatonema 

rubrum 

1 

i 

1 

Olimlias  phosphorica 

I 

II 

fj 

Colobonema  typicum 

8 

| 

2 

i 

1 Trachyncmidae 
genus? 

| 

i 

$ 

1 

a 

5 

jj 

1 

=3 

€ 

1 

1 

i 

■i  i 

! 

a 

1 

1 

£ 

1 

■< 

| 

'§ 

§ 

J 

| 

1 

j 

1 

!! 

II 

S3 

3 

S 

3 

| 

I 

I 

a 

=s| 

g-S1 

Oh 

| 

1 

1 

J 

3 

1 

| 

•s> 

.a 

3 

% 

2 

| 

| 

1 

705 

766 

767 

770 

771 

772 

773 

774 

775 

777 

778 

779 

780 

781 
785 

787 

788 

789 
701 

793 

794 

795 

796 

797 

798 

799 

800 
801 

804 

805 

806 

807 

808 

809 

810 
811 
812 

813 

814 

815 

816 
818 
822 
824 

1 

■ 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

2 

2 

i 

4 

1 

1 

1 

2 

■ 

2 

1 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

3 

1 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

3 

1 

1 

2 

1 

5 

3 

3 

1 

9 

2 

2 

2 

5 

1 

2 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

186  * Zoological  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5  j 1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930  187 


188  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5 


3R^S!?naP!an 

r-l  — < CO  „ t 1— « ^ < 

eqpjny 

8U99S9JIU  l 

uorqi^oou  ciSttpj 

B^inomSun  gqonuiq 

reqiA&ii  Bn°»y 

1-H  <M  1-H  -Hoi  r-  — 

B^ound  goq^isnu^ 

- 

■euiq^uiOBAq 

■eqAqdugj 

1-H  CO  1-H  1-H  (M  cqj  t-h  1-h  .-h  HHHN  Nh  Ofl  i-h  i-h 

,eai9aojdBq  BAoraBj, 

•e^vye  'egpqX.reQ 

naucmuLtax 
sq'Bidnsj'eai  ugpqA.reQ 

^h  ifooo 

1-H  1-H  CO 

'BJiqO  Bq^U1339<J  ^ 

npi^niuS  ^jnniasy  i 

1-H  03 

iippeuiu3  ,Bjnni39y 

CO 

*B9J^I0  ^Ul39y 

“ 

■bsioui  snssiaqog  i 

jds  BuiunQ 

sipipiosoqojd 
‘ 'BlU0AJ9{) 

B[[Aqdrai3i  adouiq; 

geiAipjEA  S9qd9j^iit?u 

- 

ratuqEjS  src3JOi[i3]j 

CO 

umraiurai  s^joqujj 

T-H  1-H  HNNH  CO  1-h  1-h  1-h  CO  ZO 

,;snu93 

9Bpira9uAqoBJX 

CO  T-H 

'B^OSSOJQ  i 

- - - 

B9uuruq  «;ossojq  i 

canDicU}  ^raauoqo[03 

- - 

q9qo9Bq 

uoSoqoejuu^ 

1-H  1-H  CO 

um^^A 

uamuopJdoq'y; 

<M  CS  1-H  1-1  1-H 

smu9^ 

uouoqdsoqd  eiqpuqo 

■euEpiJog  B9ionb9y 

uiruqru 

■eni9uo)Baiojq3 

- 

,;ds  sisdoo^Q 

03 

UU1<£U0UU  ‘BJBi;OJ9^9H 

- 

'Bjqiu  lB9pu,B<j 

Boinoo  BgpuBjj 

aqotu  BiiiiAuiGanoa 

- 

Brao^oqoip 

sisdo9[0UB2 

- 

Net 

Number 

CCO3lNC0>CiC«0NC005iH(N»0C000O5O'H(NC0iCN0005OMC0>ONOJiH^i0iNC0H}iNC005O’HNC0ai 
Q0)OOO'HrHiHrHrHC'JWM05(N«C0MC0C0C0««C0il<iJ,'ti}''fiJ'iCi0‘0cDC0C0fflC0C0NNNNN 
OOOO  0303C50i05050505030jroO‘-0>05010'-OjC3  0Gi05  0'-C»a3  0i050505  0<®®0505ffi0305  0i050>©003 

1938] 


Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


189 


C<l  <M  ^ CO 

os  cn  o>  g os 

l>  <U  0)  CO"  OJ  on-  O tO 

o »— i ooj  o •— i 

2 ^ 
3 3 3 3 3 *3  =3  « =3  " 
2>-5i72'-s(y2'-5COl/3cQO 


3 3 

02  *-3 


Net 

Number 

.=  1 
l\ 

1 

1 

S 

a 

1 

2 

2 

f 

£ 

1 

EE 

I 

1 

II 

i 2 

1 

i 

§ 

< 

Olindiaa  phosphorica 
tenuis 

l 

!i 

sj 

IP 

£ 

1 

1 

| 

& 

2 

| 

| 

J 

a 

Is 

I1 

a 

.1 

1 

a 

5 

! 

3 

3 

4 

0 

8 

£ 

a 

t 

2 

§. 

3 

ll 

I* 

I 

.1 

8 

1 

J 

2 

1 

i 

| 

I 

1 

fee 

I 

■< 

| 

§ 

p. 

Is 
“ 2 

ll 

o 

3 

■3 

2 

I 

| 

I 

I 

a 

ll 

Oh 

| 

| 

1 

£ 

| 

3 

1 

i 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

s 

1 

3 

I 

| 

s 

898 

899 

902 

903 
905 

915 

916 

918 

919 

921 

922 
925 

928 

929 

930 

931 

932 

933 

937 

938 

939 

940 

942 

943 
945 
947 
949 
951 
954 
959 

962 

963 

964 

967 

968 

969 

970 

971 

977 

978 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

I 

3 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

1 

2 
2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

3 

6 

5 

3 

l 

I 

3 

1 

2 

l 

18 

66 

1 

3 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

Surfaco 
June  25.  1929 
Surface 

July  II,  1929  1 

Surface 

July  23,  1929 

Surfaco 

Sept.  8,  1930 

Surface 

Oct.  16.  1930 

Surface 

June  8,  1929 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :5  f 1938]  Bigelow:  Medusae  Taken  During  1929  and  1930 


Nichols:  Classification  of  Carp-like  Fishes 


191 


6. 

Classification  of  Carp-Like  Fishes. 

J.  T.  Nichols. 

The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History. 

In  attempting  to  classify  the  carp-like  fishes  (Eventognathi  or  Cypri- 
noidea)  it  is  generally  assumed  that  the  suckers  (Catostomidae)  are  the 
most  primitive  group.  This  is  thoroughly  in  accord  with  the  writer’s  views 
and  he  surmises  that  it  is  among  ancestral  bottom-feeding  suckers  that  these 
fishes  lost  oral  dentition,  the  lack  of  which  is  an  outstanding  feature  with 
them  all.  Suckers  are  closely  related  to  the  true  carps  (Cyprinidae) , but 
their  recognition  as  a full  family  is  at  least  convenient  in  this  case.  The 
comparatively  few  genera  of  suckers  need  no  further  subdivision.  It  may 
be  noted  that  the  northern  genus  Catostomus  represents  generalized  or 
standardized  forms,  and  that  the  single  peculiar  genus  Myxocyprinus  in 
China  resembles  one  of  the  specialized  genera  in  the  lower  Mississippi 
Valley.  These  peculiar  suckers  also  have  characters  which  are  perhaps 
ancestral;  and  it  may  be  questioned  whether  resemblance  between  Chinese 
and  American  genera  is  relationship  or  parallelism,  whether  these  are 
specializations  of  more  standard  northern  suckers  or  of  some  different 
ancestral  forms. 

More  different  in  the  main  from  the  true  carps  are  the  loaches,  a large 
varied  group  with  characters  generally  spoken  of  as  degenerate.  It  is  the 
writer’s  view  that  the  loaches  are  a recent  specialization  from  the  carps, 
perhaps  more  or  less  polyphylatic,  but  this  may  not  be  generally  accepted. 
Classification  of  the  loaches  is  very  difficult.  Two  families  are  usually 
recognized,  true  loaches  (Cobitidae),  and  flattened  bottom  forms  (Homa- 
lopteridae).  In  the  latter  a series  from  Crossostoma  to  Gastromyzon  is 
rather  clear,  its  relationship  to  the  others  of  which  Lepturichthys  seems  to 
be  a terminal  specialization,  obscure.  It  is  probably  impossible  to  divide 
the  loaches  on  the  basis  of  structural  resemblances  without  violating  rela- 
tionships. To  place  the  emphasis  on  apparent  relationships  the  writer 
would  recognize  a single  family  for  them  (Cobitidae),  consider  the  obvious 
groups  or  series  central  for  four  subfamilies,  and  tentatively  place  aberrant 
forms  wherever  they  seem  to  fit  least  badly. 

Cobitis  and  related  genera  (Cobitinae)  are  more  or  less  elongate  with 
erectile  spine  under  the  eye,  a peculiar  un-carp-like  specialization.  As  their 
ancestors  must  have  been  without  it  we  have  some  justification  in  consider- 
ing Misgurnus,  a widely  distributed,  abundant  and  somewhat  aberrant  eel- 
like genus  which  lacks  the  spine  and  otherwise  resembles  Cobitis  in  various 
ways,  a primitive  member  of  this  series.  Botia  and  related  genera  might 
be  secondarily  free-swimming  standardized  forms  derived  from  Cobitis. 

Nemaclieilus,  Barbatula  and  related  genera  lacking  the  erectile  spine 
may  be  grouped  in  a subfamily  (Nemacheilinae)  very  abundant  in  High 
Asia,  also  with  a claim,  which  we  do  not  recognize,  to  the  genus  Misgurnus. 


192 


Zoologica:  Neto  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :6 


The  aberrant  carp-like  genus  Gobiobotia,  for  lack  of  a better  place,  may 
go  as  a primitive  Homalopterin ; and  the  Crossostoma-Gastromyzon  series 
stand  as  a subfamily  (Gastromyzoninae) . 

The  true  carps  are  the  most  abundant  family  in  this  group,  and  repre- 
sented by  many  genera.  Their  relationships  to  one  another  are  sufficiently 
close  and  sufficiently  confused  to  make  their  subdivision  hardly  worthwhile, 
but  it  is  certainly  a convenience.  In  so  doing  one  may  also  give  tangible 
expression  to  one’s  views  on  relationships.  The  carps  are  most  differen- 
tiated in  Asia;  all  the  main  groups  are  represented  and  most  divergent  there. 

Weber  and  de  Beaufort  (Vol.  Ill,  1916)  recognize  3 subfamilies  for 
Indo-Australian  forms,  Abramidinae,  Rasborinae  and  Cyprininae,  of  which 
the  last  is  the  most  composite.  Turning  to  the  list  of  species  from  China 
on  the  Asiatic  continent  we  find  various  genera  which  fit  into  these  sub- 
families without  much  question,  and  others  with  northern  affinities  which 
do  not.  The  keeled  breams,  Megalobrama,  Hemiculter,  Erythroculter  and 
so  forth  obviously  go  into  the  Abramidinae,  Opsariichthys  which  is  I’elated 
to  Rasbora  in  the  Rasborinae,  Cyprinus  and  Barbus  and  their  allies  in  the 
Cyprininae.  One  hesitates  to  place  Leuciscus  and  Phoxinus,  which  with 
their  allies  are  widely  distributed  northward,  in  the  Rasborinae  and  may 
recognize  a superficially  somewhat  parallel  subfamily  (Leuciscinae)  for 
these.  Though  probably  derived  from  this  group  Schizothorax  and  allied 
genera,  abundant  in  High  Asia,  are  sufficiently  numerous  and  distinct  to 
recognize  as  another  subfamily  (Schizothoracinae) . The  peculiar  transverse 
mouth  of  the  abundant  Chinese  genus  Xenocypris  is  presumedly  derived 
from  a more  or  less  sucking  mouth  of  bottom  feeding  forms,  and  this  is 
perhaps  the  secondarily  actively  free  swimming  terminal  member  of  a 
series  (Chondrostomatinae)  that  runs  from  Labeo,  through  Varicorhinus 
to  it,  with  various  aberrant  side  specializations.  The  little  fishes  belonging 
to  Rhodeus  and  allied  genera  form  a uniform  well  differentiated  group 
(Rhodeinae).  The  whole  series  of  genera  allied  to  Gobio,  showing  grada- 
tion from  standard  free-swimming  to  specialized  bottom  forms,  may  con- 
veniently be  considered  a subfamily  (Gobioninae) , perhaps  the  most  recently 
evolved,  now  replacing  in  the  Chinese  center  of  specialization  earlier  Chon- 
drostomatinae, just  as  these  or  some  other  bottom  Cyprinids  presumably 
replaced  the  Catostomidae. 

The  standardized  Leuciscinae  may  be  the  oldest  group.  Native  American 
carps  belong  to  it,  with  the  exception  of  Notemigonus,  an  Abramidin.  The 
Abramidinae  and  Schizothoracinae  seem  to  be  specializations  of  the  Leucis- 
cinae. Whence  the  Rhodeinae  came  is  uncertain  but  one  may  suspect  from 
the  Abramidinae.  The  Cyprininae  are  now  flowering  in  southern  Asia, 
and  Cyprinus  itself  is  possibly  a relict  from  an  earlier  period  of  differentia- 
tion in  this  group.  The  Gobioninae  may  be  derived  from  the  Cyprininae. 

There  are  plenty  of  Cyprinid  genera,  aberrant  or  otherwise,  to  be 
assigned  to  this  or  that  of  these  eight  divisions  according  to  one’s  idea  of 
their  relationships,  but  these  eight  as  outlined  can  be  considered  to  cover 
the  group  in  all  parts  of  the  world,  and  afford  a basis  for  discussion  of 
the  relationships  of  any  genus. 


Tentative  Subdivision  of  the  Cyprinoidea. 

Suborder  Cyprinoidea.  Carp-like  fishes. 

Family  Catostomidae.  Suckers. 

Family  Cyprinidae.  True  Carps. 

(1)  Subfamily  Leuciscinae — Leuciscus,  Phoxinus,  Richardsonius, 
Hybopsis,  etc. 


1938] 


Nichols:  Classification  of  Carp-like  Fishes 


193 


(2)  Subfamily  Rasborinae  — Rasbora,  Danio,  Opsariichthys, 
Barilius,  etc. 

(3)  Subfamily  Abramidinae.  Abramis,  Erythroculter,  Hemiculter, 
Notemigonus,  etc. 

(4)  Subfamily  Schizothoracinae.  Schizothorax,  Schizopygopsis, 
Diptychus,  etc. 

(5)  Subfamily  Rhodeinae.  Rhodens,  Pseudoperilampus,  Acantho- 
rhodeus,  etc. 

(6)  Subfamily  Cyprininae.  Cyprinus,  Osteochilus,  Barbus,  Labeo, 
etc. 

(7)  Subfamily  Chondrostomatinae.  (Labeo),  Varicorhinus,  Chon- 
dr  ostoma,  Xenocypris,  etc. 

(8)  Subfamily  Gobioninae.  Gnathopogon,  Gobio,  Pseudogobio, 
Saurogobio,  etc. 

Family  Cobitidae.  Loaches. 

(1)  Subfamily  Cobitinae.  Misgurnus,  Cobitis,  Botia,  etc. 

(2)  Subfamily  Nemacheilinae.  (Misgurnus) , Nemacheilus,  Bar- 
batula,  etc. 

(3)  Subfamily  Homalopterinae.  (Gobiobotia) , Homaloptera,  Lep- 
turiclithys,  etc. 

(4)  Subfamily  Gastromyzoninae.  Crossostoma,  Hemimyzon,  Gas- 
tromyzon,  etc. 

Dr.  Y.  T.  Chu  has  recently  (1935,  Biol.  Bull.  St.  John’s  Univ.,  Shanghai, 
No.  2,  p.  ix)  listed  Chinese  genera  of  Cyprinidae  in  eight  subfamilies.  He 
does  not  differentiate  Rasborinae  from  Leuciscinae,  and  recognizes  a sub- 
family for  the  aberrant  genus  Hypophthalmichthys  of  uncertain  relation- 
ships. There  are  presumably  other  aberrant  Cyprinid  genera  which  might 
be  so  treated.  He  confines  the  Chondrostomatinae  to  genera  close  to 
Xenocypris,  leaving  less  terminal  ones  in  the  Cyprininae,  a more  conserva- 
tive procedure  especially  as  the  phylaticy  of  the  series  from  Labeo  to 
Xenocypris  is  assumed  rather  than  proved.  Also  the  name  Acheilognathinae 
is  used  by  him  in  place  of  Rhodeinae. 


Nigrelli  & Smith:  Tissue  Response  to  Parasite 


195 


7. 

Tissue  Responses  of  Cyprinodon  variegatus  to  the  Myxosporidian 
Parasite,  Myxobolus  lintoni  Gurley. 

Ross  F.  Nigrelli 

New  York  Aquarium 

& 

G.  M.  Smith 

Department  of  Anatomy,  Yale  School  of  Medicine, 
and  New  York  Aquarium. 

(Plates  I-VII). 

Introduction. 

Little  is  known  about  the  histopathology  of  myxosporidian  infections. 
The  majority  of  these  protozoan  parasites  are  found  in  the  gall-bladder 
and  urinary  bladder  of  fresh  water  and  marine  fishes  but  cause  little  or  no 
damage  to  the  host  tissues.  However,  when  the  infections  become  localized 
in  the  epithelium  of  the  intestine,  in  the  liver,  or  in  other  organs,  a con- 
siderable number  of  pathological  changes  may  occur.  If  the  fins,  skin  or  mus- 
culature are  invaded,  the  resulting  lesions  are  very  conspicuous,  producing  in 
many  instances  tumor-like  growths. 

One  of  the  best  known  myxosporidian  tumors  is  found  on  the  European 
Barbel,  Barbus  barbus,  and  is  called  the  “boil  disease”  or  “Beulenkrankheit.” 
This  condition  is  caused  by  Myxobolus  pfeifferi  Thelohan  and  has  been 
reported  for  other  European  fresh  water  fishes  such  as  Barbus  fluviatilis  and 
B.  plebejus.  Keysellitz  (1908)  has  found  tumors  on  these  fish  varying  in  size 
from  that  of  a millet  grain  to  one  as  big  as  a hen’s  egg,  and  as  many  as 
twenty-three  small  ones  on  a single  fish.  According  to  Doflein  (1928),  the 
causative  agent  may  be  found  in  all  organs  of  the  body.  When  the  muscula- 
ture becomes  infected  tumor-like  growths  are  formed.  Microscopically,  such 
structures  show  a hypertrophy  of  the  “interfibrillares”  connective  tissues, 
Myxosporidia,  degenerated  muscle,  and  a secondary  infection  with  bacteria. 

Fiebiger  and  Kahls  (1929)  have  also  described  the  “boil  disease”  from 
certain  Austrian  fishes.  In  the  Barbel,  the  typical  nodules  were  found,  show- 
ing the  characteristic  pathological  picture.  However,  a similar  infection 
in  the  Giant  Perch  ( Lucioperca  sandra ) resulted  in  no  pathological  changes, 
except  for  some  vascular  congestion. 

Plehn  (1910)  reported  that  Myxobolus  piriformis  Thelohan  produced  in 
a European  minnow,  Leuciscus,  growths  which  resemble  a papillary  adeno- 
cystoma, but  which  were  not  regarded  as  true  tumors.  These  are  usually 
found  in  the  tail  and  histologically  show  folds  of  the  epithelium  of  the  skin 
with  the  parasites  within  the  folds. 

Hahn  (1913)  described  tumors  from  the  common  killifish,  Fundulus 


196 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :7 


heteroclitus , resulting  from  an  infection  of  Myxobolus  musculi  = M.  funduli 
Kudo,  1919.  The  lesions,  according  to  Hahn,  are  caused  primarily  by  worm 
parasites  or  mechanical  injury  and  only  secondarily  do  they  become  infected 
with  Myxosporidia.  Microscopically,  the  tumors  show  an  infiltration  with 
small  lymphocytes  and  a preponderance  of  vascular  tissue  and  erythrocytes. 
Numerous  non-staining  granules  of  unknown  nature  and  origin  were  found 
in  infected  epidermis,  in  connective  tissue  of  the  dermis  and  in  atrophied 
muscle  fibers.  The  latter  were  completely  degenerated,  showing  but  few 
fibers  with  normal  fibrillae  and  cross  striations.  The  entire  tumor  mass 
eventually  becomes  infected  with  bacteria.  According  to  Hahn,  the  vegeta- 
tive stages  of  the  parasite  are  intracellular  and  found  within  the  muscle 
fibers. 

Kudo  (1929,  1931)  has  noted  tumor  formation  due  to  Myxobolus  and 
related  Myxosporidia  in  several  species  of  fresh  water  fishes.  One  form, 
Myxobolus  notatus  Mavor,  is  found  in  the  sub-dermal  connective  tissues  of 
the  tail  muscles  of  the  blunt-nosed  minnow,  Pimephales  notatus  ( Hyborhyn - 
chus  notatus)  and  Leuciscus  rutilis.  The  tumor  enclosing  a trophozoite 
reaches  a diameter  of  7 mm.  Histologically,  the  growths  are  composed  of 
large  cysts  which  are  surrounded  by  the  sub-dermal  cells  of  the  hosts.  The 
tissue  around  the  parasite  becomes  so  highly  changed  that  it  appears  as  an 
“epithelium.”  The  tissues  not  in  contact  with  the  cysts  show  no  cytological 
changes.  However,  such  areas  have  an  abundance  of  blood  capillaries.  The 
nuclei  of  the  cells  in  direct  contact  with  the  cysts  become  hypertrophied; 
the  cells  stain  deeper  than  the  normal  cells,  and  lack  the  distinct  membrane 
characteristic  of  epithelial  cells.  They  vary  considerably  in  size  and  shape, 
being  columnar,  club-shaped  or  irregularly  rounded,  and  do  not  form  a 
continuous  layer.  Kudo  believed  that  these  “epithelial  cells”  are  modified 
connective  tissue  cells.  Similar  pathological  pictures  were  described  by 
Mavor  (1916)  and  Debaisieux  (1925). 

There  are  other  genera  of  Myxosporidia  that  produce  definite  responses 
of  host  tissues.  In  some  cases  such  infections  result  in  a complete  degenera- 
tion of  the  invaded  areas,  often  causing  the  death  of  the  fish;  other  infec- 
tions result  in  a simple  hypertrophy  of  the  connective  tissue  cells,  enclosing 
the  spores  or  vegetative  stages  of  the  parasite  (Plehn,  1905;  Kudo,  1919, 
1926;  Davis,  1923;  Dunkerly,  1925). 

Recently,  the  writers  have  encountered  several  specimens  of  Cyprinodon 
variegatus  Lacepede  with  large  myxosporidial  tumors  of  the  body.  This 
has  afforded  the  opportunity  of  making  a study  of  various  histological 
responses  of  the  host  resulting  from  such  an  infection.  It  is  recalled  that 
this  disease  was  first  noted  by  Linton  (1889)  in  sheepshead  minnows  caught 
at  Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts.  Gurley  (1891)  definitely  allocated  the  para- 
site causing  the  tumors  and  named  it  Myxobolus  lintoni.  In  1894,  he  gave 
a more  detailed  description  of  the  species.  Similar  parasites  and  tumors 
were  observed  by  Hahn  (1913). 

Material  and  Methods. 

The  infected  Cyprinodon  were  caught  at  Sandy  Hook  Bay,  New  Jersey, 
and  the  Connecticut  River.  The  tissues  were  fixed  in  10%  neutral  formalin, 
and  embedded  in  paraffin  after  decalcification.  These  were  then  sectioned 
at  3-10  y thick  and  stained  with  Giemsa’s,  Wright’s,  hematoxylin-eosin  and 
Masson’s  special  connective  tissue  stain.  An  examination  of  the  spores  in 
these  preparations  showed  them  to  be  Myxobolus  lintoni  Gurley. 

Description  of  the  Parasites. 

Vegetative  Stages.  Histological  examination  of  the  tumors  revealed 
many  stages  in  the  development  of  the  parasite.  Although  an  occasional 


1938] 


Nigrelli  & Smith:  Tissue  Response  to  Parasite 


197 


spore  was  found  free  in  the  lumen  of  the  intestine,  there  was  no  evidence  of 
sporoplasm  or  multiplicative  stages  in  the  gut-epithelium.  The  tumors  them- 
selves are  composed  of  enormous  numbers  of  spores  and  vegetative  parasitic 
masses  surrounded  by  host  tissues  (Figs.  4-7).  These  masses  vary  as  to 
number.  Thus  in  certain  flat  tumors  (Fig.  1),  there  are  only  a few  present 
and  more  or  less  widely  scattered.  In  more  rounded  pendant  types  of  tumors 
(Figs.  2 & 3),  the  vegetative  groups  are  numerous  but  are  situated  mostly 
at  the  base  or  the  periphery  near  the  body  wall.  The  parasites  towards  the 
surface  of  the  growths  are  usually  fully  developed  spores.  The  size  and 
shape  of  the  circumscribed  vegetative  masses  also  vary  a great  deal.  A few 
are  spherical,  measuring  from  30  g to  66  p in  diameter.  The  majority  of 
them,  however,  are  oval  and  range  in  size  from  18  x 29  to  62  x 128.7  p. 

Each  vegetative  mass  demonstrates  clearly  various  stages  in  sporogene- 
sis.  In  the  larger  groups  may  be  found  sporonts  with  two,  four  and  six 
nuclei  and  minute  basophilic  staining  granules  in  the  cytoplasm,  or  young 
spores  with  a nucleus  at  the  base  of  each  polar  capsule  and  two  or  four 
nuclei  in  the  sporoplasm,  depending  upon  whether  or  not  the  shell  is  developed. 
In  these  young  spores,  the  polar  filaments  are  in  the  form  of  basophilic 
granules  aligned  spirally.  Scattered  throughout  the  vegetative  masses  may 
be  found  nuclei  of  different  forms  together  with  degenerating  host  tissue. 
Other  large  circumscribed  masses  contain  only  matured  spores  (Fig.  7), 
many  with  but  a single  nucleus  in  the  sporoplasm.  In  smaller  masses  (10-15  p 
in  diameter)  trophozoites  with  many  nuclei  are  present.  According  to  Kudo, 
and  other  investigators,  the  larger  of  the  nuclei  are  vegetative,  while  the 
smaller  become  generative  nuclei.  The  latter  are  “budded”  off  with  a small 
bit  of  cytoplasm  and  become  the  sporonts.  The  nucleus  of  the  sporont  divides 
several  times  until,  in  this  species  at  least,  six  nuclei  are  produced.  Such 
cells  have  basophilic  granules  in  the  cytoplasm.  These  may  be  discarded 
nucleoli;  a phenomenon  previously  reported  for  other  Myxosporidia  (see 
Kudo,  1926).  In  so  far  as  could  be  determined,  the  sporont  at  this  stage 
becomes  transformed  into  the  definitive  spore.  It  is  assumed  that  in  the 
final  stage  of  sporogenesis  two  nuclei  are  used  in  the  formation  of  the  polar 
capsule,  two  for  the  shell  and  two  remain  as  the  nuclei  of  the  sporoplasm. 
Therefore,  unlike  the  majority  of  forms  belonging  to  the  genus  Myxobolus 
the  pansporoblast  of  M.  lintoni  gives  rise  to  a single  spore,  instead  of  two  or 
more. 

Spore.  The  present  observations,  on  the  fully  developed  spores  agree 
with  those  of  Linton  and  Gurley,  except  in  size.  The  measurements  given 
by  Gurley  and  also  used  by  Kudo  (1919)  are  as  follows:  length  13.9  p ; 
breadth  11  p ; thickness  8 p.  Certain  of  our  measurements  agree  with  those 
given  by  Gurley,  but  the  average  size,  for  over  200  spores  taken  at  random, 
is  slightly  smaller  than  those  given  above,  measuring  10.96  x 7.47  x 6.46  p. 
The  extreme  measurements  are  as  follows:  length  9.13  to  14.9;  width  4.98  to 
10.40;  thickness  4.15  to  7.47  /x.  However,  the  smaller  size  recorded  here  for 
Myxobolus  lintoni  is  no  doubt  partly  due  to  shrinkage  following  fixation. 

The  spores  (Fig.  7)  are  oval  in  shape.  The  shell  is  more  or  less  thick 
and  with  a fairly  marked  sutural  ridge.  There  are  two  polar  capsules,  having 
an  average  measurement  of  4 p in  length  and  2 p in  width.  The  sporoplasm 
usually  contains  two  nuclei  and  a large  “iodinophilous”  vacuole.  The  more 
mature  spores  have  but  a single  nucleus  which,  according  to  Kudo  (1931), 
is  the  result  of  a fusion  of  the  two  nuclei  of  the  younger  spore. 

With  Masson’s  stain  the  shell,  capsule  and  vacuole  of  the  sporoplasm 
are  colored  green ; the  polar  filaments  and  sporoplasm  are  colored  red ; while 
the  nuclei  take  on  a deeper  red  color. 

Although  the  organisms  are  usually  localized  in  the  tumor  mass,  an 
occasional  spore  was  found  in  the  lumen  of  the  intestine,  on  the  gills,  in 
the  liver,  kidney  and  external  to  the  meninges  of  the  cord.  None  of  these 
spores  resemble  the  species  reported  by  Davis  (1917)  as  Myxobolus 


198 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :7 


capsulatus  which  was  found  in  the  visceral  connective  tissues  of  Cyprinodon 
from  Beaufort,  North  Carolina.  According  to  this  investigator,  M. 
capsulatus  is  present  in  a state  of  diffuse  infiltration,  and  differs  from  M. 
lintoni  mainly  in  having  longer  polar  capsules,  almost  two-thirds  the  length 
of  the  spore. 


Description  of  the  Tumors. 

As  was  previously  mentioned,  two  types  of  tumors  were  encountered. 
Fig.  1 shows  the  flattened  type  with  the  overlying  skin  slightly  ulcerating 
and  pigmented.  Figs.  2 and  3 demonstrate  the  large  pendant  types  of 
tumors.  The  fish  in  Fig.  2 measures  about  4 cm.  in  length.  The  tumor  is 
situated  on  the  dorsal  surface  of  the  body  and  measures  8 x 10  mm.,  the 
upper  border  extending  above  the  surface  of  the  body.  The  fish  in  Fig.  3 is 
4.24  cm.  in  length  and  the  tumor,  irregular  in  shape,  measures  approximately 
1 x 1.2  cm.  This  is  situated  behind  the  left  pectoral  fin  and  extends  dorsally 
for  about  one-half  the  body  width.  The  ventral  border  of  the  tumor  reaches 
about  4 mm.  below  the  surface  of  the  body.  In  the  last  two  fish,  the  skin 
appears  to  be  sloughed  off,  while  the  tumor  of  the  fish  in  Fig.  3,  is  beginning 
to  show  signs  of  ulceration. 

In  most  of  the  microscopic  preparations  the  loss  of  the  epithelium  cov- 
ering the  surface  of  the  growths  is  apparent.  The  external  boundary  of 
the  tumors  consists  of  a single  layer  of  elongated  flattened  melanophores 
(Fig.  6,  p).  These  pigment  cells  are  of  the  usual  corial  type  found  in 
this  fish,  normally  lying  under  the  transparent  epithelium.  It  is  immedi- 
ately below  this  narrow  outer  layer  of  pigment  cells  that  characteristic 
changes  of  host  tissue  occur  (Figs.  4-15).  The  diffusely  scattered  spores 
and  vegetative  masses  of  varying  sizes  are  embedded  in  a meshwork  of 
delicate  fibroblasts  of  the  host.  As  was  previously  mentioned,  the  diffuse 
arrangement  of  the  spores  is  more  frequently  encountered  near  the  free 
surface  of  the  tumor,  whereas  the  circumscribed  collections  of  spores  or 
vegetative  stages  are  more  numerous  near  the  base  or  the  mesial  aspect 
of  the  tumor.  It  is  in  the  deeper  parts  of  the  growth  that  the  fibroblastic 
response  of  the  host  is  most  marked.  Many  delicate  spindle-shaped,  ir- 
regular or  often  stellate  forms  of  fibroblasts  are  loosely  arranged  between 
the  parasitic  masses  forming  a stroma  of  the  tumor  which  separates  and 
supports  the  circumscribed  collections  of  the  organisms  (Fig.  6,  fi).  It  is 
only  rarely  that  the  connective  tissue  stroma  takes  on  a denser  appearance 
(Fig.  8).  Lying  in  the  stroma  are  occasional  polynuclear  cells,  lymphocytes, 
eosinophiles  and  mast  cells.  This  leucocytic  inflammatory  reaction  is  a very 
mild  one,  and  there  is  practically  no  evidence  of  necrosis.  The  connective 
tissue  stroma  contains  also  a few  melanophores  which  perhaps  have  migrated 
into  the  mass  of  Myxosporidia  (Figs.  8 and  10,  p).  Bacteria,  bacilli  and  a 
few  cocci,  may  be  seen  near  the  surface  of  some  of  the  myxosporidial 
tumors.  These  doubtless  represent  a secondary  infection. 

In  most  microscopic  fields  there  co-exists  with  the  fibrous  stroma,  a 
serous  or  albuminous  substance  staining  faintly  pinkish  with  eosin  in 
which  Myxosporidia  lie  scattered  (Fig.  9). 

The  vascular  supply  of  myxosporidial  growths  consists  of  a very  fine 
network  of  capillary  blood  vessels,  very  often  only  wide  enough  to  permit 
the  passage  of  a single  file  of  red  blood  cells.  In  some  fields  a few 
erythrocytes  lie  in  the  tissue  spaces  outside  the  lumen  of  the  capillaries. 
These  cells  are  normal  in  appearance,  and  indicate  a mild  form  of  extra- 
vasation of  blood.  No  hemorrhages  of  importance  were  noted.  A few 
small  nerve  trunks  were  found  in  areas  involved  in  myxosporidial  infection, 
but  these  did  not  seem  to  be  affected  by  the  diseased  conditions. 

The  tumors  of  Cyprinodon  are  not  encapsulated,  as  an  irregular  infiltra- 
tion by  the  organisms  into  adjacent  structures  occurs  along  the  margins  of 


1938] 


Nigrelli  & Smith:  Tissue  Response  to  Parasite 


199 


these  growths.  Myxosporidia  gain  access  to  the  deeper  lying  muscular 
structure  by  penetrating  through  the  relatively  dense  external  limiting 
fascia  which  normally  separates  muscles  from  the  layers  of  the  skin  (Fig. 
10,  f).  The  fibers  of  this  fascial  structure  become  fragmented  and  split  in 
the  longitudinal  direction  into  finer  bundles  between  which  Myxosporidia  in 
small  groups  are  found.  Organisms  which  collect  below  the  level  of  the 
external  limiting  membrane  spread  out  along  the  fibrous  septa  which  sepa- 
rates muscle  bundles.  This  streaming  infiltration  along  intermuscular  septa 
is  shown  in  Fig.  11.  In  some  places  the  vegetative  masses  were  found  well 
organized  in  the  fibrous  tissue  separating  groups  of  muscle  fibers  (Fig.  12). 
Where  the  diseased  process  is  advanced,  atrophy,  loss  of  striation,  hyalin 
degeneration  and  necrosis  of  muscle  fibers  may  occur  (Fig.  12,  n).  In  the 
sections  examined  we  have  found  no  evidence  of  spores  or  vegetative  stages 
lying  directly  in  the  individual  muscle  cells  as  reported  by  Hahn  (1913). 

In  microscopic  sections  prepared  in  the  region  of  the  body  cavity  of 
one  fish,  there  were  found  certain  areas  where  a penetration  of  organisms 
through  the  pigmented  peritoneal  lining  had  occurred  (Fig.  13).  This  was 
usually  only  a slight  involvement  of  the  peritoneum,  and  interestingly 
enough,  was  not  associated  with  an  inflammatory  exudate.  The  normally 
densely  massed  pigmented  cells  of  the  peritoneum  were  disarranged  so  that 
groups  of  melanophores  were  seen  separated  by  collections  of  Myxosporidia. 
Although  this  penetration  of  myxosporidial  tumor  had  occurred  imme- 
diately in  the  region  of  the  liver,  an  infiltration  of  liver  substance  had  not 
taken  place  to  any  extent,  as  only  a very  few  spores  could  be  identified  in 
the  liver  tissue. 

Partial  destruction  of  scales  in  the  diseased  regions  was  not  uncommon. 
Bony  tissue  and  cartilage,  when  lying  in  a myxosporidial  growth,  were 
found  surrounded  and  infiltrated  by  spores  (Fig.  14).  This  was  particu- 
larly true  in  the  case  of  spongy  bone,  where  the  meshes  between  the  bony 
spicules  were  filled  with  varying  numbers  of  spores  (Fig.  15).  Here  and 
there  the  bony  spicules  appeared  degenerated  and  necrotic. 

Discussion. 

Microscopic  tissue  changes  caused  by  myxosporidial  infections  have 
been  described  by  previous  investigators,  and  have  been  referred  to  in  the 
introduction.  The  present  studies  are  restricted  to  material  obtained  from 
Sandy  Hook  Bay,  New  Jersey,  and  the  mouth  of  the  Connecticut  River. 
These  fish  were  caught  during  August  and  the  early  part  of  September, 
1937,  in  the  two  locations  about  100  miles  apart.  The  lesions  in  the  fish 
from  both  localities  were  similarly  advanced  and  much  the  same  in  char- 
acter and  distribution.  It  became  apparent,  after  microscopic  studies,  that 
there  was  a mild  general  infestation  in  each  fish  examined,  as  indicated 
by  the  occurrence  of  spores  in  the  liver,  kidney,  on  the  gills  and  in  the 
lumen  of  the  intestine.  In  these  organs  no  histological  lesions  were  evoked. 
Contrasting  with  this,  the  skin  and  subcutaneous  lesions  were  most  ex- 
tensive, as  there  resulted  in  these  regions  relatively  large  tumor  masses. 
Here  the  Myxosporidia  were  seen  as  diffuse  spores  or  as  circumscribed 
vegetative  masses  in  various  phases  of  development  and  embedded  in  a 
delicate  meshwork  of  fibroblastic  tissue  varying  somewhat  in  density.  This 
meshwork  of  fibroblasts,  with  its  rich  capillary  blood  supply,  represents  one 
of  the  major  responses  of  the  host  to  the  myxosporidial  infection.  Asso- 
ciated with  it  there  occurs  a wide-spread  exudate  which  stains  a light 
pinkish  color  with  eosin  and  thus  resembles  a serous  or  albuminous  mate- 
rial. In  certain  areas,  the  exudate  exists  as  a homogenous  substance  in 
which  spores  and  vegetative  masses  lie  free.  In  other  places,  it  is  granular 
or  appears  to  contain  fine  threads  not  unlike  fibrin.  The  exudate  accom- 
panies fibrous  tissue  organization.  It  is  least  conspicuous  where  the  fibro- 


200 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :7 


blastic  network  is  most  highly  developed  and  condensed.  The  fact  that  the 
exudate  is  present  at  sites  without  fibroblastic  development  suggests  the 
possibility  that  it  precedes  the  fibrous  organization  of  the  tumors. 

The  spread  of  the  myxosporidial  parasites  from  the  subcutaneous 
region  to  the  muscles  of  the  body  wall  is  accomplished  by  their  passing 
between  the  loosened  fibers  of  the  external  limiting  fascia.  Intermuscular 
fibrous  septa  form  pathways  for  the  parasites  to  reach  the  deep  seated 
musculature  and  the  peritoneum.  In  one  specimen  a limited  involvement 
of  the  peritoneum  had  occurred. 

Myxosporidia  infecting  intermuscular  fascia  may  result  in  the  de- 
generation of  muscle  tissue  itself.  This  is  evidenced  by  the  loss  of  striation, 
hyalinization  and  atrophy  of  the  fibers. 

Bony  and  cartilaginous  structures,  interposed  in  the  spread  of  the 
infection,  are  surrounded  and  infiltrated  by  spores  and  may  become  necrotic. 

A secondary  invasion  of  bacteria,  which  frequently  occurs,  may  con- 
tribute to  bring  about  destruction  of  various  tissues  infected  by  Myxos- 
poridia. 


Summary. 

1.  Several  specimens  of  Cyprinodon  variegatus  were  found  showing 
tumors  caused  by  the  Myxosporidian,  Myxobolus  lintoni  Gurley. 

2.  Certain  stages  in  sporogenesis  are  reported  and  the  morphology  of 
the  spore  redescribed. 

3.  In  so  far  as  could  be  determined,  the  sporont  of  M.  lintoni  gives  rise 
to  a single  spore. 

4.  This  sporont  has  six  nuclei  and  several  discarded  nucleoli  in  the 
cytoplasm.  As  in  many  Myxosporidia,  two  of  the  nuclei  probably  give 
rise  to  the  polar  capsules,  two  to  the  shell  and  two  remain  as  the  nuclei 
of  the  sporoplasm. 

5.  With  Masson’s  special  connective  tissue  stain  the  shell,  capsule  and 
vacuole  of  the  sporoplasm  are  colored  green ; the  polar  filaments  and  sporo- 
plasm are  colored  red;  while  the  nuclei  take  on  a deeper  red  color. 

6.  Various  histological  changes  in  the  host  tissue  due  to  the  infection 
with  Myxobolus  lintoni  are  described. 


References. 

Davis,  H.  S. 

1917.  The  Myxosporidia  of  the  Beaufort  Region.  Bull.  Bur.  Fish.  35:  201-243. 
1923.  A new  Myxosporidian  Parasite,  the  Cause  of  “Wormy”  Halibut.  Re- 
port of  U.  S.  Comm.  Fish.  Appendix  VIII,  pp.  1-5. 

Debaisieux,  P. 

1925.  Etudes  sur  les  myxosporidies,  III.  Myxobolus  notatus  Mavor.  Arch. 
Zool.  Exper.  et  Gen.  Tome  64. 

Doflein,  F. 

1928.  Lehrbuch  der  Protozoenkunde.  Part  II.  pp.  440-1262.  Verlag  von 
Gustav  Fischer.  Jena. 

Dunkerly,  J.  S. 

1925.  The  Development  and  Relationships  of  the  Myxosporidia.  Quart.  J. 
Micr.  Sci.  Vol.  69. 

Fiebiger,  J.  and  Kahls,  0. 

1929.  Ueber  Masseninfektion  mit  Myxosporidien  bei  Fischen.  Zentralbl 
Bakt.  I Abt.  Orig.  113:  8-19. 


1938] 


Nigrelli  & Smith:  Tissue  Response  to  Parasite 


201 


Gurley,  R.  R. 

1891.  On  the  Classification  of  the  Myxosporidia,  a Group  of  Protozoan  Para- 
sites Infecting  Fish.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm.  11:  407-420. 

1894.  The  Myxosporidia,  or  Psorosperms  of  Fishes,  and  the  Epidemics  Pro- 
duced by  Them.  U.  S.  Comm,  of  Fish  and  Fisheries.  Report  for  1892. 
pp.  65-304. 

Hahn,  C.  W. 

1913.  Sporozoon  Parasites  of  Certain  Fishes  in  the  Vicinity  of  Woods  Hole, 
Massachusetts.  Bull.  Bur.  Fish.  33:  193-214. 

Keysselitz,  G. 

1908.  Die  Entwicklung  von  Myxobolus  pfeifferi.  Arch.  f.  Protist.  11:  252-308. 
Kudo,  R. 

1919.  Studies  on  Myxosporidia.  III.  Biol.  Mongr.  5:  1-265. 

1926.  On  Myxosoma  catostomi  Kudo  1923,  a Myxosporodian  Parasite  of  the 
Sucker,  Catostomus  commersonii.  Arch.  f.  Protist.  56:  90-115. 

1929.  Histozoic  Myxosporidia  Found  in  Fresh-water  Fishes  of  Illinois, 
U.  S.  A.  Arch.  f.  Protist.  65 : 364-378. 

1931.  Handbook  of  Protozoology.  451  pp.  *C.  C.  Thomas,  Publ.  Baltimore,  Md. 
Linton,  E. 

1889.  On  Certain  Wart-like  Excrescences  Occurring  on  the  Short  Minnow, 
Cyprinodon  variegatus,  Due  to  Psorosperms.  Bull.  U.  S.  Fish  Comm. 
9:  99-102. 

Mavor,  J.  W. 

1916.  Studies  on  the  Protozoan  Parasites  of  Georgian  Bay.  Trans.  Roy.  Soc. 
Canada.  Ser.  4,  10:  63-74. 

Plehn,  M. 

1905.  Ueber  die  Drehkrankheit  der  Salmoniden  (Lentospora  cerebralis) 
(Hofer).  Arch.  f.  Protist.  5:  145-166. 

1910.  Die  Pathogene  Bedeutung  der  Myxoboliden  fur  Fische.  Sitz.  Ges. 
Morph,  u.  Physiol.  Miinchen,  26:  20-27. 


202 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Live  Cyprinodon  taken  at  Sandy  Hook,  N.  J.  This  fish  shows  flat  myxo- 
sporidian  tumors. 

Figs.  2 & 3.  Cyprinodon  with  large  pendant  types  of  myxosporidian  tumors. 
Killed  and  fixed  specimens  taken  from  Sandy  Hook. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  4.  Low  power  photomicrograph  through  the  myxosporidian  tumor  of  the 
skin,  x 40.  Stained  with  Giemsa. 

Fig.  5.  A slightly  higher  magnification  of  the  tumor  shown  in  Fig.  4.  Note  the 
vegetative  parasitic  masses  in  the  deeper  parts  of  the  tumor,  x 75. 

Plate  III. 

• 

Fig.  6.  Tumor  showing  circumscribed  vegetative  parasites  and  spores.  Note  the 
fine  network  of  fibroblasts  (fi)  between  the  parasitic  masses.  Outer  sur- 
face lined  by  pigment  cells  (p) ; the  epidermis  has  disappeared.  About 
x 250. 

Fig.  7.  Fully  developed  spores  of  Myxobolus  lintoni.  x 1500. 

Plate  IV. 

Fig.  8.  Fibroblastic  respose  of  the  host  supporting  vegetative,  parasitic  masses. 

Note  that  in  this  section  the  fibroblasts  (fi)  are  denser  than  those  shown 
in  Fig.  6.  A large  single  melanophore  (p)  with  its  dendrites  may  be  seen 
in  the  center.  No  albuminous  exudate  present,  x 375. 

Fig.  9.  Section  showing  a single  vegetative  mass  with  developing  spores.  A few 
solitary  spores  are  present  in  the  adjacent  albuminous  or  serous  exudate. 

- About  x 500. 

Plate  V. 

Fig.  10.  Low  power  photomicrograph  showing  extension  of  the  myxosporidian 
parasites  through  the  loosened  external  limiting  fascia  (f).  (m),  muscle 
layer,  (p),  pigment  cells,  x 90. 

Fig.  11.  Section  showing  spores  scattered  along  the  intermuscular  fibrous  tissue, 
(m)  muscle,  x 375. 

Plate  VI. 

Fig.  12.  Section  showing  infiltration  of  intermuscular  connective  tissue  by  the 
myxosporidian  parasites,  (n)  necrotic  muscle  fibers,  x 90. 

Fig.  13.  Fragmentation  of  the  pigmented  peritoneum  by  Myxosporidia.  About 
x 375. 

Plate  VII. 

Fig.  14.  Myxosporidia  surrounding  bony  spicules  (b).  x 100. 

Fig.  15.  Infiltration  of  spongy  bone  by  the  spores  of  Myxobolus  lintoni.  x 750. 


NIGRELL!  & SMITH. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  3. 


TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARIEGATUS  TO  THE  MYXOSPORIDI AN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTONI  GURLEY. 


NIGRELLI  & SMITH. 


PLATE  II. 


iMdlWSfifl 


•0.1  "?• 


A V-'. 


» Serf 


FIG.  5. 


TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARI EGATUS  TO  THE  MYXOSPORI  Dl  AN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTONI  GURLEY. 


N1GRELLI  & SMITH. 


PLATE  III. 


FIG.  7. 

TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARI EGATUS  TO  THE  M YXOSPORI Dl AN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTON1  GURLEY. 


NIGRELLI  & SMITH. 


PLATE  IV. 


FIG.  8. 


TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARI EGATUS  TO  THE  MYXOSPORIDIAN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTON1  GURLEY. 


NIGRELLI  a SMITH. 


PLATE  V. 


FIG.  10. 


«> 


FIG.  11. 

TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARI EGATUS  TO  THE  MYXOSPORIDIAN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTONI  GURLEY. 


NIGRELLI  & SMITH. 


PLATE  VI. 


FIG.  12. 


TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARIEGATUS  TO  THE  MYXOSPORIDIAN 
PARASITE.  MYXOBOLUS  LINTONI  GURLEY. 


NIGRELLI  a SMITH. 


PLATE  VII. 


ms 


'Vi  AT-lS 
iit'y 

$&§$$ 
|>*fr 
3 • - » 


Hi 


FIG.  15. 


TISSUE  RESPONSES  OF  CYPRINODON  VARI EGATUS  TO  THE  MYX0SP0R1DIAN 
PARASITE,  MYXOBOLUS  LINTONI  GURLEY. 


Cox  & Coates:  Electric  Eel  Tissue 


203 


8. 

Electrical  Characteristics  of  the  Electric  Tissue  of  the  Electric  Eel, 
Electrophorus  electric  us  (Linnaeus). 

R.  T.  Cox 

Department  of  Physics,  New  York  University, 

University  Heights 

& 

C.  W.  Coates 

New  York  Aquarium 
(Plate  I;  Text-figures  1 & 2). 

A previous  paper1  by  the  present  authors  jointly  with  L.  P.  Granath 
described  observations  made  with  a cathode-ray  oscillograph  of  the  dis- 
charge of  the  electric  eel.  In  that  work  two  types  of  discharge,  the  “major” 
and  “minor,”  characterized  by  repeatable  peak  voltages,  were  identified  as 
the  discharges  of  the  large  organs  and  the  organs  of  Sachs  respectively. 
Other  discharges,  of  indefinite  peak  voltage  but  identified  by  their  occur- 
rence only  between  a minor  and  an  ensuing  train  of  major  discharges,  were 
assigned  to  a third  type  under  the  name  “intermediate,”  and  were  tentatively 
associated  with  the  organs  of  Hunter.  Observations  made  with  external 
electrodes  on  the  skin  of  the  eel  out  of  water  showed  that  the  major  dis- 
charge runs  along  the  large  organ  as  a pulse  of  potential  gradient  at  a 
speed  of  the  order  of  500  to  1,000  meters  per  second. 

On  the  completion  of  this  part  of  the  work  it  was  considered  advisable 
to  carry  the  research  for  a time  to  a place  where  the  electric  eel  was 
plentiful  and  could  be  observed  in  the  wild  state  or  at  least  under  nearly 
natural  conditions.  Accordingly  an  expedition  was  organized  by  New  York 
University  and  the  New  York  Aquarium.  Its  expenses  were  met  by  a 
generous  grant  from  the  Doctor  Simon  Baruch  Foundation,  for  which  we 
wish  to  express  our  gratitude.  To  the  Goeldi  Museum  of  Para,  Brazil,  we 
are  indebted  for  a laboratory  and  facilities  for  the  work,  and  to  Dr.  Hag- 
mann  and  Snhr.  Pira  of  the  staff  of  the  Museum  we  are  particularly 
obliged  for  their  constant  kind  assistance.  Specimens  for  observation  were 
supplied  by  Mr.  Karl  Griem.  He  and  his  associates,  Messrs.  Hory,  and 
Weber,  were  most  helpful.  We  should  like  to  give  our  thanks  also  to  the 
Brazilian  Embassy  in  Washington,  to  Mr.  George  E.  Seltzer  and  Mr. 
Reginald  S.  Kazanjian  of  the  U.  S.  Consulate  at  Para,  and  to  Dr.  Eladio 
da  Cruz  Lima  and  a number  of  other  residents  of  Para  for  facilitating 
arrangements  for  the  expedition.  To  Mr.  Robert  S.  Mathews  and  Miss 
Shelby  Shackelford,  members  of  the  expedition,  we  are  indebted  for  a 
great  deal  of  varied  assistance. 

1 Coates,  C.  W.,  R.  T.  Cox  & L.  P.  Granath.  The  Electric  Discharge  of  the  Electric  Eel, 
Electrophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  Zoologica,  Vol.  XXII  (Part  1),  No.  1,  April  5,  1937. 


204 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :8 


The  observations  made  at  the  Goeldi  Museum  confirmed  in  general 
and  extended  those  made  earlier  in  New  York.  A report  of  them  has  been 
published  in  abstract.2  In  the  present  paper  some  of  these  observations 
are  combined  with  others  made  later  at  the  New  York  Aquarium.  Whereas 
our  first  observations  at  the  Aquarium  were  almost  wholly  concerned  with 
the  variation  in  the  external  voltage  along  the  electric  organs  at  different 
instants  during  the  discharge,  the  present  work  undertakes  to  determine 
some  of  the  electrical  characteristics  of  the  electric  tissue  and  to  make 
some  inferences  concerning  the  process  of  electric  discharge. 

It  has  long  been  surmised  that  the  electric  organ  of  electric  fish  is  in 
some  sort  a battery  of  cells.  Thus  Faraday  remarked  of  the  torpedo: 

“In  concluding  this  summary  of  the  powers  of  torpedinal  electricity,  I cannot 
refrain  from  pointing  out  the  enormous  absolute  quantity  of  electricity  which  the 
animal  must  put  in  circulation  at  each  effort.  . . . These  circumstances  indicate 
that  the  torpedo  has  power  (in  the  way  probably  that  Cavendish  describes)  to 
continue  the  evolution  for  a sensible  time,  so  that  its  successive  discharges  rather 
resemble  those  of  a voltaic  arrangement,  intermitting  in  its  action,  than  those  of  a 
Leyden  apparatus,  charged  and  discharged  many  times  in  succession.”3 

There  is  a variety  of  other  evidence  pointing  to  the  same  conclusion. 
The  possibility  of  generation  of  electromotive  force  by  the  conversion  of 
mechanical  energy,  as  in  an  electrostatic  or  an  electromagnetic  generator, 
is  precluded  by  the  absence  of  any  structure  in  the  organ  suitable  to  this 
conversion  and  by  the  observation  that  no  muscular  action  is  required 
for  the  discharge.  The  possibility  that  the  discharge  is  generated  by  the 
thermoelectric  effect  is  similarly  ruled  out  by  the  lack  of  suitable  structure 
and  of  the  requisite  differences  in  temperature. 

There  remain  to  be  considered  only  electrochemical  processes,  and  their 
consideration  here  is  rendered  reasonable  by  the  fact  that  the  minute 
electrical  effects  observed  in  nerve  and  muscle  tissue  have  been  convincingly 
ascribed  by  recent  research  to  such  processes.  The  voltages  observed  in 
nerves  and  muscles  have  been  identified  as  concentration  potentials.  The 
theory  of  their  production  is  that  the  cell  membrane  is  permeable  to  one 
ion  of  an  electrolyte  and  impermeable  to  the  other  ion.  If  then  the  electro- 
lyte is  present  in  different  concentrations  on  the  two  sides  of  the  membrane, 
there  will  be  a migration  through  the  cell  membrane  of  the  ions  to  which 
it  is  permeable.  The  region  on  the  side  of  lower  concentration  will  thus 
acquire  an  electric  charge  of  the  sign  of  these  ions  and  an  equal  charge 
of  the  opposite  sign  will  be  left  on  the  other  side.  The  ions  which  pass  through 
the  membrane  will  hinder  the  migration  of  other  like  ions  by  the  electro- 
static repulsion  they  exert  on  charges  of  their  own  sign,  and  in  time  an 
equilibrium  will  be  reached  characterized  by  a definite  voltage  across  the 
membrane.  This  voltage  is  determined  by  the  chemical  valence  of  the 
diffusing  ion,  by  the  relative  concentrations  of  the  electrolyte  on  the  two 
sides  of  the  membrane,  and  by  the  temperature.  These  conditions  being 
known,  the  voltage  is  calculable.  In  the  case  of  the  boundary  of  a nerve 
fiber,  the  relative  concentration  of  potassium  on  the  inside  and  outside  of 
the  fiber,  as  found  by  Fenn,  Cobb,  Hegnauer  and  Marsh,4  would  give  rise 
at  room  temperature  to  a concentration  voltage  of  118  millivolts.  This  is 
much  greater  than  the  voltages  actually  observed  in  experiments  with 
nerve,  but  the  means  of  observation  are  not  such  as  to  reveal  the  maximum 
voltage. 

The  voltages  observed  in  the  discharge  of  the  electric  eel,  on  the  other 
hand,  are  very  much  greater  than  the  concentration  voltage  found  across 
any  single  membrane.  We  have  observed  voltages  as  high  as  500  between 
the  anterior  and  posterior  ends  of  the  large  electric  organ,  and  voltages 

2 Cox,  R.  T.  & R.  S.  Mathews.  Journal  of  Applied  Physics , Feb.,  1938.  (Abstract). 

3 Experimental  Researches  in  Electricity.  Everyman’s  Library  Edition,  London,  1922.  Page  26. 

4 Cited  by  Erlanger  & Gasser.  Electrical  Signs  of  Nervous  Activity,  Philadelphia,  1937. 
Page  134. 


1938] 


Cox  & Coates:  Electric  Eel  Tissue 


205 


above  300  are  common.  Such  voltages  as  these  must  be  the  sums  of  many 
concentration  voltages.  Each  unit  or  electroplax  of  the  electric  tissue  is 
divided  by  a vertical  partition,  and  we  suppose  this  pai'tition  is  the  boundary 
across  which  the  concentration  voltage  is  developed,  so  that  each  electro- 
plax is  a single  concentration  cell.  E.  du  Bois-Reymond5  gives  the  dimension 
of  one  electroplax  of  the  large  organ  in  the  direction  in  which  the  electric 
polarity  is  developed  as  0.1  mm.,  so  that  there  would  be  about  100  cells  to 
the  centimeter.  If  the  cells  in  line  along  the  organ  are  all  joined  in  series, 
the  electromotive  force  (which  is  the  voltage  measured  when  no  appreciable 
current  is  flowing)  of  the  whole  series  is  the  sum  of  the  electromotive  forces 
of  the  separate  cells.  With  100  cells  to  the  centimeter  and  100  millivolts  to 
the  cell,  an  electromotive  force  of  10  volts  would  be  developed  in  one 
centimeter.  This  is  approximately  what  we  measure  near  the  anterior 
end  of  the  large  organs. 

It  seems  then  altogether  probable  that  the  electromotive  force  of  the 
electric  organs  is  that  of  a series  of  cells,  in  each  of  which  there  is  de- 
veloped a concentration  voltage  by  the  selective  diffusion  of  ions  through 
a boundary.  The  cells  in  any  cross-section  of  the  electric  organ  we  suppose 
act  in  parallel.  The  electromotive  force  is  not  thereby  increased,  since  a 
number  of  similar  cells  in  parallel  have  only  the  electromotive  force  of  each 
one  of  them.  But  when  a parallel  array  of  cells  is  joined  to  an  external 
conductor,  so  that  a circuit  is  made  and  a current  flows,  the  total  current  in 
the  external  conductor  is  the  sum  of  the  currents  in  the  cells.  Thus  we  suppose 
that  the  parallel  action  of  the  cells  of  the  electric  organ  serves  to  produce 
the  large  currents  (of  the  order  of  one  ampere  at  maximum)  which  we 
have  observed. 

We  have  now  to  account  for  the  release  of  energy  by  the  electric  organ 
in  brief  transient  discharges.  Evidently  the  electromotive  forces  of  the  cells 
and  their  connection  in  series  cannot  both  be  maintained  all  the  time,  for  if 
it  were  so,  there  would  not  be  transient  discharges,  but  at  all  times  an  elec- 
tric current  would  flow  in  the  water  around  the  fish.  Hence  either  the  elec- 
tromotive forces  of  the  cells,  or  their  connection  in  series,  or  possibly  both, 
must  be  transient,  existing  only  for  the  duration  of  the  discharge. 

The  structure  of  the  electric  tissue  seems  adapted  to  a transient  series 
connection  rather  than  to  a transient  generation  of  electromotive  force. 
The  discharge  at  any  part  of  the  organ  is  evidently  governed  by  the  nerve 
branching  to  that  part,  for  transsection  of  the  nerve  cord  stops  the  progress 
of  the  discharge  down  the  organ  at  the  point  of  transsection.  On  the  other 
hand,  transsection  of  the  electric  organ  without  injury  to  the  nerve  cord 
makes  no  appreciable  difference  in  either  the  open  circuit  voltage  or  the 
rate  of  propagation  of  the  discharge.  There  is  an  ending  of  a nerve  fiber 
on  the  posterior  face  of  each  cell  of  the  electric  tissue.  A fall  of  the 
resistance  of  the  sheath  of  a nerve  fiber  during  the  nervous  impulse  is  well 
established.  It  seems  reasonable  to  suppose  that,  except  during  the  dis- 
charge of  the  organ,  cells  adjacent  along  its  axis  are  effectively  insulated 
from  each  other  by  the  high  resistance  of  the  nerve  sheath,  but  when  a 
nervous  impulse  reaches  the  end  of  a fiber  the  drop  in  this  resistance  makes 
an  electrical  connection  between  the  posterior  (electrically  negative)  face 
of  each  cell  and  the  anterior  (electrically  positive)  face  of  the  cell  next 
behind,  so  that  there  follows  a progressive  connection  in  series  of  the 
cells  all  along  the  organ. 

Several  observations  on  the  discharge  give  qualitative  evidence  that 
the  discharge  is  produced  by  a transient  connection  in  series  of  cells  with 
constant  electromotive  force  rather  than  by  the  transient  generation  of 
electromotive  force  in  cells  permanently  connected  in  series.  If  two  points 
on  the  large  organ  are  connected  to  the  oscillograph  with  the  circuit  open, 

5 du  Bois-Reymond.  Emil.  Dr.  Carl  Sachs  Untersuehungen  am  Zitteraal  Gymnotus  electricus, 
Leipsig,  1881.  Page  49. 


206 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :8 


so  that  no  current  flows  except  that  which  makes  a circuit  within  the 
tissue  of  the  eel,  one  of  the  most  striking  features  of  the  oscillographic 
trace  is  the  uniformity  of  the  peak  voltage  throughout  a long  series  of 
discharges.  In  this  case,  since  the  current  flowing  in  the  electric  tissue 
must  be  rather  small,  the  observed  peak  voltage  must  be  near  the  full 
electromotive  force.  Thus  it  appears  that  the  electromotive  force,  at  least 
at  the  peak,  is  nearly  the  same  in  successive  discharges.  But  when  a circuit 
is  made  through  the  organ  and  an  external  conductor  of  low  resistance,  so 
that  a large  current  flows,  the  peak  voltages  are  observed  to  be  less  uniform. 
In  this  case,  the  peak  voltage  is  the  electromotive  force  less  the  drop  in 
voltage  caused  by  the  dissipation  of  energy  in  maintaining  a current  through 
the  internal  resistance  of  the  tissue.  It  appears  then  that,  while  the  elec- 
tromotive force  is  nearly  uniform  at  the  peaks  of  successive  discharges,  the 
internal  resistance  is  somewhat  variable.  This  would  seem  to  lend  some 
support  to  the  hypothesis  that  the  electromotive  force  is  uniform  not  only 
at  the  peaks  of  discharges  but  also  during  and  between  them,  the  discharge 
being  produced  by  a variation  in  the  internal  resistance  such  as  would 
occur  in  the  transient  series  connection  of  the  cells. 

Another  evidence,  more  convincing  than  this,  is  obtained  when  the 
oscillograph  is  connected  to  two  points  near  the  posterior  end  of  the  large 
organ  and  the  two  ends  of  the  whole  organ  are  short-circuited  by  a low 
resistance.  The  voltage  recorded  by  the  oscillograph  is  the  electromotive 
force  of  the  segment  included  between  the  points  of  contact  less  the  drop 
in  voltage  caused  by  the  current  which  the  electromotive  force  of  the  entire 
organ  sends  through  this  segment.  The  electromotive  force  of  this  segment 
alone  would  make  the  anterior  end  of  the  segment  positive  with  respect  to 
the  posterior.  The  current  flowing  through  the  resistance  of  the  segment 
would  cause  by  itself  a voltage  in  the  opposite  sense.  Under  the  action 
of  these  two  opposing  voltages,  the  net  voltage  of  the  anterior  end  of  the 
segment  wflth  respect  to  the  posterior  end  will  be  positive  or  negative  as 
the  electromotive  force  in  the  segment  is  greater  or  less  than  the  voltage 
drop  caused  there  by  the  current.  Moreover,  since  the  discharge  runs 
along  the  organ  from  anterior  to  posterior,  the  relation  between  these  two 
opposing  voltages  may  be  different  at  different  instants  during  the  dis- 
charge, and  the  voltage  recorded  by  the  oscillograph  may  change  sign,  i.e., 
it  may  be  diphasic.  If  so,  the  order  in  which  the  two  phases  occur  will 
be  just  opposite  according  to  whether  it  is  the  electromotive  force  or  the 
resistance  of  the  electric  tissue  which  varies  to  produce  the  discharge.  If 
the  electromotive  force  varies  progressively  from  anterior  to  posterior 
while  the  resistance  remains  constant,  then,  before  the  pulse  of  electro- 
motive force  has  reached  this  segment  near  the  posterior  end,  the  current 
caused  by  the  electromotive  force  of  the  anterior  parts  will  have  started 
in  the  entire  organ  and  the  negative  phase  of  the  discharge  will  be  observed 
in  the  segment.  Only  later,  when  the  electromotive  force  has  been  gen- 
erated in  the  segment  and  has  declined  in  the  anterior  parts,  will  the  posi- 
tive phase  occur.  On  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  the  resistance  which  varies 
progressively  from  anterior  to  posterior,  the  electromotive  force  remaining 
constant,  no  large  current  will  flow  until  the  resistance  of  the  whole  organ, 
including  that  of  the  entire  posterior  segment,  has  fallen  to  a low  value.  In 
this  case,  the  voltage  across  the  posterior  segment  will  first  become  posi- 
tive, as  its  cells  are  thrown  into  series  by  the  falling  resistance,  and  after- 
ward will  become  negative,  as  the  impulse  reaches  the  posterior  end  of  the 
organ,  dropping  the  resistance  there  and  so  completing  the  circuit  to  allow 
the  passage  of  a large  current.  When  the  observation  is  made,  it  is  found 
that  the  voltage  across  the  segment  is  first  positive,  rising  sharply  for  a 
very  brief  time,  then  sharply  falling  and  reversing.  Consequently  the 
hypothesis  that  the  discharge  is  produced  by  a drop  in  the  internal  re- 
sistance is  favored. 


1938] 


Cox  & Coates:  Electric  Eel  Tissue 


207 


(a) 


R E 


Text-fig.  1. 

(a)  Electrical  connections  used  in  making  oscillo- 
graphic traces,  (b)  The  same  with  a schematic 
representation  of  the  electrical  characteristics 
of  the  eel. 

Another  evidence  of  the  variation  of  the  internal  resistance  of  the 
organ  during  the  discharge  appears  in  the  oscillographic  traces  reproduced 
in  Plate  I,  Figs.  1,  2 and  3.  These  traces  were  obtained  with  electrical 
connections  as  shown  in  Text-fig.  1 (a).  The  eel  was  123  cm.  long.  The 
electrodes  were  in  contact  with  the  skin,  one  23  cm.  from  the  snout  at 
the  anterior  end  of  the  large  organs,  the  other  51  cm.  from  the  snout,  so 
that  there  was  included  between  the  electrodes  a convenient  length  of  the 
large  organs  and  necessarily  about  the  same  length  of  Hunter’s  organs,  but 
none  of  the  organs  of  Sachs.  The  electrodes  were  made  of  aluminum  plates 
on  rubber  belts,  which  were  fastened  around  the  eel.  They  were  designed 
to  have  an  area  large  enough  to  avoid  a very  high  current  density  through 
the  skin.  When  the  eel  discharges  in  the  water,  the  flow  of  current  through 
the  skin  is  distributed  over  a large  surface.  With  electrodes  of  small  area 
in  a circuit  of  low  resistance,  the  high  current  densities  produced  in  the 
discharge  temporarily  bleach  and,  if  continued,  seriously  injure  the  skin. 


208 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :8 


A circuit  for  the  discharge  was  completed  through  a resistor  and  a battery, 
which  could  be  connected  either  to  reinforce  or  oppose  the  discharge  of  the 
eel  through  the  resistor.  It  was  necessary  in  making  observations  to  con- 
nect the  resistor  and  battery  only  briefly  in  the  circuit.  The  repeated  dis- 
charge of  the  eel  through  a low  resistance  not  only  produces  the  injury  to 
the  skin  already  mentioned  but  also,  of  course,  exhausts  the  electric  organs. 
The  exhaustion  shows  itself,  at  least  in  eels  of  large  size,  not  in  an  appre- 
ciable reduction  of  the  peak  voltage  on  open  circuit  but  in  a reluctance  of 
the  eel  to  discharge.  The  effects  of  connection  to  a battery  are  more 
striking.  On  being  connected  through  a low  resistance  to  a battery  of 
voltage  even  considerably  less  than  its  own  and  with  either  polarity  of 
connection,  the  eel  becomes  restive.  If  the  connection  is  maintained,  the 
peak  voltage  on  open  circuit  declines  and  the  form  of  the  oscillographic  trace 
is  markedly  altered,  the  peak  becoming  much  sharper.  The  alteration  per- 
sists for  some  time  after  the  eel  is  disconnected  from  the  battery.  To 
avoid  it  in  these  observations,  our  procedure  was  as  follows:  The  eel  was 
made  to  discharge  by  gentle  prodding.  When  it  was  discharging  with 
some  regularity,  the  resistor  was  thrown  into  the  circuit  by  a button 
switch  and  the  camera  shutter  was  opened  to  photograph  the  screen  of  the 
oscillograph.  As  soon  as  traces  of  the  discharge  were  obtained,  the  shutter 
was  closed  and  the  button  switch  released.  Since  the  shutter  was  always 
open  for  the  interval  of  several  discharges,  the  traces  of  these  discharges 
overlap  on  the  photographs. 

In  Plate  I,  Figs.  1,  2 and  3,  the  resistance  was  1,000  ohms.  In  Fig.  1 
the  battery  voltage  was  90  reinforcing  the  discharge  of  the  eel.  In  Fig.  2 
there  was  no  battery  voltage.  In  Fig.  3 the  battery  voltage  was  90 
opposing  the  discharge  of  the  eel.  A constant  voltage  between  the  terminals 
of  the  oscillograph  does  not  show  on  the  oscillographic  trace.  If  the  re- 
sistance of  the  electric  tissue  were  constant  during  the  discharge,  the 
battery  would  add  only  a steady  voltage  to  that  of  the  electric  tissue.  If 
then  the  electromotive  force  of  the  electric  tissue  varied  during  the  dis- 
charge in  the  same  way  for  each  of  the  three  connections,  the  same  trace 
would  be  obtained  each  time.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  internal  resistance 
of  the  electric  tissue  varies  during  the  discharge,  the  current  produced  in  it 
by  the  battery  will  vary  and  also  the  contribution  of  the  battery  to  the 
recorded  voltage.  Thus  different  traces  will  be  obtained  with  the  three 
connections.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  traces  in  Plate  I are  different,  the 
voltage  being  raised  when  the  battery  reinforces  the  electric  organ  and 
lowered  when  the  battery  opposes  the  electric  organ.  Hence  we  infer  that 
the  resistance  varies  in  the  discharge. 

In  Plate  I,  Figs.  4 and  5,  as  in  Fig.  2,  there  was  no  battery  voltage. 
Plate  I,  Fig.  4,  is  the  trace  of  the  discharge  on  open  circuit,  so  that  the 
external  resistance  was  effectively  infinite.  In  Fig.  2 the  resistance  was 
1,000  ohms  and  in  Fig.  5 it  was  300  ohms.  The  current  flowing  in  the 
organ  is  increased  as  the  external  resistance  is  lowered,  and  the  drop 
of  the  observed  peak  voltage  below  the  electromotive  force  is  consequently 
also  increased. 

Using  various  battery  voltages  and  external  resistances,  we  have  ob- 
tained traces  of  a large  number  of  discharges,  and  from  measurements  on 
these  we  have  undertaken  to  calculate  for  different  instants  during  the 
discharge  the  values  of  the  internal  resistance  of  the  segment  of  the  electric 
organ  employed  in  the  observations,  assuming  the  resistance  changing  and 
the  electromotive  force  constant.  For  this  calculation  it  was  necessary  to 
make  some  assumption  concerning  the  leaking  of  current  through  the  tissue 
of  the  eel  adjacent  to  the  electric  organ.  The  paths  followed  by  this 
current  could  doubtless  be  accurately  represented  in  diagram  only  by  a 
complicated  network,  but  for  purposes  of  rough  reckoning  we  have  employed 
the  simple  scheme  shown  in  Text  fig.  1 (b).  In  this  figure,  E denotes  the  elec- 


1938] 


Cox  & Coates:  Electric  Eel  Tissue 


209 


tromotive  force  of  the  electric  tissue  and  R its  resistance,  which  we  assume 
changing  throughout  the  discharge.  The  leakage  path  is  represented  by  a 
single  resistance  r,  shunting  the  electric  organ.  The  electromotive  force  of 
the  battery  is  denoted  by  E'  and  the  external  resistance  by  R'. 

At  the  junction  of  the  three  resistances,  the  current,  I,  in  the  electric 
tissue  unites  with  the  current,  I',  in  the  external  part  of  the  circuit  to  pro- 
duce the  current,  i,  in  the  leakage  path,  and  we  have: 

i = I + I' 

In  the  circuit  comprising  E',  R',  and  r,  there  is  a drop  in  voltage  I'R' 
through  the  resistance  R'  and  a drop  ir  through  the  resistance  r.  These 
must  together  be  equal  to  the  electromotive  force  E'  of  the  battery,  for 
around  the  whole  circuit  the  net  drop  in  voltage  must  be  zero.  Hence  we 
have: 

I'R'  + ir  = E' 

Similarly  for  the  circuit  comprising  E,  R,  and  r,  we  have: 

IR  + ir  = E 

With  these  three  equations  we  can  eliminate  the  two  currents,  I and  I', 
and  obtain  for  the  third  current,  i,  an  expression  in  terms  of  the  electro- 
motive forces  and  resistances  alone.  This  expression  is: 

ER'  + E'R 
1 RR'  + rR  + rR' 

Except  during  the  discharge,  we  suppose  that  R is  very  large.  If  this 
is  so,  the  only  appreciable  current  flowing  when  the  organ  is  not  discharging 
is  that  produced  by  the  battery  in  a circuit  closed  through  the  external  re- 
sistance R'  and  the  leakage  resistance  r.  If  we  denote  by  io  the  current  flow- 
ing in  r when  the  organ  is  not  discharging,  we  have: 

E’ 

10  — r + R' 


The  voltage  between  the  terminals  of  the  oscillograph  is  ir-E'  during 
the  discharge  and  ioii  — E'  between  discharges.  (The  resistance  of  the  bat- 
tery is  low  enough  that  the  voltage  between  its  terminals  may  be  regarded 
as  constant  and  equal  to  E'.)  Hence  the  variable  part  of  this  voltage  is 
ir  — ior.  This  is  the  voltage  as  recorded  on  the  oscillographic  trace.  If  we 
denote  this  voltage  by  V,  we  obtain  from  the  two  preceding  equations: 


V: 


i -r  ^ ^ ^ 

(RR'  -)-  rR  + rR'  R'  +r 


Finally,  if  we  solve  this  last  equation  for  R,  we  obtain: 


R = 


rR'  JE  — V 
r + R'\  V 


E'  r \ 
V r+R'J 


In  this  expression,  E'  and  R'  are  known,  being  chosen  at  will  by  the 
connection  of  different  batteries  and  resistors  in  the  circuit,  and  V is  the 
voltage  measured  on  the  oscillographic  trace  for  any  instant  during  the 
discharge.  E,  the  electromotive  force  of  the  segment  of  the  electric  organ, 
and  r,  the  leakage  resistance  of  the  adjacent  tissue,  are  not  directly  given 
and  values  must  be  sought  which  will  bring  into  the  best  possible  agreement 
the  values  of  R calculated  for  the  same  instant  from  different  traces.  In 
the  calculations  E was  taken  as  260  volts  and  r as  3,600  ohms. 

The  values  of  R calculated  from  a number  of  traces  obtained  with 
widely  varying  electrical  connections  are  shown  in  Text-fig.  2.  Each  plotted 
point  denotes  an  average  of  measurements  made  on  the  traces  of  from  four 
to  thirteen  discharges.  The  traces  of  discharges  obtained  with  the  same 
connections  are  sometimes  rather  widely  variant.  Moreover  the  measure- 
ments could  not  be  made  with  accuracy,  by  reason  of  the  lack  of  high  preci- 


RESISTANCE,  OHMS. 


210 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :8 


Text-fig.  2. 

Kesistance  of  a segment  of  the  large  electric  organ  at  different  instants  during 
the  discharge,  calculated  from  voltages  observed  when  the  organ  discharges 
through  various  circuits. 


Open  circles  . . 

Crosses 

Open  triangles 
Open  squares 
Solid  circles.  . . 
Solid  triangles 
Solid  squares  . 


open  circuit 

external  resistance,  1,000  ohms]  v.Q+tOT.„ 

300  ohms [■  voltaee^ 

battery  voltage,  90  volts  reinforcing  discharge]  External 

157.5  volts  opposing  discharge  j-  resistance, 

202.5  volts  opposing  discharge]  1,000  ohms. 


sion  of  the  apparatus  and  also  of  the  impossibility  of  finding  at  all  closely 
on  the  trace  the  point  corresponding  to  the  instant  at  which  the  discharge 


1938] 


Cox  & Coates:  Electric  Eel  Tissue 


211 


began.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  extreme  values  of  the  resistance  calcu- 
lated for  any  instant  during  the  discharge  differ  in  most  cases  by  a factor 
somewhat  greater  than  two.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  observations  from 
which  the  calculations  were  made,  the  net  electromotive  force  acting  was 
varied  by  a factor  of  about  six  and  the  effective  resistance  through  which 
it  acted  was  varied  by  a factor  of  about  forty.  Considering  these  wide 
variations  in  the  experimental  conditions,  the  inaccuracy  of  the  observa- 
tions, and  the  extreme  crudity  of  the  schematic  representation  in  assuming 
the  leakage  current  as  flowing  through  a single  resistance,  we  think  the 
discrepancies  in  the  results  are  not  significant  and  we  consider  that  the 
results  confirm  the  general  hypothesis  from  which  the  calculations  were 
made.  Our  conclusion  is  then  that  the  electromotive  force  of  the  electric 
tissue  is  almost  certainly  that  of  a series  of  concentration  cells,  that  the 
discharge  is  very  probably  produced  by  a transient  drop  in  the  internal 
resistance  of  the  electric  tissue,  and  that  this  drop  is  probably  an  action  of 
the  nervous  impulse  at  the  ends  of  the  nerve  libers  which  changes  a virtual 
insulation  between  adjacent  cells  into  an  effective  connection. 

Two  other  observations  seem  worth  noting.  One  of  these  is  that  the 
electric  tissue  is  rectifying,  that  is,  during  the  discharge,  when  its  resis- 
tance to  an  electromotive  force  in  the  same  direction  as  its  own  falls 
markedly,  its  resistance  to  an  electromotive  force  in  the  opposite  direction 
remains  high.  As  the  opposing  electromotive  force  of  the  battery  shown  in 
Text-fig.  1 is  increased,  the  discharge  diminishes  in  voltage  and  at  a certain 
value  of  the  opposing  electromotive  force  disappears  altogether.  A further 
increase  in  the  opposing  electromotive  force,  up  to  some  90  volts  at  least, 
produces  no  additional  effect;  discharge  is  not  reversed. 

The  other  observation  concerns  the  intermediate  discharge.  Since  the 
major  and  minor  discharges  can  be  definitely  attributed  to  the  large  organs 
and  the  organs  of  Sachs,  and  since  the  only  other  electric  organs  are  those 
of  Hunter,  it  seems  natural  to  associate  the  third  type  of  discharge  with 
these.  However,  our  observations  on  the  discharge  through  various  resis- 
tances indicate  that  this  discharge  has  a power  altogether  out  of  proportion 
to  the  bulk  of  Hunter’s  organs.  These  organs,  while  nearly  as  long  as  the 
large  organs,  have  a very  much  smaller  cross-section.  Consequently  their 
internal  resistance  should  be  much  higher  and  the  voltage  they  could  develop 
externally  across  a low  resistance  should  be  only  a very  small  fraction  of 
that  developed  in  the  major  discharge.  Plate  I,  Fig.  3,  shows  one  and  prob- 
ably two  intermediate  discharges,  those  of  the  lowest  and  next  lowest  peak 
voltages.  (They  are  distinguished  from  the  major  discharge  by  their  more 
gradual  fall  as  well  as  by  their  lower  peak  voltage.)  The  peak  voltages  of 
these  two  discharges,  while  definitely  lower  than  those  of  the  major  dis- 
charges, are  still  relatively  about  as  large  as  on  open  circuit.  Consequently 
it  would  seem  that  only  the  large  organs  would  have  enough  power  to  pro- 
duce the  intermediate  discharge.  It  may  be  that  the  intermediate  discharge 
is  a discharge  of  the  large  organs  modified,  in  some  way  of  which  as  yet  we 
have  only  a very  vague  idea,  by  the  simultaneous  discharge  of  Hunter’s  or- 
gans. On  open  circuit,  the  intermediate  discharge  has  sometimes  a spur 
before  the  main  peak.  This  spur  may  show  the  discharge  of  Hunter’s 
organs. 


212 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATE. 

Plate  I. 

Oscillographic  traces  of  the  major  discharge  of  a segment  of  the  large  organ 
with  various  electrical  connections. 

Fig.  1.  Battery  voltage,  90  volts  reinforcing  discharge]  External 
Fig.  2.  No  battery  voltage  j-  resistance, 

Fig.  3.  Battery  voltage,  90  volts  opposing  discharge  j 1,000  ohms. 

Fig.  4.  Open  circuit. 

Fig.  5.  External  resistance  300  ohms,  no  battery  voltage. 


COX  & COATES. 


PLATE  1. 


CO 

CD 


ELECTRICAL  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  ELECTRIC 
TISSUE  OF  THE  ELECTRIC  EEL. 
ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


i/loaScLruj -th  s of  asecon  d . 


Masterson:  Colonial  Rattlesnake  Lore,  1714 


213 


9. 

Colonial  Rattlesnake  Lore,  1714. 

James  R.  Masterson 

Hillsdale  College 

The  subjoined  document,1  here  printed  for  the  first  time,  is  in  all 
likelihood  the  fullest  account  before  the  Nineteenth  Century  of  the  charac- 
teristics and  habits  of  rattlesnakes.  The  author  was  a Captain  Walduck 
(probably  Thomas  Walduck2),  who  at  an  earlier  time  had  sent  to  his  friend 
James  Petiver/1  apothecary  and  Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  eight 
letters  concerning  the  trade,  government,  society,  and  natural  curiosities  of 
Barbados.4  While  at  Barbados  he  had  made  wistful  efforts  to  bring  himself 
to  the  attention  of  the  Royal  Society;  and  in  his  “Account  of  the  Rattle- 
snake,” read  before  the  Society  January  7,  1714,  he  achieved  his  ambition. 
From  a reference  in  the  manuscript  it  appears  likely  that  Walduck  sent  it  to 
Petiver  from  New  England. 

The  whole  paper,  presented  with  due  solemnity  before  the  most  dis- 
tinguished scientific  society  of  the  time,  is  an  extraordinary  collection  of 
folklore  pertaining  to  a creature  almost  as  fictitious  as  the  basilisk,  the 
hydra,  or  the  unicorn.  One  can  imagine  the  honest  Captain,  full  of  inquiry 
and  thirsty  for  scientific  glory,  noting  down  for  the  Royal  Society  of  London 
the  mendacities  of  Indians  and  fur  traders.  He  displays  no  less  assiduity  in 
this  task  than  his  distinguished  contemporary,  the  Reverend  Cotton  Mather, 
D.D.,  who  in  1712  had  contributed  snake  lore  to  the  archives  of  the  Royal 
Society.  Why  Captain  Walduck’s  letter  was  not  similarly  honored  by 
inclusion  in  the  Society’s  Philosophical  Transactions  is  not  clear;  perhaps 
the  editors  doubted  the  authenticity  of  the  Captain’s  information. 


Capt  Walducks  Acc*  of  ye  Rattle  Snake  Read  before 
ye  Royall  Society  [word  illegible]  Jan:  7th.  171J 

The  most  pernicious  Creature  in  ye  English  Empire  upon  ye  Main  of 
America  is  the  Rattle  Snake,  as  well  for  their  Number  as  Effect,  whose  bite 
is  as  mortall  as  Fate,  unless  ye  part  be  imediately  cut  out : beleiving  it  may 
not  be  unpleasant  to  you,  I will  describe  as  many  of  it’s  Qualities  as  I can, 

1 The  MS.  forms  Number  21  (ff.  113b-116b)  in  Sloane  MS.  3339  (British  Museum),  which  is 
Volume  VIII  of  the  collections  of  James  Petiver  from  1691  to  1717,  entitled  Adversaria.  See  Samuel 
Ayscough,  A Catalogue  of  the  Manuscripts  Preserved  in  the  British  Museum  (London,  1782),  II, 
653;  E.  J.  L.  Scott,  Index  to  the  Sloane  Manuscripts  in  the  British  Museum  (London,  1994),  p.  556. 

2 Tho.  Waldock  was  appointed  Register  of  the  Court  of  Admiralty  for  the  Bahamas,  February 
25,  1697  ( Calendar  of  State  Papers,  Colonial  Series : America  and  West  Indies , 15  May,  1696-31  Oct., 
1697,  ed.  J.  W.  Fortescue  {London,  1904},  p.  383).  The  Minutes  of  the  Council  of  Barbados,  March 
16,  1703,  refer  to  a lawsuit  of  Thomas  Walduck  ( Calendar  of  State  Papers,  Colonial  Series:  America 
and  West  Indies,  Dec.  1,  1702-1703,  ed.  Cecil  Headlam  {London,  1913},  pp.  265,771). 

3 Petiver’s  name  appears  frequently  in  Philosophical  Transactions  (see  particularly  XXII,  795). 
Regarding  his  collections  see  Sir  Hans  Sloane,  A Voyage  to  . . . Jamaica  (London),  II  (1725),  iv-v. 

4 Of  these  the  first  appears  to  have  been  lost ; the  remaining  seven  are  preserved  in  Sloane  MS. 
2302.  The  fourth  is  dated  October  29,  1710,  and  the  last  September  17,  1712.  In  a letter  from 
Barbados  dated  November  12,  1710,  Walduck  speaks  of  himself  as  having  passed  fourteen  years  in 
the  West  Indies,  “and  I support  my  self  with  the  hopes  of  Seeing  England  once  More  ” (Sloane 
MS.  2302,  f.  16). 


214  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :9 

leaving  ye  Descriptions  of  its  Parts  to  Surgeons  & Anatomists.  He  is  bred 
from  an  Egg  an  Inch  & half  long,  & about  ye  bigness  of  a Mans  little 
finger;  ye  Shell  is  of  ye  Colour  of  Parchment,  & when  first  laid  near  as  Tuff, 
& what  surprized  me,  I found  some  of  these  Eggs  once,  & they  hapned  to 
be  near  Maturity  to  hatch,  & I brake  them  with  a Stick,  & out  ran  a 
Snake  all  perfect,  att  least  7.  inches  long,  & as  big  as  a Goose-Quill,  for  they 
are  quoill’d  oblong  in  ye  Shell,  their  head  in  ye  middle  & their  Tayl  on  ye 
outside,  & when  they  hatch  ye  Shell  groweth  dry,  & they  break  it  with  their 
heads  & come  out:  In  Carolina  & Virginia  they  engender  in  ye  Month  of 
Aprill  (when  ye  Sun  is  near  ye  Tropick  of  Cancer,  & warms  ye  Earth,  & 
vivifies  those  dead  Animalls  buried  in  ye  Winter)  for  a fortnight  or  3 weeks 
together:  In  New-England  & Pensylvania  not  untill  May,  or  June;  when 
they  [ folio  114]  engender  some  Thousands  of  them  gott  together  (I  heard 
a man  say  he  saw  a heap  as  big  as  a hhd)  some  flying  about  others  hissing 
& makeing  a horrible  noise,  in  a strange  permiscuous  manner — And  this 
to  me  obviates  a vulgar  Opinion  that  there  is  a king  among  ye  Snakes,  in 
whose  head  is  a Carbuncle  that  shines  in  ye  night  with  wonderfull  Lustre, 
& this  is  only  ye  Agrigation  of  their  Eyes,  by  such  a number  getting 
together,  their  Spirits  being  high  & volatile  & full  of  venom,  that  by  ye 
Reflection  of  water,  or  some  such  Accident  gives  such  a light  in  ye  Night  as 
Travellers  love  to  report)  a little  time  after  they  lay  their  Eggs  at  ye  Roots 
of  dry  Trees,  amongst  leaves  & dry  moss,  where  ye  heat  of  ye  Sun  & Earth 
vivifyes  & hatches  them,  & in  August  young  Snakes  have  been  seen ; their 
Eggs  are  laid  like  a chain  8.  10.  12.  together  if  they  lay  but  once  or 
oftner  is  uncertain : at  a year  old  they  have  a Rattle  in  their  Tayls,  & 
about  2 foot  long  & as  bigg  as  a Mans  thumb,  & then  they  come  to  be  deadly 
poysonous,  so  they  shall  grow  to  be  8.  10.«12  foot  long  & as  bigg  as  a Mans 
thigh,  & every  year  increases  a Rattle  (some  belive  they  grow  like  ye 
Alligator  as  long  as  they  live)  there  have  been  some  kill’d  with  24  Rattles 
in  them,  & it  is  beleived  they  do  not  exceed  that  age,  they  live  upon 
Squirrells  & all  sorts  of  Birds  that  they  can  catch,  & by  a wonderfull 
Facination  they  shall  charm  them,  both  Squirrells  & Birds  into  their 
mouths,  from  ye  Top  of  a Tree  50  foot  high,  for  they  are  a Slothfull 
heavy  Creature  (to  other  Snakes)  otherways  they  could  not  gett  their  prey, 
they  swallow  all  whole,  for  their  bite  is  as  deadly  to  themselves  as  to  those 
they  bite,  as  soon  as  they  bite  they  apply  themselves  to  a certain  Root 
w:ch  they  eat  & is  an  Antidote  to  their  own  poyson,  by  ye  want  of  which 
they  shall  dye  in  an  houres  time  by  their  own  poyson  [ye  Indians  [folio 
1145]  & some  of  ye  English  that  trade  amongst  ye  Indians  know  this  Root  & 
keep  it  always  about  them,  & when  they  are  bitt,  they  chew  this  Root  & 
apply  it  to  ye  wound,  by  w:ch  means  ye  Poyson  will  be  expelled:  ye  Indians 
likewise  have  another  Notion,  or  rather  a peice  of  superstition  as  a Remedy 
agJ  ye  bite  of  ye  R:  Snake  that  by  painting  a R:  Snake  upon  their  Bodyes, 
they  beleive  ye  Rattle  Snake  will  not  bite  them,  & several  both  Indians,  & 
White  men  have  Snakes  drawn  with  black  strokes  most  curiously  upon  their 
bodies:  We  may  Quest:11  whither  this  might  not  be  taken  from  ye  brazen 
serpent  in  ye  Wilderness,  & handed  down  to  them  by  Tradition,  or  whither 
there  might  not  be  some  Magick  in  it,  for  all  Diabolical  Magick  came  from 
Natural  Magick  (as  all  Idolatry  is  a Corruption  of  ye  true  Religion),  as 
soon  as  they  bite  they  run  away,  & they  never  bite  but  once,  ye  Experiment 
of  their  killing  themselves  by  their  own  bite  hath  been  tryed  thus : An 
Indian  hath  been  hired  to  bring  in  a Rattle  snake  (for  there  be  some  of 
them,  & white  men  too,  that  will  take  up  a Rattle  snake  as  one  would 
take  up  an  Eel,  & it  hath  been  put  into  a Cask  standing  up  with  one  head 
out,  & ye  Snake  hath  been  provok’d  by  a stick  to  bite  ye  Stick,  which  it 
hath  done,  but  could  not  be  provoked  to  bite  ye  2d  time,  & in  an  hour  after 
hath  died  for  want  of  this  Root.  Another  Experiment  of  ye  virulence  of 
its  Poyson  hath  been  this  a Snake  hath  been  confined  as  above  & by  green 
switches  their  Rind  being  pealed  off,  ye  Snake  hath  been  provoked  to  bite  ye 


1938] 


Masterson : Colonial  Rattlesnake  Lore,  1714 


215 


end  of  ye  switch,  & ye  poyson  hath  been  observed  to  run  up  ye  switch,  & 
turned  ye  green  of  ye  switch  \folio  115]  to  a blackness  all  ye  way  up  to  ye 
Top,  this  hath  been  tryed  some  score  of  times  by  several  hands,  & it  is  ye 
Nature  of  ye  Poyson  to  ascend ; for  if  a man  be  bitt  by  ye  Snake  in  ye  Arm, 
or  Leg,  left  him  hold  that  part  up  higher  than  his  body  he  shall  live  some 
days,  but  if  it  be  below  he  shall  not  live  2 houres,  but  their  body  shall 
break  full  of  large  Chapps,  & Crakks  as  if  their  Skinn  had  been  roasted 
by  ye  Fire.  The  R.  Snake  cannot  bite  running,  he  must  be  quoiled  round 
with  his  head  in  ye  middle  & then  he  will  rise  as  high  as  his  navel,  & no 
higher  & so  chop  to  bite,  Dogs  that  are  used  to  them  shall  make  them  kill 
themselves  by  running  round  & baying  at  them,  that  by  chopping  att 
ye  Dogg  they  have  bitt  themselves.  Their  Poyson  lieth  in  som  little  bladder 
att  ye  Root  of  their  two  lower  Tusks,  which  when  they  bite  breaks  & is 
squeaz’d  out,  & their  is  two  socketts  in  their  upper  jaw  to  receive  them, 
they  never  make  use  of  them  in  their  ordinary  feeding  but  swallow  all 
whole,  their  Stomach’s  are  of  a large  Capacity  young  Fauns  being  taken 
out  whole.  The  Indians  never  are  in  fear  of  them,  nor  will  they  be 
perswaded  to  kill  any  of  them.  The  Indians  believe  that  ye  R.  Snakes  are 
ye  Executors  of  ye  Divine  Vengeance,  & that  he  that  is  bitt  by  them  hath 
been  a Murderrer,  w :ch  likewise  was  the  Opinion  of  ye  Inhabitants  of  Maltha 
when  S :l  Paul  was  shipwrek’d  there  according  to  ye  sacred  Text.  Indeed 
they  never  do  bite  but  when  provoked,  & a Man  may  as  securely  sleep  in  ye 
wood  for  them  as  in  a feather  bed.  [folio  115b]  They  never  bite  but  first 
make  a Rattling  with  their  tayls,  & they  may  be  heard  20  yards  of.  Those 
Men  y‘  use  ye  Woods  say  they  never  come  near  a R.  Snake  but  they  are 
aprised  of  it  before  they  either  hear  or  see  them,  & they  are  in  a fright  as 
tho’  a Spectre  was  near  them,  & that  their  breath  inflames  ye  Air  & before 
they  either  hear  or  see  them  they  are  seized  with  sorrow.  So  that  ye 
Fiction  of  Phyton  is  verify’d  in  ye  Rattle  Snake,  or  they  are  all  one  Crea- 
ture, they  are  locked  up  all  ye  Winter  in  ye  Earth,  & when  they  first  come 
forth  in  ye  Spring  they  are  weak  & have  lost  all  their  Stock  of  poyson,  & 
their  bite  is  of  no  danger,  untill  by  feeding  & warm  weather  they  are 
supply’d  with  fresh  venom,  & in  a Month’s  time  their  bite  shall  become 
Mortall,  & their  venom  is  deadly  lett  it  be  lodg’d  any  where  so  long  as  ye 
Snake  lives  but  not  longer  Experienced  by  ye  Following  History:  A Man  in 
Virginia  being  in  ye  Woods  having  a pair  of  boots  on  was  bitt  by  a RSnake 
thro’  his  boot  came  home  to  his  wife  & dyed,  his  Boots  were  hung  up  in 
ye  house,  & his  widdow  marryed  a second  husband,  who  putt  on  those  Boots, 
& by  rideing  a Small  Journey  complain’d  with  a pain  in  his  Leg  & likewise 
dyed,  the  Boots  were  hung  up  again,  & ye  Woman  married  ye  third 
Husband,  who  made  use  of  ye  same  Boots,  & ye  first  time  of  wearing 
them  complained  as  ye  former  of  a small  tumor  in  his  legg  & likewise  died; 
Upon  this  ye  Surgeon  cutts  ye  boot  in  peices  & found  ye  Tooth  of  ye  Rattle 
Snake  that  bitt  ye  first  Husband,  & did  all  ye  Execution  since  as  small  as 
a hair,  they  took  it  out  with  a [folio  116]  pair  of  Forceps,  & prick’d  a dog 
with  it  that  within  few  hours  dyed,  ye  Surgeon  took  ye  tooth  some  time 
after  tryed  it  upon  another  Dog  & it  did  him  no  hurt,  & it  was  supposed 
then  ye  Snake  was  dead.  Wherever  ye  English  come  & settle  ye  Snakes 
leave  ye  place  in  a little  time,  which  keeps  up  ye  superstition  of  ye  Indians 
that  there  is  some  extraordinary  virtue  in  ye  English,  when  I can  conceive 
no  other  Reason  in  it  but  by  planting  & weeding  ye  Earth,  plowing  & 

breaking  up  ye  glebe,  they  eradicate  ye  Root  out  of  ye  Ground  that  is  ye 

Antidote  & self  preservation  to  ye  Snake  against  his  own  poyson,  & there- 
fore they  are  forced  to  leave  ye  place  & go  where  it  is  to  be  found.  They 
are  not  all  over  America,  not  to  ye  Southward  of  ye  Tropick  & to  ye 

Norward  of  55°,  whither  ye  heat  destroys  them  in  one  & ye  Cold  in  ye 

other  I am  not  Judge,  there  is  none  in  ye  Kingdom  of  Mexico  amongst  ye 
Spaniards,  but  they  say  they  were  once  all  over  there  & drove  away  by  ye 
prayers  of  one  of  their  Fryers;  this  is  one  of  their  Legends.  We  may  say  ye 


216 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :9 


same  thing  100  years  hence  in  N.  England,  a Man  may  live  there  20  Years 
now  & not  see  one,  & in  some  Ages  a RSnake  will  be  as  great  a Rarity  in 
N.  England  as  a Wolf  is  now  in  Old  England,  tho’  they  were  once  very 
populous  in  each  Country.  There  be  Water  R.  Snakes  as  well  as  Land  & 
as  deadly  in  some  Rivers  in  Virginia  they  shall  creep  up  ye  Calles  of  Shipps, 
& assault  a boat  when  near  ye  Shore,  there’s  aboundance  of  Strange  Reptiles 
in  ye  Woods  in  Virginia  & Carolina  Viper  about  2 foot  long  more  deadly  than  ye 
R.  S.  [ folio  116b]  but  not  so  Common,  & for  whose  bite  ye  Indians  them- 
selves know  no  remedy,  & of  which  they  stand  very  much  in  fear,  there  be 
likewise  in  ye  Woods  of  Carolina  Snakes  made  like  a Coach  whip  as  long  & 
as  small,  that  will  twist  their  head  round  a horse’s  Leg,  & with  their  Tayl 
Lash  a horse  with  great  Violence  untill  ye  blood  comes,  there  is  like  wise 
a Glass  Snake  about  2 foot  long,  & as  green  & as  brittle  as  Glass,  that  if  they 
happen  to  fall  off  a bough  they  will  break  as  short  as  glass,  & with  a little 
switch  it  is  more  easye  to  break  one  of  them  than  a Tobacco  pipe,  & what 
adds  to  ye  Wonder  they  never  bleed. 

This  is  what  I have  learned  (having  particularly  enquired)  of  ye  Indians, 
& white  Men  conversant  & Tradeing  amongst  ye  Indians,  & beleive  most 
of  this  is  Matter  of  Fact. 


1938] 


Notes 


217 


NOTES 

External  Parasites  of  the  Electric  Eel,  Electrophones  electricus  (Linnaeus). 
Two  external  parasites  have  been  found  so  far  on  the  electric  eel,  Electrophones 
electricus.  On  one  eel,  measuring  about  five  feet  in  length,  numerous  “anchor” 
parasites  (copepods)  were  found  embedded  in  the  thick  skin  along  the  dorsal  sur- 
face of  the  body.  The  copepods  were  identified  as  Lernaecocera  cyprivmcea  L. 
and  have  been  previously  reported  by  many  investigators  from  several  species  of 
cyprinid  fishes.  On  September  30,  1937,  five  of  the  smaller  eels  (ranging  in  size 
from  18"  to  2'6")  were  found  to  be  heavily  infected  with  leeches.  More  than  2,375 
parasites  were  removed  from  one  eel  measuring  24%  inches  in  length.  These 
leeches  are  the  common  Placobdella  parasitica  (Say)  which  are  usually  found 
on  the  soft  parts  of  turtles,  but  which  also  have  been  reported  on  other  fishes. 
When  bearing  eggs  or  young,  the  leeches  often  leave  the  host  for  a time  and  lead 
a free  life  underneath  stones,  and  feed  on  worms  and  larvae. 

The  interesting  thing  about  these  infections  is  that  the  parasites  were  able 
to  withstand  the  electric  discharges  of  the  eels.  These  discharges,  according  to 
Coates,  Cox  and  Granath  (1937 11  may  reach  a voltage  of  300  in  eels  exceeding 
50  cm.  in  length.  One  11%"  eel  gave  off  about  200  volts  (Coates  and  Cox,  1936) 2. 

It  is  definitely  known  that  the  eels  were  discharging  at  the  time  the  parasites 
were  present. — Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  New  York  Aquarium. 


1 C.  W.  Coates,  R.  T.  Cox,  and  L.  P.  Granath  (1937).  Zoologica  22:  1-32. 

2 C.  W.  Coates  and  R.  T.  Cox  (1936).  Zoologica  21  : 125-128. 


jHeto  fforfe  Zoological  Society 

General  Office:  90  Broad  Street,  New  York  City 


©fficenJ 

President,  W.  Redmond  Cross 


Vice-Presidents,  Kermit  Roosevelt  and  Alfred  Ely 
Chairman,  Executive  Committee,  W.  Redmond  Cross 


Treasurer,  Cornelius  R.  Agnew 
Secretary,  Fairfield  Osborn 

Scientific  Staff 

Zoological  $arb 
W.  Reid  Blair,  Director 


Raymond  L.  Ditmars,  Curator  of  Mammals  and  Reptiles 


Claude  W.  Leister,  Ass’t  to  the  Director  and  Curator,  Educational  Activities 
H.  C.  Raven,  Prosector 
Edward  R.  Osterndorff,  Photographer 
William  Bridges,  Editor  and  Curator  of  Publications 

Squarium 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  Acting  Director 
Christopher  W.  Coates,  Aquarist 
Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  Pathologist 
G.  M.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Pathology 
Homer  W.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Physiology 

Department  of  tropical  fte&arci) 

William  Beebe,  Director  and  Honorary  Curator  of  Birds 


John  Tee-Van,  General  Associate 
Gloria  Hollister,  Research  Associate 
Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate 

Cbitorial  Committee 

Fairfield  Osborn,  Chairman 


Lee  S.  Crandall,  Curator  of  Birds 
Charles  R.  Schroeder,  Veterinarian 


W.  Reid  Blair 
William  Beebe 


Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr. 
William  Bridges 


ZOOLOGICA 


SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 
OF  THE 

NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


VOLUME  XXIII 
Part  3 

Numbers  10-16 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  SOCIETY 
THE  ZOOLOGICAL  PARK,  NEW  YORK 


September  28,  1938. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

10.  Morphology  of  the  Hypophysis  of  the  Common  Goldfish 

( Carassius  auratus  L) . By  W.  Randal  Bell.  (Plates 
1 & 2;  Text-figures  1 & 2) 219 

11.  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation.  By  Joel  Hartley. 

(Plates  I-V) 235 

12.  Papilloma  of  the  Skin  Occurring  in  an  Electric  Eel,  Elec- 

tro phorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  By  C.  W.  Coates, 

R.  T.  Cox  & G.  M.  Smith.  (Plates  I-VI) 247 

13.  Arithmetical  Definition  of  the  Species,  Subspecies  and 

Race  Concept,  with  a Proposal  for  a Modified  Nomen- 
clature. By  Isaac  Ginsburg.  (Text-figures  1-4) 253 

14.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XIV.  Introduction,  Itinerary,  List  of  Stations, 

Nets  and  Dredges  of  the  Eastern  Pacific  Zaca  Expedi- 
tion, 1937-1938.  By  William  Beebe.  (Text-figures 
1 & 2) 287 

15.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XV.  Seven  New  Marine  Fishes  from  Lower 
California.  By  William  Beebe  & John  Tee-Van. 
Plates  I-III;  Text-figures  1-5) 299 

16.  Deep-sea  Fishes  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expedi- 

tions. Family  Anguillidae.  By  A.  Vedel  Taning. 
(Text-figure  1)  313 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


219 


10, 

Morphology  of  the  Hypophysis  of  the  Common  Goldfish 
(Car as sius  auratus  L.).1 

W.  Randal  Bell 

Washington  Square  College,  New  York  University 
(Plates  I & II;  Text-figures  1 & 2). 

There  is  much  speculation  concerning  the  possibility  of  pituitary- 
gonadal  relationships  in  fish  similar  to  those  found  in  mammals.  Implants 
and  extracts  of  fish  pituitaries  have  been  found  to  cause  a premature  ovula- 
tion in  fish,  (Houssay,  1930,  von  Ihring,  1935)  and  an  increase  in  gonad  size 
(Cardoso,  1934).  Noble,  Kumpf  and  Billings  (1936)  have  induced  brooding 
behavior  in  the  Jewel  fish  ( Hemichromis  bimaeulatus ) with  injections  not 
only  of  fish  pituitary  extracts  but  of  sheep  extracts  and  prolactin  as  well. 
Wunder  (1931),  Fleischman  and  Kann  (1932),  and  Ranter  (1934),  have 
found  the  color  and  ovipositor  length  of  the  bitterling  ( Rhodeus  amarus ) 
to  be  affected  by  hormones  from  the  fish  pituitary  but  not  by  gonad  stimu- 
lating hormones  from  the  pituitary  of  mammals.  Smith  (1931),  Zondek 
and  Krohn  (1932),  Matthews  (1933),  Parker  (1934),  Zondek  (1935),  Hog- 
ben  (1936),  and  numerous  other  workers  have  studied  the  pigmentation 
effects  caused  by  changes  in  the  amounts  of  intermedin  and  other  “chroma- 
tophorotropic”  hormones.  The  effects  of  the  physiological  removal  of  the 
pituitary  have  been  observed  by  Lundstrom  and  Bard  (1932),  Matthews 
(1933),  Parker  (1935),  and  Smith,  Burr  and  Ferguson  (1935).  Recently 
Abramowitz  (1937)  has  reported  the  successful  removal  of  the  pituitary  of 
the  catfish  and  the  killifish,  using  an  opercular  approach.  Examination  of 
the  goldfish  gives  reason  to  believe  that  such  an  approach  would  be  effica- 
cious in  its  hypophysectomy.  However,  an  improved  technique  for  this  opera- 
tion, especially  one  which  would  make  possible  a partial  ablation,  would  be 
highly  desirable. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  investigation  to  demonstrate  the  anatomy  and 
histology  of  the  pituitary  and  its  surrounding  structures  in  a form  of  fish2 
well  adapted  to  experimention.  Carassius  auratus  (the  goldfish)  was  selected 
because  it  is  highly  adaptable  to  laboratory  conditions  and  has  an  excep- 
tional resistance  to  surgical  shock.  Also,  its  compact  pituitary  is  suspended 
by  a stalk  which  passes  through  a connective  tissue  membrane,  covering 
a foramen  in  the  brain-case  floor.  These  protective  structures  should  make 
it  quite  feasible  to  remove  the  gland  without  injury  to  the  brain.  It  is 
hoped  that  the  observations  presented  here  will  provide  an  adequate  founda- 
tion for  future  investigations. 

At  this  time,  I wish  to  acknowledge  the  thoughtful  guidance  of  Dr. 
Harry  A.  Charipper  in  the  accomplishment  of  this  work.  I would  also  like 

1 Accepted  in  partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Science,  New 
York  University. 

2 A resume  and  key  references  on  the  pituitary  of  various  teleosts  may  be  found  in  the 
symposium  report  of  H.  A.  Charipper  (1937). 


220 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


to  thank  Mr.  C.  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  of  the  New  York  Aquarium  for  providing 
the  laboratory  facilities  and  for  his  helpful  advice  on  the  ichthyological 
aspects  of  the  problem. 


Materials  and  Methods. 

The  specimens  of  Carassius  auvatus  were  obtained  from  commercial 
fisheries  in  Saddle  River,  New  Jersey.  Their  over-all  length  varied  from 
seven  to  eight  inches,  while  their  body  length  from  the  tip  of  the  snout  to 
the  proximal  border  of  the  tail  fin  averaged  five  inches.  Material  for  histo- 
logical preparations  was  fixed  between  the  end  of  December  and  the  latter 
part  of  March.  Most  of  this  was  from  female  animals. 

For  convenience,  the  fish  were  removed  from  the  large  main  tank  into 
small  individual  tanks  before  being  used.  All  tanks  were  supplied  with  ac- 
tively flowing  tap  water,  which  maintained  a temperature  of  about  8°  Centi- 
grade. This  water  was  cold  enough  to  prevent  any  active  maturation  of  the 
eggs  in  the  ovaries. 

The  fish  were  taken  from  the  water  and  rapidly  anaesthetized  by  flood- 
ing the  gills  with  chloroform.  The  roof  of  the  cranium  was  removed  first  by 
cutting  transversely  through  the  dermal  bone  between  the  eyes,  and  con- 
tinuing the  incision  through  the  dorso-lateral  angles  of  the  neurocranium. 
The  entire  roof  was  then  lifted  and  broken  away  at  its  posterior  margin. 
The  neurocranium  was  then  freed  posteriorly  by  a transverse  incision  in  the 
region  of  the  medulla,  and  anteriorly  by  another  incision  midway  between 
the  olfactory  lobes  and  the  olfactory  bulbs.  Finally  the  entire  neurocranium 
was  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  animal  by  cutting  through  the  opercular 
attachments  and  separating  the  gill  bars  from  their  cartilaginous  attach- 
ments on  the  neurocranium.  The  optic  nerves  and  muscles  were  carefully 
cut  to  avoid  altering  their  relation  to  the  pituitary.  The  neurocranium  with 
the  brain  and  pituitary  were  removed  to  the  fixative.  The  whole  procedure 
was  accomplished  in  about  three  minutes. 

Helly’s,  Bouin’s  and  Zenker’s  fluids  were  employed  for  fixation.  At  first 
the  crania  from  anesthetized  fish  were  immersed  in  these  for  about  seven- 
teen hours.  Later  it  was  found  more  desirable  to  kill  the  animals  directly 
by  injecting  the  fixing  fluid  through  the  thin  medial  wall  of  the  olfactory  pit 
into  the  cavity  above  the  brain.  The  neurocranium  was  then  rapidly  re- 
moved as  before  and  more  fluid  injected  into  the  myodom  near  the  gland 
before  immersion.  The  fixation  time  was  reduced  to  six  hours  by  this  pro- 
cedure. 

When  the  pituitary  was  to  be  sectioned  alone,  it  was  carefully  removed 
from  the  cranium  after  fixation.  All  attempts  to  remove  the  brain  and 
the  pituitary  together  were  unsuccessful,  due  to  the  fragile  nature  of  the 
pituitary  stalk  and  to  the  intimate  relation  of  the  endocranial  membranes 
and  the  bone  floor  to  the  pituitary  body.  Specimens  designed  for  sectioning 
of  the  neurocranium  were  decalcified  for  four  hours  in  10%  solution  of 
nitric  acid  in  70%  alcohol.  Sections  of  the  pituitary  were  cut  from  5-7 
micra  in  thickness  and  those  of  the  neurocranium  at  10-15  micra.  Serial 
sections,  longitudinal,  horizontal  and  transverse,  were  made  of  the  pituitary 
in  situ  in  the  neurocranium  and  also  of  the  gland  alone.  The  Masson  stains 
were  used  for  cytoplasmic  differentiation  and  Delafield’s  haematoxylin  and 
eosin  as  a routine  procedure.  The  latter  technique  was  used  for  the  ana- 
tomical preparations. 

Relation  of  the  Pituitary  Gland  to  Surrounding  Structures. 

The  pituitary  body  of  Carassius  auratus  lies  deeply  embedded  in  the 
neurocranium.  It  does  not  occupy  a sella  turcica  in  the  basisphenoid  bone 
of  the  cranial  floor  as  is  the  case  in  higher  vertebrates.  Instead,  it  lies  in 
a tunnel-like  cavity,  the  myodom,  below  the  floor  of  the  brain  case  (Plate  I, 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


221 


Fig.  1).  This  space  is  enclosed  in  the  apex  of  the  V-shaped  neurocranial 
floor,  just  above  the  prominent  parasphenoid  or  “keel  bone”  (Plate  I,  Fig.  4). 
The  myodom  extends  posteriorly  from  the  optic  foramina  to  the  region  of 
the  medulla,  the  pituitary  lying  near  its  anterior  end. 

The  lateral  walls  of  the  teleost  neurocranium  in  the  region  of  the 
pituitary  are  formed  by  the  prootic  and  alisphenoid  bones.  The  alisphenoid 
bones  extend  forward  and  medially  to  form  the  walls  and  floor  of  the  brain 
case  proper  in  the  region  of  the  orbit.  Posterior  to  the  pituitary,  the  roof 
of  the  myodom  forms  the  floor  of  the  brain  case.  This  is  made  up  of  two 
horizontal  plate-like  processes,  extending  medially  from  the  prootic  bones 
and  fusing  in  the  midline,  forming  the  “prootische  Briicke”  of  Holmgron 
and  Stenzio  (1936). 

When  viewed  from  above,  a large  oval  optic-pituitary  foramen  may  be 
observed  in  the  floor  of  the  brain  case.  The  posterior  rim  of  this  is  formed 
by  the  prootic  bridge  and  the  anterior,  more  dorsal  rim  by  the  alisphenoid 
bones  (Plate  I,  Fig.  1).  Its  lateral  edges  are  formed  by  delicate  bony  pro- 
cesses projecting  from  the  lateral  walls.  A thin,  tough  extension  of  the 
endocranial  membrane  completely  covers  the  foramen  except  where  it  sur- 
rounds the  optic  nerves  and  pituitary  stalk  as  they  enter  the  brain  case 
(Plate  I,  Fig.  3).  A sac-like  fold  of  this  membrane  is  reflected  over  the 
pituitary  body,  which  lies  immediately  below  the  posterior  half  of  the 
foramen.  The  optic  nerves  enter  the  myodom  through  the  optic  foramina, 
and  then  pass  through  the  anterior  half  of  the  optic-pituitary  foramen  to 
reach  the  brain. 

The  pituitary  body  is  placed  dorsally  in  the  myodom  (Plate  I,  Fig.  4) 
above  the  rectus  externus  muscles  of  the  eye,  which  enter  this  bony  chamber 
ventral  to  the  optic  nerves.  In  transverse  section,  the  muscles  appear  as  two 
oval  masses  ventro-lateral  to  the  pituitary.  A medial  bony  septum  rises  from 
the  parasphenoid  a short  distance  between  them. 

The  pituitary  lies  with  its  dorsally  flattened  surface  pressed  against 
the  membrane  covering  the  optic-pituitary  foramen.  Its  posterolateral  edge 
is  enclosed  by  a cupping  of  the  rim  of  the  prootic  bridge  (Plate  I,  Fig.  3). 
Likewise  the  lateral  edges  of  the  foramen  project  past  the  sides  of  the 
gland.  (Plate  I,  Fig.  2).  The  above  three  structures  effectively  separate 
the  pituitary  from  the  cavity  of  the  brain  case. 

As  a result  of  this  separation,  the  pituitary  is  suspended  from  the  brain 
by  a short  and  heavy  stalk.  This  solid  process  is  about  twice  as  wide 
as  it  is  long  in  a transverse  section  (Plate  I,  Fig.  2).  It  rises  in  the  mid- 
line from  the  floor  of  the  hypothalamis  at  the  posterior  end  of  the  lobus 
medialis.  The  latter  is  a small  eminence  of  the  lamina  post-optica  lying 
between  the  anterior  ends  of  two  large,  oval  lateral  lobes,  the  lobi  inferior 
(or  mammillary  lobes).  These  latter  bodies  are  over-shadowed  dorsally  by 
the  larger  optic  lobes  (Plate  I,  Fig.  4).  In  a transverse  section,  the  narrow, 
medial,  slit-like  cavity  of  the  third  ventricle  may  be  seen  to  penetrate  the 
ventral  infundibular  region  for  a short  distance  but  it  does  not  extend  into 
the  pituitary  stalk. 

No  large  blood  vessels  were  observed  entering  the  pituitary  body,  al- 
though a large  vein  occupies  the  angle  formed  by  the  posterior  indentation 
of  the  pars  intermedia  (Plate  I,  Fig.  3).  The  membranes  surrounding  the 
gland  contain  a profusion  of  small  vessels,  which  were  frequently  observed 
to  penetrate  the  pituitary,  especially  in  the  region  of  the  pars  anterior.  The 
gland,  as  well  as  the  brain  itself,  lies  in  a semi-fluid  fatty  mass. 


Anatomy  of  the  Gland. 

The  pituitary  in  Carassius  is  an  irregular,  solid,  rounded  mass  about 
1.3  millimeters  in  length.  Its  form  can  best  be  appreciated  by  consulting 


222 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


Text-fig.  1 showing  sketches  of  its  various  aspects.  From  above  (Text-fig. 
1,  B)  it  is  almost  circular  with  a flattened  posterior  side.  A slight  crevice 
connects  the  stalk  with  the  posterior  extremity.  Ventrally  and  laterally 
(Text-fig.  1,  A and  C),  it  shows  a rounded  cone-shaped  body  projecting 
from  the  main  mass  of  the  gland.  The  apex  of  this  cone-like  portion  of  the 
intermedia  points  posteriorly  and  somewhat  ventrally.  The  separation  of 
this  portion  from  the  remainder  of  the  pars  intermedia  is  not  always  so 
pronounced. 

The  posterior  aspect  (Text-fig.  1,  D)  is  almost  triangular  with  the  apex 
being  formed  by  the  cone  just  described.  The  dorsal,  more  massive,  rec- 
tangular portion  represents  the  ubergangsteil  and  the  remainder  of  the  in- 
termedia. This  latter  is  faintly  outlined  as  a central  triangular  portion. 

The  pars  intermedia  is  the  most  ventral  portion  and  occupies  somewhat 
less  than  one-half  the  volume  of  the  gland.  A crevice  may  be  seen  to  sepa- 
rate this  lobe  from  the  ubergangsteil  everywhere  except  at  the  very  core  of 
the  gland.  In  addition  to  the  cone-shaped,  antero-ventral  portion  the  inter- 
media is  made  up  of  a more  dorsal  plate  (Text-fig.  2,  and  Plate  I,  Fig.  3), 
lying  intimately  in  contact  with  nearly  the  whole  ventral  surface  of  the 
ubergangsteil.  Anteriorly  this  plate  has  a flat  dorsal  surface,  but  posterior 
to  the  center  it  rises  medially  to  form  a triangular  cross  section.  In  some 
cases  the  plate  disappears  entirely  from  transverse  sections  taken  near  the 
posterior  extremity. 


Drawings  of  various  aspects  of  the  hypophysis.  (A)  Ventral  aspect,  (B) 
Dorsal  aspect,  (C)  Lateral  view  and  !D)  Caudal  view.  In  A,  B,  and  C 
the  nasal  end  is  to  the  left.  Approximately  x 12. 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


223 


The  ubergangsteil  is  formed  by  a deep  plate  of  cells,  indented  antero- 
dorsally  by  the  pars  anterior  and  postero-ventrally  by  the  ridge  of  the 
intermedia.  The  pars  nervosa  forms  a solid  core-like  mass  in  this  lobe 
posterior  to  the  midpoint  (Text-fig.  2,  and  Plate  I,  Fig.  3).  Branching 
root-like  processes  extended  from  this  into  all  the  other  lobes  but  especially 
into  the  pars  anterior  and  the  intermedia.  A heavy  process  curves  ventrally 
toward  this  latter  portion  in  the  median  plane  and  on  reaching  it,  broadens 
out  into  a mass  which  sends  processes  radiating  throughout  the  lobe. 


A diagrammatic  reconstruction  of  a median  sagittal  section  of  the  pituitary 
body  showing  the  anatomical  and  area  relationships  of  the  various 
portions.  P.A. — Pars  anterior;  P.N. — Pars  nervosa;  P.l. — Pars  inter- 
media; Ubg. — Ubergangsteil.  Approximately  x 15. 


The  pars  anterior  (Text-fig.  2,  and  Plate  I,  Fig.  3)  may  be  con- 
sidered to  consist  of  two  portions;  first,  a flat  plate-like  region  anterior  to 
the  pituitary  stalk  and  dorsal  to  the  ubergangsteil — the  pars  anterior  proper; 
and  second,  a layer  of  peculiar  cells  enveloping  the  dorsal  nervosa  mass  and 
the  roots  of  the  processes  which  radiate  from  it  (Plate  I,  Fig.  5). 

Histology  op  the  Pituitary  Gland. 

Pars  Nervosa.  This  tissue  appears  as  a loose  fibrous  mass  with  scat- 
tered neuroglia  nuclei  and  occasional  glandular  cells  (Plate  I,  Figs.  2,  3,  5). 
The  coarse  basophilic  fibers  run  lengthwise  in  the  cords,  as  do  the  nuclei  of 
the  neuroglia  cells.  These  latter  are  fusiform  or  irregularly  elongate  in  shape 
and  are  characterized  by  scattered  coarse  granules.  They  are  stained  red 
with  the  Masson  technique.  Occasionally  an  area  appears  around  the  nuclei 
which  stains  as  would  cytoplasm,  but  no  cell  borders  are  visible.  Numerous 
large  basophilic  glandular  cells,  resembling  those  of  the  ubergangsteil,  are 
found  in  the  nervosa  masses  but  not  in  the  cords.  These  are  always  de- 
generate and  often  appear  as  irregular  blue  masses.  Eosinophilic  colloid 
material  was  observed  in  rare  cases  only.  Numerous  blood  vessels  penetrate 
the  cords  of  the  nervosa  and  occasional  large  vessels  appear  in  the  dorsal 
mass. 


224 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


Pars  Intermedia.  A compact  irregular  cord-like  arrangement  is  char- 
acteristic of  the  pars  intermedia  (Plate  I,  Fig.  6).  The  cords  are  separated 
from  each  other  and  from  the  processes  of  the  nervosa  by  thin  connective 
tissue  membranes.  The  lobe  appears  as  a typical  epithelial  gland,  and  the 
roots  of  the  nervosa  occupy  only  a small  portion  of  its  volume. 

Two  cell  types  were  observed — a large,  rounded  one,  flattened  by  adjoin- 
ing cells,  and  a smaller,  more  polygonal  type  (Plate  II,  Fig.  7).  The  rounded 
cells  are  predominant  and  are  responsible  for  the  faintly  basophilic  staining 
reaction  of  this  lobe.  They  occupy  the  center  of  the  cords  and  much  of  the 
periphery,  while  the  polygonal  cells  are  always  located  adjacent  to  the  con- 
nective tissue  membrane. 

The  vesicular  nuclei  of  the  basophils  are  large  and  oval  and  occa- 
sionally indented.  They  are  made  prominent  with  the  Masson  stains,  by 
a deep  red-staining  rim,  scattered  large  red  granules,  and  often  a round, 
central  nucleolus.  The  cytoplasm  is  marked  by  numerous  faint  blue  granules. 

The  polygonal  cells  are  smaller  than  the  basophils,  although  their 
nuclei  are  identical  in  size  as  well  as  staining  reaction.  The  cytoplasm  of 
the  former  is  dense  and  finely  granular.  It  takes  both  acid  and  basic  stains 
better  than  that  of  the  basophilic  cells  and  stains  a reddish  purple  with  the 
Masson  technique.  These  may  be  called  amphiphils. 

The  goldfish  intermedia  is  moderately  well  supplied  with  blood  vessels. 
The  largest  vessel  observed  in  the  pituitary  appears  in  the  region  adjacent 
to  the  lower  nervosa  mass  (Plate  I,  Fig.  3).  Numerous  other  smaller  vessels 
are  associated  with  the  connective  tissue  elements  throughout  the  intermedia 
and  between  this  lobe  and  the  iibergangsteil. 

iibergangsteil.  The  iibergangsteil  is  the  largest  portion  of  the  pituitary 
body,  occupying  about  one-half  of  its  volume  (Plate  I,  Fig.  3).  Although 
connective  membranes  separate  it  from  the  pars  intermedia  and  the  pars 
nervosa,  no  similar  structure  lies  between  its  cells  and  those  of  the  pars 
anterior.  The  iibergangsteil  is  quite  homogeneous  in  structure;  there  are 
no  connective  tissue  elements  within  it  and  nervosa  processes  extend  into  it 
for  only  a short  distance.  Strongly  contrasting  areas  appear,  however,  as  a 
result  of  differential  staining.  Small  irregular  masses  of  deep-staining 
acidophils  are  characteristically  distributed  throughout  a deeply  basophilic 
background  (Plate  I,  Fig.  3,  and  Plate  II,  Fig.  8).  These  masses  increase 
somewhat  in  number,  as  one  proceeds  posteriorly.  The  transition  from 
acidophilic  to  basophilic  areas  is  strikingly  sharp  and  is  visible  even  in  un- 
stained sections. 

The  acidophilic  areas  (Plate  II,  Fig.  8)  are  made  up  of  large,  polygonal 
cells,  having  a finely  granular  cytoplasm,  which  takes  an  intense  red  color 
with  the  Masson  stains.  The  cell  borders  are  exceptionally  sharp  and  dis- 
tinct while  the  nuclei  are  very  prominent  and  about  the  size  of  those  of  the 
pars  intermedia.  The  round  or  oval  vesicular  nuclei  possess  a few  large 
granules  and  frequently  a large  central  nucleolus.  Like  the  nuclei  of 
the  intermedia,  these  take  a deep  red  stain  and  have  a dense  rim.  Scattered 
among  the  acidophils  are  occasional  polygonal  cells  with  the  typical  red 
nuclei  but  whose  cytoplasm  is  vesicular,  containing  large  faintly  violet 
granules.  These  are  chromophobic  cells,  presumably  degranulated  eosino- 
phils. 

The  basophilic  background  (Plate  II,  Fig.  8)  is  composed  of  large 
polygonal  cells,  having  indistinct  borders  and  spherical  or  picnotic  nuclei, 
that  are  more  granular  than  those  of  the  acidophils.  The  nuclei  of  most  of 
the  cells  appear  degenerate  and  many  are  missing  entirely.  With  the  Mas- 
son stains,  several  differentiated  areas  may  be  distinguished.  The  cells  of 
all  regions  possess  large  red  cytoplasmic  globules  which  are  usually  located 
near  the  cell  borders.  The  cells  of  the  central  region  have  relatively  few 
globules  in  a pure  blue  cytoplasm  in  which  individual  granules  cannot  be 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


225 


distinguished.  Those  of  the  posterior  region  are  similar  but  have  more 
numerous  globules.  The  most  anterior  region  and  also  an  area  of  cells 
lying  below  the  pars  anterior  present  a different  picture.  Here  the  number 
of  globules  is  greatly  increased  so  that  they  may  occupy  a large  portion  of 
the  volume  of  the  cells.  The  cytoplasm  is  not  deep  blue  but  shows  a coarse 
violet  or  violet  and  blue  granulation.  These  cells  appear  to  be  largely  de- 
granulated  although  they  have  not  lost  their  red  globules. 

The  vascular  supply  of  the  iibergangsteil  is  poor.  Only  small  capil- 
laries have  been  observed,  and  rarely  do  more  than  several  of  these  appear  in 
any  one  field. 

Pars  Anterior.  The  characteristic  cellular  arrangement  in  the  pars  an- 
terior is  due  to  the  presence  of  a large  number  of  cords  of  the  nervosa 
which  course  through  the  lobe  in  an  anterior-posterior  direction  (Plate  I, 
Fig.  5,  and  Plate  II,  Figs.  10,  11).  In  tranverse  section,  the  lobe  has  a 
perforated  appearance,  while  in  a sagittal  section,  the  cells  seem  to  be  divided 
into  horizontal  cords  several  cells  in  depth. 

The  cells  are  small  as  compared  with  those  of  the  iibergangsteil  and 
the  intermedia  (Plate  II,  Figs.  9,  10).  They  are  rounded  or  polygonal  and 
have  distinct  borders  and  large  typically  ovoid  nuclei.  Many  indented  or 
folded  nuclei  are  also  present.  The  majority  of  the  nuclei  are  vesicular, 
having  large,  deep  red  granules  and  a smooth  prominent  red  rim  outlined 
against  a yellowish  nucleoplasm.  On  the  basis  of  cytoplasmic  staining  re- 
actions, three  cell  types  may  be  distinguished ; e.g.,  purplish-red  amphiphilic 
cells,  basophils,  and  chromophobes.  The  lobe  is  composed  predominantly  of 
the  amphiphils,  which  have  considerably  less  affinity  for  acid  fuchsin  than 
the  amphiphils  of  the  pars  intermedia.  The  chromophobes  (Plate  II,  Fig. 
10)  are  relatively  scarce  and  are  distributed  uniformly  throughout  the  lobe. 
They  have  normal  nuclei  but  appear  pale  violet  in  color  like  the  degranulated 
cells  of  the  iibergangsteil.  The  basophils  (Plate  II,  Fig.  10)  are  smaller 
than  the  other  cells  but  have  nuclei  which  are  identical  in  size  and  staining 
reaction.  Their  cytoplasm  is  filled  with  fine  deep  blue  granules. 

A transition  from  a predominantly  basophilic  condition  next  to  the 
iibergangsteil  to  an  acidophilic  one  at  the  dorsal  free  border,  occurs  in  this 
lobe.  Most  of  this  is  due  to  the  depth  of  staining  of  the  amphiphilic  cells. 
At  the  ventral  border,  the  majority  of  these  assume  a deep  purple  color  and 
have  a dense  cytoplasm  without  visible  granulation,  while  those  at  the  dorsal 
border  are  more  red  than  purple  and  have  varying  numbers  of  coarse 
granules.  Some  of  the  transition  is  also  due  to  the  increase  in  the  number 
of  basophils  toward  the  ventral  border.  At  most,  however,  these  cells 
account  for  only  a small  fraction  of  the  change. 

A few  of  the  amphiphilic  cells  possess  nuclei  unlike  the  vesicular 
acidophilic  nuclei  of  the  remainder  of  the  cells  of  the  pars  anterior.  They 
are  uniformly  filled  with  fine  basophilic  granules,  are  without  nucleoli,  and 
have  a deep  blue  rim  (Plate  II,  Fig.  9). 

The  processes  of  the  nervosa  that  penetrate  the  pars  anterior  are  highly 
fibrous  and  especially  loose  in  consistency  (Plate  II,  Figs.  10,  11).  Asso- 
ciated with  most  of  them  are  blood  vessels  of  various  sizes;  these  always 
lie  within  the  connective  tissue  membranes  separating  the  processes  from 
the  surrounding  cells  (Plate  II,  Fig.  11).  A few  vessels  lie  in  the  paren- 
chyma itself,  and  occasionally  one  of  these  near  the  free  border  may  be  seen 
to  connect  with  a vessel  in  the  connective  tissue  capsule  of  the  gland.  The 
pars  anterior  is  the  most  vascular  lobe  of  the  goldfish  pituitary;  neverthe- 
less, its  vascular  supply  is  relatively  poor  as  compared  with  that  lobe  in  the 
mammal  and  most  higher  vertebrates. 

The  layer  of  cells,  enveloping  the  dorsal  mass  of  the  pars  nervosa 
(Plate  I,  Fig.  5)  is  considered  part  of  the  pars  anterior,  because  of  their 
resemblance  to  the  cells  found  in  that  part  of  the  gland  and  should  be 


226 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


confirmed  further  by  morphogenic  studies.  The  layer  is  thickest  next  to  the 
mass  and  thins  down  to  a few  cells  as  it  follows  the  processes  a short  way. 
Some  nesting  of  the  cells  is  evident.  A few  cells  follow  the  main  stalk  all 
the  way  to  the  pars  intermedia.  The  cells  are  small  and  polygonal  with  large 
vesicular  nuclei  and  a scanty  rim  of  cytoplasm.  When  stained  with  Dela- 
field’s  hematoxylin  and  eosin,  the  nuclei  are  deep  blue  and  the  cytoplasm 
is  a faint  blue.  Masson  staining  produces  a pale  violet  coloration  of  the 
fine  cytoplasmic  granules.  The  nuclei  are  pale  yellowish-red  with  deep  red 
rims  and  a few  scattered  large  red  granules. 

Discussion. 

The  anatomical  relationships  of  the  pituitary  in  Carassius  auratus  to 
the  neurocranium  and  brain  resemble  those  found  in  higher  vertebrates  more 
than  in  most  other  teleosts.  Matthews  (1936)  found  the  pituitary  of  Fundu- 
lus  heteroclitus  to  be  closely  applied  to  the  floor  of  the  brain  and  merely  cov- 
ered ventrally  by  the  parasphenoid  bone.  This  condition  is  characteristic 
of  most  of  the  teleost  pituitaries  that  have  been  described,  e.g.,  Anguilla  vul- 
garis and  the  Mormyridae  (Stendell,  1914),  Anguilla  anguilla  (Florentin 
and  Weiss,  1931,  and  v.  Hallerstein,  1934),  Gasterosteus  aculeatus  (Bock, 
1928),  Gadus  morrhua  (Herring,  1908  and  1913)  and  the  haddock  (de  Beer, 
1926). 

In  Carassius,  on  the  other  hand,  the  gland  is  separated  from  the  brain 
by  the  shelf-like  cranial  floor  and  the  extension  of  the  endocranial  membrane 
over  the  optic-pituitary  foramen.  As  a result  of  this  change,  the  pituitary  is 
attached  to  the  lobus  medialis  by  a relatively  long  stalk,  which  penetrates 
the  foramen.  Two  teleost  pituitaries,  those  of  Cyprinus  carpio,  the  carp, 
and  of  Esox  lucius,  the  pike,  as  described  by  Stendell  (1914),  are  very  simi- 
lar in  structure  to  the  gland  of  the  goldfish.  Whether  they  also  have  similar 
anatomic  relationships  is  unknown.  In  fact,  previous  accounts  of  teleost 
pituitaries  have  included  only  brief  comments  on  this  subject..  The  only 
available  literature  dealing  with  it  is  that  provided  in  anatomical  discus- 
sions by  Jordan  (1905),  Gregory  (1933),  von  Hallerstein  (1934)  and  Holm- 
gren and  Stenzio  (1936). 

Four  main  divisions  were  differentiated  in  the  goldfish  pituitary:  pars 
nervosa,  pars  intermedia,  iibergansteil,  and  pars  anterior.  These  terms  have 
been  used  by  de  Beer  (1926)  and  other  recent  workers  in  describing  the 
teleost  pituitary.  The  configuration  and  structure  of  these  divisions  show  a 
marked  similarity  to  those  in  Esox  and  especially  in  Cyprinus. 

Certain  changes  in  the  orientation  of  the  various  lobes  have  taken  place 
as  a result  of  the  development  of  the  pituitary  stalk.  The  glands  have  as- 
sumed a compact  ovoid  form  with  a somewhat  variable  orientation  of  the 
lobes.  The  pars  anterior  of  Carassius  and  Esox  are  antero-dorsal  in  position 
while  the  pars  intermedia  is  ventral  and  ventro-caudal  respectively.  In  the 
acorn-shaped  gland  in  Cyprinus,  the  pars  anterior  is  dorsal  and  the  inter- 
media is  directed  antero-ventrally.  The  change  in  the  position  of  the  gland 
in  Cyprinus  has  been  associated  by  Stendell  (1914)  with  its  greater  anterior 
rotation  as  a result  of  a more  extensive  stalk  formation.  These  glands  rep- 
resent a considerable  advance  over  the  condition  in  other  teleosts,  in  which 
the  lobes  are  serially  extended  in  an  anterior-posterior  direction,  i.e.,  pars 
anterior,  iibergangsteil,  and  pars  intermedia. 

The  goldfish  has  a typical  teleost  pars  nervosa,  which  is  composed  of  a 
mass  of  tissue  in  the  postero-dorsal  region,  from  which  root-like  processes 
radiate  in  all  directions  into  the  glandular  tissue.  Like  Cyprinus,  however, 
it  has  an  additional  long  internal  process  leading  to  the  distant,  compact, 
lobe-like  pars  intermedia.  Here  the  process  ends  in  an  additional  mass  of 
nervosa  tissue  from  which  processes  radiate  throughout  the  intermedia.  The 
fine  structure  of  the  nervosa  is  very  similar  to  that  described  by  other  work- 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


227 


ers.  Numerous  acidophilic  colloid  droplets  have  been  noted  in  the  nervosa 
adjacent  to  the  pars  intermedia  by  Herring  (1908),  Stendell  (1914),  Bock 
(1928),  and  Matthews  (1936).  Some  such  strongly  acidophilic  material  was 
observed  in  the  pars  intermedia  and  occasionally  in  the  adjacent  nervosa  in 
Carassius.  This  material  was  missing,  however,  in  the  dorsal  mass  of  the 
nervosa.  Stendell  (1914)  and  Bock  (1928)  noted  glandular  cells  distributed 
throughout  the  nervosa  and  stated  that  these  had  migrated  there  from  the 
pars  intermedia  and  the  pars  anterior.  These  cells  are  present  in  Carassius 
but  they  definitely  resemble  the  basophils  of  the  iibergangsteil. 

The  pars  intermedia  of  the  goldfish  forms  a distinct  lobe  and,  like  that 
of  the  carp,  it  is  separated  from  the  iibergangsteil  by  a partial  cleft  and  a 
connective  tissue  membrane.  In  most  other  teleosts  it  consists  of  a region, 
occupying  the  posterior  or  postero-ventral  extremity  and  enveloping  the  roots 
of  the  nervosa.  This  is  the  case  in  Anguilla,  Mormyrus,  Mugil,  Salmo,  Chry- 
sops  and  Esox  (Stendell,  1914)  and  in  Gasterosteus  (Bock,  1928).  In  Fun- 
dulus  it  takes  the  form  of  a layer,  several  cells  in  thickness,  following  the 
contours  of  the  nervosa  (Matthews,  1936). 

Stendell  (1914)  found  no  pattern  of  cell  arrangement  and  no  blood  ves- 
sels in  the  intermedia  of  the  teleosts  he  studied.  The  only  vascular  supply 
in  this  lobe  was  that  carried  into  it  by  the  roots  of  the  nervosa.  The  condi- 
tion is  strikingly  different  in  Carassius.  Here  the  parenchyma  is  broken  up 
into  irregular  cords  by  a connective  tissue  network  which  extends  through- 
out the  lobe.  Moreover,  blood  vessels  are  more  numerous  in  this  lobe  than 
are  free  in  the  parenchyma  of  all  the  pituitary  regions.  The  cord-like  ar- 
rangement resembles  that  seen  in  the  intermedia  of  some  of  the  mammals. 

As  in  all  vertebrates,  the  intermedia  of  the  goldfish  is  predominantly 
basophilic  in  staining  reaction.  The  cells  in  the  center  of  the  cords  are  baso- 
philic while  many  of  those  next  to  the  nervosa  and  connective  membranes 
are  amphiphilic  in  reaction.  The  latter  take  both  acid  and  basic  stains  bet- 
ter than  the  basophilic  cells.  Matthews  (1936)  noted  large  intensely  stain- 
ing acidophiles  adjacent  to  the  nervosa  cords  in  Fundulus  and  Stendell  found 
a similar  condition  in  Esox.  It  seems  likely  that  these  cells  are  identical  with 
the  amphiphils  in  Carassius.  As  in  Matthews’  description  in  Fundulus,  many 
of  the  nuclei  in  this  lobe  of  the  goldfish  pituitary  are  folded  or  indented. 

A marked  similarity  also  exists  between  the  iibergangsteil  of  Carassius 
and  that  of  Cyprinus  (Stendell,  1914).  In  both  it  is  the  largest  portion  of 
the  complex;  that  of  Carassius  is  central  in  position  while  it  is  central  and 
posterior  in  Cyprinus.  The  position  of  this  lobe  in  other  teleosts  is  highly 
variable.  The  simple  pituitaries,  lacking  hypophyseal  stalks,  have  a mass  of 
differentiated  cells  occupying  a central  position  between  the  pars  anterior 
and  the  pars  intermedia.  Bock  (1928)  found  it  to  be  located  centrally  in 
Gasterosteus  and  to  be  covered  ventrally  by  the  pars  anterior  and  the  pars 
intermedia.  In  Esox,  it  is  a compact  mass  in  the  anterior  region  while  in 
Fundulus  (Matthews,  1936),  it  is  composed  of  an  anterior  mass  and  a layer 
which  covers  the  periphery  of  the  gland  everywhere  except  at  the  posterior 
extremity. 

Many  irregular  patches  of  large  polygonal  acidophils  lying  in  a back- 
ground of  similar  basophilic  cells  have  been  described  in  the  iibergangsteil 
of  the  goldfish.  Stendell  (1914)  found  acinar  groups  of  acidophils  lying  in  a 
chromophobic  background  in  the  closely  related  Cyprinus  and  in  a basophilic 
area  in  Esox.  The  basophils  of  the  goldfish  appear  degenerate,  at  least  in  the 
late  Winter  and  Spring,  but  nevertheless  they  take  a much  stronger  baso- 
philic stain  than  the  basophils  of  the  intermedia. 

The  staining  reactions  of  the  iibergangsteil  of  the  various  other  teleost 
pituitaries  are  variable  and  widely  divergent  from  these.  Tilney  (1911)  de- 
scribed columns  of  acidophils,  separated  by  blood  vessels  in  Anguilla  vulgaris, 
while  Stendell  (1914)  found  the  cells  to  be  predominantly  basophilic  in  this 


228 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


form  and  in  Mormyrus.  This  lobe  is  predominantly  acidophilic  in  Fundulus 
(Matthews,  1936)  and  Gadus  (Herring,  1908)  and  equally  acidophilic  and 
basophilic  in  Esox  (Stendell,  1914).  Usually  the  cells  of  the  other  teleost 
iibergangsteils  are  smaller  and  more  rounded  than  those  of  Cyprinus,  Esox 
and  Carassius. 

Stendell  (1914)  held  that  there  is  a progressive  increase  in  the  number 
of  basophils  and  a decrease  in  acidophils  from  the  region  adjacent  to  the 
pars  anterior  to  that  next  to  the  pars  intermedia  in  the  teleost  iibergangsteil. 
Bock  (1928)  could  not  confirm  this  in  Gasterosteus  nor  does  it  occur  in 
Carassius.  In  the  latter,  an  increase  in  the  number  of  acidophilic  masses 
occurs  toward  the  caudal  extremity. 

Few  nervosa  cords  penetrate  the  teleost  iibergangsteil.  Connective  tis- 
sue has  not  been  reported  in  it,  and  there  is  no  sharp  boundary  separating 
it  from  the  pars  anterior.  In  Gasterosteus  there  is  a partial  separation 
(Bock,  1928). 

A pars  anterior,  very  similar  to  that  described  by  Stendell  (1914)  in 
Cyprinus  and  Esox,  is  present  in  Carassius.  Matthews  (1936)  was  unable 
to  distinguish  such  a differentiated  portion  in  Fundulus.  However,  all  other 
descriptions  in  teleosts  have  included  such  a portion  in  an  anterior  or  antero- 
dorsal  region  of  the  pituitary. 

A characteristic  cellular  arrangement  in  the  form  of  cords,  separated 
by  processes  of  the  nervosa  was  noted  in  Carassius.  Stendell  (1914)  noted 
a similar  cord-like  arrangement  of  the  cells  in  Cyprinus  and  Esox,  but  found 
them  to  be  separated  by  blood  sinusoids.  Many  large  blood  vessels  were 
found  enclosed  within  the  nervosa  cords  in  the  goldfish  and  it  seems  pos- 
sible that  Stendell  mistook  such  cords  for  blood  sinuses. 

Most  of  the  cells  of  the  goldfish  pars  anterior  stain  purple  or  a purplish- 
red  with  the  Masson  stains  and  have  been  described  as  amphiphilic.  Some 
basophils  and  chromophobes  are  also  present.  The  cells  of  Cyprinus  and 
Esox  (Stendell,  1914)  and  Anguilla  vulgaris  (Tilney,  1911)  are  reported  to 
be  basophilic.  Stendell  (1914)  also  described  large  acidophils  next  to  the 
blood  sinusoids  in  Esox.  He  and  Bock  (1928)  have  found  the  pars  anterior 
to  be  acidophilic  in  the  primitive  Mormyrus  and  Gasterosteus,  respectively. 
It  is  interesting  to  note  that  an  antero-dorsal  chromophobic  zone  was  found 
in  the  pars  anterior  of  Gasterosteus  (Bock,  1928)  and  in  Gadus  morrhua 
(Herring,  1908).  In  the  former,  the  nuclei  are  closely  packed  and  sur- 
rounded by  a small  ring  of  basophilic  granules. 

A small  specialized  region  has  been  included  in  the  discussion  of  the 
pars  anterior  of  Carassius  although  its  significance  is  uncertain.  This  is  the 
area  of  small  polygonal  cells  surrounding  the  pars  nervosa  and  fusing  with 
the  posterior  end  of  the  pars  anterior  proper.  The  cells  resemble  those  of 
the  pars  anterior  in  size  but  have  less  cytoplasm  and  are  nearly  chromo- 
phobic. On  the  other  hand,  its  position  and  form,  as  a layer  surrounding  the 
nervosa,  immediately  recalls  the  descriptions  of  the  pars  intermedia  in  Fun- 
dulus (Matthews,  1936),  in  the  haddock  and  the  cod  (Butcher,  1936)  and  in 
other  teleosts.  It  seemed  advisable  to  classify  this  region  with  one  of  the 
other  lobes  of  the  gland  until  more  is  known  about  it  rather  than  further 
confuse  the  pituitary  terminology. 

No  large  blood  vessels  were  found  entering  the  pituitary  body  in  Caras- 
sius. Occasionally  capillaries  were  observed,  however,  leaving  the  rich  net- 
work in  the  pituitary  capsule  and  entering  the  pars  anterior.  The  blood 
supply  of  the  gland  is  poor  as  compared  with  those  of  most  higher  verte- 
brates; this  is  true  in  general  of  all  teleosts.  The  pars  anterior  is  most 
vascular  of  the  teleost  lobes  with  the  exception  of  that  in  Gasterosteus  (Bock, 
1928).  In  Carassius,  the  vessels  are  located  in  the  nervosa  cords  while  in 
Anguilla  (Tilney,  1911)  and  Esox  and  Cyprinus  (Stendell,  1914)  numerous 
blood  sinusoids  are  reported.  The  pars  nervosa  carries  numerous  vessels 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


229 


throughout  the  gland.  Few  vessels  are  present  in  the  iibergangsteil  in  Caras- 
sius,  Anguilla  and  Cyprinus  (Stendell,  1914)  while  Mormyrus,  and  Esox 
(Stendell,  1914)  and  Fundulus  (Matthews,  1936)  are  somewhat  better  sup- 
plied. Blood  vessels  are  reportedly  absent  in  the  parenchyma  of  the  pars 
intermedia,  nevertheless  they  are  present  in  considerable  number  in  Caras- 
sius. 

In  the  accounts  of  the  pituitary  of  the  teleosts,  most  investigators  have 
included  a thin-walled,  folded  pouch,  the  saccus  vasculosus.  This  lies  pos- 
terior to  the  gland  and  is  a separate  outgrowth  of  the  posterior  hypothal- 
amis.  It  is  not  present  in  all  Teleostei;  von  Hallerstein  (1934)  reported  the 
presence  of  one  in  Cyprinus  but  there  is  none  in  Carassius.  The  saccus  vas- 
culosus is  related  in  no  way  to  the  pituitary  body.  According  to  von  Haller- 
stein (1934),  its  thin  epithelial  wall  contains  numerous  characteristic  sen- 
sory cells,  as  well  as  nerves,  which  is  evidence  for  its  being  a special  sense 
organ.  For  these  reasons,  it  is  suggested  that  this  organ  should  be  omitted 
from  discussions  of  the  teleost  pituitary. 

If  granulation  and  regranulation,  as  evidenced  by  the  presence  of  the 
similar  cells  with  varying  numbers  of  granules  can  be  taken  as  evidence  of 
secretory  activity,  as  is  usually  done,  and  if  certain  changes  in  the  form  and 
staining  reaction  of  the  nuclei  may  also  be  taken  as  such  evidence  (as  Sever- 
inghaus  (1938)  believes  valid  for  the  rat  at  least)  then  the  cells  of  the 
pituitary  of  the  goldfish  may  be  considered  to  be  in  a state  of  active  secre- 
tion in  the  late  Winter  and  early  Spring.  Such  variations  in  granulation 
occur  in  Carassius  both  in  the  pars  anterior  and  in  the  iibergangsteil.  Scat- 
tered about  the  pars  anterior,  cells  have  been  observed  the  nuclei  of  which 
stain  uniformly  with  basic  stains  instead  of  the  usual  vesicular  manner  with 
acid  ones.  Otherwise  these  cells  cannot  be  differentiated  from  the  normal 
amphiphilic  cells. 

In  this  discussion  of  the  pituitary,  the  terminology  developed  by  Sten- 
dell (1914),  Herring  (1908),  Tilney  (1911)  and  de  Beer  (1926)  and  used 
as  such  by  de  Beer,  has  been  adopted.  This  is  based  on  Stendell’s  homology 
of  the  various  portions  of  the  teleost  pituitary  with  those  of  this  gland  in 
higher  vertebrates.  The  suitability  of  this  terminology  has  been  questioned. 
Indeed,  Stendell  himself  stated  that  the  iibergangsteil  of  the  Teleostei  sug- 
gests the  pars  anterior  more  than  it  does  the  pars  intermedia.  He  thought 
it  not  impossible  that  the  anterior  lobe  of  higher  vertebrates  arose  from  the 
iibergangsteil  of  fish. 

Bock  (1928)  carried  this  idea  to  a positive  conclusion  as  a result  of  his 
study  in  Gasterosteus.  He  said  that  the  anterior  lobe  of  Teleostei  is  thus  to 
be  regarded  as  a structure  typical  of  this  group,  to  which  there  is  no  homol- 
ogy in  amniotes  and  amphibia. 

In  the  absence  of  detailed  embryological  evidence  Stendell,  (1914),  pre- 
ferred to  retain  a homology  based  largely  on  relative  position.  It  seems  to 
the  author,  however,  that  a modification  of  this  type  of  “homology”  to  in- 
clude histological  and  cytological  similarities,  such  as  Bock  (1928)  sug- 
gested with  respect  to  the  iibergangsteil,  would  be  of  definite  value.  Such  a 
homology  would  undoubtedly  approach  closer  to  a fundamental  physiological 
analogy.  Such  an  analogy  and  the  simplification  it  might  bring  should  be  the 
goal  of  comparative  physiological  experimentation.  Very  little  has  been  ac- 
complished in  this  direction  as  yet,  with  the  exception  of  the  work  on  the 
pars  intermedia.  The  functions  of  the  other  portions  of  the  pituitary  in  ver- 
tebrates below  the  mammals  are  almost  completely  unknown. 

Both  the  evidence  of  secretory  activity  and  the  cytological  structure  of 
the  cells  of  the  pars  anterior  and  the  iibergangsteil  in  the  goldfish  pituitary, 
suggest  that  these  two  portions  ought  to  be  considered  as  a glandular  com- 
plex, which  is  equivalent  to  the  pars  anterior  of  higher  vertebrates.  Al- 
though no  attempt  has  been  made  here  to  study  the  embryological  origin  of 


230 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


the  various  portions  and  thus  arrive  at  a true  homology,  if  such  a thing  is 
possible,  the  lack  of  separation  of  the  iibergangsteil  from  the  pars  anterior 
suggests  a common  embryological  origin.  In  contrast  to  this,  there  is  a very 
definite  separation  of  the  iibergangsteil  from  the  pars  intermedia. 

The  pars  anterior  (Hauptlappen)  in  teleosts  was  considered  by  Stendell 
(1914)  to  be  homologous  to  the  lobe  of  that  name  in  higher  forms,  while  Bock 
(1928)  thought  it  was  distinctive  of  this  group.  Certain  facts  suggest  an- 
other possibility,  which  would  afford  a definite  simplification  in  terminology. 
This  lobe  is  strikingly  similar  to  the  pars  tuberalis  in  reptiles,  birds  and 
mammals  in  various  morphological  respects.  The  lobe  is  typically  composed 
of  small  polygonal  basophils  with  a few  acidophils  in  some  forms.  Only  the 
primitive  pituitaries  of  Mormyrus  and  Gasterosteus  are  acidophilic.  The 
acinar,  vesicular,  cord-like  or  columnar  arrangement  of  the  cells  found  in 
the  tuberalis  of  various  higher  vertebrates  can  all  be  duplicated  in  the  teleost 
pars  anterior.  Stendell  (1914)  has  reported  the  presence  of  intercellular 
colloid  in  Esox  lucius. 

The  position  and  relationships  of  the  pars  anterior  may  also  be  equated 
to  the  uberalis.  It  is  dorsal  or  antero-dorsal  in  the  more  complex  teleost 
pituitaries  and  anterior  in  the  lower  forms.  The  position  of  the  pars 
tuberalis  in  amphibians  is  antero-ventral,  in  reptiles  it  is  antero-dorsal, 
and  in  birds  and  mammals  it  is  dorsal.  The  tuberalis  usually  fuses  with 
the  pars  anterior  without  a line  of  separation  much  as  the  teleost  pars 
anterior  does  with  the  iibergangsteil.  In  the  stalked  pituitaries,  the  pars 
anterior  lies  in  contact  with  the  infundibular  stalk  much  as  does  the  tuber- 
alis in  the  birds  and  mammals. 

It  seems  desirable  to  simplify  the  pituitary  terminology  in  the  teleosts 
and  to  correlate  it  with  that  applied  to  higher  vertebrates.  The  morpho- 
logical similarity  of  the  teleost  iibergangsteil  and  pars  anterior  with  the 
pars  anterior  and  pars  tuberalis  respectively  of  higher  forms  suggests  that 
the  latter  terms  might  well  be  substituted  for  the  former  in  referring  to 
the  teleost. 

No  thorough  cytological  investigation  has  been  attempted  in  this  paper. 
An  elaboration  of  this  material  with  information  of  that  type,  secured 
throughout  the  year  and  including  seasonal  variations  would  allow  a more 
critical  examination  of  the  above  question.  At  best,  however,  this  can  only 
elaborate  on  the  morphological  similarities.  By  combining  this  method  with 
physiological  experiments,  an  analogy  with  the  functions  of  the  lobes  of  the 
pituitary  of  higher  vertebrates  might  be  established. 


Summary. 

1.  The  anatomical  relationship  and  position  of  the  pituitary  gland  in  the 
teleost  fish,  Carassius  auratus,  are  distinctive  not  only  in  the  vertebrate 
group  as  a whole  but  also  in  the  teleost  group  itself.  It  is  well  below 
the  floor  of  the  brain  in  the  region  of  the  diencephalon,  above  the  promi- 
nent parasphenoid  and  surrounded  by  the  prootic  and  alisphenoid  bones. 
Its  dorsal  surface  is  separated  from  the  floor  of  the  brain  by  a tough 
membrane. 

2.  The  pituitary  body  is  attached  to  the  brain  in  the  infundibular  region  of 
the  hypothalamis  by  a cylindrical  stalk,  which  penetrates  this  membrane. 

3.  Only  a few  small  blood  vessels  were  observed  entering  the  gland  from 
the  vascular  network  in  its  connective  tissue  sac.  As  in  most  teleosts 
the  gland  is  poorly  vascularized  as  compared  with  those  of  higher  verte- 
brates. 

4.  The  pituitary  is  made  up  of  the  following  four  main  divisions. 

(A)  A pars  nervosa  made  up  of  two  irregular  masses  connected  by  a 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


231 


heavy  process.  Root-like  processes  ramify  throughout  the  pituitary  from 
these  regions. 

(B)  A pars  intermedia  which  is  a large  compact  ventral  lobe  almost 
completely  separated  from  the  ubergangsteil  by  a narrow  cleft. 

(C)  An  ubergangsteil  in  the  form  of  a large  thick  plate-like  region 
dorsal  to  the  pars  intermedia.  Its  structure  resembles  most  closely  the 
pars  anterior  of  higher  vertebrates. 

(D)  A small  plate-like  pars  anterior  in  the  antero-dorsal  region.  In 
structure  it  is  very  similar  to  the  pars  tuberalis  of  many  of  the  higher 
vertebrates. 

5.  Evidence  is  offered  to  confirm  Bock  (1928)  in  the  suggestion  that  the 
ubergangsteil  in  Teleostei  is  really  the  pars  anterior  in  the  sense  that 
this  term  has  been  applied  to  higher  vertebrates. 

6.  Similarly  evidence  is  presented  and  the  suggestion  is  made  that  the 
“pars  anterior”  in  Teleostei  is  in  fact  the  pars  tuberalis  of  higher  forms. 
Cell  type,  arrangement,  and  the  position  and  relationships  of  the  lobe 
as  a whole  were  used  as  criteria. 


Bibliography. 


Abramowitz,  A.  A. 

1937  The  opercular  approach  to  the  pituitary.  Science,  v.  85,  p.  609. 

Bock,  Friedrich 

1928  Die  Hypophyse  des  Sticklings  (Gasterosteus  aculeatus  L.)  unter 
besonderer  Berichtigung  der  jahrescyklischen  Veranderungen.  Zeitschr. 
f.  wissens.  Zool.,  Bd.  131  ,S.  645-710. 

Butcher,  Earl  0. 

1936  Histology  of  the  pituitaries  of  several  fish.  Bull.  Mt.  Desert  Island 
Biol.  Lab.,  pp.  18-20. 

Cardoso,  D. 

1924  Relations  entre  l’hypophyse  et  les  Organes  Sexuels  chez  les  Poissons. 
Compt.  rend.  Soc.  Biol.,  T.  115,  pp.  1347-1349. 

Charipper,  Harry  A. 

1937  The  morphology  of  the  hypophysis  in  lower  vertebrates  particularly 
fish  and  amphibia,  with  some  notes  on  the  cytology  of  the  pituitary 
of  Carassius  auratus  (the  Goldfish)  and  Necturus  maculosus  (the 
Mudpuppy).  Symposia  on  Quantitative  Biology.  V,  pp.  151-164. 

de  Beer,  G.  R. 

1926  The  Comparative  Anatomy,  Histology  and  Development  of  the 
Pituitary  Body.  Oliver  & Boyd,  London. 

Fleischmann,  W.  and  Suzanne  Kann 

1932  Uber  eine  Funktion  des  weiblichen  Sexual  hormones  bei  Fischen 
(Wachstum  der  Legerrohre  des  Bitterlings) . Pfluger’s  Arch.  f.  d. 
pies.  Physiol.,  Bd.  230,  S.  662-667. 

Florentin,  P.  and  M.  Weiss 

1931  Etude  histologique  de  l’hypophyse  de  l’anguille  (Anguilla  anguilla 
L.).  Compt.  rend.  Soc.  Biol.,  T.  107,  pp.  718-720. 

Gregory,  William  K. 

1933  Fish  skulls:  A study  of  the  evolution  of  natural  mechanisms.  Trans. 
Amer.  Philosoph.  Soc.,  New  Series,  vol.  23,  part  II. 


232 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :10 


Herring,  P.  T. 

1908  A contribution  to  the  comparative  physiology  of  the  pituitary  body. 
Quart.  Jour.  Exp.  Physiol.,  v.  1,  pp.  261-280. 

1913  Further  observations  upon  the  comparative  anatomy  and  physiology 
of  the  pituitary  body.  Quart.  Jour.  Exp.  Physiol.,  v.  6,  pp.  73-108. 

Hogben,  L. 

1936  The  pigmentary  effector  system.  VII.  The  chromatic  function  in 
Elasmobranch  fishes.  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.,  Series  B,  v.  120,  pp.  142-158. 

Holmgren,  Nils  and  Erik  Stenzio 

1936  Kranium  and  Visceralskelett  der  Akranier,  Cyclostomen  und  Fische. 
Bolk,  Goppert.  Kallius  und  Lubosch’s  Handbuch  der  vergleichenden 
Anatomie  der  Wirbeltiere.  Bd.  4,  S.  233-500.  Urban  & Schwarzenberg, 
Berlin. 

Houssay,  B.  A. 

1930  Accion  Sexual  de  la  Hipofisis  en  los  peces  y Reptiles.  Rev.  Soc. 
Argentina  Biol.,  T.  6,  pp.  686-688. 

Jordan,  David  Starr 

1905  A guide  to  the  Study  of  Fishes.  Henry  Holt  & Co.,  New  York. 
Kanter,  A.  E. 

1934  A new  biologic  test  for  hormones  in  pregnancy  urine.  J.A.M.A.,  v. 
103,  pp.  2026-2027. 

Lundstrom,  Helen  M.  and  Philip  Bard 

1932  Hypophysial  control  of  cutaneous  pigmentation  in  an  Elasmobranch 
fish.  Biol.  Bull.,  v.  62,  pp.  1-9. 

Masson,  P. 

1928  Carcinoids  (argentafRne-cell  tumors)  and  nerve  hyperplasia  of  the 
appendicular  mucosa.  Am.  J.  Path.,  v.  4,  pp.  181-211. 

Matthews,  Samuel  A. 

1933  Color  changes  in  Fundulus  after  hypophysectomy.  Biol.  Bull.  v.  64, 
pp.  315-320. 

1936  The  pituitary  gland  of  Fundulus.  Anat.  Rec.,  v.  65,  pp.  357-69. 

Noble,  G.  K.,  K.  F.  Kumpf  and  V.  N.  Billings 

1936  The  induction  of  brooding  behavior  in  the  Jewel  fish.  Anat.  Rec., 
v.  67,  Proc.  Amer.  Soc.  Zool.,  p.  50. 

Parker,  G.  H. 

1934  Color  changes  in  the  catfish  Ameiurus  in  relation  to  neurohumors. 
J.  Exp.  Zool.,  v.  69,  pp.  199-224. 

Severinghaus,  Aura  E. 

1938  The  cytology  of  the  pituitary  gland.  The  pituitary  gland,  pp.  69-117. 
The  Williams  & Wilkins  Co.,  Baltimore. 

Smith,  D.  C. 

1931  The  influence  of  humoral  factors  upon  the  melanophores  of  fish,  espe- 
cially Phoxinus.  Zeitschr.  f.  vergl.  Physiol.,  Bd.  15,  S.  613-636. 

Smith,  G.  M.,  H.  S.  Burr  and  R.  S.  Ferguson 

1935  A study  of  the  effects  of  intermedia  and  injury  of  the  hypophysis  on 
traumatic  corial  melanophores  in  goldfishes.  Endocrinology,  v.  19,  pp. 
409-412. 

Stendell,  Walter 

1914  Die  Hypophysis  Cerebri.  Oppel’s  Lehrbuch  der  vergl.  mikros.  Anat., 
Teil  8,  S.  1-162. 


1938] 


Bell:  Hypophysis  of  the  Goldfish 


233 


Tilney,  Frederick 

1911  Contribution  to  the  study  of  the  hypophysis  cerebri  with  especial  ref- 
erence to  its  comparative  histology.  Memoirs  of  the  Wistar  Institute 
of  Anatomy  and  Biology,  No.  2. 

von  Hallerstein,  Viktor  Haller 

1934  Aussere  Gleiderung  des  Zentralnervensystems.  Bolk,  Goppert,  Kallius, 
and  Lubosch’s  Handbuch  der  vergleichenden  Anatomie  der  Wirbeltiere. 
Bd.  2,  1.  Halfte,  S.  319. 

von  Ihering,  R. 

1935  Die  Wirkung  von  Hypophyseninjektion  auf  den  Laichakt  von  Fischen. 
Zool.  Anzeiger,  Bd.  Ill,  S.  273-279. 

WUNDER,  W. 

1931  Experimented  Erzeugung  des  Hochzeitskleides  beim  Bitterling  (Rho- 
deus  amarus)  durch  Einspritzung  von  Hormonen.  Zeitschr.  vergl. 
Physiol.,  Bd.  13,  S.  696-708. 

Zondek,  Bernard 

1935  Chromatophorotropic  principle  of  the  pars  intermedia  of  the  pituitary. 
Glandular  Physiology  and  Therapy,  pp.  133-138.  Amer.  Med.  Assoc., 
Chicago. 

Zondek,  B.  and  H.  Krohn 

1932  Hormon  des  Zwischenlappens  der  Hypophyse.  1.  Die  Rotfarbund  der 
Elritze  als  Testobjekt.  Klin.  Woch.,  Bd.  11,  S.  405-408. 


234 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Median  sagittal  section  of  a portion  of  the  neurocranium  with  the  brain 
and  pituitary  in  situ.  Nasal  end  at  the  right.  The  section  shows  the 
pituitary  (P)  lying  in  the  myodom  (MY)  below  the  floor  of  the  brain 
case.  The  cerebrum  (CB),  cerebellum  (CBL),  lobus  viscero-sensibilis 
(L.V.S),  parasphenoid  (PS)  and  optic  nerve  (O.V.)  are  also  indicated. 
Zenker’s;  Delafield’s  haematoxylin-eosin.  x 4. 

Fig.  2.  Transverse  section  of  the  pituitary  near  the  posterior  end  and  of  adja- 
cent structures,  further  magnified  from  Fig.  4.  Note  the  cavity  of  the 
third  ventricle  above  the  pituitary  stalk  and  the  thin  lateral  bone  shelves 
between  the  gland  and  the  brain.  P.N.,  pars  nervosa;  UBG,  Ubergang- 
steil;  P.I.,  pars  intermedia,  x 13. 

Fig.  3.  An  area  from  Fig.  1 under  higher  magnification,  showing  the  attachment 
of  the  pituitary  to  the  brain,  the  cupped  anterior  rim  of  the  prootic 
bridge,  the  connective  tissue  capsule  of  the  gland,  and  the  large  blood 
vessel  lying  in  the  posterior  indentation  of  the  intermedia.  Nasal  end  at 
the  right.  P.A.,  pars  anterior,  x 13. 

Fig.  4.  Transverse  section  of  a portion  of  the  neurocranium  with  the  brain  and 
pituitary  in  situ.  The  section  shows  the  attachment  of  the  pituitary 
to  the  floor  of  the  hypothalamis  and  the  bony  shelves  that  separate  them 
laterally.  B.S.,  bony  shelf;  L.ln.,  lobus  interior;  L.M.,  lobus  medialis; 
O.L.,  optic  lobe;  P..  pituitary;  R.M.,  x-ectus  muscle.  Bouin’s;  Delafield’s 
haematoxylin-eosin.  x 4. 

Fig.  5.  Dorsal  mass  of  the  pars  nervosa  and  the  adjacent  specialized  region  of 
the  pars  anterior  (the  gi'oup  of  cells  above  the  arrows).  The  dark  cells 
in  the  nervosa  are  glandular  cells  similar  to  the  basophils  of  the  iibei-- 
gangsteil.  Zenker’s;  Masson  stains,  x 160. 

Fig.  6.  Transverse  section  of  epithelial  portions  of  the  pituitary  showing  his- 
tological structui-e  of  the  (P.l.)  pars  intei’media;  (UBG)  iibergangsteil 
and  (P.A.)  pai's  antei’ior.  The  dai’k  ai-eas  in  the  iibergangsteil  represent 
acidophils  and  the  light  areas  in  the  pars  anterior  are  nei’vosa  cords. 
Zenker’s;  Masson  stains,  x 200. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  7.  Pai’s  intei’media  showing  amphiphilic  cells  adjacent  to  the  nei'vosa  cord 
at  left.  Bemaining  cells  ai-e  weakly  basophilic.  Zenker’s;  Masson  stains, 
x 1080. 

Fig.  8.  tibergangsteil  area.  Acidophils  appear  dark  while  the  basophils  appear 
chromophobic  with  haematoxylin.  Several  chromophobes  may  be  noted 
among  the  acidophils.  Bouin’s;  Delafield’s  haematoxylin  and  Masson  A. 
x 1800. 

Fig.  9.  Pars  anterior  at  the  dorsal  border,  showing  typical  amphiphilic  cells, 
three  with  dark  basophilic  nuclei,  also  occasional  chi’omrphobes.  Zenk- 
er’s; Masson  stains,  x 1800. 

Fig.  10.  Pars  anterior  near  the  ventral  border  with  deeper-staining  amphiphils 
than  in  the  more  doi’sal  region.  C.,  chromophobe;  B.,  basophil;  A.,  am- 
phiphil.  Zenker’s;  Masson  stains,  x 1800. 

Fig.  11.  Section  of  an  ai’ea  fi’om  the  pars  anterior  showing  cords  of  the  nervosa 
with  blood  vessels  typically  enclosed  within  them.  Zenker’s;  Masson 
stains,  x 1800. 


BELL. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  5.  FIG.  6. 


MORPHOLOGY  OF  THE  HYPOPHYSIS  OF  THE 
COMMON  GOLDFISH  (CARASSIUS  AURATUS  L. ). 


BELL. 


PLATE  II. 


FIG.  9. 


FIG.  7. 


FIG.  10. 


FIG.  11. 

MORPHOLOGY  OF  THE  HYPOPHYSIS  OF  THE 
COMMON  GOLDFISH  (CARASSIUS  AURATUS  L.). 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


235 


11. 

Pathology  of  Diroflaria  Infestation.1 

Report  of  a case  with  chronic  pulmonary  arteritis. 

Joel  Hartley,  M.D. 

Mt.  Sinai  Hospital,  New  York  City. 

(Plates  I-V). 

The  prominent  increase  in  the  recognition  of  Dirofilaria  immitis  infes- 
tation among  dogs  in  the  United  States  during  recent  years  has  made  this 
a subject  of  some  importance.  Anatomic  reports,  although  plentiful,  have 
been  generally  incomplete  and  inconclusive.  A case  of  extensive  Dirofilaria 
immitis  infestation  in  a gray  wolf  has  recently  come  under  our  observation, 
the  study  of  which  forms  the  basis  of  this  report.  In  view  of  the  gaining 
importance  of  the  disease  it  is  of  value  to  review  briefly  the  literature  on 
the  subject  and  to  discuss  its  various  features. 

The  occurrence  of  this  type  of  parasitism  in  the  gray  wolf,  as  far  as  we 
can  determine,  has  not  been  reported  in  detail  although  there  are  frequent 
records  of  its  appearance  in  dogs.  Textbooks,  however,  refer  to  the  occur- 
rence of  Dirofilaria  in  foxes,  wolves,  muskrats,  raccoons,  and  occasionally 
other  animals.  Infestation  with  Dirofilaria  immitis  does  not  occur  in  man 
and  conversely  Filaria  bancrofti  is  not  observed  in  animals  except  perhaps 
in  primates. 

The  presence  of  worms  in  the  heart  of  the  dog  was  first  reported  by 
Peysson  in  1806  and  by  Von  Gruby  and  Delafond  in  1843.  Leidy  named  the 
parasite  Filaria  immitis.  Raillet  and  Henry  in  1911  established  the  genus 
Dirofilaria,  the  most  common  species  of  which  is  Dirofilaria  immitis  (dirus, 
meaning  cruel),  a designation  which  has  remained  to  the  present.  The 
members  of  the  group  besides  D.  immitis  are : D.  magalhaes  and  D.  repens. 
The  genus  Dirofilaria  is  characterized  by  the  absence  of  oral  labia  and  by 
the  possession  of  very  inconspicuous  cephalic  papillae. 

Shattock  in  1881  observed  worms  in  the  cardiac  chambers  of  a dog  in 
Japan  and  found  many  parasites  partly  embedded  in  a post-mortem  blood 
clot,  which  extended  into  the  pulmonary  artery  and  its  larger  branches. 

In  1886,  J.  R.  Figueira  de  Saboia  described  the  presence  of  male  and 
adult  filaria  in  the  chamber  of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart  of  a child  and 
referred  them  to  De  Magalhaes  for  study.  A statement  of  the  illness  of 
the  child  was  not  given ; the  blood  was  not  known  to  have  been  examined 
for  larvae.  The  role  of  the  parasite  in  the  child’s  illness  is  therefore  un- 
known. These  were  designated  D.  magalhaes.  This  occurrence  in  the  child 
plus  one  case  of  D.  repens  found  in  man  by  Skrjbin,  Althausen  and  Schul- 
man  (1930),  represent  the  only  recorded  instances  of  infestation  in  man 
by  a related  species  of  Dirofilaria. 

1 From  the  laboratories  of  the  Mt.  Sinai  Hospital  and  the  New  York  Zoological  Park. 


) 


236 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :11 


Woods,  in  1885,  observed  that  Dirofilaria  infestation  was  a common 
disease  throughout  the  coastal  cities  of  China.  In  one  of  his  cases  a con- 
tinuous coil  of  filaria  was  found  extending  from  the  right  hepatic  vein, 
through  to  the  inferior  vena  cava,  into  the  right  auricle,  through  the  tri- 
cuspid valve  orifice  into  the  chamber  of  the  right  ventricle.  The  left 
auricular  chamber  was  packed  with  the  nematodes  connected  with  a mass 
fourteen  inches  long  extending  into  both  lungs  through  the  pulmonary- 
arteries.  He  was  of  the  opinion  that  the  ova  were  introduced  into  the  animal 
by  drinking  from  stagnant  pools.  F.  Fullerborn  and  others,  however, 
definitely  established  the  fact  that  the  disease  is  transmitted  by  means  of 
the  mosquito  which  functions  as  the  intermediate  host. 

De  Magalhaes  (1892)  emphasized  the  difference  between  Dirofilaria 
immitis  and  Filaria  bancrofti.  This  investigator  felt  that  whereas  Dirofilaria 
immitis  was  generally  found  in  the  chamber  of  the  right  heart  and  in  its 
great  vessels,  Filaria  bancrofti  was  constantly  encountered  within  the 
lymphatics.  The  recent  studies  of  Augustine  and  his  co-workers  demon- 
strated, on  the  other  hand,  that  the  microfilaria  of  D.  immitis  could  occa- 
sionally also  be  found  within  the  lymphatic  channels. 

The  first  comprehensive  articles  on  Dirofilaria  immitis  appeared  in  1889 
with  the  reports  by  Janson  of  post-mortem  findings  in  41  dogs.  The  para- 
sites were  most  frequently  found  in  the  right  cardiac  chambers  and  its 
great  vessels  but  only  rarely  within  the  cavity  of  the  left  ventricle,  aorta  or 
femoral  artery.  Pulmonary  emboli  were  found  in  the  branches  of  the 
pulmonary  artery  with  infarction,  necrosis  and  even  abscess  formation  of 
the  pulmonary  parenchyma.  The  adult  parasites  wei'e  found  in  the  inferior 
vena  cava,  extending  into  the  hepatic  vein,  producing  thereby  congestion  of 
the  liver  with  secondary  congestion  of  the  portal  vein  and  subsequent  ascites. 
In  one  heart  a worm  was  seen  passing  through  a patent  foramen  ovale  with 
one  half  of  its  body  located  in  each  auricle.  This  offers  a ready  explanation, 
at  least  in  some  instances,  of  a mechanism  for  the  entrance  of  the  parasite 
into  the  general  systemic  circulation.  Janson  further  described  26  cases  of 
hypertrophy  of  the  right  ventricle  and  in  some  specimens  marked  dilata- 
tion, 5 of  obstruction  of  the  pulmonary  artery,  2 examples  of  aneurism  of 
the  pulmonary  artery  without  thrombosis,  9 of  aneurism  of  the  pulmonary 
artery  with  thrombosis,  13  of  “interstitial  hepatitis,”  19  instances  of  hydro- 
thorax and  ascites,  1 of  edema  of  the  subcutaneous  tissues,  5 examples  of 
worms  entangled  in  the  chordae  tendinae.  He  referred  to  the  presence  of 
chronic  endocarditis  which  he  felt  had  proceeded  the  filariasis,  and  was 
aggravated  by  the  presence  of  the  nematodes.  In  the  lungs  of  acute  cases 
he  found  “anemia  and  atelectasis  with  and  without  edema.”  A “nut-meg 
liver”  was  not  infrequently  observed.  The  kidney  exhibited  “parenchy- 
matous, catarrhal  and  interstitial  changes.”  On  the  basis  of  these  ana- 
tomical findings  Janson  believed  that  the  embryos  of  Dirofilaria  immitis 
escaped  from  the  body  mostly  in  the  urine.  This  concept  has  been  subse- 
quently shown  to  be  erroneous,  for  although  microfilaria  are  known  to  pass 
through  the  kidneys,  the  renal  lesions,  described  by  Janson,  correspond  to 
the  so-called  spontaneous  interstitial  nephritis,  so  commonly  observed  in 
animals  (Horn,  1937).  However  the  possibility  of  any  exaggeration  of  this 
process  by  the  toxins  elaborated  by  the  parasite  cannot  be  negated. 

Van  Meter  (1892)  reported  the  gross  finding  of  a case  which  included 
chronic  endocarditis  of  the  tricuspid  valve,  attributed  to  the  presence  of  the 
parasite.  The  inter-auricular  septum  was  perforated  (foramen  ovale?)  and 
the  nematodes  were  also  found  in  the  pulmonary  vein.  French  (1899)  re- 
ported the  gross  findings  of  a case  in  a bitch  whose  litter  of  pups  three 
months  previously  died  with  diarrhea.  He  found  some  small  worms  in  the 
intestines  of  the  offsprings  and  raised  the  question  of  the  possibility  of 
the  placental  transmission  of  the  disease.  Riesman  (1903)  described  an 
animal  with  dyspnea,  who  fell  to  the  ground  while  trotting  and  on  examina- 


1938] 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


237 


tion  revealed  markedly  accentuated  heart  sounds,  a murmur  (type  not  de- 
scribed), cyanosis  and  ascites.  Necropsy  disclosed  a “white  thrombus”  in 
the  right  heart  enmeshing  a parasite  and  slightly  hypertrophied  right 
cardiac  chambers.  The  left  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery  was  completely 
occluded  with  an  ante-mortem  thrombus.  Larvae  were  not  demonstrated. 
He  stated  that  50%  of  the  canine  population  of  China  and  Japan  harbored 
the  worm  and  that  the  embryos  were  found  more  easily  during  the  night 
than  the  day.  The  attention  of  Hopkins  three  years  afterwards  was  drawn 
to  this  disease  when  three  of  his  dogs  being  used  for  experimental  pur- 
poses died  under  anesthesia.  These  and  three  additional  animals  showed 
gross  findings  typical  of  immitis  infestation.  In  one  case,  the  wall  of  the 
pulmonary  artery  two  centimeters  above  the  valve  was  studded  with  fine 
granules  which  on  section  proved  to  be  subendothelial  fibrous  nodules. 

In  1919  Lynch  anesthetized  an  infected  dog  in  whose  blood  he  had 
demonstrated  many  larvae  and  proceeded  to  observe  the  vessels  of  the 
omentum  drawn  over  the  stage  of  a microscope.  He  observed  the  micro- 
filaria moving  about  in  the  capillaries  but  found  no  evidence  of  plugging 
of  the  vessels.  In  the  same  year  Ryan  reported  the  case  of  a dog  which 
had  contracted  the  disease  in  the  northern  temperate  zone  of  the  United 
States.  Kowakami,  in  1919,  studied  the  distribution  of  the  microfilaria  in 
the  body  and  found  them  to  be  most  commonly  within  the  lungs,  heart  and 
respiratory  muscles.  Yano  (1927)  gave  the  order  of  frequency  of  the  in- 
volved organs  as  heart,  lung,  kidney  and  asserted  that  20%  of  the  dogs 
about  Tokio  were  infected.  Histological  studies  of  the  kidneys  of  his  animals 
disclosed  the  typical  lesion  found  in  the  so-called  interstitial  nephritis  of 
dogs.  In  one  instance,  however,  the  author  found  multiple  hemorrhages 
and  in  another,  multiple  zones  of  infarction.  Microfilaria  were  found  in 
scattered  capillaries  of  the  cortex.  In  advanced  cases  there  was  renal 
atrophy.  It  was  Yano’s  opinion  that  the  microfilaria  did  not  form  glom- 
erular emboli  but  suggested  that  the  renal  changes  might  be  of  toxic  origin. 
A few  of  the  vitally  stained  microfilaria  injected  into  healthy  dogs  were  re- 
covered in  the  urine  and  were  at  times  associated  with  renal  hemorrhage. 
Blood  eosinophilia  was  not  observed.  His  attitude  concerning  the  toxic 
origin  of  renal  changes  was  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  when  a centrifuged 
extract  of  female  Dirofilaria  immitis  was  injected  into  mice,  distinct 
changes,  resembling  those  found  in  dogs,  were  elicited  in  the  kidneys. 

Yamanouchi  (1928)  attempted  to  study  the  distribution  of  experiment- 
ally introduced  larvae  in  the  kidneys  of  mice.  When  he  injected  living  larvae 
into  mice  both  intravenously  and  into  the  renal  artery,  he  found  the  em- 
bryos in  the  capillaries  of  the  cortex  located,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  capil- 
laries of  the  glomeruli.  Heat-killed  larvae  were  distributed  mostly  in  the 
afferent  vessels  of  the  glomeruli  but  none  in  the  excretory  tubular  system, 
the  kidney,  ureters  or  bladder.  Blackberg  and  Ashman  (1930)  emphasized 
the  pronounced  effect  of  filarial  infestation  upon  cardiac  function.  Electro- 
cardiographic tracings  taken  on  dogs  during  exercise  disclosed  an  inversion 
of  the  T wave  in  lead  I and  almost  complete  disappearance  of  the  T wave 
in  lead  II.  In  view  of  the  similiarity  of  the  tracings  to  those  seen  during 
attacks  of  angina  pectoris  in  man  the  changes  were  attributed  to  an  in- 
adequate blood  supply  resulting  in  a deficient  oxygen  supply  to  the  cardiac 
muscle. 

Hayes  (1933)  reported  that  80%  of  the  dogs  in  Florida  that  he  ex- 
amined had  Dirofilaria  immitis  infestation.  Hayes  asserted  that  in  1931- 
1933  this  disease  caused  more  loss  than  canine  distemper.  He  referred  to 
the  increase  of  the  disorder  in  recent  years  throughout  the  southern  tiers 
of  the  United  States.  It  was  panzootic  in  1932,  throughout  Georgia,  Florida, 
Alabama,  Mississippi  and  Louisiana.  The  most  common  symptoms  were 
poor  general  condition,  a rough  coat,  lack  of  endurance,  a lazy  attitude  de- 
veloping into  extreme  weakness,  progressive  anemia,  often  chronic  in- 


238 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :11 


digestion,  accompanied  by  ascites  and  generalized  dropsical  swellings.  Mild 
infestations  produced  less  marked  symptomotology  and  with  good  care  the 
animals  could  go  on  indefinitely  without  any  apparent  discomfort. 

In  recent  years  Augustine  and  his  co-workers  studied  the  question  of 
the  filtration  of  microfilaria  by  lymph  nodes.  They  found  that  the  larvae 
were  not  phagocytosed,  as  were  the  erythrocytes,  and  that  they  could  pass 
through  the  lymph  nodes  with  slight  hindrance.  In  another  experiment, 
after  exsanguinating  a normal  dog  and  substituting  the  blood  of  a heavily 
infested  dog,  they  were  able  to  collect  living  embryos  in  the  lymphatic 
channels  and  in  the  spinal  fluid.  Thus,  they  demonstrated  that  the  larvae 
may  escape  from  the  blood  vessels,  traverse  tissues  and  enter  the  lymphatic 
system.  The  histological  findings  were  the  same  in  both  donor  and  re- 
cipient. Microfilaria  were  disseminated  in  every  part  of  the  body.  Great 
numbers  were  present  in  the  lungs,  liver  and  kidney.  None  was  found  in 
the  stomach  or  intestines.  In  the  lungs  many  were  discovered  in  the  large 
arteries,  veins,  capillaries  and  occasionally  in  the  alveoli.  Many  lay  in  the 
veins  and  sinusoids  of  the  liver.  The  kidneys  manifested  the  microfilaria 
most  frequently  in  the  glomeruli,  some  edema  was  present  but  no  patho- 
logical changes.  They  usually  followed  the  course  of  the  capillaries.  Very 
few  were  recovered  in  40  cc.  of  urine  of  a heavily  infected  dog.  Evidence 
that  they  passed  through  the  glomeruli  to  the  efferent  vessels  was  offered 
by  the  presence  of  the  organisms  in  the  renal  veins.  Few  existed  in  the 
capsule  of  the  spleen  but  many  were  in  the  pulp.  The  lymph  nodes  likewise 
showed  few  and  those  were  mostly  in  tne  intermediary  sinuses  in  the  depths 
of  the  node.  Great  numbers  were  embedded  in  the  myocardium,  particu- 
larly the  left  ventricle.  They  were  mostly  in  the  capillaries  but  in  some  in- 
stances lay  outside  the  capillaries  parallel  to  the  fibers.  A tremendous  num- 
ber rested  in  the  bood  vessels  of  the  pericardium.  No  cellular  reaction  to 
the  microfilaria  was  evident  anywhere. 

To  settle  the  question  of  the  behavior  of  the  larvae  in  the  capillaries 
and  the  reason  for  the  absence  of  embolic  phenomena  these  workers  injected 
the  microfilaria  into  bats  and  observed  their  behavior  in  the  capillaries  of 
the  bat’s  wing.  This  was  a superior  method  to  that  of  Lynch,  who  ex- 
amined the  exposed  mesentery  of  a dog,  because  it  did  not  disturb  the  normal 
physiological  conditions  of  the  host.  “The  anterior  end  of  the  microfilaria 
were  constantly  active  in  searching  movements.  As  the  blood  vessels  branch 
and  become  smaller  the  organisms  may  eventually  enter  capillaries  which 
are  obviously  somewhat  contracted  and  proceed  into  them  until  the  lumen 
gets  too  small,  when  they  never  were  observed  to  escape  or  make  permanent 
plugs.  They  simply  backed  out.  That  is  the  reason  why  microfilaria  do  not 
form  emboli.  Whenever  these  active  organisms  became  stuck  in  a capillary 
they  merely  moved  backwards  against  the  current  until  they  were  safely 
on  their  way  elsewhere.” 

Joyeux  and  Cabassu  (1935)  found  microfilaria  in  the  blood  of  19  out 
of  26  dogs  examined  in  the  area  known  as  Camargue.  They  identified  the 
adult  Dirofilaria  in  one  of  two  foxes  they  studied.  Yamamoto  (1936)  de- 
scribed microfilaria  in  the  uterus  and  detected  their  escape  in  the  menstrual 
flow.  However,  he  did  not  regard  this  fact  as  definite  proof  of  passage 
through  the  placenta.  Ohashi,  in  the  same  year,  established  the  fact  that 
the  larvae  could  be  found  in  the  skin  of  the  eyelids,  bulbar  conjunctivae  and 
membrana  nictitans.  A few  embryos  were  present  in  the  lacrimal  secretion. 
He  occasionally  found  that  they  worked  their  way  into  the  vitreous  body  or 
produced  hemorrhage  about  the  optic  nerve. 

Hinman  and  Baker  (1936)  made  a helminthic  survey  of  1,305  dogs 
from  New  Orleans  and  found  321,  or  24.4%,  infected  with  Dirofilaria  im- 
mitis.  They  recovered  the  embryos  in  immature  dogs  and  concluded  that 
they  may  pass  through  the  placenta.  Diagnostic  serological  and  intra- 
dermal  tests  in  filaria  were  introduced  independently  by  Taliaferro  and 


1938] 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


239 


Hoffman,  and  also  by  N.  H.  Fariley  (cited  by  Manson-Bahr  1935).  The 
antigen  was  obtained  from  Dirofilaria  immitis. 

Nematodes  have  been  found  in  the  hearts  of  the  harbor  seal.  Accord- 
ing to  Ross  Nigrelli  of  the  New  York  Aquarium  this  species  belongs  to  the 
genus  Halocercus,  the  members  of  which  are  common  parasites  of  the  lungs 
of  other  species  of  seals,  dolphins  and  porpoises.  This  parasite  not  in- 
frequently is  mistaken  for  Dirofilaria  immitis. 


Report  of  a Case. 

On  December  12,  1937,  a male  wolf  ( Canis  nubilis ) died  in  the  New 
York  Zoological  Park.  He  was  observed  to  have  had  a distended  abdomen 
during  the  previous  four  years. 

Post-mortem  Examination : The  body  was  well  developed  and  in  fairly 
good  condition.  The  dentition  was  good.  The  abdomen  was  moderately  dis- 
tended. The  wall  of  the  right  heart  was  strikingly  hypertrophied  and  the 
chambers  tremendously  dilated  so  that  it  appeared  to  be  about  twice  the 
size  of  the  left  ventricle  (Plate  I,  Fig.  1).  The  pulmonary  ring  was  dilated 
and  measured  6.5  cm.  in  circumference  whereas  the  aortic  ring  measured 
5.5  cm.  A thrombus  filled  the  right  ventricle  in  which  many  adult  round 
worms  were  enmeshed.  These  were  identified  by  Lucker  and  McIntosh  in 
E.  W.  Price’s  laboratory  of  the  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry,  Washington, 
D.  C.,  as  Dirofilaria  immitis.  A reddish-brown,  rough,  irregular,  endocardial 
nodule,  3 mm.  in  diameter,  was  found  in  the  outflow  tract  of  the  right  ven- 
tricle. A thrombus,  with  entrapped  Dirofilaria,  extended  into  the  lumen  of 
the  pulmonary  artery  and  of  many  of  its  branches.  Many  of  the  branches 
of  the  right  pulmonary  artery  and  some  of  the  left  showed  aneurysmal 
dilatations  and  some  were  thrombosed.  In  the  branches  the  thrombi  were, 
for  the  most  part,  firmly  adherent.  Some  were  reddish-brown  and  others 
grayish-white,  fibrotic  and  evidently  organized  (Plate  I,  Fig.  2).  Some 
of  the  nematodes  were  still  motile.  The  intima  of  the  main  stem  of  the 
pulmonary  artery  was  roughened,  due  to  shallow,  fine,  pit-like,  closely 
grouped  depressions.  Along  the  intimal  surfaces  of  the  branches  of  the  pul- 
monary arteries  there  was  longitudinal  and  transverse  bridging.  Tranvers- 
ing  the  lumina  of  some  branches,  in  secant-like  fashion  was  a network  of 
slender,  fibrous  bands,  strings  and  thin  membranes,  originating  in  the  in- 
tima at  one  point  and  inserting  at  another  (Plate  I,  Fig.  2),  (Safir,  1932). 
The  lungs  weighed  1,370  grams  together  and  presented  many  infarcted 
areas  with  associated  areas  of  pneumonitis  (Plate  II,  Fig.  1).  The  pul- 
monary veins  exhibited  no  pathological  changes.  The  larger  radicles  of  the 
tracheo-bronchial  tree  were  clear  throughout.  The  hilar  lymph  nodes  were 
large  and  succulent. 

The  peritoneal  cavity  was  filled  with  2,000  cc.  of  clear  amber  fluid.  The 
liver  was  enlarged,  weighed  1,900  grams  and  displayed  evidence  of  marked 
acute  and  chronic  passive  congestion.  Some  areas  manifested  pseudo-adeno- 
matous formation.  There  was  one  large  cyst  4 cm.  in  diameter  in  the  right 
lobe.  A large  thrombus  containing  Dirofilaria  filled  the  right  main  branch 
of  the  hepatic  vein  and  its  smaller  branches  (Plate  II,  Fig.  2).  The  gall 
bladder  and  biliary  system  were  normal.  The  spleen  did  not  appear  en- 
larged. A firm  hemangioma,  about  1 cm.  in  diameter,  arose  from  the  mid- 
portion. The  gastro-intestinal  tract  showed  evidence  of  severe  passive  con- 
gestion. Multiple  minute  mucosal  hemorrhages  were  present.  In  addition 
many  small,  yellow,  hard  nodules  2 mm.  in  diameter  were  disseminated  over 
the  serosa  of  the  small  intestine.  The  kidneys  were  markedly  congested. 
The  spinal  fluid  was  cloudy  and  on  smear  disclosed  many  gram  positive  cocci. 
The  meninges  had  a dull  fibrinous  appearance.  Pure  cultures  of  staphy- 
lococcus were  grown  from  the  heart’s  blood  and  the  spinal  fluid.  The  or- 


240 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :11 


ganisms  produced  yellowish  to  light  orange  pigment  but  could  not  be  defi- 
nitely classified  by  fermentation  tests. 

Microscopic  Findings : The  myocardium  revealed  only  degenerative 
changes.  The  intima  of  the  main  stem  of  the  pulmonary  artery  was  markedly 
thickened  and  showed  pit  formation.  The  adventitia  was  thickened  and 
showed  numerous  perivascular  infiltrations  consisting  chiefly  of  lymphocytes 
but  also  plasma  cells  and  polymorphonuclear  cells.  The  pericardium  in  this 
region  revealed  a membrane  composed  of  fibrin  with  entrapped  necrotic 
cells  lying  on  the  surface.  The  elastica  Van  Giesen  stain  disclosed  marked 
reduplication  and  fragmentation  of  the  elastic  fibres.  The  elastic  lamellae 
were  of  irregular  thickness  and  often  their  continuity  was  interrupted. 

The  walls  of  the  intra-pulmonic  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
were  thickened  and  exhibited  frequently  a striking  destruction  with  replace- 
ment of  the  elastic  and  muscle  fibres  of  the  media  by  connective  tissue.  The 
elastica  was  markedly  fragmented  (Plate  III,  Fig.  1).  There  was  excessive 
thickening  of  the  adventitia.  The  intima  manifested  a conspicuous  focal 
thickening.  In  one  place  there  was  necrosis  of  the  wall  with  inflammatory 
cell  infiltration  (Plate  IV).  The  lumina  of  these  vessels  displayed  thrombi 
in  all  stages  of  organization.  The  adjacent  alveolar  septa  were  very  strik- 
ingly thickened  and  infiltrated  with  inflammatory  cells.  This  interstitial 
reaction  extended  into  the  finer  ramifications.  The  lung  tissue  in  the  im- 
mediate vicinity  of  the  larger  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery  showed 
collapsed  alveoli,  frequently  containing  polymorphonuclear  cells  and  macro- 
phages. Many  of  the  smaller  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery  were  sur- 
rounded by  a mantle  of  inflammatory  cells  and  display  a marked  thick- 
ening of  the  wall  and  narrowing  of  the  lumen  (Plate  III,  Fig.  2).  Some  ves- 
sels disclosed  entire  replacement  with  fibrous  tissue.  There  was  also  evi- 
dence of  purulent  bronchitis,  obliterating  bronchiolitis,  pneumonia  and 
edema.  Organizing  pneumonia  was  in  evidence.  One  wide  patch  of  lung 
tissue  was  completely  fibrotic,  suggesting  a completely  organized  infarct. 
The  ghost-like  remains  of  its  vessel  of  supply  was  present  in  its  center 
(Plate  III,  Fig.  1).  The  lumen  of  this  artery  was  completely  filled  with  scar 
tissue  indicating  an  organization  of  the  original  thrombus.  A gram  stain 
showed  a small  number  of  gram  positive  cocci  in  the  lung  tissue  while  an 
iron  stain  revealed  large  amounts  of  iron  pigment  in  the  walls  of  the  larger 
arteries  and  in  the  macrophages  (heart  failure  cells)  which  occupied  the 
alveolar  spaces.  In  the  lumen  of  one  bronchus  an  adult  Dirofilaria  was  seen 
(Plate  V,  Figs.  1 and  2).  The  hilar  lymph  nodes  revealed  evidence  of  hyper-) 
plasia.  A gram  stain  disclosed  only  an  occasional  gram  positive  coccus. 

The  capsule  of  the  liver  was  slightly  thickened.  The  hepatic  architec- 
ture was  severely  distorted.  There  was  marked  central  congestion  and 
marked  secondary  atrophy  of  liver  cells.  In  some  places  entire  patches  were 
devoid  of  liver  cells  and  were  replaced  by  cavernous  sinusoids.  Disse’s 
spaces  were  widened  and  filled  with  granular  material.  The  Kupfer  cells 
were  markedly  swollen  and  some  showed  erythrophagocytosis.  The  biliary 
ducts  were  not  increased.  A large  branch  of  the  hepatic  vein  contained  an 
organizing  thrombus.  An  adult  worm  lay  within  the  lumen  next  to  the 
thrombus.  An  iron  stain  disclosed  very  little  iron  and  the  gram  stain  only 
occasional  gram  positive  cocci. 

The  spleen  was  markedly  congested.  The  pancreas  displayed  vascular 
congestion.  The  adrenals  presented  slight  hemorrhage  in  the  zone  reticu- 
laris. The  kidneys  were  the  seat  of  marked  congestion,  edema  and  de- 
generation of  the  tubular  epithelium.  There  was  slight  interstitial  focal  in- 
filtrations of  plasma  cells. 

Unfortunately  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  were  lost  and  could  not  be 
examined  microscopically.  No  larvae  were  detected  in  any  of  the  tissues. 
All  tissues  were  fixed  in  formalin. 


1938] 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


241 


The  final  diagnosis  was : Dirofilaria  immitis  infestation  of  the  right 
heart  with  thrombosis  in  the  right  heart,  pulmonary  artery  and  its  branches, 
and  the  right  branch  of  the  hepatic  vein ; chronic  arteritis  of  the  pulmonary 
artery  and  its  branches  with  aneurism  formation  of  many  of  the  branches 
and  pulmonary  arteriosclerosis;  mai'ked  hypertrophy  of  the  right  ventricle 
and  auricle  with  tremendous  dilatation ; chronic  endocarditis  of  the  out- 
flow tract  of  the  right  ventricle;  multiple  pulmonary  infarcts;  chronic 
purulent  bronchiolitis;  chronic  pneumonitis  of  all  lobes;  staphylococcus 
sepsis ; severe  acute  and  chronic  passive  congestion  of  the  liver  with  atrophy 
and  pseudoadenomatous  formation;  acute  purulent  meningitis;  large  cyst 
of  the  liver;  and  slight  interstitial  nephritis. 


Comment. 

A review  of  the  reported  cases,  including  the  instance  herein  de- 
scribed, indicates  that  the  usual  cause  of  death  in  dirofilariasis  of  the 
pulmonary  arterial  tree  is  congestive  right  heart  failure.  Anatomically,  it 
was  evidenced  in  this  case  by  right  cardiac  hypertrophy  and  excessive  dila- 
tation, an  extreme  degree  of  chronic  passive  congestion  of  the  liver  and 
ascites.  From  the  character  of  the  arterial  lesions  observed  there  is  indi- 
cation that  one  of  the  earliest  effects  on  the  pulmonary  arteries  may  be  a 
toxic  degeneration  of  the  pulmonary  arterial  wall  caused  by  the  humoral 
products  of  the  adult  parasites.  This  arteritis  in  turn  may  have  caused 
the  thrombosis  in  the  pulmonary  vessels,  followed  by  the  development  of 
marked  chronic  changes  in  the  vessel  walls  and  organization  of  the  thrombi. 
The  hypertension  of  the  pulmonary  circuit  thus  engendered  by  the  presence 
of  such  an  occluding  mechanism,  caused  dilation  of  the  right  ventricle  and 
subsequent  hypertrophy.  The  pulmonary  hypertension  may  in  turn  be  a 
contributing  factor  in  the  causation  of  the  thickening  of  the  intima  and  the 
endocardium.  The  endocarditis  may  well  be  a change  de  novo  or  possibly 
an  exaggeration  of  a preceeding  endocarditis  which  is  so  commonly  found  in 
animals  of  the  older  age  group.  Thrombus  formation  may  also  be  provoked 
by  this  endocardial  lesion.  As  the  right  heart  fails,  the  slowing  of  the  cir- 
culation produced  in  the  great  veins  leading  to  the  right  heart,  plus  the 
presence  of  the  adult  parasites,  would  tend  to  foster  further  thrombosis  in 
these  places.  We  have  then,  four  factors  that  may  have  a causative  relation- 
ship to  thrombus  formation,  namely:  toxic  arteritis,  chronic  endocarditis, 
slowing  of  the  venous  circulation,  and  the  adult  Dirofilariae  acting  as  foreign 
bodies.  The  pulmonary  arteriosclerosis  in  the  case  herein  reported  may  be 
considered  as  secondary  to  the  pulmonary  hypertension. 

The  presence  of  this  obstructing  mechanism,  together  with  the  asso- 
ciated infarcts,  whatever  the  pathogenesis  of  the  latter  may  be,  causes  gen- 
eralized anoxemia,  as  a result  of  the  interference  with  the  pulmonary  cir- 
culation. This  readily  accounts  for  part  of  the  symptom-complex  that  the 
diseased  animals  present,  such  as,  dyspnea,  cyanosis  and  weakness. 

It  is  interesting  in  connection  with  the  arterial  lesions  encountered  to 
briefly  mention  the  report  of  Clark  and  Graef  of  a case  of  Schistosomiasis 
mansoni  in  a twenty-one  year  old  Puerto  Rican  girl  who  died  of  congestive 
failure.  Post-mortem  examination  revealed  a markedly  dilated  right  heart. 
Evidence  of  arteritis  and  dilatation  of  the  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery 
with  associated  severe  arteriosclerosis  was  noted.  The  authors  were  able 
to  demonstrate  the  ova  in  the  media  and  concluded  that  the  arteritis  was 
a specific  response  to  the  parasite,  while  the  arteriosclerotic  thickening  was 
assumed  to  be  secondary  to  the  increased  tension  within  the  pulmonary 
arterial  tree.  We  do  not  feel  that  the  arteritis  observed  by  us  was  caused 
by  the  presence  of  adult  or  embryonic  parasites  in  the  wall  of  the  vessels. 
We  could  not  demonstrate  such  a lesion  as  did  Clark  and  Graef.  On  the 


242 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :11 


contrary,  we  are  inclined  to  the  view  that  the  toxins  elaborated  by  the  adult 
Dirofilaria  and  their  larvae  may  have  caused  the  arteritis.  The  work  of  Yano, 
referred  to  above,  in  which  he  produced  renal  changes  after  injection  of  a 
centrifuged  extract  of  female  Dirofilaria,  gives  some  support  to  this  concept. 

In  the  case  reported  here,  the  additional  factor  of  severe  infection  must 
be  held  accountable  as  the  immediate  cause  of  the  animal’s  death. 

We  failed  to  detect  any  microfilaria  in  the  tissues  we  examined.  This 
is  not  surprising  when  one  considers  the  life  cycle  of  the  Dirofilaria.  For  it 
is  known  that  the  larvae  produced  by  the  adult  filaria  are  not  capable  of 
maturing  in  the  host  and  tend  to  disappear.  They  must  pass  through  an 
intermediate  host  (mosquito)  and  be  innoculated  into  a dog  or  other  sus- 
ceptible animal  before  they  are  capable  of  reaching  an  adult,  sexually  mature 
state.  In  our  case,  where  the  adult  nematodes  were  apparently  dying  as 
they  were  entrapped  in  thrombi,  fewer  and  fewer  embryos  were  produced 
and  thus  none  was  seen  in  the  tissues.  The  blood  of  the  wolf  was  not 
examined  before  death. 

It  is  apparent  from  what  has  been  said  that  in  infested  animals  with 
cardiac  embarrassment,  the  additional  toxic  effect  of  an  anesthetic  on  the 
cardiac  muscle  readily  explains  the  cases  of  death  ensuing  during  anesthesia 
reported  in  the  literature. 


Summary. 

1.  A review  of  the  literature  on  the  morbid  anatomy  of  Dirofilaria 
immitis  infestation  in  mammals  is  presented. 

2.  An  instance  of  such  infestation  in  a gray  wolf  dying  of  congestive 
heart  failure  and  superimposed  sepsis  is  described. 

3.  An  unusual  feature  of  arteritis  with  associated  aneurysmal  dilata- 
tion of  the  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery  is  reported. 

The  author  is  indebted  to  Dr.  Charles  R.  Schroeder  for  his  kind  co- 
operation and  permission  to  publish  the  case;  and  to  Drs.  Paul  Klemperer 
and  Sadao  Otani  for  their  valuable  aid  in  the  preparation  of  this  report. 


Bibliography. 


Andrews,  Mary  N. 

1937.  Hyperinfection  of  dogs  with  microfilaria.  J.  Helminth.,  15,  167-168. 
Augustine,  D.  L.,  Drinker,  & Leigh: 

1935.  On  the  filtration  of  microfilaria  by  lymph  nodes.  Tr.  Royal  Soc.  Troy. 
Med.  and  Hygiene,  29,  51. 


Augustine,  D.  L.,  & Drinker 

1935.  Migration  of  microfilaria  (dirofilaria  immitis)  from  blood  vessels  to 
lymphatics.  Tr.  Royal  Soc.  Troy.  Med.  and  Hygiene,  29,  303-306. 

Augustine,  D.  L.,  Field,  & Drinker 

1936.  Observations  on  living  microfilaria  immitis  in  the  capillary  circulation 
of  bats.  Tr.  Royal  Soc.  Troy.  Med.  and  Hygiene,  30,  231. 


Blackberg,  S.  N.,  & Ashman,  R. 

1930.  Electrocardiographic  studies  of  dogs  infested  with  dirofilaria  immitis. 
J.  A.  Vet.  M.  A.,  77.  204-211. 


Clark,  E.,  & Graef,  I. 

1935.  Chronic  pulmonary  arteritis  in  schistosomiasis  mansoni  associated  with 
right  ventricular  hypertrophy.  Report  of  a case.  Amer.  J.  Path.,  11, 
693-707. 


1938] 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


243 


De  Rosario,  F. 

1936.  Dirofilaria  immitis  Leidy  and  its  culicine  intermediate  host  in  Manila. 
Philippine  J.  Sci.,  60,  45-55. 

French,  W.  F. 

1899.  Worms  in  a dog’s  heart.  Amer.  Vet.  Rev.,  23,  432-434. 

Fullerborn,  F. 

1929.  In  the  “Handbuch  der  pathogenen  Mikroorganismen”  by  Kolle  and 
Wasserman. 

Gaillard,  H. 

1937.  L’Evolution  de  dirofilaria  immitis  Leidy  chez  Aedes  (Stegomya) 
aegypti  et  A.  olbopictus  au  Turkin.  Comp.  Rend.  Soc.  de  Biol.,  125,  130- 
132. 

Gruby  & Delafond 

Recuil  de  Medecine  V eterinaire,  Bd.  20. 

Hall,  M.  C„  Price,  E.  W.,  & Wright,  W.  H. 

1935.  Parasites  and  parasitic  diseases  of  dogs.  U.  S.  Dept.  Agriculture. 
Dept.  Circ.  No.  338.  May. 

Hayes,  I.  M. 

1933.  Filariasis  or  heartworm  in  dogs.  Vet.  Med.,  28,  140-143. 

Hill,  V.  C. 

1934.  Some  data  on  dirofilaria  immitis.  Vet.  Bull.  U.  S.  Army,  28,  252-253. 
Hopkins,  J.  G. 

1906.  Six  cases  of  infection  with  filaria  immitis.  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  Bull., 
17,  377-379. 

Hinman,  E.  H. 

1935.  Studies  on  dog  heartworm.  Amer.  J.  Trop.  Med.,  15.  371-382. 
Hinman,  E.  H. 

1936.  Attempted  reversal  of  periodicity  in  dirofilaria  immitis.  Proc.  Soc. 
Exp.  Biol,  and  Med.,  33,  524-527. 

Hinman,  E.  H.,  & Baker,  D.  D. 

1936.  Helminthologic  survey  of  1,305  dogs  from  New  Orleans  with  special 
reference  to  age  resistance.  J.  Trop.  Med.,  39,  101-104. 

Hinman,  E.  H.,  Faust,  E.  C.,  & De  Bakey,  M.  E. 

1936.  Filarial  Periodicity  in  dog  heartworm  dirofilaria  immitis  after  blood 
transfusion.  Proc.  Exp.  Bio.  and  Med.,  31,  1043. 

Horn,  H. 

1937.  The  Experimental  Nephropathies.  Archiv.  Path.,  23,  71-121. 

Howard,  F.  H. 

1903-1904.  Case  of  filaria  immitis  in  heart  of  a dog.  Proc.  Path.  Soc.  (Phila.), 
7.  91-96. 

Hu,  Stephen  M.  K. 

1931.  Host-parasite  relationships  of  dirofilaria  immitis.  Am.  J.  Hyg.,  14,  614- 
629. 

Hutyra  & Marak 

1926.  “Pathology  and  Therapeutics  of  the  Diseases  of  Domestic  Animals,” 
Vol.  3.  Budapest. 

Janson,  J.  L.  & Tokishige,  H. 

1899-1892.  Filaria  immitis.  Mitteilungen  Deutche  Gesell  f.  Volkerk.  Ostas- 
iens,  5,  349. 


244 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :11 


Joyeux,  Ch.,  & Cabassu,  J. 

1935.  Etude  sur  le  filariose  des  chiens  de  Camargue.  Frequence  de  dirofilaria 
immitis  (Leidy).  Bull,  de  le  Soc.  Path.  Exot.,  18,  187. 

Kawakami,  A. 

1919.  Ueber  die  Verteilung  der  Microfilarien  in  den  verschiedenen  Organen 
von  Hunden,  die  von  filaria  immitis  infiziert  worden  sind.  Verhandl.  d. 
Jay.  Path.  Gesellsch.,  Tokio,  9,  95. 

Leidy 

1856.  Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.,  5.  118. 

Lent,  H.,  & Teixeira  de  Freitas,  J. 

1911.  Dirofilaria  Raillet  and  Henry.  Mem.  Inst.  Oswaldo  Cruz.,  1937,  32. 
37-54. 

Lynch,  K.  M. 

1919.  Filarial  periodicity.  J.  Am.  Med.  A.,  73,  760. 

Magalhaes,  De  P.  S. 

1892.  Die  filaria  bancrofti;  Cobbald  und  die  filaria  immitis.  Centrbl.  F.  Bac- 
teriol.  u.  Parasitenk  {Jena),  12,  511-514. 

Magalhaes,  de,  P.  S. 

1886.  Rev.  des.  cursos.  theor.  e.  prat.  d.  fac.  de  med.  d.  Rio  di  Janeiro,  Anno 
3,  No.  3. 

Manson-Baiir  Philip,  H 

1935.  “Lectures  on  Tropical  Diseases.”  W.  T.  Keene’s  and  Co.,  Chicago. 
Markus,  H. 

1909-1910.  Filaria  immitis  Bij.  den  hond  in  Nederland.  Tijdschr.  V veeart- 
senijk  Moandbl.,  Utrect,  37,  449-456. 

McGinnis,  C.  L. 

1933.  Filariasis  in  a dog.  Vet.  Med.,  28,  140-143. 

Mazza,  S. 

1937.  Filarideo  del  corozon  de  coati.  (Filariasis  in  the  heart  of  a raccoon). 
Prensa  med.  Argent.,  13,  1045-1048. 

Mazza,  S.,  Rosenbusch,  F.,  & Antequeda,  E. 

1926~.  Secunda  nota  preliminar  sobre  la  microfilaria  sp.  de  los.  penos.  del 
Norte.  (Microfilaria  in  dogs).  Bol.  Inst,  de  Clin.  Quir.,  2,  267-272. 

Mullany,  J. 

1934.  Heartworm  in  Hong  Kong.  J.  Royal  Army  Vet.  Corps,  6,  34-35. 

Nigrelli,  Ross 

Personal  communication. 

Pavoloff,  P. 

1935.  Dirofilaria  immitis  in  Bulgaria.  Vet.  Sbir.,  39,  133-135. 

Perard,  Ch. 

1936.  Au  sujet  de  la  filariose  du  chien.  (Dirofilaria  immitis).  Bui.  De  la  Soc. 
Path.  Exot.,  19,  1036. 

Peysson 

1806.  Observations  de  pathologie  comparee  sur  des  vers  trouves  dans  le  coeur 
d’un  chien.  Annals  Soc.  de  med.  prat,  de  Montpel.,  15,  49-53. 

Popesco,  F. 

1935.  Canine  Filariasis  in  Roumania.  Arch.  Vet.  Bucharest,  25,  145-148. 


1938] 


Hartley:  Pathology  of  Dirofilaria  Infestation 


245 


Prieto,  R.  R. 

1934.  Filariasis  as  a cause  of  sudden  death.  Rev.  Hig.  y San.  pec.,  Madrid, 
24.  53-54. 

Roulard,  E.,  Colas-Balcour,  J.,  Touranoff,  C.,  & Treillard,  M. 

1936.  Transmission  of  dirofilaria  immitis  Leidy.  Bull.  Soc.  Path.  Exot.,  29. 
111-112. 

Raillet  and  Henry 

1911.  Bui.  de  la  Soc.  de  Path.  Exot.,  Vol.  4,  p.  285. 

Ryan,  J.  F. 

1919.  Filaria  immitis  in  a dog’s  heart.  J.  Am.  Vet.  Assn.,  55,  199. 

Saphir,  Otto 

1932.  Bands  and  Ridges  in  the  Pulmonary  Artery.  Archiv.  Path.,  14.  10-20. 
Shattock,  S.  G. 

1881-1882.  Filaria  immitis  in  a dog’s  heart.  TV.  Path.  Soc.,  London,  33,  434. 
Siiipley,  Arthur  E. 

1894.  Notes  on  a dog’s  heart  infected  with  filaria  immitis.  Proc.  of  Cam- 
bridge Philosophical  Soc.,  8,  211-214. 

Simonelli,  A. 

1936.  Canine  Filariasis  in  Umbria.  Nuovo  Ercol.,  41,  169-178. 

Skrjbin,  K.  J.,  Althausen,  A.  Y.,  & Schulman,  E.  S. 

1930.  First  case  of  dirofilaria  repens  in  man.  Trop.  Med.  i.  vet.,  8.  9-11. 

Smith,  Allen  J. 

1915-1916.  Filiariasis  in  the  Americas.  Proc.  of  the  Second  Pan  Amer.  Scient. 
Cong.,  sect.  8,  part  1,  vol.  9,  pp.  49-76. 

Woods,  G.  W. 

1885-1886.  (U.S.N.)  Report  on  filaria  in  dogs.  U.  S.  Navy  Dept.  Bur.  Med. 
and  Surg.  Gen.  Doc.  U.  S.  N.,  pp.  100-103. 

Underwood,  P.  C. 

1933.  A case  of  heartworm  (dirofilaria  immitis)  in  a Virginia  dog.  J. 
Parisitol.,  20,  77. 

Vaills,  L. 

1930.  Filaria  and  microfilaria  infection  in  dogs.  Rev.  vet.  Toulouse,  88,  133- 
144. 

Van  Meter,  S.  D. 

1892.  The  filaria  immitis.  TV.  Colorado  M.  Soc.,  pp.  288-292. 

Welch,  F.  H. 

1873.  On  a species  of  filaria  found  in  the  interior  of  the  vascular  system  of 
a dog.  Lancet,  1.  336-338 

Yamanouch,  M. 

1928.  Distribution  of  experimentally  introduced  larvae  of  dirofilaria  immitis 
in  the  kidney.  Tr.  Jap.  Path.  Soc.  1 8,  487-489. 

Yamamoto,  K. 

1936.  Histopathological  findings  of  the  uterus,  placenta,  and  fetus  of  dogs 
with  dirofilaria  immitis  infections.  Tr.  Soc.  Path.  Jap.,  26,  690-694. 

Yano,  A. 

1927.  Findings  in  the  kidneys  of  a dog  with  dirofilaria  immitis.  Jap.  Med. 
World,  7,  pp.  292  and  also  324. 


246 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Markedly  dilated  and  hypertrophied  right  cardiac  chamber. 

Fig.  2.  Right  lung  with  pulmonary  arteries  opened  to  show  old  and  fresh  thrombi 
(A)  and  adult  Dirofilaria  (B).  Note  organizing  network  over  intima  (C). 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  1.  Right  lower  lobe  (larger)  and  right  upper  lobe  (smaller)  showing  areas 
of  infarction  and  pneumonitis.  Note  aneurysmal  dilation  of  pulmonary 
artery  (A). 

Fig.  2.  Liver  with  hepatic  vein  containing  thrombus  and  adult  Dirofilaria. 

Plate  III. 

Fig.  1.  Cross  section  of  a branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery  showing  complete  or- 
ganization of  a thrombus.  Elastica  exhibits  marked  fragmentation  and  de- 
struction. (Section  taken  from  an  infarcted  area.  Elastica-carmine  stain). 

Fig.  2.  Smaller  branch  of  pulmonary  artery  showing  markedly  thickened  intima 
and  narrowed  lumen.  (Elastica-carmine  stain). 

Plate  IV. 

Fig.  1.  Wall  of  large  branch  of  pulmonary  artery  showing  purulent  inflammation 
of  intima  (A)  and  thrombus  in  lumen  (B). 

Plate  V. 

Fig.  1.  Low  power  view  of  lung  showing  longitudinal  section  of  an  adult  Diro- 
filaria (A)  lying  within  the  bronchus,  thickened  wall  of  main  branch  of 
pulmonary  artery  revealing  fibrosis  (B)  and  a thrombus  in  lumen  (C). 

Fig.  2.  Enlarged  photograph  of  right  lower  corner  of  Fig.  1 showing  portion  of 
Dirofilaria  lying  within  bronchus,  and  purulent  bronchitis. 


HARTLEY. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  2. 


PATHOLOGY  OF  DIROFILARIA  INFESTATION. 


HARTLEY. 


PLATE  II. 


FIG.  2. 


PATHOLOGY  OF  DIROFILARIA  INFESTATION. 


HARTLEY 


PLATE  III 


FIG.  2. 


PATHOLOGY  OF  DIROFILARIA  INFESTATION 


HARTLEY. 


PLATE  IV. 


PATHOLOGY  OF  DIROFILAR1A  INFESTATION. 


HARTLEY. 


PLATE  V. 


FIG.  2. 


PATHOLOGY  OF  DIROFILARIA  INFESTATION. 


Coates,  Cox  & Smith:  Papilloma  in  Electric  Eel 


247 


12. 

Papilloma  of  the  Skin  Occurring  in  an 
Electric  Eel,  Electro phorus  electric  us  (Linnaeus). 

C.  W.  Coates 

New  York  Aquarium 

R.  T.  Cox 

Department  of  Physics,  New  York  University, 

University  Heights 

& 

G.  M.  Smith 

Department  of  Anatomy,  Yale  School  of  Medicine, 
and  New  York  Aquarium. 

(Plates  I-VI). 

With  the  increase  in  the  reported  instances  of  abnormal  growths  occur- 
ring in  fishes,  it  has  become  apparent  that  cutaneous  tumors  of  teleosts 
are  more  frequently  encountered  than  are  the  visceral  neoplasms  affecting 
deeper-lying  organs.  Among  the  skin  tumors  of  fishes  those  arising  in  the 
connective  tissue  of  the  derma  or  corium  seem  to  be  more  common  than 
those  growths  composed  of  the  squamous  and  mucus  cells  of  the  epidermis. 
There  are,  finally,  a group  of  papillary  tumors  of  the  skin  in  which  the 
hyperplastic  epithelium  is  heavily  supported  by  a stroma  of  connective 
tissue  carrying  blood  and  lymphatic  vessels  and  occasionally  nerves  to  the 
tumor.  These  growths  represent  both  an  epithelial  and  mesodermal  re- 
sponse with  both  types  of  cells  about  equally  distributed.  Such  tumors  may 
be  classified  as  fibro-epithelial  growths  of  the  skin.  Unlike  neoplastic 
growths  in  mammals,  teleost  tumors  which  are  composed  principally  of 
epidermal  cells  appear  to  be  exceedingly  rare.  Even  when  they  occur  in  a 
malignant  form  (epithelioma),  their  rate  of  growth  is  a relatively  slow 
one,  and  the  tumor,  although  involving  adjacent  tissues,  usually  remains 
localized  in  the  region  where  it  has  its  origin,  rarely  giving  rise  to  the  sec- 
ondary growths  in  distant  tissues  or  organs  so  frequently  found  in  mam- 
malian and  avian  tumors. 

Of  the  few  benign  epithelial  tumors  in  fishes  which  have  been  reported 
in  the  literature,  the  following  instance  described  by  Takahashi  (1929)  may 
be  mentioned  as  an  example.  The  growth  was  3 x 2 x 0.5  cm.,  grayish-white 
in  color,  and  occurred  in  a Crucian  carp,  Carassius  carassius,  occupying 
the  region  of  the  left  operculum.  It  was  sharply  circumscribed  and  showed 
on  its  surface  dilated  blood  vessels.  The  tumor  was  composed  histologically 
of  epidermal  cells  which  were  flattened  near  the  surface  and  exhibited  some 
cornification.  Along  the  deep  surface  of  the  tumor  there  was  an  active 
proliferation  of  epithelial  cells  into  the  derma.  Interstitial  connective  tissue 


248 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :12 


was  scanty  but  fairly  well  supplied  with  blood  vessels.  There  was  no  ne- 
crosis, nor  were  there  metastases.  Attempts  to  transplant  small  pieces  of 
tissue  into  other  fishes  of  the  same  species  were  unsuccessful. 

There  are  no  tumors  reported  up  to  the  present  time  occurring  in  the 
electric  eel,  Electrophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  The  small  cutaneous 
growth  here  described  developed  in  the  right  mid-dorsal  region  of  a large 
adult  electric  eel,  caught  in  the  Amazon  river  basin  and  maintained  in  good 
health  in  a fresh  water  tank  at  the  New  York  Aquarium  for  a period  of 
more  than  four  years.  This  particular  eel,  measuring  6 feet  in  length  and 
18  inches  in  largest  circumference,  had  been  tested  frequently  for  electrical 
discharges  estimated  by  measurement  to  be  approximately  350  volts  and 
40  watts  (Coates,  Cox  & Granath,  1937).  Such  electrical  discharges  were 
repeated  at  intervals  of  about  2/1,000  of  a second  when  the  eel  was  dis- 
turbed. Other  eels  subjected  to  the  treatment  in  measuring  electrical  dis- 
charges for  approximately  the  same  period  showed  no  similar  growths. 
The  growth  began  as  a small  elevation  of  the  skin,  pinkish-gray  in  color, 
and  a few  millimeters  in  diameter.  Its  maximum  growth  of  2 x 2.5  cm. 
was  reached  in  about  ten  weeks,  at  which  time  it  was  excised  for  purposes 
of  histological  study.  No  recurrence  took  place  during  the  remaining  year 
and  a half  of  life. 

The  growth  was  a grape-like  pedunculated  mass  (Plate  I,  Figs.  1 and  2) 
and  was  attached  to  the  skin  by  a narrow  short  stalk  above  the  lateral  line. 
It  did  not  appear  to  have  its  origin  in  the  skin  overlying  the  usual  distribu- 
tion of  the  electric  organs.  It  was  of  considerable  interest,  therefore,  when 
the  microscopic  study  disclosed  evidences  of  nerve  trunks  and  nerve  ter- 
minations in  the  epithelium  of  the  growth  itself  (Plates,  IV  & V,  Figs.  7 
and  10). 

The  epithelial  tumor,  regarded  as  a benign  papilloma,  was  composed 
of  solid  masses  of  squamous  epithelium  commingled  with  very  numerous 
mucous  cells,  in  an  arrangement  far  more  irregular  than  that  exhibited  by 
the  normal  skin  (Plate  II,  Figs.  3 and  4).  The  epithelium  composing  the 
various  lobes  of  the  grape-like  mass  was  supported  by  a central  narrow 
fibrous  core  of  connective  tissue  containing  many  small  blood  vessels  along 
the  course  of  which  existed  dendritic  melanophores.  The  linear  distribution 
of  pigmented  cells  external  to  the  thin  walls  of  blood  vessels  gave  to  the 
interior  of  the  tumor  the  peculiar  branching  or  tree-like  effect  seen  by 
transillumination  in  the  gross  specimen  cleared  in  cedar  oil  (Plate  I,  Fig. 
2).  It  will  be  noted  that  pigmented  lines  identifying  the  various  ramifica- 
tions of  the  connective  tissue  stroma  extended  outward  nearly  to  the  free 
surface  of  the  growth. 

It  is  not  the  purpose  of  the  present  paper  to  refer  in  detail  to  the 
rather  complicated  structure  of  the  skin  of  the  electric  eel.  It  may  be  stated 
briefly,  that  the  normal  epidermis  (Plate  VI,  Figs.  11  and  12)  approximately 
20-30  cells  in  depth,  rests  upon  a well  developed  basement  membrane  which 
in  its  turn  separates  epithelium  (E)  from  the  corium  (C).  The  latter  is 
composed  of  dense  connective  tissue  fibers  supporting  the  blood  capillaries, 
lymphatic  vessels,  small  nerve  trunks  and  branches  and  numerous  melano- 
phores. The  pigment  cells  are  spread  out  in  horizontal  arrangement,  at 
times  in  several  layers,  immediately  below  the  hyaline  basement  membrane. 
In  the  normal  skin,  extending  outward  at  right  angles  to  the  surface  of  the 
body,  are  found  at  short  regular  intervals  numerous  prolongations  of  the 
fibrous  tissue  of  the  corium,  passing  as  supporting  septa  (T)  outward  into 
the  epithelium  (Plate  VI,  Fig.  11).  These  supporting  septa  of  connective 
tissue  are  somewhat  conical  in  shape  with  the  broader  base  continuous 
with  the  corium  while  externally  they  taper  off  to  form  finely  pointed  or 
club-shaped  tips  of  delicate  connective  tissue  which  in  this  way  carry  the 
terminal  branches  of  blood  capillaries  with  closely  lying  melanophores  to 
points  near  the  extreme  outer  limits  of  the  epithelial  surface.  Such  sup- 


1938] 


Coates,  Cox  & Smith:  Papilloma  in  Electric  Eel 


249 


porting  septal  strands,  single  or  branching,  form  a region  of  attachment 
for  narrow  elongated  closely  packed  palisade-like  epithelial  cells  (T)  (Plate 
VI,  Fig.  12).  In  contrast  with  these  the  epidermal  cells  springing  from  the 
basement  membrane  between  the  supporting  septa  form  a system  of  low 
cuboidal  and  small  round  epithelial  cells  several  layers  in  density  which  in 
all  probability  represent  matrix  cells  that  give  rise  to  predominant  squamous 
and  mucous  cells  of  the  many-layered  epidermis.  Relatively  few  elongated 
or  fusiform  cells  are  found  resting  on  the  basement  membrane  between 
septa. 

Since  both  the  above-mentioned  prolongations  of  connective  tissue  from 
the  basement  membrane  and  the  tuft-like  arrangement  of  narrow  epithelial 
cells  covering  their  tips  are  very  conspicuous  features  in  the  skin  of  the 
electric  eel,  it  seems  rather  reasonable  to  suppose  that  they  are  somehow 
involved  in  the  conduction  of  the  electric  discharge  from  the  tissue  of  the 
fish  into  the  surrounding  water.  If  these  structures  differ  in  electric  con- 
ductivity from  the  surrounding  epithelial  tissue,  their  presence  must  modify 
the  distribution  of  electric  current  through  the  epithelium.  If  they  are 
markedly  more  conducting  than  the  surrounding  tissue,  their  effect  will  be 
to  concentrate  the  current  in  their  own  structure  through  the  layers  of 
cells  near  the  basement  membrane.  The  branching  of  the  prolongations  near 
the  outer  boundary  of  the  epithelium  would  diffuse  the  current  again  where 
it  passes  through  the  outer  layers.  If  such  a distribution  of  current  in  the 
epithelium  exists,  its  advantage  may  be  to  by-pass  the  discharge  around  the 
matrix  cells  and  so  to  confine  any  injurious  effect  it  may  have  on  the  epi- 
thelial tissue  to  the  outer  layers  of  cells  which  are  constantly  replenished. 

In  our  preparations,  the  extreme  outer  layer  of  cells  of  the  normal 
epidermis  in  contact  with  aquatic  environment  is  composed  of  mucous  cells. 

In  the  papillomatous  growth  all  forms  and  shapes  of  epithelial  cells 
already  mentioned  were  present,  but  did  not  give  the  appearance  of  having 
the  precise  and  regular  arrangement  which  is  seen  so  well  in  the  normal 
skin.  Besides  mucous  cells  there  was  a great  irregular  commingling  of 
squamous  cells  with  variations  in  shape  and  size,  also  with  irregularities 
in  the  size  of  the  nucleus.  In  many  places  epithelial  cells  were  trans- 
versely arranged  running  parallel  with  the  surface.  For  the  most  part 
the  cells  forming  the  outer  boundary  of  the  various  lobules  composing  the 
tumor  were  of  the  mucous  type.  (Plate  III,  Fig.  5). 

The  entire  tumor  after  excision  was  fixed  in  10%  formalin,  embedded 
in  paraffin,  sectioned  serially  and  stained  with  both  hematoxylin  and  eosin 
and  Masson’s  Light  Green  stain.  An  opportunity  was  afforded  therefore 
to  examine  in  sequence  the  stalk-like  attachment  of  the  growth  to  the  skin 
in  order  to  determine  the  presence  of  nerve  tissues. 

Several  small  nerve  trunks  were  found  entering  the  growth  via  the 
narrow  stalk.  One  of  these  was  composed  of  six  separate  bundles  of 
myelinated  nerves,  while  another  consisted  of  two  nerve  bundles.  The  en- 
veloping connective  tissue  of  each  nerve  trunk  was  well  developed.  Of  par- 
ticular interest  was  the  appearance  of  the  perineurium  immediately  sur- 
rounding the  smaller  separate  groups  of  nerve  fibers.  The  perineurium 
was  conspicuous  by  the  lamellated  appearance  of  its  cells  arranged  circularly 
in  several  layers  (Plate  IV,  Figs.  7 and  8).  The  two  primary  nerve  trunks 
which  could  be  traced  in  detail  entered  the  same  lobule  of  the  tumor  at  dif- 
ferent levels  by  penetration  of  the  basement  membrane  and  were  unaccom- 
panied by  blood  or  lymphatic  vessels.  On  reaching  the  epithelium  the 
perineural  cells  were  still  further  increased  in  number  and  rested  in  contact 
with  flattened  adjacent  epithelial  cells,  from  which  they  were  clearly 
distinguished,  particularly  in  sections  stained  by  the  Masson  technique. 
The  lamellated  arrangement  of  cells  about  the  several  groups  of  nerve 
fibers  persisted  as  the  nerve  bundles  coursed  through  the  hyperplastic 


250 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :12 


epithelium  (Plate  V,  Fig.  9)  to  reach  positions  near  the  outer  surface  of 
the  tumor.  Here  individual  nerve  fibers  terminated  with  lamellated  cells 
still  visible  (Plate  V,  Fig.  10).  Terminal  modifications  of  nerve  fibers  were 
thus  formed  resembling  in  many  respects  Pacinian  bodies. 

In  numerous  areas  of  the  growth  considerable  oedema  was  noted.  This 
affected  principally  the  region  near  the  surface  representing  the  terminal 
branches  of  the  small  capillaries  coursing  along  the  fibrous  septa.  The 
tips  of  connective  tissue  septa  here  formed  a delicate  reticulum  in  whose 
meshes  an  oedematous  or  albuminous  material  existed. 

Neither  necrosis  nor  signs  of  inflammation  were  found  in  the  papil- 
loma. There  was  no  evidence  that  parasites  were  present  in  the  abnormal 
tissue.  No  intracellular  inclusion  bodies  could  be  demonstrated.  Collections 
of  monocytes  with  ingested  particles  of  pigment  detritus  were  encountered 
at  intervals  (Plate  III,  Fig.  6). 


Summary. 

The  histological  features  of  a papilloma  arising  in  the  skin  of  Electro- 
phorus  electricus  (Linnaeus),  containing  certain  terminal  modifications  of 
nerve  fibers,  are  described,  and  the  electrical  possibilities  of  the  regions  con- 
taining palisade-like  epithelial  cells  in  the  normal  skin  are  briefly  discussed. 


Bibliography. 

Coates,  C.  W.,  Cox,  R.  T.  & Granath,  L.  P. 

1937.  The  electric  discharge  of  the  electric  eel,  Electrophorus  electricus 
(Linnaeus).  Zoologica,  22:  1. 

Takahashi,  K. 

1929.  Studie  fiber  die  Fischgeschwfilste.  Zeitschrift  fur  Krebsf orschung , 
29:  1. 


1938] 


Coates,  Cox  & Smith:  Papilloma  in  Electric  Eel 


251 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Gross  specimen  of  lobulated  papilloma  excised  from  the  skin  of  an  elec- 
tric eel,  Electrophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  Fixed  in  formalin. 

Fig.  2.  Gross  specimen  of  papilloma,  cleared  in  cedar  oil,  photographed  by 
transillumination  to  show  the  pigmentation  of  the  supporting  stroma 
caused  by  melanophores  which  accompany  small  blood  vessels.  X 4. 

Plate  II. 

Figs.  3 & 4.  Photomicrographs  of  papilloma,  composed  of  hyperplastic  epithelium 
formed  by  commingling  of  squamous  and  mucous  cells.  The  outer  lining 
cells  are  columnar-shaped  mucous  cells.  The  supporting  stroma  of  the 
papilloma  is  fibrous  tissue  containing  pigment  cells  along  the  course  of 
small  blood  vessels.  X 65,  85. 

Plate  III. 

Fig.  5.  Mucous  cells,  columnar  in  form,  covering  the  outer  surface  of  the 
epithelial  growth.  X 275. 

Fig.  6.  Collections  of  monocytic  cells  containing  ingested  pigment  detritus. 
X 325. 

Plate  IV. 

Figs.  7 & 8.  Bundles  of  nerve  fibers  with  thickened  lamellated  perineurium  lying 
in  fibrous  stroma  of  the  growth.  X 150,  250. 

Plate  V. 

Figs.  9 & 10.  Terminal  modifications  of  nerve  fibers  resembling  Pacinian  bodies 
lying  in  the  hyperplastic  epithelium  of  the  growth.  X 250. 

Plate  VI. 

Fig.  11.  Normal  skin  of  Electrophorus  electricus  (Linnaeus).  Many  layers  of 
squamous  epithelial  cells  with  numerous  distended  mucous  cells,  rest 
upon  a dense  fibrous  corium  (C)  containing  pigment  cells.  Supporting 
the  epithelium  are  connective  tissue  septa  (T)  arising  from  the  corium 
and  extending  into  the  epithelium  ( E ) . The  outer  lining  of  the 
epithelium  is  formed  by  columnar  shaped  mucous  cells.  X 95. 

Fig.  12.  Normal  epithelium  of  the  skin  of  electric  eel  showing  septa  attached  to 
which  are  narrow  elongated  epithelial  cells  giving  a tuft-like  appearance 
(T).  (C)  = corium,  (M)  = matrix  cells,  (S)  — squamous  cells,  (X)  — 
mucous  cells.  X 250. 


COATES,  COX  a SMITH. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  2. 


PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTR1CUS  (LINNAEUS) 


COATES,  COX  a SMITH. 


PLATE  II 


FIG.  3. 


FIG.  4. 


PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


COATES,  COX  a SMITH. 


PLATE  III. 


FIG.  5. 


FIG.  6. 


PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


COATES,  COX  & SMITH. 


PLATE  IV. 


FIG.  7. 


FIG.  8. 


PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


COATES,  COX  a SMITH. 


PLATE  V. 


FIG.  9. 


FIG.  10. 


PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


COATES,  COX  & SMITH. 


PLATE  VI. 


FIG.  12. 

PAPILLOMA  OF  THE  SKIN  OCCURRING  IN  AN 
ELECTRIC  EEL,  ELECTROPHORUS  ELECTRICUS  (LINNAEUS). 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


253 


13. 

Arithmetical  Definition  of  the  Species,  Subspecies  and  Race 
Concept,  with  a Proposal  for  a Modified  Nomenclature. 

Containing  a simple  method  for  the  comparison  of  related  populations.1 

Isaac  Ginsburg. 


(Text-figures  1-4). 

Introduction. 

Ever  since  naturalists  began  to  doubt  the  special  creation  of  species, 
in  consequence  of  the  accumulating  incontrovertible  evidence  proving  the 
descent  of  species  from  preexisting  forms  of  life,  the  question  of  what 
constitutes  a species  became  bothersome.  The  acuteness  of  the  problem 
was  intensified  when  biologists  ceased  to  be  satisfied  with  describing  and 
cataloging  species  of  plants  and  animals  by  a study  of  one  or  but  a few 
specimens,  and  began  to  study  in  detail  the  individuals  comprising  a species 
en  masse.  The  great  individual  variability  of  the  characters  employed  for 
specific  distinctions  and  the  consequent  difficulty  of  drawing  sharp  lines  of 
demarcation  between  closely  related  species  wras  thus  revealed. 

This  fundamental  problem  in  biology  engaged  the  attention  of  students 
and  a considerable  literature  has  grown  up  dealing  with  the  question  of 
what  constitutes  a species.  A good  deal  of  what  has  been  written  has 
reference  to  its  speculative  aspects.  It  is  not  the  aim  of  this  article  to 
add  anything  to  the  purely  abstract  discussions  of  the  problem.  Instead, 
it  represents  an  attempt  to  solve  this  problem  and  determine  definitely  just 
what  is  a species  by  reference  to  a series  of  actual  data.  It  is  my  intention 
to  consider  in  detail  a number  of  concrete  cases  showing  the  facts  of 
speciation  as  they  occur  in  nature  and  an  attempt  is  made  to  correlate  the 
facts  and  draw  the  proper  conclusions  therefrom. 

The  data  employed  to  support  the  propositions  advanced  in  the  present 
paper  are  entirely  taken  from  populations  of  fishes.  The  data  were  not 
specially  collected  for  this  paper,  but  have  been  gathered  in  connection 
with  my  revisional  studies  of  American  fishes.  Some  of  the  data  have  been 
published  in  reports  on  these  studies;  others  are  here  published  for  the 
first  time,  or  previously  published  data  are  amplified.  As  far  as  the  included 
evidence  is  concerned  this  paper  may  be  said  to  be  a sort  of  a by-product 
of  my  revisional  studies  of  the  genera  of  American  fishes,  and  the  support- 
ing data  presented  below  have  been  only  casually  selected  to  prove  the 
propositions  advanced.  While  the  examples  cited  have  been  taken  entirely 
from  the  class  of  fishes,  the  same  method  no  doubt  will  be  found  applicable 
to  other  groups  of  animals,  and  plants  as  well. 

All  the  examples  included  below  are  based  on  quantitative  characters. 
The  method  developed  here  is  most  strikingly  applicable  to  such  characters 


1 Published  by  permission  of  the  U.  S.  Commissioner  of  Fisheries. 


254 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


which  thus  serve  best  for  the  purpose  of  illustration.  For  some  specific 
characters  this  method  will  be  applied  with  greater  difficulty  and  a lesser 
degree  of  precision,  and  cases  may  be  encountered  in  which  it  is  inappli- 
cable, especially  in  cases  in  which  differences  are  based  on  qualitative  char- 
acters (see  below).  However,  this  is  a problem  in  practical  usage.  Such 
cases  must  be  considered  by  themselves,  and  special  means  of  expressing 
particular  characters  in  the  form  of  frequency  distributions,  may  be  devised. 
The  fact  that  this  method  may  be  inapplicable  practically  in  some  cases  does 
not  detract  from  the  pertinence  of  the  general  principles  evolved  as  a result 
of  its  application  in  the  great  number  of  cases  in  which  it  may  be  used  with 
ease  and  precision. 

The  question  of  what  constitutes  a species  cannot  be  considered  by 
itself.  To  solve  this  problem  consistently  it  must  be  broadened  to  include 
the  subdivisions  of  the  species,  since,  as  will  be  shown  definitely  hereafter, 
the  different  categories  which  may  be  established  imperceptibly  grade  into 
one  another.  This  paper,  therefore,  goes  into  the  whole  problem  of  the 
species  and  its  subdivisions.  In  connection  with  this  study  the  question  of 
the  nomenclature  of  taxonomic  categories  below  specific  rank  is  examined 
and  a modification  of  the  method  now  in  general  use,  is  proposed.  A simple 
method  for  the  comparison  of  closely  related  populations  is  employed  in 
this  paper,  which  may  prove  to  be  a useful  tool  in  the  taxonomic  study  of 
populations  of  specific  or  lower  rank. 

Failure  of  Previous  Attempts  to  Establish  Absolute  Limits 
to  the  Species  Concept. 

A number  of  criteria  have  been  used  by  previous  writers  for  the  pur- 
pose of  defining  and  establishing  absolute  boundaries  to  limit  the  species 
concept.  The  literature  on  the  subject  is  quite  voluminous,  and  it  is  not  my 
present  purpose  to  give  a complete  review  of  such  previous  attempts.  This 
has  been  done  by  a number  of  writers  in  greater  or  lesser  detail,  and  the 
reader  may  be  referred  to  one  of  these  writers,  such  as  Robson  (1928)  who 
also  gives  an  extensive  bibliography  of  the  subject.  In  general,  it  may  be 
stated  that  all  criteria  which  have  been  proposed  for  establishing  absolute 
boundaries  by  which  we  may  definitely  determine  just  what  constitutes  a 
species,  have  been  found  wanting.  One  of  these  criteria,  the  morphological, 
may  be  considered  here  briefly  because  the  definitions  proposed  herewith 
are  based  solely  on  that  criterion.  It  is  the  only  criterion  which  is  most 
generally  useful  in  the  practice  of  taxonomy. 

A population  of  variable  individuals  was  considered  to  be  fully  distinct 
specifically  from  another  population  differing  in  at  least  one  structural  or 
color  character  in  such  manner  that  no  intergrading  individuals  occur,  but 
that  every  single  individual  may  be  referred  either  to  one  or  the  other  of 
the  two  populations.  Such  populations  have  been  regarded  as  fully  distinct 
species.  Even  at  the  present  time  some  systematists  hold  to  this  as  a 
criterion  for  distinguishing  species,  or  as  the  most  important  criterion. 
However,  absolute  lack  of  intergradation  in  nature  is  far  from  being  the 
usual  condition.  On  the  contrary,  intergradation  of  related  populations  is 
so  general  that  it  would  not  be  far  fetched  to  make  the  statement  that  it 
is  the  rule  rather  than  the  exception.  Certainly  most  closely  related  species 
of  fishes,  in  my  experience,  have  been  found  to  intergrade  more  or  less. 

Specific  characters  are  roughly  divisible  into  two  classes:  (1)  quan- 

titative characters,  such  as  the  number  of  fin  rays,  scales  or  vertebrae, 
proportional  measurements,  etc.;  (2)  qualitative,  such  as  differences  in 
color,  or  the  presence  or  absence  of  certain  structures  or  color  marks,  or 
differences  in  their  form.  Among  fishes  the  former  is  predominant.  Qual- 
itative structural  characters  which  are  absolute,  that  is,  they  practically 
do  not  show  any  intergradation,  are  in  many  cases  considered  to  be  of 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


255 


generic  or  subgeneric,  rather  than  specific,  importance.  Also,  two  groups 
of  related  species  between  which  a comparatively  wide  gap  exists  with 
respect  to  a given  quantitative  character  are  often  placed  in  separate  genera 
or  subgenera.  Characters  which  are  considered  to  be  of  specific  importance 
only,  by  general  consent,  more  likely  than  not,  will  be  found  to  intergrade 
between  two  closely  related  populations  when  a sufficiently  large  number 
of  individuals  are  studied  in  detail.  This  is  true  not  only  of  quantitative 
characters,  but  frequently  an  imperceptibly  gradual  intergradation  occurs 
also  in  the  case  of  qualitative  characters,  although  in  the  latter  case  it  may 
be  difficult  to  measure  and  express  in  terms  of  precise  figures  the  degree 
of  intergradation. 

The  general  existence  of  intergradation  is  not  duly  reflected  at  present 
in  taxonomic  works.  The  reason  taxonomists  have  been  able  to  describe 
species  generally  in  such  manner  as  to  make  it  appear  that  no  intergrading 
individuals  are  present,  is  that  these  descriptions  are  usually  based  on  but 
a few  individuals.  Consequently,  by  the  law  of  chance,  such  few  individuals 
were  apt  to  fall,  in  most  cases,  near  the  center,  and  away  from  the  extremes, 
of  a regular  frequency  distribution.  Occasional  bothersome  specimens 
may  have  been  explained  away  as  being  abnormalities,  spoi’ts  or  hybrids. 
However,  such  border  line  specimens  will  be  found  in  most  closely  related 
species  if  a sufficient  number  of  individuals  are  studied  in  detail.  Except 
for  possible  occasional  hybrids,  or  atypical  individuals  for  various  reasons, 
such  specimens  are  normal  individuals,  but  they  fall  in  at  the  extreme  of 
the  frequency  distribution,  and  as  far  as  any  given  single  character  is 
concerned  they  may  as  well  belong  to  one  species  as  to  another  closely 
related  one. 

The  True  Morphological  Criterion  Is  the  Degree  of 
Intergradation,  or  Divergence. 

The  intergradation  between  natural  populations  varies  in  degree.  When 
a sufficient  number  of  pairs  of  closely  related  populations  are  compared  and 
the  several  intergradations,  or  divergences,  are  arranged  in  order  of  mag- 
nitude, we  obtain  a series  that  is  graduated  by  virtually  infinitesimal  steps. 
It  follows,  therefore,  that  the  determination  of  whether  a given  pair  of  pop- 
ulations constitute  two  species  or  belong  to  a category  of  lower  rank  depends 
on  the  degree  of  intergradation;  or,  to  view  it  from  another  angle,  the 
degree  of  divergence.  As  a further  consequence,  it  follows  that  species  as 
well  as  subspecies  and  races  are  not  absolute  entities.  The  lines  drawn  to 
limit  these  classificatory  units  must  be  arbitrary.  That  this  is  not  merely 
a theory  but  the  actual  condition  which  exists  in  nature  is  attempted  to 
be  proved  in  the  paragraphs  which  follow.  (I  discussed  this  proposition  in 
another  paper  (1937a).  Data  to  prove  it  are  presented  here.)  After  adopt- 
ing a measure  by  which  the  degree  of  intergradation  is  expressed  in  terms 
of  a definite  figure,  a series  of  data  obtained  by  the  study  of  pairs  of 
closely  related  populations  of  fishes  is  presented  and  the  figure  expressing 
the  degree  of  intergradation  for  each  pair  is  calculated  by  the  method 
employed.  The  figures  thus  obtained  form  a gradual  series  which  may  be 
arranged  in  ascending  or  descending  order  and  there  are  no  breaks  in  the 
gradual  continuity  of  the  series  where  sharp  lines  may  be  drawn  to  limit 
absolutely  our  concept  of  species,  subspecies  or  race. 

Measure  of  Intergradation,  or  Divergence. 

Our  next  step  in  the  solution  of  the  problem  is  to  adopt  a definite  and 
uniform  measure  by  which  the  degree  of  intergradation,  or  divergence, 
between  any  two  closely  related  populations  may  be  expressed  in  terms  of  a 
single  figure.  Several  methods  of  measuring  intergradation  or  divergence 
may  be  employed.  For  instance,  Davenport  (1898)  proposes  what  are  essen- 


256 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


tially  two  methods  of  measuring  precisely  the  difference  between  two 
closely  related  populations.  Davenport  represents  the  two  related  popula- 
tions, in  every  instance  cited  by  him,  in  the  form  of  a single  bimodal  curve. 
One  measure  which  he  designates  as  the  “index  of  divergence”  represents 
“the  ratio  of  the  distance  between  the  modes  to  the  half-range  ...  of  the 
broader  curve.”  The  other  measure,  designated  by  the  author  as  the  “index 
of  isolation,”  represents  “the  ratio  of  the  depression  [between  the  two  parts 
of  the  bimodal  curve]  to  the  length  of  the  shorter  mode.”  (The  “depres- 
sion” is  the  vertical  distance  between  the  apex  of  the  smaller  curve  and 
the  lowest  point  of  the  depression).  Both  measures  are  expressed  as  per- 
centages. A measure  which  is  often  employed  to  indicate  the  difference  or 
divergence  between  two  populations  may  be  represented  by  the  formula 

Mi  — M; 

V El2  + E? 

in  which  Mj  and  M2  represent  the  means  of  the  two  respective  populations, 
and  E!  and  E2  represent  the  probable  errors  of  the  two  means,  respectively. 
This  expression  represents  the  ratio  of  the  difference  between  the  means  to 
the  probable  error  of  this  difference  (see  Pearl,  1930,  pp.  282-287).  In 
treatises  dealing  with  the  application  of  statistical  methods  to  biological 
problems  the  statement  is  often  made  that  when  the  numerical  value  of  this 
ratio  is  3 or  4,  it  is  “significant.”  Other  methods  may  be  suggested.  For 
our  present  purpose  a simple  method  of  expressing  the  degree  of  intergra- 
dation, or  divergence,  between  two  related  populations  is  proposed  to  be 
used  as  indicated  below. 

For  the  present  I am  not  going  to  discuss  in  detail  the  advantages  and 
disadvantages  of  the  various  methods  which  have  been  proposed  or  which 
may  be  suggested  with  the  method  employed  herein.  This  is  a problem  by 
itself,  a full  discussion  of  which  would  lead  us  astray  from  our  main  thesis. 
If  any  consistent  method  be  adopted  and  a number  of  closely  related  pairs 
of  populations  be  compared  by  it,  the  results  quite  likely  will  form  a gradual 
series  going  to  prove  the  continuity  of  intergradations,  inter  se,  in  nature; 
but  the  relative  position  of  the  pairs  of  populations  compared,  in  the  series, 
will  no  doubt  change  somewhat  according  to  the  method  used,  and  some 
methods  will  more  nearly  represent  the  facts  of  nature  than  others.  A brief 
comparison  is  made  below  (p.  279)  between  the  method  employed  herein  and 
the  standard  method,  and  it  is  shown  that  the  latter  is  not  well  adapted  for 
our  purpose.  Besides  the  fitness  of  the  measure  employed  to  represent  the 
facts  more  nearly  in  their  true  light,  it  has  two  salient  advantages  which 
may  be  mentioned  briefly.  (1)  It  may  be  determined  easily  and  quickly,  a 
very  desirable  consideration,  especially  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  busy 
taxonomist.  (2)  Because  of  its  simple  character  its  pertinence  in  explain- 
ing the  facts  of  nature  is  strikingly  evident  and  the  relationship  of  variable 
and  closely  related  populations  may  be  appreciated  readily  when  this  measure 
is  used. 

Our  simple  measure  may  be  illustrated  by  the  following  hypothetical 
examples.  Let  us  assume  two  species  of  fishes,  A and  B,  the  chief  differenti- 
ating character  of  which  is  represented  by  the  number  of  scales  in  the  lateral 
line,  a character  which  is  frequently  employed  in  distinguishing  closely  re- 
lated species  of  fishes.  Let  us  suppose  further  that  the  scales  of  a hundred 
specimens  of  each  species  have  been  counted,  and  the  figures  obtained  were 
as  follows: 

Number  of  scales  (class)  24  25  26 

Species  A (frequencies)  92  8 

Species  B (frequencies)  97  3 

It  may  be  said  then  that  species  A intergrades  with  species  B to  the  extent 
of  8%  and  this  figure  may  be  suggested  as  our  measure  of  intergradation. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


257 


While  this  figure  obviously  suggests  itself,  it  is  not  the  figure  finally  adopted. 
The  measure  of  intergradation  for  the  above  hypothetical  case,  by  the  method 
employed,  is  4%,  for  reasons  which  will  become  clear  presently. 

In  nature  examples  similar  to  the  above  simple  hypothetical  case  may 
be  encountered ; but  the  variability  and  relationship  of  closely  related  natural 
populations  is  much  more  often  not  as  simple.  Let  us,  therefore,  take  the 
next  step  and  assume  a hypothetical  case  where  the  dispersion  of  the  fre- 
quency distributions  and  the  overlap  are  a little  more  pronounced;  while  at 
the  same  time  the  frequency  distributions  are  perfectly  regular,  as  follows : 
Number  of  scales  (class)  24  25  26  27 

Species  A (frequencies)  5 90  5 

Species  B (frequencies)  5 90  5 

In  this  perfectly  regular  hypothetical  case  each  species  overlaps  the  other  by 
5%  and  this  figure  may  be  taken  as  our  measure  of  intergradation. 

Again  it  may  be  stated  that  perfectly  regular  frequency  distributions 
such  as  the  foregoing  hypothetical  case  are  seldom  encountered  in  practice. 
Frequency  distributions  are  usually  irregular  or,  to  use  the  technical  ex- 
pression, skewed.  Part  of  the  irregularity  encountered  in  practice  is  no 
doubt  due  to  incomplete  sampling  of  the  populations;  but  it  is  evident  that 
skewness  in  the  frequency  distributions  of  populations  is  the  more  usual 
and  normal  condition  in  nature.  Let  us  then  assume  a hypothetical  case 
where  the  frequency  distribution  is  irregular  while  the  overlap  is  more  pro- 
nounced than  in  the  simple  hypothetical  case  cited  first,  as  follows: 

Number  of  scales  (class)  24  25  26  27 

Species  A (frequencies)  3 89  8 

Species  B (frequencies)  6 85  9 

This  case  is  a little  more  complicated  and  is  nearer  the  majority  of  examples 
encountered  in  actual  practice.  How  are  we  to  measure  intergradation  in 
this  case? 


Frequency  polygons  of  the  number  of  scales  of  two  hypothetical  species; 
see  discussion  in  text.  Solid  line  represents  species  A,  broken  line  rep- 
resents species  B. 

If  two  frequency  polygons  be  constructed  to  represent  graphically  the 
foregoing  hypothetical  data  (Text-fig.  1),  the  polygons  will  intersect  at  a 
point  over  the  abscissal  axis  between  the  points  representing  25  and  26 


258 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


scales.  If  a vertical  line  be  drawn  from  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  two 
polygons,  it  will  be  found  that  8 specimens  of  species  A cross  over  to  the 
right  of  the  dividing  line,  and  6 specimens  of  species  B cross  over  to  the 
left.  The  specimens  thus  crossing  over  may  be  said  to  intergrade.  Species 
A therefore  intergi’ades  with  respect  to  species  B to  the  extent  of  8%  ; while 
species  B intergrades  with  species  A in  6%  of  the  individuals.  The  inter- 
gradation is  thus  not  the  same  in  both  species.  This  is  a result  of  the  skew- 
ness of  the  frequency  distributions  and  is  the  usual  condition  encountered 
in  practice,  as  stated.  However,  we  want  a single  figure  which  will  I'epre- 
sent  the  intergradation  between  two  species.  This  is  obtained  by  taking  the 
simple  average  of  the  two  figures.  The  intergradation  of  species  A and  B 
in  this  hypothetical  case  is  therefore  7%. 

We  will  now  take  up  an  actual  case  and  see  how  this  measure  works  in 
practice.  Let  us  take  the  case  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus,  the  northern  Atlantic 
and  Gulf  coast  populations  of  which  diverge  sufficiently  to  place  them  well 
up  in  the  following  gradated  series  of  examples.  The  two  populations  diverge 
chiefly  in  the  frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  fin  for  which  the  data  are  given  in  Table  VII,  p.  267.  These  data  are 


Text-figure  2. 

Frequency  polygons  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second  dorsal 
fin  of  two  populations  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus,  based  on  data  given  in 
Table  VII,  the  actual  number  of  specimens  being  represented.  The 
solid  line  represents  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population;  the  broken  line 
represents  the  Texas  population.  The  dotted  vertical  line  represents 
the  dividing  line  between  the  two  polygons  as  used  throughout  the 
present  discussion  for  the  purpose  of  determining  and  measuring  the 
degree  of  intergradation. 

represented  graphically  by  Text-fig.  2 which  illustrates  the  frequency  poly- 
gons of  the  two  populations  and  the  dividing  line  that  forms  the  basis  of 
determining  the  measure  of  intergradation  as  used  throughout  the  present 
discussion.  Of  the  northern  population  15  specimens  cross  over  to  the  right 
of  the  dividing  line,  or  14.42%  of  the  composite  sample  studied  comprising 
104  specimens;  and  50  specimens  of  the  Gulf  coast  population  cross  over  to 
the  left  of  the  line,  or  44.64%  of  the  sample  which  comprises  112  fish.  The 
simple  average  of  these  two  percentages,  in  round  figures,  is  30,  which  rep- 


1938] 


Ginsburg : Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


259 


resents  the  measure  of  intergradation  of  those  two  populations.  In  practice, 
it  is  usually  not  necessary  actually  to  construct  the  polygons;  but  the  point 
where  the  dividing  line  is  to  be  drawn  may  be  determined  by  inspection  after 
arranging  the  data  in  a frequency  distribution  table,  preferably  in  the  form 
of  percentages  (see  Table  I). 

This  measure  of  intergradation,  which  is  uniformly  employed  in  this 
paper,  has  the  following  statistical  basis.  If  the  histograms  representing 
the  two  populations  compared  be  constructed  on  a percentage  basis,  the  area 
enclosed  by  the  two  overlapping  histograms,  expressed  as  a percentage  of 
the  sum  of  their  separate  areas,  equals  the  measure  of  intergradation  deter- 
mined as  indicated  above.  In  other  words,  the  measure  of  intergradation  as 
employed  for  our  present  purpose  represents  the  measure  of  the  area  en- 
closed by  the  two  overlapping  histograms  expressed  as  a percentage.  This 
may  be  illustrated  graphically  by  the  pair  of  intergrading  populations  of 
Sciaenops  ocellatus. 


TABLE  I. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  fin  rays  in  the  sec- 
ond dorsal  of  two  races  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus,  expressed  as  percentages  of 
the  total  number  of  specimens  counted  of  each  race,  respectively. 


Locality 

Number  of  dorsal  rays 

(percentages)  : 

Totals 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

Chesapeake  Bay 

3.85 

31.73 

50.00 

13.46 

.96 

100 

Texas  coast 

6.25 

38.39 

42.86 

12.50 

100 

The  smaller  of  the  over- 
lapping percentages 

6.25 

38.39 

13.46 

.96 

59.06 

Table  I gives  in  percentage  form  the  data  represented  in  Table  VII,  p. 
267.  This  is  necessary  for  the  purpose  of  constructing  the  graphs  because 
the  number  of  specimens  in  the  two  samples  is  not  the  same,  the  usual  con- 
dition in  practice;  whereas,  in  order  to  show  the  normal  amount  of  overlap 
of  the  two  populations  it  is  necessary  to  have  two  samples  containing  the 
same  number  of  individuals.  Text-figs.  3 and  4 illustrate  graphically  the 
data  presented  in  Table  I.  Text-fig.  3 shows  the  overlapping  histograms  of 
the  two  populations,  the  part  of  each  histogram  which  overlaps  the  other 
being  distinctively  shaded.  In  Text-fig.  4,  drawn  to  the  same  scale,  the  two 
histograms  are  shown  side  by  side  with  the  shaded  areas  the  same  as  in 
Text-fig.  3.  Text-fig.  4 shows  at  a glance  the  approximate  relation  of  the 
sum  of  the  two  shaded  areas,  or  the  area  enclosed  by  the  overlapping  histo- 
grams, to  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  two  histograms.  Precisely,  this  area 
equals  30%,  in  round  figures,  of  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  two  histograms. 
The  measure  of  intergradation  is  therefore  30%  in  this  particular  case. 
This  result  may  be  obtained  by  adding  the  smaller  of  the  overlapping  fre- 
quencies, as  shown  in  Table  I,  and  dividing  the  sum  by  2 in  order  to  get  the 
percentage  of  the  area  overlapped  to  the  sum  of  the  two  histograms;  or  by 
the  simple  arithmetical  calculation  as  indicated  above. 

The  measure  of  divergence  may  be  indicated  as  a percentage  also,  by 
subtracting  the  measure  of  intergradation  as  determined  above  from  100. 

The  calculation,  and  hence  the  number  denoting  intergradation,  or  di- 
vergence, is  always  based  on  the  character  showing  the  greatest  degree  of 
divergence.  There  may  be  some  question  as  to  the  adequacy  of  the  use  of  a 
single  character,  since  we  know  that  populations  usually  differ  in  several 
characters,  some  of  which  such  as  color  differences  are  not  readily  expressible 
in  definite  figures.  Some  attempts  have  been  made  to  combine  several  char- 
acters and  express  the  hypothetical  sum  of  their  differences  by  a single  fig- 


260 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


ure.  However,  I am  not  at  all  satisfied  that  such  attempts  have  succeeded  in 
producing  a measure  which  will  more  satisfactorily  express  for  our  purpose 
the  essential  biological  facts.  Besides,  in  studying  and  combining  the  data 
for  several  characters  the  question  will  always  come  up  as  to  just  where  to 
draw  a line  since  practically  it  would  be  almost  impossible  to  study  them 
all.  While  not  entirely  adequate  the  present  measure  should  prove  sufficient 
for  practical  purposes,  and  conclusions  arrived  at  as  a result  of  studies  by 
the  standard  statistical  formulae  have  been  based  on  a single  character.  Cer- 
tainly in  the  determination  of  the  differences  between  species  or  subspecies 
it  is  the  character  which  shows  the  greatest  divergence  that  is  the  important 
one  to  consider.  In  the  method  here  employed  provision  is  made  for  taking 
into  consideration  other  differentiating  characters  besides  the  one  showing 
the  greatest  divergence  (see  p.  276)  ; although  such  characters  are  considered 
in  a general  way  and  not  expressed  in  terms  of  definite  figures.  This  is 
probably  the  best  that  may  be  done  for  the  present. 

Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species,  Subspecies  and  Race. 

Using  the  above  measure,  it  is  proposed  tentatively  to  limit  the  desig- 
nation of  species  and  its  subdivisions  as  follows:  Other  things  being  equal, 
a given  population  is  to  be  considered  a race  with  respect  to  another  closely 
related  population  when  the  average  intergradation  of  the  character  show- 
ing the  greatest  divergence  is  between  30%  and  40%;  a subspecies  consti- 
tutes a population  intergrading  between  15%  and  25%  ; it  is  to  be  considered 
a full  species  when  the  degree  of  intergradation  is  not  more  than  10%.  Con- 


Text-figure  3. 

Overlapping  histograms  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  fin  of  two  populations  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus;  based  on  the  same 
data  as  Text-figure  2,  but  the  number  of  specimens  in  each  class  ex- 
pressed as  a percentage  of  the  entire  sample  studied.  The  solid  line 
represents  the  Chesapeake  Bav  population;  the  broken  line  represents 
the  Texas  population;  the  hatched  space  represents  the  area  by  which 
the  latter  histogram  overlaps  the  former,  and  the  stippled  space  rep- 
resents the  area  by  which  the  former  histogram  overlaps  the  latter. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


261 


Text-figure  4. 

The  same  two  histograms  represented  in  Text-figure  3,  separated  and  placed 
side  by  side  to  give  a better  picture  of  the  relation  of  the  shaded  areas 
to  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  two  histograms.  In  this  particular  case 
the  sum  of  the  two  shaded  areas  is  30%,  in  round  figures,  of  the  sum 
of  the  areas  of  the  two  histograms,  and  this  number  represents  the 
measure  of  intergradation  in  this  particular  case.  The  series  of  three 
Text-figures  are  graphic  illustrations  showing,  by  reference  to  a par- 
ticular example,  how  the  measure  of  intergradation  as  employed  for 
our  present  purpose,  is  derived. 

comitantly,  the  divergence  between  races  is  60%  to  70%  ; between  subspecies 
75%  to  85% ; and  full  species  diverge  to  an  extent  of  90%  or  more. 

For  the  benefit  of  those  who  are  used  to  thinking  in  terms  of  graphs  the 
above  definition  may  be  paraphrased  as  follows : When  the  area  enclosed  by 
the  two  overlapping  histograms,  constructed  on  a percentage  basis,  equals 
30  to  40%  of  the  sum  of  their  separate  areas,  the  two  populations  are  to  be 
considered  as  races;  they  are  considered  subspecies  when  the  overlap  is  15 
to  25%  ; they  are  full  species  when  the  overlap  is  10%  or  less. 

The  above  proposed  boundary  lines  are  discussed  on  page  275. 

The  Variety  and  Further  Possible  Subdivision  of  the  Species. 

In  the  above  definition  of  the  two  principal  subdivisions  of  a species, 
namely,  the  subspecies  and  the  race,  the  maximum  intergradation  allowed 
for  any  population  to  be  included  under  the  latter  category  is  40%.  All 
pairs  of  populations  which  intergrade  to  a greater  extent  than  40%  are  pro- 
posed to  be  grouped  under  the  general  category  of  “variety”  and  are  not 
further  analyzed  in  our  present  preliminary  study. 

In  addition  to  the  subdivisions  of  a species  proposed  herewith  it  is 
evident  that  the  number  of  such  subdivisions  may  be  readily  increased  by 
simply  narrowing  the  boundary  lines,  which  are  arbitrary  anyway,  in  this 
completely  gradated  series.  More  extensive  studies  may  indicate  the  de- 


262 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


stability  of  increasing  the  subdivisions,  such  as  inserting  a category  between 
the  subspecies  and  the  race,  and  further  subdividing  the  inclusive  category 
here  designated  as  the  variety  and  consisting  of  populations  which  inter- 
grade by  more  than  40%.  The  number  of  categories  which  may  be  found 
desirable  to  recognize  may  differ  with  particular  genera  or  groups.  Any 
such  further  subdivision  should  be  based  not  on  the  rule  of  the  thumb,  but 
on  the  study  and  correlation  of  a sufficient  number  of  actual  cases.  Most 
likely  in  the  majority  of  cases  the  subdivisions  of  a species  proposed  here- 
with will  be  found  sufficient. 


Sampling. 

The  present  study  would  be  incomplete  without  a consideration  of  the 
question  of  sampling.  Although  I have  tried  to  avoid  the  use  of  complex 
statistical  formulae,  it  will  be  noted  that  the  present  study  is  largely  statisti- 
cal in  its  nature.  Indeed,  if  taxonomy  is  ever  to  be  placed  on  a high  scientific 
plane  it  will  perforce  have  to  become  to  a large  extent  statistical  in  its 
methods;  although,  quite  likely,  simple  statistical  deductions  will  be  found 
sufficient  in  most  cases.  One  sometimes  comes  across  the  statement  in 
taxonomic  works  that  a certain  species  is  a “statistical  species,”  sometimes 
stated  in  a rather  disparaging  manner,  as  though  such  a species  is  not  of 
much  account.  However,  probably  the  majority  of  closely  related  species  of 
fishes  are  “statistical  species.”  The  reason  taxonomists  were  able  to  make 
this  distinction  between  “statistical  species”  and  those  supposedly  not 
statistical,  is  because  their  studies  were  largely  based  on  but  a few  speci- 
mens, as  noted  above  (p.  255).  A “statistical  species”  is  simply  one  which 
diverges  from  a closely  related  species  to  a comparatively  low  degree  so 
that  even  the  study  of  a few  specimens  shows  the  close  approach  or  even 
intergradation  of  the  frequency  distributions  of  the  differentiating 
characters. 

The  importance  of  proper  sampling  in  statistical  studies  in  general  is 
universally  appreciated,  and  it  is  not  necessary  to  consider  the  subject  here 
at  any  length.  It  will  be  sufficient  here  to  state  that,  except  in  a few  cases 
such  as  the  complete  enumeration  of  the  population  of  a country  during  a 
census,  the  description  of  certain  attributes  of  a population  is  in  reality  a 
description  of  the  attributes  of  the  sample  which  has  been  studied,  and  the 
value  of  the  description  is  dependent  on  how  nearly  the  sample  is  represen- 
tative of  the  population  as  a whole. 

The  same  is  true  of  the  description  of  species,  subspecies,  races  or 
varieties.  If  a species  is  described  from  a single  specimen  or  from  a few 
specimens,  the  account  in  reality  represents  a description  of  those  specimens. 
While  in  many  cases  such  a description  is  sufficient  for  practical  purposes  to 
identify  and  distinguish  the  species,  in  many  other  cases  such  an  account 
will  be  found  entirely  inadequate.  Related  species  may  be  so  close  that  it 
takes  the  detailed  study  of  many  specimens  to  establish  their  divergence.  In 
such  cases  proper  sampling  becomes  of  importance;  although  in  the  case  of 
populations  which  reach  a sufficiently  high  degree  of  divergence  to  be 
regarded  as  full  species,  sampling  is  not  of  as  transcendent  importance  as 
in  populations  showing  a relatively  higher  degree  of  intergradation. 

In  my  own  studies  during  which  the  data  presented  below  were  obtained, 
I was  impressed  time  and  again  with  the  importance  of  proper  sampling. 
It  was  noted  frequently  that  specimens  in  the  same  lot  bearing  the  same 
data,  evidently  having  been  obtained  in  one  or  but  a few  drags  of  the  net 
in  the  same  place  at  the  same  time,  and  consequently,  most  likely  having  a 
common,  immediate  genotypic  origin,  would  tend  to  group  themselves,  in  a 
predominant  manner,  within  a narrowly  circumscribed  space,  sometimes  even 
near  either  end  of  the  frequency  distribution  of  their  species  or  race  as  a 
whole.  This  was  noted  especially  in  cases  where  the  specimens  in  the  lot  were 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


263 


of  nearly  the  same  size.  Consequently,  it  may  be  readily  appreciated  that  if 
the  sample  studied  be  obtained  in  one,  or  but  a few  drags  of  the  net  made 
at  the  same  time  in  the  same  place,  it  is  quite  likely  that  it  would  not  give 
a true  picture  of  the  population  in  many  cases. 

In  obtaining  the  data  presented  below  due  attention  was  paid  to  the 
question  of  sampling.  As  stated  above,  the  data  were  obtained  incidentally 
in  the  course  of  taxonomic  studies  of  the  fishes.  They  were  taken  from 
lots  of  specimens  obtained  at  different  times  by  various  collectors.  In  no  case 
was  a definite  plan  of  sampling  the  particular  population  devised  and  carried 
out.  Under  the  circumstances,  the  method  of  sampling  which  I adopted  was 
as  follows. 

For  the  sake  of  brevity  and  clarity  it  is  proposed  to  designate  all  the 
specimens  from  which  the  final  data  in  a Table  are  drawn,  as  the  composite 
sample  and  the  smaller  samples  which  go  to  make  up  the  composite  sample, 
as  constituent  samples.  It  has  been  stated  that  if  the  composite  sample  is 
obtained  in  one  drag  of  the  net,  that  is,  it  has  but  one  constituent  sample,  it 
will  quite  likely  not  give  a true  picture  of  the  population.  The  greater  the 
number  of  constituent  samples  the  more  nearly  will  the  data  approach  the 
true  distribution  of  the  population  as  a whole.  As  a consequence  of  these 
premises,  it  was  my  aim  to  include  as  many  constituent  samples  as  it  was 
possible  to  obtain  from  the  available  material.  If,  for  instance,  I had  25 
containers  of  specimens  representing  as  many  lots  of  fish  taken  on  different 
dates,  in  different  places,  and  20  containers  had  but  1,  2,  or  3 specimens  each, 
while  the  other  5 containers  had  much  larger  numbers,  the  20  smaller  lots 
were  included  in  the  study,  and  only  part  of  the  specimens  of  each  of  the 
larger  lots.  Of  course,  my  sampling  was  limited  by  the  material  available, 
but  in  every  case  I tried  to  come  as  near  to  my  aim  as  was  possible.  The 
number  of  constituent  samples  will  be  stated  hereafter  under  each  example 
cited,  so  that  the  reader  may  judge  as  to  the  adequacy  of  the  sampling. 
(For  the  meaning  of  the  notation  adopted  see  footnote  on  p.  264).  I am 
confident  that  in  most  cases  at  least  the  given  distributions  represented  by 
the  composite  samples  are  more  or  less  fairly  representative  of  their 
populations  for  practical  purposes. 

In  some  cases  the  number  of  specimens  studied  were  too  few  to  con- 
stitute a satisfactory  composite  sample,  such  as  in  case  of  the  two  races  of 
Hippocampus  zoster ae,  in  H.  punctulatusfi  and  in  Gobiosoma  bosci  and  G. 
robustum.  Since  it  is  my  hope  that  the  method  adopted  herein  will  serve 
as  a useful  guide  for  taxonomists  who  frequently  and  of  necessity  have  to 
work  with  quite  small  samples,  these  examples  are  included  in  our  series. 
Further  remarks  regarding  sampling  in  the  above  three  cases  are  given 
under  their  accounts. 


Examples  of  Varieties. 

Cynoscion  regalis.  This  species  is  discussed  below  in  another  connec- 
nection  and  the  frequency  distributions  of  the  number  of  dorsal  rays  are 
given  in  Table  IX,  p.  269.  Turning  to  that  Table  and  comparing  the  popula- 
tion of  Chesapeake  Bay  with  that  from  the  east  coast  of  Florida,  it  will  be 
noted  that  the  dividing  line  to  be  drawn  according  to  the  simple  method 
outlined  above,  is  between  the  columns  representing  27  and  28  rays.  Of  the 
Chesapeake  Bay  population  21  specimens  of  a total  of  40,  or  52.50%  of 
the  composite  sample,  cross  over  to  the  left  of  the  dividing  line.  The 
percentage  of  intergradation  of  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  as  compared 
with  that  of  Florida  is  therefore  52.50.  Likewise,  of  the  Florida  population 

2 The  notation  for  subspecies  employed  in  this  paper  is  in  accordance  with  the  suggestion 
made  on  p.  284. 


264 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


43  specimens  out  of  a composite  sample  of  110,  cross  over  to  the  right  of  the 
dividing  line,  representing  an  intergradation  of  39.09%.  The  simple  average 
of  these  two  intergradations,  46  in  round  figures,  represents  our  measure 
of  intergradation.  The  measure  of  divergence  in  this  case  is  100  minus  46, 
or  54%.  Constitution  of  composite  samples:  Chesapeake  Bay  1 (4) 3,  2 (4), 
7 (1),  8 (1),  13  (1);  Florida  5 (1),  28  (1),  77  (1).  The  two  larger  con- 
stituent samples  from  Florida  do  not  bear  any  more  definite  data  than  the 
locality  and  month  and  each  one  possibly  contains  more  than  one  constituent. 


Cynoscion  nebulosus.  The  well  known  spotted  sea  trout  of  the  southern 
states  is  a common  food  and  game  fish  from  Chesapeake  Bay  to  Texas,  rang- 
ing northward,  in  diminishing  numbers,  to  New  York.  For  an  account  of 
the  species  the  reader  may  be  referred  to  any  general  work  dealing  with 
the  fishes  of  the  region  where  it  occurs,  such  as  the  “Fishes  of  Chesapeake 
Bay”  by  Hildebrand  and  Schroeder  (1928).  No  extensive  study  has  been 
made  as  yet  of  its  racial  differentiation;  but  there  is  found  a statistically 
measurable  difference  in  the  number  of  dorsal  fin  rays  in  fish  from  the  Gulf 
coast  as  compared  with  those  from  Chesapeake  Bay  on  the  Atlantic  Coast. 
It  is  possible  that  a more  extensive  study  will  reveal  other  characters  show- 
ing a greater  degree  of  divergence,  but  this  is  quite  doubtful.  At  any  rate, 
the  dorsal  fin  ray  count  evidently  shows  sufficient  divergence  to  be  useful  as 
an  illustration  in  the  present  study. 


TABLE  II. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  of  Cynoscion  nebulosus. 


Number  of  rays  in  second  dorsal 


23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

Chesapeake  Bay 

1 

17 

53 

31 

6 

Texas  coast 

1 

12 

38 

48 

5 

The  dividing  line  in  this  case  is  drawn  between  the  columns  repre- 
senting 25  and  26  rays.  The  Texas  population  intergrades  by  49.04%,  while 
the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  intergrades  34.26%.  The  average  inter- 
gradation in  this  case  is  42%  and  the  divergence  58%.  Constitution  of 
composite  samples:  Chesapeake  Bay  1 (15),  2 (3),  3 (2),  5 (2),  6 (2),  16 
(1),  43  (1)  ; Texas  1 (2),  2 (4),  3 (2),  4 (2),  5 (3),  6 (1),  7 (2),  10  (1), 
17  (1),  18  (1). 

Although  this  example  does  not  form  a happy  choice  for  the  purpose  of 
illustration,  it  is  included  in  our  series  because  similar  cases  no  doubt  will  be 
encountered  in  practice.  It  will  be  noted  that  if  the  polygons  representing 
the  above  data  be  constructed  they  will  overlap  at  three  points.  Consequently, 
our  method  of  drawing  the  dividing  line  and  calculating  the  intergradation 

3 For  the  sake  of  brevity  the  sampling  of  every  case  cited  in  this  paper  is  indicated  by 
figures  which  have  the  following  meaning.  As  suggested  above  (p.  263),  the  entire  number  of 
specimens  of  a given  population,  on  which  the  final  distribution  in  any  one  Table  is  based,  is 
designated  as  the  composite  sample,  while  each  lot  of  specimens  bearing  the  same  data  is  known 
as  a constituent  sample,  a variable  number  of  constituents  going  to  make  up  the  composite 
sample,  depending  on  the  particular  population  used  as  an  example.  In  the  notation  adopted  a 
figure  outside  a parenthesis  indicates  the  number  of  specimens  in  one  or  more  constituent  samples, 
while  a figure  within  a parenthesis  gives  the  number  of  constituent  samples  each  one  of  which 
contained  the  number  of  specimens  indicated  by  the  preceding  figure.  Thus,  the  composite  sample 
of  C.  regalis  from  Chesapeake  Bay  was  made  up  of  11  constituent  samples,  four  of  which  had  1 
specimen  each,  four  constituents  had  2 specimens  each,  while  the  remaining  three  had  7,  8 and  13 
specimens,  respectively. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


265 


does  not  apply  strictly  to  the  present  case.  However,  it  will  be  noted  also 
that  if  one  specimen  from  the  Texas  population  be  dropped  at  one  extreme 
end  and  two  specimens  from  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  be  dropped  at 
the  other  end,  the  two  polygons  will  overlap  at  one  point  as  usual.  This  small 
irregularity  caused  by  one  and  two  specimens  out  of  a little  over  a hundred 
in  either  composite  sample,  very  likely  is  caused  by  the  imperfection  of 
sampling,  and  any  such  irregularity  at  either  extreme  where  the  number  of 
specimens  are  few,  is  not  likely  to  be  compensated  readily.  At  any  rate, 
whatever  the  cause,  for  the  purpose  of  computing  the  degree  of  intergrada- 
tion by  our  present  method,  this  small  irregularity  is  disregarded.  It  is  to 
be  noted  that  computing  by  the  standard  formula  (see  Table  XVII)  the 
degree  of  difference  between  these  two  distributions  almost  reaches  a 
“significant”  figure. 


Examples  of  Races. 

Bairdiella  chrysura.  This  is  a very  common  fish  on  the  east  coast  of  the 
United  States.  A recent  and  quite  extensive  account  of  the  life  history  of 
the  species  has  been  published  by  Hildebrand  and  Cable  (1930).  Like  the 
preceding  species  its  races  have  not  been  studied  extensively  as  yet,  but 
there  is  a difference  in  the  frequency  distributions  of  the  dorsal  fin  rays 
between  southern  and  northern  fish,  as  follows. 

TABLE  III. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  of  Bairdiella  chrysura. 


Number  of  rays  in  second  dorsal 


19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

Chesapeake  Bay 

2 

11 

26 

28 

3 

Texas  coast 

3 

19 

37 

12 

If  a line  be  drawn  between  the  columns  representing  21  and  22  rays,  it 
will  be  found  that  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  intergrades  with  that  of 
the  Texas  coast  to  the  extent  of  55.71%,  while  the  Texas  population  inter- 
grades 16.9%,  giving  an  average  intergradation  of  36%  and  a divergence  of 
64%.  Sampling:  Chesapeake  Bay  1 (14),  2 (8),  3 (6),  4 (3),  5 (2) ; Texas 
1 (6),  2 (1),  4 (2),  5 (1),  6 (1),  19  (1),  25  (1). 


Fundulus  confluentus.  This  is  a rather  common,  small,  cyprinodont  fish 
originally  described  from  Lake  Monroe,  Florida,  by  Goode  and  Bean  (in 
Goode  1879,  p.  118).  The  original  description  is  in  error  in  some  important 
details,  and  the  species  has  been  confused  with  related  species  by  all  later 
authors  which  I consulted.  However,  it  is  a well  marked  species  which  may 
be  distinguished  without  undue  difficulty  from  its  congeners  occurring  with 
it  through  a greater  part  of  its  range.  An  account  of  the  species  will  be 
included  in  a revision  of  the  genus  which  is  under  preparation.  The  Chesa- 
peake Bay  population  of  this  species  differs  racially  from  that  of  Florida. 
In  addition  to  a rather  slight  and  variable  difference  in  the  color  pattern,  the 
structural  character  showing  the  greatest  divergence  is  found  in  the  number 
of  rays  in  the  anal  fin  as  follows. 


266 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


TABLE  IV. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  anal  rays  in  Fundulus 
confluentus. 


Locality 

Anal  rays 

9 

10 

11 

Norfolk,  Va. 

23 

35 

Beaufort,  N.  C. 

19 

1 

Florida 

2 

21 

2 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  tends  to  have  a 
markedly  lower  anal  fin  ray  count.  The  population  from  North  Carolina 
nearly  agrees  with  that  of  Florida  in  the  number  of  fin  rays,  but  the  color 
pattern  is  more  nearly  like  that  of  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population.  Drawing 
the  dividing  line  between  the  columns  representing  9 and  10  rays  and  com- 
paring the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  with  that  of  Florida,  it  will  be  found 
that  the  former  population  intergrades  by  60.34%  and  the  latter  by  8%; 
or  an  average  intergradation  of  34 % . Sampling : N orf oik  3 ( 1 ) , 9 ( 1 ) , 14  (1), 
32  (1);  Florida  1 (6),  2 (1),  5 (1),  12  (1).  This  is  the  only  example,  of 
all  those  cited  here,  in  which  the  well  marked  modes  of  both  populations 
fall  on  the  same  side  of  the  dividing  line. 


Hippocampus  zosterae.  In  reviewing  the  species  of  its  genus  found  in 
American  waters  I (1937)  studied  material  of  this  species  from  Pensacola, 
Captiva  Pass  and  Key  West,  and  the  data  presented  herewith  are  taken  from 
my  paper,  where  the  question  of  racial  differentiation  is  taken  up  in  greater 
detail.  The  populations  from  the  three  localities  differ,  on  the  average,  in 
the  number  of  trunk  segments  and  the  number  of  rays  in  the  pectoral  fin, 
the  former  character  showing  the  greatest  divergence  as  follows. 

TABLE  V. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  trunk  segments  of  Hippo - 
campus  zosterae. 


Locality 

Trunk  segments 

9 

10 

11 

Key  West4 

4 

16 

1 

Captiva  Pass 

5 

12 

1 

Pensacola5 

7 

6 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  greatest  divergence  exists  between  the 
Pensacola  and  Key  West  populations,  while  the  Captiva  Pass  population  is 
somewhat  intermediate  but  nearer  to  that  of  Key  West.  This  gradual  dif- 
ferentiation with  latitude  is  a frequently  recurring  phenomenon  which  is 
well  known  to  students  of  fishes.  In  a case  of  this  kind  and  in  the  absence 
of  a more  elaborate  study  of  the  species,  we  may  compare  the  extremes.  If 
a line  be  drawn  between  the  columns  representing  9 and  10  segments,  it  will 
be  found  that  the  Key  West  population  intergrades  with  that  from  Pensacola 
to  the  extent  of  19.05%,  while  the  latter  intergrades  with  the  former  by 
46.15%,  giving  an  average  intergradation  of  33%.  Sampling:  Pensacola  1 
(2),  11  (1)  ; Key  West  1 (6),  2 (1),  3 (1),  4 (1),  6 (1). 


4 Including  4 specimens  from  Newfound  Harbor. 
6 Including  1 specimen  from  Apalachicola. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


267 


The  available  material  of  this  species  is  not  sufficient  to  constitute  a 
satisfactory  sample ; but  the  difference  between  the  populations  is  significant, 
especially  when  considered  in  connection  with  the  small  spread  of  the 
frequency  distribution,  and  approximately  this  difference  very  likely  will  be 
found  to  exist  after  a more  satisfactory  sampling  (see  also  remarks  on 
p.  263). 


Leiostomus  xanthurus.  This  species  is  the  well  known  spot,  a common 
market  fish  on  the  east  coast  of  the  United  States.  The  most  comprehensive 
account  of  its  life  history  published  so  far  is  that  by  Hildebrand  and  Cable 
(1930).  Almost  nothing  is  known  now  regarding  the  racial  differentiation 
of  the  species;  but  I found  a significant  difference  in  the  number  of  rays  in 
the  second  dorsal  on  comparing  fish  from  Chesapeake  Bay  with  those  from 
the  coast  of  Texas,  as  follows. 


TABLE  VI. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  of  Leiostomus  xanthurus. 


Locality 

Number  of  rays 

in  second 

dorsal 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

Chesapeake  Bay 

5 

25 

33 

18 

Texas  coast 

1 

25 

50 

20 

6 

1 

The  dividing  line  is  drawn  between  the  columns  representing  30  and 
31  rays.  The  Chesapeake  Bay  population  intergrades  37.04%  and  that  of 
the  Texas  coast  26.21%  giving  an  average  intergradation  of  32%.  Sampling: 
Chesapeake  Bay  1 (3),  2 (2),  3 (5),  4 (1),  5 (1),  10  (1),  20  (2)  ; Texas  1 
(5),  2 (2),  3 (1),  4 (1),  5 (1),  6 (1),  17  (1),  19  (1),  20  (2). 


Sciaenops  ocellatus.  This  species  is  the  well  known  redfish  in  the  mar- 
kets of  the  Gulf  coast,  the  celebrated  channel  bass  of  sportsmen.  For  an  ac- 
count of  the  species  the  reader  may  again  be  referred  to  Hildebrand  and 
Schroeder  (1928).  The  racial  differentiation  of  this  species  likewise  has 
not  been  studied  to  any  extent,  but  there  is  a significant  difference  in  the 
number  of  rays  in  the  second  dorsal  when  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population 
is  compared  with  that  of  the  Gulf  coast  as  follows. 

TABLE  VII. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  rays  in  the  second 
dorsal  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus. 


Number  of  rays  in  second  dorsal 


22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

Chesapeake  Bay 

4 

33 

52 

14 

1 

Texas  coast 

7 

43 

48 

14 

The  dividing  line  in  this  case  is  drawn  between  the  columns  represent- 
ing 24  and  25  rays.  The  intergradation  of  the  Texas  coast  population  is 
44.64%,  that  of  the  Chesapeake  Bay  population  14.42%,  or  an  average  inter- 
gradation of  30%.  Sampling:  Chesapeake  Bay  1 (1),  2 (1),  3 (1),  5 (1), 


268 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


6 (1),  22  (1),  28  (1),  37  (1);  Texas  1 (5),  2 (1),  4 (2),  5 (1),  8 (1), 
10  (1),  12  (2),  21  (1),  29  (1). 


Examples  of  Subspecies. 

Hippocampus  punctulatus2  and  H.  hudsonius2 . These  seahorses  from 
the  east  coast  of  the  United  States  and  the  coast  of  Cuba  have  been  gener- 
ally recognized  as  independent  species  by  American  ichthyologists.  How- 
ever, they  have  been  badly  confused,  and  their  structural  characters  have 
been  stated  incorrectly  in  most  current  accounts.  A discussion  of  their  mor- 
phological and  geographical  limits  is  given  in  my  review  of  the  species  of 
Hippocampus  (1937)  where  it  is  determined  that  the  character  showing  the 
greatest  divergence  between  them  is  found  in  the  number  of  caudal  seg- 
ments, as  follows. 


TABLE  VIII. 

Frequency  distributions  of  the  numbers  of  caudal  segments  of  Hippo- 
campus hudsoniuso  and  H.  punctulatus  2. 


Locality  and  subspecies 

Number  of  caudal  segments 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

H.  hudsonius-2 

Chesapeake  Bay  to 
Maine 

3 

7 

15 

7 

4 

North  and  South 
Carolina 

1 

7 

8 

1 

Mississippi  to  Texas 

1 

5 

10 

2 

H.  punctulatus* 

Florida  and  Cuba 

1 

8 

10 

7 

As  in  H.  zosterae  (see  p.  266),  the  greatest  divergence  is  found  between 
the  northern  population,  Chesapeake  Bay  to  Maine,  and  the  southern,  Florida 
and  Cuba.  The  population  from  the  Carolinas  and  that  from  Mississippi  to 
Texas  are  somewhat  intermediate  but  nearer  to  the  northern  population. 
Other  characters  as  well  gradually  differ  with  latitude.  Although  there  is 
a gradual  change  in  morphology  with  latitude,  it  nevertheless  seems  desir- 
able to  recognize  two  subspecies  as  discussed  on  page  277. 

In  this  case  the  dividing  line  is  drawn  between  the  columns  represent- 
ing 36  and  37  caudal  segments.  Comparing  the  extreme  northern  population 
of  hudsonius2  with  the  extreme  southern  population,  punctulatus 2,  the  for- 
mer intergrades  the  latter  by  27.78%,  and  the  latter  intergrades  the  former 
by  26.92%,  or  an  average  intergradation  of  27%.  Also,  in  order  to  show 
the  normal  morphological  range  of  hudsonius2  as  a whole,  the  data  from 
North  and  South  Carolina  and  Mississippi  to  Texas  are  combined  with  those 
from  Chesapeake  Bay  and  northward.  Combining  the  data  as  indicated, 
the  northern  H.  hudsonius2,  intergrades  with  the  southern  H.  punctulatus a, 
to  the  extent  of  33.80%,  while  the  latter  intergrades  by  26.92%,  giving  an 
average  intergradation  of  30%.  The  composite  sample  of  H.  hudsonius2  con- 
sists of  54  constituent  samples  as  follows:  1 (43),  2 (7),  3 (3),  5 (1).  "Some 
of  the  constituents  having  more  than  one  fish  do  not  have  the  data  any  more 
specific  than  the  name  of  the  state  on  the  coast  of  which  they  were  captured, 
and  they  quite  likely  represent  more  than  one  constituent.  At  any  rate,  the 
number  of  constituents  in  the  composite  sample  is  not  less  than  54.  The 
composite  sample  of  H.  punctulatus2  consists  of  23  constituent  samples,  as 
follows:  1 (21),  2 (1),  3 (1).  The  specimens  in  the  composite  sample  of 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


269 


punctulatus 2 are  very  few,  but  they  represent  the  limit  of  my  available  ma- 
terial. While  lacking  in  numbers  it  consists  of  many  constituents  and  pos- 
sibly fairly  represents  its  population  (see  also  remarks  on  p.  263). 


Cynoscion  arenarius2  and  C.  regalis2 • The  differences  between  these 
two  common  subspecies  from  the  east  coast  of  the  United  States  have  been 
discussed  by  me  (1929)  and  the  reader  is  referred  to  that  paper  for  details. 
In  grown  specimens  the  character  showing  the  greatest  divergence  seems 
to  be  found  in  the  number  of  gill  rakers  on  the  outer  gill  arch;  while  the 
number  of  dorsal  rays  shows  the  next  greatest  divergence.  However,  the 
number  of  gill  rakers  is  not  susceptible  of  precise  determination  for  reasons 
stated  in  the  paper  cited.  Should  it  be  found  possible  to  discount  the  diffi- 
culties inherent  in  a precise  determination  of  that  character,  it  is  doubtful 
whether  it  would  prove  to  show  greater  divergence  than  the  number  of  dorsal 
rays.  On  the  other  hand,  the  latter  character  is  susceptible  of  absolutely 
precise  determination  at  all  stages  of  growth,  soon  after  the  fin  rays  have 
developed  in  the  young  fry.  For  the  purpose  of  the  present  discussion  it 
may  be  assumed  that  that  character  shows  the  greatest  divergence. 

TABLE  IX. 


Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  articulate  dorsal  rays  in  Cyno- 
scion regalis2  and  C.  arenarius2. 


Locality  and  subspecies 

Number  of 

dorsal  rays 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

C.  regaliSi 

Chesapeake  Bay 
North  and  South 

1 

5 

15 

16 

3 

Carolina 

Cape  Canaveral  and 

1 

6 

21 

12 

Fernandina,  Fla. 

3 

15 

49 

35 

8 

C.  arenariusi 

Louisiana  and  Texas 

2 

35 

59 

22 

1 

The  dividing  line  in  this  case  falls  between  26  and  27  rays;  C.  arenarius2 
intergrading  19.33%  and  C.  regalis2  16.32%,  resulting  in  an  average  inter- 
gradation of  18%.  The  sampling  of  the  populations  of  regalis2  from  Chesa- 
peake Bay  and  from  the  coast  of  Florida  has  been  indicated  above  (p.  264)  ; 
while  that  from  the  Carolinas  is  as  follows:  3 (2),  4 (1),  7 (1),  8 (1),  15 
(1).  Of  arenarius2  69  specimens  do  not  have  any  specific  data  by  which  the 
number  of  constituent  samples  could  be  determined;  the  rest  consists  of  14 
constituents  as  follows:  1 (9),  2 (1),  5 (1),  6 (2),  22  (1). 


Examples  of  Species. 

Hippocampus  regulus  and  H.  zosterae.  The  former  species  is  closely 
related  to  the  latter,  the  races  of  which  have  been  discussed  above.  More 
extensive  accounts  of  the  two  species  and  a discussion  of  their  relationship 
are  given  in  my  (1937)  review.  It  will  be  sufficient  to  state  here  that  be- 
sides its  somewhat  smaller  size,  and  a slightly  greater  average  number  of 
trunk  segments,  H.  regulus  differs  chiefly  from  H.  zosterae  in  having  a 
smaller  number  of  caudal  segments  and  fewer  dorsal  rays,  the  greatest  di- 
vergence occurring  in  the  latter  character,  as  follows: 


270  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :13 

TABLE  X. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  dorsal  rays  in  Hippocampus 
regulus  and  H.  zosterae. 


Locality  and  species 

Number  of  dorsal  rays 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

H.  regulus 

Mississippi  and  Texas 

2 

15 

1 

Campeche,  Mexico 

5 

H.  zosterae 

Key  West,  Fla.0 

4 

13 

5 

Captiva  Pass,  Fla. 

16 

2 

Pensacola,  Fla.7 

2 

9 

1 

An  inspection  of  the  foregoing  Table  shows  that  this  character  tends  to 
be  fairly  constant  within  the  limits  of  each  species,  there  being  no  pro- 
nounced racial  divergence  as  was  found  above  for  the  number  of  trunk  seg- 
ments of  H.  zosterae.  The  Key  West  population  shows  a tendency  to  have  a 
slightly  smaller  average — thus  surprisingly  more  nearly  approaching  regulus 
from  Mississippi  and  Texas  than  the  Pensacola  race  of  zosterae  approaches 
regulus- — but  the  difference  is  slight.  The  divergence  of  the  two  species  in 
this  case  is  measured  by  drawing  a dividing  line  between  the  columns  repre- 
senting 11  and  12  rays.  H.  zosterae  is  thus  found  to  intergrade  to  the  extent 
of  11.54%  ; H.  regulus  intergrades  4.35%  ; giving  an  average  intergradation 
of  8%.  Sampling:  H.  regulus  1 (3),  2 (5),  5 (2)  ; H.  zosterae  1 (7),  2 (2), 
3 (2),  6 (1),  11  (1),  18  (1). 


Gobionellus  boleosoma  and  G.  shufeldti.  Accounts  of  these  two  species 
of  gobies  and  a discussion  of  their  relationship  will  be  found  in  my  (1932) 
revision  of  the  genus.  Briefly,  the  two  species  differ  in  the  maximum  size 
to  which  they  attain,  in  their  color  pattern,  in  the  relative  length  of  the 
ventral  fin,  in  the  extent  of  squammation  in  front  of  the  dorsal,  and  in  the 
number  of  dorsal  and  anal  rays.  However,  none  of  these  differences  is  abso- 
lutely decisive  when  each  one  is  considered  by  itself,  and  individual  fish 
often  can  not  be  distinguished  and  identified  with  assurance  by  any  one 
single  character,  although  there  is  usually  no  trouble  in  referring  individual 
fish  to  their  proper  species  when  all  the  differentiating  characters  are  taken 
in  consideration.  The  greatest  divergence  between  the  two  species  is  shown 
by  the  number  of  anal  rays,  as  follows. 

TABLE  XI. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  anal  rays  in  Gobionellus  boleo- 
soma and  G.  shufeldti. 


Species 

Number  of  anal  rays 

11 

12 

13 

14 

G.  boleosoma 

3 

74 

4 

G.  shufeldti 

3 

33 

1 

6 Including'  3 specimens  from  Newfound  Harbor  and  2 from  Biscayne  Bay. 

7 Including  1 specimen  from  Apalachicola. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


271 


The  dividing  line  in  this  case  is  between  12  and  13;  the  intergradation 
calculated  for  G.  shufeldti  is  8.11%,  and  for  G.  boleosoma  4.94%,  resulting 
in  an  average  intergradation  of  7%.  The  counts  of  the  fin  rays  in  these  two 
species  are  fairly  constant  throughout  their  ranges,  there  being  no  pro- 
nounced racial  differences  in  this  respect.  Sampling:  G.  boleosoma  1 (13), 
2 (8),  3 (1),  4 (1),  6 (1),  39  (1)  ; G.  shufeldti  1 (2),  8 (1),  13  (1),  14  (1). 


Paralichthys  lethostigma  and  P.  albigutta.  Some  recent  investigators 
have  expressed  doubt  in  regard  to  the  distinctness  of  these  two  common 
species  of  flounders.  This  doubt  is  apparently  caused  by  the  fact  that  the 
chief  differentiating  characters  are  of  a meristic  nature,  that  is,  quantita- 
tive, and  vary  within  rather  wide  limits.  Consequently,  when  specimens 
near  the  beginning  or  near  the  end  of  the  two  frequency  distributions  of 
the  two  species,  respectively,  are  encountered,  they  may  be  referred  to  either 
species  when  any  single  character  is  considered.  However,  after  preparing 
tables  for  the  several  characters  showing  the  normal  frequency  distribu- 
tions of  each  species,  it  becomes  an  easy  matter,  with  the  aid  of  such  tables, 
to  refer  individual  fish  to  their  proper  species.  An  extensive  discussion  of 
the  differences  between  these  two  species,  among  others,  is  included  in  a 
revision  of  the  genus  which  I now  have  completed  in  manuscript  form.  In 
connection  with  that  study,  I examined  over  500  specimens  representing 
both  species,  and  out  of  this  large  number  I encountered  only  one  specimen 
the  status  of  which  was  in  doubt.  Besides  the  structural  differences  the  two 
species  differ  also  in  their  color  pattern.  Without  going  here  into  details, 
it  may  be  stated  that  the  least  intergradation  is  found  in  the  number  of  anal 
rays,  as  follows. 


TABLE  XII. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  rays  in  the  anal  fin  of  Para- 
lichthys albigutta  and  P.  lethostigma. 


NUMBER  OF  RAYS  IN  ANAL  FIN 


SPECIES 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

P.  albigutta 

1 

I 

4 

10 

15 

16 

26 

17 

11 

5 

5 

P.  lethostigma 

2 

5 

10 

15 

25 

27 

31 

13 

14 

9 

1 

1 

Drawing  the  dividing  line  between  63  and  64  rays,  it  is  found  that  P. 
lethostigma  intergrades  1.31%;  but  no  specimens  of  P.  albigutta  cross  over 
to  the  left  of  the  line,  the  intergradation  of  the  latter  thus  being  0.  The 
average  intergradation  is  then  1%  in  round  numbers.  The  composite  sample 
of  P.  albigutta  includes  70  specimens  from  the  vicinity  of  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
and  16  from  the  vicinity  of  Corpus  Christi,  Texas,  for  which  no  detailed 
data  are  available,  probably  containing  a number  of  constituents.  The  rest 
are  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  except  two  specimens  from  the  Atlantic  coast, 
and  altogether  consist  of  16  constituents  as  follows:  1 (9),  2 (6),  4 (1).  The 
composite  sample  of  P.  lethostigma  contains  13  specimens  from  Beaufort, 
N.  C.,  without  any  further  data,  but  probably  obtained  on  different  dates; 
7 other  specimens  from  the  Atlantic  coast  and  133  from  the  Gulf  coast.  The 
sampling  of  all  except  the  13  is  as  follows : 1 (11) , 2 (4) , 3 (2) , 4 (3) , 5(1), 
6 (1),  7 (1),  8 (1),  9 (1),  10  (1),  12  (2),  13  (1),  21  (1). 


272 


Zoologica:  New  Yoi'Jc  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


Gobiosoma  bosci  and  G.  robustum.  An  extensive  discussion  of  the  re- 
lationship between  these  two  species  of  gobies  was  published  in  my  (1933) 
revision  of  the  genus.  Besides  a difference  in  the  color  pattern  which,  how- 
ever, is  not  always  distinctive,  the  chief  structural  characters  differentiat- 
ing the  two  species  are:  the  number  of  dorsal  and  anal  rays  and  the  length 
of  the  ventral.  The  numbers  of  fin  rays  intergrade  in  the  two  species;  but 
the  length  of  the  ventral  expressed  as  the  number  of  times  it  enters  into  the 
distance  between  the  ventral  and  anal  origins,  does  not  show  any  intergrada- 
tion in  the  specimens  measured,  as  follows. 

TABLE  XIII. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  length  of  the  ventral  in  Gobiosoma  bosci 
and  G.  robustum,  expressed  as  the  numerical  value  of  the  ratio  of  the  dis- 
tance from  base  of  ventral  to  origin  of  anal,  to  the  length  of  the  ventral. 


Length  of  ventral  in  the  distance  from  its  base  to  origin  of  anal 


1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

1.6 

1.7 

1.8 

1.9 

2.0 

G.  bosci 

2 

4 

8 

2 

1 

G.  robustum 

3 

7 

2 

4 

In  this  case  then  intergradation  is  zero  and  divergence  100%.  The 
heading  numbers  for  the  classes  in  the  above  table  represent  the  mid-values, 
this  example  being  an  illustration  of  a character  the  measurements  of  which 
form  a continuous  series.  Sampling:  G.  bosci  1 (9),  2 (4);  G.  robustum 
1 (5),  2 ( 1 ) , 4 (1),5  (1).  The  composite  samples  are  entirely  inadequate 
but  there  is  no  question  in  regard  to  the  specific  distinctness  of  the  popula- 
tions compared  (see  also  remarks  on  p.  263). 

It  should  be  stated  also  that  the  chief  differentiating  character  which 
distinguishes  these  two  species  is  not  susceptible  of  determination  with  a 
high  degree  of  accuracy.  Although  proportional  measurements  are  widely 
employed  for  separating  closely  related  populations  of  fishes,  of  specific  or 
lower  rank,  such  measurements  can  be  determined  only  by  a rather  rough 
approximation  to  their  true  value.  The  values  of  the  measurements,  more 
likely  than  not,  are  apt  to  vary  with  the  state  and  method  of  preservation 
of  the  specimens  and  also  with  the  observer  making  the  measurements.  Even 
the  same  observer  measuring  the  same  specimens  with  the  same  instruments 
is  apt  to  obtain  somewhat  different  results  by  successive  trials;  although 
when  sufficient  care  is  exercised  and  a vernier  caliper  employed  for  taking 
the  measurements,  the  results  usually  are  sufficiently  accurate  for  practical 
purposes  even  in  the  case  of  quite  small  specimens.  Anyway,  since  the  data 
represented  in  the  above  Table  are  not  entirely  satisfactory  we  may  cite  the 
following  case  which  occupies  the  same  position  in  our  series,  and  which  is 
based  on  a character  that  is  susceptible  of  being  determined  with  almost 
absolute  accuracy. 


Lepiclogobius  y-cauda  and  L.  guaymasiae.  These  two  gobies  were  de- 
scribed originally  by  Jenkins  and  Evermann  (1888)  from  the  Gulf  of 
California.  The  two  species  are  very  closely  related,  and  all  later  authors 
considered  the  above  two  names  as  synonymous.  Indeed,  the  original  de- 
scriptions are  not  sufficient  to  distinguish  the  two  species,  are  erroneous 
in  some  important  details,  and  it  is  very  doubtful  whether  even  the  original 
describers  separated  all  of  their  material  properly.  Nevertheless,  the  two 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


273 


species  are  quite  distinct.  The  differences  distinguishing  these  two  species 
will  be  taken  up  in  greater  detail  in  a revision  of  their  genus  which  is  now 
in  process  of  preparation.  It  will  suffice  for  our  present  purpose  to  state 
that  the  greatest  divergence  is  shown  by  the  number  of  pectoral  rays  as 
follows. 


TABLE  XIV. 


Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  pectoral  rays  in  Lepidogobius 
y-cauda  and  L.  guaymasiae. 


Species 

Number  of  pectoral  rays 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

L.  y-cauda 
L.  guaymasiae 

6 

23 

11 

7 

51 

42 

5 

1 

In  this  case  also  intergradation  is  zero  and  divergence  100%,  as  far 
as  the  samples  studied  are  concerned.  Sampling:  G.  y-cauda  1 (1),  2 (2), 
5 (1),  6 (1),  24  (1)  ; G.  guaymasiae  2 (2),  14  (1),  34  (1),  54  (1). 


Paralichthys  dentatus  and  P.  lethostigma.  The  latter  species  was  com- 
pared above  with  P.  albigutta,  with  which  it  showed  a slight  amount  of  in- 
tergradation. When  compared  with  another  species  of  its  genus,  with 
dentatus,  it  does  not  show  any  intergradation.  P.  dentatus  has  a more 
northern  distribution.  It  is  the  well-known  summer  flounder  or  fluke  and 
is  an  important  commercial  species.  Its  range  extends  from  Cape  Cod  to 
northern  Florida.  On  the  coast  of  North  Carolina  and  southward  its  geo- 
graphical range  overlaps  with  its  two  common  congeners  which  were  dis- 
cussed above.  An  extensive  account  of  this  species  is  included  in  my  manu- 
script referred  to  above.  For  a published  account  of  the  species  the  reader 
is  referred  to  “Fishes  of  Chesapeake  Bay”  by  Hildebrand  and  Schroeder 
(1928),  this  being  the  only  species  of  Paralichthys  occurring  in  that  body 
of  water.  For  the  purpose  of  the  present  discussion  it  may  be  stated  that 
P.  dentatus  has  nearly  the  same  frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of 
fin  rays  as  P.  lethostigma,  but  it  differs  decidedly  in  the  number  of  gill 
rakers,  as  follows. 


TABLE  XV. 

Frequency  distribution  of  the  number  of  gill  rakers  on  the  lower  limb 
of  the  first  gill  arch  of  Paralichthys  dentatus  and  P.  lethostigma. 


Number  of  gill  rakers  on  lower  limb 


8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

P.  lethostigma 
P.  dentatus 

7 

67 

66 

6 

4 

3 

18 

44 

35 

11 

The  foregoing  is  an  illustration  of  a case  where  a gap  exists  between 
two  species  with  reference  to  a given  character.  The  composite  sample  of 
lethostigma  consists  of  24  specimens  from  localities  ranging  from  Albemarle 
Sound,  N.  C.,  to  St.  John’s  River,  Florida,  on  the  Atlantic  coast,  and  122 
from  the  coasts  of  Texas  and  Louisiana  (including  1 specimen  from  Apala- 
chicola, Fla.).  The  Atlantic  coast  specimens  include  13  from  Beaufort, 
N.  C.,  without  any  more  detailed  data,  probably  a mixed  lot,  and  7 other 
constituents  as  follows:  1 (3),  2 (4).  The  composite  sample  from  the 


TABLE  XVI. 

Summary  of  the  preceding  data  showing  the  gradual  continuity  of  intergradation  and  divergence  arranged  in 
order  of  decreasing  intergradation,  or  increasing  divergence. 


274 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


e 

£ V2 

g o « 
o s 
ft 

(SCO 


rO 

8 


©4 


Ci 


CO 


(M 

00 


00 

CO 


O t-H  O 00  <0  rH 


8 

be 


<D  i £ 

g&g 

«.£.§ 

0)  - 

s 


03 
° U) 


CO 


cvl 


o 

CO 


00  rH  o o 


.*_>  c3  ^ V> 
C ^ vn  c3 
0,  tjo3 

^ c a 
0)^0  ° 
Ph  .5  H ft 


O o o 


hn  cj  to  C 

21^-B 

c {*  «w  c3 

0i  fcfi  o "2 

ft  H C ft 
OJ  -g  O o 
Ph  .£  Q3  C, 


53 

"53 

* 

8 

© 

•S 

© 

to 


8 

85 

s 

o 

83 

o 

8 


O 


8 

*8 


8 

"8 


8 

"8 


8 

*8 


8 

"8 


8 

"8 


8 

"8 


8 

£ 

8 

83  © 

"W 

&5 

a 

© 

a 

8 

ft 

•<s> 

© 

8 

ft 

.8 

© 

s 

a 

'o  1 

© 

Co 

CO 

CO 

co 

to 

C3  Bh 

I? 


8 

O 

coO 

•<s> 

§>3 


>» 

8 

m 

CO 

S g 

C0 

o c3 
8*  0) 
8 rv 


© 


m 


0) 

.r8 

ou 


S JO 

s>  8 

Is 

h w 
•a  03 
° X 
. a> 

CQEh 


s 

s 

52 

s 

'e.ts 
e>  t 


g -£  s 

55  05 
2^  § 


kfe  iuw  ujn 


8 

pq 

K a> 
SPi 
ti  ai 
53  a; 


O 0) 

„ -JZ 

too 


c$ 
-Q 
M 3 

Wr  ■) 

HO 

53  T3 
~ C 

■S  e« 

o 

SiS 

Pi.:-. 

, o 

ado 


§>■-£ 
© H 
c-  8 


*2  -2 
53  o 


e -= 


0<C  m Ci  (L  c5 


CO 

co  ^ co 

Ig  8 © 

eW 


o a> 

x a 

•<s>  03 
© Ifl 
CO  CP 

O r8 

o 


^ o 
8 ° 
•2  M 

© 03 
CO  X 
O <D 

o 


gs» 

S t3 

§,« 

O 

^ ft 

3 “ 

'S  S 

•cO  O 
8W 
cq 


">H  0j 

pq 

^ CD 

^ c3 
<D 

co  rv 

8 E? 

r8  ^ 

r 


8 

5- 

C3 

CO 

© 

ti 

CO 

S S 

e es 

O CO 

g « 
a <u 

• B-Ph 


s 

J- 

S v 

c3 

sPP 

S o> 

Co 

| a 

8 o3 
© ui 

-K>  <D 


•S 

s 

® cS 

CO  rrt 

'eiS 


53 

S 

535 


55 


sg 

co  u 

|3 

r-  x 

CV3  v* 


to  fe 

s 


■S^ 


8 

8 

© 

8 m 
. o3 

8 o 
.8  ° 
S«H 
CO  > — i 
© 8 
SO 


ft  -8 
ft  -o 


© © lX:  ^ © 

^ h5  to  a;  o Uti 


53  o 

t,  ej 


.g  >> 

ho  or- 

® 5 

o -2 

•'S  8 

55  53 

>-4  Ch 


1938] 


Ginsburg : Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


275 


Gulf  coast  is  constituted  as  follows:  1 (6),  2 (4),  3 (4),  5 (1),  6 (1), 

8 (1),  9 (1),  10  (1),  12  (2).  13  (1),  21  (1).  The  composite  sample  of  P. 
dentatus  consists  of  71  specimens  from  Chesapeake  Bay  constituted  as  fol- 
lows: 1 (28),  2 (8),  3 (5),  5 (1),  7 (1)  ; 37  specimens  from  Beaufort,  N.  C., 
for  which  no  further  data  are  available,  probably  a mixed  lot;  7 specimens 
comprising  6 constituent  samples  from  North  Carolina  to  Georgia. 

Recapitulation. 

The  data  presented  above  of  a series  of  actual  cases  in  widely  dissimilar 
groups  of  fishes,  arranged  to  show  the  degree  of  divergence  in  a gradually 
ascending  series,  are  recapitulated  in  tabular  form  on  page  274,  in  order  to 
give  a birdseye  view  of  the  gradual  continuity  of  the  series.  Table  XVI 
shows  the  gradualness  of  divergence  or  intergradation  and  that  any  line 
drawn  between  the  species  concept  and  its  subdivisions  must  be  arbitrary. 
The  continuity  of  the  series  is  not  as  gradual  as  may  be  desired.  A more 
evenly  gradual  continuity  will  no  doubt  be  obtained  by  studying  and  citing 
a greater  number  of  examples.  However,  those  cited  seem  sufficient  for  this 
preliminary  study  to  establish  in  a definite  manner  the  gradualness  of 
divergence  in  nature.  Beside  their  number,  the  kinds  of  examples  cited 
are  not  as  well  chosen  as  I would  have  liked  them  to  be.  I have  now  under 
study  other  populations  which  show  promise  of  furnishing  better  proof  to 
clinch  the  present  thesis.  However,  the  differentiation  of  those  populations 
has  not  been  satisfactorily  established  as  yet,  and  the  accumulated  data  are 
not  of  sufficient  extent  to  enable  me  to  use  those  data  with  assurance.  While 
the  examples  cited  are  sufficient  to  prove  the  proposition  in  this  preliminary 
paper,  the  subject  evidently  can  not  be  expected  to  be  exhausted  in  a single 
article. 

The  Arbitrary  Boundaries  Between  Species,  Subspecies  and  Race. 

The  propriety  and  expediency  of  the  arbitrary  boundaries  between  the 
three  main  taxonomic  units  proposed  in  this  paper  may  now  be  considered 
after  having  determined  just  how  intergradation  occurs  in  nature. 

It  may  be  suggested  by  a study  of  Table  XVI  that  a more  logical  boundary 
to  draw  between  the  species  and  subspecies  would  be  between  two  other 
pairs  of  population,  namely,  Paralichthys  lethostigma  and  P.  albigutta, 
and  Gobiosoma  bosci  and  G.  robustum.  That  is,  two  populations  are  to  be 
regarded  as  fully  distinct  species  only  when  they  differ  in  any  single  char- 
acter in  such  a manner  that  there  is  no  intergradation  between  them.  How- 
ever, this  suggestion  can  be  defended  neither  on  theoretical  nor  on  practical 
grounds. 

First  of  all  it  may  be  stated  that  there  is  nothing  of  an  inherently 
fundamental  nature  in  such  a boundary  line.  In  a gradually  continuous 
series  such  as  we  are  dealing  with,  it  is  just  as  arbitrary  as  any  other 
dividing  line  which  may  be  proposed.  Even  when  a gap  exists  between 
two  species  it  may  be  possible  to  devise  such  a measure  as  will  express 
the  degree  of  the  extent  of  the  gap  and  the  series  denoting  divergence  con- 
tinued in  a gradual  manner,  although  for  our  present  purpose  it  is  not 
deemed  necessary  to  devise  such  a measure. 

FOOTNOTES  TO  TABLE  XVI. 

8 This  column  is  added  for  the  purpose  of  comparing  the  method  here  employed  with  the 
standard  method,  as  discussed  on  page  279.  However,  this  does  not  form  an  essential  part  of  our 
method,  and  the  column  as  well  as  the  discussion  may  be  left  out  of  consideration  by  those 
readers  who  are  not  interested  in  making  this  comparison. 

9 The  sampling  of  the  pairs  of  populations  of  S.  ocellatus  and  H.  hudsonius  is  not  altogether 
comparable  as  discussed  on  page  277.  When  the  extreme  populations  of  the  latter  species  are 
compared  the  intergradation  is  27%. 


276 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


Second,  it  should  be  remembered  that  two  diverging  populations,  espe- 
cially when  they  reach  such  a high  degree  of  divergence  as  to  constitute 
species  or  subspecies,  usually  differ  in  several  characters.  Sometimes  a high 
degree  of  divergence  may  be  shown  by  two  or  more  characters,  although  no 
single  character  may  show  a divergence  of  100%.  In  such  cases  individual 
specimens  may  be  referred  with  comparative  ease  to  their  proper  species 
by  at  least  one  of  these  characters  falling  decidedly  near  the  mode  of  its 
species.  (This  point  is  taken  up  more  fully  in  my  manuscript  study  of  the 
genus  Paralichthys) . It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  the  boundary  line  under 
discussion  can  not  be  defended  on  theoretical  grounds. 

On  practical  grounds  also  such  a boundary  line  will  not  prove  satisfac- 
tory. If  this  boundary  is  adopted,  possibly  the  majority  or  at  least  a large 
percentage  of  closely  related  species  of  fishes  now  universally  l’ecognized 
will  have  to  be  reduced  to  subspecific  rank  because  of  the  general  or  at 
least  frequent  existence  of  intergrades.  A case  in  point  is  the  difference 
between  Gobionellus  boleosoma  and  G.  shufeldti  which  forms  one  of  the  pre- 
ceding illustrations.  Probably  no  taxonomist  who  would  compare  and  study 
authentic  specimens  of  these  two  species  would  do  otherwise  but  come  to 
the  conclusion  that  they  represent  fully  distinct  and  independent  species. 
In  fact  the  differences  between  them  are  more  numerous  and  saliently 
marked  than  in  many  other  species  which  are  now  generally  recognized. 
In  spite  of  all  this,  their  chief  differentiating  character  intergrades  in  8% 
of  the  individuals  of  G.  shufeldti,  or  7%  as  an  average  between  the  two. 

It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  a boundary  line  drawn  so  that  two  popula- 
tions in  which  the  average  intergradation  of  the  most  divergent  character 
is  7%  or  less  are  considered  fully  distinct,  is  not  far  fetched.  The  figure  pro- 
posed herein,  10%,  is  not  based  on  sufficient  definite  data,  but  is  chosen 
chiefly  for  the  simple  reason  that  it  represents  a conveniently  round  number 
in  our  decimal  system.  Since  such  a boundary  line  is  arbitrary  anyway,  the 
one  proposed  here  tentatively  is  sufficient  for  the  purpose  of  discussion.  It 
is  evident  that  the  boundary  line  will  be  drawn  the  more  advantageously  in 
accordance  with  the  facts  of  nature,  the  greater  the  number  of  cases  which 
are  studied  in  detail  and  correlated,  and  quite  likely  will  change  with  in- 
creased knowledge.  It  may  also  be  found  advantageous  to  fix  different  boun- 
daries in  special  cases  or  in  certain  groups  in  order  to  give  in  such  cases  an 
interpretation  of  the  facts  which  will  more  closely  approach  nature. 

The  proposed  boundary  between  the  subspecies  and  the  race  also  seems 
the  most  expedient  as  judged  by  the  evidence  considered. 

In  the  arithmetical  definition  of  species,  subspecies  and  race  given  on 
page  260,  it  is  to  be  noted  that  gaps  are  left  in  the  continuity  of  the  per- 
centages at  the  boundary  lines  between  the  species  and  subspecies  on  the 
one  hand  and  the  subspecies  and  the  race  on  the  other.  This  is  done  on  pur- 
pose. Also,  the  phrase  “other  things  being  equal”  is  used  advisedly.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  other  things  usually  are  not  equal.  Populations,  especially 
those  that  reach  a sufficiently  high  degree  of  divergence  to  be  regarded 
properly  as  species  or  subspecies,  usually  differ  in  many  characters,  the  na- 
ture, number  and  variability  of  which  vary  widely  with  the  particular 
populations,  and  all  the  characters  have  to  be  taken  in  consideration.  Since 
any  single  character  does  not  absolutely  determine  the  taxonomic  status  of 
a population,  it  is  evident  that  in  appraising  the  sum  total  of  values  of  the 
other  characters  in  which  two  populations  differ,  there  will  be  room  for 
difference  of  opinion  in  cases  where  the  difference  between  the  two  popula- 
tions falls  near  any  arbitrary  lines  which  may  be  fixed.  This  is  as  it  should 
be.  The  very  nature  of  the  subject  matter  excludes  the  possibility,  at  least 
for  the  present,  of  universal  agreement  in  all  cases.  Consequently,  the  taxo- 
nomic status  of  border  line  populations  will  be  determined  to  a large  extent 
by  a consideration  of  the  other  differentiating  characters  in  addition  to  the 
one  showing  the  greatest  divergence.  Leaving  gaps  between  the  proposed 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


277 


limits  of  our  taxonomic  units  thus  allows  leeway  for  the  exercise  of  judg- 
ment in  border  line  cases. 

The  necessity  of  exercising  judgment  in  regard  to  populations  falling 
near  an  arbitrarily  fixed  border  line  is  shown  by  two  pairs  of  populations 
cited  above  as  illustrative  examples,  namely,  the  populations  of  Sciaenops 
ocellatus,  and  those  of  Hippocampus  hudsonius  (including  all  populations  of 
the  typical  subspecies).  Both  pairs  intergrade  approximately  by  30%.  The 
intergradation  of  the  latter  pair  is  even  a fraction  greater  in  the  samples 
examined.  Nevertheless,  the  latter  two  populations  are  recognized  as  sub- 
species, and  the  former  as  races  only  for  the  following  reasons:  (1)  Specia- 
tion  in  Hippocampus  is  rather  unlike  the  usual.  The  species  generally  ap- 
proach closely  or  even  overlap  (see  Ginsburg  1937,  p.  558  and  passim ).  Hip- 
pocampus constitutes  one  of  those  groups  in  which  different  arbitrary  lines 
between  the  categories  will  possibly  have  to  be  drawn  in  order  to  adequately 
represent  the  essential  facts,  as  suggested  on  page  276.  (2)  The  sampling  of 
the  two  l'espective  pairs  of  populations  is  not  strictly  comparable.  Of  Sciae- 
nops ocellatus  two  extreme  populations  are  compared,  while  of  Hippocampus 
hudsonius  intermediate  populations  are  also  included.  Of  the  latter  species, 
when  the  extremes  are  compared  (see  p.  268),  the  intergradation,  27%,  falls 
within  the  arbitrarily  fixed  gap  between  the  subspecies  and  the  race  as  de- 
fined on  page  260,  and  is  less  then  in  the  extreme  populations  of  Sciaenops 
ocellatus.  (3)  The  populations  of  Hippocampus  hudsonius  diverge  to  a con- 
siderable extent  in  a number  of  other  characters  also,  such  as  the  number 
of  dorsal  rays,  the  number  of  pectoral  rays,  the  relative  length  of  the  snout 
and  the  relative  depth.  (For  a more  detailed  discussion  of  their  differences 
see  Ginsburg  1937,  p.  557.)  While  the  degree  of  intergradation  in  every 
character  is  considerable,  an  appraisal  of  the  sum  total  of  all  the  differences 
between  the  populations  makes  it  evident  that  it  is  desirable  to  recognize 
them  as  subspecies  rather  than  races.  But  for  the  populations  of  Sciaenops 
ocellatus  no  other  well  marked  diverging  characters  are  known  at  present. 

The  foregoing  paragraph  discusses  some  of  the  many  factors  involved 
which  need  to  be  considered  in  forming  a final  conclusion  in  regard  to  the 
status  of  a given  pair  of  populations  under  study.  A decision  becomes  es- 
pecially difficult  in  cases  where  the  samples  available  are  manifestly  inade- 
quate, a frequent  contingency  in  taxonomic  practice.  In  such  cases  it  would 
take  an  experienced,  able  and  careful  taxonomist,  one  who  has  a highly  de- 
veloped intuitive  capacity,  to  form  a decision  which  may  stand  the  test  of 
time  and  further,  more  adequate  research.  Even  under  the  most  favorable 
circumstances  opinions  regarding  the  rank  of  a given  pair  of  populations 
may  change  as  other,  more  divergent,  characters  are  discovered.  For  in- 
stance, it  is  possible  that  some  other  characters  may  be  discovered  by  which 
the  populations  of  Sciaenops  ocellatus  may  be  shown  to  diverge  to  such  a 
degree  as  to  constitute  subspecies. 

The  arbitrary  lines  suggested  in  this  first  attempt  are  admittedly  tenta- 
tive; but  I believe  that  they  approach  closely  to  those  which  may  be  fixed 
after  more  extensive  studies.  Furthermore,  any  arbitrary  line,  no  matter 
on  how  many  concrete  examples  it  may  be  based,  will  be  from  its  very  nature 
only  generally  indicative  since  all  characters  have  to  be  considered  in  deter- 
mining the  taxonomic  status  of  a pair  of  populations,  as  stated.  Also,  their 
proper  use  will  always  depend  on  the  experience  and  ability  of  the  taxono- 
mist. Nevertheless,  although  the  arbitrary  lines  here  proposed  are  tentative, 
they  are  manifestly  preferable  to  the  rule  of  the  thumb  by  which  taxonomists 
now  seem  to  decide  regarding  the  category  of  particular  pairs  of  popula- 
tions. At  least,  they  form  a basis  for  immediate  practice,  as  a general  guide 
for  taxonomists  to  determine  whether  any  given  pair  of  diverging  popula- 
tions are  to  be  assigned  specific,  subspecific  or  racial  rank.  They  also  form 
a basis  for  discussion,  improvement  and  refinement. 

Irrespective  of  the  question  of  the  adequacy  of  the  arbitrary  lines  here 


TABLE  XVII. 

Some  commonly  used  statistics  of  the  populations  discussed  above,10  based  on  the  data  presented  in  Tables  II-XV. 


278 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


H 

s 

Q 

05 

tH 

05 

tH 

TF 

©3 

o 

00 

rH 

O 

rH 

O 

00 

O 

rH 

1 

W 

© 

©i 

LO* 

co’ 

00 

©3 

co 

©i 

LO 

©3 

CO 

tH 

O 

LO 

1 

rH 

©i 

t-H 

©3 

LO 

rH 

00 

©3 

Cl 

rH 

©1 

05 

CO 

rH 

LO 

tH 

00 

©3 

o 

CO 

©3 

IH 

O 

^f 

CO 

05 

LO 

tH 

rH 

CO 

©1 

CO 

©3 

05 

CO 

00 

H 

rH 

IH 

05 

CO 

rH 

00 

tH 

co 

IH 

tH 

©3 

00 

IH 

rH 

O 

o 

O 

rH 

o 

o 

rH 

o 

o 

O 

rH 

O 

o 

o 

5 

CO 

05 

LO 

CO 

co 

LO 

05 

o 

CO 

LO 

tH 

00 

co 

CM 

o 

CO 

LO 

©1 

CO 

00 

CO 

CO 

©3 

tH 

CO 

O 

o 

LO 

05 

05 

rH 

LO 

05 

00 

CO 

GO 

CO 

©3 

05 

rH 

©3 

^F 

CO 

CO 

tH 

00 

05 

CO 

05 

CO 

co 

§ 

j 

rH 

rH 

05 

co 

CO 

^F  00 

^F  LO 

tH  LO 

O CO 

IH  CO 

©1  rH 

00  V- 

CO  LO 

H ^ 

©3  Ttf 

o o 

©3  tH 

^ 05 

tH  ©3 

tH  LO 

^ CO 

©1  ©1 

O O 

^F  CO 

00  CO 

^ 05 

05  O 

LO  LO 

©1  CO 

CO  O 

CO  ©3 

rH  rH 

CO  LO 

tH  00 

05  CO 

C5  LO 

LO  LO 

tH  C© 

LO  Tj« 

CO  05 

CO  to 

rF  LO 

tH  ©1 

LO  LO 

CO  ©3 

©3  CO 

rH  rH 

"cF  CO 

CO  CO 

W 

o o 

o o 

o o 

o o 

O O 

o o 

O O 

O rH 

o o 

o o 

o o 

rH  rH 

o o 

o o 

o o 

o o 

rF  00 

O tH 

LO  00 

rH  CO 

rH  CO 

©1  ^ 

tH  CO 

O C5 

©3  CO 

tH  rH 

CO  rH 

tH  CO 

CO  o 

LO  CO 

2 

^F  H 

o o 

tH  tH 

©1  LO 

©3  rH 

00  O 

rH  O 

IH  ©1 

05  rH 

LO  ©3 

CO  00 

LO  rH 

rH  rH 

O HF 

rH 

T— 1 

rH  rH 

rH 

tH  rH 

rH  rH 

t-H  t — 1 

rH 

rH  rH 

co  co 

05  05 

o tF 

O ©1 

CO  LO 

CO  05 

O 00 

©1 

LO  O 

05  LO 

CO  IH 

LO  LO 

©3  05 

CO  00 

05  rH 

LO  CO 

©1  00 

tH  CO 

O 05 

CO  00 

CO  00 

©1  LO 

^ 00 

05  tH 

00  00 

^ CO 

CO  CO 

O LO 

00  05 

tH  TF 

t 

oo  oo 

05  O 

tH  LO 

O 00 

CO  05 

LO  00 

oo  co 

LO  LO 

CO  LO 

©3  05 

©3  LO 

O O 

©3  CO 

O LO 

00  00 

IH  00 

00  tH 

00  00 

tH  IH 

Oj  Op 

00  tH 

LO  CO 

CO  ©3 

©3  O 

rH  rH 

tH  CO 

rH  CO 

©3  ©3 

rH 

LO  rf 

Ph 

LO  LO 

LO  LO 

LO  Tf 

CO  ©1 

CO  ©1 

CO 

tF  LO 

LO  LO 

LO  LO 

4 

3 

CO  CO 

LO  rH 
rH  rH 

oo 

LO  CO 

CO  ^F 

O tH 

rH  ©1 

05 

o ^F 

rH  LO 

rH  V- 

rH  CO 

©1 

05  05 

tH  LO 

05  CO 

©3  tH 

LO  00 

00  o 

CO  CO 

LO  C l 

CO  ©1 

rH  CO 

O CO 

tH  tH 

O tH 

CO  05 

LO  CO 

IH  CO 

tH  CO 

LO  ©3 

©3  00 

CO  CO 

©3  LO 

©3  CO 

IH  tH 

©3  CM 

tH  rH 

o o 

LO  CO 

05 

rH  LO 

LO  tH 

LO  LO 

^ rH 

©3  CO 

IH 

LO  ©3 

00  00 

§ 

CO  CM 

xF  ©1 

©1  00 

O CO 

00 

tH  O 

CO  tH 

00  00 

©3  00 

O 05 

05  O 

©3  tH 

IH  CO 

^F  rH 

rH  rF 

tH  ft 

LO  LO 

rH  © 

© 05 

Cl  Cl 

© © 

ft  CO 

CO  LO 

tH  LO 

©3  O 

©3  ©3 

00  00 

rH  r — 1 

^F  rH 

CO  05* 

©3  Cl 

©1  ©1 

©1  ©1 

rH 

co  co 

©1  ©1 

CO  CO 

©3  ©3 

rH  rH 

rH  rH 

CO  LO 

©3  ©3 

rH 

>i 

o3  cS 

d 

O 

*-4-1 

d 

>» 

cS 

ffl 

o 

03  © 
0>  . 
fttf 
Oj  ^3 

S3 

M 

4J  <D 

52  PC 
o 

s£ 
M C3 
Cfi  M 
X <u 
<u,c 

►>> 

d 

m 

0)  'S 

cs 
o3  o 

0)  o 

O, 

£7*  w 

» s 

n>  rS 

Florida  coast 
Norfolk,  Va. 

Key  West,  FI 
Pensacola,  FI 

Chesapeake  E 
Texas  coast 

a 

M 

m $ 

g* 

o c; 

ft 
2 c$ 
d m 
X <D 

ei  CO 
CO  ^ 

g 

© 

e 

a 

3 

ft 

o 

(ft 

£ o 

co 

•<s> 

ft- 

© 

«*• 

HO 

CO 

© „ 
'S'- 

r© 

© 

£ 

qH 

s' 

§ 

CO  3 
5=5 

o 

co 

£ 

© - 

© 

© 

oT 

© ^ 
CO 
© 

CO 

ft 

CO 

3 

V- 

£ 

e 

& 

co 

Q)  H 

HO 

co 

S$ 

© 

© 

© 

•s« 
s s 
© 

co  © 

§s 

ft  ft 

CO 

s 

ft 

co 

CO  £ 
^ © 

ft  ?> 

g e 

pus  zosterae 
regulus 

,s  shufeldti 
boleosoma 

Si  e 

•<s>  HO 
so  so 

co  S 
ft  -H 

co 

ft 

. bosci 
robustum 

ius  guaymasi 
y-cauda 

§ 

CC  ©5 

^*^ 
^ CO 

-S  ° 

^ © 
CO 

ft 

s 

s 

e 

s 

co 

s 

§ 

ft 

© 

r© 

.© 

© 

CO  v. 
© - 

© 

•<s> 

© 

co  - 
© ~ 

© 

ft3  ~ 

"3 _ 

■a- 

§- 

© 

© 

ft 

§ 

© - 
so  '• 

co 

© 

© - 

§ - 
© 

© 

ft 

#© 

© 

co  - 

© 

S3  - 
© 

© 

ft 

*© 

© 

© ^ 
- 

o 

© 

CC  - 

© " 

ft 

© C 
2 

.©  ^ 

s 

5= 

*<S> 

£ 

ft 

•2 

a 

s 

ft 

-© 

V. 

r© 

ft 

ft 

ft 

e 

•-S- 

© 

•c*i 

ft 

•<s> 

© 

e 

© 

© 

© 

o 

o 

cq 

fcn 

£ 

H 

CO 

S3 

o 

Hi 

CL 

H 

Oh 

1938] 


Ginsburg : Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


279 


proposed,  the  fundamental  thing  to  remember  is  that  no  matter  where 
drawn,  the  lines  must  be  arbitrary.  This  is  proved  by  the  gradual  series 
here  presented.  It  is  either  one  or  the  other.  Either  the  different  categories 
have  no  existence  in  fact,  and  in  that  case  our  use  of  the  terms  “species,” 
“subspecies,”  “race,”  etc.,  should  be  abandoned.  Or,  if  the  categories  do 
exist  in  nature,  they  can  be  based  only  on  relative  degrees  of  divergence. 
The  sum  total  of  experience  obtained  as  a result  of  careful  population  studies 
made  up  to  now  unmistakably  shows  that  the  latter  interpretation  represents 
the  true  state  of  affairs  in  nature. 


Comparison  Between  the  Simple  Method  Employed  in 
This  Paper  and  That  in  General  Usage.14 

Attention  has  been  called  previously  (p.  256)  to  the  use  of  the  standard 
method  for  comparing  closely  related  populations  as  represented  by  the  for- 
mula ■ ..  ==§  . This  formula  is  not  well  adapted  for  our  purpose, 

V iiii-  -|-  Jcj2 

as  may  be  shown  by  a consideration  of  the  several  factors  which  go  to  make 
up  that  expression. 

First  of  all  it  may  be  stated  that  theoretically  this  expression  in  reality 
is  not  a measure  of  divergence.  Rather,  it  is  meant  to  be  a test  indicating, 
from  a strictly  mathematical  point  of  view,  the  probable  reliability  of  a 
difference  between  two  sets  of  data,  and  consequently  the  probable  value 
of  any  conclusions  which  may  be  drawn  from  such  data.  From  a biological 
point  of  view,  the  usefulness  of  this  test  is  limited  in  such  a problem  as  we 
are  confronted  with.  Since  differences  between  populations  exhibit  all  de- 
grees of  extensiveness,  it  follows  as  a consequence  which  can  hardly  be 
doubted  that  some  average  differences  between  natural  populations  exist, 
which  are  of  such  low  magnitude  as  to  be  below  the  usually  accepted  mathe- 
matical “significance”  obtained  by  the  use  of  the  above  formula  with  sam- 
ples which  are  ordinarily  limited  in  practice.  Such  small  differences  must 
have  a biological  significance,  although  mathematically  their  significance 
appears  doubtful.  This  test  merely  serves  as  a warning  to  proceed  with 
caution  in  drawing  conclusions  in  cases  where  the  values  are  low,  but  it  does 
not  prove  that  such  low  values  do  not  have  any  biological  significance.  How- 
ever, while  the  above  expression  is  strictly  speaking  not  a measure  of  di- 
vergence, it  may  be  used  for  that  purpose.  It  is  evident  that,  in  general,  the 
greater  the  divergence  between  two  populations  the  greater  is  the  numerical 

14  See  also  footnote  to  Table  XVI,  p.  275. 


FOOTNOTES  TO  TABLE  XVII. 

10  The  symbols  at  the  head  of  the  columns  stand  for  the  following : M = arithmetical  mean  ; 
R = actual  range  of  the  distribution  on  the  X — axis  ; a = standard  deviation  ; N = number  of  speci- 
mens in  composite  sample ; Em  ==  probable  error  of  the  mean ; Mi  — M2  = difference  between 
the  means  of  the  two  populations  compared  ; Ed  = probable  error  of  Mi  — M2. 

11  Biological  statisticians  are  now  generally  employing  the  standard  error  instead  of  the  probable 
error. . To  reduce  the  figures  given  in  this  table  to  the  standard  error  and  the  derivatives  based  on 
it,  divide  the  probable  error  of  the  mean,  and  the  probable  error  of  the  difference  between  the  means 
by  the  modulus  .6745,  and  multiply  the  figures  in  the  last  column,  showing  “significance,”  by  the  same 
number.  The  relative  magnitudes  of  the  comparative  figures  given  in  the  last  column  will  thus 
remain  the  same. 

12  The  sampling  of  the  populations  of  H.  hudsonius  is  not  altogether  comparable  with  those  of 
5.  ocellatus,  as  discussed  on  page  277.  The  statistics  for  the  extreme  northern  population  of  the 
former  (see  Table  VIII,  p.  268)  are:  M = 37.0556;  cr  — 1.0787;  Em  = 0.1213;  and  as  compared 

Mi  — M2 

with  the  southern  population,  punctulatus2,  Mi  — M2  = 1.2094,  Ed  = .1745  and  — 

Ed 

= 6.9,  or  nearly  the  same  as  when  the  total  sample  of  hudsoniusz  is  compared  with  punctulatus 2 
(see  discussion  on  p.  280). 

13  Omitting  the  one  specimen  at  the  extreme  right  of  the  frequency  distribution  (see  Table 
XII,  p.  271),  the  statistics  for  lethostigma  are : M = 68.1645;  R = 11  ; a — 2.1134;  Em  — 0.1156; 

Mi  — M2 

and  as  compared  with  albigutta  Mi  — - M2  = 9.4258  ; Ed  = 0.1752,  and  — — — 53.8. 


280 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


value  of  this  expression.  Consequently,  by  the  use  of  the  above  formula 
comparative  figures  are  obtained  which  may  indicate  the  relative  degree  of 
divergence  of  a pair  of  populations  in  a given  series  of  pairs  investigated. 
The  question  remains  how  useful  is  the  standard  method  for  our  present 
practical  purpose. 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  above  expression  depends  on:  (1)  the  differ- 
ence between  the  means  which  may  be  determined  directly  from  the  data 
by  a simple  arithmetical  process  of  averaging,  and  (2)  on  the  probable  error 
which  depends,  in  its  turn,  on  a number  of  factors.  The  statistical  formulae 
for  the  determination  of  the  probable  error  are  as  follows: 


The  probable  error  then  depends  on  the  number  of  specimens  in  the  com- 
posite sample  and  on  the  value  of  sigma.  Now,  the  magnitude  of  sigma  is 
determined  primarily,  (1)  by  the  extent  of  the  spread  of  the  frequency 
distribution,  the  greater  the  spread  the  greater  its  value;  and  (2)  by  the 
form  of  the  distribution;  one  having  a sharply  pronounced  mode  with  the 
number  of  specimens  diminishing  rapidly  at  either  end  will  show  a com- 
paratively smaller  value  for  sigma,  while  a distribution  the  curve  of  which 
has  a flattened  form,  or  is  skewed,  will  show  a relatively  greater  value.  (I  am 
not  considering  very  irregular  distributions  which  may  be  due  to  faulty  sam- 
pling, heterogeneity  of  the  material  or  other  causes.)  It  follows  therefore 
that  the  value  of  the  probable  error  depends  chiefly  on  three  factors,  namely, 
(a)  the  number  of  specimens  in  the  composite  sample,  (b)  the  spread  of 
the  distribution,  and  (c)  the  form  of  the  distribution.  Some  of  the  factors 
involved  are  shown  in  Table  XVII.  The  influence  of  the  form  of  the  dis- 
tribution on  the  value  of  sigma  is  well  shown  by  the  two  populations  of 
Fundulus  confluentus,  for  instance. 

With  these  brief  remarks  we  may  now  compare  the  method  employed 
herein  with  the  standard  method.  The  final  values  obtained  by  these  two 
methods  are  shown  conveniently  in  parallel  columns  in  Table  XVI,  page  274. 
Turning  back  to  that  Table  it  will  be  noted  that  of  the  15  pairs  of  popula- 
tions compared  10  occupy  the  same  relative  position  by  both  methods,  while  5 
would  occupy  different  positions  if  they  were  to  be  arranged  in  regular  order 
by  the  standard  method.  A consideration  of  the  latter  cases  throws  con- 
siderable light  on  the  relative  merits  of  the  two  methods. 

The  first  value  out  of  place  is  that  of  Hippocampus  zosterae,  that  ob- 
tained by  the  standard  method  being  too  low.  The  chief  reason  for  the  low 
value  is  shown  in  Table  XVII.  The  composite  samples  are  quite  small,  which 
results  in  a comparatively  greater  value  for  the  probable  errors.  Although 
the  spread  of  the  distribution,  and  hence  sigma,  is  small,  its  effect  is  not 
sufficient  to  counteract  the  influence  of  the  small  sample.  On  account  of  the 
relatively  large  probable  error  combined  with  the  comparatively  small  dif- 
ference between  the  means,  the  final  expression  obtained  is  relatively  low. 

The  effect  of  the  high  probable  error  as  a result  of  a small  sample  is 
also  shown  by  the  relatively  low  value  obtained  in  comparing  H.  punctulatus , 
with  H.  hudsonius.,.  Although  in  this  case  the  sample  of  only  one  of  the  two 
populations  compared  is  quite  small  and  the  difference  between  the  means 
is  higher,  the  effect  of  the  small  sample  of  the  one  population  is  sufficient  to 
result  in  a low  value. 

The  influence  of  the  size  of  the  sample  on  the  final  figure  used  for  com- 
parison is  shown  further  by  two  different  comparisons  of  the  populations  of 
H.  hudsonius.  The  northernmost  population  of  hudsonius0  diverges  to  a 
greater  extent  than  the  populations  from  intermediate  localities-  from  the 


probable  error  of  the  mean  = .6745 


<T 


V N 


while,  ° (standard  deviation) 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


281 


southernmost  populations,  punctulatuso  (see Table VIII.  p.  268). The  two  com- 
parisons of  these  populations  here  made  are  as  follows:  (1)  The  intermediate 
populations  are  grouped  with  the  northern  one  into  the  subspecies  hudsonius , 
and  the  composite  sample  is  compared  with  the  southernmost  populations, 
designated  as  the  subspecies  punctulatus2  (see  Table  XVII,  p.  278).  (2)  The 
northernmost  population  only  of  hudsonius2  is  compared  with  the  southern- 
most ones,  punctulatus2  (see  footnote  to  Table  XVII).  The  “significant” 
figures  obtained  in  these  two  comparisons  are  about  the  same,  6.8  and  6.9, 
respectively.  The  greater  divergence  of  the  populations  from  near  the  ex- 
tremes of  the  geographic  range  of  the  species  as  a whole,  is  not  indicated 
by  these  figures.  The  same  two  comparisons  made  by  the  method  here  em- 
ployed are  30%  and  27%,  respectively,  which  does  show  the  lesser  inter- 
gradation, or  greater  divergence,  of  the  populations  from  the  extremes  of 
the  geographic  range.  The  figures  obtained  by  the  use  of  the  standard  for- 
mula fail  to  show  this  greater  divergence,  evidently  because  the  number  of 
specimens  in  one  of  the  composite  samples  used  in  the  second  comparison  is 
considerably  less  than  that  in  the  first  comparison. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  value  for  the  comparison  between  Cynoscion 
regalis2  and  C.  arenarius2  is  relatively  high  and  for  the  same  reason.  In 
this  case  the  samples  are  comparatively  large,  resulting  in  a low  probable 
error,  and  this  combined  with  the  rather  large  difference  between  the  means 
gives  a relatively  high  figure  as  the  final  result.  The  magnitude  of  the  figure 
obtained  by  the  standard  method  in  comparing  a pair  of  related  populations 
is  thus  greatly  influenced  by  the  number  of  specimens  in  the  samples;  but 
by  far  not  to  such  an  extent  by  the  method  employed. 

The  influence  of  the  figure  representing  the  probable  error  may  also  be 
shown  by  the  following  hypothetical  examples.  Let  us  suppose  that  of  popu- 
lation A we  study  a sample  to,  which  is  sufficiently  representative  for  all 
practical  biological  purposes.  Let  us  now  take  another  sample  n2  of  the 
same  population  containing  say  ten  times  the  number  of  specimens  in  the 
first  sample.  Biologically,  as  far  as  we  may  draw  any  conclusions  from  their 
study,  the  two  samples  are  very  nearly  alike;  but  mathematically  the  prob- 
able error  of  the  second  sample  will  be  smaller.  Of  course,  this  is  perfectly 
logical.  It  simply  shows  that  from  a mathematical  point  of  view  the  reliabil- 
ity of  the  sample  increases  as  the  number  of  specimens  is  increased.  How- 
ever, from  a practical  biological  point  of  view  let  us  see  what  will  happen 
when  population  A is  compared  with  another  population.  Let  us  suppose 
that  we  take  a sufficiently  representative  sample  m of  a population  B.  If 
now  we  compare  sample  to,  with  m we  will  get  one  figure ; while  by  comparing 
to,  with  m we  will  get  a different  and,  quite  likely,  a widely  divergent  figure. 
Two  separate  comparisons  of  population  A with  B will  thus  yield  two  results. 

Mi  — M2 

In  general,  as  n increases  the  numerical  value  of  ~ ===== 

V Ei2  + E2 

will  increase.  Consequently,  the  standard  formula  in  the  form  in  which  it 
is  generally  employed  is  not  suitable  for  the  practical  purpose  of  obtaining 
a series  of  comparative  figures.  On  the  other  hand,  by  the  method  employed 
here  the  results  will  differ  but  little  with  the  size  of  the  samples,  especially 
when  such  composite  samples  give  fairly  approximate  representations  of 
their  populations. 

Of  even  greater  importance  in  comparing  the  two  methods  is  the  factor 
M, — M2.  It  is  obvious  that  pairs  of  populations  the  chief  differentiating 
characters  of  which  are  not  the  same  or  in  which  the  values  of  M, — M„  differ 
widely  can  not  be  fairly  compared  by  any  method  employing  this  factor.  A 
striking  effect  of  the  influence  the  factor  M, — M„  exerts  on  the  final  value 
obtained  by  the  standard  method,  is  shown  by  the  comparison  between  P. 
lethostigma  and  P.  albigutta.  The  difference  between  the  means  in  this  case 
is  comparatively  high,  resulting  in  a very  high  value  for  the  final  figure, 
although  the  probable  error  is  also  high  because  of  the  wide  spread  of  the 


282 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


distribution.  In  spite  of  the  fact  that  this  pair  of  populations  shows  a slight 
amount  of  intergradation,  the  index  of  their  divergence  obtained  by  the 
standard  method  is  much  greater  than  that  of  other  pairs  which  do  not  in- 
tergrade at  all.  This  example  shows  in  a striking  manner  that  the  standard 
method  is  not  well  adapted  for  our  purpose  which  requires  the  comparison 
of  pairs  of  populations  that  differ  by  widely  unlike  characters. 

The  influence  of  the  factor  M, — M0  is  further  shown  by  the  comparison 
of  the  fifth  pair  of  populations  falling  out  of  line,  namely,  that  of  Gobiosoma 
bosci  and  G.  robustum.  In  this  case,  although  the  samples  are  small,  never- 
theless the  probable  error  is  relatively  small,  evidently  because  of  the  small 
range,  according  to  the  unit  adopted.  In  spite  of  the  small  probable  error, 
the  final  figure  obtained  is  yet  relatively  small,  evidently  due  to  the  small 
difference  between  the  means. 

It  is  evident  that  the  standard  formula  is  not  well  adapted  for  our  pur- 
pose because  the  several  factors  involved  do  not  result  in  fair  comparative 
figures.  It  is  preferable  from  the  point  of  view  of  theoretical  mathematics 
in  determining  probabilities;  but  for  our  purpose  it  is  all  too  often  not 
practically  workable.  One  great  drawback  is  that  in  practice  we  usually  do 
not  have  samples  of  sufficient  size  that  may  be  adequate  according  to  mathe- 
matical usage.  But  irrespective  of  the  size  of  the  samples,  the  formula  is 
not  properly  applicable  because  of  the  other  factors  involved,  as  discussed 
above.  An  application  of  the  standard  formula  evidently  is  often  bound  to 
lead  us  astray.  Although  the  method  employed  lacks  the  mathematical  ele- 
gance of  the  standard  method,  in  reality  it  gives  a truer  picture  and  inter- 
pretation of  the  facts  of  nature  in  connection  with  the  problem  under  con- 
sideration. The  relative  degree  of  divergence  of  the  pairs  of  populations,  or 
their  position  in  the  series,  with  which  this  paper  deals,  is  shown  more 
nearly  in  keeping  with  the  facts  of  nature  or  more  accurately  by  our  present 
method. 

The  method  here  employed  also  has  the  advantage  of  greater  clarity. 
In  using  the  standard  formula  biometricians  seem  to  be  chiefly  concerned 
whether  the  resulting  figure  is  “significant”  or  not;  but  once  “significant” 
figures  are  obtained  no  particular  stress  seems  to  be  laid  generally  on  the 
relative  value  of  figures  of  differing  magnitude.  For  instance,  let  us  say 
that  we  compare  three  pairs  of  populations  and  obtain  the  three  “significant” 
figures  of  5,  10  and  15,  respectively.  Now,  definitely,  just  what  is  the  mean- 
ing of  these  relative  figures  outside  their  implication  of  differing  degrees 
of  probability?  Certainly,  this  is  not  clear  to  the  average  busy  biologist.  Of 
course,  5 is  greater  than  10,  and  10  is  greater  than  15;  but  the  differences 
between  these  figures  do  not  convey  any  special  meaning  or  idea  in  connec- 
tion with  our  problem,  since  the  biologist  is  not  in  the  habit  of  thinking  in 
such  terms.  Indeed,  the  relative  magnitude  of  such  figures  hardly  seem  to 
have  any  definite  meaning  within  rather  wide  limits  even  to  the  statisticians. 
Furthermore,  such  figures  are  not  susceptible  of  conveying  a very  precise 
meaning  with  respect  to  divergence;  because  their  value  changes  materially 
as  the  size  of  the  sample  is  changed,  and  with  other  factors.  Even  their 
relative  value  in  the  series  is  likely  to  change  with  a change  in  these  fac- 
tors. On  the  other  hand,  by  the  method  employed,  if  we  compare  three  pairs 
of  populations  and  find  that  the  intergrades  are  5,  10,  and  15  per  cent,  re- 
spectively, of  the  total  number  of  individuals  in  the  composite  samples,  on 
the  average,  such  figures  immediately  convey  a definite  and  clear  meaning 
to  every  biologist. 

Nomenclature  of  Taxonomic  Units  Below  Full  Specific  Rank. 

It  has  been  shown  that  the  boundary  lines  which  may  be  drawn  between 
the  species  and  its  subdivisions  are  arbitrary,  and  tentative  limits  have  been 
proposed  where  to  draw  such  lines.  The  nomenclature  of  the  species  and 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


283 


its  subdivisions  may  now  be  considered  with  profit,  and  a simpler  method 
than  the  one  now  in  use  is  here  proposed. 

According  to  present  usage  which  is  sanctioned  by  the  international 
code  of  zoological  nomenclature,  subspecies  are  designated  in  the  form  of 
trinomials.  The  international  code  goes  into  the  subject  only  as  far  as 
subspecies  are  concerned,  and  no  units  of  lower  rank  are  considered;  but  on 
account  of  the  arbitrary  nature  of  these  categories  there  is  no  fundamental 
reason  for  stopping  there,  and  some  authors  now  are  using  quadrinomials, 
generally  inserting  the  term  “variety”  between  the  third  and  fourth  words 
of  the  full  name.  However,  there  is  likewise  no  reason  for  stopping  even 
there.  One,  conceivably,  may  even  propose  to  use  quinquinomials,  sexi- 
nomials,  etc.,  since  in  a gradual  series  such  as  we  are  dealing  with  where  the 
boundary  lines  necessarily  must  be  arbitrary,  such  boundaries  may  be 
increased. 

It  is  evident  that  carried  to  its  logical  conclusion,  the  nomenclature  of 
taxonomic  units  below  specific  rank  would  become  clumsy  and  unwieldy,  and 
assume  a form  very  similar  to  the  pre-Linnaean  polynomial  nomenclature; 
although  it  is  true  that  the  fundamental  nature  of  the  binomial  system  would 
be  retained.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  there  is  room  for  improvement  in 
our  present  method  of  naming  taxonomic  units  below  specific  rank. 

Another  practical  difficulty  inherent  in  the  present  system  is  found  in 
the  relation  of  zoological  considerations  to  nomenclature.  It  should  be  re- 
membered that  the  Linnaean  or  binomial  system  of  nomenclature  serves  two 
virtually  independent  purposes:  (1)  It  supplies  names  to  species  and  groups 
of  higher  or  lower  rank,  such  names  being  for  the  practical  use  of  handles 
by  which  we  may  discuss  these  entities.  (2)  It  also  attempts  to  show  rela- 
tionship. In  practice  these  two  purposes  cannot  be  made  to  work  in  entire 
accord.  For  the  first  purpose  stability  is  a primary  consideration,  and  it 
could  be  served  most  effectively  by  a set  of  arbitrary  rules,  such  as  the  inter- 
national code;  but  since  the  second  purpose  must  also  be  considered,  abso- 
lute stability  is  impossible,  and  part  of  the  full  names  of  organisms  must 
change  with  inci'eased  knowledge,  with  our  changing  ideas  of  relationship, 
or  with  differences  in  the  interpretation  of  relationship  by  individual  biolo- 
gists. Changes  in  nomenclature  caused  by  zoological  considerations  are,  or 
may  be,  chiefly  of  two  kinds. 

First,  changes  in  the  first  word  or  the  generic  part  of  the  name  of  a 
species  are  caused  by  the  everlasting  shifting  about  of  species  from  one 
genus  to  another,  or  the  frequent  changing  of  the  boundaries  of  genera  by 
individual  zoologists.  Species  are  thus  constantly  shuffled  with  respect  to 
their  generic  affiliations.  Nomenclatorial  instability  of  this  kind  is,  of  course, 
inherent  in  the  system  and  is  frequently  unavoidable;  although  it  would  be 
well  for  zoologists  to  exercise  restraint  in  their  treatment  of  many  cases  of 
this  kind  by  refraining  from  changing  the  constitution  of  genera  on  the 
slightest  provocation. 

Second,  in  genera  in  which  the  populations  are  now  in  an  early  and 
active  state  of  diversification  and  ramification,  questions  may  arise:  (a)  as 
to  whether  a given  population  is  to  be  properly  assigned  specific  or  subspe- 
cific rank,  and  (b)  if  the  latter,  as  to  the  proper  species  into  which  it  is  to  be 
grouped.  In  such  cases,  any  interpretation  given  of  the  relationship  between 
closely  related  populations,  on  the  basis  of  the  available  zoological  evidence, 
is  not  the  only  possible  one.  The  chief  difficulty  in  the  way  of  a single,  con- 
sistent and  acceptable  interpretation  in  cases  of  this  kind  often  lies  in  the 
uncertainty  as  to  which  one  of  the  several  populations  is  the  more  primitive 
one,  and  the  consequent  uncertainty  as  to  the  starting  point  of  the  argument. 
This  is  primarily  due  to  our  present  very  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  me- 
chanism and  methods  of  descent.  While  the  available  evidence  may  show  to 
a high  degree  of  probability  that  the  several  populations  under  consideration 


284 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :13 


should  be  assigned  to  taxonomic  units  of  varying  degree,  yet  the  interpreta- 
tion of  their  relationship  on  which  such  assignment  must  depend  is  of  a 
speculative  nature  to  a large  extent.  Examples  of  such  genera  are  Hippo- 
campus (see,  for  instance,  page  549  of  my  review,  1937),  and  Bathygobius 
(a  study  of  which  I have  now  prepared  in  manuscript  form).  In  such  cases 
scrambling  and  unscrambling  of  the  trinomial  names  of  subspecies  may  well 
be  expected  to  result  from  different  interpretation  of  the  data  by  individual 
zoologists. 

In  view  of  the  possible  resulting  complexity  of  nomenclature  as  outlined 
above,  the  impossibility  of  being  reasonably  certain  of  relationship,  in  some 
cases,  at  the  present  time,  and  the  necessarily  arbitrary  nature  of  limiting 
taxonomic  units,  the  following  method  of  naming  species  and  their  sub- 
divisions is  here  proposed.  All  names  are  to  be  binomial.  To  indicate  that 
a taxonomic  unit  is  to  be  regarded  as  a full  species  the  numeral  1 is  inserted 
after  the  specific  name  of  the  binomial ; a taxonomic  unit  of  the  next  lower 
rank  is  to  have  the  numeral  2 inserted  in  the  same  place;  the  next  lower, 
the  figure  3.  Related  populations  of  organisms  of  the  rank  of  full  species  or 
lower  are  thus  divided  by  arbitrary  lines  into  categories  and  the  categories 
designated  by  number,  namely,  a category  of  the  first  order  or  a full  species, 
a category  of  the  second  order  or  a subspecies,  a category  of  the  third  order 
or  a race.  In  the  case  of  a full  species  which  is  not  subdivided  the  numeral 
may  be  left  out  in  writing  its  binomial  designation.  By  way  of  illustration, 
a taxonomic  unit  of  the  second  category  would  be  designated  as : 

A — us  a — us2; 

while  a unit  of  the  third  category  would  bear  the  designation : 

A — us  b — usR. 

The  subspecies  treated  of  in  this  paper  are  designated  above  according 
to  the  proposed  method. 

The  proposed  method  is  in  consonance  with  the  international  code, 
except  for  the  required  use  of  trinomials  for  subspecies,  which  is  not  uni- 
versally followed  anyway.  If  anything  it  will  tend  to  reenforce  the  system 
of  binomial  nomenclature  which  will  thus  become  binomial  in  fact  as  well 
as  in  theory,  and  the  necessity  for  using  the  clumsy  trinomial  and  quadri- 
nomial  designations  will  be  obviated.  Another  advantage  is  that  this  method 
does  not  imply  a commitment  as  to  the  relationship  of  the  populations  named. 
It  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  given  a certain  set  of  evidence  rela- 
tionship may  be  interpreted  sometimes  in  more  than  one  way.  In  such 
cases,  if  the  nomenclature  be  used  in  the  form  here  proposed  it  will  be  in 
accordance  with  the  known  facts  and  no  more ; the  probable  taxonomic  rank 
of  the  particular  unit  may  thus  be  indicated  without  the  necessity  of  making 
a commitment  in  regard  to  relationship  about  which  one  may  be  uncertain. 

An  apparent  advantage  of  this  method  of  nomenclature  is  its  flexibil- 
ity. However,  its  very  flexibility  may  turn  out  to  be  a disadvantage  if  the 
method  is  not  used  with  caution.  It  may  tend  to  put  a premium  on  care- 
less work.  Without  the  necessity  of  using  trinomials,  quadrinomials,  etc.,  it 
may  result  in  the  excessive  multiplication  of  new  names  based  on  unim- 
portant or  irrelevant  differences  exhibited  by  a few  specimens  after  a hap- 
hazard examination  of  such  specimens.  Nevertheless,  the  advantages  of 
this  method  are  so  evident  that  they  outweigh  this  possible  disadvantage, 
and,  in  any  case,  there  is  no  absolute  insurance  against  careless  or  half- 
baked  work.  The  undesirable  contingency  indicated  may  be  obviated  by  a 
general  agreement  among  systematists  to  refrain  from  formally  naming 
categories  of  a rank  lower  than  a subspecies,  or  at  least  the  next  lower  or 
third  category  which  would  be  equivalent  to  a quadrinomial  as  now  used; 
otherwise  the  resulting  great  increase  in  new  names  will  tend  to  make 
zoological  nomenclature  too  burdensome. 


1938] 


Ginsburg:  Arithmetical  Definition  of  Species 


285 


Summary. 

1.  No  absolute  criterion  exists  by  which  to  determine  just  what  is  a 
species.  All  proposed  criteria  hold  only  in  part  or  in  special  cases.  Morph- 
ology is  the  only  practical  and  most  generally  applicable  criterion,  al- 
though it  has  only  a relative  value.  The  present  study  is  based  entirely  on 
that  criterion. 

2.  Intergradation  in  nature  is  universal.  It  is  the  rule  rather  than  the 
exception.  This  is  true  of  species  as  well  as  of  subspecies  or  taxonomic  cate- 
gories of  lower  rank.  (To  a certain  extent  this  is  also  true  of  categories 
higher  than  species,  but  this  paper  deals  only  with  the  species  and  its  sub- 
divisions.) Consequently  the  limitation  of  the  species  concept  or  that  of 
any  of  its  subdivisions  must  depend  on  the  degree  of  intergradation. 

3.  The  intergradation  between,  or  the  divergence  of,  natural  popula- 
tions is  such  that  if  some  method  be  adopted  for  measuring  intergradation, 
,or  divergence,  and  a sufficient  number  of  pairs  of  closely  related  popula- 
tions be  compared,  the  figures  expressing  the  measures  and  indicating  the 
degree  of  intergradation,  or  divergence,  will  form  a continuous  series  with- 
out any  breaks.  Consequently,  it  follows  that  any  limitation  given  to  our 
concept  of  species,  subspecies,  race,  etc.,  necessarily  must  be  arbitrary. 

4.  A definite  measure  which  is  determined  by  a simple  arithmetical 
calculation  is  employed  in  the  present  study  for  the  purpose  of  expressing 
intergradation,  or  divergence.  This  measure  is  based  on  the  character  show- 
ing the  greatest  divergence  between  the  two  populations. 

5.  The  measure  employed  has  the  advantage  of  simplicity,  clarity  and 
ease  of  determination,  and  it  gives  a correct  though  approximate  interpre- 
tation of  the  data. 

6.  Using  this  measure  as  a basis,  definitions  of  the  terms  species,  sub- 
species, and  race  are  presented. 

7.  The  necessity  of  proper  sampling  of  the  material  from  which  the 
data  are  obtained,  that  form  the  basis  of  the  measure,  is  indicated  and  dis- 
cussed. The  method  of  sampling  the  material  used  in  the  present  study  is 
stated. 

8.  A series  of  examples  of  pairs  of  related  populations  of  fishes  is 
presented,  showing  the  application  of  the  measure,  proving  the  gradualness 
of  intergradations,  inter  se,  and  showing  that  the  necessarily  arbitrary 
boundaries  drawn  in  the  definition  of  the  species  and  its  subdivisions,  are 
more  or  less  in  accordance  with  the  facts  of  speciation  as  they  occur  in 
nature. 

9.  A comparison  is  made  between  our  method  of  measuring  divergence 
and  the  standard  method. 

10.  A method  for  the  nomenclature  of  populations  below  specific  rank 
is  proposed. 


Bibliography.15 

Davenport,  Charles  B.  and  J.  W.  Blankinship. 

1898.  A precise  criterion  of  species.  Science  (n.  s.)  vol.  7,  pp.  684-695. 

Ginsburg,  Isaac. 

1929.  Review  of  the  weakfishes  (Cynoscion)  of  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  coasts 
of  the  United  States,  with  a description  of  a new  species.  Bull.  U.  S. 
Bur.  Fish.,  vol.  45,  pp.  71-85. 

1932.  A revision  of  the  genus  Gobionellus  (Family  Gobiidae).  Bull.  Bing- 
ham Oceanog.  Coll.,  vol.  4,  art.  2. 

1933.  A revision  of  the  genus  Gobiosoma  (Family  Gobiidae)  with  an  ac- 
count of  the  genus  Garmannia,  idem,  art.  5. 


286 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


1937.  Review  of  the  seahorses  (Hippocampus)  found  on  the  coasts  of  the 
American  continents  and  of  Europe.  Proc.  TJ.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  83, 
pp.  497-594. 

1937a.  The  species  and  its  subdivisions.  Copeia,  pp.  184-188. 

Goode,  G.  Brown. 

1879.  A preliminary  catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  the  St.  John’s  River  and 
the  east  coast  of  Florida,  with  descriptions  of  a new  genus  and  three 
new  species.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  2,  pp.  108-121. 

Hildebrand,  Samuel  F.  and  Louella  E.  Cable. 

1930.  Development  and  life  history  of  fourteen  teleostean  fishes  at  Beaufort, 
N.  C.  Bull.  U.  S.  Bur.  Fish.,  vol.  46,  pp.  383-488. 

Hildebrand,  Samuel  F.  and  William  C.  Schroeder. 

1928.  Fishes  of  Chesapeake  Bay,  idem,  vol.  43,  pt.  1,  366  pp. 

Jenkins,  Oliver  P.  and  Barton  W.  Evermann. 

1888.  Description  of  eighteen  new  species  of  fishes  from  the  Gulf  of  Cali- 
fornia. Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  11,  pp.  137-158. 

Pearl,  Raymond. 

1930.  Introduction  to  medical  biometry  and  statistics.  Philadelphia  and 
London.  W.  B.  Saunders  Company. 

Robson,  G.  C. 

1928.  The  species  problem.  London.  Oliver  and  Boyd. 


15  Includes  only  those  publications  to  which  reference  is  made  in  the  text. 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


287 


14. 

Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions 
of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society,  XIV. 

Introduction,  Itinerary,  List  of  Stations,  Nets  and  Dredges  of  the 
Eastern  Pacific  Zaca  Expedition,  1937- 1938.1 

William  Beebe 

Department  of  Tropical  Research 
New  York  Zoological  Society 

(Text-figures  1 & 2). 

[This  is  the  fourteenth  of  a series  of  papers  dealing  with  the  collec- 
tions made  in  the  eastern  Pacific  by  the  expeditions  of  the  New  York 
Zoological  Society.  The  first  thirteen  of  the  series  appeared  under  the 
heading  of  “The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.”  As  it  is  necessary  to  sim- 
plify the  titles  of  future  reports,  all  publications  dealing  with  the  materials 
gathered  in  this  region  will  appear  from  now  on  under  the  title  of  the 
“Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society.”  Under 
this  name  will  appear  the  results  of  work  of  the  Noma  (1923),  Arcturus 
(1925),  Antares  (1933),  Templeton  Crocker  (1936)  and  the  Eastern  Pacific 
Zaca  (1937-1938)  Expeditions.] 

Introduction. 

The  Twenty-sixth  Expedition  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Research 
was  made  possible  by  Mr.  Templeton  Crocker’s  generous  offer  of  the  use  of 
his  yacht  Zaca  for  the  second  time.  Mr.  Crocker  accompanied  the  expedition 
together  with  his  friend  Mr.  Maurice  Willows.  The  scientific  personnel  was 
the  same  as  on  the  first  trip  and  consisted  of  four  members  of  the  Tropical 
Research  Department,  Dr.  William  Beebe,  Director;  Mr.  John  Tee-Van, 
General  Associate;  Miss  Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate;  and  Mr. 
George  Swanson,  Artist.  Toshio  Asaeda  was,  as  before,  photographer  and 
preparateur,  and  together  with  Captain  Alfred  Pedersen  and  the  entire 
crew  were  most  efficient  and  helpful  in  every  way. 

The  Zaca  is  a Diesel  schooner,  118  feet  over  all,  with  a gross  tonnage 
of  84.  She  is  supplied  with  all  of  the  usual  apparatus  for  capturing  fish  and 
animals,  such  as  seines,  nets,  submerged  lights,  etc.;  in  addition  Mr.  Crocker 
provided  for  these  expeditions,  a gasoline-engined  winch  and  a 7,500-foot 
length  of  34 -inch-diameter  steel  cable.  With  this  apparatus  we  were  able 
to  trawl  down  to  a maximum  depth  of  500  fathoms  and  to  dredge  on  the 
bottom  with  deep-sea  dredges.  Two  valuable  features  of  the  vessel  were 
the  bow  pulpit  and  the  boom-walk  copied  after  those  which  I first  used  on 
the  Arcturus  in  1925. 


1 Contribution  Number  560,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society. 
For  corresponding  List  of  Stations  of  the  First  Zaca  Trip,  see  Zoologica,  Vol.  XXII,  No.  2. 


288 


[XXIII  :14 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 

Itinerary. 

The  route  of  the  expedition  is  shown  on  the  two  accompanying  maps. 
We  left  San  Diego  on  November  6,  1937,  and  disbanded  at  Balboa  on  April 
5,  1938.  The  route  is  indicated  by  the  successive  numbers  of  the  Stations. 

The  dates  and  time  spent  at  the  various  localities  are  as  follows:  San 
Diego,  November  5;  MEXICO:  Ensenada,  November  6;  Guadelupe  Island, 
November  8;  San  Benito  Islands,  November  9 and  10;  Cedros  Island,  Novem- 
ber 10;  Cape  San  Lucas,  November  13;  Penas,  Banderas  Bay,  November  15 
and  16;  Chamela  Bay,  November  17  to  20;  Tenacatita  Bay,  November  20; 
Manzanillo,  November  21  and  22;  Sihuatanejo  Bay,  November  24;  Acapulco, 
November  25  to  29 ; Port  Angeles,  December  1 ; Port  Guatulco,  December 
2 to  7 ; Santa  Cruz  Bay,  December  7 and  8 ; Tangola-Tangola,  December 
8 to  13;  EL  SALVADOR:  La  Libertad,  December  16  to  19;  La  Union,  De- 
cember 20  and  21;  Meanguera  Island,  December  21  and  22;  Farrallone 
Islands,  December  22;  Conchaguita  Island,  December  22;  La  Union,  Decem- 
ber 22  and  23,  and  26  and  27;  NICARAGUA:  Potosi  River,  December  23  to 
25;  Monypenny  Point,  December  25  and  26;  Corinto,  December  28  to  January 
7;  San  Juan  del  Sur,  January  9 to  12;  COSTA  RICA:  Port  Parker,  January 
12  to  23;;  Murcielago  Bay,  January  23;  Potrero  Grande  Bay,  January  23 
and  24;  Port  Culebra,  January  24  to  31;  Cocos  Bay,  January  26,  29  and  31; 
Braxilito  Bay,  January  31  to  February  1;  Piedra  Blanca  Bay,  February  1 
to  6;  Puntarenas,  February  11  and  12;  Cedro  Island,  February  12  and  13; 
Puntarenas,  February  13  to  21;  Cedro  Island,  February  21  and  22;  Negritas 
Island,  February  22;  Jasper  Island,  February  22  to  25;  Ballenas  Bay,  Feb- 
ruary 25  and  26 ; Puntarenas,  February  28  to  March  1 ; Uvita  Bay,  March  2 
to  4;  Golfito,  Gulf  of  Dulce,  March  5 to  9;  Pavon  Bay,  March  9 and  10; 
PANAMA:  Puerto  Armuelles,  March  11;  Parida  Island,  March  11  to  13; 
Bahia  Honda,  March  13  to  19;  Hermosa  Bay,  Coiba  Island,  March  19  and  20; 
Hannibal  Bank,  March  20;  Balboa,  C.Z.,  March  22  to  24;  COLOMBIA: 
Gorgona  Island,  March  27  to  April  2;  PANAMA:  Balboa,  April  5. 


List  of  Stations,  Nets  and  Dredges. 

The  data  presented  in  the  following  tables  are  self-explanatory.  Ab- 
bi'eviations  are  as  follows:  The  Station  numbers  refer  to  the  continuously 
numbered  series  of  oceanographic  stations  of  the  Department  of  Tropical 
Research.  In  the  second  column  the  letter  “D”  refers  to  dredges,  “T”  to 
tow-nets  and  “L”  to  submarine  night  lights.  Hence,  182,  D-l  means  the 
first  dredge  drawn  at  Station  182. 

In  the  third  column  the  dredges  are  separated  into  two-  and  four-foot 
ones,  the  measurement  being  across  the  mouth.  Both  sizes  were  of  the  Blake 
type,  the  bags  being  of  two-inch  and  one-inch  mesh  respectively.  The  small 
dredges  were  drawn  from  launch  or  dory,  the  large  ones  being  handled  from 
the  deck  of  the  yacht,  using  the  quarter-inch  steel  cable.  The  tow-nets  of 
one-half  and  one  metre  diameter  were  of  standard  Michael  Sars’  type,  with 
2XX  silk  bolting  cloth  posteriorly  and  OXX  bolting  cloth  anteriorly,  the 
mouth  of  the  net  having  a collar  of  shrimp  netting.  The  lights  indicated 
refer  to  night  stations,  where  submerged  electric  lights  were  employed, 
and  the  captures  made  by  the  use  of  long-handled  dip-nets. 


1938] 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


289 


Sta- 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1937 

Hr  s. 

Mins. 

Nov. 

126 

D-13 

4'  dredge 

45 

82 

28°  12' 

115°  07' 

E.  of  Cedros  Is.,  Mex. 

10 

Mud,  algae. 

— 

10 

D-14 

4'  dredge 

45 

82 

28°  10' 

115°  08' 

“ 

10 

— 

10 

D-15 

4'  dredge 

42 

76 

28°  09' 

115°  08' 

“ 

10 

Mud. 

— 

10 

D-16 

4'  dredge 

42 

76 

28°  07' 

115°  08' 

10 

— 

20 

D-17 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

28°  05' 

115°  09' 

10 

u 

— 

10 

D-18 

4'  dredge 

20 

36 

28°  01' 

115°  10' 

SE.  of  Cedros  Is.,  Mex. 

10 

Rocks,  algae. 

— 

10 

D-19 

4'  dredge 

25 

45 

2 7°  59' 

115°  09' 

“ 

10 

“ 

— 

10 

135 

D-27 

2'  dredge 

2-6 

3.6-11 

22°  53' 

109°  54' 

San  Lucas  Bay,  Mex. 

13 

Sand. 

— 

20 

150 

D-27 

4'  dredge 

60 

108 

23°  01' 

109°  28' 

Gorda  Banks,  Mex. 

13 

— 

20 

176 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

31°  25' 

116°  58' 

23  m.  S.xW.  of  Banda 
Point,  Mex. 

7 

— 

i 

10 

177 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

28°  42' 

117°  50' 

30  m.  E.xS.  of  Guad- 
alupe Is.,  Mex. 

8 

— 

— 

30 

178 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

28°  18' 

115°  34' 

San  Benito  Is.,  Mex. 

9 

— 

2 

00 

179 

T-l 

Yl  Metre 

0 

0 

24°  02' 

111°  38' 

18  m.  SSE.  of  Pt. 
Tosca,  Mex. 

12 

— 

— 

10 

180 

T-l 

y Metre 

0 

0 

23°  31' 

110°  54' 

65  m.  N W . of  Cape 
Falso,  Mex. 

12 

— 

10 

181 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

20°  36'  30" 

105°  16' 

Banderas  Bay,  Mex. 

15 

— 

2 

0 

182 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

8 

14.5 

19°  34'  30" 

105°  08'  15" 

Chamela  Bay,  Mex. 

17 

Sand,  algae. 

— 

10 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

12 

22 

19°  34' 

105°  07'  30" 

“ 

17 

— 

10 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

15 

27 

19°  33'  45" 

105°  07'  45" 

“ 

17 

“ 

— 

10 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

16 

29 

19°  33'  30" 

105°  08'  15" 

17 

Sand,  algae, 
cr.  shell. 

— 

10 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

19°  34'  45" 

105°  08'  30" 

17 

— 

2 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

19°  34'  45" 

105°  08'  30" 

18 

— 

2 

0 

183 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

15 

27 

19°  17' 

104°  51' 

TenacatitaBay,  Mex. 

21 

Sand. 

— 

10 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

30 

54 

19°  15'  30" 

104°  51' 

21 

Muddy  sand. 

— 

15 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

19°  14'  30" 

104°  51'  30" 

a 

21 

Sandy  mud. 

— 

15 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

19°  14'  30" 

104°  52'  30" 

“ 

21 

Mud. 

— 

15 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

19°  18' 

104°  51' 

“ 

20 

— 

2 

30 

184 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

25 

45 

19°  03'  45" 

104°  20'  45" 

Manzanillo,  Mex. 

22 

Sand. 

— 

10 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

30 

55 

19°  04' 

104°  22' 

“ 

22 

Grav’ly  sand. 

— 

20 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

19°  03'  30" 

104°  19'  45" 

21 

— 

3 

0 

185 

T-l 

Metre 

300 

545 

17°  45' 

103°  05' 

43  m.  SE.  of  Pt. 
Telmo,  Mex. 

23 

— 

2 

0 

T-2 

Metre 

400 

730 

17°  45' 

103°  05' 

23 

— 

2 

0 

T-3 

Metre 

500 

910 

17°  45' 

103°  05' 

23 

— 

2 

0 

T-4 

J4  Metre 

0 

0 

17°  45' 

103°  05' 

23 

— 

0 

30 

186 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

17°  38' 

102°  00' 

20  m.  W.  of  Sihua- 
tanejo,  Mex. 

23 

— 

2 

30 

187 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

17°  17' 

101°  16' 

72  m.  WNW.  of  Aca- 
pulco, Mex. 

24 

— 

0 

30 

188 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  15'  30" 

99°  55'  30" 

Acapulco,  Mex. 

25 

— 

2 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  15'  30" 

99°  55'  30" 

26 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  15'  30" 

99°  55'  30" 

27 

— 

2 

0 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  15'  30" 

99°  55'  30" 

“ 

28 

— 

2 

0 

189 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

20 

36 

16°  40' 

99°  43'  30" 

17  m.  SE.xE.  of 
Acapulco,  Mex. 

29 

Sandy  mud, 
algae. 

— 

10 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

20 

36 

16°  39'  30" 

99°  42' 

* 

29 

— 

20 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

13 

23.5 

16°  39' 

99°  41' 

“ 

29 

Mud. 

— 

10 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

28 

51 

16°  38'  30" 

99°  40' 

a 

29 

— 

14 

190 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  30' 

99°  13' 

45  m.  ESE.  of 
Acapulco,  Mex. 

29 

— 

1 

0 

191 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

8 

14.5 

16°  29' 

98°  45' 

Mouth  of  Dulce  Riv., 
Mex. 

30 

— 

0 

10 

192 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

26 

47 

16°  16'  30" 

98°  37' 

4 m.  SSW.  of  Maldan- 
ado  Pt.,  Mex. 

30 

Mud. 

— 

10 

290 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :14 


GUADELUPE  IS.^> 
177® 


SAN  BENITO  ISH78@ 
CEDROS  IS."l26^b 


~o. 


SAN  DIEGO 


MAGDALENA  BAY 

179© 
180  © 


SAN  LUCAS  B.-ISS^^baKk 
GORDA  BANKS-150 


.BANDERAS  B.-I8I^ 

, ,o  (tbes  mar/etas  /s.) 


CHAMELA  B.- 182 
TENACATITA  B."  183 
MAN2ANIL  LO-184 


S I H U AT  A NEJO 


185® 

186 
B. - 

187 

ACAPULCO-  188 
189 
190® 

DULCE  RIVER-I9I" 

192 
193 

PORT  ANGELES  - 194- 
P O R T GUATULCOl 
SANTA  CRUZ  B.  / 9 
TANGOLA-TANGOLA  B.  196 

ZACA  EXPEDITION 
1937-1938 

NEW  YORK 
ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


1938] 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


291 


LA  LIBERTAD  -198 


GULF  OF  FONSECA-199 

(CONCHAGUITA  IS.,  LA  UNION, 
UCANGUERA  IS,  NONFPENNF  PT.. 
POTOSI  P.,  FARALLONE  IS.) 

CORI  NTO-200 

© 

201 


PORT  PARKER 
-203 


MURCIELAGO  BAY-204 
POTRERO  GRANDE  B/205 
PORT  C U LE  BRA—  206 

(COCOS  BJ 

BR  AX  I LITO  BAY-207 
PIEDRA  BLANCA  B.-208 

209© 

21 

210© 

GULF  OF  NICOYA-213 

(ALCATRAZ  IS.,  BALLENAS  B., 

CEDRO  IS.,  JASPER  IS., 

NEGRITOS  IS.,  PUNTARENAs)) 

UVITA  BAY 


2170 

GULF  OF  DULCE-218 

(GOLr/rO,  PAVON  b) 


PARI  DA 

CO  I BA  IS.  “223 
HANNIBAL  BANK-224 
225© 


GORGONA  IS. 
232  " 


292 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :14 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1937 

Hrs. 

Mins. 

192 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

33 

60 

16°  16' 

98°  36' 

4 m.  SSW.  of  Maldan- 

Nov. 

30 

Sand. 

10 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

38 

69 

16°  15' 

98°  35'  30" 

ado  Pt.,  Mex. 

a 

30 

Mud. 

10 

193 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

16°  05' 

98°  17' 

21  m.  SE.  of  Maldan- 

30 

— 

1 

10 

194 

L-l 

Light 

15°  39'  15" 

96°  30'  40" 

ado  Pt.,  Mex. 
Port  Angeles,  Mex. 

Dec. 

1 

3 

0 

195 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

2.5 

4.5 

15°  44'  56" 

96°  08'  03" 

Port  Guatulco,  Mex. 

4 

Sand,  algae. 

— 

3 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.5 

15°  44'  51" 

96°  07'  51" 

4 

Sand. 

— 

4 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

3.5 

6.3 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  07'  53" 

* 

4 

Sand,  cr.  shell 

— 

3 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

4.5 

8.2 

15°  44'  40" 

96°  07'  53" 

a 

4 

Sand,  algae, 

— 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

15°  44'  50" 

96°  08'  09" 

a 

5 

cr.  shell. 
Sand,  algae. 

3 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  08'  05" 

U 

5 

Sand,  algae, 

— 

3 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

4.5 

8.2 

15°  44'  35" 

96°  08' 

« 

5 

cr.  shell. 
Rocks. 

_ 

3 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

15°  44'  30" 

96°  07'  56" 

“ 

5 

Sand,  algae, 

— 

3 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

7 

12.6 

15°  44'  28" 

96°  07'  51" 

a 

5 

cr.  shell. 
Gr.  sand,  cr. 

_ 

5 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

15°  44'  53" 

96°  08'  03" 

« 

6 

shell. 

Gr.  sand,  cr. 

_ 

3 

D-ll 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

15°  44'  49" 

96°  07'  59" 

a 

6 

shell,  dead 
coral. 

Gr.  sand,  cr. 

4 

D-12 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

15°  44'  42" 

96°  07'  55" 

a 

6 

shell. 

Sand. 

_ 

3 

D-13 

2'  dredge 

8 

14.6 

15°  44'  33" 

96°  07'  49" 

a 

6 

« 

— 

3 

D-14 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

15°  44'  27" 

96°  07'  57" 

a 

6 

CoraL 

— 

5 

D-15 

Diving 

1.5 

2.7 

15°  44'  54" 

96°  07'  57" 

w 

6 

1 

0 

D-16 

2'  dredge 

10 

18.2 

15°  44'  35" 

96°  07'  45" 

a 

7 

Sand. 

— 

3 

D-17 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

15°  44'  39" 

96°  07'  42" 

“ 

7 

— 

5 

D-18 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

15°  44'  39" 

96°  07'  49" 

a 

7 

— 

3 

D-19 

4'  dredge 

17 

31 

15°  44'  22" 

96°  07'  27" 

a 

7 

Gr.  mud,  cr. 

— 

5 

D-20 

4'  dredge 

23 

42 

15°  44'  22" 

96°  07'  08" 

a 

7 

shell. 

Mud. 

_ 

10 

D-21 

4'  dredge 

18 

33 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  06'  55" 

Santa  CruzBay,  Mex. 

7 

“ 

— 

10 

L-l 

Light 

— 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  08' 

Port  Guatulco,  Mex. 

3 

— 

1 

30 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  08' 

4 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  44'  45" 

96°  08' 

5 

— 

2 

30 

196 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

5 

9 

15°  45'  58" 

96°  06' 

Tangola-Tangola 

9 

Gr.  sand. 

0 

3 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

5.5 

10 

15°  45'  53" 

96°  05'  57" 

Bay,  Mex. 

9 

Sand. 

0 

3 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

15°  45'  48" 

96°  05'  54" 

“ 

9 

“ 

0 

3 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

8 

14.5 

15°  45'  44" 

96°  05'  52" 

a 

9 

0 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

9 

16.3 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  05'  50" 

“ 

9 

“ 

0 

5 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

15°  45'  34" 

96°  06'  02" 

9 

Sand,  cr. 

0 

5 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

15°  45'  34" 

96°  06'  03" 

a 

9 

shell. 

Sand. 

0 

4 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

9 

16.3 

15°  45'  37" 

96°  05'  54" 

a 

9 

0 

5 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

7.5 

13.6 

15°  45'  45" 

96°  05'  59" 

a 

12 

a 

0 

3 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

15°  45'  51" 

96°  06'  01" 

12 

“ 

0 

3 

D-ll 

2'  dredge 

4.5 

8.2 

15°  45'  57" 

96°  06'  02" 

12 

u 

0 

3 

D-12 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

15°  46'  02" 

96°  05'  58" 

a 

12 

a 

0 

5 

D-13 

2'  dredge 

10 

18 

15°  45'  32" 

96°  05'  52" 

“ 

12 

Gr.  sand,  cr. 

0 

3 

D-14 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

15°  45'  34" 

96°  06'  03" 

a 

12 

shell. 
Cr.  shell. 

0 

5 

D-15 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

15°  45'  34" 

96°  06'  03" 

12 

Cr.  shell. 

0 

5 

1938] 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


293 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1937 

Hrs. 

Mina. 

Dec. 

196 

D-16 

4'  dredge 

16 

29 

15°  45'  22" 

96°  05'  51" 

Tangola-Tangola 
Bay,  Mex. 

13 

Mud. 

0 

5 

D-17 

4'  dredge 

23 

42 

15°  45' 

96°  05'  34" 

“ 

13 

0 

3 

D-18 

4'  dredge 

30 

55 

15°  44'  58" 

96°  05'  13" 

U 

13 

U 

0 

3 

D-19 

4'  dredge 

30 

55 

15°  44' 

96°  05' 

13 

“ 

0 

3 

D-20 

4'  dredge 

50 

91 

15°  43'  15" 

95°  04'  15" 

13 

0 

4 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  06'  05" 

“ 

8 

— 

1 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  06'  05" 

“ 

9 

— 

1 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  06'  05" 

10 

— 

3 

0 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  06'  05" 

11 

2 

30 

L-5 

Light 

— 

— 

15°  45'  40" 

96°  06'  05" 

12 

— 

3 

0 

197 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

14 

25 

14°  16' 

92°  03' 

7 m.  W . of  Champer- 
ico,  Guatemala. 

15 

Mud. 

0 

5 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

14 

25 

14°  13' 

92°  02' 

44 

15 

0 

5 

198 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

13 

24 

13°  27'  20" 

89°  19'  20" 

La  Libertad,  El 
Salvador. 

16 

0 

5 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

14 

25 

13°  25'  50" 

89°  19'  20" 

« 

16 

a 

0 

5 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  28'  11" 

89°  19'  14" 

° 

16 

— 

1 

30 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  28'  11" 

89°  19'  14" 

a 

18 

— 

2 

00 

199 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

16 

29 

13°  08' 

87°  43' 

Meanguera  Is.,  Gulf 
of  Fonseca,  El  Sal. 

23 

Sand,  mud, 
cr.  shell. 

0 

3 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  02'  30" 

87°  29'  30" 

Monypenny  Pt.,  Gulf 
of  Fonseca,  Nicar. 

24 

Mud. 

0 

1 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  03' 

87°  30' 

24 

0 

2 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

13°  03'  30" 

87°  30'  20" 

“ 

24 

0 

1 

D-6 

4'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

13°  03' 30" 

87°  30'  20" 

“ 

24 

0 

1 

D-6 

4'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

13°  02'  30" 

87°  29'  30" 

“ 

24 

0 

1 

D-7 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  20'  07" 

87°  49' 

La  Union,  Gulf  of 
Fonseca,  El  Salv. 

27 

Mud,  man- 
grove leaves 

0 

1 

D-8 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  19'  53" 

87°  48'  43" 

“ 

27 

a 

0 

2 

D-9 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  19'  45" 

87°  48'  32" 

a 

27 

a 

0 

2 

D-10 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  19'  35" 

87°  48'  19" 

“ 

27 

Mud. 

0 

3 

D-ll 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  19'  24" 

87°  48'  00" 

u 

27 

0 

IK 

D-12 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  19'  08" 

87°  47'  30" 

“ 

27 

0 

3 

D-13 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  18'  50" 

87°  47'  07" 

27 

U 

0 

IK 

D-14 

4'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

13°  19'  40" 

87°  48'  23" 

u 

27 

“ 

0 

IK 

D-15 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  19'  52" 

87°  48'  43" 

“ 

27 

U 

0 

IK 

D-16 

4'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  48'  57" 

“ 

27 

* 

0 

ik 

D-17 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

13°  19'  54" 

87°  49'  07" 

44 

27 

Mud,  man- 
grove leaves. 

0 

IK 

D-18 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

13°  19'  50" 

87°  49' 

* 

27 

a 

0 

IK 

D-19 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

“ 

27 

* 

0 

1A 

D-20 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

27 

“ 

0 

IK 

D-21 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

“ 

27 

“ 

0 

IK 

D-22 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

“ 

27 

0 

IK 

D-23 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

27 

0 

IK 

D-24 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

* 

27 

0 

IK 

D-25 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

13°  20'  03" 

87°  49'  26" 

27 

“ 

0 

2 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  19'  59" 

87°  49'  15" 

20 

— 

3 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  11' 

87°  41'  15" 

Meanguera  Is.,  Gulf 
of  Fonseca,  El  Salv. 

21 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  19'  59" 

87°  49'  15" 

La  Union,  Gulf  of 
Fonseca,  El  Salv. 

22 

— 

2 

30 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

CO 

o 

© 

05 

O 

CO 

Monypenny  Pt.,  Gulf 
of  Fonseca,  Nicar. 

23 

— 

2 

0 

L-5 

Light 

— 

— 

13°  02' 

87°  29'  30" 

* 

24 

— 

2 

40 

200 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

6.5 

11.8 

121"  28'  25" 

87°  10'  59" 

Corinto,  Nicaragua 

29 

Mangrove 

leaves. 

0 

IK 

294 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :14 


Sta- 

tion 

No. 

Net 

No. 

Type  of 
Net 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Locality 

Date 

1937 

Bottom 

Duration 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Hrs. 

Mins. 

Dec. 

200 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

5.3 

9.7 

12°  28'  27" 

87°  10'  55" 

Corinto,  Nicaragua 

29 

Mangrove 

0 

VA 

leaves. 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

12°  28'  28" 

87°  10'  51" 

a 

29 

“ 

0 

3 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

Vi 

.9 

12°  28'  32" 

87°  10'  42" 

u 

29 

0 

VA 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

12°  28'  36" 

87°  10'  48" 

u 

29 

“ 

0 

1H 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

2.5 

4.6 

12°  28'  41" 

87°  10'  42" 

a 

29 

“ 

0 

2 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

12°  28'  45" 

87°  10'  34" 

“ 

29 

“ 

0 

2 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

6.6 

12 

12°  28'  24" 

87°  10'  58" 

M 

29 

“ 

0 

2 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

12°  28'  27" 

87°  11'  04" 

u 

29 

“ 

0 

2 

1938 

Jan. 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

12°  27'  46" 

87°  11'  32" 

“ 

5 

0 

VA 

D-ll 

2'  dredge 

8 

14  6 

12°  27'  46" 

87°  11' 32" 

M 

5 

Sand. 

0 

m 

D-12 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  27'  20" 

87°  11'  38" 

a 

5 

Mangrove 

0 

VA 

leaves. 

D-13 

2'  dredge 

3 

5 4 

12°  27'  14" 

87°  11'  45" 

w 

5 

a 

0 

3 

D-14 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  27'  30" 

87°  12'  06" 

“ 

5 

a 

0 

3 

D-15 

2'  dredge 

1 

1.8 

12°  27'  32" 

87°  12'  09" 

“ 

5 

“ 

0 

5 

D-16 

2'  dredge 

4-7 

7-13 

12°  27'  41" 

87°  12'  08" 

w 

5 

“ 

0 

5 

D-17 

2'  dredge 

7-10 

13-18 

12°  27'  46" 

87°  12'  17" 

a 

5 

Sand. 

0 

7 

D-18 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

12°  27'  38" 

87°  12'  41" 

“ 

5 

Mangrove 

0 

5 

leaves. 

D-19 

2'  dredge 

12-13 

22-24 

12°  28'  03" 

87°  12'  39" 

5 

0 

4 

D-20 

2'  dredge 

1.5 

2.7 

12°  27'  19" 

87°  11'  39" 

“ 

7 

0 

3 

D-21 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

12°  27'  14" 

87°  11'  38" 

M 

7 

“ 

0 

3 

D-22 

2'  dredge 

1.5 

2.7 

12°  27'  07" 

87°  11'  37" 

a 

7 

0 

5 

D-23 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  27'  20" 

87°  11'  35" 

a 

7 

“ 

0 

5 

D-24 

2'  dredge 

6.5 

11.8 

12°  27'  15" 

87°  11'  55" 

a 

7 

0 

5 

D-25 

2'  dredge 

6.5-2.5 

11. 8-1.5 

12°  27'  10" 

87°  11'  57" 

“ 

7 

“ 

0 

10 

D-26 

2'  dredge 

2.5 

4.5 

12°  27'  24" 

87°  11'  15" 

a 

7 

“ 

0 

3 

D-27 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  28'  38" 

87°  10'  42" 

“ 

7 

0 

5 

D-28 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  28' 31" 

87°  10'  45" 

a 

7 

“ 

0 

5 

D-29 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  28'  16" 

87°  10'  49" 

M 

7 

“ 

0 

5 

D-30 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

12°  28'  27" 

87°  10'  47" 

a 

7 

0 

6 

1937 

Dec. 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

12°  28'  22" 

87°  11'  06" 

“ 

28 

— 

2 

15 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

12°  28'  22" 

87°  11'  05" 

“ 

29 

— 

1 

30 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

12°  28'  22" 

87°  11'  05" 

* 

30 

— 

1 

0 

1938 

Jan. 

201 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

12°  09' 

87°  24' 

22  m.  SW.  of  Corinto, 

7 

— 

1 

30 

Nicaragua. 

202 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

11°  15'  12" 

85°  52'  58" 

S.  Juan  del  Sur,  Nicar. 

9 

— 

1 

30 

203 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

15 

27 

10°  56'  05" 

85°  49'  25" 

Port  Parker,  Costa 

20 

Sandy  mud, 

0 

4 

Rica. 

cr.  shell. 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

10 

18.2 

10°  55'  38" 

85°  49'  21" 

20 

Shelly  sand, 

0 

5 

algae. 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

12 

22 

10°  55'  45" 

85°  49'  05" 

“ 

20 

Shelly  mud. 

0 

2 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

7 

12.8 

10°  55'  06" 

85°  48'  53" 

22 

Gravel,  algae. 

0 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

10°  55'  10" 

85°  49'  10" 

W 

22 

Shells,  dead 

0 

2 

coral. 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

1 

1.8 

10°  55'  20" 

85°  49'  18" 

22 

Rocks,  gravel. 

0 

3 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

9-5 

16. 4-9.1 

10°  55'  43" 

85°  49'  37" 

22 

Shells,  algae. 

0 

5 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

9 

16.4 

10°  55'  43" 

85°  49'  46" 

“ 

22 

“ 

0 

5 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

1.5-4 

2. 7-7.2 

10°  55'  51" 

85°  49'  52" 

22 

Coral. 

0 

5 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

6-2.5 

10.9-4.5 

10°  56'  15" 

85°  48'  47" 

22 

Rocks. 

0 

3 

1938] 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


295 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1938 

Hrs. 

Mins, 

203 

D-ll 

2'  dredge 

2-4 

3. 6-7.2 

10°  56'  07" 

85°  48'  52" 

Port  Parker,  Costa 

Jan. 

22 

Rocks. 

0 

3 

D-12 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

10°  55'  43" 

85°  48'  44" 

Rica. 

22 

Gravel,  algae, 

0 

2 

D-13 

2'  dredge 

7-9 

12.8-16.4 

10°  55'  33" 

85°  48'  30" 

22 

cr.  shell. 
Shells,  algae. 

0 

3 

D-14 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

10°  55'  29" 

85°  48'  24" 

u 

22 

“ 

0 

5 

D-15 

2'  dredge 

9-2 

16.4^3.6 

10°  55'  03" 

85°  48'  25" 

“ 

22 

Mangrove 

0 

3 

L-l 

Light 

10° 55' 22" 

85°  48'  28" 

„ 

12 

leaves,  cr. 
shell,  algae. 

3 

0 

L-2 

Li^ght 

— 

— 

10°  55'  22" 

85°  48'  28" 

“ 

14 

— 

1 

30 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  55'  51" 

85°  48'  58" 

16 

— 

1 

30 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  55'  51" 

85°  48'  58" 

“ 

17 

— 

1 

45 

204 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

10°  52'  08" 

85°  52'  30" 

Murcielago  Bay, 

23 

Sand. 

0 

3 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

10°  52'  05" 

85°  52'  27" 

Costa  Rica. 

23 

« 

0 

3 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

2.5 

4.5 

10°  52'  01" 

85°  52'  23" 

23 

0 

5 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

10°  51'  55" 

85°  52'  19" 

“ 

23 

0 

5 

205 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  50'  45" 

85°  45'  30" 

Potrero  Grande  Bay, 

23 

— 

2 

30 

206 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

14 

25.5 

10°  37'  03" 

85°  41'  12" 

Costa  Rica. 

Port  Culebra,  Costa 

30 

Sandy  mud. 

0 

3 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

14 

25.5 

10°  36'  47" 

85°  41'  10" 

Rica. 

30 

u 

0 

4 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

14 

25.5 

10°  36'  22" 

85°  41'  08" 

“ 

30 

“ 

0 

5 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  37'  10" 

85°  41'  18" 

25 

— 

2 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  37'  50" 

85°  39' 

a 

28 

— 

1 

45 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  35'  45" 

85°  40'  15" 

a 

29 

— 

1 

45 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  35'  45" 

85°  40'  15" 

30 

— 

2 

15 

207 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

10°  25'  20" 

85°  48'  45" 

Braxilito  Bay,  Costa 

31 

— 

2 

40 

208 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

9°  51'  57" 

85°  29'  55" 

Rica. 

Piedra  Blanca  Bay, 

Feb. 

5 

Rocks,  sand, 

0 

3 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

9°  51'  54" 

85°  29'  53" 

Costa  Rica. 

5 

algae. 

0 

3 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

9°  51'  52" 

85°  29'  46" 

5 

* 

0 

3 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

6 

10.9 

9°  51'  49" 

85°  29'  41" 

u 

5 

0 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

9°  51'  47" 

85°  29'  34" 

“ 

5 

0 

3 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

9°  51'  48" 

85°  29'  32" 

5 

« 

0 

5 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

9°  52'  06" 

85°  29'  49" 

« 

5 

0 

3 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

9°  52'  06" 

85°  30' 

5 

« 

0 

5 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

9°  52'  05" 

85°  30'  09" 

5 

“ 

0 

5 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

2 

3.6 

9°  51'  51" 

85°  30'  20" 

« 

5 

“ 

0 

4 

L-l 

Light. 

— 

— 

9°  51'  47" 

85°  29'  56" 

“ 

1 

— 

2 

40 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  51'  47" 

85°  29'  56" 

“ 

2 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  51'  47" 

85°  29'  56" 

“ 

3 

— 

2 

0 

209 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  45' 

85°  26' 

22  m.  WNW.  of  Cape 

6 

— 

0 

45 

T-l 

Yi  Metre 

0 

0 

9°  41' 

85°  24' 

Blanco,  Costa  Rica 

6 

0 

15 

210 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  15' 

85°  09' 

20  m.  S.  of  Gape 

7 

— 

2 

0 

L-2 

Light 





9°  14' 

85°  07' 

Blanco,  Costa  Rica. 

8 

2 

30 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  13' 

85°  09' 

u 

26 

— 

3 

0 

T-l 

Metre 

300 

540 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

7 

— 

4 

0 

T-2 

Metre 

400 

730 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

« 

7 

— 

4 

0 

T-3 

Metre 

500 

910 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

7 

— 

4 

0 

T-4 

Yi  Metre 

2 

3.6 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

7 

— 

0 

30 

T-5 

Yi  Metre 

2 

3.6 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

7 

— 

0 

30 

296 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :14 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1938 

Hrs. 

Mins. 

Feb. 

210 

T-6 

Metre 
(3  nets) 

500 

910 

9°  12' 

85°  05' 

20  m.  S.  of  Cape 
Blanco,  Costa  Rica. 

7 

— 

2 

53 

T-7 

Metre 
(3  nets) 

500 

910 

9°  09' 

85°  04' 

“ 

8 

— 

4 

25 

T-8 

Metre 
(3  nets) 

500 

910 

9°  12' 

85°  ic 

27 

— 

3 

26 

T-9 

Metre 

200 

360 

9°  11' 

85°  08'  30" 

“ 

27 

— 

3 

32 

T-10 

Metre 
(2  nets) 

500 

910 

9°  11' 

85°  08'  30" 

27 

— 

3 

32 

T-ll 

Yi  Metre 

3 

5.4 

9°  11' 

85°  08'  30" 

“ 

27 

— 

1 

0 

211 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  29' 

85°  08' 

6 m.  SW.  of  Cape 
Blanco,  Costa  Rica. 

10 

— 

0 

20 

212 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  58'  15" 

84°  59'  45" 

Puntarenas,  Costa 
Rica 

11 

— 

8 

0 

213 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

8 

14.6 

9°  50'  52" 

84°  53'  07" 

Cedro  Island,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

13 

Mud. 

0 

3 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

9°  50'  46" 

84°  53'  05" 

“ 

13 

“ 

0 

3 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

9°  50' 41" 

84°  53'  03" 

“ 

13 

a 

0 

1 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

5 

9.1 

9°  50'  39" 

84°  53'  07" 

“ 

13 

a 

0 

2 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

9°  50'  37" 

84°  53'  12" 

“ 

13 

0 

2 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

9°  50'  38" 

84°  53'  14" 

13 

Mud,  sand, 
cr.  shell 

0 

2 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2' 

9°  50'  42" 

84°  53'  17" 

“ 

13 

“ 

0 

2 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.2 

9°  50'  45" 

84°  53'  19" 

13 

“ 

0 

3 

D-9 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

9°  50'  52" 

84°  53'  23" 

“ 

13 

“ 

0 

4 

D-10 

2'  dredge 

10 

18.2 

9°  51' 01" 

84°  53'  22" 

* 

13 

Mud. 

0 

3 

D-ll 

4'  dredge 

35 

63.7 

9°  44'  52" 

84°  51'  25" 

Off  BallenasBay,  Gulf 
of  Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

25 

0 

3 

D-12 

4'  dredge 

35 

63.7 

9°  44'  24" 

84°  51'  03" 

“ 

25 

“ 

0 

5 

D-13 

4'  dredge 

35 

63.7 

9°  43'  45" 

84°  51' 08" 

25 

“ 

0 

5 

D-14 

4'  dredge 

35 

63.7 

9°  43' 

84°  51'  17" 

“ 

25 

“ 

0 

5 

D-15 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

9°  42'  10" 

84°  51'  25" 

“ 

25 

* 

0 

5 

D-16 

4' dredge 

45 

82 

9°  41'  10" 

84°  51'  45" 

25 

“ 

0 

5 

D-17 

4'  dredge 

35 

63.7 

9°  42' 

84°  56' 

25 

U 

0 

5 

D-18 

4'  dredge 

80 

145 

9°  29' 30" 

85°  06'  40" 

3 m.  off  Cape  Blanco, 
Costa  Rica. 

26 

0 

10 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  51'  30" 

84°  52'  30" 

Cedro  Island,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

21 

— 

2 

30 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  47' 

84°  53'  30" 

Alcatraz  Is.,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

22 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  46' 20" 

84°  53'  05" 

Jasper  Is.,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

23 

— 

2 

30 

L-4 

Light 

9°  44'  25" 

84°  59'  35" 

BallenasBay,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica 

25 

Mar. 

3 

00 

214 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

42 

76.5 

9°  19'  32" 

84°  29'  30" 

14  m.  S.xE.  of  Judas 
Pt.,  Costa  Rica 

i 

Mud,  shell. 

0 

5 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

43 

78 

9°  18'  45" 

84°  29'  15" 

i 

Mud. 

0 

10 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

50 

91 

9°  18'  05" 

84°  28'  25" 

a 

i 

“ 

0 

10 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

61 

112 

9°  17'  40" 

84°  27'  30" 

a 

i 

Mud,  rocks 

0 

10 

215 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  03' 

84°  06' 

23  m.  W.  of  Uvita 
Bay,  Costa  Rica. 

i 

— 

1 

30 

216 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  08'  45" 

83°  45'  25" 

Uvita  Bay,  Costa 
Rica 

2 

— 

4 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

9°  08'  45" 

83°  45'  25" 

3 

— 

2 

0 

217 

L-l 

Light 

8°  19' 

83°  36' 

20  m.  W.  of  Gulf  of 
Dulce,  Costa  Rica 

4 

0 

30 

1938] 


Beebe:  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions — Introduction 


297 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1938 

Hrs. 

Mins. 

218 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

100 

183 

8°  35'  30" 

83°  15'  30" 

Gulf  of  Dulce,  Costa 

Mar. 

9 

Mangrove 

0 

6 

218 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

105 

192 

8°  35'  50" 

83°  16'  40" 

Rica. 

Gulf  of  Dulce,  Costa 

9 

leaves. 

Mangrove 

0 

15 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

80-60 

145-109 

8°  38'  10" 

83°  16'  45" 

Rica. 

9 

leaves. 

0 

10 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

8°  38'  15" 

83°  10'  25" 

Golfito,  Gulf  of 

9 

M angrove 

0 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

8°  38'  15" 

83°  10'  25" 

Dulce,  Costa  Rica 

9 

leaves,  mud, 
shells. 

0 

3 

D-6 

2'  dredge 

4 

7.3 

8°  38'  15" 

83°  10'  25" 

9 

a 

0 

3 

D-7 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

8°  38'  15" 

83°  10'  25" 

* 

9 

“ 

0 

3 

D-8 

2'  dredge 

6 

11 

8°  38'  15" 

83°  10'  25" 

“ 

9 

0 

3 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

8°  38'  12" 

83°  10'  45" 

“ 

6 

— 

2 

0 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

8°  38'  12" 

83°  10'  45" 

u 

7 

— 

2 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

8°  26' 

83°  08'  40" 

Pavon  Bay,  Gulf  of 

9 

— 

2 

0 

219 

T-l 

Metre 

300 

540 

8°  08' 

83°  17' 

Dulce,  Costa  Rica 
25  m.  W.xN.  of  Pt. 

10 

4 

3 

T-2 

(3  nets) 
Metre 

500 

910 

8°  03' 

83°  12' 

Burica,  Costa  Rica. 

10 

2 

0 

220 

L-l 

(3  nets) 
Light 

_ 

_ 

8°  07' 

82°  22'  12" 

Isla  Parida,  Gulf  of 

11 

4 

0 

L-2 

Light 

_ 

_ 

8°  07'  52" 

82°  18'  45" 

Chiriqui,  Panama. 

12 

2 

30 

221 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

35 

64 

7°  54'  45" 

82°  04'  32" 

Gulf  of  Chiriqui, 

13 

Sandy  mud. 

0 

5 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

35 

64 

7°  54'  15" 

82°  04'  25" 

Panama. 

13 

« 

0 

5 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

35 

65 

7°  53'  12" 

82°  02'  45" 

13 

0 

5 

D-4 

4'  dredge 

38 

69 

7°  52'  45" 

82°  02' 

“ 

13 

“ 

0 

8 

D-5 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

7°  52'  30" 

82°  01' 

13 

0 

10 

222 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

3 

5.4 

7°  45'  51" 

81°  32'  21" 

Bahia  Honda,  Pan. 

18 

Rocks,  dead 

0 

2 

D-2 

2'  dredge 

4-8 

7.2-14.5 

7°  45'  46" 

81°  32'  23" 

« 

18 

coral. 

0 

3 

D-3 

2'  dredge 

8 

14.5 

7°  45'  42" 

81°  32'  24" 

18 

Dead  coral. 

0 

3 

D-4 

2'  dredge 

11 

20 

7°  45'  39" 

81°  32'  21" 

“ 

18 

Dead  coral, 

0 

3 

D-5 

2'  dredge 

11 

20 

7°  45'  35" 

81°  32'  18" 

u 

18 

shells,  gr. 
mud. 

Mud,  shells, 

0 

10 

L-l 

Light 

_ 

_ 

7°  45'  15" 

81°  32'  10" 

u 

13 

leaves. 

2 

15 

223 

L-l 

Light 

— 

— 

7°  32' 

81°  52' 30" 

Bahia  Hermosa, 

19 

— 

3 

30 

224 

D-l 

4'  dredge 

40 

73 

7°  23'  30" 

82°  03' 

Coiba  Is.,  Panama. 
Hannibal  Bank,  Pan. 

20 

Rocks,  dead 

0 

4 

D-2 

4'  dredge 

35 

64 

7°  23'  30" 

82°  03' 

« 

20 

coral. 

Rocks,  mud, 

0 

10 

D-3 

4'  dredge 

35 

64 

7° 23' 30" 

82°  03' 

« 

20 

dead  coral. 
Sand,  shells, 

0 

15 

225 

T-l 

Metre 

500 

910 

7°  08' 

81°  57' 

11  m.  SW.xW.  of  Jic- 

20 

algae. 

2 

31 

226 

L-l 

(3  nets) 
Light 

_ 

7°  05' 

81°  27' 

aron  Is.,  Panama. 

22  m.  ESE.  of  Jicaron 

20 

0 

30 

227 

T-l 

Metre 

500 

910 

7°  00' 

80°  40' 

Is.,  Panama. 

20  m.  SW.  of  Morro 

21 

3 

41 

228 

T-l 

(3  nets) 
Metre 

500 

910 

7°  00' 

79°  16' 

de  Puercos,  Panama. 
52  m.  SE.xE.  of  Cape 

25 

4 

30 

229 

L-l 

(3  nets) 
Light 

_ 

_ 

6°  27' 

79°  00' 

Mala,  Panama. 
83  m.  SE.  of  Cape 

25 

0 

35 

Mala,  Panama. 

298 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


Sta- 

tion 

Net 

Type  of 

Depth 

Position 

General 

Date 

Bottom 

Duration 

No. 

No. 

Net 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

N.  Lat. 

W.  Long. 

Locality 

1938 

Hrs. 

Mins. 

230 

T-l 

Metre 

500 

910 

5°  10' 

78°  42' 

71  m.  W.xS.  of  Cape 

Mar. 

26 

4 

2 

231 

L-l 

(3  nets) 
Light 

© 

eo 

o 

78°  33' 

Corrientes,  Columbia. 
85  m.  SW.  of  Cape 

26 

0 

35 

232 

D-l 

2'  dredge 

2-8 

3.6-14.6 

2°  57'  30" 

78°  11' 

Corrientes,  Columbia. 
Gorgona,  Island, 

31 

Sand. 

0 

30 

L-l 

Light 

_ 

2°  59' 

78°  11' 

Columbia. 

27 

_ 

2 

30 

L-2 

Light 

— 

— 

2°  59' 

78°  11' 

28 

— 

4 

0 

L-3 

Light 

— 

— 

2°  59' 

78°  11' 

“ 

29 

— 

3 

30 

L-4 

Light 

— 

— 

2°  59' 

78°  11' 

30 

— 

4 

0 

L-5 

Light 

— 

— 

2°  59' 

78°  11' 

“ 

31 

— 

4 

0 

233 

T-l 

Metre 

500 

910 

4°  45' 

78°  02' 

55  m.  SSW.  of  Cape 

Apr. 

3 

_ 

4 

33 

234 

T-l 

(3  nets) 
Metre 

500 

910 

7*  24' 

78°  35' 

Corrientes,  Columbia. 
24  m.  W.xS.  of  Pinas 

4 

_ 

4 

27 

(3  nets) 

Pt.,  Panama. 

Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 New  Marine  Fishes 


299 


15. 


Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions 
of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society,  XV. 
Seven  New  Marine  Fishes  from  Lower  California.1 


William  Beebe 
& 

John  Tee-Van 

Department  of  Tropical  Research, 

New  York  Zoological  Society 

(Plates  I-III;  Text-figures  1-5). 

| This  is  the  fifteenth  of  a series  of  papers  dealing  with  the  collections 
of  the  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society 
made  under  the  direction  of  William  Beebe.  For  data  on  dredges,  localities, 
dates,  etc.,  concerning  the  capture  of  specimens  treated  in  this  paper,  refer 
to  Zoologica,  XXII,  No.  2,  pp.  33-46.] 


Contents. 

Page 


Mobula  lucasana,  sp.  nov 299 

Arenichthys  apterus,  gen.  nov.,  sp.  nov 301 

Citharichthys  gordae,  sp.  nov 302 

Scorpaenodes  cortezi,  sp.  nov 304 

Ammodytes  lucasanus,  sp.  nov 306 

Emblemaria  micropes,  sp.  nov 308 

Acanthemblemaria  crockeri,  sp.  nov 310 


Mobulidae. 

Mobula  lucasana,  sp.  nov. 

(Plate  I,  Figs.  1 & 2;  Plate  II,  Figs.  3 & 4;  Plate  III,  Fig.  5). 

Type:  Holotype  2;  No.  24,793,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society;  San  Lucas  Bay,  Lower  California,  Mexico;  March 
30,  1936;  width  across  disk  1,035  mm.  (40%  inches)  ; length  from  anterior 
part  of  disk  to  posterior  margin  of  the  pelvic  fins,  584  mm.  (23  inches). 
Type  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  the  head, 
posterior  body  and  tail  preserved,  the  latter  damaged,  only  a length  of  7 
inches  projecting  beyond  the  outer  margin  of  the  pelvic  fins. 


1 Contribution  No.  561,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society. 


300 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :15 


Description  and  Dimensions  of  Type:  Skin  smooth,  no  trace  of  rugosi- 
ties or  spines  anywhere.  Width  across  disk  1,035  mm. ; length  from  anterior 
margin  of  disk  to  posterior  margin  of  the  pelvic  fin  584  mm.  (anterior 
margin  of  the  disk  considered  as  being  at  the  mid-line  of  the  body,  thus  not 
including  the  cephalic  projections)  ; cephalic  fins  extending  forward  80  mm. 
beyond  the  anterior  margin  of  the  disk,  the  distance  between  their  tips 
approximately  150  mm.,  distance  from  upper  margin  of  the  cephalic  fin 
to  lower  margin  of  the  fin  when  the  fin  is  unfurled,  58  mm.  Eye  lateral, 
17  mm.  in  diameter,  its  anterior  margin  88  mm.  from  the  tip  of  the  cephalic 
fin.  Spiracle  oblique,  31  mm.  posterior  to  the  eye.  Mouth  inferior,  128  mm. 
wide,  very  slightly  concave  when  viewed  from  below,  the  margin  of  the 
upper  lip  40  mm.  from  the  anterior  margin  of  the  disk. 

Teeth  in  each  jaw  in  a narrow  band,  each  band  extending  70  percent, 
of  the  width  of  the  mouth.  Upper  jaw  with  80  transverse  rows  of  teeth  and 
5 rows  fi’om  back  to  front.  Lower  jaw  with  97  teeth  in  a transverse  series 
and  with  4 or  5 rows  from  back  to  front.  Teeth  small,  flattened,  their 
surfaces  slightly  roughened,  the  posterior  border  with  2 to  5 dull,  irregular 
points.  A typical  tooth  in  the  center  of  the  lower  jaw  measures  1.2  mm. 
in  width  and  .5  to  .6  mm.  in  depth. 

Mouth  to  transverse  line  of  first  gill-openings  70  mm.;  transverse  dis- 
tance between  first  gill-openings  133  mm. ; transverse  distance  between  last 
gill-openings  60  mm.;  length  of  gill-slits  of  first  four  pairs  of  gill-openings 
52  mm. ; length  of  last  gill-slit  37  mm. 

Pelvic  fins  rather  elongate,  their  tips  extending  31  mm.  beyond  the 
posterior  tip  of  the  pectoral,  the  inner  margin  extending  backward  farther 
than  the  outer,  the  fin  nearly  uniform  in  width,  averaging  38  mm. 

Dorsal  fin  with  its  posterior  one-fourth  situated  above  the  free  portion 
of  the  tail,  the  base  of  the  fin  57  mm.,  the  height  46  mm. 

Tail  immediately  beyond  the  dorsal  fin  flattened,  the  skin  of  its  upper 
surface  reticulated,  the  reticulations  being  in  the  form  of  minute,  low, 
raised  ridges  of  skin,  the  upper  margins  of  which  are  roughened  and  occa- 
sionally slightly  ciliate.  Although  the  area  mentioned  above  has  this  peculiar 
specialized  skin  there  is  no  trace  of  a spine  or  of  the  beginnings  of  a spine. 
Tail  beyond  the  expanded  portion  becoming  attenuated  near  the  tips  of  the 
pelvic  fins,  its  diameter  50  mm.  posterior  to  the  tips  of  the  pelvic  fins  being 
3.5  to  4 mm. 

Color : In  life  upper  surfaces,  including  the  area  about  the  eye  and  the 
upper  part  of  the  cephalic  fins,  blackish-gray;  lower  surfaces  whitish  be- 
coming bluish-gray  toward  the  tips  of  the  wings,  this  color  darkest  on  the 
anterior  portion  of  the  fins.  Leading  edge  of  undersurfaces  of  pectoral  fin 
dusky,  the  posterior  edges  similarly  colored  but  the  band  of  color  narrower. 
An  oval,  dusky  spot  near  the  posterior  margin  of  the  lower  side  of  the 
pectoral  fin,  slightly  nearer  the  pelvic  fins  than  the  tip  of  the  pectoral.  Tip 
of  the  cephalic  fin  black. 

The  preserved  type  has  the  underside  of  the  body,  anterior  to  the 
mouth,  and  a narrow  band  along  the  lower  jaw  as  well  as  the  entire  inner 
surface  of  the  cephalic  fin,  brownish-black. 

Remarks:  Two  species  of  Mobula  are  recorded  from  the  eastern  Pacific, 
Mobula  tarapacana  (Philippi)  from  the  coast  of  Chile  and  M.  japanica, 
recorded  from  Hawaii  and  known  principally  from  the  western  Pacific. 

Mobula  tarapacana  was  described  from  a drawing  of  a dead  specimen 
and  there  is  considerable  question  as  to  the  accuracy  of  the  description  and 
figure.  The  present  species,  M.  lucasana,  however,  does  not  possess  the 
peculiar  long  neck  of  the  drawing  of  tarapacana. 

In  all  of  the  available  descriptions  of  M.  japanica  the  bands  of  teeth 
are  described  as  extending  to,  or  nearly  to,  the  angles  of  the  jaws.  The 
teeth  of  the  present  species  by  no  means  extend  that  far.  In  addition 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 New  Marine  Fishes 


301 


japanica  possesses  a caudal  spine  and,  even  though  the  caudal  of  lucasana 
is  damaged,  there  is  sufficient  to  show  that  the  spine  is  lacking.  Jordan  and 
Fowler’s  figure  ( Proc . U.  S.  National  Museum,  XXVI,  p.  666,  fig.  10)  of  a 
fetus  of  japanica  shows  quite  clearly  a spine  on  the  tail  close  to  the  pelvic 
fins,  a condition  that  is  not  true  of  lucasana.  However,  in  the  present  species 
it  is  of  interest  that  the  skin  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  base  of  the  tail  is 
modified,  a condition  that  may  or  may  not  be  significant  in  view  of  the 
absence  of  a spine.  This  modification  is  mentioned  in  the  description  of  the 
species. 

During  the  1936  Zaca  Expedition  these  fish  were  common  at  Cape  San 
Lucas  and  San  Lucas  Bay  and  a number  of  individuals  were  seen  somer- 
saulting in  the  air  and  striking  the  water  in  descent  with  a sound  audible 
for  considerable  distances.  In  January  and  February,  1938,  numerous  indi- 
viduals, presumably  of  this  species,  were  seen  off  Elena  Point  and  Cape 
Velas,  Costa  Rica.  Probably  some  of  the  west  coast  of  Central  America 
sight  records  of  Manta  can  be  assigned  to  the  present  new  species. 

The  type  of  lucasana  was  captured  on  a baited  hook. 


Myridae. 

Arenichthys,  gen.  nov. 

Body  elongate;  dorsal  fin  beginning  close  behind  gill-opening;  pectoral 
fins  absent;  anterior  nostril  in  a tube;  posterior  nostril  in  a flap-like  tube 
which  is  open  on  its  inner  posterior  aspect,  the  tube  as  large  and  con- 
spicuous externally  as  the  anterior  nostril;  teeth  as  in  the  description  of 
the  species. 

Genotype:  Arenichthys  apterus  Beebe  and  Tee-Van. 


Arenichthys  apterus,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-fig.  la,  lb,  lc). 

Type:  Holotype,  No.  25,361,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society;  taken  in  dredge  136-D-16  in  45  fathoms,  Arena 
Bank,  Lower  California  (23°29'30"  N.,  109°25'30"  W.),  April  20,  1936; 
standard  length  135  mm.  Type  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of 
Tropical  Research. 

Measurements  of  the  type:  Length,  standard,  135  mm.;  depth  4.1  mm. 
(33)  ; head  16.6  mm.  (8.1)  ; eye  1.6  mm.  (10.2)  ; snout  3.6  mm.  (4.6)  ; snout 
to  gape  5.8  mm.  (2.85)  ; snout  to  dorsal  fin  19  mm.  (7.1)  ; snout  to  anus 
46  mm.  (2.95)  ; snout  to  anal  fin  47.5  (2.84). 

Description:  Body  elongate,  worm-like,  very  slightly  compressed,  the 
depth  33  times  in  the  length;  head  and  trunk  2.95  in  the  length.  Head  8.1 
in  the  length,  1.76  in  the  trunk;  gill  opening  oblique,  at  the  level  of  the 
mid-sides.  Gape  extending  backward  slightly  beyond  the  vertical  of  the 
posterior  border  of  the  orbit. 

Maxillary  teeth  small,  conical,  in  three  rows,  the  teeth  of  the  inner  row 
considerably  larger  than  the  others;  all  are  slightly  depressible.  Vomer 
anteriorly  with  a series  of  teeth  about  its  border;  progressing  backward 
from  these  border  teeth  are  three  teeth  set  transversely  on  the  median  line 
followed  by  two  teeth  set  on  the  median  line;  posterior  to  these  are  two 
lines  of  teeth  on  the  shaft  of  the  vomer,  the  two  rows  rather  widely  sep- 
arated from  each  other,  the  teeth  of  the  central  portion  of  each  row  slightly 
heavier  than  those  of  the  anterior  and  posterior  portions.  Lower  jaw  with 
a double  row  of  small  conical  teeth  becoming  an  irregular  three  rows  an- 
teriorly, the  teeth  of  the  inner  row  largest. 


302 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :15 


Text-figure  1. 

A.  Arenichthys  apterus.  B.  Arenichthys  apterus.  Diagram  of  teeth  of  the  upper 
jaw.  C.  Arenichthys  apterus.  View  from  inside  of  mouth  of  right  side  of 
upper  lip,  showing  (left)  the  tubular  anterior  nostril,  and  (right)  the  pos- 
terior nostril. 


Anterior  nostril  in  a tube;  posterior  nostril  in  a flap-like  tube  which  is 
open  on  its  inner  posterior  aspect.  Eye  small,  10.2  in  the  head. 

Dorsal  fin  beginning  slightly  less  than  an  eye’s  diameter  posterior  to 
the  vertical  of  the  gill  opening,  confluent  with  the  anal  fin  about  the  tip  of 
the  caudal.  Pectoral  fins  absent. 

Color:  Brown  above,  white  below,  the  boundary  sharply  demarcated, 
especially  on  the  head.  Here  the  brown  of  the  interorbital  space  extends 
forward  to  the  snout  as  a band  the  width  of  the  interorbital  space,  leaving 
the  upper  lip  and  the  side  of  the  head  white  with  the  exception  of  a rather 
long,  triangular,  brown  spot  extending  forward  from  the  eye  toward  the 
snout.  Lower  jaw  with  a narrow  brown  band  along  the  lip,  most  intense 
interiorly,  and  hidden  by  the  upper  jaw  when  the  mouth  is  closed. 


Bothidae. 

Citharichthys  gordae,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-fig.  2). 

Type:  Holotype,  No.  25,785,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society;  taken  at  Station  150,  Dredge  Haul  14;  depth  60 
fathoms,  center  of  outer  Gorda  Bank,  Lower  California,  April  23,  1936; 
standard  length  97  mm.  Type  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of  Trop- 
ical Research. 

Dimensions  of  Type : Total  length  120  mm. ; standard  length  97  mm. ; 
depth  40  mm.  (2.4  in  length)  ; head  36  mm.  (2.7  in  length)  ; eye  10.5  mm. 
(3.7  in  head)  ; interorbital  space  1.3  mm.  (8  in  eye)  ; maxillary  12  mm. 
(3  in  head)  ; pectoral  length  22.5  mm.  (1.6  in  head). 

Counts  of  Type:  Dorsal  fin  76;  anal  57;  pectoral  12;  gill-rakers  19; 
lateral  line  scales  50 ; vertebrae  33. 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 Neiv  Marine  Fishes 


303 


Description : A medium-sized  flounder  (standard  length  up  to  111  mm.), 
moderately  deep  (2.4  in  length)  ; eyes  separated  by  a narrow,  concave,  scaled 
space  which  rises  to  a sharp  ridge  above  lower  eye;  interorbital  width  sim- 
ilar in  both  sexes;  dorsal  beginning  on  blind  side  opposite  front  of  eye; 
upper  pelvic  fin  on  ventral  profile;  head  moderately  compressed  with  the 
upper  profile  very  slightly  concave;  anterior  margin  of  the  eyes  are  level 
or  the  lower  slightly  in  advance;  upper  eye  touching  profile  of  head;  max- 
illary not  reaching  middle  of  eye;  teeth  slightly  enlarged  anteriorly  but  not 
forming  real  canines;  indications  of  an  imperfect  second  row  in  the  upper 
jaw;  gill-rakers  long  and  slender;  scales  relatively  strongly  ctenoid. 


Color : Immaculate  below;  brown  above  with  various  dark  mottlings, 
sometimes  reduced  to  several  small  spots,  or  increasing  to  larger  blotches, 
the  extreme  is  where  the  dark  color  has  run  together  covering  three-fourths 
of  the  upper  surface.  The  fins  are  dusky,  sometimes  indistinctly  mottled  or 
spotted;  opercular  region  and  lateral  line  always  dark. 

In  specimens  of  50  mm.  standard  length  or  under,  there  is  often  a faint 
but  distinct  regular  pattern.  The  body  is  pale  with  6 to  8 broken  cross 
bands,  very  distinct  as  mid-ray  spots  on  the  profile  fins,  and  about  as  strong 
but  of  greater  extent  on  the  baseosts ; these  bands  are  very  irregular  on  the 
body  proper  but  in  general  follow  the  oblique  muscle  bands.  The  pre- 
peduncular  band  is  almost  complete  and  the  dark  markings  on  the  peduncle 
are  reduced  and  concentrated  to  a pair  of  jet  black  dots  in  the  profile. 

Variation : Considering  that  216  specimens  of  this  new  form  were  taken 
on  Gorda  Bank,  measuring  from  31  to  111  mm.  in  length,  the  extremes 
of  variation  shown  were  small.  Depth  in  length  2.3  to  2.4  (average  2.3)  ; 
head  in  length  2.68  to  2.7  (2.7)  ; eye  in  head  3.4  to  4.15  (3.75)  ; snout  in 
head  5 to  6 (5.5)  ; maxillary  in  head  2.78  to  3 (2.9)  ; dorsal  count  73  to  79 
(76)  ; anal  count  57  to  62  (58.7)  ; scales  48  to  50  (48.6)  ; gill  rakers  17  to 
19  (18). 

General  Relationships:  In  general  appearance  and  the  more  obvious 
external  characters  C.  gordae  approaches  C.  fragilis,  a species  which  has 
been  taken  only  in  the  upper  half  of  the  Gulf  of  California,  from  Guaymas 
northward.  On  the  other  hand  the  low  vertebral  count  of  gordae  (34)  re- 
moves it,  according  to  Norman,  from  the  subgenus  Orthopsetta  “species  of 
the  North  Pacific,”  (with  37  to  40  vertebrae,  including  sordidus,  fragilis, 


Text-figure  2. 

Citharichthys  gordae.  Drawing  by  George  Swanson. 


304 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :15 


xanthostigma  and  stigmaeus) , and  places  it  in  the  subgenus  Citharichthys 
“species  of  the  Atlantic  and  Tropical  Pacific,”  (with  33  to  36  vertebrae), 
including  the  Pacific  species  platophrys  and  gilberti.  In  scale  and  gill-raker 
count  and  interorbital  width  it  is  indistinguishable  from  fragilis,  while  in 
dorsal  and  anal  ray  count  it  departs  widely  from  this  species  and  is  within 
the  range  of  both  species  of  subgenus  Citharichthys.  In  depth  and  pectoral 
length  it  is  closest  to  stigmaeus.  C.  gordae  differs  from  the  two  species 
platophrys  and  gilberti,  in  possessing  smaller  scales,  a greater  number  of 
gill-rakers,  a larger  head,  shorter  maxillary  and  a much  narrower  inter- 
orbital. The  distinctions  between  the  two  subgenera  Citharichthys  and 
Ortliopsetta  are  very  slight  and  may  disappear  on  more  intensive  study. 

Local  Distribution : Two  hundred  and  sixteen  specimens  of  this  new 
species  were  taken  by  us,  200  of  which  came  up  in  ten  di’edge  hauls  at 
Station  150,  on  Gorda  Banks.  The  single  catch  of  these  fish  outside  of  the 
banks  but  in  the  same  general  locality  was  from  Station  151  D-l,  when  16 
came  up  from  a depth  of  60  fathoms  on  April  24,  half  a mile  south  of  Cape 
San  Lucas  and  20  miles  south-west  of  Gorda  Banks. 

The  ten  catches  on  Gorda  were  made  on  April  21,  22  and  23,  1936.  The 
extremes  in  vertical  limits  were  45  to  80  fathoms,  in  size  31  to  111  mm.  and 
in  abundance  in  hauls  were  2 in  D-6  and  50  in  D-4.  The  ten  hauls  show  a 
remarkable  relation  to  sandy  bottoms,  none  being  on  muddy  or  rocky  areas. 

The  16  flounders  taken  at  Station  151  measure  from  31  to  111  mm. 
in  length,  an  average  far  and  away  smaller  than  those  from  Gorda,  and  this 
may  have  significance  in  the  proximity  of  the  locality  to  San  Lucas  Bay 
which  proved,  in  the  case  of  many  other  fish,  to  be  a nursery  for  young 
stages. 


SCORPAENIDAE. 

Szorpaenodes  e© rfezi,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-fig.  3). 

Type:  Holotype,  No.  24,889-A,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society.  Taken  at  surface  in  weed,  Station  138,  24°  55'  N. 
Lat.,  110°  20'  W.  Long.,  10  miles  east  of  San  Jose  Island,  Gulf  of  Cali- 
fornia, April  8,  1936.  Standard  length  45.5  mm.  Type  in  the  collections  of 
the  Department  of  Tropical  Research. 

Measurements  and  Counts  of  Type:  Length,  total,  54  mm.;  length, 
standard,  45.5  mm. ; depth  16  mm. ; width  of  body  8.8  mm. ; head  15.8  mm. ; 
eye  4.2  mm. ; snout  5.3  mm. ; maxillary  8.2  mm. ; interorbital  space,  3.2  mm. ; 
snout  to  dorsal  fin  16.1  mm.;  snout  to  anal  fin  31  mm.;  dorsal  fin  XIII,  13; 
anal  fin,  III,  6;  pectoral  fin  18;  pelvic  fin  I,  5;  scales,  approximately  63  rows; 
lateral  line  pores  41 ; gill-rakers  10  plus  20. 

Description:  Body  considerably  compressed,  its  width  5.2  in  the  length, 
depth  2.84;  the  dorsal  outline  evenly  rounded. 

Body,  with  the  exception  of  snout,  chin,  maxillary,  branchiostegal  mem- 
branes and  isthmus,  covered  with  small,  weakly  ctenoid  scales,  approximately 
63  rows  from  shoulder  to  caudal  fin. 

Lateral  line  continuous,  prominent,  following  the  dorsal  outline  and 
composed  of  41  pores. 

Head  2.86  in  the  length,  about  1%  times  as  deep  as  wide.  Spines  of 
the  head  low,  the  following  present:  nasal,  preocular,  supraocular,  post- 
ocular and  parietal.  Opercle  posteriorly  with  two  flat  spines,  the  upper 
slightly  longer  than  the  lower,  the  lower  heavier  at  its  base.  Preopercle 
with  five  rather  prominent  spines,  the  second  and  third  slightly  stronger 
than  the  others.  Suborbital  stay  weak  but  evident  without  dissection. 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 New  Marine  Fishes 


305 


Text-figure  3. 

Scorpaenodes  cortezi.  Drawing  by  George  Swanson. 


Snout  3 in  head.  Eye  small,  3.75  in  the  head.  Nostrils  small,  slightly 
nearer  eye  than  snout,  the  anterior  with  a slight  raised  rim. 

Mouth  terminal,  the  jaws  equal.  Maxillary  1.9  in  the  head,  its  pos- 
terior tip  extending  to  the  vertical  of  slightly  beyond  the  posterior  margin 
of  the  pupil.  Upper  and  lower  jaw  with  a band  of  small  conical  teeth,  the 
band  widening  anteriorly.  Vomer  with  small  teeth  on  its  head,  none  on  the 
shaft.  Palatine  teeth  apparently  absent  in  the  type  specimen,  but  present 
as  a band  of  minute  teeth  in  a 39  mm.  specimen  that  has  been  stained  with 
alizarin  and  cleared  in  caustic  potash. 

Gill-rakers  10  plus  20  on  the  first  arch;  rakers  slim,  the  longest  about 
half  an  eye’s  diameter.  No  slit  behind  the  fourth  gill-arch. 

Spines  of  the  dorsal  fin  regularly  increasing  in  length  from  the  first  to 
the  fifth,  the  length  of  the  latter  being  two  in  the  head,  the  spines  then 
decreasing  in  length,  the  last  spine  about  half  the  height  of  the  first  ray. 
Soft  dorsal  fin  anteriorly  about  as  high  as  the  highest  spine,  slightly  lower 
posteriorly.  First  anal  spine  less  than  half  the  height  of  the  second ; second 
anal  spine  considerably  stronger  and  heavier  than  the  other  two;  tip  of  the 
second  extending  slightly  beyond  that  of  the  third.  Anal  rays  slightly 
longer  than  the  second  anal  spine.  Caudal  fin  truncate.  Pectoral  fin  rounded 
posteriorly,  all  its  rays  simple,  the  tips  of  the  rays  expanded  and  flattened, 
the  tips  with  heavy  skin.  Tips  of  the  lower  three  to  four  rays  free  of  mem- 
brane. Pelvic  fins  inserted  posterior  to  the  vertical  of  the  pectoral  fin  base. 

Color : A color  sketch  made  from  the  living  fish  is  as  follows:  Body 
dark  reddish-brown  with  a yellowish  tinge,  paler  below,  the  entire  body 
covered  with  black  punctulations  and  irregular  greenish-yellow  blotches, 
the  latter  especially  marked  posteriorly.  Dorsal  fin  dark  brown,  the  mem- 
branes of  the  spinous  dorsal  black,  the  soft  dorsal  irregularly  blotched  with 
lighter.  Caudal  fin  yellowish-green,  without  pattern.  Pectoral  fin  brown- 
ish, yellow  toward  the  tip  and  dusky  at  the  base.  Pelvic  fins  black  at  base, 
yellow  at  tips  and  with  scarlet  along  the  anterior  edge.  Anal  fin  black  at 
base,  yellow  on  outer  half  and  with  a small  scarlet  patch  at  base  of  the 
first  spine. 

In  preservative  the  body  is  dark  brown  with  irregular,  rather  large, 
lighter  blotches. 


306 


[XXIII  :15 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

Ammodytidae. 

Ammodytes  lucasanus,  sp.  nov. 

Type:  Holotype,  No.  25,249-A,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society;  from  stomach  of  Euthynnus  alletterata  (Rafin- 
esque),  Cape  San  Lucas,  Lower  California,  April  25,  1936;  standard  length 
100  mm.  Paratype:  No.  25,541-A,  from  stomach  of  Seriola  colburni  Ever- 
mann  and  Marsh,  Cape  San  Lucas,  Lower  California,  May  6,  1936 ; standard 
length  103  mm.  Types  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of  Tropical 
Research. 

Thirty-one  other  specimens  (Nos.  25,249,  25,541  and  25,555),  50  to  106 
mm.  standard  length,  are  also  in  the  collections.  They  were  taken  from  the 
stomachs  of  the  following  fish:  Euthynnus  alletterata  (Rafinesque),  Seriola 
dorsalis  (Gill)  and  Seriola  colburni  Evermann  and  Marsh,  and  from  a cor- 
morant, Phalacrocorax  penicillata  (Brandt)  ; all  of  these  from  Cape  San 
Lucas,  April  25,  1936  and  May  6,  1936. 

Dimensions  of  Type : Total  length  114  mm.;  standard  length  100  mm.; 
depth  11.3  mm.  (8.85  in  length)  ; width  of  body  8.6  mm.  (2.72  in  head)  ; 
head  23.5  mm.  (4.25  in  length)  ; eye  3.8  mm.  (6.2  in  head)  ; interorbital 
space  2.6  mm.  (9  in  head)  ; snout  6.6  mm.  (3.55  in  head)  ; maxillary  7.7 
mm.  (3.04  in  head)  ; predorsal  length  25  mm.  (4  in  length)  ; preanal  length 
66  mm.  (1.6  in  head)  ; pectoral  fin  length  10.2  mm.  (2.3  in  length)  ; caudal 
peduncle  depth  5.1  mm.  (4.6  in  length). 

Counts  of  Type:  Dorsal  fin  47;  anal  fin  22;  pectoral  fin  15;  97  lateral 
folds ; branchiostegal  rays  7 ; gill-rakers  6 plus  23 ; vertebrae  56. 

Description:  Elongate,  spindle-shaped,  tapering  toward  head  and  caudal 
fin,  the  head  quite  sharp  and  pointed.  Upper  and  lower  profiles  similar. 

Body,  with  the  exception  of  the  head,  covered  with  scales,  the  scales 
being  cycloid  but  with  traces  of  small  points  along  the  posterior  edge,  the 
whole  suggesting  a weakly  ctenoid  scale.2  A series  of  97  oblique  folds  along 
the  sides,  the  upper  margin  of  each  fold  being  anterior  to  the  lower.  A fold 
of  skin  along  the  lower  side  of  the  belly  ending  near  the  beginning  of  the 
anal  fin,  this  fold  not  noticeable  in  the  preserved  type  but  remarked  upon 
in  the  field  notes  on  fresh  specimens. 

Lateral  line  single,  paralleling  the  back ; anteriorly  the  lateral  line  partly 
surrounds  the  eye,  having  an  angled  branch  descending  to  under  the  pos- 
terior lower  edge  of  the  eye,  and  an  upper  branch  which  runs  obliquely 
forward  ending  posterior  to  the  vertical  of  the  eye;  on  the  posterior  head 
the  lateral  line  follows  closely  the  upper  border  of  the  opercular  margin, 
then  sharply  ascends  to  the  position  of  the  line  on  the  body;  a short  trans- 
verse branch  of  the  lateral  line  on  the  nape,  not  meeting  its  fellow  of  the 
opposite  side. 

Head  conical,  4.25  in  the  length,  the  lower  jaw  projecting  considerably 
beyond  the  tip  of  the  upper  and  with  a heavy  fleshy  tab  on  its  tip.  Eye  6.2 
in  head.  Nostrils  subcircular,  the  anterior  slightly  larger,  situated  midway 
between  the  eye  and  the  tip  of  the  premaxillary,  placed  one  before  the 
other  and  widely  spaced  from  each  other.  Mouth  widely  protractile,  the 
jaws,  vomer  and  palate  toothless.  Maxillary  extending  slightly  beyond  the 
vertical  of  the  anterior  border  of  the  eye. 

Opercular  and  preopercular  borders  smooth,  the  former  ending  pos- 
teriorly in  a wide  obtuse  flap.  Branchiostegal  rays  7,  the  membranes  free 
from  each  other,  leaving  a wide  opening  interiorly. 

Dorsal  fin  low,  continuous,  formed  of  rays  only,  originating  slightly 
back  of  the  pectoral  origin.  Caudal  fin  deeply  forked.  Anal  fin  low,  con- 

2 This  is  also  true  of  specimens  of  Ammodytes  personatus  from  the  San  Juan  Islands,  Wash- 
ington (Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  2712). 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 Neiv  Marine  Fishes 


307 


tinuous,  formed  of  rays  only,  originating  under  the  29th  dorsal  ray.  Pec- 
toral fins  small,  pointed,  situated  below  the  median  line  of  the  body.  Pelvic 
fins  absent. 

Color : Fresh  specimens  greenish  above,  silvery  on  sides  with  traces  of 
bright  golden  yellow  on  the  sides  of  the  head  and  upper  body.  A series  of 
rather  widely  placed  black  spots  (8  in  the  holotype,  4 in  the  paratype) 
along  the  upper  margin  of  the  dorsal  fin. 

Variation : In  a series  of  ten  specimens  examined,  including  the  para- 
type, there  is  the  following  variation  in  proportions  and  counts:  depth  7.8 
to  9.45;  head  4 to  4.25;  eye  6.8  to  8;  snout  3.5  to  3.8;  dorsal  fin  count  45 
to  46;  anal  fin  count  20  to  23;  lateral  folds  97  to  100;  gill-rakers  6 plus 
22  to  23. 

Remarks : During  the  last  few  years  there  has  been  a tendency  to  con- 
sider many  of  the  northern  forms  of  Ammodytes  as  being  a single  circum- 
polar species  which  sends  representatives  down  the  coasts  of  the  continents 
to  a greater  or  lesser  degree,  the  distance  depending  upon  the  temperature 
of  the  water  and  other  conditions. 

As  far  as  the  Pacific  is  concerned,  ichthyologists  seem  in  agreement 
that  all  of  the  previously  reported  Ammodytes  in  that  region  are  of  one 
species.  Thus  the  nominal  form  alascanus  was  merged  during  the  latter  part 
of  the  last  century  with  personatus ; Jordan  in  1906  considered  the  Japanese 
form  as  the  same  species  and  in  1930  Soldatov  and  Lindberg  utilized  the 
name  personatus  for  the  northwestern  Pacific  fish.  Finally  Schultz  in  1936 
has  related  the  Pacific  form  to  the  circumpolar  species  by  using  the  name 
Ammodytes  tobianus  personatus  (Girard)  for  the  Pacific  fish. 

With  this  taxonomic  history  in  mind  the  counts  and  measurements  of 
two  series  of  eastern  Pacific  Ammodytes,  one  series  from  Karluk  Island, 
Alaska,  and  the  second  from  Straits  of  Juan  de  Fuca,  Washington,  together 
with  the  records  in  the  literature  of  California  specimens,  have  been  com- 
pared with  those  of  our  San  Lucas  material.  The  most  pertinent  counts  are 
included  in  the  following  diagram;  unfortunately  we  have  not  been  able  to 
procure  California  specimens,  so  that  we  have  no  vertebrae  counts  for  this 
locality. 


AMMO  DYTES 

LUCASANUS 

PE  R S ONATUS 

' SAN  LUCAS 

CALIFORNIA 

WASHINGTON 

ALASKA 

DO  R S A L 
F 1 N 
RAYS 

60 ; 
so ; 
40 ; 

B 

■ 

1 

_ _ fi  

ANAL 
F 1 N 
RAYS 

35  : 

30 ; 

25 ; 
20  '■ 

I 

- « - 

I"""" 

9 __ 

LATERAL 

FOLDS 

ISO  - 

140 

too 

8 

1 

V E RTEBRAE 

75  h 

70 

65 

60 

55 

• 

1 

8 

308 


Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :15 


Examination  of  the  table  above  demonstrates  the  apparent  close  rela- 
tionship of  lucasanus  to  the  northern  Ammodytes.  In  each  of  the  characters 
shown  there  is  a numerical  diminution  as  one  progresses  southward,  a con- 
dition similar  to  that  found  in  other  groups  of  fishes.  In  the  case  of  the 
lateral  folds,  however,  the  fishes  from  California  to  Alaska  are  markedly 
closer  to  each  other  than  they  are  to  lucasanus;  this  similarity  is  shown 
to  a lesser  degree  in  the  dorsal  fin  rays. 

While  it  might  be  advisable  to  consider  lucasanus  as  a southern  repre- 
sentative of  personatus,  we  think  it  better,  for  the  present,  to  establish  it 
as  a separate  form,  principally  for  the  following  reasons : 

1.  A gap  of  1,100  miles  intervenes  between  the  southernmost  recorded 
locality  of  personatus  (Monterey  Bay,  California)  and  the  type  locality  of 
lucasanus.  Specimens  from  this  gap  would  help  to  establish  the  relationship 
between  the  two  forms. 

2.  The  San  Lucas  fish  come  from  a sub-tropical  faunal  region,  as  op- 
posed to  the  cold  water  habitat  of  personatus.  San  Lucas  is  about  420  miles 
south  of  Cedros  Island  where  northern  and  southern  faunas  meet  and  cross. 

3.  With  this  faunal  difference  in  mind  it  is  possible  that  the  lessened 
numerical  characters  may  be  constantly  associated  with  the  warm  water 
habitation  of  lucasanus  and  that  this  species  may  have  broken  off  completely 
from  its  northern  parent  form,  leaving  no  intermediates. 

Emblem  ariidae. 

Emblemaria  micropes,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-fig.  4). 

Type:  Holotype,  $,  No.  24,895,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society.  Taken  in  loose  weed  floating  along  beach,  Inez 
Point,  Santa  Inez  Bay,  Gulf  of  California,  April  9,  1936.  Standard  length 
33  mm.  Type  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Research. 

Dimensions  and  Counts  of  Type : Length,  total,  37.6  mm. ; length,  stand- 
ard, 33  mm. ; depth  5.4  mm. ; head  7.8  mm. ; eye  1.4  mm. ; snout  1.9  mm. ; 
maxillary  3 mm. ; interorbital  space  1 mm. ; snout  to  dorsal  fin  5 mm. ; snout 
to  anal  fin  15  mm.;  height  of  dorsal  fin  7 mm.;  pectoral  fin  length  6.8  mm.; 
pelvic  fin  length  3.2  mm. ; height  of  supraocular  tentacle  2 mm. ; dorsal  fin, 
XIX,  12;  anal  fin,  II,  21;  pectoral  fin  13;  pelvic  fin  3. 

Description:  Body  elongate,  considerably  compressed  posteriorly,  the 
greatest  width  of  body  (across  the  swollen  opercles)  6 in  the  length;  depth 
6.1. 

Head  4.2  in  the  length ; preopercular  area  and  head  considerably 
swollen.  Upper  profile  of  head  a simple  curve  from  nape  to  snout.  A large 
flattened  supraorbital  tentacle,  slightly  longer  than  eye  diameter.  Pre- 
opercular margin  not  visible,  hidden  by  the  swollen  sides  of  the  head. 
Opercular  margin  smooth,  the  branchiostegal  rays  and  membranes  extend- 
ing considerably  beyond  its  margin,  the  tip  of  the  outermost  branchiostegal 
ray  forming  a slight  forwardly-curved  hook  above;  branchiostegal  mem- 
branes broadly  joined  to  each  other  but  free  from  the  isthmus. 

Snout  4.1  in  the  head.  Eye  small,  5.6  in  head,  not  entering  the  dorsal 
profile.  Nostrils  two  on  each  side,  the  anterior  with  a small  fleshy  tentacle. 
Mouth  small,  the  lips  rather  full;  maxillary  extending  to  posterior  border 
of  the  eye.  Teeth  in  the  upper  jaw  strong,  blunt  and  conical,  the  anterior 
ones  strongest,  in  a single  row,  with  a trace  of  asperities  along  the  inner 
base  of  the  anterior  teeth  resembling  small  teeth.  Lower  jaw  with  a 
similar  series  of  teeth,  the  lateral  anterior  ones  exceptionally  strong  and 
recurved.  Vomerine  teeth  in  a slightly  curved  row  of  four  teeth.  Palatine 
teeth  similar  in  size  and  not  quite  continuous  with  the  vomerine  teeth. 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 New  Marine  Fishes 


309 


Dorsal  fin  beginning  on  the  nape,  of  19  spines  and  12  rays,  the  last 
ray  connected  by  membrane  with  the  caudal  peduncle ; a slight  flap  of  mem- 
brane projecting  forward  from  the  edge  of  the  1st  dorsal  spine  with  the 
exception  of  the  basal  portion  of  the  spine.  Caudal  fin  rounded.  Anal  fin 
of  2 spines  and  21  rays,  similar  to  the  dorsal  but  lower.  Pectoral  fins  with 
lowermost  five  rays  slightly  thickened  and  with  their  tips  free  of  mem- 
brane. Pelvic  fins  of  three  rays,  short  and  thick,  originating  under  the 
pectoral  base. 


Text-figure  4. 

Emblemaria  micropes.  Drawing  by  George  Swanson. 


Color : The  following  notes  were  made  upon  the  living  fish.  Head, 
supraocular  tentacle,  body  and  pectoral  fins  green,  becoming  more  intense 
green  on  the  caudal  fin.  Anterior  three-quarters  of  the  dorsal  fin  with 
alternate  bands  of  green  and  bright  red,  each  band  including  about  two  to 
three  rays;  posterior  quarter  of  dorsal  fin  with  faint  pinkish  patches 
distally  in  the  webs.  Anterior  three-quarters  of  the  anal  fin  green  on  its 
basal  third,  similar  to  that  of  the  body,  black  on  its  median  third  and  with 
the  outer  margin  white;  posterior  quarter  almost  all  green  with  only  a 
hint  of  dusky  and  whitish. 

Remarks : The  five  species  of  Emblemaria  known  from  the  eastern 
Pacific  seem  to  be  well  differentiated  from  each  other,  not  only  by  their 
coloration  but  by  various  combinations  of  other  characters.  In  the  following 
table  the  dorsal  and  anal  fin  counts  and  the  head  and  pelvic  fin  proportions 
of  the  various  species  are  gathered  together. 


Species. 

Dorsal  fin 
count. 

Anal  fin 
count. 

Pelvic  fin 
in  length. 

Head  in 
length. 

nigra,  Panama 

XXVII,  11 

26-27 

7. 1-7. 5 

4. 1-4. 2 

nivipes,  Panama 

XXIII-XXIV, 

12-14 

25 

3.8 

3.4-3.75 

hudsoni,  Peru 

XXII-XXIII, 

15-16 

27 

3.9 

3.9 

oculocirrus,  Gulf  of 
California 

XXII,  13 

25-26 

4.9-5.75 

3.75-4.1 

micropes,  Gulf  of  California 

XIX,  12 

23 

10.3 

4.2 

This  new  species  differs  from  the  somewhat  similar  Emblemaria  oculo- 
cirrus  from  the  same  region,  in  fin  ray  counts,  smaller  and  differently 
shaped  pelvic  fins,  low  dorsal  fin  and  in  the  supraocular  tentacle.  At  first 
it  was  though  that  the  former  was  the  opposite  sex  of  the  high-dorsalled 
oculocirrus,  but  careful  dissection  disclosed  that  all  of  the  available  speci- 
mens examined,  four  of  oculocirrus  and  the  type  of  micropes,  were  males. 
While  perhaps  of  no  importance,  it  is  of  interest  that  the  specimen  of 


310 


Zoological  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :15 


microbes  was  taken  in  weed  along  shore,  while  all  three  specimens  of 
oculocirrus  were  washed  out  of  empty  augur  shells  taken  on  sandy  shallows. 
For  comparison  with  our  materials  of  the  genus  we  have  examined  the 
single  specimen  of  oculocirrus  taken  by  Dr.  C.  H.  Townsend  and  recorded 
by  Osburn  and  Nichols  (Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  XXXV,  (1916), 
p.  178). 

Acanthemblemaria  crockeri,  sp.  nov. 

(Text-fig.  5). 

Type:  Holotype,  No.  24,824,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New 
York  Zoological  Society;  taken  with  fulminating  cap,  3V2  fathoms  deep, 
San  Lucas  Bay,  Lower  California,  April  2,  1936;  standard  length  41  mm.; 
type  in  the  collections  of  the  Department  of  Tropical  Research. 

Dimensions  of  Type : Total  length  46.2  mm. ; standard  length  41  mm. ; 
depth  6.2  mm.  (6.6  in  length)  ; head  10.2  mm.  (4  in  length)  ; eye  2.1  mm. 
(4.85  in  head)  ; interorbital  space  1.5  mm.  (6.8  in  head)  ; snout  2.3  mm. 
(4.4  in  head)  ; maxillary  4.8  mm.  (2.1  in  head)  ; predorsal  length  6.5  mm. 
(6.3  in  length)  ; preanal' length  18.2  mm.  (2.2  in  length)  ; pectoral  fin  length 
6.2  mm.  (1.65  in  head)  ; pelvic  fin  length  3.4  mm.  (3  in  head)  ; caudal 
peduncle  depth  2.8  mm.  (3.64  in  head). 

Counts  of  Type:  Dorsal  fin  XXVI,  13;  anal  fin  II,  27;  pectoral  fin  12; 
pelvic  fin  3;  caudal  fin  19;  branchiostegal  rays  6. 


Text-figure  5. 

Acanthemblemaria  crockeri.  Drawing  by  Miss  Eloise  Southern. 


Description:  Body  moderately  elongate,  the  greatest  depth  at  the  base 
of  the  pelvic  fins;  the  trunk  compressed,  especially  posteriorly.  The  depth 
of  the  caudal  peduncle  3.64  in  the  head  length.  Body  scaleless.  Anterior 
profile  a simple  curve  from  origin  of  dorsal  fin  to  snout. 

Head  with  short  blunt  spines  anteriorly,  those  on  the  snout  and  at 
the  anterior  edge  of  the  eye  largest,  the  spines  extending  backward  on 
the  upper  surface  of  the  head  slightly  beyond  the  vertical  of  the  posterior 
border  of  the  orbit,  the  posterior  margin  of  the  spinous  area  forming  a 
blunt  angle  at  the  mid-line  of  the  body.  Spines  extending  in  a single 
palisade-like  series  about  the  orbit,  except  posteriorly  where  there  is  a slight 
elevated  rim  free  of  spines,  and  superiorly  where  there  is  a slight  gap 
for  the  supraorbital  tentacle;  anterior  orbital  spines  strongest.  Inter- 
orbital space  concave,  its  central  portion  free  of  spines.  Supraorbital 
tentacle  multifid,  tree-like,  with  a number  of  major  trunks  and  branches 
from  which  extend  smaller  ones,  the  height  of  one  of  the  larger  from  its 
tip  to  the  base  of  the  tentacle,  slightly  greater  than  an  eye  diameter. 
Nasal  tentacle  of  right  side  with  a single-based  bifid  tentacle,  that  of  the 
left  side  single-based  but  quadrifid  distally,  the  tentacles  about  equal  to 
an  eye  diameter  in  length.  A group  of  pores  extending  slightly  below  and 
along  posterior  border  of  the  eye;  a series  of  8 pores  along  the  posterior 
border  of  the  pi’eopercle  and  on  to  the  underside  of  the  posterior  portion  of 


1938] 


Beebe  & Tee-Van:  7 New  Marine  Fishes 


311 


the  mandible;  3 pores,  forming  a triangle,  at  the  nape  immediately  before 
the  dorsal  fin,  and  4 pores  on  each  side  of  the  upper  body  above  the  pre- 
opercle  and  opercle.  Branchiostegal  membranes  joined  to  each  other  but 
free  from  the  isthmus,  the  rays  extending  upward  beyond  the  opercular  tip 
to  form  a small  hook. 

Dorsal  fin  beginning  above  the  center  of  the  preopercle,  the  tips  of  both 
rays  and  spines  thickened;  the  fin  connected  by  membrane  to  the  caudal 
peduncle  but  not  to  the  caudal  fin.  Anal  fin  originating  under  the  13th  dorsal 
ray,  similar  to  dorsal  but  its  rays  shorter  and  slightly  heavier,  the  fin 
similarly  joined  to  the  caudal  peduncle.  Pectoral  fin  with  tips  of  lower 
rays  thickened.  Pelvic  fins  originating  before  the  pectoral,  composed  of  3 
simple  rays,  the  central  ray  longest,  the  inner  ray  shortest.  Caudal  fin 
rounded. 

Teeth : Upper  jaw  with  a single  row  of  strong,  conical,  inwardly  curved 
teeth,  the  teeth  strongest  anteriorly  and  much  smaller  along  side  of  jaw; 
inside  of  this  row  anteriorly  is  a band  of  small  conical  teeth.  Palatines 
with  2 rows  of  strong  teeth.  Vomer  with  about  5 strong  teeth  on  each  side. 

Lower  jaw  expanded  and  flattened  anteriorly,  then  constricted  and  ex- 
panded again  posteriorly,  the  jaw,  when  viewed  from  above,  shaped  like 
an  old-fashioned  keyhole,  or  as  suggested  by  Myers  and  Reid  in  their  de- 
scription of  Acanthemblemaria  hancocki,  like  the  jaw  of  Hippopotamus. 
Lower  jaw  with  a single  series  of  flattened  strong,  conical  teeth,  paralleling 
which  exteriorly,  on  the  posterior  half  of  the  jaw,  is  a second  row  of  some- 
what similar  teeth.  Anteriorly  behind  the  single  strong  series  is  a band  of 
very  small  conical  teeth. 

Color : In  life,  general  color  of  body  brownish-tan,  darker  above;  sides 
with  small  subcircular  and  oval  spots  of  scarlet-red,  these  becoming  dull 
brown  superiorly.  Head  yellowish  laterally  and  below,  dull  reddish-orange 
above  and  with  a large  oval  patch  of  vinaceous-buff  on  the  preopercle,  this 
patch  surrounded  anteriorly,  superiorly  and  posteriorly  by  a narrow  blackish 
margin.  Opercle  with  a small  blackish  patch  near  its  posterior  margin. 
Pectoral  and  pelvic  fins  with  greenish-yellow  rays.  Vertical  fins  brownish- 
pink,  the  rays  and  spines  pinkish.  Caudal  fin,  rays  of  the  dorsal  fin  and 
posterior  rays  of  the  anal  with  pinkish-red  spots  along  the  rays.  Anterior 
portion  of  dorsal  with  a dull  brown  median  band  surmounted  by  a mar- 
ginal orange  band.  Iris  brownish-gold. 

In  preservative  the  scarlet  and  orange  pigment  has  disappeared  en- 
tirely and  the  specimen  may  be  described  as  follows:  General  color  pale 
buff,  the  entire  body  covered  with  minute  brown  chromatophores,  the 
chromatophores  on  the  sides  and  lower  sides  forming  the  borders  of  sub- 
circular  clear  patches  (These  are  the  scarlet  spots  of  the  life  coloration). 
Above,  the  chromatophores  are  more  concentrated,  forming  irregularly- 
shaped  patches  which  extend  onto  the  base  of  the  dorsal  fin.  Dorsal  fin 
with  brownish  blotches,  especially  anteriorly  where  a spot  of  deep  brown 
and  black  extends  down  the  center  of  the  fin.  Anal  fin  with  dark  spots 
toward  the  outer  margin,  these  especially  marked  anteriorly.  Preopercle 
with  a large  ovoid  brownish  spot,  heavily  bordered  anteriorly,  superiorly 
and  posteriorly  with  darker  brown.  Opercle  mottled  with  brown. 

Remarks'.  The  genus  Acanthemblemaria  was  previously  represented  in 
the  eastern  Pacific  by  the  recently  described  Acanthemblemaria  hancocki 
Myers  and  Reid  19363,  taken  at  Secas  Island,  Pacific  coast  of  western  Pan- 
ama. The  U.  S.  National  Museum  has  kindly  allowed  us  to  have  one  of 
the  paratypes  of  hancocki  for  examination.  Comparison  of  the  single  spec- 
imen of  crockeri  with  the  original  description  of  hancocki  and  the  paratype 
of  the  latter  has  enabled  us  to  draw  up  the  following  key  to  show  the  differ- 
ences between  the  two  species. 

3 Myers,  G.  S.  and  Reid,  E.  D.,  University  of  Southern  California  Publications , The  Hancock 
Pacific  Expeditions,  Vol.  2,  No.  2,  pp.  7-9. 


312 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

Key  to  Eastern  Pacific  Species  of  Acanthemblemaria. 

A.  Dorsal  fin  XXII  to  XXIII,  13  to  14;  anal  fin  II,  24  to  25;  spines  of 
head  relatively  small  and  fine;  supraorbital  tentacle  simple;  head  with 
a dark  area  like  a large,  hour-glass  shaped  saddle  set  transversely 
across  the  occiput  and  extending  down  on  opercles  to  opposite  lower 
rim  of  the  eye;  no  oval,  black-margined  brown  patch  on  the  preoper- 
cle;  body,  in  preservative,  pale  with  conspicuous  brown  spots  hancocki. 

AA.  Dorsal  fin  XXVI,  13;  anal  fin  II,  27;  spines  of  head  coarse  and  heavy; 
supraorbital  tentacle  complex  and  multifid;  no  hour-glass  shaped  dark 
figure  on  nape;  an  oval  conspicuous,  black-margined  brownish  spot  on 
preopercle;  body,  in  preservative,  with  pale  spots  surrounded  with 
darker  crockeri. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Mobula  lucasana.  Dorsal  view  of  freshly  caught  type  specimen.  Photo- 
graph by  Toshio  Asaeda. 

Fig.  2.  Mobula  lucasana.  Ventral  view  of  freshly  caught  type  specimen.  Photo- 
graph by  Toshio  Asaeda. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  3.  Mobula  lucasana.  Under  anterior  surface  of  body  showing  folded  cephalic 
fins,  mouth  and  teeth.  The  upper  jaw  teeth  show  as  a dark  band  just 
below  the  margin  of  the  upper  jaw.  Photograph  by  Toshio  Asaeda. 

Fig.  4.  Mobula  lucasana.  View  of  posterior  end  of  animal  from  dorsal  side, 
showing  the  dorsal  and  pelvic  fins  and  the  expanded  base  of  the  tail. 
Photograph  by  E.  Osterndorff. 

Plate  III. 

Fig.  5.  Mobula  lucasana.  Photograph  of  teeth  of  the  lower  jaw.  Enlarged  33 
times.  Photograph  by  Mrs.  Ruth  Needham  Nauss. 


BEEBE  & TEE-VAN. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  I. 


FIG.  2. 


SEVEN  NEW  MARINE  FISHES  FROM  LOWER  CALIFORNIA. 


BEEBE  & TEE-VAN. 


PLATE  II 


FIG.  3. 


FIG.  4. 


SEVEN  NEW  MARINE  FISHES  FROM  LOWER  CALIFORNIA, 


BEEBE  & TEE-VAN. 


PLATE  III. 


FIG.  5. 

SEVEN  NEW  MARINE  FISHES  FROM  LOWER  CALIFORNIA. 


Taning:  Family  Anguillidae 


313 


16. 

Deep-sea  Fishes  of  the  Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions. 
Family  Anguillidae.1 

A.  Vedel  Taning 

Copenhagen,  Denmark. 

(Text-figure  1). 

Dr.  William  Beebe  has  kindly  entrusted  to  me  the  collection  of  lepto- 
cephalus  stages  of  the  European  and  American  eels  made  off  Bermuda 
during  the  years  1929-1931.  As  rather  few  eel  larvae  have  been  collected 
in  the  deep  water  very  close  to  Bermuda,  it  was  of  interest  to  me  to  see  this 
material  procured  during  1,350  hauls  off  Nonsuch  Island.2  The  specimens 
are  preserved  in  alcohol  and  are  accordingly  probably  shrunk  about  2 mm. 
as  compared  with  specimens  preserved  in  formalin. 

The  collection  is  small,  comprising  only  46  specimens,  of  which  29 
belong  to  the  European  eel  and  17  to  the  American  eel.  The  specimens  were 
collected  during  the  months  of  May  through  September,  none  being  taken 
in  April  and  none  in  October  or  November  when  relatively  few  hauls  were 
made. 

Moreover,  rather  few  hauls  were  carried  out  in  the  water  layers  in 
which  we  should  expect  most  of  these  larvae,  that  is,  in  subsurface  water 
in  depths  between  25  and  200  fathoms.  Only  about  60  hauls  were  made  in 
these  upper  layers  from  May  through  September,  as  against  about  1,100 
in  deeper  water  layers. 

The  eel  larvae  are,  according  to  Johannes  Schmidt’s  experiences,  most 
frequently  taken  during  night  hauls  and  of  these  comparatively  very  few 
were  made  during  the  Nonsuch  investigations.  In  the  collection  only  three 
specimens  of  Anguilla  anguilla  were  caught  during  night  hauls. 

The  facts  mentioned  explain  why  so  few  eel  larvae  have  been  caught, 
and  we  may  moreover  emphasize  that  the  small  net  commonly  used  (1-metre 
net)  is  not  the  best  implement  for  the  capture  of  eel  larvae  of  a length 
greater  than  about  40  mm.,  as  these  are  rather  rapid  stages  which  easily 
escape  the  net.  This  is  especially  the  case  with  larval  stages  of  the  Amer- 
ican eel,  of  which  some  in  the  collection  are  approaching  the  metamorphosis- 
stage;  during  the  latter  period  they  become  very  strong  and  rapid  in  their 
movements. 

In  regard  to  literature  on  the  subject,  I refer  the  reader  to  Schmidt’s 
various  publications  mentioned  in  the  Bibliography. 

In  the  accompanying  Tables  I give  various  particulars  concerning  the 
material,  such  as  myomere  counts.  A few  show  the  total  number  of  112 
and  113  myomeres,  and  as  an  overlapping  in  numbers  may  occur  in  the  two 

1 Contribution  No.  562,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society. 

Contribution,  Bermuda  Biological  Station  for  Research,  Inc. 

2 For  /detailed  data  in  regard  to  nets,  locality,  dates,  etc.,  refer  to  Zoologica,  Vol.  XIII, 
Nos.  1,  2 and  3. 


314 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :16 


species,  it  could  be  assumed  that  the  identification  is  not  quite  certain. 
Since,  however,  the  pre-  and  postanal  number  of  myomeres  and  the  blood 
vessels  furnish  some  help  in  the  identification  and  since  the  size  of  the 
larvae  and  the  season  of  capture  give  further  help,  I am  rather  certain  that 
the  few  specimens  showing  the  number  of  myomeres  mentioned  are  referred 
to  the  proper  species. 

Tables  I and  II  show  the  sizes  during  the  different  months. 

TABLE  I.  TABLE  II. 


The  larval  stages  belonging  to  the  European  eel  ( Anguilla  anguilla ) 
are  easily  referred  to  the  year’s  brood  (O-group)  and  the  previous  year’s 
brood  (I-group)  ; probably  a few  of  a length  of  about  36-37  mm.  in  June 
and  July  and  a single  one  of  41  mm.  in  September  should  actually  be  re- 
ferred to  respectively  the  I-group  and  the  O-group,  but  this  is  of  minor 
importance. 

It  is  well  known  that  during  the  movement  of  the  larval  stages  a few 
may  be  behind  the  main  stock  moving  toward  Europe  and  remain  as  the 


1938] 


Tailing:  Family  Anguillidae 


315 


I-group  for  some  time  in  the  western  Atlantic;  the  13  specimens  measuring 
between  about  41  and  50  mm.  taken  from  May  to  September  belong  to  this 
slow-moving  (and  late  spawned)  part  of  the  I-group. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  16  smaller  specimens,  between  18  and  37  mm. 
long,  taken  from  June  to  September,  belong  most  probably  to  the  faster- 
moving  (and  early  spawned)  part  of  the  O-group  which  have  already 
reached  the  vicinity  of  the  Bermudas  in  June. 

In  considering  now  Table  II,  which  shows  the  lengths  of  larval  stages 
of  the  American  eel  ( Anguilla  rostrata ) taken  during  the  months  men- 
tioned, it  is  immediately  obvious  that  these  arrive  in  the  Bermuda  area 
later,  in  July  and  August,  and  are  of  larger  size  than  those  of  the  O-group 
of  the  European  eel;  this  is  quite  in  agreement  with  the  fact  that  the  breed- 
ing place  of  the  American  eel  is  situated  more  to  the  southwest  than  that 
of  the  other  species,  and  that  the  spawning  takes  place  earlier  in  the  year.3 
According  to  Schmidt,  metamorphosis  takes  place  at  a length  of  60  to  65 
mm.  in  the  American  eel.  As  is  well  known,  the  Bermuda  fresh  water  eel  is 
the  American,  not  the  European  species.  In  regard  to  this,  see  William 
Beebe  and  John  Tee-Van,  “American  Fresh-water  Eels  in  Bermuda,”  Bull. 
N.  Y.  Zool.  Soc.,  Vol.  XXXVII,  1934,  pp.  181-183,  and  Johs.  Schmidt,  1909, 
pp.  17-18. 

The  following  table  (Table  III)  gives  a review  of  the  actual  number 
of  larval  stages  taken  in  the  different  months  and  the  number  per  100  hauls. 
It  is  obvious  that  the  European  species  is  most  common  from  June  to 
August,  and  the  American  only  during  August  and  September.  Actually, 
however,  we  know  but  very  little  concerning  conditions  during  the  months 
from  October  to  April,  and  it  would  certainly  be  most  interesting  to  get 
investigations  also  carried  out  during  these  months. 


TABLE  III. 


April 

May 

June 

July 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Total 

Total  No.  of  hauls 
1929-3 i 

63 

214 

260 

236 

192 

362 

15 

8 

1,350 

No.  of 

Anguilla  anguilla .... 

0 

3 

10 

7 

6 

3 

0 

0 

29 

No.  per  100  hauls 

1.4 

3.8 

2.9 

3.1 

0.8 

2.2 

No.  of 

Anguilla  rostrata 

0 

0 

0 

2 

6 

9 

0 

0 

17 

No.  per  100  hauls. ..... 

0.8 

3.1 

2.5 

1.2 

As  in  other  areas  of  the  Sargasso  Sea  the  number  of  larval  stages  of 
Anguilla  anguilla  surpasses  that  of  A.  rostrata. 

As  to  the  relative  frequencies  in  the  different  months  and  in  different 
depths,  the  following  table  (Table  IV)  gives  a clear  review,  showing  that 
the  larval  stages  of  the  European  eel  are  by  far  the  most  common  in  the 

3 It  is  unlikely  that  the  American  eel  spawns  so  close  to  Bermuda  that  eggs  and  young  larvae 
could  be  met  with  there;  at  any  rate  post-larval  stages  smaller  than  15  mm.  have  not  yet  been 
captured  near  Bermuda.  Johannes  Schmidt  has  previously  (The  Danish  “Dana”  Expeditions 
1920-22,  No.  1,  p.  16,  footnote,  1929)  pointed  out  that  the  eggs  without  oil  globule  described  by 
M.  P.  Fish  ( Zoologica , Vol.  VIII,  No.  5,  p.  289  ff.)  cannot  be  eggs  of  Anguilla  rostrata.  I have 
myself  hatched  eggs  of  the  same  or  a very  similar  type  and  I am  most  inclined  to  refer  the  eggs  in 
question  to  the  Muraenoid  species  of  which  the  larval  stage  is  known  as  Leptocephalus  similis. 
The  information  obtained  by  the  1,350  hauls  made  by  Dr.  Beebe  off  Bermuda  supports  the  view  that 
Anguilla  rostrata  propagates  at  a considerable  distance  from  these  islands. 


316 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :16 


subsurface  waters  off  Bermuda  from  May  through  July,  very  few  occurring 
in  the  deeper  strata,  where,  however,  the  larval  stages  of  the  American  eel 
are  most  commonly  taken  during  August  and  September,  owing  probably 
also  to  the  fact  that  the  fishing  during  daytime  in  the  lighter  subsurface 
layers  of  the  water  is  not  able  to  catch  the  rapid  stages  of  these  larger 
sizes  of  American  eel  larvae. 


Text-figure  1. 

Distribution  in  the  western  Atlantic  of  the  different  larval  stages  of  the  European 
and  American  eel.  Unbroken  line  = European  eel.  Broken  line  = American 
eel.  Curves  show  limits  of  occurrence:  e.g.,  larvae  less  than  10  mm.  have  only 
been  found  inside  the  10  mm.  curve,  etc.  ul:  curve  showing  limit  of  occur- 
rence of  unmetamorphosed  larvae.  Striated  area:  only  place  where  the  newly 
hatched  larvae  (5-7  mm.  long)  of  the  European  eel  have  been  recorded. 
American  eel  larvae  less  than  15  mm.  have  never  been  taken  outside  the 
dotted  area;  the  actual  spawning  place  inside  the  dotted  area  is,  however, 
not  yet  known.  (Redrawn  from  Schmidt,  1935). 


1938]  Tailing:  Family  Anguillidae  317 

TABLE  IV. 


Depth 

Total  No. 
of  hauls 

A.  anguilla 

+ . rostrata 

May- July 

Aug.  Sept. 

May-Julv 

Aug.- 

Sept. 

Fath- 

oms 

Metres 

May- 

July 

Aug.- 

Sept. 

No. 

No. 

per 

100 

hauls 

No. 

No. 

per 

100 

hauls 

No. 

No. 

per 

100 

hauls 

No. 

No. 

per 

100 

hauls 

25-200 

c. 45-370 

43 

20 

11 

25.6 

1 

5.0 

0 

0.0 

0 

0.0 

>300 

> c.550 

606 

506 

9 

1.5 

8 

1.6 

2 

0.3 

15 

3.0 

Though  the  material  to  hand  is  very  small  it  gives  some  valuable 
information  as  to  the  occurrence  of  the  larval  stages  of  the  two  species  of 
fresh-water  eels  off  Bermuda,  and  I wish  to  emphasize  that  the  area  is 
obviously  very  interesting  for  studies  on  the  rate  of  growth  and  movement 
of  the  eel  larvae.  Further  studies  would  certainly  give  us  much  information 
which  otherwise  will  be  difficult  to  obtain.  A glance  at  the  small  map  (Text- 
fig.  1)  will  show  immediately  how  excellent  the  position  of  Bermuda  is  for 
these  studies. 

I take  this  opportunity  of  thanking  Miss  Esther  Hansen  for  valuable 
assistance. 


Study  Material. 

The  following  list  gives  the  catalogue  number,  net,  depth  in  fathoms, 
date,  length  and  myomere  count  of  each  Anguilla  leptocephalus  taken  by  the 
Bermuda  Oceanographic  Expeditions.  All  were  caught  in  the  cylinder  of 
water  off  the  Bermuda  coast  described  in  Zoologica,  Vol.  XVI,  No.  1,  p.  5. 


Anguilla  anguilla. 

No.  9,858;  Net  85;  200  fathoms;  May  5,  1929;  50  mm.;  72+46  (118)  myom. 

No.  9,895;  Net  90;  200  fathoms;  May  11,  1929;  43  mm.;  70+45  (115)  myom. 

No.  9,895a;  Net  90;  200  fathoms;  May  11,  1929;  43  mm.;  68+48  (116)  myom. 
No.  11,046;  Net  227;  800  fathoms;  June  27,  1929;  32  mm.;  73+44  (117)  myom. 
No.  11,075;  Net  229;  1,000  fathoms;  June  27,  1929;  43.5  mm.;  71+42  (113)  myom. 
No.  11,184;  Net  245;  800  fathoms;  July  1,  1929;  30.5  mm.;  73+40  (113)  myom. 
No.  11,707;  Net  313;  800  fathoms;  July  22,  1929;  47.5  mm.;  73+43  (116)  myom. 
No.  11,772;  Net  320;  1,000  fathoms;  July  23,  1929;  37  mm.;  70+44  (114)  myom. 
No.  11,819;  Net  326;  1,000  fathoms;  July  24,  1929;  36.5  mm.;  71+45  (116)  myom. 

No.  15,625;  Net  657;  700  fathoms;  June  2,  1930;  27  mm.;  74+41  (115)  myom. 

No.  15,746;  Net  683;  900  fathoms;  June  7,  1930;  37.5  mm.;  71+44  (115)  myom. 

No.  17,789;  Net  839;  700  fathoms;  Sept.  3,  1930;  41  mm.;  70+44  (114)  myom. 

No.  18,351;  Net  870;  100  fathoms;  Sept.  11,  1930;  34.5  mm.;  68+44  (112)  myom. 
No.  18,386;  Net  874;  500  fathoms;  Sept.  11,  1930;  44  mm.;  69+46  (115)  myom. 
No.  20,985;  Net  1035;  100  fathoms;  June  25,  1931;  27.5  mm.;  70+43  (113)  myom. 
No.  20,985a;  Net  1035;  100  fathoms;  June  25,  1931;  33  mm.;  69+44  (113)  myom. 
No.  21,020;  Net  1042;  100  fathoms;  June  26,  1931;  45  mm.;  70+46  (116)  myom. 
No.  21,020a;  Net  1042;  100  fathoms;  June  26,  1931;  41  mm.;  70+45  (115)  myom. 
No.  21,043;  Net  1047;  100  fathoms;  June  27,  1931;  48  mm.;  71+45  (116)  myom. 
No.  21,043a;  Net  1047;  100  fathoms;  June  27,  1931;  46  mm.;  71+46  (117)  myom. 
No.  21,152;  Net  1058;  300  fathoms;  July  7,  1931;  ca.  18  mm.;  66+47+  (113+) 
myom. 

No.  21,342;  Net  1080;  100  fathoms;  July  14,  1931;  44.5  mm.;  71+46  (117)  myom. 


318  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

No.  21,342a;  Net  1080;  100  fathoms;  July  14,  1931;  28  mm.;  73+ca.  43  (ca.  116) 
myom. 

No.  21,858;  Net  1129;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  4,  1931;  34  mm.;  72+43  (115)  myom. 
No.  22,233;  Net  1166;  900  fathoms;  Aug.  11,  1931;  45.5  mm.;  72+46  (118)  myom. 
No.  22,409;  Net  1184;  800  fathoms;  Aug.  15,  1931;  35  mm.;  73+44  (117)  myom. 
No.  22,760;  Net  1192;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  17,  1931;  36  mm.;  72+44  (116)  myom. 
No.  22,934;  Net  1244;  800  fathoms;  Aug.  31,  1931;  35.5  mm.;  70+49  (119)  myom. 
No.  22,905;  Net  1245;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  31,  1931;  35  mm.;  73+43  (116)  myom. 

Anguilla  rostrata. 

No.  11,650;  Net  305;  600  fathoms;  July  16,  1929;  43.5  mm.;  68+39  (107)  myom. 

No.  11,722;  Net  314;  900  fathoms;  July  22,  1929;  39.5  mm.;  67+39  (106)  myom. 

No.  12,877;  Net  406;  800  fathoms;  Sept.  2,  1929;  51  mm.;  69+39  (108)  myom. 

No.  13,125;  Net  427;  900  fathoms;  Sept.  5,  1929;  48  mm.;  68+40  (108)  myom. 

No.  13,193;  Net  435;  1,000  fathoms;  Sept.  6,  1929;  51.5  mm.;  71+38  (109)  myom. 
No.  13,343;  Net  449;  1,000  fathoms;  Sept.  9,  1929;  53  mm.;  71+39  (110)  myom. 
No.  17,759;  Net  835;  500  fathoms;  Sept.  3,  1930;  49.5  mm.;  70+38  (108)  myom. 

No.  18,029;  Net  856;  800  fathoms;  Sept.  6,  1930;  47.5  mm.;  69+39  (108)  myom. 

No.  18,098;  Net  862;  800  fathoms;  Sept.  8,  1930;  50  mm.;  69+40  (109)  myom. 

No.  18,549;  Net  881;  600  fathoms;  Sept.  12,  1930;  45  mm.;  69+38  (107)  myom. 

No.  18,496;  Net  883;  700  fathoms;  Sept.  13,  1930;  46.5  mm.;  68+38  (106)  myom. 
No.  22,305;  Net  1169;  700  fathoms;  Aug.  12,  1931;  51  mm.;  67+39  (106)  myom. 

No.  22,306;  Net  1172;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  12,  1931;  53  mm.;  70+39  (109)  myom. 

No.  22,667;  Net  1209;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  20,  1931;  41  mm.;  69+38  (107)  myom. 

No.  23,039;  Net  1217;  600  fathoms;  Aug.  24,  1931;  48  mm.;  70+39  (109)  myom. 

No.  23,040;  Net  1240;  1,000  fathoms;  Aug.  29,  1931;  45  mm.;  70+38  (108)  myom. 
No.  23,707;  Net  1325;  500  fathoms;  Sept.  19,  1931;  52  mm.;  70+39  (109)  myom. 


Bibliography. 

Johs.  Schmidt 

1909.  Remarks  on  the  metamorphosis  and  distribution  of  the  larvae  of  the 
Eel.  (Anguilla  vulgaris  Turt.).  ( Medd . Komm.  Havunders0gelser, 
Serie:  Fiskeri,  Bd.  Ill,  Nr.  3,  pp.  1-17.  Kpbenhavn). 

1909.  On  the  distribution  of  the  fresh-water  Eels  (Anguilla)  throughout 
the  world.  I.  Atlantic  Ocean  and  adjacent  Regions.  {Medd.  Komm. 
Havunders0gelser,  Serie:  Fiskeri,  Bd.  Ill,  Nr.  7,  pp.  1-45.  Kpbenhavn. 

1912.  Danish  researches  in  the  Atlantic  and  Mediterranean  on  the  life- 
history  of  the  Fresh-water  Eel  (Anguilla  vulgaris  Turt.).  ( Inter- 
nationale Revue  der  gesamten  Hydrobiologie  und  Hydrographie,  V. 
pp.  317-342,  Leipzig). 

1913.  On  the  Identification  of  Muraenoid  Larvae  in  their  early  (“Prelepto- 
cephaline”)  stages.  {Medd.  Komm.  Havunders0gelser,  Serie:  Fiskeri, 
Bd.  IV,  pp.  1-13.  Kpbenhavn). 

1913.  First  Report  on  Eel  investigations  1913.  {Rapports  et  Proces-V erbaux 
du  Conseil  Intern,  p.  VExplorat.  de  la  Mer,  Vol.  18,  pp.  1-30,  Kpben- 
havn) . 

1915.  Second  report  on  Eel  investigation  1915.  {Rapports  et  Proces-V erbaux 
du  Conseil  Intern,  p.  VExplorat.  de  la  Mer,  23,  1.  pp.  1-24,  Kpbenhavn) . 

1916.  On  the  early  larval  stages  of  the  Fresh-water  Eel  (Anguilla)  and  some 
other  North  Atlantic  Muraenoids.  {Medd.  Komm.  Havunders0gelser, 
Serie:  Fiskeri,  Bd.  V,  Nr.  4.  pp.  1-20,  Kpbenhavn). 

1922.  The  breeding  places  of  the  Eel.  {Phil.  Trans.  Royal.  Soc.  London, 
B.  Vol.  211,  385,  pp.  179-208,  London). 

1924.  The  transatlantic  migration  of  the  Eel-larvae.  Nature.  Jan.  5,  1924. 

1925.  The  breeding  places  of  the  Eel.  {Smithsonian  Report  for  1924,  pp. 
279-316,  Washington). 

1931.  Eels  and  Conger  Eels  of  the  North  Atlantic.  {Nature,  Vol.  128,  pp. 
602-604.  London). 

1935.  Danish  Eel  Investigations  during  25  Years,  1905-1930.  Published  by 
the  Carlsberg  Foundation,  Copenhagen. 


Jleto  Horfe  Zoological  Society 

General  Office:  90  Broad  Street,  New  York  City 


Officers; 

President,  W.  Redmond  Cross 
Vice-Presidents,  Kermit  Roosevelt  and  Alfred  Ely 
Chairman,  Executive  Committee,  W.  Redmond  Cross 
Treasurer,  Cornelius  R.  Agnew 
Secretary,  Fairfield  Osborn 

Scientific  Staff 

Zoological  |3arb 
W.  Reid  Blair,  Director 

Raymond  L.  Ditmars,  Curator  of  Mammals  and  Reptiles 
Lee  S.  Crandall,  Curator  of  Birds 
Charles  R.  Schroeder,  Veterinarian 
Claude  W.  Leister,  Ass’t  to  the  Director  and  Curator,  Educational  Activities 
H.  C.  Raven,  Prosector 
Edward  R.  Osterndorff,  Photographer 
William  Bridges,  Editor  and  Curator  of  Publications 

Squarium 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  Acting  Director 
Christopher  W.  Coates,  Aquarist 
Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  Pathologist 
G.  M.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Pathology 
Homer  W.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Physiology 

department  of  Croptcal  &esearcf) 

William  Beebe,  Director  and  Honorary  Curator  of  Birds 
John  Tee-Van,  General  Associate 
Gloria  Hollister,  Research  Associate 
Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate 

Cbttorial  Committee 

Fairfield  Osborn,  Chairman 

Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr. 
William  Bridges 


W.  Reid  Blair 
William  Beebe 


ZOOLOGICA 


SCIENTIFIC  CONTRIBUTIONS 
OF  THE 

NEW  YORK  ZOOLOGICAL  SOCIETY 


1/ 


VOLUME  XXIII 
Part  4 

Numbers  17  - 21 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  SOCIETY 
THE  ZOOLOGICAL  PARK,  NEW  YORK 


December  31,  1938. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

17.  The  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes.  By  William  K. 

Gregory  & G.  Miles  Conrad.  (Text-figures  1-37) 319 

18.  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological 

Society.  XVI.  Holothurians  from  the  Western  Coasts 
of  Lower  California  and  Central  America,  and  from 
the  Galapagos  Islands.  By  Elisabeth  Deichmann. 
(Text-figures  1-15)  361 

19.  A Note  on  Eggs  and  Young  of  Leioheterodon  madagas- 

cariensis  (Dumeril  & Bibron).  By  Roger  Conant. 
(Plate  I) 389 

20.  An  Unusual  Aberrantly  Colored  Pleuronectid.  By  C.  M. 

Breder,  Jr.  (Plate  I)  393 

21.  A Diagnostic  Test  for  the  Recognition  of  Tuberculosis  in 

Primates.  By  Charles  R.  Schroeder.  (Plates  I & II)  397 

Index  to  Volume  XXIII 401 


Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


319 


17. 


The  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes. 
William  K.  Gregory  & G.  Miles  Conrad 

The  American  Museum  of  Natural  History 


(Text-figures  1-37). 


Table  of  Contents. 

Page 


Introduction  319 

Phylogenetic  Review  of  Principal  Groups 325 

Cheirodontinae  325 

Serrasalmoninae  325 

Characinae  333 

Sarcodacinae  338 

Erythrininae  343 

Hemiodontinae  344 

Anostomatinae 347 

Citharininae  349 

Distichodontinae  352 

Gymnotidae  353 

The  Characins  and  the  Supposed  South  American- African  Bridge 356 

Bibliography 356 

Abbreviations  Used  in  the  Illustrations 359 


Introduction. 

In  the  systematic  history  of  the  family  Characinidae,  among  the  greatest 
contributors  were  Muller  and  Troschel  (1844,  +),  Sagemehl  (1884,  + ), 
Boulenger  (1887,  +),  Eigenmann  (1899,  +),  Rowntree  (1903,  1906),  and 
Regan  (1911,  +).  In  spite  of  all  of  these  labors  the  broad  evolutionary 
trends  were  so  easily  obscured  by  the  details  that  it  was  only  in  1917,  with 
the  publication  by  Eigenmann  of  the  first  part  of  his  monograph  on  “The 
American  Characidae,”  that  the  first  attempt  to  outline  the  phylogenetic 
relationships  of  all  of  the  South  American  subfamilies  was  made  (Text-fig. 
5).  Unfortunately  this  outline  from  which  we  have  made  a phylogenetic 
diagram  was  never  completely  developed,  for  Dr.  Eigenmann  died  before 
the  completion  of  his  memoir  on  the  Tetragonopterinae  and  allied  sub- 
families. 

Rowntree  (1903)  examined  the  visceral  anatomy  of  the  characins  and 
made  several  contributions  of  phylogenetic  interest,  including  evidence 
against  the  idea  of  an  amioid  ancestry  of  the  Erythrininae  which  had  been 
suggested  by  Sagemehl.  Much  of  the  data  concerning  the  visceral  anatomy 
merely  shows  the  differences  in  adaptation  to  an  herbivorous  diet  on  the  one 


320 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


hand  and  a carnivorous  diet  on  the  other.  Thus  the  differences  and  sim- 
ilarities noted  in  the  stomach  and  intestine  have  little  phylogenetic  signifi- 
cance of  subfamily  rank,  inasmuch  as  the  herbivorous  condition  has  appar- 
ently been  developed  independently  several  times  within  the  family. 

In  1911  Regan  revised  the  classification  of  the  Characinidae  and  in  so 
doing  synthesized  the  groups  of  previous  authors  to  a more  workable  system. 
However,  in  many  respects  the  classification  of  Boulenger  in  the  Cambridge 
Natural  History  is  still  useful. 

Cockerell  (1912,  1913)  studied  the  scales  of  both  the  African  and  South 
American  characins.  His  studies  were  very  detailed  and  in  some  cases  his 
results  are  confusing  when  compared  with  other  data,  but  on  the  whole  they 
served  to  clarify  the  phylogenetic  relationships  within  certain  groups. 


Text-figure  1. 

The  phylogenetic  relationships  of  the  subfamilies  of  the  Characidae. 


The  fossil  records  of  this  group  are  very  meagre.  From  the  Tertiary  of 
Brazil  and  Peru  three  more  or  less  doubtful  genera  are  known : Lignobrycon 1 
Eigenmann  and  Myers  1929,  Eobrycon2  Jordan  1907,  Characilepis  Cockerell 
1920.  These  are  apparently  related  to  the  Characinae.  The  teeth  known  as 
Onchosaurus  Gervais  1852^  which  are  found  in  the  Upper  Cretaceous  of 
North  America,  Europe  and  Egypt,  have  been  shown  by  Eastman  (1917) 
to  resemble  the  teeth  of  Hydrocyon  and  Hoplias.  However,  neither  in  gen- 
eral body  form  nor  in  tooth  structure  are  any  of  these  genera  primitive  and 
we  must,  therefore,  with  Eigenmann,  fall  back  upon  an  analysis  of  the  gen- 
eralized conditions  among  living  characins  as  the  principal  basis  for  a tenta- 
tive reconstruction  of  phylogenetic  history. 

As  a basis  for  our  chart  (Text-fig.  1)  of  the  phylogenetic  relationships 
of  the  family  Characinidae  we  have  used  first  the  monumental  work,  “The 
American  Characidae,”  by  C.  H.  Eigenmann,  as  well  as  many  lesser  papers 
by  the  same  author.  Nor  have  we  neglected  the  important  systematic  and 
distributional  studies  of  Regan,  Boulenger  and  others.  Our  own  material 
includes  a series  of  skeletal  and  preserved  specimens  representing  the  vari- 

1 Based  on  Tetragonopterus  ligniticus  Woodward,  Catalogue  of  Fossil  Fishes  in  the  British 
Museum  (Natural  History),  1901,  pt.  4,  p.  298,  pi.  17,  figs.  2,  3. 

2 Based  on  Tetragonopterus  avus  Woodward,  ibid.,  p.  298,  pi.  17,  fig.  1. 


PICTORIAL  CLASSIFICATION  OF 

THE  CHARACINS 

CHEIRODONTINAE 

SEKRA5ALM0NINAE 

CHARACINAE 

SARCODACINAE 

AN  0ST0MAT1NAE 

DI5TICH0D0NT1NAE 

2WEKIC1W 

AM.ER.1C2W 

AMERICAN" 

AMERICAN" 

AFRICAN" 

Cheirodon 

Serrasalmo 

Brqcoa 

Chilodus 

Distichodus 

AFRICAN" 

amr, T7 

jjjh 

" • - 

Sarcodaces 

Aaostoraus 

Paraphiago 

MoerShausia 

Mijlefes 

«sAc_ 

AMERICAN" 

Procmlodus 

Ichthqoborus 

Tetragonopterus 

Stethaprioa 

Corijnopoma 

Acestrorhqachus 

Luc  ocharcix 

Curimatus 

Pha^o 

^r'!'^Chalciaus 

Cqnodon 

CITHARININAE 

JA 

AFRICAN" 

iSP  " 

Gasteropelecus 

ERYTHRININAE 

Starks  iaa 

AFRICAN 

AMERICAN" 

Citharinus 

jg§]  „ 

HEMIODONTINAE 

Alestes 

AMERICAN" 

. 

Metqnnis 

Hqdrocqoa 

Lebiasiaa 

Text-figure  2. 

A pictorial  classification  of  the  characin  fishes. 


PICTORIAL  AC  I NS 


CHEIRODONTTNAE 


SERRASAISTICHODONTINAE 


Tetraq,onopterus 


ahekica.it 


Cheirodon. 


AFRICAN 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


321 


ous  subfamilies;  especially  those  brought  back  by  Messrs.  Lang  and  Chapin 
of  the  American  Museum  Congo  Expedition  of  1909-1915,  and  the  Brazilian 
collections  made  by  B.  A.  Krukoff  in  1934  and  1935. 

As  an  aid  to  the  construction  of  a tentative  phylogenetic  chart  we  have 
arranged  a “Pictorial  Classification  of  the  Characins”  (Text-fig.  2).  This  is 
based  on  a phylogenetic  interpretation  of  the  characters  used  in  defining 
families,  subfamilies,  etc.,  by  various  authors.  In  view  of  the  remarkable 
uniformity  in  basic  morphology  of  all  characins  and  of  the  existence  of  more 
or  less  annectant  genera  between  the  so-called  families  of  earlier  authors 
we  have  treated  the  entire  series  as  a single  family,  Characinidae,  coordinate 
in  rank  with  the  Gymnotidae,  the  latter  being  an  extremely  specialized  and 
presumably  early  side  branch. 

To  supplement  the  chart  showing  the  inferred  phylogenetic  relationships 
of  the  general  body  forms  we  have  added  several  other  charts  laid  out  on  the 
same  plan.  First  of  these  is  a series  of  scales  as  figured  by  Cockerell  (1912, 
1913).  Although  Cockerell  figured  the  circuli  and  radii  of  the  scales,  we 
have  contented  ourselves  with  the  outlines  (Text-fig.  3)  which,  by  them- 
selves, seem  to  present  the  several  broad  divergent  trends  within  the  family. 

A series  of  diagrams  of  characin  livers  has  been  compiled  from  Rown- 
tree’s  data.  These  drawings  (Text-fig.  4)  are  quite  schematic  and  are  merely 
diagrams  from  verbal  descriptions,  but  they  afford  an  interesting  contrast 
to  the  more  or  less  stable  characters  relied  on  in  the  above  charts.  Whether 
the  viscera,  always  in  a more  or  less  plastic  state,  have  any  really  helpful 
significance  in  these  studies  is  open  to  question  except  in  certain  cases,  but 
it  is  noteworthy  that  in  several  places  interrelationships  are  evident. 

For  convenience  we  insert  at  this  point  a summary  of  the  subfamilies  of 
the  characins,  as  used  in  the  present  paper. 

1.  Cheirodontinae  (Cheirodontinae  and  Tetragonopterinae  of  Eigenmann). 

Primitive,  generalized  characins;  both  maxilla  and  premaxilla  bear- 
ing teeth;  marginal  teeth  varying  from  pluricuspid  to  conical; 
mouth  moderate  to  small.  American:  Grundulus,  Mixobrycon, 
Moenkhausia  (Text-figs.  2,  8),  Tetragonopterus  (Text-figs.  2,  7,  8), 
Cheirodon  (Text-figs.  2,  6,  8),  etc. 

2.  Serrasalmoninae  (Stethaprioninae,  Serrasalminae  and  Mylinae  of  Eigen- 

mann). Extremely  deep  bodied;  short,  heavy  jawed  offshoots  of 
Tetragonopterus.  Nicely  graded  series  of  constantly  increasing 
ratios  of  depth  to  length.  Teeth  grade  from  carnassial  to  molari- 
form.  American:  Stethaprion  (Text-fig.  2),  Mylesinus,  Serrasal- 
mo  (Text-fig.  2),  Mylosoma  (Text-figs.  7B,  8),  Metynnis  (Text- 
fig.  2),  etc. 

3.  Characinae  (Characinae  (in  part),  Hydrocyoninae  and  Gasteropelecidae 

of  Regan).  The  large  central  group  of  African  and  South  Ameri- 
can forms  arising  from  the  Cheirodontinae.  Varying  in  body-form, 
but  central  type  as  in  Brycon;  hypocoracoids  usually  forming 
prominent  vertical  laminae,  but  grading  into  forms  with  short 
median  laminae  and  divergent  coracoid  fossae  ( Cynopotamus ) ; lat- 
eral line  decurved ; no  teeth  on  palatines.  American : Charax,  Bry- 
con (Text-figs.  2,  9,  11,  12,  14,  16,  30),  Iguanodectes,  Diapoma 
(Text-fig.  2),  Corynopoma  (Text-fig.  2),  Chalcinus  (Text-figs.  2,  13, 
14),  Gasteropelecus  (Text-figs.  2,  13,  14).  African:  Alestes  (Text- 
figs.  2,  10,  15),  Hydrocyon  (Text-figs.  2,  11,  12,  17,  18,  19,  20, 
21,  29). 

4.  Sarcodacinae  (Sarcodacinae,  Acestrorhamphinae,  Cynodontinae  and 

Xiphostomatidae  of  Regan).  Predatory  “pikes”  derived  from  the 
Characinae.  Jaws  more  or  less  elongate  with  caniniform  teeth;  a 
large  prefrontal  plus  supraorbital  bone;  supraoccipital  small,  not 
elevated  above  flattened  skull  top;  no  interfrontal  fontanelle.  Ameri- 


322 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Text-figure  3. 

Chief  variants  in  the  form  of  characin  scales.  Based  on  data  from  Cockerell 
(1912,  1913). 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


323 


Text-figure  4. 

Chief  variants  in  the  form  of  the  liver.  Based  on  Rowntree’s  (1903)  data. 


324  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :17 

can:  Luciocharax  (Text-figs.  2,  23,  24),  Acestrorhynchus  (Text-fig. 
2).  African:  Sarcodaces  (Text-figs.  2,  23,  24). 

5.  Erythrininae  (Erythrininae  and  Lebiasininae  of  Regan).  Amm-like 

relatives  of  Sarcodaces  with  more  or  less  broad,  rounded  heads. 
Opposite  hypocoracoid  fossae  diverging  sharply,  median  laminae 
short  ( Lebiasina ) to  absent;  lateral  line  straight  (lacking  in  Lebia- 
sina).  Teeth  on  palatines.  American : Erythrinus  (Text-figs.  2,  25, 
26),  Hoplias  (Text-fig.  24),  Lebiasina  (Text-fig.  2). 

6.  Hemiodontinae  (Hemiodontidae  of  Regan).  Small  fusiform  to  slender 

offshoots  of  the  Characinae  with  short  anal  fin,  adipose  typically 
reduced  or  absent;  very  small  to  small  subterminal  to  terminal 
mouth;  teeth  uniserial,  minute;  “pterygoid  movably  articulated 
with  quadrate,  narrowed  posteriorly  ending  in  a small  condyle” 
(Regan).  American:  Hemiodus,  Poecilobrycon  (Text-fig.  2),  Nan- 
nostomus,  Parodon. 

7.  Anostomatinae  (Anostomidae  of  Regan).  Slender  to  deep-bodied  herbi- 

vorous American  characins.  In  scale  and  jaw  characters  paralleling 
some  of  the  Citharininae  and  Hemiodontinae.  “Pterygoid  rather 
broad  posteriorly,  overlapping  the  quadrate”  (Regan).  Anostomus 
(Text-fig.  2),  Prochilodus  (Text-fig.  2),  Chilodus  (Text-fig.  2). 
Curimatus  (Text-figs.  2,  28),  Leporinus  (Text-figs.  28,  29,  30, 
31,  32). 

8.  Citharininae  (Citharininae,  Hemistichodontinae  and  Xenocharacinae  of 

Regan).  An  African  group  grading  in  scale  characters  from  cyc- 
loid to  ctenoid.  Parallel  in  many  characters  to  South  American 
Anostomatinae.  Citharinus  (Text-fig.  2),  Xenocharax. 

9.  Distichodontinae  (Distichodontinae  and  Ichthyoborinae  of  Regan).  This 

African  group  seems  to  be  related  to  the  Citharininae,  but  is 
sharply  separated  in  that  the  dentaries  are  movably  articulated 
with  the  articulars.  Distichodus  (Text-figs.  2,  33),  Phago  (Text- 
figs.  2,  35),  Ichthyoborus  (Text-fig.  2),  Mesoborus  (Text-fig.  34), 
Paraphago  (Text-fig.  2). 


-Curimatinae 

- Elopomorphinae 
- Hemiodontinae 

- Prochilodinae 
-dxiLod.Ln.ae 

~ Anastomatinae 


- Hydrocyrunae 
~ Cy  rwdorttinae 

- Acestrorhamphinae 

- Characinae 

- Salm.ininae 


- Lebiasininae 
~ Piabuscininae 

- Pyrrhulininae 

- lyu  anodectinae 
~ Aryconmae 


-Gasteropelicinae 


-Chalciainae 


Aiylinae  Serrasalmoninae 
I Gymnocharacinae  Stethaprioninae 


1 CAtoenkhausia) 
Tetragon  optennae 


GLandulocaudinae 
_ Diapominae 


Text-figure  5. 

The  phylogeny  of  the  South  American  characins,  according  to  Eigenmann  (1917,. 
pp.  38,  39). 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


325 


Phylogenetic  Review  of  Principal  Groups. 

Cheirodontinae. 

Several  authors,  including  one  of  us  (Gregory,  1933),  have  considered 
the  Erythrininae  to  be  the  most  primitive  existing  subfamily  of  the  Char- 
acinidae,  but  further  study  indicates  that  this  subfamily  is  relatively  high 
in  the  phylogenetic  series.  After  close  study  of  Eigenmann  (1916),  we  are 
indeed  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  the  Erythrininae  are  less  primitive  than 
the  Cheirodontinae. 

Text-figure  6 represents  the  skeleton  of  Cheirodon.  It  closely  resembles 
the  generalized  cheirodont  which  Eigenmann  has  pictured  for  us  in  words. 
It  is  a relatively  deep-bodied  type,  with  a long  anal  fin  having  its  origin 
under  the  last  dorsal  ray  and  reaching  almost  to  the  origin  of  the  caudal. 
The  caudal  is  deeply  forked.  The  mouth  is  terminal  and  relatively  small. 
The  teeth  of  the  generalized  type  are  in  a single  series,  rather  few  in  num- 
ber and  with  lateral  notches,  occurring  along  the  edge  of  the  premaxilla,  at 
the  upper  angle  of  the  maxillary,  and  along  the  front  and  sides  of  the 
lower  jaw. 

The  Cheirodontinae,  or  some  of  them,  also  retain  several  other  out- 
standing generalized  characters  from  which  those  of  almost  any  of  the 
remaining  subfamilies  may  have  sprung.  One  of  these  is  the  extremely 
undifferentiated  cycloid  scales,  almost  elliptical  in  shape,  from  which  the 
others  have  evidently  developed.  Another  is  the  greatly  variable  tooth 
form,  which,  as  noted  by  Eigenmann,  ranges  from  the  simple  conical  type 
of  Grundulus,  through  the  bicuspid  teeth  of  Macropsobrycon,  the  tricuspids 
of  Aphyocharax,  Megalamphodus,  Parecbasis  to  the  octacuspids  of  Cheir- 
odon. Thus,  as  far  as  teeth  are  concerned,  this  group  is  well  prepared  to 
account  for  all  of  the  bizarre  tooth-types  encountered  in  the  family,  such 
as  the  caniniform  teeth  of  Hydrocyon,  the  molariform  teeth  of  the  Mylinae, 
the  incisor-like  teeth  of  Leporinus  and  many  others. 

Eigenmann’s  generalized  cheirodont  exhibits  the  well  developed  chain 
of  suborbital  bones  which  are  constantly  cropping  out  in  various  genera  of 
the  Characinidae  and  which  apparently  first  led  Sagemehl  to  the  belief  that 
Erythrinus  had  amioid  affinities  (since  wholly  disproved  by  several  authors). 
An  adipose  fin  is  present  in  the  generalized  type  of  the  Cheirodontinae  as 
well  as  in  most  other  Characinidae.  However,  the  cheirodont  genera  Grun- 
dulus and  Spintherobolus  lack  one,  this  indicating  that  the  possession  of  an 
adipose  is  in  an  unstable  condition  in  even  the  more  primitive  characins. 
Some  of  the  Cheirodontinae  also  have  the  median  fronto-parietal  fontanelle 
which  is  so  frequent  in  other  subfamilies. 

Arising  from  the  Cheirodontinae  ( sensu  strictu),  then,  are  the  several 
diverging  subfamilies.  The  Tetragonopterinae  of  Eigenmann  are  very  near 
to  the  primitive  stock  of  the  characins  and  may  have  been  derived  from  the 
Cheirodontinae  or  from  a common  stem.  In  either  event  Eigenmann  points 
out  the  significant  similarity  of  the  heavy  teeth  and  cheek  armor  in  Mixo- 
brycon  (Cheirodontinae)  and  that  of  Hyphessobrycon  (Tetragonopterinae). 
A glance  at  Moenkhausia  (Text-fig.  2),  a tetragonopterine,  will  show  the 
general  similarity  of  its  body  form  to  that  of  Cheirodon  pulcher.  Tetra- 
gonopterus  proper  (Text-fig.  2)  is  a greatly  deepened  form  which  through 
some  species  such  as  T.  argenteus  has  given  rise  ultimately  to  the  extremely 
deep-bodied  and  strangely  modified  Serrasalmoninae. 

Serrasalmoninae. 

We  have  seen  above  that  T etrag onopterus  argenteus,  which  we  refer  to 
the  Cheirodontinae,  approaches  very  closely  to  the  body  form  of  the  Steth- 
aprioninae  and  differs  from  the  latter  chiefly  in  the  lack  of  a “pre-dorsal 
spine”  insofar  as  external  gross  characters  are  concerned.  Both  Cockerell 


326 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


(1913)  and  Eigenmann  and  Myers  (1929)  noted  the  relationship  between 
Stethaprion  and  another  cheirodont,  Moenkhausia,  but  Eigenmann  (1907) 
states,  “the  membei's  of  the  Stethaprioninae  mark  the  direct  road  from  the 
genus  Tetragonopterus  in  its  narrowest  sense  to  the  Mylinae  and  Serrasal- 
moninae.  In  the  deep  T.  argenteus  the  post-ventral  region  is  trenchant,  the 
pre-ventral  region  flat.  In  Stichonodon  both  pre-ventral  and  post-ventral 
regions  are  trenchant.  In  Stethaprion,  Brachychalcinus , and  Fowlerina  the 
post-ventral  region  is  incipiently  serrate  and  there  is  a pre-dorsal  spine. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


327 


\~p/m 
<scalebone 


cupel  t 


supra  orouc 


postorbital  canal  a 


orbital  canal 


pmr 


occipital  canal 
scalebone 

...  fossa  forlei/ator  arcus palatini 

v.  fossa  for  dilatator  ope r cut i 
fossa  for  lerntor  ope r cut i 

-supclt 

-preop  ercular  canal 


ang 

mandibular  canal  \ 


\ r 

\ I 

suborbifal  canal 


Tetra^oriopterus 


Text-figure  7. 

A,  skull  of  Tetragonopterus,  showing  lateral  line  canals  and  principal  muscle 
fossae.  B,  Mylosoma,  detail  of  occipital  region,  showing  canals. 


328 


Zoological  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


In  Mylesinus  of  the  Mylinae  the  abdomen  is  serrate  behind  the  ventrals  and 
in  the  rest  of  the  Mylinae  and  Serrasalmoninae  the  ventral  edge  is  serrate 
both  in  front  and  behind  the  ventrals.”  This  series  is  supported  again  by 
Eigenmann  and  Myers  in  1929.  On  the  entire  chart  of  body  forms  (Text- 
fig.  2)  there  is  no  series  so  convincing  as  this  one,  especially  in  the  constantly 
increasing  ratio  of  depth  to  length  until  finally,  in  Metynnis,  the  depth 
almost  equals  the  length.  There  is  a transition  from  the  sharp,  shearing, 
carnassial-like  teeth  of  Serrasalmo  to  the  more  blunt,  molariform  teeth  of 
Myletes,  while  the  jaws  in  both  remain  short  and  blocky.  In  liver  form 
(Text-fig.  4)  Serrasalmo  appears  to  be  very  generalized. 

The  skulls  of  the  Cheirodontinae  and  the  Serrasalmoninae  are  often 
quite  small  and  paper  thin  so  that  in  order  to  facilitate  the  identification  of 
the  bones  a detailed  study  of  the  sensory  canals  was  made.  Text-figure  7, 
an  outline  picture  of  the  skull  of  the  typical  genus,  Tetragonopterus,  shows 
the  position  and  names  of  the  canals  and  the  diagnostic  muscle  fossae. 

The  lateral  line  passes  from  the  body  into  the  posttemporal  bone  and 
from  there  it  continues  into  the  “scalebone.”  In  the  scalebone  it  forks  into 
two  branches,  one  leading  toward  the  postorbital  canal,  the  other,  the  occipi- 
tal canal,  passing  dorsally  through  the  parietal  bone.  Just  above  the  scale- 
bone the  occipital  canal  is  met  by  a branch  from  the  supraorbital  canal. 
At  the  most  ventral  point  of  the  surface  of  the  pterotic  the  preopercular 
canal  arises.  This  preopercular  canal  runs  directly  into  the  mandible. 
Starting  at  the  origin  of  the  preopercular  canal  and  bordering  the  fossa 
of  the  dilatator  operculi  is  the  postorbital  canal  which  continues  forward  to 
the  junction  of  the  suborbital  canal  with  the  main  trunk.  The  suborbital 
canal  joins  the  main  canal  at  the  “peninsula”  which  marks  the  separation 
of  the  fossa  for  the  levator  arcus  palatini  from  that  of  the  dilatator  operculi. 
From  this  junction  forward  the  sensory  canal  is  known  as  the  supraorbital 
canal  and  gives  off  several  branches  as  it  passes  through  the  frontal  bone. 
This  canal  passes  through  the  nasal  bone  and,  in  Tetragonopterus  at  least, 
seems  to  continue  into  the  premaxilla. 

The  nicely  graded  series  of  body  forms  which  has  been  noted  in  the 
cheirodont-serrasalmonine  branch  is  reflected  in  the  skull  structures.  Cheir- 
odon  (Text-fig.  8A)  has  the  skull  of  a more  or  less  fusiform  habitus.  The 
dorsal  curvature  of  the  skull  is  slight  and  convex  and  there  are  sizable 
parietals,  which  might  imply  a lack  of  the  forward  curling  of  the  occiput 
that  is  seen  as  we  proceed  up  the  scale.  The  dermosphenotic  is  present  in 
this  primitive  form.  The  jaws  are  relatively  compact  and  strong  and  are 
not  elongate. 

Moenkhausia  (Text-fig.  8B)  reflects  the  slightly  deeper  body  and  the 
supraoccipital  crest  is  a bit  more  steep  than  in  Cheirodon.  Indeed  the  entire 
skull  shows  a dorso-ventral  emphasis.  The  dermosphenotic  disappears  in 
Moenkhausia  and  is  lost  in  those  latter  specimens  of  this  series  which  we 
have  examined.  The  parietal  and  pterotics  have  been  reduced. 

The  skull  of  Tetragonopterus  (Text-fig.  8C)  resembles  very  closely  that 
of  Moenkhausia.  As  might  be  inferred  from  the  progressively  increasing 
body-depth,  the  supraoccipital  bone  is  so  upturned  that  the  frontal  is  quite 
concave  in  side  view.  The  suture  between  the  frontals  and  the  parietals  and 
pterotics  is  in  the  form  of  two  acute  angled,  overlapping  bevels.  Thus  the 
surface  extent  of  the  parietals  is  a great  deal  less  than  the  cranial.  This 
suggests  a mechanical  shoving  forward  of  the  temporal  region.  The  post- 
orbital portion  of  the  circumorbital  chain  has  been  dissected  away  so  as  to 
show  the  various  muscle  fossae  as  well  as  the  postorbital  process  of  the 
sphenotic  bone. 

As  a representative  of  the  Serrasalmoninae,  Mylosoma  (Text-fig.  8D) 
serves  admirably.  Here  is  the  ultimate  in  the  deep-bodied  forms  in  some 
of  which  the  depth  almost  equals  the  length.  It  is  no  wonder,  therefore, 
that  the  fronto-parieto-supraoccipital  contour  in  side  view  is  so  concavo- 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes  329 


Text-figure  9. 
Skeleton  of  Brycon. 


332 


Zoological  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


convex  as  to  form  a feeble  S.  In  Tetragonopterus  a perpendicular  line  pass- 
ing through  the  posterior  tip  of  the  supraoccipital  would  also  pass  close  to 
the  rear  margin  of  the  operculum,  while  in  Mylosoma  such  a line  would 
pass  through  the  center  of  the  postorbital  portion  of  the  circumorbital 
chain.  For  the  first  time  in  this  series  a new  bone  appears,  the  supra- 
orbital. The  sensory  canal  system  retains  the  basic  plan  of  Text-fig.  7A, 
but  in  response  to  the  necessity  of  the  openings  passing  through  the  thick 
layer  of  fatty  tissue  (which  cushions  the  concave  part  of  the  skull)  there 
have  been  developed  several  bony  “craters”  which  carry  the  canals  to  the 
surface.  The  word,  crater,  is  really  descriptive  of  them  for  they  look  much 
like  a volcanic  crater — an  eruption  of  the  bone.  As  another  innovation  the 
occipital  canal  passes  behind  the  crest,  which  is  usually  placed  at  the  pos- 
terior edge  of  the  parietal.  However,  in  Mylosoma  this  crest  has  moved 
forward  on  the  parietal,  while  the  canal  presumably  maintains  its  primitive 
position  (see  inset,  Text-fig.  7B). 

The  most  salient  feature  of  this  phylogenetic  branch  is  the  constant 
anterior  movement  of  the  occipital  region  while  the  rest  of  the  skull  remains 
stationary.  The  loss  of  the  dermosphenotic  and  the  appearance  of  the 
supraorbital  are  observed.  The  fontanelles  are  left  intact  throughout  the 
group. 


carotid  for 


■Autogenous 

%parapophysis 


pt+poreth 


trigemiho-faciatis  Tio/c/i  carotid  for 


Brycon 


i pupra  occipital  buttress 
\ - ? neural  arch  or 
■ ’wcrsp/natbone 

, neural archVZ 

pto  p ' neural arch  \ Iff 

’tyj  transv. pr  142 
' tfansv prV3 
' transvprVb 


fir/en  Z'i/ra  de£ 


Hydrocyon 


boc\  j tripus-autogparapoph  V3 
ogot  \inbcrcalarium=l autog.parapopb 
scaphium^neurai arch  VZ 

r VI 


Text-figure  11. 

Neurocrania  of  the  African  Hydrocyon  and  the  South  American  Brycon.  The 
first  four  vertebrae  with  their  attendant  Weberian  apparatus  are  included 
with  the  skull  of  Hydrocyon.  Although  the  Weberian  ossicles  and  anterior 
vertebrae  have  not  been  added  to  the  skull  of  Brycon,  a close  similarity  in 
basic  plan  of  the  neurocrania  is  noted  in  these  two  members  of  the  Chara- 
cinae. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phytogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


333 


Characinae. 

This  group  is  the  most  extensive  of  the  family,  abounding  as  it  does 
in  both  South  American  and  African  forms  which  range  from  the  primitive 
African  genus,  Alestes,  to  the  South  American  fresh-water  flying  fish,  Gas- 
teropelecus.  Although  the  interrelationships  of  the  group  are  obscure  and 
are  in  the  sense  used  by  Eigenmann  (1917)  probably  polyphyletic,  there  is 
little  doubt  that  they  are  all  traceable  to  the  completely  primitive  Cheir- 
odontinae.  The  Characinae  include  on  our  chart  (Text-fig.  2)  as  representa- 
tives of  the  group,  the  following  genera: 

(A)  American 
Brycon 
Diapoma 
Corynopoma 
Chalcinus 
Gasteropelecus 


SdC 


inter-fronta! 


- trans.  groove  can  ■ 
sm.impan 


He  /e-ris'Z  /s/ca. 


Hydrocyon 


prodtic  / [ 

/ en  trance  to  cran.  recess 

trans.  groove  ran.s/n . forsaccutus 

/. rnpar . 


Text-figure  12. 

Neurocrania  of  Hydrocyon  and  Brycon,  longitudinal  sections.  These  sections  show 
even  more  strikingly  the  basic  similarity  of  the  African  and  South  American 
genera  of  Characinae.  The  heavy  black  lines  in  Hydrocyon  indicate  the  posi- 
tion of  the  semicircular  canals. 


334 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Text-figure  13  (upper). 

Cleithrum  and  primary  pectoral  arch  (except  radials)  of  A.  Gasteropelecus  pec- 
torosus  and  B.  Chalcinus  trachypomus.  After  Regan,  1911. 


Text-figure  14  (lower) . 

Skeletons  of  Gasteropelecus,  Chalcinus  and  Brycon. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phytogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


335 


(B)  African 

Alestes 

Hydrocyon 

This  group  may  be  split  into  several  series,  all  of  which  seem  to  be 
ultimately  derivable  from  cheirodont  beginnings.  The  African  members  are 
closely  related  to  their  South  American  allies  in  the  fundamental  pattern 
of  skull  structure  (Text-figs.  11,  12)  as  well  as  in  many  curious  details  of 
body  form,  scalation,  etc. 

According  to  Eigenmann  the  Glandulocaudinae,  here  represented  by 
Diapoma  and  Corynopoma  (Text-fig.  2),  are  linked  quite  definitely  to  the 
Cheirodontinae  by  Paragoniates,  with  its  general  shape  and  backward  posi- 
tion of  the  dorsal  fin,  and  by  Compsura  and  Odontostilbe,  with  the  peculiar 
caudal  scalation  of  the  males. 

Brycon  (Text-figs.  2,  9)  seems  to  be  the  central  type  of  the  group  and 
from  it,  according  to  Eigenmann  (1917),  arose  one  line  leading  to  Iguano- 
dectes  and  Pyrrhulina.  Eigenmann  and  Myers  (1929)  describe  the  sub- 
family Iguanodectinae  as  “slender,  elongate,  moderately  compressed,  smelt- 
like fishes  of  small  size  . . .”  Cockerell  (1913)  remarks  that  the  iguano- 
dectine  scales  are  not  far  from  the  condition  noted  in  Cheirodon.  Pyrrhulina 
is  apparently  near  to  the  point  at  which  the  hemiodontines  branched  from 
the  cheirodont  stem. 

Chalcinus  (Text-fig.  2),  in  its  deepened  coracoids  and  large  pectoral 
fins,  seems  to  afford  a favorable  point  of  departure  for  Gasteropelecus 
(Text-fig.  2).  Regan  (1911,  p.  20)  rejected  this  connection  and  stressed 
the  structural  relationships  with  Tetragonopterus.  But  the  latter  differs 
widely  from  Chalcinus  (Text-fig.  14B)  in  the  low  position  of  the  pectorals, 
general  form  of  body  and  mouth,  and  undoubtedly  points  rather  to  Serra- 
salmo.  After  comparing  the  skeletons  of  Chalcinus  and  Tetragonopterus 
with  the  skeleton  of  Gasteropelecus  (Text-fig.  14A),  we  incline  to  the  opin- 
ion that  Chalcinus  is  much  the  nearer  to  the  structural  ancestor  of  Gas- 
teropelecus. 

Alestes  (Text-figs.  2,  10),  a relatively  primitive  predator,  is  typical  of 
several  African  members  of  the  Characinae,  such  as  Bryconaethiops,  Micra- 
lestes,  and  Petersius,  which  vary  from  fusiform  to  fairly  deep-bodied  shapes. 
The  teeth  vary  from  very  small  pluricuspid  to  large  compressed  shearing 
types;  some  even  have  molar-like  teeth  on  the  inner  row  of  the  upper  jaw. 

That  the  African  genus  Alestes  is  surely  close  to  the  American  Brycon 
is  undoubted.  The  general  shape  of  the  skulls  (Text-figs.  15,  16)  is  very 
much  alike.  They  both  possess  the  supraorbital,  but  whereas  Brycon  retains 
the  dermosphenotic,  it  is  noteworthy  that  in  Alestes  the  frontal  is  excluded 
from  the  orbit  by  a prolongation  of  the  suborbitals.  However,  in  Alestes 
the  dermosphenotic  may  be  so  completely  fused  with  the  suborbitals  as  to 
be  indistinguishable  from  them.  At  any  event,  the  postorbital  portion  of 
the  circumorbital  chain  serves  the  purpose  of  protecting  the  muscle  fossae 
noted  in  Text-fig.  8,  as  does  the  dermosphenotic  when  present.  In  both 
genera  the  lacrymal  is  present  (not  shown  in  Text-fig.  14)  and  well  sep- 
arated from  the  parethmoid,  as  in  primitive  characins. 

Hydrocyon  (Text-figs.  17,  18)  is  an  extreme  predaceous,  pike-like  off- 
shoot of  this  African  stock.  Regan  (1911)  separates  it  as  a distinct  sub- 
family from  the  rest  of  his  Characidae  largely  on  the  basis  of  the  movable 
premaxillae,  but  this  character  is  developed  independently  in  other  groups 
of  characins  (e.g.,  Anostomatinae,  Hemiodontinae,  Citharininae  and  Dis- 
tichodontinae)  and  should  not  outweigh  the  many  marks  of  close  kinship 
with  other  African  Characinae.  If  we  are  to  grade  taxonomic  rank  accord- 
ing to  intensity  of  specialization  then  the  complex  symphysial  hinge-joint  of 
Hydrocyon  (Text-figs.  19,  20,  21)  should  entitle  it  to  the  grade  perhaps  of 
a superfamily.  However,  other  characins  (Text-fig.  22)  and  even  its  own 


336 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII : 17 


Text-figure  15. 

Skull  of  Alestes. 


young  clearly  point  the  way  toward  the  complex  hinge-joint  of  Hydrocyon. 

The  complex  symphysial  hinge-joint  of  Hydrocyon  and  other  characins 
is  described  in  more  detail  by  Gregory  and  Conrad  (1936)  as  follows: 

“Thus  the  story  of  the  development  of  the  complex  hinge-joint  in  Hydro- 
cyon lineatus  starts  at  a stage  when  the  ‘hinge’  is  nothing  more  than  an 
interdigitating  articulation  with  but  three  knuckles  to  each  dentary  [Text- 
fig.  21,  I.].  The  dorsal  border  of  the  dentary  then  produces  another  knuckle, 
C,  on  the  right  and  b on  the  left.  The  ventral  border  of  the  left  dentary 
gives  rise  to  / [Text-fig.  21,  II.].  The  next  stage  [Text-fig.  21,  III.]  sees 
the  first  advance  toward  the  adult  interlocked  hinge  for,  as  pointed  out 
above,  the  knuckles  begin  to  curl  from  the  posterior  to  the  anterior  borders 
of  the  dentary,  leaving  an  opening  or  fenestra  at  the  pivotal  point.  By 
inserting  here  an  hypothetical  phase  in  which  this  forward  curling  is  wholly 
finished  and  the  knuckles  are  interdigitated,  it  can  be  seen  that  by  the  coales- 
cence of  the  knuckles  arising  from  the  same  dentary  the  condition  in  IV. 
[Text-fig.  21]  would  occur.  Now  all  the  elements  are  present  [Text-fig.  20, 
V. ; Text-fig.  21,  IV.]  and  the  left  hinge-stop  is  completely  formed,  while  the 
right  one  is  in  process  of  coalescence.  Finally,  in  VI.  [Text-fig.  20]  the  hinge- 
joint  reaches  its  completely  formed  complex  condition,  which  will  with 
later  growth  be  pulled  out  and  distorted  both  vertically  and  horizontally, 
while  at  the  same  time  retaining  its  mechanical  efficiency. 

“A  glance  at  [Text-fig.  22]  shows  that  the  most  common  condition  of 
the  hinge  in  Characins  is  that  seen  in  Moenkhausia  ( Tetragonopterinae 
Eigenmann),  Piaractus  ( Mylinae  Eigenmann),  and  Alestes  ( Characinae 
Regan).  In  all  of  these  the  knuckles  are  arranged  in  planes  radiating  pos- 
teriorly from  the  anterior  border  of  the  dentary.  Our  detailed  studies  on 
the  family  suggest  that  Hydrocyon  has  evidently  arisen  from  an  Alestes- like 
ancestor,  and  a comparison  between  the  Alestes  hinge  in  [Text-fig.  22]  and 
that  of  Hydrocyon  in  [Text-fig.  21]  (II.)  shows  that  the  latter  passes 


1938J  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


337 


Brycon  dentex 


Text-figure  16. 

Skull  of  Brycon.  After  Gregory,  1933,  fig.  70. 


through  an  Alestes  stage  in  development.  Returning  to  [Text-fig.  22]  we 
notice  that  the  primitive  hinge  condition  is  upset  in  Erythrinus  and  Hoplias 
which  have  moved  the  ‘area  of  radiation’  posteriorly,  so  that  the  knuckles 
radiate  both  anteriorly  and  posteriorly.  The  condition  in  Erythrinus  may 
possibly  be  that  of  Hydrocyon  in  [Text-fig.  21]  (IV.)  just  before  any  of 
the  knuckles  have  coalesced. 

“In  conclusion,  the  complex  hinge-joint  in  the  symphysis  mandibulae  of 
Hydrocyon  lineatus  Bleeker  develops  its  most  complex  features,  the  so-called 
hinge-stops  described  above,  after  the  post-larval  and  infantile  stages  have 
been  completed. 

“The  hinge  is  formed  from  interdigitating  processes  analogous  to  the 

knuckles  of  a mechanical  hinge.  These  knuckles  represent  subdivisions  of 
the  subalveolar  ridge  of  the  dentary  bone.  They  are  typical  polyisomeres  in 
the  sense  defined  by  one  of  us  (Gregory,  1934).  They  grow  inward  toward 
the  mid-plane  like  fingers,  decussate  across  the  mid-plane,  and  curl  around 
and  join  themselves  into  the  hinge-stops  on  either  side  of  the  mid-plane. 
Here  they  behave  like  typical  anisomeres,  which  arise  by  the  differential 
growth  and  fusion  of  polyisomeres. 


338 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Text-figure  17. 

Skull  of  Hydrocyon.  After  Gregory,  1933,  fig.  69. 


“The  earlier  structural  stages  of  the  condition  in  Hydrocyon  are  found 
in  Alestes  and  other  primitive  Characins  and  in  an  arrested  stage  in  the 
subfamily  Erythrininae.” 


Sarcodacinae. 

Acestrorhyncus,  with  its  comparatively  long  jaws  and  with  its  pre- 
maxillaries  fixed  and  firmly  attached  to  the  mesethmoid,  has  apparently 
given  rise  to  the  elongate,  pike-like  Xiphostomatidae  of  Regan  (represented 
on  our  chart  (Text-fig.  2)  by  Acestrorhyncus  and  Luciocharax) . 

The  similarity  of  the  skulls  of  Sarcodaces  (Text-figs.  23,  24),  an  Afri- 
can form,  and  Luciocharax,  a South  American,  is  amazing.  Text-figure  23 
shows  the  dorsal  views  of  these  skulls.  It  is  seen  that  the  dorsal  fontanelle 
is  completely  closed  over  in  both  and  that  a triangle  is  formed  by  the 
dermosphenotics,  frontals  and  pterotics.  This  wedge-like  arrangement  of 
the  cranial  elements  is  highly  suggestive  of  relationship,  coupled  as  it  is 
with  a well  developed  prefrontal  plus  supraorbital  which  is  so  rare  among 
the  other  characins  examined.  The  scale  bone  is  not  figured  in  Luciocharax. 
There  is  no  supraopercular  bone  in  Luciocharax,  but  this  is  a derm  bone 
which  might  easily  be  lost.  As  seen  in  side  view  (Text-fig.  24)  the  two 
skulls  are  likewise  comparable,  with  their  plate-like  lacrymals  which  are  so 
different  from  those  of  the  more  primitive  characins.  The  prefrontals  lie 
dorsal  to  the  lacrymals  instead  of  behind  them  as  in  more  generalized 
forms.  The  suborbital  bones  of  both  are  very  similar  in  cut,  the  bones 
marked  so2  being  strikingly  alike.  There  is  a persistence  of  the  dermosphen- 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


339 


Hydrocyon 


Text-figure  18. 

Skull  of  Hydrocyon,  dorsal  view. 


otics  of  the  primitive  characin.  The  cut  of  the  operculum  is  quite  similar 
in  both.  The  premaxilla  and  dentary  of  Luciocharax  have  been  elongated 
and  the  maxilla  is  somewhat  reduced.  That  the  increased  number  of  teeth 
in  Luciocharax  is  secondary  is  highly  probable. 

The  similarity  of  these  two  is  so  great  that  it  seems  warranted  to  refer 
Sarcodaces  to  the  Sarcodacinae  (which  includes  Luciocharax  and  others) 
as  here  understood  (page  321).  The  connection  of  Sarcodaces  with  Alestes 
and  allied  genera  seems  much  more  remote  than  with  Luciocharax.  In 
Sarcodaces  the  lacrymal  and  prefrontal  overlap,  as  they  do  in  Luciocharax, 
whereas  in  Alestes  which  has  the  typical  characin  lacrymal  placement,  they 
are  well  separated  from  the  parethmoid-prefrontal  complex.  A supraorbital 
is  present  in  Sarcodaces  and  Luciocharax  and  is  also  present  in  Alestes. 
Alestes  lacks  the  dermosphenotic  that  is  present  in  the  others.  The  general 
heavily  armored  character  and  the  telescoped  occipital  region  common  to 
Sarcodaces  and  Luciocharax  is  lacking  in  Alestes  and  the  Characinae  gen- 
erally. The  large,  well  developed  circumorbitals  of  Sarcodaces  are  noted  in 
Hydrocyon,  but  the  lacrymal  and  parethmoid  are  well  separated  in  the  latter. 
Hydrocyon  has  a well  developed  supraorbital  but  at  the  same  time  retains 
the  dermosphenotics  of  the  primitive  Cheirodon.  The  supraopercular  found 
in  some  few  characins,  such  as  Sarcodaces,  is  lacking  in  Hydrocyon.  The 


340 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Lower  jaw  of  Hydrocyon  lineatus,  showing  the  dentaries  spread  to  greatest  extent 
in  A and  closed  as  tightly  as  possible  in  B.  After  Gregory  and  Conrad, 
1936,  fig.  1. 

supraoccipital  is  produced  sufficiently  far  back  to  include  Hydrocyon  among 
the  more  central  Characinae. 

Luciocharax,  while  it  retains  most  of  the  osteological  characters  of  the 
Characidae  of  Regan,  has  developed  a somewhat  movable  upper  jaw  and  the 
maxillaries  have  become  firmly  united  with  the  premaxillaries. 

The  scales  of  the  Acestrorhamphinae  (our  Sarcodacinae)  according  to 
Cockerell  (1913)  are  like  those  of  the  Serrasalmoninae.  However,  this  prob- 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


341 


Text-figure  20. 

A,  distal  portion  of  left  half  of  mandible  of  adult  Hydrocyon,  oblique  mesial  view 
of  S turned  slightly.  VI,  median  sagittal  section  of  same  specimen.  V,  section 
of  a much  smaller  specimen,  measuring  23  cm.  (Stippled  portion  represents 
right  dentary;  unstippled,  left.)  After  Gregory  and  Conrad,  1936,  fig.  6. 

ably  indicates  only  a community  of  origin  for  the  two  groups  have  developed 
into  as  many  diverging  types.  While  the  Serrasalmoninae  have  become  in- 
creasingly deep-bodied  as  noted  above,  the  sarcodacines  have  been  pulled  out 
antero-posteriorly  to  form,  in  Luciocharax,  an  astonishingly  pike-like  fish. 
Thus  the  Sarcodacinae  like  the  Serrasalmoninae  may  be  traced  back  to  the 
Cheirodontinae. 


342 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


II 


Text-figure  21  (left). 

Median  sagittal  sections  of  symphysis  in  Hydrocyon  lineatus.  IV,  a specimen 
about  21  cm.  long;  III,  a fish  about  5.5  cm.  in  length;  II,  a specimen  5 cm. 
long;  and  I,  about  2.5  cm.  long.  After  Gregory  and  Conrad,  1936,  fig.  7. 

Text-figure  22  (right). 

Diagrams  of  disarticulated  symphysial  hinges  in  various  characins;  mesial  views. 
The  hatched  portion  represents  the  cavities  and  the  light,  the  knuckles.  The 
dotted  lines  are  merely  an  aid  in  noting  the  directions  of  the  knuckles. 
L,  left  dentary;  R,  right  dentary;  ant.,  anterior  border  of  the  dentary.  After 
Gregory  and  Conrad,  1936,  fig.  5. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


343 


Erythrininae. 

As  noted  above  the  primitive  appearance  of  the  Erythrininae  is  ap- 
parently only  secondary.  In  a study  of  the  visceral  anatomy  of  the  chara- 
cins  Rowntree  (1903)  notices  the  striking  resemblance  between  the  Eryth- 
rininae and  Sarcodaces,  “not  only  in  cranial  characters,  as  shown  by  Sage- 
mehl,  but  also  in  certain  visceral  characters,  notably  in  the  opening  of  the 
ductus  pneumaticus  far  to  the  left  on  the  alimentary  canal,  in  the  character 
of  the  ovaries,  and  in  the  features  of  the  air-bladder.”  This  asymmetric 
position  of  the  ductus  pneumaticus  is,  according  to  Rowntree,  a specialized 
condition  inasmuch  as  a symmetric  or  mid-dorsal  position  of  the  duct  is  the 
primitive  one.  That  Rowntree  and  Sagemehl  noted  several  points  common 
to  the  Erythrininae  and  Sarcodaces  is  an  interesting  observation  for,  of  all 
the  skulls  studied,  the  only  ones  forming  possible  links  between  the  Eryth- 
rininae and  the  remainder  of  the  Characinidae  are  those  of  Sarcodaces  and 
related  genera. 

Rowntree  further  notes  that  Macrodon  ( Hoplias ),  alone  among  the 
Characinidae,  possesses  but  two  of  the  usual  three  liver  lobes.  Insofar  as 
scales  are  concerned  Cockerell  (1913)  shows  that  the  Erythrininae  combine 
characters  of  the  characins  and  cyprinids. 

Studies  on  the  symphysial  hinge-joints  in  characins  seemed  to  indicate 
at  first  that  the  condition  noted  in  Erythrinus  (Text-fig.  22)  was  a precursor 
of  that  found  in  Hydrocyon.  Upon  further  consideration  (see  above,  page 
337),  however,  it  is  more  probable  that  the  Erythrinus  condition  of  the 
symphysial  hinge-joint  is  merely  that  of  Hydrocyon  in  an  arrested  stage. 

In  any  event  it  becomes  evident  that  the  Erythrininae  are  well  along 
in  the  evolutionary  series,  but  in  spite  of  their  amazing  similarity  to  the 
cyprinids  in  the  scales  it  is  doubtful  that  they  are  near  to  the  stem  leading 
from  the  primitive  Ostariophysi  to  that  group.  The  well  developed  upper 
and  lower  jaws  are  armed  with  conical,  canine-like  teeth  much  as  in  Sar- 
codaces (Text-fig.  24).  The  condition  of  their  jaws  and  teeth  and  the  lack 
of  an  adipose  fin  are  early  noted  in  the  cheirodont  Grundulus,  and  the  Eryth- 
rinus body-form  has  been  developed  time  and  again  within  the  family 
Characinidae. 

The  heavily  armored,  tightly  built  skull  of  the  Erythrininae  (Text-figs. 
24B,  25,  26)  closely  resembles  those  of  the  Sarcodacinae.  Hoplias  (Erythrin- 
inae) (Text-fig.  24B),  with  its  elongate  dermosphenotic  and  separate  supra- 
operculum,  seems  to  form  a connecting  link  between  Sarcodaces  and  Eryth- 
rinus. The  lacrymal  and  the  pre-fronto-parethmoid  articulate  in  this  sub- 
family and  are  not  separated  from  each  other  as  they  are  in  more  primitive 
characins.  However,  the  Erythrininae  resemble  the  primitive  subfamilies 
in  not  having  the  frontal  excluded  from  the  orbit,  whereas  in  Sarcodaces  and 
Luciocharax  the  enlarged  prefrontal  plus  supraorbital  do  exclude  the  frontal 
from  the  orbital  margin.  Both  Erythrinus  and  Sarcodaces  have  large  nasals. 
The  interfrontal  sutures  and  the  sutures  between  the  parietals  are  very 
similar  in  the  two,  but  Erythrinus  lacks  the  characteristic  triangular 
dorsal  view  in  Sarcodaces.  The  fontanelles  are  entirely  covered  over  in  both 
genera.  The  dentition  of  Hoplias  is  quite  like  that  of  Sarcodaces.  The  cut 
of  the  lower  border  of  the  operculum  in  the  Erythrininae  and  Sarcodaces 
is  peculiar,  but  this  is  approached  also  in  Curimatus  (Anostomatinae) . 

Lebiasina  and  Piabucina  (Text-fig.  26),  referred  by  Regan  to  his  Char- 
acidae  (sensu  strictu),  show  a close  approximation  to  Erythrinus  not  only 
in  the  body-form  but  even  in  the  skull.  The  fronto-parietal  fontanelle  is 
completely  closed  over;  the  operculum  is  very  similar;  the  lacrymal-pareth- 
moid  relationship  is  as  in  the  Erythrininae;  and  there  is  a sizable  dermo- 
sphenotic. The  only  specimen  available  does  not  seem  to  have  a supra- 
opercular.  The  dorsal  aspect  affords  a favorable  comparison  with  Eryth- 
rinus. The  coracoids  of  Lebiasina,  according  to  Regan,  have  the  median 


344 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Text-figure  23. 

Skulls  of  Luciocharax  and  Sarcodaces,  dorsal  views. 


ventral  laminae  present  but  short  whereas  in  the  Erythrininae  generally 
these  are  absent. 

Thus  the  Erythrininae  may  easily  have  been  derived  either  from  a 
cheirodont  near  to  the  Alestes-Hydrocyon  stem  or  from  the  immediate  an- 
cestors of  the  Sarcodacinae. 


Hemiodontinae. 

Regan  (1911)  points  out  that  with  the  exception  of  certain  diagnostic 
skull  characters,  the  osteological  characters  of  the  Hemiodontinae  are  “essen- 
tially similar  to  the  Characidae.”  As  noted  above  (p.  321)  his  “Characidae” 
has  been  redefined  in  part  as  the  Characinae.  Cockerell  (1913)  notes  that 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


345 


Text-figure  24. 

Skulls  of  Sarcodaces,  Hoplias  and  Luciocharax,  lateral  views. 


the  scales  of  the  “Pyrrhulinae,”  which  we  refer  to  the  Characinae,  are  very 
similar  to  those  of  Nannostomus  of  the  subfamily  Hemiodontinae.  On  the 
other  hand  Cockerell  states  that  the  scales  of  Hemiodus,  Anisistsia  (Hemio- 
dontinae), and  Anostomus  (Anostomatinae)  are  of  the  curimatine  type 
(< Curimatus  being  referred  by  us  to  the  Anostomatinae),  while  the  scales 
of  Poecilobrycon  (Hemiodontinae)  and  Nannostomus  (Hemiodontinae)  are 
like  those  of  Leporinus  (Anostomatinae),  indicating  for  the  hemiodontines 
a position  close  to  the  anostomatine  series.  However,  because  of  the 
slight  affinities  of  Pyrrhulina  and  other  members  of  the  Characinae  to 
the  Hemiodontinae  we  consider  the  subfamily  Hemiodontinae  as  a side 


346 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


soe  _P+rn  ,.supcl 

scale  borte 


pf  & pereth 
deth 


qu'  an  X>' 


Erythrinus  unitaenlatus 


Text-figure  25. 

Skull  of  Erythrinus,  lateral  view.  After  Gregory,  1933,  fig.  67. 


Text-figure  26. 

Skulls  of  Erythrinus  (after  Gregory,  1933,  fig.  68)  and  Piabucina,  dorsal  views. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phytogeny  of  the  Cliaracin  Fishes  347 

shoot  of  the  Cheirodon-Curimatus  line.  Parodon  (Hemiodontinae)  with  its 
rather  short  body  seems  to  be  a primitive  forerunner  of  the  elongate,  fusi- 
form Poecilobrycon  (Text-fig.  2).  The  Hemiodontinae  and  Prochilodinae  of 
Regan  both  have  a single  headed  hyomandibular  in  contrast  to  the  double 
headed  condition  seen  in  the  remainder  of  the  family. 

The  subfamily  resemblances  between  the  scales  of  various  genera  as 
observed  by  Cockerell  (1913)  may,  according  to  our  classification,  be  tab- 
ulated as  in  Text-fig.  27. 


CHEIRODONTINAE  SERRASALMONINAE  CHARAC1NAE  HEMIODONTINAE  ANOSTO  MATI NAE 


>*Cheirodon.  < 

^■Pheaacocjaster  « 
l Deuterodon. 

K'  Astqanax 
Hemi^rammus 
\ HijpKessobrijCori; 
'^Pnstella 
MoeakKausia 
Aphuocharax 


kjuanodectes 

Ctenobrqcon. 

CBPLjcoaam.ericiis 
CreatocKaaes 
Gasteropelecus 
Carnegie  lla 
Charax 

Petersius  < 

Chalciaus  < 

Chalceus 
Pqrrhulina 
Alestes 


CHemiodus 
Aaisistsia 


Curimatus 


• Hqdrolqcus 

- Hqdrocqnus 

- Accstrorhqachus 


Nannosfomus 
Poecilobrqcoa 
CKaracidium. 

ERYTHRININAE 
Lebiasiaa 
Erqthriaus 
Hoplias 


Aaostomus^. 
Leporiaus  ^ 


Text-figure  27. 

Resemblances  between  the  scales  of  various  genera  of  characins  as  noted  by 
Cockerell,  1913. 


Anostomatinae. 

The  Anostomatinae,  a rather  compact  group,  are  represented  in  the 
“Pictorial  Classification”  (Text-fig.  2)  by  Anostomus,  Prochilodus,  Chilodus 
and  Curimatus.  The  series  starts  with  Anostomus,  which  possesses  a small, 
non-protractile  mouth  and  has  the  rami  of  the  lower  jaw  short  and  stout. 
Leporinus  is  very  close  to  Anostomus ; it  is  said  by  Cockerell  (1913)  to  have 
curimatoid  shaped  scales  with  a very  definite  alestoid  relationship.  Chilodus 
also  has  scales  of  curimatoid  shape  with  evidence  of  a part  of  the  alestiform 
pattern.  Cockerell  goes  so  far  as  to  state  the  belief  that  this  group  supplies 
the  link  between  Distichodus  and  Alestes  because  their  scales  undoubtedly 
illustrate  the  beginning  of  the  development  which  culminates  in  the  special- 
ized ctenoid  scales  of  the  African  Xenocharax.  In  Prochilodus  we  have  at 
iast  a real  development  of  the  ctenoid  scale,  combined  with  an  alestoid  radial 
pattern.  It  is  apparent  from  scale  studies  that  Prochilodus  leads  us  toward 
a separate  offshoot  of  the  curimatoids,  possibly  to  the  African  distichodonts, 
but  certainly  near  and  parallel  to  them. 

The  curimatoids  proper  are  represented  in  our  “Pictorial  Classification” 
by  Curimatus.  This  toothless  form  constitutes  the  “end-genus”  of  this  line 
of  divergence  from  the  Cheirodontinae. 

As  a whole  the  subfamily  Anostomatinae  is  highly  specialized  and  far 
from  its  original  ancestor,  a generalized  cheirodont.  These  conclusions  con- 


348 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


pfo 

sPh°\ 

Sup-  or 6 

pf+parpfhjt 
cleth 


pcalebone 

- pirn 


■mx ' 


Curimalus 


cerning  the  relationships  of  this  group,  based  largely  upon  scale  structure, 
are  in  accord  with  Eigenmann’s  systematic  studies  (1917). 

The  skulls  of  this  group  that  we  have  been  able  to  study  are  Curimatus 
and  Leporinus  (Text-fig.  28).  A supraorbital  bone  is  present  in  Curimatus 
and  Prochilodus  but  is  absent  in  Leporinus.  The  fontanelle  in  both  Curi- 
matus and  Leporinus  completely  separates  the  frontals  from  the  occiput 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phytogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


349 


Hydrocyon 


to  the  dermethmoid;  the  lacrymal  and  parethmoid  are  well  separated;  the 
supraoccipital  is  produced  posteriorly;  the  maxilla  is  greatly  reduced,  the 
small  nibbling  jaws  retain  strong  teeth  in  Leporinus  but  are  edentulous  in 
Curimatus  and  some  others.  The  lower  border  of  the  operculum  in  Curi- 
matus  is  truncate  postero-inferiorly  as  in  Sarcodaces.  The  opercular  region 
of  the  skull  extends  postero-ventrally  in  Curimatus  but  to  a much  lesser 
degree  in  Leporinus. 

Text-figure  29  shows  the  great  similarity  between  the  occipital  regions 
of  the  skulls  of  the  African  characine,  Hydrocyon,  and  the  South  American 
anostomatine,  Leporinus. 

The  implied  relationship  pn  the  chart  (Text-fig.  1)  between  the  Anos- 
tomatinae  and  the  Citharininae  is  strengthened  by  the  skulls.  It  may  be, 
however,  that  these  resemblances  are  merely  due  to  parallelism  for  both 
subfamilies  reflect  their  cheirodont  ancestry. 

The  ribs  of  Leporinus  and  other  genera,  along  with  those  of  the 
remainder  of  the  Characinidae,  are  articulated  to  the  centrum  by  auto- 
genous parapophyses.  Text-figures  30,  31  give  front  and  side  views  of 
vertebrae  in  the  abdominal  and  caudal  regions.  Text-figure  32  shows  the 
arrangement  of  the  hypurals  in  Leporinus. 


Citharininae. 

Regan  (1911)  refers  the  African  Citharinus  (Text-figs.  2,  3)  and  its 
ally  Citharidium  (Text-fig.  3),  along  with  many  other  African  genera,  to 


350 


Zoologica : New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Text-figure  30. 

A,  C,  side  and  front  views  of  abdominal  vertebra  of  Leporinus,  showing  rib  and 
autogenous  parapophysis.  B,  autogenous  parapophysis  and  rib  of  Brycon; 
D,  with  autogenous  parapophysis  attached  to  centrum  in  Brycon. 


Text-figure  31. 

A,  lateral  view  and  B,  front 
view  of  caudal  vertebra  in 
Leporinus. 


the  family  Citharinidae.  We,  however,  prefer  to  segregate  Citharinus  and 
Citharidium  and  their  near  allies,  N annaethiops , Neolebias,  Xenocharax 
(Text-fig.  3),  Hemistichodus,  in  a more  primitive  subfamily,  Citharininae, 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


351 


Text-figure  32. 

Arrangement  of  hypurals  in  Leporinus. 


characterized  by  the  absence  of  the  high  specializations  of  the  mouth  parts 
seen  in  the  Distichodontinae,  as  here  understood. 

Boulenger  in  the  Cambridge  Natural  History,  places  both  Prochilodus 
(Text-figs.  2,  3),  a definitely  ctenoid  South  American  anostomatine,  and 
Curimatus  (Text-figs.  2,  3)  in  the  Citharininae;  nor  was  this  classification 
wholly  unwarranted,  for  his  conclusions  are  supported  by  other  anatomical 
features,  i.e.,  both  have  movable  upper  jaws,  premaxillaries  articulating  on 
the  mesethmoid,  maxillaries  articulated  with  or  adherent  to  the  premaxil- 
laries, palate  toothless,  lateral  line  straight,  etc. 

Cockerell  (1912)  separates  the  scales  of  the  African  subfamily  Cithar- 
ininae into  the  Citharidium  type  and  the  Citharinus  type,  the  former  with 
ctenoid  and  the  latter  with  cycloid  scales.  It  is  evident  that  Citharinus 
with  the  more  primitive  cycloid  scale  is  the  forerunner  of  the  ctenoid 
Citharidium. 

The  skull  of  Citharinus  compares  rather  well  with  that  of  the  Anos- 
tomatinae,  especially  Prochilodus  or  Curimatus  (Text-fig.  28).  The  simi- 
larity and  extent  of  the  fontanelle  and  the  presence  of  supraorbital  are  note- 
worthy. The  jaws,  too,  are  quite  similar  in  both  subfamilies. 

In  further  support  of  an  early  connection  between  the  Anostomatinae 
and  the  Citharininae,  Rowntree  (1903)  writes  of  an  accessory  branchial 
organ  arising  as  a blind  sac  from  the  upper  margin  of  the  last  gill  cleft; 
this  character  seems  to  be  peculiar  to  the  herbivorous  forms,  Hemiodus 
(Hemiodontinae),  Prochilodus,  Caenotropus,  Curimatus  (Anostomatinae), 
and  Citharinus,  Xenocharax  (Citharininae).  Sagemehl  identified  this  struc- 
ture as  an  organ  arising  from  the  rudimentary  fifth  branchial  arch.  “If  this 
conclusion,”  says  Rowntree,  “be  correct  the  presence  of  the  organ  in  the 
herbivorous  Characinids,  and  in  these  only,  becomes  of  great  interest,  in 
view  of  the  fact  that  traces  of  a fifth  gill  have  not  been  found  in  any  living 
ganoid,  but  only  in  fishes  of  yet  lower  organization — certain  Selachians  and 
Dipnoids.” 

Apparently,  however,  both  Sagemehl  and  Rowntree  failed  to  realize 
that  selachians  and  dipnoans  have  no  connection  with  teleosts  and  that 
the  so-called  fifth  branchial  arch  has  no  definite  claim  to  be  homologized 
with  those  of  selachians  and  dipnoans,  but  is  more  probably  a secondary 
response  to  the  presence  of  an  accessory  branchial  organ. 


352 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Rowntree  then  procedes  to  draw  these  conclusions,  “(1)  that  the  herbi- 
vorous Characinids  which  possess  it  (the  accessory  branchial  organ)  form 
a natural  group;  and  (2)  that  this  division  of  the  family  cannot  be  derived 
from  either  the  Erythrinoids  or  the  other  carnivorous  Characinids,  but  is 
at  least  as  ancient  as  either  of  these  groups.”  His  first  conclusion,  at  least, 
seems  safe  and  serves  as  more  positive  evidence  in  showing  the  inter- 
relationship of  the  anostomine-citharinine  group. 

Distichodontinae. 

Regan’s  subfamilies,  Distichodontinae  and  Ichthyoborinae,  are  closely 
linked  by  the  possession  of  more  or  less  massive  dentaries,  firmly  united  at 
the  symphysis  and  movably  articulated  with  the  articulars. 


Text-figure  33. 

Skull  of  Distichodus.  After  Gregory,  1933,  fig.  71. 


That  these  African  forms  were  derived  from  the  ctenoid  African  Cith- 
arininae  seems  more  likely  than  that  they  came  from  the  ctenoid  South 
American  anostomatines.  Apparently  drift  toward  the  herbivorous  dis- 
tichodonts  took  place  in  or  near  the  stem  of  the  Anostomatinae  and  Cith- 
arininae  (Text-fig.  1). 

Distichodus  (Text-fig.  33)  is  apparently  more  primitive  than  Mesoborus 
(Text-fig.  34),  Ichthyoborus,  or  Phago  (Text-fig.  35).  The  lengthening  of 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


353 


body  and  jaws  in  Ichthyoborus  and  the  development  of  unicuspid  teeth  are 
probably  secondary  conditions  as  contrasted  with  the  primitive  short  jawed, 
deep  bodied  Distichodus.  With  regard  to  the  scales  Cockerell  (1912)  notes 
that  there  is  nothing  to  distinguish  the  scales  of  Ichthyoborus  from  those 
of  Distichodus. 


Text-figure  34. 
Skull  of  Mesoborus. 


Gymnotidae. 

To  judge  from  the  cranial  osteology  the  gymnotids  have  probably  been 
derived  from  some  primitive  member  of  the  Characinae.  The  chief  habitus 
specializations  are: 


354  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :17 

(1)  Marked  forward  inclination  of  the  entire  suspensorium,  primi- 
tively correlated  with  a small  projecting  mouth; 

(2)  Varied  reduction  or  emphasis  of  premaxilla  and  maxilla; 

(3)  Reduction  and  loss  of  true  pterygoid  correlated  with  enlargement 
of  entopterygoid  (mesopterygoid)  and  symplectic; 

(4)  Loss  of  parethmoid  (prefrontal)  and  varied  reduction  of  meseth- 
moid ; 

(5)  Loss  of  suborbital  series  including  lacrymal; 

(6)  Reduction  or  loss  of  postorbital  process  (dermosphenotic)  ; 

(7)  Varied  emphasis  or  reduction  and  loss  of  interfrontal  fontanelle. 

Regan  has  noted  that  the  pectoral  girdle  of  Rhamphichthys  is  much 
less  specialized  than  that  of  the  typical  “Sternarchids.”  This  genus  has  a 
greatly  elongated,  decui’ved  snout  with  a very  small  mouth  and  thus  parallels 
some  of  the  long-snouted  mormyrids. 

A possible  explanation  of  the  peculiar  specializations  of  the  gymnotid 
skull  as  above  noted  may  be  as  follows: 

All  primitive  gymnotids  being  lost,  the  genus  Rhamphichthys,  even 
with  its  “mental  vent,”  may  be  near  the  structural  starting  point  for  the 
remaining  genera.  We  have  only  to  suppose  that  with  the  extreme  elonga- 
tion of  the  snout  the  maxilla  lost  its  normal  connection  with  the  reduced 


doth 


A Eigenmannia  macrops  B Electrophorus  electrlcus 


Text-figure  36. 

Skulls  of  Eigenmannia  and  Electrophorus,  dorsal  views.  After  Gregory,  1933, 
fig.  72. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phytogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


355 


palatine,  retaining  only  its  contact  with  the  premaxilla,  the  latter  resting 
only  upon  the  prolonged  mesethmoid.  As  the  palatine  disappeared  the 
true  pterygoid  became  reduced  and  the  entopterygoid  enlarged.  Meanwhile 
the  entire  suspensorium  was  swinging  far  forward  as  the  mouth  became 


Text-figure  37. 

Skulls  of  Eigenmannia  and  Electrophorus,  lateral  views.  After  Gregory,  1933, 
fig.  73. 


356 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


smaller  and  smaller  at  the  end  of  the  lengthening  edentulous  snout.  In 
the  line  leading  to  Sternarchus  and  Eigenmannia  (Text-figs.  36,  37)  a 
reverse  movement  then  set  in  involving  the  secondary  shortening  of  the 
snout  and  the  secondary  widening  of  the  mouth  which  even  acquired 
secondary  teeth.  The  end-stage  is  Electrophorus  (Text-figs.  36,  37)  in 
which  the  mesethmoid  is  secondarily  enlarged  and  strengthened  and  the 
median  frontal  fontanelle  is  completely  closed  to  support  the  upward  thrusts 
of  the  stout  upper  and  lower  jaws.  Meanwhile  the  maxilla,  having  long 
since  lost  its  primitive  contact  with  the  palatine,  remains  as  a vestigial 
tab  on  the  distal  end  of  the  secondarily  enlarged  premaxilla. 

To  those  who  hold  to  current  interpretations  of  “Irreversibility  of  Evo- 
lution” such  an  explanation  can  only  appear  fantastic.  But  if  we  once  grasp 
the  idea  of  secular  rise  and  recession  of  specializations  the  above  steps  will 
be  seen  to  be  supported  by  strong  morphological  evidence  as  well  as  by 
closely  analogous  series  among  the  long-snouted  mormyrids  Gymnarchus 
and  their  secondarily  short-snouted  relatives,  such  as  Petrocephalus  (Greg- 
ory, 1933,  Figs.  62B,  64). 


The  Characins  and  the  Supposed  South  American-African  Bridge. 

The  unique  distribution  of  the  Characidae  in  Africa  and  South  America 
alone  has  long  engaged  the  attention  of  ichthyologists.  Africa  and  South 
America  each  serve  as  subsidiary  centers  for  adaptive  radiation  of  the 
group,  the  Cheirodontinae,  Serrasalmoninae,  Erythrininae,  Anostomatinae 
and  Hemiodontinae  being  characteristic  of  South  America  while  the  Cith- 
arininae  and  Distichodontinae  are  confined  to  Africa.  The  Characinae  and 
Sarcodacinae,  however,  as  here  understood,  have  representatives  in  both 
continents  and  the  resemblances  between  certain  African  and  South  Ameri- 
can forms  are  so  striking  (Text-figs.  9,  10,  11,  12,  22,  23,  24,  29)  as  to 
leave  a strong  impression  of  close  relationship. 

Accordingly,  the  preceeding  study  leads  us  to  the  following  tentative 
conclusions: 

(1)  that  the  African  and  South  American  characins  are  closely 
related ; 

(2)  that  so  far  as  known  characins  are  wholly  absent  from  ancient 
freshwater  deposits  of  North  America; 

(3)  that  there  is  much  evidence  analyzed  by  C.  W.  Andrews,  Schuchert 
and  others  for  the  reality  of  a narrow  isthmian  land  or  archi- 
pelago connecting  Brazil  with  West  Africa  even  in  possibly  late 
Tertiary  times. 

Dr.  Bequaert,  however,  in  the  light  of  his  wide  knowledge  of  the 
faunae  and  florae  of  South  America  and  Africa,  tells  us  that  neither  the 
botanists  nor  the  entomologists  would  favor  the  assumption  of  an  extreme 
or  prolonged  contact  between  the  two  continents  in  Tertiary  times  on 
account  of  the  large  number  of  endemic  families  on  either  side  of  the 
Atlantic. 


Bibliography. 

Andrews,  C.  W. 

1906.  A descriptive  catalogue  of  the  Tertiary  Vertebrata  of  the  Fayum, 
Egypt.  Printed  by  order  of  the  Trustees  of  the  British  Museum. 
London. 

Borodin,  N.  A. 

1929.  Notes  on  some  species  and  subspecies  of  the  genus  Leporinus  Spix. 
Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  vol.  50.  no.  3. 


1938]  Gregory  & Conrad:  Phylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


357 


1931.  On  the  genus  Anostomus  (Family  Characinidae).  Bull.  Mus.  Comp. 
Zool.,  vol.  72,  no.  2,  pp.  37-52. 

Boulenger,  G.  A. 

1909.  Catalogue  of  the  fresh-water  fishes  of  Africa  in  the  British  Museum. 
Vol.  I.  London. 

1910.  Fishes  (systematic  account  of  Teleostei).  In  the  Cambridge  Natural 
History.  London. 

Bridge,  T.  W.  and  Haddon,  A.  C. 

1893.  Contributions  to  the  anatomy  of  fishes.  II.  The  air-bladder  and 
Weberian  ossicles  in  the  siluroid  fishes.  Philo.  Trans.  Royal  Soc. 
London,  vol.  184  (1893),  B,  pp.  65-333. 

Bruhl,  C.  B. 

1847.  Anfangsgrunde  der  vergleichenden  Anatomie  aller  Thierklassen. 
Erster  Abschnitt,  Die  Skeletlehre  der  Fische,  Lief.  1-3.  Wien.  IV, 
254  pp.,  19  pis.  4to  and  obi.  folio. 

de  Castelnau,  Francis 

1855.  Expedition  dans  les  parties  centrales  l’Amerique  du  Sud,  de  Rio  de 
Janeiro  a Lima,  et  de  Lima  au  Para:  executee  par  ordre  du  gouverne- 
ment  frangaise  pendant  les  annees  1843  a 1847  sous  la  direction  du 
comte  Francis  de  Castelnau.  Zoologie.  Poissons.  Paris. 

Cockerell,  T.  D.  A. 

1912.  Scales  of  African  characinid  fishes.  Smith.  Misc.  Coll.,  vol.  56,  pp. 
1-10,  2 pis. 

1913.  The  scales  of  the  South  American  characinid  fishes.  Ann.  Carnegie 
Mus.,  vol.  9,  1913-15,  pp.  92-113. 

Cope,  E.  D. 

1878.  Synopsis  of  the  fishes  of  the  Peruvian  Amazon  obtained  by  Professor 
Orton  during  his  expeditions  of  1873  and  1877.  Proc.  Amer.  Philo. 
Soc.,  vol.  17,  pp.  673-701. 

Eastman,  C.  R. 

1904.  On  the  dentition  of  Rhynchodus  and  other  fossil  fishes.  Amer.  Natural- 
ist, vol.  38,  no.  448,  pp.  295-299. 

1917.  Dentition  of  Hydrocyon  and  its  supposed  fossil  allies.  Bull.  Amer. 
Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  vol.  37,  art.  26,  pp.  757-760. 

Eigenmann,  C.  H. 

1905.  Divergence  and  convergence  in  fishes.  Bio.  Bull.  Woods  Hole,  vol.  8, 
no.  2,  pp.  59-66. 

1906.  The  freshwater  fishes  of  South  and  Middle  America.  Popular  Science 
Monthly,  June. 

1907.  Fowler’s  “Heterognathous  Fishes”  with  a note  on  the  Stethaprioninae. 
Amer.  Naturalist,  vol.  41,  no.  492,  pp.  767-772. 

1912.  The  freshwater  fishes  of  British  Guiana,  including  a study  of  the 
ecological  grouping  of  species,  and  the  relation  of  the  fauna  of  the 
plateau  to  that  of  the  lowlands.  Mem.  Carnegie  Mus.,  vol.  5,  pp.  1-554. 

1914.  Some  results  from  the  studies  of  South  American  fishes.  Indiana  Univ. 
Bull.,  vol.  12,  no.  1,  pp.  20-48. 

1915.  The  Serrasalminae  and  Mylinae.  Ann.  Carnegie  Mus.,  vol.  9,  pp.  226- 
272. 

1916.  The  Cheirodontinae,  a sub-family  of  minute  characid  fishes  of  South 
America.  Mem.  Carnegie  Mus.,  vol.  7,  no.  1,  pp.  1-100. 

1917-27.  The  American  Characidae.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  vol.  43,  pt.  1, 
1917;  pt.  2,  1918;  pt.  3,  1921;  pt.  4,  1927. 

1921.  Nature  and  origin  of  the  fishes  of  the  Pacific  slope  of  Ecuador,  Peru 
and  Chile.  Proc.  Amer.  Philo.  Soc.,  vol.  60,  pp.  503-523. 

1927.  Fresh-water  fishes  of  Chile.  Mem.  Nat.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  22,  2nd. 
memoir. 


358 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :17 


Eigenmann,  C.  H.  and  Eigenmann,  R.  S. 

1889.  A revision  of  the  edentulous  genera  of  Curimatinae.  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad. 
Sci.,  vol.  4,  1887-89,  pp.  409-440. 

1891.  A catalogue  of  the  fresh-water  fishes  of  South  America.  Proc.  U.  S. 
Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  14,  pp.  1-81. 

Eigenmann,  C.  H.  and  Myers,  G.  S. 

1929.  The  American  Characidae.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  vol.  43,  pt.  5. 

Fowler,  H.  W. 

1906.  Further  knowledge  of  some  heterognathous  fishes.  Parts  I and  II. 
Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.,  vol.  58,  pp.  293-351;  431-483. 

1930.  The  fresh-water  fishes  obtained  by  the  Gray  African  Expedition-1929. 
With  notes  on  other  species  in  the  Academy  collection.  Proc.  Acad. 
Nat.  Sci.,  vol.  82,  pp.  27-83. 

Gill,  T. 

1896.  1.  The  differential  characters  of  characinoid  and  erythrinoid  fishes. 

Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  18,  pp.  205-209. 

1896.  2.  Note  on  the  fishes  of  the  genus  Characinus.  Proc.  U.  S.  National 
Mus.,  vol.  18,  pp.  213-215. 

1896.  3.  Notes  on  characinoid  fishes  with  ctenoid  scales,  with  a description 
of  a new  Psectrogaster.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  18,  pp.  199-203. 
1896.  4.  The  nomenclature  of  the  fishes  of  the  characinoid  genus  Tetrag- 
onopterus.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  vol.  18,  pp.  225-227. 

Gregory,  William  K. 

1933.  Fish  skulls:  a study  of  the  evolution  of  natural  mechanisms.  Trans. 
Amer.  Philo.  Soc.,  (N.  S.)  vol.  23,  no.  2,  pp.  75-481. 

Gregory,  W.  K.  and  Conrad,  G.  M. 

1936.  The  structure  and  development  of  the  complex  symphysial  hinge-joint 
in  the  mandible  of  Hydrocyon  lineatus  Bleeker,  a characin  fish.  Proc. 
Zool.  Soc.  London,  1936,  pt.  4,  pp.  975-984. 

Gunther,  A. 

1864.  Catalogue  of  the  fishes  of  the  British  Museum.  Vol.  V.  Physostomi. 
London. 

Haseman,  J.  D. 

1911.  Some  new  species  of  fishes  from  the  Rio  Iguassu.  Ann.  Carnegie  Mus., 
vol.  7,  nos.  3,  4,  pp.  374-387. 

1912.  Some  factors  of  geographical  distribution  in  South  America.  Ann. 
N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  22,  pp.  9-112. 

Jordan,  D.  S. 

1923.  A classification  of  fishes,  including  families  and  genera  as  far  as 
known.  Stanford  Univ.  Pub.,  Biological  Sci.,  vol.  3,  no.  2. 

Matthew,  W.  D. 

1915.  Climate  and  evolution.  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  vol.  24,  pp.  171-318. 
Muller,  J.  and  Troschel,  F.  H. 

1845.  Horae  ichthyologicae.  Beschreibung  und  Abbildung  neuer  Fische;  die 
Familie  Characinen.  3 pts.  in  2 vols.  Berlin. 

Myers,  G.  S. 

1929.  1.  Cranial  differences  in  the  African  characin  fishes  of  the  genera 
Alestes  and  Brycinus,  with  notes  on  the  arrangement  of  related  genera. 
Amer.  Mus.  Novitates,  no.  342. 

1929.  2.  On  curimatid  characin  fishes  having  an  incomplete  lateral  line,  with 
a note  on  the  peculiar  sexual  dimorphism  of  Curimatopsis  macrolepis. 
Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  10,  vol.  3,  p.  618. 


1938] 


Gregory  & Conrad:  Pliylogeny  of  the  Characin  Fishes 


359 


Nichols,  J.  T. 

1930.  Speculation  on  the  history  of  the  Ostariophysi.  Copeia,  no.  4,  pp. 
148-151. 

Nichols,  J.  T.  and  Griscom,  L. 

1917.  Fresh-water  fishes  of  the  Congo  Basin  obtained  by  the  American 
Museum  Congo  Expedition,  1909-1915.  Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist., 
vol.  37,  art.  25,  pp.  653-756. 

Norman,  J.  R. 

1928.  The  South  American  characid  fishes  of  the  subfamily  Serrasalmoninae, 
with  a revision  of  the  genus  Serrasalmus  Lacepede.  Proc.  Zool.  Soc. 
London,  pt.  4,  1928. 

Pearson,  N.  E. 

1924.  Fishes  of  the  eastern  slope  of  the  Andes.  1.  The  fishes  of  the  Rio 
Beni  Basin,  Bolivia  collected  by  the  Mulford  Expedition.  Indiana  Univ. 
Studies,  vol.  11,  no.  64. 

Regan,  C.  T. 

1911.  The  classification  of  the  teleostean  fishes  of  the  order  Ostariophysi. 
1.  Cyprinoidea.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  8,  vol.  8,  pp.  13-32. 

Rowntree,  W.  S. 

1903.  On  some  points  in  the  visceral  anatomy  of  the  Characinidae,  with  an 
enquiry  into  the  relations  of  the  ductus  pneumaticus  in  the  Physostomi 
generally.  Trans.  Linn.  Soc.  London,  2 ser.,  vol.  9,  pp.  47-81. 

1906.  On  the  dentition  of  the  characinoid  genus  Piabuca;  a new  generic 
character.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  7,  vol.  17,  pp.  240-243. 

Sagemehl,  M. 

1885.  Beitrage  zur  vergleichenden  Anatomie  der  Fische.  III.  Das  cranium  der 
Characiniden  nebst  allgemeinen  Bemerkungen  uber  die  mit  einem 
Weber’schen  Apparat  versehenen  Physostomenfamilien.  Morphol. 
Jahrb.,  vol.  10,  pp.  1-119. 

Schuchert,  C. 

1932.  Gondwana  Land  bridges.  Bull.  Geol.  Soc.  Ayner.,  vol.  43,  pp.  875-915. 
Spix,  J.  B.  von  and  Agassiz,  L. 

1829-31.  Selecta  genera  et  species  piscium  quos  in  itinere  per  Brasiliam  annis 
1817-20  . . . peracto  'collegit  et  pingendos  curavit  Dr.  J.  B.  de  Spix 
. . . digressit,  descripsit  et  observationibus  anatomicis  illustravit  Dr.  L. 
Agassiz,  praefatus  est  et  edidit  itineris  socius  Dr.  C.  F.  Ph.  de 
Martius  (Memoriae  J.  B.  de  Spix).  Monachii.  xvi,  138  pp.,  and  atlas 
of  101  pis. 


Abbreviations  Used  in  the  Illustrations. 


“adn” — adnasal 
“alsp” — alisphenoid 
ang — angular 
art — articular 
boc — basioccipital 
brstg — branchiostegal 
cerhy — ceratohyal 
cl,  clt — cleithrum 
cor — hypocoracoid 
cran — cranial 
Deth — dermethmoid 
dn — dentary 

dsph,  dsphot — dermosphenotic 
entp — entopterygoid 
epiot — epiotic 


exo — exoccipital 
f,  for — foramen 
fr — frontal 
hyo — hyomandibular 
iop — interopercular 
ju — jugal 
la — lacrymal 
m — mesocoracoid 
mtp — metapterygoid 
mx — maxilla 
na — nasal 

op,  operc — opercular 
opisthot,  opot — opisthotic 
orbsp — orbitosphenoid 
pa — parietal 


360 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


pareth — parethmoid 

pas — parasphenoid 

pelt,  pci — postcleithrum 

pf — prefrontal 

pi — palatine 

pmx — premaxilla 

pop,  preoperc — preopercular 

ptm — posttemporal 

pto — pterotic 

ptr — pterygoid 

qu — quadrate 

sc,  scap — hypercoracoid  (scapula) 


so — suborbital 

soc — supraoccipital 

sop — subopercular 

sphot — sphenotic 

supcl,  supclt — supracleithrum 

sup.  op. — supraopercular 

sup.  orb — supraorbital 

sym — symplectic 

tab — tabular 

v — vertebra 

vo — vomer 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


361 


18« 

Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the 
New  York  Zoological  Society.  XVE 

Holothurians  from  the  Western  Coasts  of  Lower  California  and 
Central  America,  and  from  the  Galapagos  Islands.1 

Elisabeth  Deichmann 

Assistant  Curator  of  Invertebrates,  Museum  of  Comparative 
Zoology,  Cambridge,  Massachusetts. 

(Text-figures  1-15). 

[This  is  the  Sixteenth  of  a series  of  papers  dealing  with  the  collections 
of  the  Eastern  Pacific  Expeditions  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society  made 
under  the  direction  of  William  Beebe.  The  present  paper  is  concerned  with 
specimens  taken  on  the  Eastern  Pacific  Zaca  (1937-1938)  and  the  Arcturus 
Oceanographic  (1925)  Expeditions.  For  data  on  localities,  dates,  dredges, 
etc.,  of  these  expeditions,  refer  to  Zoologica,  Vol.  VIII,  No.  1,  pp.  1-45 
( Arcturus ) and  Zoologica,  Vol.  XXIII,  No.  14,  pp.  287-298  (Eastern  Pacific 
Zaca ) .] 

Contents. 

Page 

Introduction  362 

Order  Aspidochirota 

Family  Stichopodidae 

Genus  Parastichopus  H.  L.  Clark 

Parastichopus  calif ornicus  (Stimpson)  362 

Parastichopus  parvimensis  (H.  L.  Clark) 362 

Genus  Stichopus 

Stichopus  fuscus  Ludwig  363 

Family  Holothuriidae 

Genus  Labidodemas  Selenka 

Labidodemas  americanum  sp.  nov 363 

Genus  Holothuria  Linnaeus 

Holothuria  arenicola  Semper 364 

Holothuria  impatiens  (Forskal)  365 

Holothuria  inhabilis  Selenka  365 

Holothuria  inornata  Semper  365 

Holothuria  languens  Selenka  367 

Holothuria  lubrica  Selenka  368 

Holothuria  marenzelleri  Ludwig  var.  theeli  var.  nov 369 

Holothuria  gyrifer  (Selenka)  371 

Holothuria  pardalis  Selenka  372 

Order  Dendrochirota 
Family  Cucumariidae 

Genus  Cucumaria  Blainville 

Cucumaria  calif ornica  Semper  372 

Genus  Pentamera  Ayres 

Pentamera  beebei  sp.  nov 374 

Pentamera  chierchia  (Ludwig)  374 

Pentamera  zacae  sp.  nov 375 


l Contribution  No.  564,  Department  of  Tropical  Research,  New  York  Zoological  Society. 


362 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


Genus  Thyone  Oken 

Tliyone  benti  Deichmann  var.  zacae  var.  nov 376 

Thyone  gibber  (Selenka)  376 

Family  Phyllophoridae 

Genus  Euthyonidium  gen.  nov. 

Euthyonidium  ovulum  (Selenka)  380 

Genus  Phyllophorus  Grube 

Phyllophorus  zacae  sp.  nov 381 

Family  Psolidae 

Genus  Thyonepsolus  H.  L.  Clark 

Thyonepsolus  beebei  Deichmann  382 


Order  Molpadonia 

Family  Caudinidae 

Genus  Paracaudina 


Paracaudina  chilensis  (J.  Muller)  383 

Bibliography  384 


Introduction. 

The  holothurians  brought  back  by  the  Eastern  Pacific  Zaca  Expedition 
of  1937-1938  are  of  even  greater  interest  than  those  secured  in  1936.2 
Twenty  different  species  were  collected  and  only  five  are  identical  with  those 
brought  back  in  1936  (two  of  these  were  then  described  as  new).  Of  the 
remaining  fifteen  species  four  are  new,  while  three  are  reported  for  the 
first  time  since  the  types  were  described.  Only  eight  may  be  designated  as 
common  and  even  here  the  material  in  hand  has  in  two  cases  given  very 
valuable  additional  information  and  helped  to  straighten  out  some  moot 
questions. 

A few  shore  species  from  the  Galapagos  Islands  (secured  by  the  Arc- 
turus  Oceanographic  Expedition  in  1925)  have  been  included,  thereby  bring- 
ing the  total  number  of  species  discussed  up  to  twenty-three.  Some  of  the 
species  in  the  Arcturus  collection  were  also  taken  by  the  Zaca. 

I beg  Dr.  William  Beebe  to  accept  my  sincere  thanks  for  the  oppor- 
tunity of  studying  this  interesting  collection. 

Order  Aspidochirota. 

Family  Stichopodidae. 

Genus  Parastichopus  H.  L.  Clark,  1922. 

Parastichopus  Californians  (Stimpson). 

For  diagnosis,  synonyms,  etc.,  see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  163. 

Local  Range:  Two  large  specimens  from  Cedros  Island,  40  fathoms, 
(Station  126  D-17). 

Parastichopus  parvimensis  (H.  L.  Clark). 

Stichopus  parvimensis  H.  L.  Clark,  1913,  p.  234;  1922,  p.  70,  pi.  1,  figs. 

13-14;  G.  H.  Parker,  1921,  p.  205. 

Parastichopus  parvimensis,  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  163  (passim). 

Diagnosis:  Resembles  P.  calif ornicus  but  is  normally  dark  brown  with 
black  tips  to  the  papillae.  Spicules  minute  tables  (disk  up  to  0.05  mm.)  and 
small  buttons  (length  0.08  mm.).  Shallow  water  form. 

Type:  U.S.N.M. 

Type  Locality:  Cedros  Island,  west  coast  of  Lower  California,  3.5  feet. 

General  Distribution:  From  San  Pedro  to  Cedros  Island,  in  shallow 
water. 


2 See  Deichmann,  1937. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


363 


Local  Range : One  much  contracted  specimen  from  Cedros  Island,  20 
fathoms,  (Station  126  D-18) . 

Remarks : The  specimen  agrees  in  every  respect  with  various  individu- 
als from  Corona  del  Mar,  California. 


Genus  Stichopus  Brandt,  1835. 

Stichopus  fsfscMS  Ludwig. 

For  diagnosis,  synonyms,  etc.,  see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  163. 

Local  Range : Two  large,  well  expanded  specimens  from  Hood  Island, 
Galapagos,  15  feet  depth  ( Arcturus  Oceanographic  Expedition). 

Remarks : The  first  record  of  this  characteristic  form  from  the  Gala- 
pagos. Previously  it  had  been  reported  from  Ecuador  (Ludwig). 


Family  Holothuriidae. 

Genus  Labidodemas  Selenka,  1867. 

Labidodemas  Selenka,  1867,  p.  309;  Sluiter,  1901,  p.  21;  Fisher,  1907, 
p.  674. 

Diagnosis:  Medium  sized  forms  with  20  small  tentacles,  terminally 
placed;  anus  subterminal.  Feet  few,  arranged  in  three  double  rows  ventrally 
and  in  two  single  to  double  rows  on  the  dorsal  side ; either  all  the_  feet  are 
cylindrical  or  the  dorsal  ones  are  more  papilliform.  Skin  thin,  soft.  Inner 
anatomy  as  in  a typical  Holothuria.  Spicules  form  a more  or  less  scattered 
layer  of  tables  with  spire  of  various  degrees  of  development;  besides  also  a 
few  plates  or  buttons  with  large  holes;  C-shaped  spicules  said  to  be  present 
in  some  cases.  In  one  species  the  spicules  seem  to  be  completely  reduced. 
Shallow  water. 

Type  Species : Labidodemas  semperianum  Selenka. 

Remarks:  Three  or  four  species  were  hitherto  described,  ranging  from 
the  East  Indies  to  Hawaii;  [the  latter  locality  represents  supposedly  the 
type  locality  for  L.  semperianum,  but  the  label  in  the  M.C.Z.  says  Society 
Islands.]  According  to  Sluiter  (1901,  p.  21)  three  of  the  species  are  identi- 
cal (see  Fisher,  1907,  p.  675),  while  the  fourth  species  lacks  spicules. 

The  species  described  below  differs  so  markedly  from  the  other  species 
known  that  it  cannot  be  considered  a variety  of  any  of  these. 

Labidodemas  amerieanum  sp.  nov. 

Diagnosis:  Ventral  feet  cylindrical,  in  double  rows;  dorsal  feet  papilli- 
form, in  two  scattered  rows.  Spicules  delicate  tables  with  four  central  holes 
and  a circle  of  marginal  holes.  Spire  low,  mostly  incomplete  or  reduced  to 
four  knobs.  Ventral  feet  with  large  end  plate  and  plates  with  four  to  five 
holes,  possibly  reduced  tables.  Dorsal  papillae  with  no  end  plate  but  the 
same  kind  of  plates  as  the  ventral  feet.  Skin  soft,  golden  brown  in  color  to 
greenish,  appendages  mostly  dark  brown. 

Type:  M.C.Z. 

Type  Locality:  Jasper  Island,  Costa  Rica. 

General  Distribution:  Probably  widespread  in  the  Panamic  region. 

Local  Range:  Two  contracted  specimens  from  Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica. 

Remarks:  The  material  has  been  compared  with  the  type  material  of 
L.  semperianum  from  Hawaii,  (or  Society  Islands)  in  the  M.C.Z.  The  latter 


364  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :18 


Text-figure  1. 

Labidodemas  americanum  sp.  nov.  1-3,  Tables  with  reduced  spire  from  skin.  4-5, 
Buttons  in  wall  of  feet,  probably  derived  from  tables.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


species  has  much  stouter  spicules  with  long  spines  on  the  top  of  the  spire,  so 
it  is  out  of  question  that  the  present  species  is  identical  with  Selenka’s 
species  as  one  would  be  inclined  to  expect. 

The  specimens  are  small  (5-6  cm.  long)  and  not  well  suited  for  anatomi- 
cal studies.  The  radials  are  large  squarish  while  the  interradials  are  low; 
both  are  thin  and  delicate  in  structure.  The  Polian  vesicle  is  small  and 
ventrally  placed;  the  single  stone  canal  is  embedded  in  the  dorsal  mesentery, 
its  flattened  head  projecting  free  to  the  right.  The  intestine  is  partly  torn 
and  filled  with  coarse  coral  debris.  No  traces  of  gonads  are  present  in  the 
types. 


Genus  Holothuria  Linnaeus. 

Holothuria  arenicola  Semper. 

Holothuria  arenicola  Semper,  1868,  p.  81,  pi.  20,  pi.  30,  fig.  13,  pi.  35, 
fig.  4;  Theel,  1886a,  p.  7;  Fisher,  1907,  p.  662;  Deichmann,  1930, 
p.  66,  pi.  4,  figs.  1-9;  1937,  p.  165  (passim);  Panning,  1935,  IV, 
p.  88,  text-figure  73. 

Holothuria  maculata  Ludwig,  1887,  p.  2. 

Nec  Holothuria  maculata  Ludwig,  1894,  p.  1 (=  H.  inhabilis  Selenka; 
see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  165). 

Diagnosis:  Slender  tapering  form  (up  to  20  cm.  long)  ; mouth  almost 
terminal  with  20  small  tentacles;  anus  terminal.  Feet  cylindical,  in  scat- 
tered bands  almost  equally  numerous  ventrally  and  dorsally  and  only  very 
slightly  smaller  on  the  dorsum.  Calcareous  ring  low;  ring  canal  unusually 
far  behind  the  calcareous  ring  (1-2  cm.)  ; normally  one  small  stone  canal 
attached  to  the  mesentery;  one  or  two  Polian  vesicles.  Cuvieran  organs 
present  but  seem  normally  to  be  small;  gonads  numerous  tubes  in  a tuft 
behind  the  vascular  ring. 

Spicule  tables  with  4-8  marginal  holes  and  a low  four-pillared  spire 
with  8-12  spines  on  top.  Buttons  smooth,  regular,  usually  with  6 holes  often 
decreasing  in  size  with  advancing  age;  few  buttons  present  in  young  indi- 
viduals. Feet  with  end  plate  and  straight  supporting  rods  with  perforated 
ends  and  often  holes  along  the  middle  sometimes  developed  as  regular  large 
buttons  with  numerous  holes. 

Color  mottled  gray,  with  either  two  rows  of  dark  spots  on  the  dorsum 
or  irregularly  spotted. 

Type : Possibly  in  Germany. 

Type  Locality:  Bohol,  Philippines. 

General  Distribution:  Almost  circumtropical.  Common  in  the  West 
Indies  and  Hawaii,  in  shallow  water  often  buried  in  sand. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


365 


Local  Range : Two  small  specimens  from  Tangola-Tangola  Bay,  Mexico, 
in  coral  (Station  196  D-15)  ; one  small  specimen  from  Ballena  Bay,  Costa 
Rica  ( Zaca  1938)  ; one  from  Gardner  Bay,  Hood  Island,  Galapagos  ( Arctu - 
rus,  1925). 

Remarks : This  widespread  species  was  recorded  from  the  Galapagos  by 
Theel,  1886a,  and  from  Panama  by  Ludwig  in  18873.  Later  Ludwig  mistook 
H.  inhabilis  from  off  Cocos  Island,  66  fathoms,  for  this  common  species. 
It  has  been  reported  by  most  collectors  working  in  the  Panamic  waters. 

Holothuria  impatiens  (Forskal). 

Fistularia  impatiens  Forskal,  1775,  p.  121,  pi.  39,  fig.  B. 

Holothuria  impatiens  Theel,  1886a,  p.  7;  Fisher,  1907,  p.  667;  Pan- 
ning 1935,  IV,  p.  86,  text-fig.  72  (complete  list  of  references)  ; 
Deichmann,  1930,  p.  64,  pi.  3,  figs.  17-18. 

Diagnosis : Medium  sized  form  (10-15  cm.  long),  slender,  often  dis- 
tinctly bottle-shaped  with  long  narrow  “neck.”  Tentacles  20,  small,  mouth 
and  anus  both  terminal.  Feet  cylindrical,  slightly  more  papilliform  on  the 
dorsal  side,  scattered  over  the  entire  body  without  any  apparent  order, 
often  placed  distinctly  on  warts.  Calcareous  ring  low;  stone  canal  free; 
Polian  vesicles  usually  2-4;  Cuvieran  organs  unusually  thick  tubes;  gonads 
placed  in  anterior  part  of  body. 

Spicules  regular  tables  with  8 large  marginal  holes;  spire  with  one  or 
two  cross  beams  and  numerous  short  spines  on  the  top.  Buttons  smooth 
oval  with  6 large  holes.  Feet  with  end  plate,  often  reduced  in  the  dorsal 
appendages'  and  numerous  slightly  curved  supporting  rods,  heavy,  with  few 
holes  in  the  ends  and  on  each  side  of  the  middle,  occasionally  developed  as 
complete  buttons.  Color  mottled,  gray,  skin  decidedly  sandy  to  the  touch. 

Type : Lost. 

Type  Locality:  Red  Sea. 

General  Distribution:  Almost  circumtropical.  Common  in  the  West 
Indies  and  in  Hawaii;  shallow  water  to  few  fathoms  depth. 

Local  Range:  Five  small  individuals  from  Situatanejo,  Mexico;  6 from 
Station  195  D-15;  two  fragments  from  Galapagos  ( Arcturus  1925). 

Remarks:  This  common  species  was  reported  from  the  Galapagos  in 
1886,  by  Theel;  from  Lower  California  in  1913  by  H.  L.  Clark. 

Holothuria  inhabilis  Selenka. 

For  diagnosis,  etc.,  see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  164. 

Local  Distribution:  Three  large  specimens  from  Corinto,  Nicaragua, 
2 and  1 fathoms  (Station  200  D-5  and  D-15). 

Remarks:  The  specimens  agree  with  those  previously  reported  from 
Lower  California,  Cocos  Island  and  Clarion  Island.  The  depth  is  excep- 
tionally low  but  very  likely  the  larger  individuals  migrate  shorewards  as  is 
known  to  be  the  case  in  other  species. 

Holothuria  inornata  Semper. 

Holothuria  inornata  Semper,  1868,  p.  252,  pi.  40,  fig.  1 ; Panning,  1934, 
II,  p.  33,  text-fig.  28  (reproduction  of  Semper’s  figure). 

Diagnosis : Large  form  (20  cm.  or  more)  with  thick  skin ; 20  large  ten- 
tacles; mouth  ventrally  directed;  anus  terminal;  ventral  feet  numerous, 


3 Deichmann  (1937)  erroneously  writes  “1875”  instead  of  “1887.” 


366 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


cylindrical,  forming  a crowded  sole;  dorsal  appendages  mostly  papillae, 
many  arranged  on  more  or  less  distinct  warts.  Inner  anatomy  not  remark- 
able except  for  a cluster  of  5-6  free  stone  canals;  Cuvieran  organs  present. 

Spicules  a thinly  scattered  layer  of  tables;  dorsally  they  are  large  with 
mostly  complete  disk  consisting  of  four  central  holes  and  four  marginal 
ones  and  with  about  12  marginal  spines;  ventrally  most  of  the  tables  are 
smaller  with  disk  completely  reduced;  spire  with  four  pillars,  usually  one 
cross  beam  and  ending  in  four  upright  and  8 vertical  spines.  Feet  with 
end  plate  and  no  supporting  rods  or  plates  except  a number  of  perforated 
plates  close  to  the  end  plate;  dorsal  appendages  with  a vestigial  end  plate 
and  numerous  supporting  rods,  straight  or  curved,  smooth  with  perforated 
ends.  Color  almost  black  with  a reddish  tinge. 

Type : Hamburg. 

Type  Locality : Mazatlan,  Mexico. 

General  Range : Probably  the  entire  Panamic  region.  Shallow  water. 

Local  Range:  Two  small  specimens  from  Ballena  Bay,  Costa  Rica,  shore; 
one  small  from  Corinto,  Nicaragua;  two  large  from  Galapagos  ( Arcturus , 
1925). 


Text-figure  2. 

Holothuria  inornata  Semper.  1-5,  Tables  of  various  development  from  skin  and 
dorsal  appendages.  6-7,  Typically  reduced  tables  from  ventral  appendages. 

8,  Supporting  plate  from  near  end  plate  in  ventral  apendages.  9,  Straight 
supporting  rod  from  dorsal  appendage.  Scale  1/100  mm. 

Remarks : The  species  has  not  been  reported  since  the  original  type 
specimens  were  secured.  The  general  exterior  of  the  animal  is  slightly  sug- 
gestive of  H.  grisea  Selenka  from  the  West  Indies,  and  the  coasts  of  Brazil 
and  West  Africa,  but  it  is  much  larger  and  more  darkly  colored  and  has 
numerous  stone  canals. 

Although  it  is  not  impossible  that  H.  atra  occurs  in  the  Galapagos 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


367 


Islands  and  Clipperton  Island  (see  Panning,  chart,  p.  29)  it  is  very  likely 
that  the  two  records  actually  refer  to  this  species. 

Holothuria  Ianguens  Selenka. 

Holothuria  Ianguens  Selenka,  1867,  p.  335,  pi.  19,  figs.  80-81;  H.  L. 

Clark,  1920,  p.  149;  Panning,  1934,  II,  p.  45,  text-fig.  37. 

Holothuria  imitans  Theel,  1886a,  p.  7. 

Diagnosis : Slender  form  (rarely  more  than  10  cm.  long);  tentacles 
small,  mouth  and  anus  terminal;  feet  ventrally  cylindrical,  dorsally  papilli- 
form, in  indistinct  longitudinal  rows,  scattered.  Inner  anatomy  not  remark- 
able. Cuvieran  organs  apparently  lacking. 

Spicules  a crowded  layer  of  tables  with  reduced  disk,  except  in  very 
young  individuals  (3  cm.  long)  where  it  is  circular  with  smooth  edge;  spire 
tall  with  normally  one  cross  beam  and  ending  in  a Maltese  cross  of  8 flat 
spines;  in  the  juvenile  tables  the  spire  is  more  tapering,  often  with  two 
cross  beams  and  insignificant  teeth.  Feet  with  end  plate  and  curved  sup- 
porting rods,  either  smooth  with  perforated  ends  or  with  lateral  projections 
which  ultimately  may  become  united  so  they  form  a series  of  holes  along 
the  sides.  Dorsal  papillae  lack  end  plate  but  are  filled  with  curved  support- 
ing rods  with  spinous  or  perforated  ends. 

Color  mottled  reddish-brown,  lighter  below;  tentacles  yellow.  Skin 
slightly  sandy  to  the  touch. 

Type:  In  Germany;  paratype  in  M.C.Z. 

Type  Locality : Panama. 

General  Distribution:  Probably  the  entire  Panamic  region,  including 
Galapagos.  Shallow  water. 

Local  Range:  One  specimen  from  Santa  Cruz  Bay,  Mexico,  4 and  15 
fathoms  (Station  195  D-14  and  D-15)  ; one  from  Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica  (Station  213  L-3)  ; two  from  Galapagos  ( Arcturus , 
1925). 


Text-figure  3. 

Holothuria  Ianguens  Selenka.  1-2,  Juvenile  table,  disk  and  lateral  view,  from 
small  specimen  from  the  Galapagos  Islands.  3-5,  Normal  reduced  tables, 
lateral  view  from  adult  specimens.  6,  Straight  supporting  rod  from 
dorsal  appendage.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


368 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


Remarks:  The  species  differs  from  the  common  West  Indian  form, 
H.  surinamensis  Ludwig,  in  its  smaller  size,  its  total  lack  of  large  flat  rods 
scattered  in  the  skin,  and  in  the  flat  undivided  spines  on  the  top  of  the 
spire.4  It  differs  from  the  Indo-Pacific  form,  H.  imitans  Ludwig  from 
the  Navigator  Islands,  in  the  more  delicate  tables  with  smooth  margin  to 
the  disk,  which  is  preserved  only  in  very  young  individuals,  while  Ii.  imitans 
apparently  retains  the  disk  on  most  of  its  tables. 

H.  languens  was  described  from  Panama,  and  as  far  as  known  it  is 
restricted  to  that  region.  Semper  referred  (1868,  p.  87)  an  incomplete 
specimen  from  British  Guiana  to  H.  languens,  as  it  seemed  to  resemble 
Selenka’s  species.  Undoubtedly  he  was  dealing  with  Ludwig’s  H.  surina- 
mensis, described  a few  years  later  from  Dutch  Guiana  (Surinam) — a 
species  which  never  has  been  reported  from  outside  of  the  West  Indies. 
Sluiter’s  record  (1910,  p.  331)  of  H.  languens,  from  St.  Thomas,  W.  I.,  also 
undoubtedly  refers  to  H.  surinamensis .5 

Ludwig  withdrew,  but  as  I consider  incorrectly,  H.  surinamensis,  mak- 
ing it  a synonym  of  H.  imitans  which  he,  in  the  same  paper  (1887),  reported 
from  Panama  and  Galapagos.  He  did  not  mention  Selenka’s  species  at  all, 
being  probably  misled  by  Selenka’s  very  untypical  figure.  It  is  not  clear 
whether  he  refers  to  his  original  material  from  the  Navigator  Islands  or 
to  his  Panamic-Galapagos  material  when  he  speaks  of  the  presence  of  tables 
with  spinous  margin.  As  far  as  the  present  material  shows,  the  disk  is 
smooth  in  H.  languens.  H.  L.  Clark  (1920,  p.  148)  describes  an  H.  imitans 
from  somewhere  in  the  Pacific  Ocean — Albatross  cruise,  locality  label  lack- 
ing— and  emphasizes  the  spinous  disk  and  the  tapering  spire  with  12-20 
teeth,  different  from  H.  languens  which  he  records  from  the  Gulf  of  Panama. 


Holothuria  lubrica  Selenka. 

Holothuria  lubrica  Selenka,  1867,  p.  329,  pi.  18,  fig.  59;  Panning,  1934, 
p.  45,  text-fig.  38  (copied  from  Lampert,  1896,  fig.  2). 

Holothuria  kapiolaniae  Bell,  1887,  p.  533;  Fisher,  1907,  p.  653. 

For  diagnosis,  etc.,  see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  165. 

Local  Range:  Four  specimens  from  Ballena  Bay,  Costa  Rica,  shore;  1 
from  Corinto,  Nicaragua,  shore. 

Remarks:  The  typical  form  seems  to  be  restricted  to  Panamic  waters 
and  possibly  Hawaii  ( H . kapiolaniae  Bell).  The  records  from  the  Malay 
Archipelago,  given  by  Sluiter  (1901,  p.  8),  need  re-investigation.  Sluiter 
gives  no  measurements  of  the  spicules  and  it  is  possible  that  he  was  dealing 
with  the  other  species  with  similar  but  shorter  spicules  before  him,  viz., 
H.  parva  Lampert,  type  locality  east  coast  of  Africa,  or  possibly  H.  moebii 
Ludwig. 

Theel’s  record  of  H.  lubrica  from  St.  Bartholomew,  W.  I.,  has  unfor- 
tunately been  repeated  uncritically  by  various  writers.  Actually  Theel  says 
about  his  West  Indian  material:  “either  lubrica  or  the  foregoing  species,” 
( =H . glab err ima) , and  the  description  is  decidedly  of  H.  glaberrima. 

Ludwig  maintains  (1898,  p.  434)  that  he  has  found  spicules  of  the 
glaberrima  type  in  specimens  from  Mazatlan,  Mexico,  but  he  has  not 

4 Deichmann  (1926,  pi.  1,  fig.  1)  selected  the  most  reduced  table  she  could  find  in  H.  suri- 
namensis, as  well  as  the  most  complete  type.  Unfortunately  this  figure  was  selected  by  Panning 
(1934,  II,  text-fig.  34)  instead  of  the  more  typical  tables  figured  in  1930,  pi.  3,  figs.  12-15,  19. 
Normally  H.  surinamensis  has  heavy  double  spines  on  the  top  of  the  spire. 

5 The  records  of  H.  imitans  from  Bermuda  are  due  to  Panning  who  refers  Clark’s  material  of 
H.  surinamensis  (1898,  p.  412,  and  1899,  p.  118)  to  Ludwig’s  Indo-Pacific  species.  His  reasons 
are  that  Clark  states  that  fiat  bars  apparently  are  lacking  in  the  Bermuda  specimens  (but  may 
have  been  overlooked)  and  that  he  sometimes  has  found  spines  on  the  edge  of  the  tables  in  speci- 
mens from  Bermuda  as  well  as  from  Jamaica,  adding  that  these  tables  may  have  more  spines 
(18-20)  on  the  top  of  the  spire.  Presumably  this  is  merely  an  untypical  variation,  and  H.  imitans 
must  be  removed  from  the  list  of  West  Indian  species  until  a careful  comparison  has  been  made. 


1938]  Deichmann:  Holothurians  369 


Text-figure  4. 

Holothuria  lubrica  Selenka.  1-5,  Typical  spinous  rods  from  integument. 
Holothuria  glaberrima  Selenka.  6-8,  Typical  rods  from  integument.  Scale 
1/100  mm. 


compared  them  with  spicules  of  the  true  glaberrima.  Although  the  spicules 
vary  somewhat  in  development  and  are  of  approximately  the  same  size,  I 
have  always  found  that  they  cannot  be  confused.  Moreover,  the  two  species 
are  rather  different  in  exterior.  H.  glaberrima  is  dark  brown  and  robust, 
while  H.  lubrica  is  smaller  and  grayish  in  color,  often  with  yellow  feet  and 
two  rows  of  dark  spots  on  the  dorsum. 


Holothuria  marenzelleri  Ludwig  var.  theeli  var.  nov. 

Holothuria  marenzelleri  var.  ? Theel,  1886a,  p.  7. 

Holothuria  marenzelleri  Ludwig,  1887,  p.  2,  pi.  2,  fig.  12;  Panning, 
1934,  II,  p.  47,  fig.  41  (copy  of  Ludwig’s  figure). 

Diagnosis:  Large  robust  form  (up  to  20  cm.  long)  with  20  large  bushy 
tentacles;  ventral  side  covered  by  numerous  cylindrical  feet;  dorsal  side 
with  numerous  small  papillae.  Single  free  stone  canal. 

Spicules  in  young  individuals  short  spectacle-shaped  rods,  often  devel- 
oped as  asymmetrical  or  symmetrical  plates;  surface  smooth;  margin  scal- 
loped. In  larger  individuals  the  spicules  change  into  larger  rods  with  more 
or  less  rough  surface  and  numerous  holes  in  the  ends  and  along  the  margins. 
Color  dark  brown. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z.  cat.  no.  665.  Ludwig’s  types  of  the  typical  form  from 
the  Nicobars  are  probably  in  Germany. 

Type  Locality:  Galapagos  Islands. 

General  Distribution:  According  to  Panning  (chart,  p.  44)  taken  only 
in  the  Galapagos  Islands. 

Local  Range:  Nine  specimens  ranging  from  small  to  large,  from  Tower 
Island  and  Hood  Island,  Galapagos  (Arcturus) . 

Remarks:  Ludwig  gives  no  figures  of  the  spicules  in  his  species  from 
the  Nicobars  and  his  description  may  equally  well  refer  to  H.  erinaceus 
Semper — a widespread  form  in  the  East  Indies.  Theel  was  the  first  to 
express  his  doubt  whether  the  Galapagos  specimens  were  identical  with 
the  typical  H.  marenzelleri. 

Only  examination  of  the  types  of  H.  marenzelleri,  or  of  specimens  from 
Nankauri,  Nicobars,  can  decide  whether  two  species  are  concealed  under  one 
name  or  not.  Apparently  there  are  no  records  of  H.  marenzelleri  occurring 
between  the  Galapagos  Islands  and  the  Malay  Archipelago. 


370  Zoologica:  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :18 


Text-figure  5. 

Holothuria  marenzelleri  Ludwig  var.  theeli  var.  nov.  1-8,  Tyical  smooth  plates 
and  rods  from  young  individuals  from  Galapagos.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


Text-figure  6. 

Holothuria  marenzelleri  Ludwig  var.  theeli  var.  nov.  1-3,  Typical  rods  with 
numerous  holes  and  rough  surface  from  large  individuals  from  same 
locality  as  the  small  individuals  figured  above.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


It  is  with  great  hesitation  that  the  large  individuals  with  rather  differ- 
ent spicules  are  referred  to  H.  'marenzelleri  var.  theeli.  But  it  is  quite  pos- 
sible that  the  small  smooth  spicules  are  completely  reduced  and  the  spicules 
in  the  older  individuals  become  large  and  rough. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


371 


Holothuria  gyrifer  (Selenka). 

Stichopus  gyrifer  Selenka,  1867,  p.  319. 

Holothuria  monacaria,  Fisher,  1907,  p.  659;  H.  L.  Clark,  1923,  p.  163; 
1938,  pi.  16,  fig.  7 (colored  figure)  ; Panning,  1934,  III,  p.  69,  text- 
fig.  (complete  list  of  references). 

Holothuria  ? patagonica  R.  Perrier,  1904,  p.  13. 

Stichopus  ( Holothuria  ?)  patagonicus  R.  Perrier,  1905,  pp.  11-17, 
pi.  1,  figs.  1-3. 

Nee  P solus  monacarius  Lesson,  1830,  p.  225,  pi.  76. 

Diagnosis'.  Slender  form,  of  medium  length  (10-5  cm.),  slightly  bottle- 
shaped, with  pronounced  “neck”  when  normally  expanded.  Tentacles  20, 
cylindrical  feet  small;  mouth  and  anus  terminal.  Feet  few,  in  indistinct 
rows;  ventrally  cylindidcal  feet,  dorsally  papillae.  Inner  anatomy  rather 
similar  to  that  of  H.  impatiens. 

Spicules  a crowded  layer  of  tables  and  buttons.  Tables  with  round  disk 
with  a complete  circle  of  marginal  holes,  edge  smooth,  spire  moderately  high 
with  four  pillars  and  mostly  one  cross  beam  and  few  teeth  on  the  top.  But- 
tons smooth  with  six  large  holes.  Ventral  feet  with  large  end  plate  but  no 
special  supporting  rods,  except  for  a few  reticulated  plates  next  to  the  end 
plate  or  the  typical  buttons  may  be  slightly  larger.  Dorsal  appendages  with 
no  end  plate  and  besides  the  typical  buttons  a number  of  long  curved  rods 
with  short  transverse  projections  which  often  unite  so  they  form  a row  of 
lateral  holes  on  each  side. 

Color  bright  brown,  ventrally  paler;  appendages  white,  base  surrounded 
by  a circular  white  area. 

Types : M.  C.  Z.  and  Gottingen,  Germany. 

Type  Locality : Hawaii. 

General  Distribution : Indo-West  Pacific  to  Hawaii,  and  Gulf  of  Cali- 
fornia (Clark,  1923).  A specimen  without  spicules,  tentatively  described  as 
a new  species,  reported  from  Chile  by  R.  Perrier,  1904. 

Local  Range:  Two  large  specimens  from  Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of  Nicoya, 
Costa  Rica,  shore. 

Remarks : It  has  been  deemed  advisable  to  change  the  name  monacaria 
Lesson  to  gyrifer  Selenka,  since  it  is  absolutely  certain  that  the  species 
usually  called  monacaria  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  species  which  Lesson 
described  and  figured  from  Tahiti,  while  the  type  of  gyrifer  has  been  exam- 
ined. It  is  a mystery  how  the  present  species  with  few  appendages  has 
been  confused  with  Lesson’s  species  which  has  numerous  conical  appendages 
on  the  dorsal  side  while  the  ventrum  is  covered  by  numerous  cylindrical 
feet.  What  Lesson’s  species  actually  is  cannot  be  said  offhand — possibly  it 
is  a well  known  form  and  the  name  monacaria  may  be  placed  among  the 
synonyms. 

H.  gyrifer  is  a most  strikingly  colored  species  (see  Clark’s  colored 
figure,  1938)  and  it  can  hardly  be  confused  with  any  other  form.  It  resem- 
bles H.  impatiens  in  general  shape  but  it  is  more  brightly  colored  and  the 
skin  is  less  rough  to  the  touch.  The  spicules  resemble  those  found  in  H. 
arenicola,  but  differ  in  the  presence  of  a complete  circle  of  holes  in  the 
margin  of  the  disk,  and  the  holes  are  often  rectangular,  while  in  H.  arenicola 
the  holes  are  more  circular  and  frequently  the  marginal  holes  are  reduced 
to  four.  Also  the  buttons  in  gyrifer  are  large  while  in  arenicola  they  tend 
to  become  very  small. 

Stichopus  patagonicus  R.  Perrier,  from  Sta.  Cruz,  Patagonia,  is  unques- 
tionably this  species.  The  single  individual  measured  5.3  cm.  (strongly  con- 
tracted) and  the  spicules  were  dissolved  and  the  calcareous  ring  slightly 
corroded.  Possibly  it  was  wrongly  labelled,  as  it  is  most  unlikely  that  this 
tropical  form  should  occur  so  far  south. 


372  Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society  [XXIII  :18 

Holothuria  pardalis  Selenka. 

Holothuria  pardalis  Selenka,  1867,  p.  336,  pi.  19;  fig.  85;  Fisher,  1907, 
p.  664,  pi.  69,  figs.  1,  la-g;  Panning,  1935,  V,  p.  3,  text-fig.  106. 

Diagnosis:  Small  to  medium-sized  form  (10-12  cm.)  slender,  with  20 
small  tentacles;  mouth  and  anus  terminal;  feet  cylindrical,  in  indistinct 
bands,  not  crowded,  rarely  retracted  into  warts. 

Spicules  tables  with  reduced  or  low  spire  and  small  disks  often  com- 
posed of  four  holes,  margin  spinous.  Buttons  with  6-8  holes,  often  incom- 
plete and  frequently  twisted.  Feet  with  end  plate,  slightly  smaller  in  the 
dorsal  appendages  and  supported  by  curved  supporting  rods  with  per- 
forated ends. 

Color  mottled  gray,  extremely  variable,  reminiscent  of  H.  arenicola 
Semper. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z.  and  Gottingen,  Germany. 

Type  Locality:  Hawaii. 

General  Distribution:  Indo-West  Pacific  and  Galapagos  Islands. 

Local  Range:  Three  specimens  from  Darwin  Bay,  Galapagos  Islands 
( Arcturus ) . 

Remarks:  The  specimens  were  kept  in  formalin  but  the  spicules  are 
well  preserved  and  agree  with  those  figured  by  Fisher. 


Order  Dendrochirota. 

Family  Cucumariidae. 

Genus  Cucumaria  Blainville,  1834. 

For  definition  and  diagnostic  characters,  see  Deichmann,  1938,  p.  103. 

Cucumaria  californica  Semper. 

Cucumaria  californica  Semper,  1868,  p.  235,  pi.  39,  fig.  16,  pi.  40,  fig. 
10;  Theel,  1886a,  p.  9. 

Nec  Cucumaria  californica,  Edwards,  1910,  p.  601.  (=  Cucumaria  fallax 
Ludwig) . 

Diagnosis:  Medium  sized  forms  (about  10  cm.)  with  ten  bushy  ten- 
tacles of  equal  size.  Skin  soft,  smooth;  feet  large,  soft,  completely  retrac- 
tile, arranged  in  five  bands,  not  scattered  in  the  interambulacra.  Calcareous 
ring  simple,  single  stone  canal  and  one  or  two  Polian  vesicles. 

Spicules  four-holed  buttons  or  longer  oblong  plates  with  holes  mostly 
in  two  rows ; surface  knobbed  or  smooth.  Feet  with  no  end  plate  or  a vestige 
and  a few  three-armed  supporting  rods.  Tentacles  with  few  plates  or  rods 
or  no  spicules  at  all.  In  older  individuals  the  spicules  may  be  almost  com- 
pletely lacking. 

Color  varying  from  almost  black  to  slate-colored  or  almost  white  with 
dark  tentacles  and  anterior  end  which  always  seems  to  be  blackish. 

Type:  Possibly  in  Germany. 

Type  Locality:  Mazatlan,  Mexico. 

General  Distribution:  Probably  widespread  in  the  Panamic  region. 

Local  Range:  Eighteen  specimens  from  Situatanejo  Bay,  Mexico, 
shore. 

Remarks : A well  marked  species  which  can  hardly  be  confused  with  any 
other  species  described  from  the  Panamic  region. 

The  name  C.  californica  Semper  has  by  a curious  error  been  applied  to 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


373 


a large  frondosa-l ike  form,  C.  fallax  Ludwig,  which  is  common  in  the  Bering 
Sea.  A large  individual  of  the  latter  species,  from  the  Albatross  cruises, 
received  in  one  way  or  another  the  label  Galapagos.  Edwards,  who  identified 
the  material,  assumed  that  the  label  was  correct  and  that  this  species  was 
identical  with  Semper’s  C.  calif ornica.  He  referred  several  of  the  specimens 
from  the  Bering  Sea  to  Semper’s  species  while  other,  mostly  smaller,  indi- 
viduals from  the  same  area,  were  correctly  named  C.  fallax  Ludwig. 


Genus  Pentamera  Ayres,  1852. 

Pentamera  Ayres,  1852,  p.  207 ; Deichmann,  1938,  p.  105. 

Diagnosis : Small  to  medium  sized  forms  (rarely  more  than  10  cm.); 
ventral  tentacles  small;  feet  long,  non  retractile,  arranged  in  five  bands  but 
never  scattered  in  the  interambulacra.  Calcareous  ring  with  long  posterior 
prolongations  on  the  radials.  Spicules  two-pillared  tables,  or  reduced  deriva- 
tives of  these  or  developed  as  acorn-like  bodies.  Feet  with  large  end  plate 
and  numerous  supporting  tables  usually  with  well  developed  spire,  in  some 
cases  completely  reduced.  Tentacles  with  rods  or  plates,  in  some  forms  no 
spicules,  at  least  in  older  individuals.  Spicules  usually  numerous,  but  in 
some  species  scarce  and  reduced  with  advancing  age. 

Type  Species:  Pentamera  pulcherrima  Ayres. 

Remarks:  The  diagnosis  is  here  modified  to  include  also  Pentamera 
chier chia  (Ludwig)  and  P.  zacae  sp.  nov.,  the  former  with  few  and  mostly 
reduced  spicules,  the  latter  with  peculiar  acorn-shaped  bodies,  as  it  seems 
unwise  for  the  present  to  segregate  these  two  forms  which  otherwise  con- 
form well  with  the  typical  members  of  the  genus. 

The  type  species  seems  to  represent  the  only  form  in  the  tropical  west- 
ern Atlantic,  while  P.  calcigera  (Stimpson)  is  a typical  form  in  the  northern 
waters,  of  both  Atlantic  and  Pacific,  and  a series  of  seven  related  species 
are  known  from  the  west  coast  of  North  America  (see  Deichmann,  1938). 

From  the  Panamic  region  (and  Chile)  four  species  are  known. 


Key  to  the  Species  of  Pentamera  Known  from  the  Panamic  Region 

and  Chile. 

1.  Spicules  in  skin  acorn-shaped  bodies,  possibly  derived  from  tables. 
Feet  with  large  end  plate  and  numerous  curved  supporting  tables  with 
well  developed  spire  composed  of  two  rods  with  flattened  top  with  blunt 
lobes  or  teeth.  Color  white  Pentamera  zacae  sp.  nov. 

1.  Spicules  in  skin  two  pillared  tables  or  derivates  of  these  with  spire 

reduced  2. 

2.  Spicules  scarce;  disk  with  normally  four  holes  and  spinous  edge;  spire 
low  with  few  teeth  or  reduced  to  two  knobs.  Feet  with  large  end  plate 
and  a varying  number  of  spectacle-shaped  rods  with  or  without  two 
knobs  representing  the  spire.  Color  dark  brown  or  black 

Pentamera  chierchia  (Ludwig). 

2.  Spicules  numerous  with  well  developed  spire,  disk  with  smooth  edge. 

Feet  with  large  end  plate  and  well  developed  supporting  tables  with 
curved  disk  and  tall  or  even  excessively  tall  spire 3. 

3.  Supporting  tables  in  feet  often  excessively  tall.  Tables  small  with  tuft 

of  slender  spines  on  top Pentamera  beebei  sp.  nov. 

3.  Supporting  tables  in  feet  not  excessively  tall.  Tables  large  with  fairly 
stout  short  spines  on  top Pentamera  chiloensis  Ludwig,  1887. 

( Syn . Cucumaria  tabulata  Perrier,  1904).  Type  Locality:  Chiloe  Island, 
Patagonia. 


374 


[XXIII  :18 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 

Pentamera  heebei  sp.  nov. 

Diagnosis : Small  form  (few  cm.  long),  externally  and  internally  typical 
of  the  genus.  Spicules  minute  tables  with  mostly  four  larger  holes  and  four 
marginal  ones;  spire  two  pillared,  ending  in  a tuft  of  slender  spines.  Feet 
with  large  end  plate  and  curved  supporting  tables  with  from  2-7  cross 
beams  in  the  spire  which  ends  in  a few  flattened  lobes  or  teeth.  Color  white. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z. 

Type  Locality:  Ballena  Bay,  Gulf  of  Nicoya,  Costa  Rica,  40  fathoms. 

General  Distribution:  Known  from  the  type  locality.  Costa  Rica. 

Local  Range:  One  small  specimen  from  Ballena  Bay,  Gulf  of  Nicoya, 
Costa  Rica,  40  fathoms  (Station  213  D-15). 


Text-figure  7. 

Pentamera  heebei  sp.  nov.  1-6,  Supporting  tables  of  various  degree  of  devel- 
opment. 7-9,  Tables  from  integument.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


Remarks:  Superficially  the  species  resembles  others  of  the  smaller  pen- 
tamerids,  but  the  peculiar  spicules  set  it  apart  from  any  other  species 
known.  The  very  tall  spires  may  possibly  disappear  completely  but  the 
excessively  small  tables  will  be  sufficient  to  distinguish  it  from  other  related 
forms. 

Pentamera  chierchia  (Ludwig). 

Cucumaria  chierchia  Ludwig,  1887,  p.  13,  pi.  1,  fig.  5. 

Diagnosis:  Small  form  (3-6  cm.),  soft  skinned  with  numerous  cylindri- 
cal feet  in  five  bands;  ventral  tentacles  small.  Calcareous  ring  with  long- 
posterior  prolongations.  Spicules  present  in  Varying  number  but  not 
crowded.  Tables  with  mostly  four  central  holes  and  dentate  margin ; spire 
low,  two-pillared,  often  completely  lacking;  feet  with  large  end  plate  and  few 
short  spectacle-shaped  rods,  rarely  with  a trace  of  a spire.  Tentacles  with 
curved  perforated  plates  and  rods.  Color  dark  brown,  almost  black. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


375 


Text-figure  8. 

Pentamera  chierchia  (Ludwig).  1-3,  Tables  with  reduced  disk  from  integument. 
4,  Supporting  rod  from  appendage.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


Type:  Possibly  in  Germany. 

Type  Locality : Coast  of  an  island  in  the  Gulf  of  Panama  (shore;  one 
single  specimen  secured). 

General  Distribution:  Probably  widespread  in  the  Panamic  region,  in 
shallow  water. 

Local  Range:  Five  from  Situatanejo  Bay,  Mexico,  shore;  one  from 
Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of  Nicoya,  Costa  Rica,  shore;  one  from  Port  Parker, 
Costa  Rica,  1.5-4  fathoms  (Station  203  D-9). 


Pentamera  zacae  sp.  nov. 

Diagnosis:  Small  form  (few  cm.  long)  with  body  strongly  curved, 
tapering  toward  both  ends.  Feet  cylindrical,  nonretractile,  in  five  bands, 


Pentamera  zacae  sp.  nov.  1 & 5,  Supporting  tables  from  appendages.  2-4  & 6-8, 
Acorn-shaped  spicules  from  integument.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


376 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


most  numerous  on  the  ventrum,  more  sparingly  on  the  dorsum  and  toward 
the  oral  and  anal  ends.  Spicules  form  a crowded  layer  of  peculiar  small 
bodies  resembling  acorns,  with  a tapering  spire,  mostly  composed  of  two 
rods  and  basal  cup-shaped  part.  Feet  with  large  end  plate  and  numerous 
supporting  tables  with  curved  disk  with  four  holes  and  a small  hole  in 
each  end ; spire  with  two  pillars  ending  in  few  flattened  lobes  or  blunt  teeth. 
Color  dirty  white. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z. 

Type  Locality:  Tangola-Tangola  Bay,  Mexico,  23  fathoms. 

General  Distribution:  Known  only  from  the  type  locality. 

Local  Range:  Tangola-Tangola  Bay,  Mexico,  23  fathoms  (Station  196 
D-17) . 

Remarks:  The  tentacles  and  calcareous  ring  are  lacking,  but  neverthe- 
less it  can  hardly  be  doubted  that  the  species  belongs  in  the  genus  Penta- 

mera. 


Genus  Thyone  Oken,  1815. 

Remarks : The  genus  is  extremely  heterogenous  and  needs  a revision, 
but  the  time  is  hardly  yet  ripe  for  undertaking  the  task.  The  type  species 
is  Thyone  fusus  (0.  F.  Muller),  a well  known  form  from  the  northeastern 
Atlantic  with  a closely  related  representative  in  the  West  Indies.  The  two 
species  listed  below  undoubtedly  deserve  separate  genera. 

Thyone  benfi  Deichmann  var.  zacae  var.  nov. 

Thyone  benti  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  170,  text-figs.  2,  1-11  (partim) . 

Diagnosis : Like  the  typical  form,  from  Puget  Sound,  but  the  disk  of 
the  tables  seems  to  become  more  quickly  reduced  and  large  heavy  rods  are 
totally  lacking  in  the  tentacles  whereas  rosettes  are  numerous. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z. 

Type  Locality:  East  of  Cedros  Island,  Lower  California;  40  fathoms. 

General  Distribution:  The  variety  is  apparently  restricted  to  the  waters 
of  southern  California  and  as  far  south  as  Cedros  Island.  The  typical  form 
is  known  from  Puget  Sound  and  may  be  expected  as  far  south  as  Point 
Conception,  California. 

Local  Range:  East  of  Cedros  Island,  Lower  California;  40  fathoms 
(Station  126  D-17). 

Remarks:  The  specimen  in  hand  measures  about  3 cm.  and  has  its  ten- 
tacle crown  and  calcareous  ring.  It  resembles  otherwise  the  larger  individual 
which  had  lost  these  organs,  from  the  same  locality  ( Zaca  1936),  except 
that  the  feet  have  just  barely  begun  to  spread  out  into  the  interambulacra. 
No  gonads  were  developed  in  this  small  individual. 

Thyone  gibber  (Selenka). 

Stolus  gibber  Selenka,  1867,  p.  356. 

Thyone  gibber  Deichmann,  1921,  p.  205,  text-fig.  4;  1936,  p.  64  (passim). 

Thyone  similis  Ludwig,  1887,  p.  23,  pi.  2,  fig.  7;  Deichmann,  1936, 
p.  64  (passim). 

Diagnosis:  Medium  sized  form  (5-10  cm.),  robust,  with  thick  skin 
packed  with  spicules  and  numerous  feet  covering  the  entire  surface  of  the 
body;  tentacles  large,  bushy,  the  two  ventral  smaller.  Calcareous  ring  with 
long  posterior  prolongations  on  the  radials.  Spicules  regular  four-holed 
knobbed  buttons,  often  with  the  central  knobs  united  into  a handle  which 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


377 


Text-figure  10. 

Thyone  benti  Deichmann  var.  zacae  var.  nov.  1-3,  Tables  with  spire  completely 
reduced.  4,  Supporting  rod  with  no  trace  of  spire.  5,  Table  from  introvert. 
6,  Rosette  from  tentacles.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


Thyone  gibber  (Selenka).  1-2,  Knobbed  buttons  from  integument.  3,  Knobbed 
button  with  spinous  handle,  from  external  layer  of  buttons.  4,  Supporting 
tale  from  appendages.  Scale  1/100  mm. 


378 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


on  the  external  side  of  the  surface  spicules  may  carry  spines.  Feet  with 
large  end  plate  and  large  supporting  tables  with  a low  spire  composed  of 
several  twisted  rods.  Introvert  with  two-pillared  tables  and  disk  perforated 
by  numerous  holes,  almost  lace-like,  forming  transition  to  rosettes.  Tentacles 
with  heavy  rods  or  oblong  plates  and  numerous  rosettes.  Color  black  or 
purplish-brown  or  white  with  tentacles  and  anterior  part  more  or  less  black. 

Type:  M.  C.  Z. 

Type  Locality : Panama. 

General  Distribution:  Widespread  in  the  Panamic  region,  in  shallow 
water. 

Local  Range:  Four  from  Situatanejo  Bay,  Mexico,  shore,  (Station  186 
L-l)  ; one  from  Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of  Nicoya,  Costa  Rica. 

Remarks : From  the  Panamic  region  only  one  other  species  is  known 
with  similar  spicules,  viz.,  T.  panamensis  Ludwig  (1887,  p.  22).  The  latter 
seems  to  lack  the  spines  on  the  handles  of  the  buttons  and  has  no  heavy  rods 
in  the  tentacles.  From  Californian  waters  a smaller  species,  Thyone  rubra 
H.  L.  Clark,  is  known.  It  has  knobbed  buttons  but  the  entire  surface  of  the 
external  side  of  the  superficial  buttons  is  covered  by  a reticulum  and  the 
supporting  tables  have  mostly  large  reticulated  spires. 

Family  Phyllophoridae. 

Diagnosis:  Dendrochirotes  with  12-30  tentacles,  either  definitely  ar- 
ranged in  an  external  circle  with  10  large  tentacles  and  an  inner  with  5 or  10 
much  smaller  ones,  or  the  two  circles  more  or  less  confluent  and  the  size  and 
number  of  the  tentacles  variable.  Feet  either  restricted  to  the  ambulacra  or 
scattered  over  the  entire  surface.  They  are  mostly  cylindrical;  in  some 
forms  the  dorsal  appendages  are  conical,  more  papilliform.  Calcareous  ring 
simple  or  with  posterior  prolongations.  Third  mesentery  attached  in  left 
interambulacrum. 

Remarks:  The  family  is  at  present  in  a state  of  upheaval,  as  are  the 
other  Dendrochirotes  and  it  is  therefore  necessary  briefly  to  summarize  the 
history  to  understand  the  viewpoint  adopted  here.  In  this  connection  there 
are  no  grounds  for  discussing  the  genera  in  which  the  feet  are  restricted 
to  the  ambulacra  as  these  forms  are  not  known  from  the  Panamic  region. 
(For  these  species,  see  Ohshima,  1912,  and  Engel,  1933).  Moreover  they 
seem  to  form  well  defined  genera  which  have  given  little  cause  for  trouble. 

Two  genera,  viz.,  Thyonidium  Diiben  & Koren,  1844,  and  Phyllophorus 
Grube,  1840,  have  for  a long  time  constantly  been  confused  and  most  authors 
have  in  despair  chosen  to  unite  all  the  species  in  the  oldest  genus  Phyllo- 
phorus. The  reason  for  this  state  of  affairs  has  been  that  the  tentacles  in 
the  common  northern  species,  T.  pellucidum  Diiben  & Koren,  have  either 
been  counted  as  15  or  20 — never  any  number  between  these  (except  occa- 
sionally 16  which  has  been  considered  an  abnormality) . The  species  showed 
therefore  apparently  almost  as  wide  a variation  as  in  Phyllophorus  in  which 
the  number  ranged  from  12  to  20,  so  there  seemed  no  valid  grounds  for 
separating  the  two  genera  on  account  of  the  tentacles.  The  differences  in 
the  type  of  calcareous  ring  seems  to  have  been  completely  ignored. 

Recent  studies  of  Heding  (1936,  pp.  19-26)  have  revealed  that  the  five 
inner  pairs  of  small  tentacles  in  T.  pellucidum  are  merely  five  tentacles 
which  usually  are  so  deeply  cleft  that  they  simulate  five  pairs,  and  were 
described  and  figured  as  such  by  Diiben  & Koren  (1844,  p.  217,  pi.  11,  fig. 
57),  and  also  that  the  full  number  is  reached  very  quickly  in  this  species 
(Heding,  p.  22).  The  same  has  been  found  by  the  writer  to  be  true  of  T. 
commune  Forbes  where  specimens  1 cm.  long  exhibit  the  full  number  of 
tentacles  (in  this  species  five  small  inner  pairs  of  tentacles).  In  Phyllo- 
phorus, on  the  other  hand,  the  tentacle  number  remains  low  for  a long 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


379 


period.  Sars  describes  (1857,  p.  137)  how  specimens  of  P.  urna  which 
measure  3-4  cm.  in  length  have  only  17  tentacles,  (12  external  of  unequal 
size  and  5 small  inner  ones),  and  gradually  more  are  added.  The  same 
irregularity  in  the  appearance  of  the  last  tentacles  is  also  noticed  by  Engel, 
1933,  so  it  seems  to  be  a characteristic  feature  of  the  genus  Phyllophorus. 

In  the  following  an  attempt  is  made  to  draw  the  line  between  the 
genera  belonging  to  the  Phyllophoridae  with  feet  scattered  in  the  interam- 
bulacra. Three  new  genera  are  proposed,  one  to  take  in  Phyllophorus  granu- 
latus  Grube,  one  to  accommodate  the  Tliyonidium- like  forms  known  from  the 
tropical  areas,  and  one  to  include  the  forms  which  have  20  tentacles  in  two 
well  defined  circles,  as  Tliyonidium,  but  a calcareous  ring  with  long  posterior 
prolongations,  as  Phyllophorus.  Furthermore  Selenka’s  old  genus  Pattalus 
is  re-established. 


Key  to  the  Genera  of  Phyllophoridae  with  Interambulacral  Feet. 

1.  Tentacles  arranged  in  an  external  circle  of  five  pairs  of  large  tentacles 
and  an  inner  circle  of  much  smaller  tentacles,  five  deeply  divided  or  five 
pairs  2. 

1.  Tentacles  arranged  in  two  indistinct  circles,  of  unequal  size  although 

those  in  the  inner  circle  are  small,  as  are  also  some  of  those  in  the  outer 
circle.  Number  of  tentacles  varying  from  12-20,  frequently  16. 4. 

2.  Calcareous  ring  tall,  tubular  with  long  deeply  divided  posterior  prolonga- 
tions and  long  narrow  interradials Neothyonidium  gen.  nov. 

Type  Species : N.  liawaiense  (Fisher),  1907. 

2.  Calcareous  ring  low,  with  long  anterior  teeth  but  no  distinct  posterior 

tails,  at  most  low  protuberances. 3. 

3.  Spicules  four-pillared  tables  which  rapidly  disappear  with  age;  tenta- 

cles with  perforated  rods  or  plates,  but  no  rosettes.  Arctic  and  boreal 
forms Tliyonidium  Duben  & Koren,  1844. 

Type  Species:  T.  pellucidum  Duben  & Koren,  1844. 

3.  Spicules  four  pillared  tables  with  spire  often  reduced  to  knobs  or  spines. 

Spicules  sometimes  reduced  with  advancing  age.  Tentacles  with  rosettes. 
Tropical  forms. Euthyonidium  gen.  nov. 

Type  Species:  E.  seguroensis  (Deichmann),  1930. 

4.  Calcareous  ring  low,  simple.  Spicules  apparently  plates,  which  are  quickly 

reduced:  Large  forms,  20  cm.  Pattalus  Selenka,  1867. 

Type  Species:  P.  mollis  Selenka,  1867. 

4.  Calcareous  ring  tall,  with  posterior  prolongations 5. 

5.  Feet  tubular,  spicules  tables  with  two  to  four  pillars  in  spire  and  appar- 
ently not  reduced  with  advancing  age.6 Phyllophorus  Grube,  1840. 

Type  Species : P.  urna  Grube,  1840. 

5.  Feet  partly  conical,  papilliform  on  the  dorsal  side. 

Euphyllophorus  gen.  nov. 

Type  Species:  E.  granulatus  Grube,  1840. 

6 Heding’s  proposal  (1936,  p.  23)  to  transfer  T.  commune  (Forbes)  to  Phyllophorus  cannot 
possibly  be  accepted.  Aside  from  the  difference  in  the  number  of  inner  tentacles  (which  may 
be  a variable  character  in  T.  pellucidum ),  the  two  species  differ  very  slightly  from  each  other 
in  general  features,  early  appearance  of  the  full  number  of  tentacles,  etc.  It  is  a regrettable 
slip  when  Heding  also  states  (p.  23)  that  the  genus  Thyonidium  "usually”  has  many  spicules, 
in  contrast  to  “Phyllophorus”  in  which  they  disappear.  Both  T.  pellucidum  and  T.  commune 
lose  their  spicules  very  rapidly — hence  the  difficulty  in  distinguishing  between  the  two  forms  (see 
among  others  Mortensen,  1927,  pp.  411  and  413).  But  in  no  case  is  it  known  that  the  spicules 
disappear  completely  in  any  member  of  Phyllophorus.  Sars  says  that  the  tables  often  are  scarce 
in  the  adult  individuals  of  P.  urna  (1857,  p.  138)  ; Theel,  1886,  p.  150,  mentions  the  presence 
of  end  plate  and  supporting  rods  in  the  largest  individuals  while  tables  are  practically  lacking. 
Usually  careful  examination  of  fragments  of  the  integument  reveals  the  presence  of  some  tables. 
More  important,  however,  is  the  entirely  different  type  of  calcareous  ring  which  is  characteristic 
of  the  members  of  the  genus  Phyllophorus. 


380 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


Euthyonidium  gen.  nov. 

Diagnosis : Medium  sized  forms  (10  cm.  long)  with  fairly  robust  feet 
scattered  over  the  entire  body,  rarely  with  trace  of  being  arranged  in 
bands.  Tentacles  five  large  pairs  in  an  external  circle  and  five  small  pairs 
in  an  inner  circle,  often  contracted  so  they  are  difficult  to  observe.  Cal- 
careous ring  simple  or  with  insignificant  posterior  protuberances.  Spicules 
tables  or  derivatives  of  tables  with  spire  reduced,  often  scarce  in  older  indi- 
viduals. Feet  with  large  end  plate  and  a few  supporting  rods.  Tentacles 
with  delicate  rods  and  rosettes. 

Type  Species : Euthyonidium  seguroensis  (Deichmann). 

Remarks : The  genus  represents  the  tropical  counterpart  of  the  northern 
genus,  Thyonidium  Diiben  & Koren,  1844.  Two  species  are  known  from  the 
West  Indies,  viz.,  the  type  species  and  E.  occidentalis  (Ludwig).  Re-exami- 
nation  of  Selenka’s  Thyone  ovulum  from  Acapulco,  Mexico,  showed  a complete 
circle  of  five  pairs  of  small  inner  tentacles,  while  a microscopical  examination 
of  the  skin  revealed  the  presence  of  a few  tables  with  reduced  spire — of 
exactly  the  same  shape  as  those  found  in  an  Euthyonidium  brought  home  by 
the  Zaca. 


Euthyonidium  ovulum  (Selenka). 

Stolus  ovulum  Selenka,  1867,  p.  365,  pi.  20,  fig.  117. 

Thyone  ovulum,  Deichmann,  1936,  p.  64. 

Diagnosis:  Agrees  in  exterior  with  diagnosis  given  for  the  genus. 
Calcareous  ring  with  radials  posteriorly  deeply  incised,  and  with  long  an- 
terior tooth;  interradials  heart-shaped  with  posterior  margin  slightly  in- 
cised. Numerous  free  stone  canals  and  Polian  vesicles.  Spicules  a scattered 
layer  of  tables  with  cross-shaped  disk  with  spinous  or  branching  edge  and 
spire  in  most  cases  reduced  to  1-4  spines.  Feet  with  large  end  plate  and 
apparently  few  supporting  rods;  tentacles  with  few  rosettes  and  delicate 
rods.  Spicules  more  or  less  completely  reduced  with  advancing  age  and 
except  for  the  large  end  plate,  easily  overlooked.  Color  reddish-brown. 

Type:  M.C.Z. 

Type  Locality:  Acapulco,  Mexico. 

General  Distribution:  Probably  widespread  in  the  Panamic  region. 

Local  Range:  One  specimen  from  Port  Parker,  Costa  Rica,  1.5-4  fathoms 
(Station  203  D-9). 

Remarks:  The  Zaca  specimen,  which  decidedly  is  a polychirote  form, 
showed  so  remarkable  a similarity  with  Thyone  ovulum  that  a re-examina- 


Text-figure  12. 

Euthyonidium  ovulum  (Selenka).  1-3,  Plates  with  reduced  spire  from  integu- 
ment. 4-5,  Supporting  rods  from  appendages.  (From  Selenka’s  type, 
M.  C.  Z.)  Scale  1/100  mm. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


381 


tion  of  Selenka’s  material  was  undertaken  and  the  presence  of  five  pairs  of 
small  tentacles  demonstrated  as  well  as  the  presence  of  a few  tables  with 
reduced  disks  of  the  same  type  as  those  found  in  the  Zaca  specimen.  “Thyone 
ovulum”  must  therefore  be  transferred  to  Euthyonidium.  The  Zaca  material 
represents  the  first  record  since  the  types  were  described. 

Genus  Phyllophorus  Grube,  1840. 

Diagnosis : Medium  sized  forms  (rarely  more  than  10  cm.  long)  with 
robust  cylindrical  feet  distributed  over  the  entire  surface  and  with  12-20 
tentacles  of  different  size  in  two  indistinct  circles;  the  last  tentacles  appear 
at  intervals  after  the  animal  has  reached  a considerable  size.  Calcareous 
ring  with  distinct  long  posterior  prolongations  on  the  radials;  interradials 
shorter  or  longer  and  often  overlapping  the  radials.  Spicules  delicate  tables ; 
feet  with  end  plate  and  sometimes  a few  oblong,  curved  supporting  tables; 
tentacles  with  few  delicate  rods  and  rosettes.  Spicules  apparently  preserved 
throughout  the  animal’s  entire  life. 

Type  Species : Phyllophorus  urna  Grube. 

Remarks:  Defined  this  way  the  genus  comprises  the  Mediterranean 
P.  urna  Grube  and  five  of  the  seven  species  known  from  the  tropical  western 
Atlantic,  some  species  from  the  Indo-Pacific  (see  Engel,  1933)  and  two 
species  from  the  Panamic  region,  including  the  species  described  below. 
From  the  west  coast  of  North  America  no  Phyllophoridae  are  known  (except 
Thyonidium  commune  Forbes;  unpublished  record,  material  in  U.S.N.M.) 
nor  has  any  been  reported  so  far  from  the  coast  of  Chile  (except  P attains). 
Two  Phyllophoridae  were  described  in  1907  from  Hawaii  by  Fisher. 

Not  included  is  P.  granulatus  Grube  from  the  Mediterranean  which 
seems  to  differ  in  so  many  respects  (papillae  on  the  dorsal  side  and  reticu- 
lated plates,  etc.  [see  Koehler,  1927,  p.  199]),  that  it  unquestionably  de- 
serves its  own  genus  for  which  the  name  Euphyllophorus  is  proposed. 

Key  to  the  Species  of  Phyllophorus  Known  from  the  Panamic  Region. 

1.  Spicules  tables  with  oval  disk  with  smooth  edge  and  8-12  small  marginal 
holes;  spire  with  four  pillars  and  ending  in  wreath  of  8-12  spines.  Feet 
with  end  plate  and  supporting  tables  with  an  enormous  four-pillared 
spire  ending  in  a long  conical  tooth  which  perforates  the  skin. 

Phyllophorus  aculeatus  Ludwig. 
(Panama,  shallow  water.  Only  the  type  specimen  known,  U.S.N.M.; 
Ludwig,  1894,  p.  128,  pi.  13,  figs.  6-11). 

1.  Spicules  tables  with  oval  disk  with  four  large  and  four  smaller  marginal 
holes,  the  latter  more  or  less  wedge  shaped.  Spire  with  two  pillars  and 
ending  in  four  tufts  of  few  spines.  Feet  with  large  end  plate  and  few 
supporting  tables  with  oval  curved  disk  and  low  two-pillared  spire  ending 
mostly  in  two  diverging  spines Phyllophorus  zacae  sp.  nov 

Phyllophorus  zacae  sp.  nov. 

Diagnosis:  Medium  sized  form  with  15  (probably  up  to  20)  tentacles  of 
unequal  size,  in  confluent  circles.  Feet  stout,  distributed  over  the  entire 
body,  not  crowded.  Calcareous  ring  with  well  developed  posterior  prolonga- 
tions on  the  radials;  anteriorly  the  radials  have  a long  rectangular  tooth 
with  a constriction  at  its  base;  interradials  with  broad  base  and  short 
anterior  tooth,  and  overlapping  the  radials.  Spicules  delicate  tables  with 
oval  disk  with  four  large  and  four  smaller  marginal  holes,  often  wedge 
shaped,  spire  with  two  pillars,  ending  in  four  tufts  of  few  spines.  Feet  with 
large  end  plate  and  with  few  oblong  supporting  tables  with  mostly  oval  disk 


382 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


with  numerous  holes  and  a two-pillared  spire  ending  mostly  in  two  diverging 
horns  or  teeth.  Tentacles  with  few  delicate  rods  and  rosettes.  Color  reddish. 
Type:  M.C.Z. 

Type  Locality : Tangola-Tangola  Bay,  Mexico,  10  fathoms. 

General  Distribution : Known  only  from  the  type  locality. 

Local  Range : One  contorted  specimen  from  Tangola-Tangola  Bay, 
Mexico,  10  fathoms  (Station  196  D-13). 


Text-figure  13. 

Phyllophorus  zacae  sp.  nov.  1-3,  Tables  from  integument.  4,  Supporting  table 
from  appendages.  5,  Rosette  from  tentacles.  Scale  1/100  mm. 

Remarks:  The  species  is  closely  related  to  Phyllophorus  destichadus 
Deichmann  (1930,  p.  146,  pi.  18,  fig.  3)  from  the  West  Indies.  It  differs  in 
the  presence  of  supporting  tables  in  the  feet  and  in  minor  details  of  the 
calcareous  ring  and  the  spicules. 

From  Hawaii  Fisher  (1907,  p.  712,  pi.  79,  figs.  2,  2a-c)  has  described 
a species  with  similar  spicules  but  with  the  tentacles  arranged  in  two  dis- 
tinct circles  and  of  pronouncedly  different  size  and  with  a very  different 
calcareous  ring — with  long  narrow  interradials.  For  that  species  the  genus 
Neothyonidium  has  been  proposed. 


For  diagnosis,  etc.,  see  Deichmann,  1937,  p.  172,  text-fig.  3. 

Local  Range:  Two  specimens  from  Situatanejo  Bay,  Mexico,  shore; 
one  from  Jasper  Island,  Gulf  of  Nicoya,  Costa  Rica,  shore. 

Remarks:  The  specimens  are  larger  and  more  robust  than  the  single 
type  specimen  secured  in  1936  from  Arena  Bank,  Gulf  of  California.  The 
present  records  indicate  that  the  species  occurs  widespread  in  the  Panamic 
region,  as  was  to  be  expected. 


L—J L—l L-l  L._!  — L 1 1 


Family  Psolidae. 

Genus  Thyonepsolus  H.  L.  Clark,  1901. 
Thyonepsolus  beebei  Deichmann. 


Order  Molpadonia. 

Family  Caudinidae. 

Genus  Paraeaudina  Heding,  1931. 


Caudina  Auctores. 

Pseudocaudina  Heding,  1931,  p.  283. 

Paraeaudina  Heding,  1931,  p.  455;  Clark,  1935,  p.  267. 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


383 


Diagnosis:  Caudinids  of  medium  size  or  large  (up  to  20  cm.)  with  15 
tentacles  with  two  pairs  of  digits  but  no  unpaired  terminal  digit.  Calcareous 
ring  with  short  undivided  posterior  prolongation  on  the  radials.  Third  loop 
of  intestine  supported  by  powerful  pseudomesenteries  attached  to  the  lateral 
body  walls  while  the  normal  ventral  mesentery  is  reduced  or  lacking.  Spicules 
small  cross-cups  or  four-holed  plates  with  spinous  to  lobate  margin,  with  age 
degenerating  into  irregular  deformed  plates.  No  phosphatic  bodies  present 
but  older  individuals  may  have  certain  spicules  surrounded  by  a reddish 
substance.  Color  white.  Shallow  water  forms. 

Type  Species:  Paracaudina  chilensis  (J.  Muller). 


I — I l LJ ! I I L_J 1 


Text-figure  14. 

Paracaudina  chilensis  (J.  Muller).  1-4,  Cross-cups  from  Zaca  specimen,  from  35 
fathoms  depth. 


Remarks:  The  number  of  species  belonging  to  this  genus  has  been  the 
subject  of  much  discussion.  Clark  (1935)  holds  that  there  are  two  Aus- 
tralian species  with  fairly  simple  spicules  while  the  type  species  can  be 
divided  into  a number  of  varieties  which  differ  merely  in  the  development 
of  the  spicules.  One  argument  against  uniting  the  widespread  forms  under 
one  name  has  been  the  discontinued  distribution  of  the  species.  It  was  first 
in  1938  that  some  specimens  were  taken  between  Chile,  the  type  locality,  and 
California,  viz.,  off  Guatemala  and  Mexico,  (Deichmann,  1938,  p.  23,  text- 
figure)  and  the  zoogeographic  gap  thereby  closed.  The  Zaca  expedition  has 
furthermore  secured  two  specimens  from  off  Costa  Rica,  an  indication  that 
P.  chilensis  is  by  no  means  uncommon  in  the  Panamic  region. 


Paracaudina  chilensis  ( J.  Muller) . 

Molpadia  chilensis,  J.  Muller,  1850,  p.  139;  1854,  pi.  4,  fig.  14,  pi.  9, 
fig.  1. 

Caudina  chilensis,  H.  L.  Clark,  1908,  p.  175. 

Paracaudina  chilensis,  H.  L.  Clark,  1935,  pp.  267-284.  (discussion  of  the 
species  problem).  Deichmann,  1938,  p.  23,  text-fig. 

Diagnosis:  As  for  the  genus.  Spicules  numerous  cross-cups  with 
marginal  projections,  shorter  or  longer,  often  as  rounded  lobes;  reduced  to 
simple  plates  in  older  individuals. 

Type:  Museum  of  Berlin. 

Type  Locality:  Coast  of  Chile. 

General  Distribution:  From  the  Strait  of  Magellan,  along  the  west 
coast  of  South,  Central  and  North  America  to  Japan,  Coasts  of  China  and 
North  Australia — varieties  chiefly  with  long  marginal  projections  on  the 
cross-cups;  from  New  Zealand  and  West  Indies — varieties  chiefly  with 


384 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


Paracaudina  chilensis  (J.  Muller).  Spicules  from  specimens  from  off  Guate- 
mala, 10  fathoms  (upper  row)  and  from  off  Mexico,  7 fathoms  (lower 
row).  Reproduced  from  Deichmann,  1938. 


reduced  marginal  projections  (this  type  may  also  occur  in  numbers  in  speci- 
mens from  the  west  coast  of  Central  America).  Shallow  water  to  about  40 
fathoms. 

Local  Range:  Two  specimens,  4 and  5 cm.,  from  Ballena  Bay,  Gulf  of 
Nicoya,  Costa  Rica,  35  and  40  fathoms  (Station  213  D-12  and  D-15). 

Remarks : The  spicules  selected  at  random  from  the  Zaca  material  shows 
the  extreme  variability  of  the  calcareous  spicules  in  this  species  when  con- 
trasted with  the  figures  of  spicules  from  the  specimens  from  Guatemala  and 
Mexico,  from  respectively  10  and  7 fathoms  depth.7  Possibly  the  greater 
depth  from  which  the  Zaca  material  came  may  account  for  the  variation  of 
the  spicules. 


Bibliography. 


Ayres,  W.  0. 

1852.  Description  of  a new  species  of  Holothuria.  Proc.  Boston  Soc.  Nat. 
Hist.,  vol.  4,  pp.  207-208  (June,  1852). 


Bell,  F.  J. 

1887.  Studies  in  the  Holothuroidea,  VI.  Descriptions  of  new  species.  Proc. 
Zool.  Soc.,  pp.  531-534,  pi.  45. 

Clark,  H.  L. 

1898.  Notes  on  the  Echinoderms  of  Bermuda.  Ann.  N.  Y.  Acad.  Sci.,  11,  no. 
19,  pp.  407-413. 

1899.  Further  Notes  on  the  Echinoderms  of  Bermuda.  Ibid,  12,  no.  7,  pp. 
117-138,  pi.  4. 

1902.  Papers  from  the  Hopkins  Stanford  Galapagos  Expedition,  1898-99,  12, 
Echinodermata.  Proc.  Wash.  Acad.  Sci.,  pp.  521-531.  (Washington, 
D.  C.) 

1908  The  Apodous  Holothurians.  Smithsonian  Contributions  to  Knowledge, 
35,  no.  1723,  pp.  1-231,  pis.  1-13. 


7 Record  of  depth  omitted  in  the  original  report  (Deichmann,  1938). 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


385 


1913.  Echinoderms  from  Lower  California  with  Descriptions  of  New  Species, 
Albatross  cruise  1911.  Bull.  Amer.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.,  32,  pp.  185-236, 
pis.  44-46. 

1920.  Holothurioidea.  Mem.  Mus.  Com-p.  Zool.  39,  pp.  121-154,  pis.  1-4. 

1922.  The  Holothurians  of  the  genus  Stichopus.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  65, 
no.  3,  pp.  39-74,  pis.  1-2. 

1923.  Echinoderms  from  Lower  California  with  Descriptions  of  new  species, 
Supplementary  Report  . . . Albatross  cruise  1911.  Bull.  Amer.  Mus. 
Nat.  Hist.,  48,  pp.  147-163. 

1935.  The  Holothurian  Genus  Caudina.  Ann.  Mag.  Nat.  Hist.,  ser.  10,  vol. 

15,  pp.  267-284. 

1938.  Echinoderms  from  Australia.  Mem.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  55,  pp.  1-596, 
pis.  1-28. 

Deichmann,  E. 

1922.  On  some  cases  of  Multiplication  by  Fission,  etc.  Papers  from  Dr.  Th. 
Mortensen’s  Pacific  Expedition,  1914-1916.  Vid.  Med.  Nat.  For.,  73, 
pp.  199-215,  text-figures  (Copenhagen). 

1930.  The  Holothurians  of  the  Western  Part  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  Bull. 
Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  71,  no.  3,  pp.  43-226,  pis.  1-24. 

1936.  A new  species  of  Thy  one  from  the  West  Coast  of  Mexico.  Proc.  New 
England  Zool.  Club,  15,  pp.  63-66,  text-figure. 

1937.  The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.  IX.  Holothurians  from  the  Gulf 
of  California,  the  West  Coast  of  Lower  California  and  Clarion  Island. 
Zoologica,  New  York  Zoological  Society,  22,  pt.  2,  pp.  161-176,  text- 
figures  1-3. 

1938.  New  Holothurians  from  the  Western  Coast  of  North  America  and 
some  Remarks  on  the  Genus  Caudina.  Proc.  New  England  Zool.  Club, 

16,  pp.  103-115,  4 text-figures. 

1938a.  New  Records  of  Paracaudina  chilensis  (J.  Muller)  from  the  West 
Coast  of  Central  America  and  Mexico.  Proc.  New  England  Zool.  Club, 

17,  pp.  23-25,  text-figure. 

Duben,  M.  W.  & Koren,  J. 

1844.  Ofversigt  Skandinaviens  Echinodermer.  Kgl.  Vid.  Akad.  Handl., 
1844  (1846),  pp.  229-328,  pis.  6-11. 

Edwards,  C.  E. 

1910.  Four  Species  of  Pacific  Ocean  Holothurians  allied  to  Cucumaria 
frondosa  (Gunnerus).  Zool.  Jahrb.  Abt.  Syst.,  29,  pp.  597-612,  pi. 19. 


Engel,  H. 

1933.  Holothuries;  Resultats  Scientifiques  du  Voyage  aux  Indes  Orienta- 
les  Neerlandaises  LL.  AA.  RR.  le  Prince  et  la  Princesse  Leopold  de 
Belgique.  Verhandelingen  van  het  Koniklijk  Natuurhistorisch  Museum 
van  Belgie  (Buiten  Reeks)  vol.  Ill,  Fascicule  13,  pp.  1-42,  pi.  1,  text 
figures  1-25,  4 charts. 

Fisher,  W.  K. 

1907.  The  Holothurians  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  Proc.  U.  S.  Nat.  Mus.,  32, 
pp.  637-744,  pis.  66-82. 

Forskal,  P. 

1775.  Descriptiones  animalium  . . . etc.  Post  mortem  auctoris  edidit  Carsten 
Niebuhr,  pp.  1-164,  1 map.  (Hauniae). 

Grube,  A.  E. 

1840.  Actinien,  Echinodermen  und  Wiirmer  des  Adriatischen  und  Mittel- 
meers  nach  eigenen  Sammlungen  beschrieben,  pp.  1-92,  pi.  1. 
(Konigsberg) . 


386 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :18 


Heding,  S.  G. 

1931.  On  the  Classification  of  the  Molpadia.  Vid.  Med.  Nat.  Hist.  For.  92, 
pp.  275-284.  Correction  of  Pseudocaudina  to  Paracaudina,  ibid,  pp. 
455-456. 

1933.  The  Caudina  of  Asamushi.  Sci.  Rep.  Tohoku  Imp.  Univ.  (4),  Biol.  8, 
no.  2,  pp.  127-243,  pis  5-8.  (Sendai,  Japan). 

1936.  Echinoderms,  6 & 7 Thule  Expedition.  Medd.  Gronland,  108,  no.  1, 
pp.  1-34,  text-figs.  1-6. 

Koehler,  R. 

1927.  Les  Echinodermes  des  Mers  d’Europe,  II,  Encylopedie  Scientifique, 
pp.  1-339,  pis.  10-18.  (Paris). 

Lampert,  K. 

1885.  Die  Seewalzen,  Holothuroidea,  Eine  Systematische  Monographic,  pp. 
1-310,  pi.  1.  (Wiesbaden). 

1896.  Die  von  Dr.  Stuhlmann  in  den  Jahren  1888  und  1889  an  der  Ostkfiste 
Afrikas  gesammelten  Holothurien.  Mit.  Mus.  Hamburg,  13,  pp.  49-71, 
text-figures. 

Lesson,  R.  P. 

1830.  Centurie  zoologique,  pp.  I-X,  1-244,  pis.  1-80.  (Paris). 

Ludwig,  H. 

1874.  Beitrage  zur  Kentniss  der  Holothurien  mit  Nachtrag.  Arbeiten  aus 
d.  Zool.-Zoot.  Institut  in  Wurzburg,  3,  Heft.  2,  pp.  77-120. 

1887.  Die  von  G.  Chierchia  auf  der  Fart  der  Kgl.  Ital.  Corvette  “Vettor 
Pisani”  gesammelten  Holothurien.  Zool.  Jahrb.,  2,  pp.  1-36,  pis.  1-2. 

1894.  Holothurioidea;  Report  on  an  Explor.,  etc.,  Albatross.  Mem.  Mus. 
Comp.  Zool.,  17,  pp.  1-183,  pis.  1-19. 

1898.  Holothurien.  Hamburger-Magelhaensische  Sammelreise,  pp.  1-98, 
pis.  1-3. 

Mortensen,  Th. 

1927.  Handbook  of  the  Echinoderms  of  the  British  Isles,  pp.  1-471,  text- 
figures  1-269.  (Oxford  University  Press). 

Ohshima,  H. 

1912.  On  the  system  of  Phyllophorinae  with  descriptions  of  the  species  found 
in  Japan.  Annot.  Zool.  Jap.  Tokyo,  8,  1912,  pp.  53-96,  pi.  1,  text- 
figures  1-7. 

Muller,  J. 

1850.  Anatomische  Studien  fiber  die  Echinodermen.  Archiv  fur  Anatomie 
und  Physiologie,  pp.  115-155. 

1854.  Uber  den  Bau  der  Echinodermen,  pi.  9,  figs.  1,  1+. 

Panning,  A. 

1929.  Die  Gattung  Holothuria.  I.  Mitt.  Zool.  Staatsinstitut  u.  Zool.  Mus. 
Hamburg,  44,  pp.  91-138,  text-figures  1-21. 

1934.  Die  Gattung  Holothuria,  II  & III.  Ibid,  45,  pp.  24-50,  65-84,  text- 
figures  22-43,  44-70. 

1935.  Die  Gattung  Holothuria,  IV  & V.  Ibid.  45  & 46,  pp.  85-107,  1-18,  text- 
figures  71-102,  103-121. 

Parker,  G.  H. 

1921.  The  locomotion  of  the  Holothurian  Stichopus  parvimensis  H.  L. 
Clark.  Journ.  Exp.  Zool.,  33,  pp.  205-208.  (Philadelphia). 

Perrier,  R. 

1904.  Holothuries  du  Cap  Horn.  Bull.  Mus.  d’Hist.  nat.,  10,  pp.  13-16. 

1905.  Holothuries  antarctiques.  Ann.  Sci.  Nat.,  9 ser.,  1,  pp.  1-146,  pis.  1-5, 
text-figures  A-M.  (Paris). 


1938] 


Deichmann:  Holothurians 


387 


Sars,  M. 

1857.  Bidrag  til  Kundskaben  om  Middelhavets  Littoral-Fauna.  Nyt  Mag. 
Naturvidenskab,  pp.  57-155,  pis.  1-2. 

Selenka,  E. 

1867.  Beitrage  zur  Anatomie  und  Systematik  der  Holothurien.  Zeitsch. 
TFiss.  Zool.,  38  pp.  291-374,  pis.  17-20. 

Semper,  C. 

1868.  Reisen  im  Archipel  der  Philippinene,  Pt.  2,  vol.  1,  Holothurien,  pp. 
1-288,  pis.  1-40. 

Sluiter,  C.  P. 

1901.  Die  Holothurien  der  Siboga  Expeditie,  Mon.  44.  Uitkomst  H.  M. 

Siboga.  . . . uitgeven  van  Max  Weber,  pp.  1-142,  pis.  1-10.  (Leiden). 
1910.  Westindische  Holothurien.  Zool.  Jahrb.,  Suppl.  11,  pp.  331-342,  text- 
figures  A-F. 

Stimpson,  W. 

1857.  On  the  Crustacea  and  Echinodermata  of  the  Pacific  Shores  of  North 
America.  Journ.  Boston  Nat.  Hist.,  6,  pp.  444-532,  pis.  18-23. 

Theel,  H. 

1886.  Report  on  the  Holothurioidea.  Report  on  the  Scientific  Results  of  the 
Voyage  of  H.M.S.  “ Challenger ” during  the  years  1873-76,  pt.  39, 
Zoology,  14,  pp.  1-290,  pis.  1-16. 

1886a.  Report  on  the  Holothurioidea,  Report  on  the  Results  of  Dredgings  by 
U.  S.  Coast  Survey  Steamer  “Blake”  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool.,  13,  pp. 

1-21,  pi.  1. 


Conant:  Note  on  Leioheterodon  madagascariensis 


389 


19. 

A Note  on  Eggs  and  Young  of  Leioheterodon  madagascariensis 

(Dumeril  & Bibron). 

Roger  Conant 

Zoological  Society  of  Philadelphia 

(Plate  I). 

The  life  histories  of  the  great  majority  of  reptiles  are  so  poorly 
known  that  even  the  most  fragmentary  observations  may  be  of  value.  Cer- 
tainly herpetology,  which  has  made  extraordinary  gains  in  the  past  few 
decades,  is  still  far  behind  other  fields,  especially  ornithology,  when  the 
lack  of  details  on  the  sizes  of  eggs  and  young,  etc.,  is  considered.  While 
I have  no  particular  interest  in  the  fauna  of  Madagascar,  and  scarcely 
know  its  literature,  I publish  this  brief  note  in  the  belief  that  it  may  help 
to  bridge  the  gap  in  our  knowledge  of  an  interesting  snake.  Monsieur  F. 
Angel,  of  the  Paris  Museum,  the  principal  worker  on  the  Malagasy  herpeto- 
fauna,  in  response  to  an  inquiry,  writes  under  date  of  November  13,  1937, 
“Je  ne  connais  pas  de  travaux  particulars  traitant  de  reproduction  des 
Lioheterodon.” 

A large  female  Leioheterodon  madagascariensis  arrived  at  the  Phila- 
delphia Zoological  Garden  on  May  11,  1937,  in  an  exchange  shipment  from 
the  London  Zoological  Gardens.  On  the  morning  of  July  18,  1937,  it  was 
discovered  coiled  about  13  eggs  which  it  had  laid  during  the  night.  It  did 
not  move  while  photographs  were  being  taken,  and  only  slightly  shifted 
its  position  when  it  and  the  eggs,  which  were  laid  on  the  cage  floor,  were 
covered  with  damp  peat  moss.  However,  it  left  them  and  lay  in  the  rear 
of  the  cage  during  the  afternoon,  but  returned  to  its  former  position  in  the 
evening.  The  next  morning  it  moved  away  from  the  eggs  again  and, 
possibly  as  a result  of  being  accidently  disturbed,  did  not  approach  them  for 
many  hours.  They  were  removed,  therefore,  to  an  aquarium  and  buried 
in  a mixture  of  slightly  damp,  rotten  wood  and  peat.  In  this  mixture  they 
were  kept,  at  ordinary  room  temperatures,  until  they  hatched. 

The  eggs  were  adherent  to  one  another  and  grouped  in  a single  cluster. 
The  shells  were  white,  parchment-like  and  yielded  slightly  to  the  pressure 
of  one’s  fingers.  Small,  hard  nodules,  slightly  raised  above  the  surrounding 
surfaces  of  the  eggs,  were  scattered  over  them. 

Owing  to  their  positions  in  the  cluster  it  was  impossible  to  measure 
all  of  the  eggs.  The  lengths,  in  five  of  them,  varied  from  46.1  to  50.0  and 
averaged  47.8  mm. ; the  widths,  in  seven,  varied  from  29.9  to  34.1  and 
averaged  32.3  mm.  Their  weight,  as  a unit,  was  376.1  grams,  or  an  average 
of  28.9  grams  for  each  egg.  The  female  was  1,483  mm.  in  length  and 
weighed  926.6  grams.  (All  weights  and  measurements  recorded  July  20, 
1937). 

The  first  indications  of  hatching  were  observed  early  during  the  after- 
noon of  October  16,  1937,  when  it  was  noticed  that  the  shell  of  one  of  the 


390 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :19 


eggs  had  a small  slit  in  it.  Protruding  from  this  opening  was  the  snout 
of  a young  snake,  surrounded  by  a mass  of  bubbles  resembling  spittle. 
Two  hours  later  snouts  were  found  protruding  from  two  other  eggs;  five 
heads  were  out  early  in  the  morning  of  October  17  and  a total  of  seven 
were  visible  the  evening  of  October  18.  At  this  time,  however,  none  of  the 
young  snakes  had  yet  left  their  shells.  They  seemed  very  wary,  and  even 
when  their  heads  were  entirely  out  they  withdrew  them  inside  their  shells 
when  an  observer  approached.  Even  passing  one’s  hand  over  the  aquarium 
or  turning  on  a photo-flood  lamp  caused  them  all  to  retreat  back  into  the 
eggs.  Masses  of  bubbles,  such  as  the  one  described  above,  were  seen 
around  or  near  each  head.  Some  of  the  eggs  had  two  or  more  slits  in  them. 

The  cluster  of  eggs  and  the  hatching  medium  were  examined  in  detail 
the  afternoon  of  October  19.  Two  young  had  escaped  from  the  shells  and 
buried  themselves  in  the  peat.  Another  was  out  by  early  evening  and  by 
the  next  afternoon  a total  of  six  had  emerged.  All  were  very  lively,  sought 
to  burrow  in  the  peat  when  they  were  handled  and  one  expanded  its  neck 
in  a manner  very  similar  to  that  employed  by  Heterodon  contortrix  when 
alarmed.  All  of  them  strongly  resembled  the  female  in  coloration  and  pat- 
tern except  that  their  lighter  markings  were  more  vivid. 

The  last  of  the  13  little  snakes  left  its  shell  shortly  after  noon,  October 
22,  and  the  entire  brood  was  weighed  and  measured  soon  afterward.  The 
figures  obtained  are  as  follows: 


Snake 

Weight 

Length 

1. 

18.2  grams 

324  millimeters 

2. 

19.1 

<< 

335 

3. 

18.3 

U 

336 

4. 

20.3 

u 

343 

5. 

19.0 

it 

. 337 

6. 

18.7 

u 

339 

7. 

16.2 

“ 

314 

8. 

18.2 

u 

343 

9. 

19.4 

« 

348 

10. 

18.1 

u 

337 

11. 

19.5 

<< 

338 

12. 

19.8 

342 

13. 

18.0 

u 

334 

Average 

18.68 

« 

336 

With  a single  exception  the  eyes  of  all  of  the  little  snakes  were  over- 
cast, indicative  of  an  approaching  moult.  In  the  snake  with  clear  eyes, 
and  one  of  the  others,  egg  teeth  were  still  in  place;  all  the  rest  had  lost 
them.  This  was  the  only  time  during  the  entire  hatching  period  that  any 
egg  teeth  were  observed,  although  the  snouts  protruding  from  all  the  top- 
most eggs  were  examined  several  times  with  a lens.  The  two  young  in 
which  egg  teeth  were  seen  must  have  come  from  eggs  lower  in  the  cluster 
and  must  have  been  among  the  last  to  hatch.  One  specimen  shed  its  skin 
on  October  27,  two  on  October  28,  seven  on  October  29,  two  on  October  30 
and  one  on  October  31. 

Attempts  to  feed  the  small  snakes  were  almost  100%  unsuccessful. 
They  consistently  refused  to  eat  the  small  frogs,  baby  mice,  earthworms, 
insects,  etc.,  which  were  put  in  their  cage,  except  as  indicated  in  the  fol- 
lowing notes:  One  snake  seized  a frog  by  the  head  but  let  go  and  lost 


1938] 


Conant:  Note  on  Leioheterodon  madagascariensis 


391 


all  interest  when  the  frog  kicked  its  legs.  Specimens  refused  the  legs  of 
freshly  killed  frogs.  Two  started  to  swallow  them  when  they  were 
forced  into  their  mouths  but  rejected  them  almost  immediately  there- 
after. One  snake  chased  a young  mouse  and  caught  it  by  the  tail.  It 
attempted  to  constrict  it,  but  instead  coiled  around  its  own  body.  The 
mouse  was  removed,  killed,  returned  to  the  cage  and  wiggled  by  the 
fingers.  The  snake  constricted  it  and  started  to  swallow  it  tail  first  but 
gave  up  the  job  before  the  mid-point  of  the  body  was  reached.  One  little 
snake  pursued  a small,  green  frog,  Rana  clamitans,  seized  it,  but  let  it  go 
at  once.  Another  snake  caught  it  and  swallowed  it. 

In  contrast  to  the  lack  of  interest  in  food  displayed  by  the  young 
snakes,  the  adult  female  has  thrived  in  captivity  and  has  accepted  several 
kinds  of  animals  as  food.  She  has  eaten  Rana  clamitans,  Rana  pipiens, 
Rana  catesbeiana,  white  mice,  rats  and  baby  chicks.  Small  prey  she  seizes 
and  swallows  as  it  struggles;  larger  animals  are  constricted. 

The  several  specimens  of  Leioheterodon  were  noticeably  similar  to 
Heterodon  in  several  respects.  The  keeled  and  turned  up  rostral,  the  robust 
body  and  the  habit  of  flattening  the  neck  (noticed  in  the  female  and  several 
young  of  the  group)  are  all  suggestive  of  the  hog-nosed  snakes.  In  no 
case,  however,  did  the  specimens  of  Leioheterodon  keep  their  necks  in  the 
flattened  position  for  any  length  of  time,  as  is  such  a common  habit  with 
Heterodon.  They  returned  to  their  normal  positions  almost  at  once.  This 
may  have  been  due  to  captivity,  however,  for  in  Heterodon  captive  speci- 
mens usually  fail  to  perform  after  one  or  two  demonstrations. 

I wish  to  express  my  indebtedness  to  Mr.  Arthur  Loveridge,  Dr.  Howard 
K.  Gloyd  and  Dr.  E.  R.  Dunn  for  helpful  suggestions  during  the  preparation 
of  this  manuscript. 


Summary. 

1.  Thirteen  eggs,  averaging  47.8  X 32.3  mm.  in  length  and  width, 
and  28.9  grams  in  weight,  were  laid  by  a specimen  of  Leioheterodon  mada- 
gascariensis in  the  Philadelphia  Zoological  Garden,  July  18,  1937. 

2.  The  eggs  started  hatching  90  days  later  and  the  last  of  the  brood 
left  its  shell  96  days  after  the  eggs  were  laid.  The  young  snakes  averaged 
336  millimeters  in  length  and  18.68  grams  in  weight. 

3.  The  young  snakes  showed  little  interest  in  food  although  one  ate 
a frog  and  one  started  to  eat  a mouse.  The  female  ate  frogs,  rats,  mice 
and  chicks. 


392 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATE. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Female  Leioheterodon  madagascariensis  coiled  around  her  clutch  of 
thirteen  eggs  a few  hours  after  they  were  laid. 

Fig.  2.  Eggs  of  L.  madagascariensis  hatching.  The  snouts  of  two  of  the  baby 
snakes  may  be  seen  protruding  from  the  shells.  A third  is  visible  be- 
neath the  slit  in  the  shell  of  the  right-hand  egg.  Photographs  by  Mark 
Mooney,  Jr. 


CONANT. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  1. 


FIG.  2. 


A NOTE  ON  EGGS  AND  YOUNG  OF  LEIOH ETERODON  MADAGASCARIENSIS 
(DUMERIL  & BIBRON  ) 


Breder:  An  Unusual  Aberrantly  Colored  Pleuronectid 


393 


20. 

An  Unusual  Aberrantly  Colored  Pleuronectid. 

C.  M.  Breder,  Jr. 

New  York  Aquarium. 

(Plate  I). 

Abnormal  coloration  in  the  Heterosomata  has  been  under  study  by 
Gudger  and  Firth  for  some  time  and  in  their  records  they  have  included 
an  analysis  of  the  earlier  literature.  See  Gudger  (1934  and  1935)  and 
Gudger  and  Firth  (1935,  1936a,  b,  c,  and  1937).  The  case  here  recorded 
(A.M.N.H.  14142)  differs  from  any  described  by  them  in  certain  interesting 
respects. 

This  specimen,  a nearly  ripe  female,  Pseudopleuronectes  americanus 
(Walbaum),  measures  195  mm.  in  standard  length  and  244  mm.  in  total 
length.  It  was  caught  by  Mr.  William  Stratton  near  Bayside,  Long  Island, 
on  November  8,  1938,  and  sent  to  the  New  York  Aquarium  through  the 
courtesy  of  Mr.  Fred  Fletcher. 

The  abnormality  in  coloration  amounts  to  a complete  absence  of 
pigmentation  on  the  upper  side  of  the  body.  The  vertical  fins,  however, 
are  normally  pigmented,  although  in  the  state  of  preservation  received 
(iced)  seemed  to  represent  a pale  phase,  a feature  not  uncommon  to  iced 
fish  in  a fairly  soft  condition.  The  pectoral  fin  of  the  upper  side  is  pig- 
mented, as  are  both  the  pelvics,  while  the  pectoral  of  the  lower  side  is  with- 
out pigment  as  is  normal  in  this  species.  All  the  pigmented  fins  are  en- 
croached upon  with  varying  pigmentless  areas  at  their  bases. 

The  head  is  also  without  pigment  on  the  upper  side,  except  for  the  pro- 
truding parts  of  the  eyes  and  a small  triangle  between  and  ahead  of  them, 
which,  however,  does  not  reach  the  lips.  The  eyes  themselves  are  normally 
pigmented.  This  fish,  then,  represents  a reversal  of  the  more  usually 
reported  abnormal  color  differential  in  which  the  dark  pigment  of  the  upper 
side  appears  on  the  normally  white  lower  surface.  There  is  here  a pretty 
problem  in  the  dynamics  of  coloration  involving  the  inverse  of  those  dark 
on  the  normally  white  lower  side. 

There  is  no  evidence  of  a hooked  dorsal  or  other  morphological  anomaly 
sometimes  associated  with  atypical  coloration  in  these  fishes.  There  is, 
however,  a very  evident  traumatic  peculiarity.  As  though  it  were  not  enough 
alone  for  this  specimen  to  grow  to  maturity,  it  clearly  survived  and  healed 
perfectly  what  appears  to  have  been  a bite  out  of  the  middle  of  its  back. 
Such  healed  injuries  are  common  enough  in  fishes  generally,  there  usually 
being  one  or  more  such  specimens  present  in  the  collections  of  the  New 
York  Aquarium.  These  arrive  along  with  other  fishes  and  are  gener- 
ally not  placed  on  exhibition  for  obvious  reasons.  This  particular  case  is, 
however,  of  unusual  interest  since  it  raises  the  question  of  the  protective 
value  of  flounder  coloration.  Specimens  of  this  species,  along  with  flounders 
generally,  are  extremely  inconspicuous  as  they  lie  on  the  sea  floor.  Not 


394 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXII  :20 


only  do  they  blend  well  with  the  bottom  colors,  but  actually  go  through 
extensive  color  and  pattern  changes  in  which  the  tone  and  texture  of  their 
surroundings  are  very  closely  approximated.  See,  for  example,  Sumner 
(1911)  and  Mast  (1916).  In  addition  to,  or  in  spite  of  this,  they  further 
hide  themselves,  when  the  nature  of  the  bottom  permits,  by  causing  a 
flurry  in  the  sand  or  mud  in  which  they  then  sink  so  that  only  their  eyes 
protrude.  Such  being  the  case,  it  might  be  inferred  that  since  the  present 
individual  was  white  on  the  top  side,  it  became  an  easy  mark.  To  offset 
this  conspicuousness  it  may  be  imagined  that  it  buried  itself  deeper  than 
others  so  that  most  of  the  time  only  its  pigmented  eyes  protruded.  How- 
ever, as  a matter  of  fact,  the  greatest  hazard  to  these  flat  fish  occurs  when 
they  are  swimming,  for  even  the  normally  colored  ones  can  then  be  easily 
seen,  and,  indeed,  even  when  buried  they  are  frequently  caused  to  swim 
by  larger  fishes  rooting  in  the  bottom,  presumably  to  dislodge  them. 

This  sketch  of  flounder  life  and  hazards  is  given  merely  as  a back- 
ground against  which  to  point  out  that  in  spite  of  the  normal  hazards  of 
all  flatfish,  this  one  without  the  alleged  protection  of  changeable  coloration 
and  the  fact  that  something  did  bite  a chunk  out  of  it,  nevertheless  grew 
to  adulthood.  It  will  be  noted  that  this  is  all  that  is  necessary  for  survival. 
This  fish  may  have  spawned  last  winter,  or  at  least  could  have  this  winter  if 
it  had  not  suffered  the  fate  of  so  many  Long  Island  flounders — one  not  in 
the  least  associated  with  any  of  its  individual  peculiarities. 

Lest  it  be  thought  that  perhaps  its  injury  was  in  some  way  connected 
with  a decoloration  of  the  upper  surface,  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  the 
writer,  as  already  indicated,  is  more  than  usually  familiar  with  injuries 
of  this  sort  because  of  circumstances,  and  that  in  no  case  known  to  him  is 
there  any  instance  where  abnormal  pigmentation  followed  even  vastly  great- 
er injuries.  See,  for  example,  figures  of  other  similar  injuries  in  Breder 
(1925  and  1934).  It  may  be  noted  in  Plate  1,  along  with  the  other  items 
discussed,  that  the  pigmentation  of  the  fin  adjacent  to  the  wound  is  normal 
and  in  the  pigmentless  areas  scales  have  covered  the  area  of  the  wound. 


References. 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr. 

1925.  Tailless  Pearl  Roach.  Bull.  N.Y.Z.S.  28  (3)  : 72-74. 

1934.  The  Ultimate  in  Tailless  Fish.  Bull.  N.Y.Z.S.  37  (5) : 141-145. 

Gudger,  E.  W. 

1934.  Ambicoloration  in  the  Winter  Flounder,  Pseudopleuronectes  amer- 
icanus.  Amer.  Mus.  Novitates  (717) : 1-8. 

1935.  Abnormalities  in  Flatfishes,  (Heterosomata).  Journ.  Morph.  58  (1) : 
1-39. 

Gudger,  E.  W.  & Firth,  F.  E. 

1935.  An  almost  totally  ambicolorate  halibut,  Hippoglossus  hippoglossus, 
with  partially  rotated  eye  and  hooked  dorsal  fin — the  only  recorded 
specimen.  Amer.  Musi  Novitates  (811):  1-7. 

1936a.  Three  partially  ambicolorate  four-spotted  flounders,  Paralichthys  ob- 
longus,  two  each  with  a hooked  dorsal  fin  and  a partially  rotated  eye. 
Amer.  Mus . Novitates  (885)  : 1-9. 

1936b.  A reversed,  almost  wholly  ambicolorate  summer  flounder,  Paralichthys 
dentatus.  Amer.  Mus.  Novitates  (896) : 1-5. 

1936c.  Ambicoloration,  partial  and  complete  in  the  southern  flounder,  Para- 
lichthys lethostigma.  Amer.  Mus.  Novitates  (897) : 1-7. 

1937.  Two  reversed,  partially  ambicolorate  halibuts,  Hippoglossus  hippoglos- 
sus. Amer.  Mus.  Novitates  (925)  : 1-10. 


1938] 


Breder:  An  Unusual  Aberrantly  Colored  Pleuronectid 


395 


Mast,  S.  O. 

1916.  Changes  in  shade,  color  and  pattern  in  fishes  and  their  bearing  on 
certain  problems  of  behavior  and  adaptation.  Bull.  U.  S.  Bureau 
Fisheries  34:  173-238  (1914). 

Sumner,  F.  B. 

1911.  The  adjustment  of  flat-fishes  to  various  backgrounds.  A study  of  adap- 
tive color  change.  Journ.  Exper.  Zool.  10  (4)  : 409-505. 


396 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATE. 
Abnormal  Pseudopleuronectes  americanus. 

Fig.  1.  Eyed  or  upper  side. 

Fig.  2.  Blind  or  under  side. 


BREDER. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  2. 


AN  UNUSUAL  ABERRANTLY  COLORED  PLEURONECTID. 


Schroeder : Test  for  Tuberculosis  in  Primates 


397 


21. 

A Diagnostic  Test  for  the  Recognition  of  Tuberculosis 
in  Primates;  a Preliminary  Report. 

Charles  R.  Schroeder 

Veterinarian,  New  York  Zoological  Park. 

(Plates  I & II). 

A practical  and  simple  test  which  might  be  applied  to  captive  Primates 
for  the  early  recognition  of  tuberculous  infection  is  urgently  needed  (Schroe- 
der, 1938).  Tuberculosis  was  recognized  as  a disease  to  be  coped  with  in  the 
late  1890’s  in  many  zoological  gardens.  Recently  the  wholesale  use  of  the 
Rhesus  Macaque  ( Macaca  mulatta ) by  laboratories  has  further  shown  the 
immediate  need  for  a test  applicable  to  large  groups  of  newly  imported 
monkeys.  Penrose,  White,  Brown  and  Pearson,  of  the  Penrose  Laboratory  of 
the  Philadelphia  Zoological  Society,  adapted  to  monkeys  the  test  used  in 
dairy  cattle  by  the  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry  (Fox,  1923).  The  test  was 
used  successfully  at  the  Philadelphia  Zoological  Garden  by  these  early  work- 
ers. Their  successful  results  were  continued  in  the  hands  of  White  and  Fox 
(White  & Fox,  1909).  Alterations  and  improvements  in  the  test  were  made 
which  depended  upon  a thermal  response  to  an  injection  of  K.O.T.  The  inter- 
esting discovery  by  early  workers,  indicating  that  Primates  have  a wider 
diurnal  temperature  variation  than  most  other  animals,  made  it  imperative 
to  record  pre-injection  temperatures  so  that  an  increase  subsequent  to  the 
injection  of  tuberculin  could  be  properly  evaluated  against  the  pre-injection 
graph  (Simpson  & Galbraith,  1906). 

The  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry  early  recognized  the  necessity  of  alter- 
ing its  test,  which  was  dependant  on  a regular  systemic  temperature  rise 
following  the  subcutaneous  administration  of  tuberculin.  It  was  necessary  to 
simplify  it  and  make  unnecessary  the  detailed  taking  and  recording  of  tem- 
peratures on  which  depended  the  accuracy  of  the  test.  They  adopted  the 
intradermal  test,  at  first  in  conjunction  with  the  ophthalmic  installation  of 
tuberculin,  later  with  a dual  intradermal  test  (caudal  fold  and  vaginal  labia), 
and  finally  with  a single  caudal  fold  intradermal  injection  which  has  given 
best  results  because  of  its  simplicity.  The  subcutaneous  test  is  still  admittedly 
accurate. 

European  investigators  have  done  some  work  but  nothing  on  a suffi- 
ciently large  scale  to  be  conclusive.  The  complete  bibliography  of  Primate 
tuberculosis  prepared  by  Dr.  Margaret  A.  Kennard  of  Yale  University  School 
of  Medicine  gives  no  clew  to  a satisfactory  test,  in  Europe  or  elsewhere,  for 
laboratory  animals. 

A modification  of  the  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry’s  intradermal  test  in 
cattle  has  been  evolved  in  the  New  York  Zoological  Park  for  use  in  monkeys.1 

l The  author  wishes  to  acknowledge  the  assistance  given  by  Dr.  N.  D.  C.  Lewis  and  Dr.  S.  E. 
Barrera  of  the  New  York  State  Psychiatric  Institute  for  permitting  the  routine  testing  of  incoming 
Rhesus  monkeys ; Dr.  Herbert  Fox  of  the  Penrose  Laboratory  of  the  Philadelphia  Zoological  Society, 
Dr.  Jacob  Traum  of  the  University  of  California,  Dr.  A.  R.  Dochez  and  Dr.  F.  S.  Cheever  of  the 
Presbyterian  Hospital,  College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons,  Dr.  Margaret  A.  Kennard  of  the  Yale 
University  School  of  Medicine  and  Dr.  Clarence  Carpenter  of  Columbia  University  for  their  timely 
aid  and  cooperation  ; and  Dr.  Florence  B.  Seibert,  who  prepared  and  donated  the  tuberculin  used. 


398 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII  :21 


Site  of  Injection. 

A simple  site  for  injection,  easily  available  in  all  Primates  and  readily 
seen,  was  to  be  selected.  For  intradermal  testing,  the  skin  on  the  back  proved 
most  satisfactory,  but  required  shaving  and  would  necessitate  handling  the 
monkey  to  read  the  test  (monkeys  usually  face  an  observer  and  the  shaved 
area  could  not  easily  be  seen  without  handling).  The  belly  and  thighs,  by 
repeated  trials,  would  not  permit  easy  intradermal  administration.  The 
tuberculin  usually  broke  through  to  the  subcutaneous  tissues  and  rapidly 
spread.  The  eyelid  was  a location  easily  seen,  which  could  be  readily 
approached,  and  has  remained  our  choice  of  site  for  the  injection. 


The  Tuberculin. 

It  seemed  important  to  select  a tuberculin  which  could  be  prepared  in 
great  concentration,  so  that  when  the  injection  was  made  the  greatest  dose 
of  sensitizing  agent  per  cell  could  be  given  (Sabin  & Joyner,  1938).  It  is  a 
well-known  fact  that  monkeys  do  not  react  allergically  to  proteins  as  well  as 
humans  or  domestic  animals  (Kopeloff  & Kopeloff,  1938).  In  addition,  a 
tuberculin  was  required  which  would  be  standard  wherever  used,  and  one 
which  would  not  lose  potency.  We  selected  Purified  Protein  Derivative  as 
prepared  by  Dr.  Florence  Seibert  of  the  Henry  Phipps  Institute  of  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  because  it  best  met  these  requirements2 3  (Seibert, 
1934).*  It  was  necessary  to  use  a tuberculin  for  the  first  test  which  would 
have  sufficient  concentration  to  bring  down  all  reactors,  regardless  of  severity 
of  reaction.  The  final  tuberculin  used,  which  proved  to  be  quite  harmless  to 
all  non-tuberculous  Primates,  was  a 1%  solution  of  P.P.D.  (0.1  cc.  = 1 mgm. 
P.P.D.).4  (Human  type  of  organism  is  usually  demonstrated). 


The  Test. 

The  animal  to  be  tested  is  restrained  by  placing  its  arms  behind  it,  legs 
extended.  It  is  placed  on  its  back,  head  extending  over  the  edge  of  a bench  or 
table,  arms  pulled  down  over  the  edge  of  the  table  at  a right  angle  to  the  long 
axis  of  the  body.  The  operator  approaches  from  behind  and  grasps  the  head 
in  the  left  hand.  A 1 cc.  tuberculin  syringe  and  %-inch  27-gauge  needle  is 
used.  The  syringe  is  held  in  the  right  hand,  the  needle  inserted  (bevel  up) 
just  under  the  skin  in  the  upper  lid  of  the  right  eye  close  to  the  margin. 
One-tenth  cc.  of  the  tuberculin  is  injected.  This  quantity  will  leave  a lentil- 
size  raised  area.  The  operation  is  simple  and  not  hazardous  for  attendant, 
operator  or  monkey.  The  specimen  is  placed  in  a cage  and  observed,  without 
further  restraint,  after  16  hours.  A reaction  will  usually  begin  to  make  its 
appearance  at  this  time  in  a tuberculous  monkey,  and  persist  for  72  hours, 
depending  upon  the  severity  of  the  reaction.  Primates  too  large  for  usual 
manual  restraint  can  be  anesthetized  with  Nembutal  (29  mgm.  per  kilo, 
intraperitoneally) . 


Interpretation  of  the  Test. 

A positive  reaction  consists  of  edema  of  the  lid  with  redness  and,  on 
rare  occasions,  a small  area  of  necrosis.  The  extent  of  the  reaction  is  imma- 
terial. All  reacting  monkeys  should  either  be  destroyed  or  used  for  short- 

2 In  a personal  communication  from  Dr.  Florence  B.  Seibert  the  following  data  on  the  stability 
of  P.P.D.  were  offered:  “We  have  found  that  a 1%  P.P.D.  solution  kept  in  the  incubator  at  37.5° 
for  one  month  loses  no  potency.  Furthermore,  a 1%  P.P.D.  solution  kept  in  the  icebox  for  nearly  5 
years  has  lost  very  little  potency.” 

3 Some  laboratories  are  using  O.T.  (Human)  0.1  cc.  = 1.0  mgm.  tuberculin  (=  0.2%  P.P.D.). 

4 No  systemic  reaction  was  demonstrated  in  non-tuberculous  Orang-utans,  Chimpanzees, 
Gorillas,  Gibbons,  Baboons,  the  Macaques,  Mangabeys,  the  more  delicate  Douracoulis  and  the  related 
New  World  monkeys. 


1938] 


Schroeder:  Test  for  Tuberculosis  in  Primates 


399 


time  experiments.  Those  monkeys  having  active,  advanced  clinical  disease 
will  often  succumb  to  this  test  dose  of  1 mgm.  P.P.D.  In  early  or  terminal 
infections  the  monkey  may  not  react.  In  terminal  infection,  the  tuberculin 
will  either  kill  the  specimen  or  bring  about  a profound  systemic  reaction, 
in  which  event  it  should  be  destroyed.  Retesting  after  two  months  is  impor- 
tant to  detect  infection  in  those  specimens  which  did  not  have  sufficiently 
advanced  disease  at  the  time  of  the  first  test  to  produce  a reaction. 

Discussion. 

The  test  as  presented  leaves  much  room  for  further  experimentation. 
It  has  proved  to  be  quite  satisfactory,  however,  and  is  being  used  routinely 
in  some  laboratories  and  zoological  gardens.  Recently  the  author,  with  one 
assistant,  tested  15  Rhesus  monkeys  in  a laboratory  in  35  minutes.  This 
period  of  time  included  catching  the  monkeys,  injecting  the  tuberculin,  and 
returning  the  animals  to  their  cages.  The  following  day  the  readings  were 
made  simply  by  observing  the  monkeys  in  their  cages.  The  value  of  such 
a test  can  be  determined  only  by  extensive  trial  to  accumulate  experience, 
statistics  on  a large  scale,  so  that  correlation  of  tuberculin  tests  and 
autopsies  can  be  made. 

Probably  90%  of  Primate  tuberculosis  is  acquired  between  time  of 
capture  and  delivery  to  the  final  user  of  the  specimens  (Schroeder,  1937). 
Testing  at  origin,  before  shipment,  will  eliminate  the  ultimate  planting  of 
tuberculosis  in  all  monkeys  shipped  in  the  same  crate  with  a tuberculous 
specimen.  When  laboratories  and  zoological  gardens  demand  tuberculosis- 
free  monkeys  from  commercial  distributors,  tuberculosis  in  Primates  will 
no  longer  be  a problem. 


Conclusions. 

1.  Monkeys  will  react  locally  to  concentrated  tuberculins. 

2.  The  site  of  injection  is  the  subcutaneous  tissue  at  the  margin  of 
the  upper  eyelid. 

3.  The  allergin  used  is  1/10  cc.  of  a 1%  solution  of  Purified  Protein 
Derivative  tuberculin  (0.1  cc.  = 1 mgm.  P.P.D.) . 

4.  Reactors  show  swelling  and  redness  of  the  lid,  visually  evident  with- 
out removing  the  specimens  from  their  cages,  in  16  hours,  and  persisting 
for  72  hours. 


Bibliography. 

Fox,  H. 

1923.  Diseases  in  Captive  Wild  Mammals  and  Birds.  J.  B.  Lippincott, 
Philadelphia,  p.  519. 

Kopeloff,  L.  & Kopeloff,  N. 

1938.  A Shock  Reaction  in  the  Monkey.  Journ.  Soc.  Amer.  Bad.  Jan.,  1938 
(Abstract  number). 

Sabin,  F.  R.  & Joyner,  A.  L. 

1938.  Tubercular  Allergy  Without  Infection.  Journ.  Exp.  Med.  Vol.  68, 
p.  659. 


Schroeder,  C.  R. 

1938.  Acquired  Tuberculosis  in  the  Primate  in  Laboratories  and  Zoological 
Collections.  Journ.  Amer.  Pub.  Health  Assn.  Vol.  28,  p.  469. 


Seibert,  F.  B.,  Arson,  J.  D.,  Reichel,  John,  Clark,  L.  T.  & Long,  E.  R . 

1934.  Purified  Protein  Derivative,  a standardized  tuberculin  for  uniformity 
in  diagnosis  and  epidemiology.  Amer.  Rev.  Tuberc.  Suppl.  Vol.  30, 
No.  6,  p.  713. 


400 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


Simpson,  S.  & Galbraith,  J.  J. 

1906.  Observations  on  the  Normal  Temperature  of  the  Monkey  and  Its 
Diurnal  Variation  and  on  the  Effect  of  Changes  in  the  Daily  Routine 
on  This  Variation.  Trans.  Royal  Soc.  Edinb.  Vol.  45,  pp.  65-104. 

White,  C.  Y.  & Fox,  H. 

1909.  Results  of  Tuberculin  Tests  in  Monkeys  at  the  Philadelphia  Zoological 
Garden.  Arch.  Int.  Med.  Vol.  4,  p.  517. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 

Plate  I. 

Fig.  1.  Manner  of  restraining  monkeys  weighing  up  to  10  kilos,  for  injection 
of  tuberculin.  Larger  specimens  should  be  anesthetized.  When  the 
operator  touches  the  eyelid  with  the  needle  the  monkey  usually  closes 
his  eyes,  which  facilitates  the  proper  administration  of  the  tuberculin. 

Fig.  2.  The  27-gauge  needle,  attached  to  a 1 cc.  Luer  end  tuberculin  syringe,  is 
inserted  bevel  up  in  the  lid  near  its  lower  margin,  and  0.1  cc.  is  admin- 
istered. 

Plate  II. 

Fig.  1.  An  average  reaction  consists  of  edema  with  or  without  apparent  redness. 

The  edema  prevents  the  specimen  from  completely  uncovering  the  pupil. 
Such  a reaction  can  be  recognized  without  restraining  the  specimen  for 
close  observation.  Some  reactions  are  more  intense,  with  pronounced 
redness  involving  adjacent  structures  and  edema  which  may  close  the  eye. 


Photographs  by  Hans  Gehrung,  N.  Y.  State  Psychiatric  Institute. 


SCHROEDER. 


PLATE  I. 


FIG.  I. 


FIG.  2. 


A DIAGNOSTIC  TEST  FOR  THE  RECOGNITION  OF  TUBERCULOSIS  IN  PRIMATES; 
A PRELIMINARY  REPORT. 


SCHROEDER. 


PLATE  II. 


A DIAGNOSTIC  TEST  FOR  THE  RECOGNITION  OF  TUBERCULOSIS  IN  PRIMATES; 


A PRELIMINARY  REPORT. 


Index  to  Parts  1-4 


401 


INDEX. 

Names  in  bold  lace  indicate  new  genera,  species  or  varieties;  numbers  in 
bold  lace  indicate  illustrations. 


A 

Abramis,  193 

Acanthemblemaria  hancocki,  311 
crockeri,  310 
Acanlhorhodeus,  193 
Acestrorhynchus,  Texl-fig.  2,  322,  324 
Aegina,  130 
allernans,  130 
cifrea,  131 
rhodina,  130 
rosea,  130 
Aegirtura,  132 
grimaldii,  132 
lanzerolae,  133 
myosura,  132 
weberi,  133 
Aequorea,  110 
floridana,  111 
rhodoloma,  129 
lenuis,  110 
Aglaura,  118 
Aglantha,  118 

Alesles,  Texl-fig.  2,  321,  322,  331,  336 
kolschyi,  323 
macrolepidolus,  323 
nurse,  323 

Amalopenaeus  sordidus,  57 
Ameiurus  melas,  3 
Ammodyles  lucasanus,  306 
personalus,  306 
lobianus  personalus,  307 
Andrya  americana,  33 
americana  leporis,  33 
cuniculi,  34,  36,  39,  47,  50 
rhopalocephala,  31,  47 
Anisistsia,  345 
Anodus,  322 

Anoslomus,  Text-fig.  2,  323,  324 
Anguilla  anguilla,  226,  313 
roslrala,  314 
vulgaris,  226 
Aphyocharax,  322,  324 
Arenichthys,  301 
aplerus,  301,  302 
Astyanax,  322 
Atolla,  133 
bairdii,  160 
gigantea,  160 
vivaldiae,  160 
wyvillei,  160 
Aurellia,  167 
aurila,  168 
flavidula,  168 
labiata,  167,  168 
limbala,  167 


maldivensis,  168 
solida,  168 

B 

Barbalula,  191 
Barbus,  192 
barbus,  195 
fluviatilis,  195 
plebejus,  195 
Barilius,  193 
Bairdiella  chrysura,  265 
Bertia  americana,  33 
americana  leporis,  33 
Bertiella  americana,  35 
Bella  splendens,  4 
Bolia,  191 

Bougainvillia  brilannica,  105 
fulva,  105 
niobe,  104 

Brachychalcinus,  326 
Brachydanio  rerio,  7 

Brycon,  Texl-fig.  2,  321,  322,  330,  332-334,  337, 
350 

Bryconaelhiops,  322,  323,  335 
Bursarius  cylherae,  150 
Bylholiara  murrayi,  108 

C 

Caenolropus,  351 
Calycopsis  sp.,  108 
Canis  nubilis,  239 

Carassius  auralus,  3,  219,  222,  223,  PI.  I & II 
carassius,  247 
Carybdea,  136 

alaia,  144,  147-150 
var.  grandis,  145 
var.  moseri,  145 
var.  pyramis,  145 
marsupialis,  137 

xaymacana,  139,  140,  142-144 
murrayana,  137 
raslonii,  137 
sliasnyi,  136 
xaymacana,  137 
Carybdeida,  135 
Calostomus,  191 
Caudina  chilensis,  383 
Chalceus,  322 

Chalcinus,  Text-fig.  2,  321,  322,  334 
Irachypomus,  334 
Charax,  321,  322 
Charybdea  grandis,  144 
(Tamoya)  haplonema,  151 
madraspatana,  145 
moseri,  144 


402 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII 


obeliscus,  145 
pyramis,  144 
philippina,  145 
xaymacana,  139 
Charybdella  alata,  144 
philippina,  145 
Charybusa  obeliscus,  145 
Cheirodon,  Text-fig.  2,  321,  326,  329 
pulcher,  322,  325 

Chelonia  mydas,  93-98,  PI.  I-XVIII 
Chilodus,  Texl-fig.  2,  322,  324 
Chondrosloma,  193 
Chromalonema,  109 
erylhrogonon,  109 
rubrum,  109 

Ciiharichihys  gordae,  302,  303 
Citharidium,  322,  349 
Cilharinus,  Texl-fig.  2,  322,  323,  324 
Cillolaenia  ctenoides,  34,  36,  39,  44,  51 
denficulala,  34,  36,  39,  42,  50 
lalissima,  42 
mosaica,  33 

peclinata,  34,  36,  39,  45,  51 
americana,  34,  36,  38,  39,  51 
perplexa,  34,  36,  37,  51 
variabilis,  34,  36,  39,  40,  51 
angusla,  33 
imbricata,  33 
variabilis,  33 
Clupea  harengus,  3 
Cobilis,  191 
Colobonema,  114,  116 
sericeum,  117 
lypicum,  117 
Compsura,  335 

Corynopoma,  Texl-fig.  2,  321 
Crealochanes,  322 
Crossola,  118 
alba,  119 
brunnea,  119 

var.  norvegica,  119 
norvegica,  119 
pedunculata,  119 
rufobrunnea,  118 
Crossosloma,  191 
Clenoiaenia  perplexa,  33 
variabilis,  33 

Cucumaria  californica,  372 
chierchia,  374 
fallax,  372 
Cunina  sp.,  128 

Cunoclona  grimaldi  var.  munda,  133 
guinensis,  133 
lanzerolae,  132 
nausilhoe,  132 
obscura,  133 

Curimalus,  Texl-fig.  2,  322,  323,  324,  348 
Cynodon,  Text-fig.  2,  320 

Cynopolamus,  321 
Cynoscion  arenarius,  269 
nebulosus,  264 
regalis,  263 

Cyprinodon  variegalus,  195,  PI.  I-VII 
Cyprinus,  192 
carpio,  226 


D 

Danio,  193 

Diapoma,  Text-fig.  2,  321 
Diplychus,  193 
Dipylidium  latissima,  42 
leuckarti,  44 

Dirofilaria  immifis,  235,  PI.  I-V 
megalhaes,  235 
repens,  235 

Dislichodus,  Text-fig.  2,  322,  323,  324,  352 

E 

Eigenmannia,  354,  355 
Electrophorus,  354,  355 

eleciricus,  203,  217,  247,  PI.  I-VI 
Emblemaria  hudsoni,  309 
micropes,  308,  309 
nigra,  309 
nivipes,  309 
oculocirrus,  309 
Erethizon  dorsalus,  37 
epixanthes,  37 

Erythrinus,  Text-fig.  2,  320,  324,  346 
Erylhroculter,  192 
Esox  lucius,  226 
Eugnalhichlhys,  322,  323 
Euphyllophorus,  379 
granulatus,  379 
Eupomotis  gibbosus,  4 
Eusicyonia  affinis,  84,  85 
aliaffinis,  84,  85,  86 
carinala,  81 
disdorsalis,  87,  89 
disedwardsi,  82 
disparri,  80,  81 
dorsalis,  89 
edwardsi,  82 
ingenlis,  88,  89 
laevigata,  80 
parri,  81 

penicillata,  82,  83 
picta,  87 
sp.,  84,  85,  86 
slimpsoni,  87 
Euthynnus  allelterata,  306 
Euthyonidium,  379,  380 
ovulum,  380 
seguroensis,  379 

F 

Filaria  bancrofti,  235 
immitis,  235 

Fislularia  impatiens,  365 
Fowlerina,  326 
Fundulus  confluentus,  265 
heleroclilus,  195,  229 

G 

Gadus  morrhua,  226 

Gasteropelecus,  Texl-fig.  2,  320,  321,  334 
pectorosus,  334 
Gaslerosieus  aculeatus,  226 
Gastromyzon,  191 
Gemmaria  dicholoma,  102 
Gennadas  brevirostris,  58 
capensis,  58 
clavicarpus,  59 


1938] 


Index  to  Parts  1-4 


403 


elegans,  58 
kempi,  58 
parvus,  57 
propinquus,  59 
scutafus,  59 
sordidus,  57,  58 
iinayrei,  58 

Geryonia  proboscidalis,  127 
ietraphylla,  127 
Gnalhopogon,  193 
Gobio,  192 
Gobiobofia,  192 
Gobionellus  boleosoma,  270 
Gobiosoma  bosci,  272 
robuslum,  272 
shufeldli,  270 
Grundulus,  321 
Gymnarchus,  356 


H 

Halicalyx  tenuis,  113 
Halicreas,  120 
album,  121,  124 
conicum,  121 
glabrum,  121,  124 
minimum,  121,  122 
papillosum,  121,  124 
racovilzae,  121 
rolundafum,  121,  124 
Haleporus  doris,  60 
Haliscera  alba,  124 
Halilrephes,  125 
maasi,  125 
valdiviae,  125 

Hemichromis  bimaculatus,  4,  219 
Hemiculter,  192 
Hemigrammus,  322 
Hemimyzon,  193 
Hemiodus,  324 
Hemistichodus,  350 
Helerodon  contortrix,  394 
Heterofiara  anonyma,  108 
minor,  108 

Hippocampus  hudsonius,  268 
punctulatus,  268 
regulus,  269 
zosterae,  266 

Holothuria  arenicola,  364,  372 
atra,  366 
erinaceus,  369 
glaberrima,  368,  369 
grisea,  366 
gyrifer,  371 
imifans,  367 
impaliens,  365 
inhabilis,  365 
inornata,  365,  366 
kapiolaniae,  368 
languens,  367 
lubrica,  368,  369 
maculata,  364 
marenzelleri,  369 
var.  Iheeli,  369,  370 
moebii,  368 
monacaria,  371 
pardalis,  372 
parva,  368 


? pafagonica,  371 
surinamensis,  368 
Homaloplera,  193 
Homoeonema,  114 
alba,  124 

(Colobonema)  sericeum,  117 
glabrum,  124 
platygonon,  120 
lypicum,  117 
Hoplerylhrinus,  322 
Hoplias,  322,  323,  324,  345 
Hybopsis,  192 
Hyborhynchus  notatus,  196 
Hydraspis  geoflroyana,  93 
Hydrocyon,  Text-tig.  2,  320,  321,  322,  323,  332, 
333,  338-342,  349 
lineaius  337 

Hymenopenaeus  apholicus,  61 
diomedeae,  66 
doris,  60 
laevis,  61 
nereus,  60 
sleindachneri,  66 
villosus,  61 
Hyphessobrycon,  325 
Hypophthalmichthys,  193 

I 

Ichthyoborus,  Text-fig.  2,  323,  324 
Iguanodectes,  321 

J 

Jenkinsia  slolifera,  3 

L 

Labeo,  192 
Labidodemas,  363 

americanum,  363,  364 
semperianum,  363 
Laodicea,  109 

Lebiasina,  Text-fig.  2,  323,  324 
Lebistes  reticulatus,  4 

Leioheierodon  madagascariensis,  393,  PI.  I 
Leiostomus  xanthurus,  267 
Lepidogobius  guaymasiae,  272 
y-cauda,  272 
Lepomis  auritus,  3 
Leporinus,  322,  323,  324,  348-351 
Lepturichlhys,  191 
Lepus  americanus,  40,  42 

californicus  melanolis,  40,  42 
europaeus,  47 
melanolis,  38 
timidus,  47,  48 
variabilis,  47 

Lernaecocera  cyprinacea,  217 
Leuciscus,  192,  195 
rutilis,  196 
Linuche  aquila,  163 
draco,  163 
unguiculata,  163 
Liriope,  126 
Ietraphylla,  127 

Luciocharax,  Text-fig.  2,  324,  344,  345 
Lucioperca  sandra,  195 


404 


Zoologica:  New  York  Zoological  Society 


[XXIII 


M 

Macaca  mulatta,  397 
Macrodon,  343 
Macropsobrycon,  325 
Marmota  marmota,  47 
Marsupialis  alata,  144 
Medusa  aurila,  168 
mucilaginosa,  128 
noctiluca,  164 
proboscidalis,  127 
unguiculala,  163 
Megalamphodus,  324 
Megalobrama,  192 
Mesoborus,  324,  353 
Metapenaeopsis,  72 
Metynnis,  Texl-fig.  2,  320,  321 
Micralesles,  322,  335 
Misgurnus,  191 
Mixobrycon,  321 
Mobula  japanioa,  300 
lucasana,  299,  PI.  I-III 
larapacana,  300 

Moenkhausia,  Texl-fig.  2,  321,  322,  329 
Molpadia  chilensis,  383 
Morone  labrax,  3 
Mylesinus,  321 
Myleles,  Text-fig.  2,  328 
Mylosoma,  321,  327,  329 
Myxobolus  capsulalus,  198 
funduli,  196 
lintoni,  195 
musculi,  196 
pfeifferi,  195 
piriformis,  195 
Myxocyprinus,  191 

N 

Nannaelhiops,  350 
Nannoslomus,  324 
Nausilhoe  puncfala,  159 
Nemacheilus,  191 
Neolebias,  350 
Neolhyonidium,  379 
hawaiense,  379 
Nolemigonus,  192 

O 

Odonlostilbe,  335 
Olindias,  112 

phosphorica,  113 
tenuis,  113 
sambaquiensis,  112 
tenuis,  113 
Opsariichthys,  192 

Oryclolagus  cuniculus,  44,  45,  47,  48 
cuniculus  domesticus,  45 
Osleochilus,  193 

P 

Pandea  conica,  106 
rubra,  107 
Panlachogon,  114 
haeckeli,  114,  115 
rubrum,  114,  115 
scotli,  114 

Paracaudina  chilensis,  383,  384 
Paragoniates,  335 


Paralichthys  albigutla,  271 
dentalus,  273 
lethosligma,  271 
Parapenaeus  kishinouyei,  72 
Paraphago,  Texl-fig.  2,  324 
Parastichopus  californicus,  362 
parvimensis,  362 
Parecbasis,  325 
Parodon,  324 
Pattalus,  379 
mollis,  379 
Pegantha  clara,  134 
smaragdina,  134 
Pelagia  crassa,  164 
curacaoensis,  164 
cyanella,  164 
flaveola,  164 
noctiluca,  164 

var.  neglecta,  164 
panopyra,  164 
var.  placenta,  164 
perla,  164 
phosphora,  164 
purpuroviolacea,  164 
rosea,  164 

Penaeopsis  beebei,  72,  74,  75 
goodei,  73,  76,  78 
kishinouyei,  72,  73,  76 
(Metapenaeopsis)  kishinouyei,  72 
(Melapenaeopsis)  beebei,  74 
(Metapenaeopsis)  mineri,  77 
mineri,  72,  76,  77 
pubescens,  76 
smithi,  78 

Penaeus  californiensis,  67,  69,  71 
canaliculaius,  67 
brasiliensis,  67 
brevirostris,  67,  69,  71 
Pentamera,  373 
beebei,  374 
calcigera,  373 
chierchia,  374,  375 
pulcherrima,  373 
zacae,  375 
Periphylla,  133 

dodecabostrycha,  156 
hyacinthina,  155 
regina,  156 
Petersius,  322,  335 
Petrocephalus,  356 
Phago,  Texl-fig.  2,  323,  324,  353 
Phalacrocorax  penicillala,  306 
Phoxinus,  192 
Phyllophorus,  379,  381 
aculeatus,  381 
destichodus,  382 
urna,  379 
zacae,  381,  382 
Physa,  8 

Piabucina,  343,  346 
„ Piaracius,  336 

Pimephales  notatus,  196 
Planorbis,  9 

Placobdella  parasitica,  217 
Platemys  geoffroyana,  93 
Pneumalophorus  grex,  3 


1938] 


Index  to  Parts  1-4 


405 


Poecilobrycon,  Texi-iig.  2,  322,  324 

Polycolpa  forskali,  134 

Poralia  rufescens,  165 

Proboscidactyla,  109 

Prochilodus,  Text-iig.  2,  322,  323,  324 

Psectrogasler,  322 

Pseudogobio,  193 

Pseudoperilampus,  193 

Pseudopleuronectes  americanus,  393,  PI.  I 

Psolus  monacarius,  371 

Ptychogena,  109 

Pyrrhulina,  335 

R 

Rana  clamitans,  395 
Rasbora,  192 
Rhamphichthys,  354 
Rhegmalodes  floridana,  111 
floridanus,  111 
Richardsonius,  192 
Rhodeus,  192 
amarus,  219 

Rhopalonema  velalum,  113 

S 

Sarcodaces,  Text-fig.  2,  322,  323,  324,  344,  345 
Saurogobio,  193 
Sciaenops  ocellalus,  258,  267 
Schizopygopsis,  193 
Schizolaenia  amerioana,  33,  34,  36,  50 
americana  leporis,  33 
decrescens,  33 
lalicephala,  33 
macrorhyncha,  33 
Schizolhorax,  192 
Scorpaenodes  coriezi,  304,  305 
Seriola  colburni,  306 
dorsalis,  306 
Sergesles  edwardsii,  61 
Serrasalmo,  Texl-fig.  2,  321,  322,  323 
Sicyonia  penicillala,  83 
picta,  87 

Sminlhea  eurygasler,  114 
Solenocera  agassizii,  63 
florea,  64" 
hexlii,  66 
mutator,  61,  62 
vioscai,  63 

Solmaris  mucilaginosa,  128 
rhodoloma,  129 
Solmissus  bleekii,  129 
faberi,  129 
inoisa,  129 
Spintherobolus,  325 
Starksina,  Text-fig.  2 (opp.  321) 

Sternarchus,  356 
Slernothaerus  niger,  93 
Stethaprion,  Texl-fig.  2,  321 
Sliohopus  fusous,  363 
gyrifer,  371 
parvimensis,  362 


(Hololhuria?)  palagonicus,  371 
Stiohonodon,  326 
Slolus  gibber,  376 
ovulum,  380 

Sylvilagus  floridanus  alacer,  32,  38,  41,  42 
floridanus  mallurus,  32,  38,  41,  42 
nuttalli  pinetis  37,  38,  42 
palustris,  41,  42 

T 

Taenia  clenoides,  44 
denticulala,  42 
goezei,  42 
lalicephala,  33 
leuckarti,  44 
pectinata,  45 
rhopaliocephala,  47 
Tamoya,  136,  150 
alala,  144 
garganlua,  151 
haplonema,  135,  151,  152-155 
prismalica,  151 
punctata,  139 

Tetrogonopterus,  Texl-fig.  2,  321,  322,  327,  329 
argentatus,  323 
argenleus,  325 
fascialus,  323 

Thalassochelys  caretta,  93 
Thyone,  376 
benti,  376 

var.  zacae,  376,  377 
gibber,  376,  377 
ovulum,  380 
panamensis,  378 
rubra,  378 
similis,  376 

Thyonepsolus  beebei,  382 
Thyonidium,  379 
pellucidum,  379 
Trachypeneus,  73 
constrictus,  79 
similis  pacificus,  78 
(Trachysalambria)  brevisulurae,  79 
Trachysalambria  curvirostris,  80 

V 

Varicorhinus,  192 
Villarius  calus,  7 
Vivipara,  11 

W 

Willia,  109 

X 

Xenocharax,  322,  323,  324 
Xenocypris,  192 

Z 

Zancleopsis,  102 
dichotoma,  102,  103 
tentaculata,  102 


jgeto  |9ork  Hoologtcal  Stcietp 

General  Office:  90  Broad  Street,  New  York  City 


©fitters 

President,  W.  Redmond  Cross 


Vice-Presidents,  Kermit  Roosevelt  and  Alfred  Ely 
Chairman,  Executive  Committee,  W.  Redmond  Cross 


Treasurer,  Cornelius  R.  Agnew 
Secretary,  Fairfield  Osborn 

Scientific  Staff 

Zoological  -Parti 
W.  Reid  Blair,  Director 


Raymond  L.  Ditmars,  Curator  of  Mammals  and  Reptiles 


Lee  S.  Crandall,  Curator  of  Birds 
Charles  R.  Schroeder,  Veterinarian 


Claude  W.  Leister,  Ass’t  to  the  Director  and  Curator,  Educational  Activities 
H.  C.  Raven,  Prosector 


Edward  R.  Osterndorff,  Photographer 
William  Bridges,  Editor  and  Curator  of  Publications 


Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr.,  Acting  Director 
Christopher  W.  Coates,  Aquarist 
Ross  F.  Nigrelli,  Pathologist 
G.  M.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Pathology 
Homer  W.  Smith,  Research  Associate  in  Physiology 

department  of  UEropical  i^esearctj 

William  Beebe,  Director  and  Honorary  Curator  of  Birds 


John  Tee-Van,  General  Associate 
Gloria  Hollister,  Research  Associate 
Jocelyn  Crane,  Technical  Associate 

Cbttortal  Committee 

Fairfield  Osborn,  Chairman 


gquarium 


W.  Reid  Blair 
William  Beebe 


Charles  M.  Breder,  Jr. 
William  Bridges 


on  5 

>»  DjlpiO 
n 5mIM1 
agglEl 

►3)  IlSSBPO 

ITIgM 

»aj535». 
s*3>  jemm 
®)3)W 

!»»  OTpl